The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org.  If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.



Title: Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis

Author: Leonard Bloomfield

Release Date: December 30, 2015 [EBook #50797]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ASCII

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***




Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)
[Contents]

Newly Designed Front Cover.

[3]

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS STUDIES
IN
LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
Vol. III May–November, 1917 Nos. 2–4
Board of Editors
George T. Flom
William A. Oldfather
Stuart P. Sherman
Published by the University of Illinois
Under the Auspices of the Graduate School
Urbana, Illinois

[4]

[Contents]

Copyright, 1917

By the University of Illinois. [5]

TAGALOG TEXTS WITH GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS
PART I: TEXTS AND TRANSLATION
PART II: GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS
PART III: LIST OF FORMATIONS AND GLOSSARY
BY
LEONARD BLOOMFIELD
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
1917

[7]

[Contents]

Table of Contents

PART I [131]
PAGE
Preface 9
List of Books and Articles consulted 13
Texts in Phonetic Transcription and Translation 16
PART II—GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS [323]
A. PHONETICS 134
1. Distinctive sounds 134
2. Syllabication 138
3. Accentuation 141
B. SYNTAX 146
1. Sentence and word 146
a. Syntactic relations 146
b. Parts of speech 146
c. Static and transient words 147
d. Personal names 147
e. The object construction 148
f. Expressions of indefinite quantity 150
2. Subject and predicate 151
a. Non-predicative sentences 151
b. The subject 153
c. The predicate 153
d. Subordinate predications 159
e. Omission of predicate 160
3. Attributes 160
a. Conjunctive attributes 162
b. Disjunctive attributes 170
c. Local attributes 177
d. Absolute attributes 180
4. Serial groups 205
C. MORPHOLOGY 210
1. Composition 210
2. General features of word-formation 211
3. Description of formations [132] 218
I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, paŋ-) 218
A. Simple static forms 218
(1) Root-words 218
(2) Doubling 223
(3) Reduplication 224
(4) Prefix paŋ- 224
B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words 226
(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag- 226
(2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r 231
(3) Active with maŋ- and abstract with paŋ- r 239
(4) Special static words 241
(5) Direct passive, with -in 243
(6) Special static words 247
(7) Instrumental passive, with i- 247
(8) Special static words 250
(9) Local passive, with -an 250
(10) Special static words 257
II. Secondary groups 262
1. Prefix si- 262
2. Prefix paki- 263
3. Prefix ka- 265
(1) Simple static forms 265
(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms 268
(3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms 280
4. Prefix pa- 298
(1) Simple static forms 299
(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms 301
(3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka- 309
5. Prefix pati- 313
III. Irregular derivatives 314
PART III
LIST OF FORMATIONS 317
INDEX OF WORDS 320
CORRIGENDA 406

[9]

[Contents]

PREFACE

This essay is purely linguistic in character and purpose.

In taking phonetic notes on Tagalog I noticed that the pronunciation of the speaker to whom I was listening, Mr. Alfredo Viola Santiago (at present a student of architectural engineering in the University of Illinois) presented certain features of accentuation not mentioned in the descriptions familiar to me. With the intention of briefly describing these features, I took down more extensive notes and asked Mr. Santiago to tell me in Tagalog the stories of “The Sun” and “The Northwind and the Sun,” used as models by the International Phonetic Association.

The data so obtained showed that the features of accentuation I had observed were in part distinctive (expressive of word-meaning), and, further, that certain other features, which were but imperfectly described in the treatises I knew (so especially the use of the “ligatures”), appeared in Mr. Santiago’s speech in a regular and intelligible manner. A more extensive study was thus indicated.

The results of this study were subject to two obvious limitations. The utterances I had transcribed were either translations or isolated sentences, and I could not determine to what extent the features of Mr. Santiago’s speech which I had observed were general in Tagalog.

The former of these limitations was fully overcome when I asked Mr. Santiago to tell me connected stories. In addition to fortunate endowments of a more general kind Mr. Santiago possesses, as I found, that vivacity of intellect and freedom from irrelevant prepossessions which we seek and so rarely find in people whose language we try to study. This latter quality may be due in part to the fact that, as Mr. Santiago’s education has been carried on entirely in Spanish and English, his speech-feeling for his mother-tongue has not been deflected by the linguistic, or rather pseudo-linguistic training of the schools, so familiar to us. However this may be, I cannot be grateful enough to Mr. Santiago (and I hope that the reader will join me in this feeling) for the intelligence, freshness, and imagination with which he has given us connected narratives in his native language,—stories he heard in childhood and experiences of his own and of his friends. It is to be hoped that some of these will be of interest to students of folk-lore (as, for instance, Nos. 9, 10, 11, the old Hindu fable in No. 4, and the Midas [10]story, much changed, in No. 5); the texts are here given, however, only for their linguistic interest.

The second limitation could not be overcome. As there exists at present no adequate description of the dialectal differentiation of Tagalog, nor even an adequate description of any one form of the language, I can make no definite statement as to the relation of Mr. Santiago’s speech to other forms of Tagalog.

What is here presented is, then, a specimen of the speech of an educated speaker from Mr. Santiago’s home town, San Miguel na Matamés, Bulacán Province, Luzón. It would have been possible to include in the description the speech of at least one other educated Tagalog from a different region (uneducated speakers are unfortunately not within my reach), as well as such data as might be gathered from printed Tagalog books: I have refrained from this extension because, at the present state of our knowledge, a single clearly defined set of data is preferable to a necessarily incomplete attempt at describing the whole language in its local and literary variations. Comparison of literary Tagalog (chiefly the translation of José Rizal’s “Noli me Tangere” by Patricio Mariano, Manila, Morales, 19131) shows that Mr. Santiago’s speech is not far removed from it. In most cases where my results deviate from the statements of the Spanish grammars, the evidence of printed books (and not infrequently the internal evidence of the grammars themselves) shows that the divergence is due not to dialectal differences but to the fact that the grammars are the product of linguistically untrained observers, who heard in terms of Spanish articulations and classified in those of Latin grammar.

This study presents, then, the first Tagalog texts in phonetic transcription and the first scientific analysis of the structure of the language2. Although the nature of the problem forbade the use of any material other than that obtained from Mr. Santiago, I have examined all the treatises on Tagalog accessible to me. No experience could show more clearly than the reading of these books the necessity of linguistic and especially phonetic training for anyone who wishes to describe a language. [11]Not one of the works in the following list3 contains an intelligible description of the pronunciation of Tagalog. The only general work of scientific value is the excellent second volume of P. Serrano Laktaw’s dictionary. Much as one may admire the pioneer courage of Totanes and the originality of Minguella, these venerable men were as little able to describe a language as one untrained in botany is to describe a plant. Among the authors of monographs are several good names and one or two of the greatest in our science: nearly all of these authors mention the difficulty under which they labored for want of an adequate description of the language. [13]

1 An English translation by Charles Derbyshire was published in 1912 by the Philippine Education Company in Manila and the World Book Company in New York, under the title “The Social Cancer”. ↑

2 The entire syntax and much of the morphology, especially whatever relates to the accent-shifts in word-formation, will be found to be new. I have of course refrained from any and all historical surmises beyond the indication of unassimilated loan-words. The system of transcription used is, with a few deviations, that of the International Phonetic Association. ↑

3 They were accessible to me chiefly through the courtesy of the Newberry Library in Chicago. ↑

[Contents]

LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES CONSULTED

Alter, F. C., Über die tagalische Sprache. Wien 1803.

Blake, F. R., Contributions to comparative Philippine Grammar. (Journal of the American Oriental Society, vols. 27, 28, 29, 30).

Brandstetter, R., Tagalen und Madagassen, Luzern 1902. (= his Malayo-polynesiche Forschungen, ser. 2, no. 2).

Conant, C. E., The names of the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 4).

The pepet law in the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 7).

de Coria, J., Nueva gramática tagalog. Madrid 1872.

Cue-Malay, G., Frases usuales para la conversacion en español tagalo é ingles. Manila 1898.

Doherty, D. J., The Tagalog language. (Educational Review, vol. 24).

Durán, C. G., Manual de conversaciones en castellano tagalo é inglés. Manila 1900.

Fernandez, D. E., Nuevo vocabulario ó manual de conversaciones en español, tagalo y pampango. Binondo 1901.

Francisco [Blancas] de San Josef, Arte y Reglas de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1832.

Garcia, F., at Herrera, V., Manga onang turo sa uikang inglés. Maynila 1902.

Gaspar de San Agustin, Compendio de la Lengua Tagala. Manila 1879.

Hévia Campomanes, J., Lecciones de gramática Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1872. 3d ed. 1883. 4th ed. 1888.

von Humboldt, W., Die Kawi-Sprache, vol. 2, pp. 315 ff., 347 ff. (= Berlin Academy Transactions, 1832, vol. 3).

Kern, J. H. C., Over zoogenaamde verbindingsklanken in het Tagala. (Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indië, ser. 3, vol. 11).

Sanskritsche woorden in het Tagala. (ib., ser. 4, vol. 4).

Kirk, May, The Baldwin primer. Tagalog edition. New York [1899 and 1902 copyright].

Lendoyro, C., The Tagalog language. Manila 1902.

MacKinlay, W. E. W., A handbook and grammar of the Tagalog language. Washington 1905.

Marre, A., Grammaire tagalog (Bijdragen, ser. 6, vol. 9).

Merrill, E. D., A dictionary of the plant names of the Philippine Islands. Manila 1903. (Publications of the Bureau of Government Laboratories, Department of the Interior, Philippine Islands, no. 8).

Miles, J., Método teórico-práctico y compendiado para aprender el lenguaje Tagálog. Barcelona 1887.

Minguella, T., Ensayo de gramática Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1878.

Método práctico para que los niños y niñas de las provincias tagalas aprendan á hablar Castellano. Manila 1886. [14]

Neilson, P. D., English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Tagalog-English Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Nigg, C., Tagalog English and English Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1904.

de Noceda, J., y de Sanlucar, P., Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1860.

Paglinawan, M., Balarilang Tagalog [on cover: Gramatikang Tagalog] Maynila 1910.

Pardo de Tavera, T. H., Consideraciones sobre el origen del nombre de los números en Tagalog (La España oriental 1889).

El Sánscrito en la lengua Tagalog. Paris 1887.

Rizal, José, Die Transcription des Tagalog. (Translated by F. Blumentritt, Bijdragen, vol. 42).

de los Santos, Domingo, Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1835 (reimpreso).

Serrano, R., Diccionario de terminos comunes Tagalo-Castellano. Ed. 3. Binondo 1869.

Nuevo diccionario manual Español-Tagalo. Manila 1872.

Serrano Laktaw, P., Diccionario Hispano-Tagalog. Primera parte. Manila 1889.

Diccionario Tagalog-Hispano. Segunda parte. Manila 1914.

de Totanes, S., Arte de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1745. Sampaloc 1796. Manila 1850. Binondo 1865 (reimpreso).

Wolfensohn, L. B., The infixes la, li, lo in Tagalog. (Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. 27). [16]

[Contents]

I. TEXTS IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION

[Contents]

Translation

1. Aŋ ulòl na uŋgòʾ at aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ.

1. The foolish monkey and the clever turtle.

Mínsan aŋ pagòŋ hábaŋ nalìlígo sa ílog, ay nakàkíta syà naŋ isa ŋ púno-ŋ-ságiŋ na lumùlútaŋ at tinátaŋày naŋ ágos. Hiníla niya sa pasígan, dátapwat hindí nya madalà sa lúpaʾ. Dáhil díto 5tináwag nya aŋ kaybígan niya ŋ uŋgòʾ at iniyálay nyà aŋ kapútol naŋ púno-ŋ-ságiŋ kuŋ itátanim nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ kapartè. Tumaŋòʾ aŋ uŋgòʾ at hináte nilà sa gitnàʾ mulá sa magkábila ŋ dúlo aŋ púno naŋ ságiŋ. Inaŋkìn naŋ uŋgò aŋ kapútol na máy maŋa dáhon, dáhil sa panukálà nya na iyòn ay tùtúbo na mabúti káy sa 10kapútol na wala ŋ dáhon.

Once upon a time, when the turtle was swimming in the river, he saw a banana-tree adrift and being carried along by the current. He dragged it to the beach, but was not able to carry it up to the solid ground. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him a half of the banana-tree, if he would plant his part for him. The monkey agreed, and they divided the banana-tree at the middle, half-way from either end. The monkey took the half which had leaves, because he thought it would grow better than the half which had none.

Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ áraw, aŋ púno naŋ uŋgòʾ ay namatày, yámaŋ aŋ sa pagòŋ ay tumúbo haŋgàŋ sa magbúŋa. Aŋ maŋa ságiŋ ay nahinòg, dátapwat hindí maakyàt naŋ pagòŋ. Dahil díto tináwag nyà aŋ kanya ŋ kaybíga ŋ uŋgòʾ at inyálay nya aŋ ila ŋ 15búŋa naŋ ságiŋ kuŋ àakyatin nyà aŋ púnoʾ. Aŋ uŋgòʾ ay umakyàt at kumáin naŋ makàkáya.

When a few days had passed, the monkey’s tree died, while that of the turtle grew until it bore fruit. The bananas grew ripe, but the turtle could not climb for them. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him some of the fruits of the banana, if he would climb the tree. The monkey climbed up and ate for all he was worth.

Sinábi naŋ pagòŋ: “Hulúgan mo akò.”

Said the turtle: “Throw me some.”

Dátapuwat isinagòt naŋ uŋgòʾ: “Balat màn at malinamnàm ay hindí kita hùhulúgan.”

But the monkey answered: “Though sweet the skins, I’d throw you none.”

20Aŋ pagòŋ ay nagálit at nagsábug sya naŋ tinìk sa palígid naŋ púnoʾ. Naŋ lumuksò aŋ uŋgò ay nátinik syà. Pinagbintaŋan nyà aŋ pagòŋ at kanya ŋ hinánap úpaŋ parusáhan niyà. Nàhúli nya aŋ pagòŋ sa kabilà naŋ isa ŋ toòd.

The turtle got angry and scattered spines round the foot of the tree. When the monkey jumped down, he landed on the spines. He suspected the turtle and looked for him, in order to punish him. He found the turtle behind a stump.

Sinábi nya sa pagòŋ: “Kità ay áki ŋ parùrusáhan. Mamíli 25ka sa dalawà. Dikdikìn kità sa lusòŋ o lunúrin kità sa ílog?”

Said he to the turtle: “I am going to punish you. Choose between the two: shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the river?”

Aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ ay nagumpisà naŋ pagsisigàw at hinilìŋ nya sa uŋgòʾ na, kuŋ maàáreʾ, ay dikdikìn siya sa lusòŋ.

The clever turtle began to shout and begged the monkey, if it were possible, to bray him in a mortar.

Dátapwat isinagòt naŋ uŋgòʾ: “Ibíbigay kò sa iyò aŋ parúsa na hindí mo gustò.”

But the monkey answered: “I shall give you the punishment you don’t want.”

30At inihágis nya sa ílog aŋ pagòŋ.

And he threw the turtle into the river.

Naŋ dumápo aŋ pagòŋ sa túbig ay nagsisigàw sya at sinábi nyà sa uŋgòʾ: “Salámat, kaybígan. Itò aŋ áki ŋ tìráhan!” [18]

When the turtle arrived in the water, he set up a shout and said to the monkey: “Thank you, friend! This is my home.”

Note. p. 16, l. 2 aŋ pagòŋ hábaŋ nalìlígoʾ is unusual and no doubt traditional for hábaŋ aŋ pagòŋ ay nalìlígoʾ. Similarly, p. 16, l. 18 Balat màn at malinamnàm ... is traditional (proverbial) for modern Káhit na malinamnàm aŋ maŋa balàt. [19]
[Contents]

2. Aŋ pagtatakbúhan naŋ usà at naŋ susòʾ.

2. The race of the deer and the snail.

Isà ŋ usà ŋ naŋìŋináin sa gúbat ay nakátagpò naŋ isa ŋ susòʾ na gumàgápaŋ sa dáhon naŋ búhoʾ. Aŋ usà ay naghintò naŋ paŋiŋináin at pinagmasdàn nyà aŋ mabágal na paggápaŋ naŋ 5susòʾ.

A deer, grazing in the jungle, came upon a snail that was creeping over the leaf of a bamboo-plant. The deer ceased from his grazing and watched the slow creeping of the snail.

Makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay sinábi nyà sa susòʾ: “Ano ŋ hína mo ŋ lumákad! Bákit hindí ka magáral na lumákad naŋ matúlin? Gáya ko, akù y paráti ŋ nàhàhábul naŋ maŋa áso, dátapwat aŋ matúlin ko ŋ pagtakbò ay sya ŋ naglíligtàs sa ákin 10naŋ áki ŋ búhay. Dátapwat gáya mò, kuŋ ikàw ay habúlin naŋ káhit anò ŋ kaáway, papáno aŋ maŋyàyári sa iyo ŋ búhay? Pího ŋ ikàw ay màpàpatày.”

When a few moments had passed, he said to the snail: “How slowly you walk! Why don’t you learn to walk faster? Look at me,—I am often pursued by dogs, but my swift running is what saves my life. But look at you,—if you should be pursued by any foe, what will ever save your life? Surely you will get killed.”

Pagkárinig naŋ susòʾ sa maŋa salità ŋ itò ay tiniŋnàn nya aŋ usà at kanya ŋ pinagarálan aŋ maínam nya ŋ paŋaŋatawàn, 15aŋ kanya ŋ mahahába ŋ paà, at aŋ malalakàs nya ŋ lamàn. Iníbig nya na siya màn ay gaya rìn naŋ usà úpaŋ siyà ay makatakbò naŋ matúlin. Dátapwat kanyà ŋ inakálàʾ na, kuŋ pilítin nya na sya y tumakbò, ay hindí sya màhùhulè naŋ malakì sa usà.

When the snail had heard these words, he looked at the deer and scanned his fine physique, his long legs, and his strong muscles. He wished that he too might be like the deer, so that he could run fast. However, he thought that if he forced himself to run, he should not remain far behind the deer.

Sa gayòn ay isinagot nyà sa usà: “Ikàw ay mapaŋmatà. 20Hindí mo hinìhinálàʾ kuŋ anò aŋ magágawa naŋ isa ŋ may matíbay na paggustò. Hinàhámon kità na makipagtakbúhan sa ákin mula ríto haŋgàŋ sa ílog na nása bandà ŋ kalunúran mulà ríto.”

Accordingly he answered the deer: “You are overweening. You do not suspect what can be done by one who has a strong will. I challenge you to race with me from here to the river that lies west of here.”

Aŋ usà ay tumáwa naŋ malakàs at isinagòt sa susòʾ: “Bákit mo inakála ŋ tàtalúnin mo akò? Sigúro ŋ ikàw ay magdàdáyaʾ!”

The deer laughed loudly and answered the snail: “How can you think you will defeat me? I suppose you are going to cheat.”

25Isinagòt naŋ susòʾ, na hindí siya magdàdáyaʾ, at, úpaŋ máy-roo ŋ tumiŋìn sa kanilà at magìŋ hukòm sa kanila ŋ pagtatakbúhan, ay sinábi nyà na tumáwag silà naŋ isà sa maŋa kayibígan nilà, na sya ŋ magígiŋ hukòm.

The snail answered that he was not going to cheat, and, so that there might be someone to watch them and be judge over their race, he suggested that they call one of their friends to be judge.

Aŋ usà ay pumáyag, at tináwag nilà aŋ isa ŋ kálaw, úpaŋ 30siya ŋ magìŋ hukòm.

The deer agreed, and they called an owl to be judge.

Naŋ magumpisà silà naŋ pagtakbò ay malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagkáhuli naŋ susòʾ. Sa kanyà ŋ pagtakbò aŋ usà ay nakáraàn naŋ isa ŋ mayábuŋ na damúhan. Naghintú sya úpaŋ maŋináin, yámaŋ malakì aŋ pagkáuna nya sa susòʾ. Binálak nyà na pagkátanaw 35nya na dumáratiŋ aŋ susòʾ ay tátakbo syà ŋ mulìʾ. Dátapuwat, naŋ sya y makapaŋináin, ay sinumpòŋ sya naŋ katàmáran. Natúlug sya sa panukálà na màgìgisiŋ syà bágo dumatìŋ aŋ susòʾ.

When they began to run, the snail was soon left far behind. On his course the deer came upon a flourishing grass-field. He stopped to graze, since his start over the snail was so great. He planned that when he saw the snail coming, he would start running again. However, when he had done feeding, he was attacked by laziness. He went to sleep, with the thought that he would wake up before the snail arrived.

Dátapwat, hábaŋ sya y natùtúlog, ay nakaraàn aŋ susòʾ. Naŋ mágisiŋ syà ay malálim nà sa hápon. Tumakbo syà naŋ úbus-lakàs 40patúŋu sa ílog, at doòn ay sinalúboŋ sya naŋ susòʾ at naŋ kanila ŋ hukòm na kálaw.

However, while he was asleep, the snail passed by. When he awoke, it was already late in the afternoon. He ran with all his might to the river, and there he was met by the snail and their judge, the owl.

“Ikàw ay talúnan,” winíka pagdáka naŋ kanila ŋ hukòm. [20]

“You are defeated,” said their judge at once. [21]
[Contents]

3. Isà ŋ Biyàrnes-Sànto.

3. A Good Friday.

Si Hwàn at aŋ kanyà ŋ kaybíga ŋ si Pédro ay namámaŋká sa ílug patúŋo sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. Sa baŋkàʾ ay máy-roon silà ŋ isà ŋ laráwan naŋ Krísto na kanila ŋ iniháhatid sa páreʾ, úpaŋ 5magámit sa pagdadáus naŋ isa ŋ Pitù ŋ Wíkaʾ. Si Hwàn ay sinìsiglàn naŋ tákot.

Juan and his friend Pedro were canoeing on the river toward the town Baliwag. In their canoe they had an image of Christ which they were conveying to a priest to be used in the celebration of a Good Friday Mass. Juan was filled with terror.

Sinábi nya kay Pédro: “Aŋ táwu nátin sa baŋkàʾ ay tadtàd naŋ súgat at hindí humíhiŋà. Sa akálà ko y patày aŋ táo ŋ iyàn. Baká táyu aŋ pagbintaŋàn naŋ pári ŋ áti ŋ paghàhatdàn 10sa kanyà.”

Said he to Pedro: “This man of ours in the canoe is all chopped up with wounds and no longer breathing. I think this man is a corpse. I am afraid we shall be suspected by the priest to whom we are delivering him.”

Isinagòt ni Pédro: “Sàsabíhin nátin sa kanyà na, naŋ màlúlan sa áti ŋ baŋkàʾ aŋ táo ŋ itò y ganyan nà aŋ kanya ŋ anyòʾ. Táyu y marámi ŋ tagapagpatotoò, kanyá hwag kà ŋ matákot.”

Pedro answered: “We shall tell him that when this man was loaded into our canoe, he was already in this condition. We have many witnesses, so don’t be afraid.”

Naŋ dumatìŋ sila sa páreʾ, ay ibinigày nila aŋ laráwan. 15Pinagsabíhan silà naŋ páreʾ na pumaroòn sila sa simbáhan kinàbukásan naŋ hápon, úpaŋ makinìg naŋ sèrmon.

When they reached the priest they gave him the image. The priest told them to come to church the next day in the afternoon to hear the sermon.

Si Hwàn ay siniglà ŋ mulí naŋ tákot, sapagkàt hindí nya màpagkúro kuŋ bákit íbig naŋ páreʾ na silà ay pása simbáhan. Paráti sya ŋ nakárinig naŋ maŋa táo ŋ kinumbidà sa simbáhan 20at doòn ay hinúli naŋ gwàrdya-sibìl. Dátapuwat hindí sya nagwíka naŋ anu màn kay Pédro, sapagkàt nàkìkíta nya na itò y walà ŋ tákot.

Juan was again filled with terror, for he could not make out why the priest wanted them to go to the church. He had often heard of men being summoned to the church and there seized by the gendarmes. However, he did not say anything to Pedro, for he saw that the latter had no fear.

Kinàbukásan naŋ hápun ay naparoòn sila sa simbáhan, at doòn ay nàkíta nilà aŋ isa ŋ Krísto ŋ nàpàpákù sa krùs.

On the next day in the afternoon they went to church, and there they saw a Christ nailed to the cross.

25Winíkà ni Hwàn: “Aŋ táu ŋ yaòn, kuŋ iyò ŋ natàtandaàn, ay sya náti ŋ inihatìd sa páreʾ. Mabúti táyo y dumoòn sa isa ŋ lugàr na hindí maáabut naŋ matà naŋ páreʾ.”

Said Juan: “That man, if you remember, is the one we delivered to the priest. We had better go to some place out of sight of the priest.”

Kanyá silà ŋ dalawà ay naparoòn sa ilálim naŋ pùlpito, úpaŋ doòn nilà pakiŋgàn aŋ sèrmon. Nagumpisà aŋ Syéti-Palábras, 30at aŋ párì ay dumáratiŋ nà sa bandà ŋ hulì naŋ kanya ŋ sèrmon.

So the two of them went under the pulpit, to hear the sermon from there. The Good Friday Mass began, and the priest was already getting to the last part of his sermon.

Winíkà naŋ pári sa kanya ŋ sèrmon: “Magsísi kayò sa inyù ŋ maŋa kasalánan, malulupìt na táo. Masdàn ninyò aŋ maŋa súgat na hiníwa ninyù sa katawàn naŋ áti ŋ Mànanákop.”

In his sermon the priest said: “Repent ye of your sins, cruel people! Behold the wounds which you struck in the body of our Savior!”

Pagkárinig nitò ni Hwàn ay sya y siniglà ŋ mulí naŋ tákot, 35sapagkàt inakálà nya na siya y nàpàpagbintaŋàn.

When Juan heard this, he was again filled with terror, for he thought that he had fallen under suspicion.

Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya ay umalìs sya sa ilálim naŋ pùlpito, hinaràp nya aŋ páreʾ, at sinábi nya: “Ámoŋ, hindí po kamì aŋ sumúgat sa táo ŋ iyàn. Naŋ sya y ilúlan sa ámi ŋ baŋkàʾ, ay sugatan nà sya antimáno.”

Therefore, what he did was to come out from under the pulpit, face the priest, and say: “Father, we are not the ones who wounded this man! When he was loaded into our canoe he was already wounded.”

40Pagkawíkà nya nitò ay bumalìk sya sa ilálim naŋ pùlpito. Hindí pinansìn naŋ párìʾ aŋ maŋa nárinig nya ŋ salitàʾ, at ipinatúluy nya aŋ kanya ŋ sèrmon. [22]

When he had said this, he went back under the pulpit. The priest paid no attention to the speech he had heard, and went on with his sermon.

“Dumatiŋ nà aŋ áraw na kayò ŋ maŋa makasalánan ay dápat magsipagsísi. Aŋ maŋa pintúan naŋ láŋit ay nábuksan nà sa pagkamatày naŋ áti ŋ Mànanákop, at káhit na sínu ŋ makasalánan ay makapàpásuk sa láŋit, kuŋ sila y magsipagsísi. Dátapwat, 5kuŋ hindí kayo magsipagsísi, ay màpàparusáhan kayò naŋ hírap na wala ŋ haŋgàn sa maŋa apùy sa infyèrno, dahilàn sa maŋa hírap na ipinasákit ninyò sa áti ŋ Mànanákop. Masdàn ninyò aŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn na pumàpáwis naŋ dugòʾ, aŋ kanya ŋ paà t kamày na nàpàpáko sa krùs, at aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa súgat mulá sa 10paà haŋgàŋ úlo. Wala ŋ ibà ŋ nagpàpahírap sa kanyà at sumúgat sa kanyà ŋ mahàl na katawàn, kuŋ hindí kayò, maŋa táwo ŋ makasalánan, at, kuŋ hindí kayo magsipagsísi, ay mahùhúlug kayo sa infyèrno!”

“The day has come now, when ye sinners must repent. The portals [23]of Heaven are open now through the death of our Savior, and every sinner can enter Heaven, if he repent. But if ye do not repent, ye shall come to be punished with sufferings without end in the flames of Hell for the sufferings which ye caused our Savior to undergo. Behold His body sweating blood, His hands and feet nailed to the cross, and His wounds from head to feet. No one other caused Him to suffer and wounded His dear body, than you, ye sinners, and if ye do not repent, ye shall fall into Hell.”

Si Hwàn ay hindí màpalagày, at inakálà nya na aŋ pári ay 15sinìsilakbuhàn naŋ gálit lában sa kanyà.

Juan could not remain in his place, for he thought that the priest was overflowing with anger against him.

Kanyàʾ hinarap nyà ŋ mulí aŋ páreʾ, at sinábi nya naŋ úbus-lakàs: “Ámoŋ, sinábi ko na pòʾ sa inyò kanína na hindí ako kasále ŋ sumúgat sa táo ŋ iyán, kanyá hwag pò ninyo akò ŋ ipadalà sa impyèrno.”

So he again faced the priest and said, as loudly as he could: “Father, only a moment ago I told you that I had no part in wounding this man, so do not send me, sir, to Hell.”

20Aŋ pári ay siniglàn naŋ malakì ŋ gálit, kanyá sinábi nya sa maŋà nakíkinìg: “Anu ba kayò, maŋa uŋàs na táo? Walá baga ní isa sa inyò na makaháwak sa táo ŋ itò úpaŋ bigtihìn?”

The priest was filled with great anger and said to the congregation: “What sort of people are you, foolish folk? Is there not one among you who can take hold of this fellow and choke him?”

Pagkárinig nitò ni Hwàn ay tumakbo syà naŋ úbus-lakàs at sinagasáa ŋ walà ŋ patumaŋgà aŋ maŋa táo ŋ nàlùluhòd at umíiyàk 25sa pagsisísi naŋ kanilà ŋ kasalánan. Sinundan syà ni Pédro at silà ŋ dalawà ay nagtakbúhan naŋ wala ŋ hintò haŋgàŋ sa dumatìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ báyan. At doòn ay ipinamalítà nila aŋ bútas-karáyum na niligtasàn nilà.

When Juan heard this, he ran with all his might, trampling without regard the people who were kneeling and weeping in repentance of their sins. He was followed by Pedro, and the two ran together, without stopping, until they reached their home town. And there they told the story of their narrow escape.
[Contents]

4. Aŋ kúbaʾ at aŋ bulàg.

4. The hunchback and the blindman.

30Isa ŋ kúbaʾ at isa ŋ bulàg ay matálik na magkaybígan. Kuŋ sila y naglálakàd aŋ kúbaʾ aŋ umàákay sa bulàg. Aŋ bulàg namàn ay syà ŋ pumápasàn sa kúbà kuŋ máy-roon silà ŋ mahírap na nilàlakáran, sapagkàt aŋ kúbaʾ ay mahínaʾ aŋ katawàn.

A hunchback and a blindman were close friends. When they walked, the hunchback led the blindman; the blindman, on the other hand, carried the hunchback on his shoulders, when they had a hard road to travel, for the hunchback was weak of body.

Mínsan sila y nakáraàn naŋ isà ŋ púno-ŋ-nyòg. Íbig nila ŋ 35pumitàs naŋ búŋa, dátapuwat hindí nila màláman kuŋ síno sa kanilà ŋ dalawà aŋ áakyàt sa púnòʾ. Sinábi naŋ bulàg na hindí sya makaáakyàt, sapagkàt hindí nya màkìkíta kuŋ alìn aŋ pìpitasín, yámaŋ máy-roo ŋ maŋa múra ŋ búŋa. Aŋ kúbaʾ ay hindi rìn íbig umakyàt, dahilàn sa kanyà ŋ kahináan. Dátapuwat malakì [24]aŋ pagkágusto nyà na kumáin naŋ nyòg. Kanyàʾ, sa katapusàn ay sinábi nya na siyà aŋ áakyàt.

Once they came upon a cocoanut-tree. They wanted to pick some of the fruits, but they did not know which of the two of them should be the one to climb the tree. The blindman said that he should not be able to climb, because he should not be able to see which fruits to pick, since there were many unripe fruits. The hunchback also did not want to climb, on account of his weakness. However, he was very eager to [25]eat of the cocoanuts, so, finally, he said to the blindman that he would do the climbing.

“Úpaŋ huwag kà ŋ mànakáwan naŋ maŋa ilálaglag kò ŋ búŋa, ay bìbiláŋin mo naŋ malakàs aŋ kalabùg sa lúpa naŋ maŋa 5búŋa na ilálaglag kò, úpaŋ áki ŋ matandaàn aŋ bílaŋ.”

“To prevent your being robbed of the fruits which I shall throw down, do you count out loud the thud on the ground of the fruits as I drop them, so that I may keep track of the number.”

Aŋ kúba ay nagumpisà naŋ pagakyàt, dátapwat paŋaŋalahátì nya ay nahúlug syà.

The hunchback began to climb, but when he was half-way up, he fell down.

“Isà!” aŋ sábi naŋ bulàg.

“One!” said the blindman.

Sinábi sa kanyà naŋ kúbàʾ na siyà aŋ kumalabòg at hindí aŋ 10búŋa naŋ nyòg.

The hunchback told him that it was he who had made the thud and not a cocoanut.

Umakyàt sya ulèʾ. Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay nahúlog ulí sya.

He climbed again. After a few moments he took another fall.

“Dalawà!” isinigàw naŋ bulàg.

“Two!” shouted the blindman.

Aŋ kúba ay nagálit, at sinábi nya sa bulàg na syà ay maúlit.

The hunchback got angry and told the blindman that he was stubborn.

15Winíkà nya: “Iyo ŋ úna ŋ kumalabòg ay akò, aŋ ikalawà ay ako rìn. Kanyàʾ, wala pà ŋ niyòg akò ŋ nàpìpitàs.”

He said: “That first thing that made a thud was I, and the second one was I again; I haven’t yet picked any cocoanuts.”

Dátapuwat aŋ bulàg ay nagakála ŋ gawì ŋ katatawanàn aŋ pagkahúlog naŋ kúbaʾ. Kanyá binálak nya na, kuŋ makárinig syà ulè naŋ kalabòg, ay sísigaw syà naŋ “Tatlò!”

But the blindman planned to make fun of the hunchback’s falls. So he decided that, when he again heard a thud, he would cry “Three!”

20Aŋ kúba ay umakyàt na mulìʾ, dátapwat nahúlog dìn syà. Aŋ bulàg ay sumigàw naŋ “Tatlò!” at tumáwa sya. Aŋ kúba ay nagínit naŋ gálit. Nilapítan nya aŋ bulàg at kanyà ŋ sinampàl sa mukhàʾ. Aŋ sampàl ay tumáma sa maŋa matà naŋ bulàg, at dáhil díto ay nadílat aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa matà.

25Úpaŋ maŋhigantì sya ay sinípà nya aŋ kúbaʾ. Tinamaan nyà itò sa likòd at dáhil díto ay nàúnat aŋ kanya ŋ kúbaʾ.

The hunchback climbed again, but again fell. The blindman cried “Three!” and laughed.

The hunchback grew hot with anger. He went up to the blindman and slapped him in the face. The slap hit the blindman’s eyes, and through it his eyes came open. To take revenge he kicked the hunchback. He struck him on the back, and through this his hump was straightened out.

Silà ŋ dalawà ay natwá sa naŋyári at lálo ŋ tumíbay aŋ kanila ŋ pagkakaybígan sa lugàr naŋ magkasirá silà.

They both rejoiced at what had happened, and their friendship grew all the closer, instead of their becoming enemies.
[Contents]

5. Aŋ hári ŋ may súŋay at si Hwàn.

5. The king who had horns and Juan.

30Sa isà ŋ kapuluwàn naghàhári aŋ isa ŋ táwu ŋ may dalawà ŋ maiiklì ŋ súŋay na nàtàtágù sa malagú nya ŋ buhòk. Hindí itò nàlàláman naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa pinaghàharían. Dátapwat aŋ líhim na ytò y nagumpisà ŋ nàibadyà sa madlàʾ sa pamamagítan naŋ maŋa maŋgugúpit na nakàpútul naŋ kanyà ŋ buhòk.

On a group of islands there ruled a man who had two short horns hidden in his thick hair. This was not known to his subjects, but the secret began to spread among the people by way of the barbers who had cut his hair.

35Kanyá sya y nagkaroòn naŋ malaki ŋ gálit sa maŋa barbéro, at inakálà nya ŋ lipúlin aŋ maŋa barbéro sa kanya ŋ kaharyàn. Iniyútus nya ŋ humúkay naŋ ápat na malálim na balòn sa harapàn naŋ kanya ŋ tìráhan, at sa gitná naŋ ápat na húkay na yitò ay nagpalagày sya naŋ isa ŋ ùpúan. Isa ŋ áraw naupó sya sa taburéte 40sa gitná naŋ ápat na húkay, at báwat táo ŋ nagdaàn ay [26]tinanùŋ nya kuŋ marúnuŋ maŋgupìt. Aŋ báwat sumagòt naŋ “Óo” ay pinahintú nya úpaŋ bigyàn nya naŋ guntìŋ at syà y gupitàn. Pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ sandalìʾ ay itinanùŋ nya sa báwat maŋgugúpit kuŋ anò aŋ nàkìkíta nya sa úlo naŋ háreʾ. Aŋ maŋa 5maŋgugúpit ay nagsipagsábi naŋ katotohánan at báwat isà sa kanilà ay sumagòt naŋ súŋay aŋ kanila ŋ nàkìkíta. Aŋ báwat sumagòt naŋ ganitò ay ibinulìd naŋ háreʾ sa isà sa maŋa húkay sa palígid niyà.

On account of this he conceived a great anger against barbers and planned to exterminate the barbers in his kingdom. He ordered four deep wells dug in front of his residence, and in the center between the four pits he had a seat placed. One day he sat down on the chair between the four pits, and asked everyone who passed whether he knew how to cut hair. Whenever anyone said “Yes,” he stopped him, gave him a pair of shears, and had him cut his hair. After a little while he [27]asked each hair-cutter what he saw on his, the king’s, head. The hair-cutters all told the truth, and each one of them answered that he saw horns. Every one who answered thus was pushed by the king into one of the pits that were round him.

Nakaraàn aŋ ila ŋ áraw at aŋ dalawà ŋ húkay ay napunú 10nà naŋ maŋa barbéro at pinatabúnan na nyà. Dumálaŋ aŋ maŋa tao ŋ nagdádaàn na marúnuŋ maŋgupìt, at aŋ háre ay nagakála ŋ nápatay nà niya ŋ lahàt aŋ maŋa barbéro sa kanyà ŋ kaharyàn.

A few days passed and two of the pits were already filled with barbers and were ordered by the king to be filled up with earth. The passers-by who knew how to cut hair grew scarce, and the king thought he had already killed all the barbers in his kingdom.

Isa ŋ áraw ay naghintày sya sa kanya ŋ ùpúan haŋgàŋ kataŋhalían bágo nagdaàn aŋ isa ŋ táo na nagsábi ŋ sya y marúnuŋ 15gumupìt naŋ buhòk.

One day he waited on his seat until mid-day, before a man came by who said he knew how to cut hair.

Itinanùŋ sa kanyà naŋ háreʾ: “Anò aŋ paŋálan mo?”

The king asked him: “What is your name?”

Isinagòt naŋ táo: “Aŋ paŋálan ko pòʾ ay Hwàn.”

The man answered: “My name, sir, is Juan.”

“Gupitàn mo akò, Hwàn,” iniyútus naŋ háreʾ.

“Cut my hair, Juan,” commanded the king.

Lumápit si Hwàn sa háreʾ at inumpisahan nyà aŋ paŋgugupìt. 20

Juan approached the king and began to cut his hair.

Makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay itinanùŋ naŋ háreʾ: “Anò aŋ nàkìkíta mo sa úlo ko, Hwàn?”

After a short time the king asked: “What do you see on my head, Juan?”

Aŋ kanya ŋ sagòt ay ganitò: “Aŋ iyo pò ŋ Kamàhálan, nàkìkíta ko sa úlo ninyò aŋ koróna.”

His reply was thus: “Your Majesty, I see on your head the crown.”

25Itò ay ikinatuwá naŋ háreʾ. Kanyá nagtindig syà sa ùpúan at inákay nya si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ palásiyo at ginawá nya si Hwàn na barbéro naŋ háreʾ. Malakì aŋ suwèldu na ibinigày nya kay Hwàn, at pinatabúnan nya aŋ maŋa nàtìtirà ŋ húkay.

This made the king glad. Therefore he got up from his seat and led Juan into his palace and made Juan barber royal. He gave Juan large wages and had the remaining pits filled up.
[Contents]

6. Tatlò ŋ estudyànte.

6. Three students.

30Si Hwàn, si Pédro, at si Andrès ay tatlò ŋ magkakayibíga ŋ estudyànte ŋ magkababáyan. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ pagbubukàs naŋ maŋa pàaralàn ay nàláman nilà na silà ay magkàkahiwá-hiwalày. Iba t ibà ŋ báyan aŋ kapàpatuŋúhan naŋ báwat isà sa kanilà. Bágo silà naghiwá-hiwalày ay nagtìpánan silà naŋ pagtàtagpuàn 35nila ŋ lugàr paguumpisà naŋ bakasyòn.

Juan, Pedro, and Andrés were three students from the same town who were friends. When the opening of the schools came, they knew that they would part: each one of them was to go to a different town. Before they parted, they appointed a place where they would meet at the beginning of the vacation.

Nakaraàn aŋ isa ŋ taòn at dumatìŋ aŋ pagsasarà naŋ kláse at aŋ maŋa estudyànte ay naguwían sa kaní-kanilà ŋ báyan, at aŋ tatlò ŋ magkakaybíga ŋ si Pédro, si Hwàn, at si Andrès ay nagtatagpò sa báya ŋ tinubúan ni Pédro, úpaŋ doòn sila magpalípas 40naŋ bakasyòn. [28]

A year passed, the closing of the schools arrived, the students returned to their home towns, and the three friends, Pedro, Juan, and Andrés met in the town where Pedro had been brought up, to spend the vacation there.

Naŋ silà y magkikíta, pagkaraàn naŋ iba t ibà ŋ bágay na kanilà ŋ pinagusápan, ay nagsiyásat silà kuŋ ganò aŋ nàtutúhan naŋ báwat isà sa kanila ŋ pagaáral naŋ wíka ŋ Kastílaʾ. Sinábi ni Pédro na syà ay marámi ŋ nàlàláma ŋ salità ŋ Kastílaʾ, dátapuwat 5aŋ maígi nya ŋ natàtandaàn ay aŋ salità ŋ “Bámos.”

When they came together, after discussing various matters, they inquired how much each of them had learned in his study of the Spanish [29]language. Pedro said that he knew a great many Spanish words, but that which he remembered best was the word “Vamos.”

Sumagòt namàn si Hwàn: “Ako màn ay marámi rì ŋ nàlàláman, dátapuwat sa ŋayòn aŋ nààalaála ko ay aŋ salità ŋ ‘Matàr.’”

Juan in turn answered: “I too know a great deal, but what I recall just now is the word ‘Matar.’”

Si Andrès namàn ay nagwíka ŋ walá sya ŋ nàtutúhan kuŋ 10hindí aŋ salità ŋ “Sì.”

Andrés said that he had learned nothing except the word “Si.”

Makaraàn aŋ kanila ŋ pagsasàlitáan ay nagyayá si Pédro na sila ay mamaŋká sa ílog at magsipalígo tulòy. Naŋ sila y namámaŋká na sa ílog, sa paŋpàŋ ay nakátanaw silà naŋ isà ŋ Kastílàʾ na íbig malígoʾ. Sinábi ni Pédro na mabúti ay makipagúsap silà 15sa Kastílaʾ, úpaŋ sa gayù y màipakíta nilà aŋ kaní-kanilà ŋ dúnoŋ.

After their conversation Pedro suggested that they go boating on the river and take a bath.

When they were boating on the river, they saw on the bank a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Pedro said it would be a good idea to speak to the Spaniard, so that each one of them might show his knowledge.

Nagumpisà si Pédro at sinábi nya ŋ “Bámos!”

Pedro began and said “Vamos!”

Si Hwàn namàn ay sumagòt: “Matàr!”

Juan answered “Matar!”

At sa hulè ay si Andrès aŋ kanya ŋ “Sì!”

And last came Andrés with his “Si!”

Naŋ márinig itò naŋ Kastílaʾ, ay siniglàn sya naŋ tákot, 20sapagkàt inakálà nya na pàpataìn sya naŋ tatlò ŋ namámaŋkàʾ. Kanyá, káhit na hindí sya marúnuŋ lumaŋòy, ay nagtalòn sya sa ílog at sya y nalúnod.

When the Spaniard heard this, he was filled with terror, for he thought that the three canoers were going to kill him. Therefore, even though he did not know how to swim, he jumped into the river and was drowned.
[Contents]

7. Isa ŋ sundálu ŋ marúnuŋ naŋ Latìn.

7. A soldier who knew Latin.

Tatlò ŋ magkakayibígan, isa ŋ párèʾ, isa ŋ maŋgagámut, at 25isa ŋ sundálu, ay magkakasáma ŋ nagsipamarìl naŋ maiílap na háyup sa isà ŋ maláwak na gúbat. Aŋ gúbat ay maláyù sa báyan. Kanyàʾ silà ay nagdalà naŋ marámi ŋ báon, úpaŋ hwag silà ŋ gutúmin.

Nakaraàn aŋ ila ŋ áraw, dátapuwat walá pa sila ŋ nàhùhúli 30káhit anò. Aŋ kanila ŋ báon ay umuntí naŋ umuntìʾ haŋgàŋ sa walà ŋ nátira kuŋ hindí isa ŋ hilàw na itlòg. Dumatìŋ sa kanilà aŋ áraw naŋ malaki ŋ gútom, dátapuwat sila ŋ tatlò ay walà ŋ pagkáin kuŋ hindí aŋ itlòg lámaŋ na nàtìtirà.

Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier, went together to shoot wild game in a deep jungle. As the jungle was far from the town, they carried plenty of provisions, so as not to be in want of food. A few days passed without their bagging anything. Their provisions grew less and less, until there was nothing left except one raw egg. There came to them the day of great hunger, but the three had no food except the egg that was left.

Sinábi naŋ páreʾ na, kuŋ paghatían nilà aŋ isa ŋ itlòg, ay 35hindí makabùbúti sa kanilà, sapagkàt hindí makapàpáwiʾ naŋ kaní-kanila ŋ gútom. Kaniyàʾ ipináyu naŋ párìʾ na isà lámaŋ sa kanilà ŋ tatlò aŋ kumáin naŋ itlòg na nàtìtirà,—at sa kanya ŋ kasakimàn ay ipináyu nya na kuŋ sínu sa kanilà aŋ pinakamahúsay na magsalitá naŋ Latìn ay sya lámaŋ kàkáin naŋ itlòg. [30]Inakálà nya na aŋ sundálu ay hindí marúnuŋ naŋ Latìn at aŋ médiko lámaŋ aŋ sya nyà ŋ màkàkatálo, at aŋ dúnoŋ nitò y kanya ŋ minámatà.

The priest said that, if they divided the one egg, it would do them no good, for it would not slacken their hunger. Therefore the priest suggested that only one of them should eat the remaining egg, and in his selfishness he suggested that whichever of them was best at speaking Latin should eat the egg all by himself. He thought that the soldier did not know Latin, and the doctor alone would be his opponent, and his knowledge he held in contempt.

Aŋ médiko y umáyun sa hátul naŋ párìʾ, dátapuwat aŋ 5sundálu ay áyaw pumáyag, sapagkàt hindí sya nagáral na gáya naŋ páriʾ at naŋ médiko; ŋúnit walá sya ŋ magawàʾ.

The doctor agreed to the advice of the priest, but the soldier did not want to consent, for he had not studied like the priest and the doctor, but there was nothing for him to do. [31]

Kinúha naŋ párìʾ aŋ itlùg at itinuktòk nya sa isa ŋ batò. Naŋ mabásag aŋ itlòg ay sinábi nyà: “Koronátum est,” at tiniŋnàn nyà aŋ dalawà nya ŋ kasáma.

The priest took the egg and tapped it against a stone. When the egg was broken, he said: “Coronatum est,” and looked at his two companions.

10Inabùt naŋ médiko aŋ basàg na itlòg, inalis nyà aŋ balàt na basàg at nilagyan nyà naŋ asìn at kanya ŋ sinábi: “Sàltum est.”

The doctor took the broken egg, removed the broken part of the shell, put on some salt, and said: “Saltum est.”

Iniyabùt naŋ maŋgagámot sa sundálu aŋ itlùg, at aŋ páre at siyà ay naghintày naŋ sàsabíhin naŋ sundálo. Itò y walà ŋ màláma 15ŋ sabíhin, sapagkàt katunáya ŋ walá sya ŋ nàlàláman káhit isa ŋ hóta tuŋkùl sa Latìn. Sa kanya ŋ pagiisìp ay nàalaála nya na, mínsan pumásuk sya sa simbáhan úpaŋ makinìg naŋ Syéti-Palábras, ay nárinig nyà sa párìʾ na aŋ kahulugàn naŋ salità ŋ “Konsumátum est” ay “Tapus nà aŋ lahàt.”

20Kanyà ibinúhos nya sa kanyà ŋ bibìg aŋ itlòg, at pagkalaguk nyà ay kanya ŋ sinábi: “Konsumátum est.”

The physician handed the egg to the soldier, and the priest and he waited for what the soldier would say.

The latter did not know what to say, for he really did not know a single iota of Latin. In his cogitation he remembered that once, when he went to church to hear the Good Friday Mass, he heard from the priest that the meaning of the words “Consummatum est” was “It is all over now.” So he poured the egg into his mouth and, when he had swallowed it, he said: “Consummatum est.”

Aŋ dalawà nya ŋ kasáma ay nàpagúlat naŋ malakì sa hindí nila hininála ŋ dúnuŋ naŋ sundálo.

His two companions were greatly astonished at the learning of the soldier, which they had by no means suspected.
[Contents]

8. Aŋ pitù ŋ dwènde.

8. The seven dwarves.

25Isà ŋ magasáwa ay máy-roo ŋ pitù ŋ anàk na dwènde. Aŋ amà ay walà ŋ trabáho at hindí rìn siya makàkíta naŋ trabáho. Aŋ inà namàn ay hindí kumìkíta naŋ salapìʾ, sapagkàt mahínaʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn at paráti sa sakìt.

A certain married couple had seven children who were dwarves. The father was out of work and could not find any. The mother also was not earning any money, for her body was weak and often sick.

Isa ŋ taŋháliʾ sila y nàùupú sa isa ŋ baŋkòʾ at pinagùusápan 30nilà aŋ kanila ŋ pamumúhay na pinagdàdaanàn. Itinanùŋ naŋ laláke kuŋ anò aŋ mabúte nila ŋ gawìn sa kanila ŋ maràmi ŋ anàk. Ipináyu naŋ babáye na kanilà ŋ ihánap naŋ trabáho aŋ maŋa bátaʾ, úpaŋ kumíta silà naŋ kwaltà. Dátapuwat isinagòt naŋ laláki na sa akálà nya ay hindí sila makàkìkíta naŋ trabáho, sapagkàt 35siya rìn ay wala ŋ màkíta. Kanyàʾ ipináyu nyà na aŋ mabúti ay itápun nilà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ.

One noon they were sitting on a bench and discussing the life they were leading. The man asked what they had better do with their many children. The woman suggested that they should look for work for their children, so that they might earn money. But the man answered that, in his opinion, they would not be able to find any work, since he himself had not been able to find any. Therefore he suggested that they had better abandon their children.

Itò y ikinaluŋkòt at ikináiyàk naŋ babáye. Áyaw sya ŋ pumáyag na itápon aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. Dátapuwat ipinakíta sa kanyà naŋ kanyà ŋ asáwa na, kuŋ hindí nila gawìn iyòn, sila ŋ [32]lahàt ay mamámatay naŋ gútom. Sa kalaúnan ay pumáyag aŋ babáe at pinagkàsunduàn nila na dalhìn nila ŋ magpasyàl aŋ maŋa bátaʾ at kanila ŋ íwan sa daàn.

This made the woman grieve and weep. She would not consent to abandon the children. But her husband made it clear to her that, if they did not do this, they would all die of hunger. Finally the woman consented and they agreed that they would take their children for a walk and leave them on the way.

Hábaŋ pinagùusápan nilà itò, aŋ ikapitù ŋ bátà ay nása isà 5ŋ bitàk naŋ baŋkò na kanila ŋ inùupàn at nárinig nya ŋ lahàt aŋ gàgawin sa kanilà naŋ kanila ŋ magúlaŋ. Pagkaraàn naŋ kanilà ŋ sàlitáan ay hinánap pagdáka naŋ báta aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa kapatìd at ibinalítà nya aŋ kanya ŋ nárinìg. Silà ay nagìyákan, sapagkàt hindí ipinaálam sa kanilà naŋ kanila ŋ magúlaŋ na silà 10ay nakabíbigat sa kanila ŋ pamumúhay. Inakálà nila na, kuŋ itò y nàláman nilà, káhit na papáno tùtúloŋ sila ŋ maghánap naŋ kabuháyan. Dátapuwat pinagkàsunduwan nilà na silà y sumáma pag niyáyà sila ŋ magsipagpasyàl at paligàw silà.

While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack [33]of the bench on which they were sitting and heard what their parents were going to do to them. After they had finished talking, the child at once looked for his brothers and sisters and told them what he had heard. They all wept, because their parents had not told them that they were a burden to their life. They thought that, if they had known this, they would have done anything whatever to help them gain a living. However, they agreed that they would go along, if they were asked to go walking, and would allow themselves to be led astray.

Kinàbukásan hinánap silà naŋ kanilà ŋ amà, pinapagbíhis 15sila, binigyàn sila naŋ maŋa púto, at sinábi ŋ sila y magsísipagpasyàl. Naŋ silà y magumpisà aŋ ikapitò ŋ báta ay hindí kináin aŋ kanya ŋ tinápay, dátapuwat magmulá sa kanila ŋ tàraŋkáhan ay dinúrog nya aŋ tinápay at ibinudbòd nya sa daà ŋ kanila ŋ nilakáran. Naŋ sila y málayú nà ay naubúsan sya naŋ tinápay, 20kanyá naŋhiŋí sya sa kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd. Dátapwat hindí nila syà binigyàn. Itò namàn ay hindí sinábi sa kanilà kuŋ bákit sya naubúsan agàd naŋ tinápay. Naŋ hindí sya makáhiŋì naŋ tinápay ay namúlot sya naŋ maŋa batò, at itò y sya nyà ŋ isa-isà ŋ inilaglàg sa kanila ŋ pinagdaánan.

On the next day their father came to them, told them to get dressed, gave them some cakes, and told them that they should all go for a walk. When they started out, the seventh child did not eat his bread, but, starting at their gate, he crumbled it and scattered it along the road which they were walking. When they had gone some distance, he ran out of bread and asked his brothers and sisters for some. But they did not give him any. He did not tell them why he had run out of bread so soon. When he could get no bread, he picked up stones and these he dropped one by one on their path.

25Naŋ dumatìŋ sila sa isa ŋ gúbat ay iníwan silà naŋ kanilà ŋ magúlaŋ at pinagsabíhan silà na hantayìn sila doòn, at silà y bábalik agàd. Silà y naíwan, dátapwat nàlàláman nilà na hindí sila pagbàbalikàn naŋ kanila ŋ magúlaŋ.

When they came to a jungle, their parents left them, telling them to wait for them there and that they would soon come back. Their parents left them, but they knew that their parents would not come back to them.

Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ sandalìʾ, ay nakárinig silà naŋ isa ŋ 30íŋay. Pinuntahàn nilà aŋ lugàr na pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ íŋay. Doòn ay nàkíta nilà aŋ isa ŋ malakì ŋ higànte na nalìlígo sa tabi naŋ isa ŋ balòn. Tiniŋnàn nila aŋ palígid-lígid naŋ lugàr, at sa tabì naŋ isa ŋ káhuy ay nàkíta nilà aŋ pananamìt naŋ higànte. Aŋ ikapitù ŋ bàta ay pinaalìs aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd at sinábi 35nya na magtágo silà at kanyà ŋ nànakáwin aŋ sapátos naŋ higànte. Itò ay kanila ŋ ginawàʾ, at ninákaw naŋ báta aŋ sapátos.

When a short time had passed, they heard a noise. They went toward the place from which the noise came. There they saw a great giant bathing by the side of a well. They looked round about the place, and by the side of a tree they saw the clothes of the giant. The seventh child sent his brothers and sisters away and told them to hide, and he would steal the giant’s shoes. They did this and the child stole the shoes.

Naŋ makapalígoʾ aŋ higànte at siyà y nagbìbíhis ay hindí nya màkíta aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa sapátos. Sya y nagálit at nagmurà. Tumáwag sya naŋ túloŋ. Naŋ itò y márinìg naŋ numákaw naŋ [34]sapátos ay dali-dáli sya ŋ dumalò. Naŋ màkíta sya naŋ higànte ay hindí sya pinagbintaŋàn, sapagkàt dahilàn sa kanya ŋ kaliitàn ay inakálà naŋ higànte ŋ hindí nya madádala aŋ sapátos.

When the giant had finished bathing and was getting dressed, he could not find his shoes. He got angry and cursed. He called for help. When the one who had stolen the shoes heard this, he quickly approached. When the giant saw him, he did not suspect him, for, on account of his smallness, the giant thought that he would not be able to carry the shoes.

Kanyàʾ itò y nagwíka sa kanyà: “Kuŋ iyo ŋ dàdalhìn ito 5ŋ súpot ko naŋ kwaltà sa áki ŋ asáwa at pabilhìn mo syà naŋ sapátos at ihatìd nya sa ákin, ay ùupáhan kità naŋ marámi ŋ kwàlta.”

Therefore the giant said to him: “If you will carry this bag of money of mine to my wife and tell her to buy some shoes and to bring them to me, I shall pay you much money.”

Sinábi tulòy nya na sya y hindí nakalàlákad naŋ wala ŋ sapátos, kanyá sya y magmadalìʾ. Naŋ màkúha nya aŋ súpot naŋ 10kwaltà ay ipinaŋákù nya ŋ bábalik syà agàd. Dátapwat, naŋ málayo sya, ay tináwag nya aŋ maŋa nàtàtágù nya ŋ kapatìd, at naŋ sila y maípon ay nagyayá sya ŋ umuwèʾ. Dátapwat isinagòt naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd na hindí nila nàlàláman aŋ daà ŋ pauwèʾ. Ŋúnit kanyà ŋ isinagòt na tùtuntunìn nilà aŋ kanya ŋ 15inilaglàg na batò at tinápay sa daàn.

He said further that he could not walk without shoes, and therefore he should hurry. Taking the bag of money, the child promised to return at once. However, when he had gone some distance, he called his hidden brothers and sisters, and when they were assembled, he suggested that they go home. But his brothers and sisters answered [35]that they did not know the way home. He however answered that they should follow the stones and bread he had dropped on the way.

Sinábi naŋ isà nyà ŋ kapatìd na, kuŋ nàláman nya kuŋ anò aŋ kanya ŋ ginawàʾ sa tinápay, ay binigyàn sána nya syà naŋ syà y maŋhiŋìʾ. Kanilà ŋ ikinaluŋkòt aŋ ipinakíta nila ŋ karamútan sa kanila ŋ kapatìd.

One of his brothers said that, if he had known what he had done with the bread, he would have given him some when he asked for it. They were sorry for the stinginess they had shown toward their brother.

20Hindí naláon at nàtagpuan nilà aŋ hiléra naŋ maŋa batò sa daàn. Itò y tinuntòn nila at nakaratìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ báhay, dalà nilà aŋ súpot naŋ kwaltà na kanila ŋ ibinigày pagdáka sa kanila ŋ magúlaŋ. Silà y naŋatwá at naŋaluŋkòt dahilàn sa kanilà ŋ malì ŋ inásal sa maŋa anàk,—sila y natwá sapagkàt máy-roon 25sila ŋ ikabùbúhay sa maláo ŋ panahòn.

It was not long before they came upon the trail of stones along their way. This they followed and arrived at their house, bringing with them the bag of money, which they at once gave to their parents. The latter rejoiced and were sorry for their bad conduct toward their children,—they rejoiced because they had now the means of living for a long time to come.
[Contents]

9. Isà ŋ pulìs na nagaswàŋ-aswáŋan.

9. A policeman who played vampire.

Noò ŋ tagáraw naŋ taò ŋ míle-nobisyèntos-dòs, hábaŋ aŋ maŋa hinòg na búŋa naŋ káhoy ay naŋakabiyábit sa maŋa saŋà, lumagánap aŋ balíta sa boo ŋ báyan naŋ San-Antónyo na máy-roo 30ŋ aswàŋ na naglílibot sa báyan.

In the summer of the year 1902, when the ripe fruits of the fruit-trees were hanging from the branches, there circulated all through the town of San Antonio the rumor that a vampire was going about the town.

Aŋ maŋa táo-ŋ-San-Antónyo sa maŋa taò ŋ iyòn ay may paniniwálaʾ sa maŋa núnoʾ, aswàŋ, dwènde, at iba pà ŋ katatakutàn. Karamíhan sa kanilà y hindí nagkapálad na makapagáral, dátapwat, káhit na ganitò aŋ kalàgáyan nila, sila y maŋa táwo 35ŋ mababaìt, matahímik, at masisípag.

The people of San Antonio in those years believed in ghosts, vampires, dwarves, and other objects of terror. Most of them had not been fortunate enough to get an education, but, in spite of this, they were kindly, quiet, and industrious people.

Aŋ maŋa báhay sa báya ŋ itò ay maliliìt at nayàyárì naŋ páwid at kawáyan. Máy-roon dì ŋ ila ŋ báhay na tablà. Karamíhan ay nàtàtayò sa malalakì ŋ bakúran, at aŋ dulúhan naŋ bakúran ay nàtàtamnàn naŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy na masasaràp aŋ 40búŋa, gáya naŋ tsíko, súhaʾ, santòl, mabúlo, maŋgà, at iba pà. [36]

The houses in this town were built of nipa-fibre and bamboo. There were also some frame houses. Most of them stood in large enclosures, and the rear part of these yards was planted with trees that have tasty fruits, such as the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, mabolo, mango, and the like.

Kasalukúya ŋ nagkàkahinòg aŋ maŋa búŋa-ŋ-káhuy na ytò naŋ lumagánap aŋ balíta na may-roòn nà ŋ ila ŋ gabì na nàmatáan naŋ ila ŋ babáe aŋ aswàŋ sa ibà t iba ŋ dulúhan. Aŋ maŋa báta at maŋa babáe ay siniglàn naŋ malakì ŋ tákot, kanyá pagkagàt 5naŋ dilìm ay agad-agàd silà ŋ nagsipanahímik sa loòb naŋ báhay. Karamíhan naŋ maŋa laláki ay naŋatákot dìn, dátapwat máy-roo ŋ ila ŋ nagsipagsábi na sila y hindí natàtákot, sapagkàt hindí pa sila nakátagpo naŋ aswàŋ, at sa ganitò y hindí nila nàlàláman kuŋ dápat katakútan aŋ aswàŋ.

These fruits were just getting ripe, when the rumor spread that, [37]for several nights back, some women had caught sight of the vampire in various back yards. The women and children were filled with great terror; accordingly, as soon as darkness came down, they staid still in their houses. Most of the men also were afraid, but there were some who said that they were not afraid, because they had not yet come across a vampire and therefore did not know whether it was really to be feared.

10Aŋ aswàŋ ay isa ŋ táo ŋ malakì aŋ kapaŋyaríhan. Nakapagìiba-t-ibà sya naŋ paŋaŋatawàn. Kuŋ mínsan ay may katawàn siya ŋ pára ŋ táo, dátapwat maitèm, kuŋ mínsan siya y isa ŋ malakì ŋ áso o báboy. Sya y naŋàŋáin naŋ táo, lálù nà naŋ maŋa bátaʾ. Dátapuwat aŋ lálo ŋ mahalagà nya ŋ pagkáin at 15sya rìn namàn nyà ŋ karanyúa ŋ kinàkáin ay aŋ báta ŋ hindí pa naipaŋáŋanàk at násàsa tiyàn pa lámaŋ naŋ kanya ŋ inà. Kanyá aŋ maŋa buntìs na babáye sa báya ŋ yaòn ay lálo ŋ malakì aŋ tákot. Hindí nila pinatúlog aŋ kanila ŋ asáwa sa pagbabantày sa kanila ŋ tabì. Aŋ aswàŋ ay mahírap mápatay naŋ patalìm o 20barìl, sapagkàt máy-roon sya ŋ íisa lámaŋ na lugàr na dápat màtamaàn o masugátan úpaŋ sya y mápatày, at aŋ lugàr na ytò ay lihìm. Aŋ bágay lámaŋ na kanya ŋ inìilágan ay aŋ báwaŋ. Kanyá itò y malakì ŋ kagamitàn sa pagpapaláyas naŋ aswàŋ.

A vampire is a being of great power. It changes its body into various forms. At some times it has a body like a human being, but black, at others it is a large dog or pig. It eats people, especially children. But its favorite food, by far, and that which it most commonly eats, is the child yet unborn and still in its mother’s womb. Therefore the pregnant women in the town had great fear. They did not allow their husbands to sleep, for watching at their side. A vampire is hard to kill with knife or gun, because it has but one place which one must hit or wound in order to kill it, and this place is secret. The only thing it flees from is garlic, which therefore is much used in driving off vampires.

Dátapwat isà ŋ bágay na nakapagtátakà sa aswàŋ na iyòn ay 25aŋ kanyà ŋ inugáli ŋ pagtitirà sa maŋa dulúhan naŋ bakúran. Katakà-takà rìn aŋ bágay na maŋa dalága aŋ karamíhan naŋ nagsipagsábi ŋ nàmatáan nilà sa dulúhan sa itaàs naŋ súhaʾ o iba pà ŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy aŋ aswàŋ na iyòn. Ila ŋ táo ŋ matalíno ay nagsábi ŋ aŋ bintàŋ nilà y isa ŋ magnanákaw at hindí aswàŋ aŋ 30pinagkàkatakutà ŋ iyòn.

A surprising thing, however, about this vampire was its habit of keeping itself in back yards. Strange was also the fact that it was mostly young girls who said that they had caught sight of this vampire in back yards, up in grape-fruit trees and other trees. A few bold men said that they suspected that this spook was a thief and no vampire.

Isa ŋ polìs na may hindí karanyúa ŋ tápaŋ ay siya ŋ tumiktìk sa aswàŋ na itò sa dulúha ŋ bágo ŋ kinakitáan sa kanyà. Pagdilìm ay nároon na syà sa kanya ŋ kublíhan. Hindí nalaúnan at dumatìŋ aŋ aswàŋ, umakyàt sa isa púno-ŋ-súhaʾ, at nárinig niya 35ŋ pumitàs naŋ marámi ŋ búŋa. Itò y bumábaʾ at umalìs, dátapwat sya y sinundàn naŋ pulìs haŋgàŋ sa báhay na kanya ŋ pinasúkan.

It was a certain policeman of more than usual courage who spied upon this vampire in a back yard in which it had recently been seen. When darkness came, he went to his hiding-place. It was not long before the vampire came and climbed on a grape-fruit tree, and he heard it picking many fruits. It came down and went away, but was followed by the policeman to a house which it entered.

Malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagkàgúlat naŋ polìs, naŋ díto nàmálas nya ŋ aŋ kápwa nya polìs nabàbálot naŋ maitìm na kúmot, at aŋ 40súpot na itìm na punò naŋ súhaʾ ay kasalukúyan pa lámaŋ niya ŋ inilálapàg.

Great was the surprise of the policeman, when he saw here his fellow policeman wrapped up in a black sheet and just putting down on the floor a black bag full of grape-fruit.

Niyáyà nya sa munisípyo aŋ kápwa nya polìs, at doòn kinàbukásan [38]ipinagsumbòŋ nyà sa presidènte. Aŋ polìs na nagaswaŋ-aswáŋan ay nábilaŋgò dahilàn sa sála ŋ pagnanákaw.

He summoned his fellow policeman to the town hall and there on the next day accused him before the judge. The policeman who had played vampire was put in jail for the crime of theft. [39]
[Contents]

10. Isà ŋ aswàŋ na nápatày.

10. A vampire that got killed.

Isà ŋ gabì sa isà ŋ báhay na pàŋaserahàn naŋ ilà ŋ maŋa 5nagsìsipagáral sa báya-ŋ-Malólos ay nárinig ko ŋ isinalaysày naŋ isà ŋ matandàʾ na may gúlaŋ na siyàm na pù ŋ taòn sa isà ŋ umpúkan aŋ sumúsunòd.

One evening in a students’ boarding-house in the town of Malolos I heard an old man, ninety years of age, tell a company the following story:

Noò ŋ sya y bágo ŋ táwu pa lámaŋ ay sa búkid sya nagtítirà. Íilan lámaŋ silà ŋ magkakápit-báhay. Isa ŋ áraw ay namatayàn 10aŋ isa nyà ŋ kápit-báhay. Sa pagsunòd sa isa ŋ matandà ŋ kaugaliàn ay dumalo syà sa kápit-báhay na may hápis.

When he was still a young unmarried man, he lived in the country. There were only a very few neighbors. One day there was a death in the house of a neighbor. Following an ancient custom, he went to the house of mourning.

Naŋ dumatìŋ sya doòn ay hindí nalaúnan at nàbalitáan nyà na may aswàŋ sa kanila ŋ lugàr. Syà ay may malakì at katutúbo ŋ gálit sa maŋa aswàŋ, kaniyá inakálà nya ŋ magbantày naŋ gabì 15ŋ iyòn.

When he arrived there it was not long before he was told that there was a vampire in the place. He had a great and inherited hatred of vampires and therefore decided to watch that night.

Naŋ malálim nà aŋ gabì ay nanáog sya sa báhay at sa isa ŋ karitò ŋ dí maláyo sa báhay, doòn sya nahigàʾ. Kabilúgan naŋ bwàn naŋ gabi ŋ iyòn, kanyà malínaw aŋ pagkàkíta nya sa maŋa bágay sa palìgid-lígid. Walá sya ŋ nàmálas na màpaghìhinaláa 20ŋ isa ŋ aswàŋ, kanyá sya y natúlog.

Late in the evening he left the house and in a wagon not far from the house, there he lay down. There was a full moon that night, so that he had a clear view of things round about. As he saw nothing that could be suspected of being a vampire, he went to sleep.

Kinàháti-ŋ-gabihàn ay nágisiŋ syà at aŋ úna ŋ tinamaàn naŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa matà ay isà ŋ bágay na maitìm sa bubuŋàn naŋ báhay naŋ kinamatayàn. Aŋ maitìm na iyòn ay walá roon bágo sya natúlog, kaniyá nagbintaŋ syà na iyòn ay aŋ aswàŋ na nàbalitáan 25nyà. Aŋ aswàŋ ay naŋàŋáin naŋ patày na táo, kanyà sinapantáhà nya na aŋ patày aŋ sadyá doòn naŋ aswàŋ na iyòn.

At midnight he woke up, and the first thing that struck his eyes was a black object on the roof of the house where there had been a death. This black thing had not been there before he went to sleep, so he suspected that this was the vampire he had been told about. Vampires eat dead people, so he concluded that the dead person was the thing for which the vampire had come there.

Pumanhìk sya sa báhay at dalà nyà aŋ isa ŋ gúlok. Aŋ maŋa táo y natùtúlog. Sa itaàs ay may-roon syà ŋ nàkíta ŋ isa ŋ bágay na nakalawìt mulá sa bubuŋàn naŋ báhay. Itò y gáya naŋ 30bitúka naŋ manòk. Humábà naŋ humábaʾ, haŋgàŋ sa aŋ dúlo y pumások sa bibìg naŋ patày. Aŋ patày ay nagtindìg sa kanyà ŋ kinàlàlagyàn pagkapások sa kanya ŋ bibìg naŋ bágay na iyòn.

Carrying a bolo-knife, he went up to the house. The people were asleep. Up above he saw something hanging down from the roof of the house. It was like the intestine of a chicken. It got longer and longer, until the end of it went into the mouth of the dead person. The corpse stood up from the place where it lay, when this thing went into its mouth.

Aŋ ginawá naŋ bágo ŋ táo ay lumápit siya sa nakatindìg na patày at sa pamamagítan naŋ dala nyà ŋ gúlok ay pinútol niya 35aŋ bágay na iyòn na pára ŋ bitúka naŋ manòk. Naŋ itò y mapútol ay may kumalabòg sa tabì naŋ báhay. Nanáog siya at doòn ay nàkíta nya aŋ patày na aswàŋ. [40]

What the young man did was to walk up to the upright corpse and, with the bolo he was carrying, cut the thing that was like the intestine of a chicken. When he had cut this, something came down with a thud at the side of the house. He went down, and there he saw the dead vampire. [41]
[Contents]

11. Aŋ maŋkukúlam.

11. Sorcerers.

Sa ilà ŋ poòk sa Filipínas ay may lubòs na paniniwálà sa maŋkukúlam aŋ maŋa táo. Áyon sa kanila ŋ paniwálaʾ aŋ maŋkukúlam ay isa ŋ táo ŋ may malakì ŋ kapaŋyaríhan at aŋ kapaŋyaríha ŋ 5itò y gáliŋ sa dimóniyo o kayà y mána sa magúlaŋ. Bágo màkamtàn aŋ kapaŋyaríha ŋ iyòn aŋ isà ay dápat múna ŋ makipagkayibígan at magsilbè sa dimóniyo. Dátapwat may ilan dì ŋ nanìniwála ŋ nàpùpúlot o naàágaw aŋ kapaŋyaríha ŋ iyòn sa gúbat o ilàŋ na lugàr na mahírap puntahàn at karanyúwa y pinagkàkatakutàn. 10

In some places in the Philippines the people have a firm belief in sorcerers. According to their belief a sorcerer is a person of great power, and this power comes from a demon or else is inherited from one’s parents. Before one may gain this power one must first become friends with a demon and serve it. However, there are some also who believe that one may find or snatch up this power in a jungle or some uncanny place that is hard to reach and usually full of terror.

Aŋ kúlam ay siyà ŋ naàágaw, nàmàmána, o ibiníbigay naŋ dimóniyo, at iyò y sya ŋ pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ kapaŋyaríhan naŋ nagmème-áreʾ. Aŋ hitsúra naŋ kúlam ay hindí parè-parého. Kuŋ mìnsan ay isa ŋ batò o isa ŋ maníka ŋ maliìt at masamàʾ aŋ 15hitsúra. Kuŋ madilìm aŋ kúlam na itò y nagníniŋnìŋ na pára ŋ alitaptàp, dátapwat aŋ niŋnìŋ na itò y nawáwalà namàn pag inìbig naŋ kúlam. Aŋ kúlam at aŋ táo, káhit laláki o babáe, na nagàári sa kanyà ay hindí naghíhiwalày káhit isà ŋ sandalèʾ at káhit na sa pagpalígoʾ ay dinádala naŋ maŋkukúlam aŋ kanya ŋ kúlam. Dáhil díto aŋ 20maŋa táo ŋ mapagsyásat, pag íbig nilà ŋ màpagkilála kuŋ maŋkukúlam ŋàʾ o hindìʾ aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ kanila ŋ pinaghìhinaláan, ay sinùsubúkan nila itò sa kanyà ŋ pagpalígoʾ. Kuŋ hindí maíŋat at walà ŋ hinálà aŋ maŋkukúlam na syà y sinùsubúkan, kuŋ mínsan ay nagkàkapálad aŋ nanùnúbok na màkíta nya aŋ kúlam.

The kulam is that seized, inherited, or given by the demon, and it is the source of the possessor’s power. The appearance of the kulam is not always the same. Sometimes it is a stone or a small doll of ugly appearance. In the dark this kulam glows like a firefly, but this glow disappears when the kulam desires it. The kulam and the person, man or woman, who possesses it, do not separate even for a moment, and even when bathing the sorcerer carries his kulam. Therefore, curious people, when they wish to find out whether a person whom they suspect is really a sorcerer or not, watch him at his bath. If the sorcerer is not careful and has no suspicion that he is being watched, the watcher sometimes succeeds in seeing the kulam.

25Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay may kapaŋyaríhan dì ŋ itágoʾ sa loòb naŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn aŋ kúlam, at hindi bihíraʾ aŋ maŋa táo ŋ nakàkíta naŋ maŋkukúlam sa kanya ŋ pagkamatày. Sa kàhulì-hulíha ŋ sandalìʾ, bágo malagòt aŋ hiniŋà, inilúluwa nilà aŋ kúlam.

The sorcerer has also the power of concealing the kulam inside his body, and the people are not rare who have seen a sorcerer at his death. At the last moment, before breathing ceases, he spits out the kulam.

30Itò y naŋyàyári lámaŋ kuŋ áyaw ipamána naŋ maŋkukúlam aŋ kanyà ŋ kúlam. Kuŋ ipinamàmána namàn itò, malwat pà bágo mamatày aŋ maŋkukúlam ay tinàtáwag na nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ íbig pamanáhan, at díto y líhim na líhim nya ŋ ibiníbigay aŋ kúlam.

This happens only when the sorcerer does not wish to bequeath his kulam. If, however, he wishes to bequeath it, then, long before the sorcerer dies, he calls the person to whom he wishes to bequeath it and in all secrecy gives him the kulam.

35Aŋ malakì ŋ kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam ay ginàgámit nya lában sa kanya ŋ maŋa kaáway, sa maŋa táo ŋ kanyà ŋ kinagàgalítan, o kayà y sa maŋa háyop nilà, kuŋ siya nyà ŋ íbig paŋhigantihàn. Gayon dìn ginàgámit nya aŋ kanya ŋ kapaŋyaríhan sa paŋbibíroʾ sa isa ŋ táo o háyop na kanya ŋ màkatwaàn.

The great power of the sorcerer is used by him against his enemies, against people who have incurred his anger; or against their live stock, in case he wishes to make this latter the object of his vengeance. He also uses his power in playing jokes on a person or animal that has gained his liking.

40Aŋ kanyà ŋ pinasàsakítan kadalasà y nagáanyo ŋ pára ŋ ulòl. Kuŋ mínsan aŋ kanya ŋ kinùkúlam ay dumádaiŋ na masakìt aŋ kanya ŋ buò ŋ katawàn, nagsísisigàw, at hindí màtahímik káhit [42]isà ŋ sandalèʾ. Sa háyop namàn karanyúwa y aŋ bábuy na pinakamahalagà sa may áriʾ, aŋ kanya ŋ ibiníbigay na parúsa ay gáya naŋ sakìt na kólera, dátapuwat lálu ŋ mabagsìk káy sa ríto. Aŋ pagdumì naŋ háyop ay wala ŋ patìd, at pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ óras, 5káhit na gáno katabàʾ aŋ háyop, ay nagígiŋ butò t balàt. Aŋ táo ŋ nàkùkúlam nya ay malakàs kumáin, katimbàŋ naŋ dalawà katáo, at mapaŋhilìŋ naŋ masasaràp na pagkáin. Dáhil díto aŋ paniwála naŋ maŋa táo y kasálo ŋ kumàkáin naŋ máy sakit aŋ maŋkukúlam na nagpàparúsa sa kanyà.

His victim usually acts like crazy. Sometimes the person he has bewitched complains that his whole body is sore, keeps shouting, and cannot keep quiet even for a moment. In the case of animals,—usually the pig most valued by the owner,—the punishment he gives is like the disease of cholera, but more severe than this. The bowel-movement of the animal does not stop, and after a few hours, no matter how fat the animal, it becomes skin and bone. The bewitched person eats mightily, like two men, and keeps asking for tasty food. Therefore people believe that the sorcerer who is punishing him shares in the eating of the sick person. [43]

10Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay may kapaŋyaríha ŋ pumaloòb sa katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kinùkúlam. Itò y sya ŋ paniwálaʾ, dátapuwat kuŋ papáno aŋ paraàn naŋ pagpások naŋ maŋkukúlam at kuŋ saàn sya pumàpások sa katawàn naŋ kanya ŋ kinùkúlam ay walà ŋ nakààalàm. Ŋúnit aŋ kanya ŋ nilàlabasàn ay aŋ hintutúroʾ. Aŋ 15bágay na itò ay malakì ŋ kabuluhàn úkol sa paggamòt sa nàkùkúlam at gayon dìn sa pagpaparúsa sa maŋkukúlam.

The sorcerer has the power of entering the body of the person bewitched. This is the belief, but in what way the sorcerer effects his entrance or at what point he enters the body of the person he is bewitching, there is no one who knows. However the place where he comes out is the forefinger. This fact is of great importance for the cure of people who have been bewitched and also for the punishment of sorcerers.

Káhit na malakì aŋ kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam ay mayroon dìn sya ŋ kinatàtakútan, karanyúwa y aŋ maŋa táo ŋ malalakàs, matápaŋ, at wala ŋ paniwálà sa kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam 20at iba pà ŋ pinagkàkatakutàn naŋ maŋa iba ŋ táo. Dáhil díto y hindí bihíraʾ na aŋ isà ŋ táo y pamagatà ŋ “médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam” pagkaraàn naŋ úna o ikalawà nya ŋ pagpapagalìŋ naŋ táo sa sakìt na itò.

Although the power of the sorcerer is great, yet there are some things which he fears, usually strong people who are bold and have no faith in the powers of sorcerers and other things that terrify other people. Therefore it is not rare that, after the first or second time he cures a person of this disease, some man receives the title of “witch-doctor.”

Mínsan ay nárinig ko ŋ magbalítaʾ aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ nakàkíta 25naŋ paŋgagamòt naŋ táo ŋ nàkùkúlam. Aŋ táo ŋ itò y may isa ŋ kápit-báhay na may anàk na dalága. Sa dalága ŋ itò y marámi ŋ maŋlilígaw, at aŋ isà sa kanilà y pinaghìhinaláa ŋ maŋkukúlam. Sa kasamaà-ŋ-pálad nitò ay nagìŋ isa syà sa maŋa hindí nátaŋgàp. Sa malakì nya ŋ gálit ay magkasunòd nya ŋ kinúlam aŋ babáye 30at laláki ŋ magkaìbígan.

I once heard someone who had seen the cure of a bewitched person tell the story. The narrator had a neighbor who had a young daughter. This young lady had many suitors, and one of them was suspected of being a sorcerer. He had the bad fortune to be one of those who were not accepted. In his great anger he bewitched, one after the other, the betrothed man and woman.

Inúna nya aŋ babáye at ito namà y agàd na itináwag naŋ médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam naŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ médiko at nàkíta nya aŋ máy sakìt, ay sinábi nya ŋ nàkùkúlam ŋàʾ aŋ babáye.

He began with the woman, and her parents at once called in a witch-doctor for her. When the doctor arrived and saw the patient, he said that the woman was really bewitched.

35Sinábi nya sa maŋa táo doòn na hwàg paàaláman sa nàkùkúlam na syà y nàròroòn sa báhay. Pag itò y nàláman naŋ máy sakìt, ay màlàláman dìn naŋ maŋkukúlam na nása loòb naŋ kanya ŋ katawàn, at makaáalis agàd aŋ maŋkukúlam. Aŋ médiko y lumápit na hindí nàmaláyan naŋ babáye, at pagdáka y tinaŋnan 40nyà naŋ mahigpìt aŋ dalawà ŋ hintutúroʾ naŋ babáye. Itò y lálo ŋ inilakàs aŋ pagsigàw, at kuminìg na pára ŋ isa ŋ natàtákot.

He told the people who were there not to let the bewitched person know that he was in the house. If the patient knew this, the sorcerer who was inside her body would have a chance to go away at once. The doctor went up to the woman without her being aware of it and suddenly seized her two forefingers in a tight grip. She shouted all the louder and trembled like one in terror.

Aŋ maŋkukúlam, áyon sa paniwálà naŋ maŋa táo, ay sya ŋ nakàràramdàm naŋ ano mà ŋ pasákit na ibigày sa katawàn naŋ [44]kanyà ŋ kinùkúlam hábaŋ sya y násàsa loòb naŋ katawàn nitò. Gayon dìn, kuŋ kausápin aŋ máy sakìt, ay siyà aŋ sumásagòt.

The sorcerer, according to people’s belief, feels any pain that is given to the body of the person he is bewitching while he is within the latter’s body. Likewise, when one speaks with the patient, it is he who answers.

Dáhil díto y itinanòŋ pagdáka naŋ médiko: “Anò aŋ ginágawá mo ríto, salbáhe?”

Therefore the doctor suddenly asked: “What are you doing here, you brute?”

5Aŋ máy sakit ay hindí kumibòʾ, dátapwat nagpílit na magkawalàʾ. Aŋ ipinakíta nya ŋ lakàs ay hindí karanyúwa ŋ lakàs naŋ babáye.

The patient did not utter a word, but tried to get free. The strength she displayed was not the usual strength of a woman.

Dátapuwat hindí sya pinawalàn naŋ médiko, at itò y tumanòŋ na mulìʾ: “Anò aŋ ginágawá mo ríto? Bákit ka naparíto? 10Pag hindí ka sumagòt, ay pahìhirápan kità.”

But the doctor did not let her go, and asked her again: “What are you doing here? Why have you come here? If you do not answer, I shall torture you.”

Aŋ babáye ay nagmàmakaáwa ŋ sumagòt: “Walá poʾ, hindí na poʾ úulèʾ, pawalan pòʾ ninyo akò, at akò y nahìhirápan nà.”

The woman answered in a pitiful tone: “No, sir, I shan’t do it again; let me go, sir; you are torturing me already.”

“Pawalàn kità?” itinanòŋ agàd naŋ médiko, “Maŋákù ka múna sa ákin na hindí ka na bábalik.”

“Shall I let you go?” asked the doctor at once. “Promise me first that you won’t come back.” [45]

15“Hindí na pòʾ akò bábalik,” aŋ sagòt naŋ babáye.

“No, I shan’t come back, sir,” answered the woman.

“Pag nàhúle kità ulèʾ díto, ay pàpatayìn kità. Hwag kà ŋ salbáhe. Tumahímik ka sa iyò ŋ báhay.”

“If I catch you here again, I shall kill you. Don’t be troublesome. Stay still in your house.”

“Ó poʾ, ó poʾ, hindí na pòʾ akò bábalik. Pawalàn na pò ninyo akò!”

“Yes, sir; yes, sir; I shan’t come back, sir. Please, let me go!”

20Hábaŋ aŋ sàlitáa ŋ itò y naŋyàyári aŋ babáye ay nagpìpílit na magkawalàʾ, íbig nya ŋ mabitíwan naŋ médiko aŋ kanya ŋ hintutúroʾ. Pagkapaŋáko naŋ babáye ay binitíwan naŋ médiko aŋ dalawà nya ŋ hintutúroʾ. Aŋ mukhá naŋ babáye na dáti ay nagpàpakilála naŋ malakì ŋ paghihírap ŋayò y nàhúsay, at sya y 25pára ŋ gága na pinagsa-ulàn naŋ pagiísip. Sya ay tumahímik, pinútol aŋ pagsisigàw, at nàkaúsap naŋ matwìd.

While this dialogue was taking place, the woman was struggling to get loose and trying to make the doctor let go of her forefingers. When the woman had made her promise, the doctor let go of her two forefingers. The face of the woman, which just before had been expressing great suffering, now became quiet, and she was like a madwoman who has got back her reason. She became quiet, stopped shouting, and was able to converse intelligently.

Aŋ laláki namàn ay nàtìtirà sa isa ŋ báya ŋ malápit. Naŋ sya y kinùkúlam nà ay itináwag sya naŋ maŋgagámot naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd na laláke. Sa kalakhàn naŋ gálit naŋ kapatìd na ytò 30ay sya nyà ŋ tináwag aŋ maŋgagamòt na mabagsìk at malupìt sa pagtaráto nya sa maŋà maŋkukúlam.

The man lived in a near-by town. When he was bewitched his brother called a physician for him. In his extreme anger, this brother called a physician who was fierce and cruel in his treatment of sorcerers.

Líhim na dumatìŋ aŋ maŋgagámot sa báhay naŋ máy sakìt. Mulá sa kanya ŋ kublíhan ay piního múna nya kuŋ aŋ maŋkukúlam ay násàsa katawàn ŋàʾ naŋ máy sakìt. Itò y nàpagkìkilála 35sa pagsisigàw, pagkílos, at pananalità ŋ hindí tulà-tulàʾ naŋ máy sakìt. Aŋ maŋgagamòt ay nagpatalìm naŋ isà ŋ gúlok at pagkatápos ay maligsì sya ŋ tumakbò sa tabì naŋ máy sakìt. Tinaŋnan nyà aŋ dalawà ŋ hintutúro nitò, dinaganàn nya aŋ katawàn, at tinagá nya ŋ makáilan aŋ mukhá naŋ máy 40sakìt. Itò y nagsisigàw at nagkawalàʾ, dátapwat naŋ makawalá sya y may maŋa súgat na aŋ kanyà ŋ mukhàʾ at aŋ dugò y umàágos na wala ŋ patìd. Walà ŋ kibú sya iníwan naŋ maŋgagamòt. Hinánap nitò aŋ kapatìd naŋ sugatàn at kanya ŋ sinábi [46]na hwag pansinìn aŋ maŋa súgat naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd, at kinàbukása y mawáwalaʾ iyòn at màlìlípat sa maŋkukúlam, sapagkàt dinatnàn nya itò sa katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd. Kinàbukásan ay pinarunàn naŋ médiko aŋ kanya ŋ ginamòt naŋ patalìm, at 5malakì aŋ tuwá nya naŋ itò y màkíta nya ŋ mahúsay at wala ŋ bakas-súgat sa mukhàʾ. Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ áraw nàbalitáan nilà na isa ŋ maŋkukúlam sa kápit-báyan nilà ay malubhàʾ aŋ lagày dahilàn sa pagdudugò ŋ hindí maampàt naŋ maŋa súgat nya sa mukhàʾ.

The physician came secretly to the sick man’s house. From his hiding-place he first determined at what time the sorcerer was in the body of the sick man. This showed itself in the shouting, movements, and senseless talking of the patient. The physician sharpened a bolo-knife and, when he had done this, quickly ran to the side of the patient. He then seized the latter’s two forefingers, leaned over his body, and cut several deep gashes in his face. The patient screamed and tried to get away, but when he did get away there were wounds in his face and the blood was flowing in a stream. The physician left him without a word. He sought out the brother of the wounded man and told him not to heed his brother’s wounds, for tomorrow they would go away and be transferred to the sorcerer, for it was the latter whom he had reached in the body of his brother. On the next day the doctor went to the man whom he had cured with the knife and was much pleased when he found him well and without the marks of wounds in his face. A few days later they heard that a sorcerer in the neighboring town was in a serious condition, owing to the unceasing flow of blood from some wounds in his face.

10Máy-roon dìn namà ŋ maŋkukúlam na maligsì at hindí na paaábot sa maŋgagamòt. Aŋ maŋgagamòt namàn ay kinàkayiláŋa ŋ bihásaʾ at maligsì. Aŋ káhit síno y maàári ŋ gumamòt sa isà ŋ nàkùkúlam, yámaŋ walá namà ŋ ibà ŋ paŋgamòt kuŋ hindìʾ aŋ pagpapahìrap sa katawàn naŋ nàkùkúlam. 15Dátapuwat malakì aŋ paŋánib, sapagkàt, kuŋ hindí maligsì, dahilàn sa kawalàn naŋ sánay, aŋ gumágamòt, maàári ŋ makawalàʾ aŋ maŋkukúlam. Kuŋ magkágayo y aŋ nàkùkúlam mìsmo aŋ maghìhírap dahilàn sa parúsa. Mínsan ay máy nàbalíta ŋ naŋyári na gáya nitò ŋ sumúsunòd.

There are also, however, some sorcerers who are quick and have not been caught by physicians. The physician, too, must be skilful and quick. Anyone at all can cure a person who has been bewitched, since there is no other method of cure than that of inflicting pain on the body of the bewitched person. The danger, however, is great, since, if the one who is attempting the cure is not quick, owing to lack of practice, the sorcerer will be able to get away. In this event it is the bewitched person himself who will suffer from the punishment. It is related that there once happened something like this which follows.

20Aŋ isà sa dalawà ŋ magkapatìd na laláki ay kinúlam naŋ kanya ŋ karibàl sa paglígaw. Walà ŋ màtáwag na médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam. Sa malakì ŋ áwà sa kanyà naŋ kanya ŋ kúya ay tinalagà nitò ŋ gamutìn sya káhit na walá sya ŋ pagkasánay. Hindí ŋá sya sanày, dátapwat madalàs nya ŋ nàpakiŋgàn sa 25maŋa maŋgagamòt aŋ paraàn naŋ paggamòt. Isa ŋ hápon, naŋ inakálà nya ŋ nása loòb na namàn naŋ katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd aŋ maŋkukúlam, ay sinuŋgabàn nya agàd aŋ isa ŋ gúlok at pagkálapit nyà sa kanya ŋ kapatìd ay tinagá nya itò naŋ walà ŋ tuòs. Kinàbukásan sa lugàr naŋ màkíta nya ŋ magalìŋ at wala 30ŋ súgat aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd itò y baŋkày na lámaŋ. Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay nakawalàʾ.

One of two brothers was bewitched by his rival in courtship. There [47]was no witch-doctor within call. In his great pity for him, the older brother decided to cure him, even though he had had no practice. He was not practised, to be sure, but he had often heard from physicians the manner of cure. One evening, when he thought that the sorcerer was inside his brother’s body, he quickly seized a bolo, and, stepping up to his brother, cut him without care. On the next day, instead of his finding his brother well and unwounded, the latter was a corpse. The sorcerer had got away.
[Contents]

12. Aŋ laro ŋ sípaʾ sa Filipínas.

12. The game of football in the Philippines.

Aŋ laro ŋ sípà sa Estádos-Unídos at sa Filipínas ay lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ pagkakáibà. Sa lugàr naŋ dalawà ŋ paŋkàt na nagtàtálo 35aŋ nagsìsipaglaròʾ na gáya naŋ fùtbol, sa sípà ay isà ŋ paŋkàt lámaŋ aŋ naglálaròʾ. Sa sípà aŋ haŋàd naŋ nagsìsipaglarò ay hindí aŋ talúnin aŋ isa ŋ kaáway, dátapuwat aŋ huwàg bayáa ŋ lumagpàk sa lúpà aŋ bóla o sípaʾ.

Aŋ bóla ŋ gámit ay malakì ŋ malaki rìn aŋ kaibhàn. Itò y 40nayàyárì naŋ yantòk na tinilàd at nilála ŋ pabilòg. Walà ŋ [48]lamàn aŋ loòb, at aŋ maŋa matà naŋ sulihiyà ay malalakè. Dáhil díto ay magaàn aŋ sípaʾ, hindí gáya naŋ bòla ŋ gámit sa bèsbol.

The games of football in the United States and in the Philippines are very different. Instead of the players belonging to two contending sides, as in American football, in “sipa” the players form but one party. In sipa the aim of the players is not to defeat an opponent, but to prevent the ball or sipa from falling to the ground. The ball used is also very different. It is made of split rattan woven into the shape of a sphere. The inside is hollow and the eyes of the weave are large. Therefore the sipa, unlike the ball used in baseball, is light. [49]

Mulá sa dalawà haŋgàŋ sa dalawà ŋ pùʾ aŋ bílaŋ naŋ nagsìsipaglaròʾ. Kuŋ silà ay marámi aŋ áyos ay pabilòg. Úpaŋ umpisahàn 5aŋ paglalaròʾ isà sa maŋa kasále ay ihiníhitsà aŋ sípa na paitaàs at patúŋo sa isà sa maŋa nagsìsipaglaròʾ, karanyúwa y sa isà ŋ katapàt nyà. Aŋ táo ŋ hinitsahàn naŋ sípaʾ ay ipinabábalik itò sa naghágis sa kanyà, hindí naŋ kanya ŋ kamày, dátapwat naŋ kanya ŋ paà.

The number of players is from two to twenty. When they are many, they stand in a circle. To begin the game, one of the party throws the sipa ball up into the air and toward one of the players, usually toward one opposite him. The one to whom the ball is tossed returns it to the one who threw it to him, not with his hand, but with his foot.

10Kuŋ aŋ maŋa nagsìsipaglarò ay marurúnoŋ, napapúpunta nilà aŋ pelóta sa káhit na síno sa maŋa kasále, kayà t báwat isà sa kanilà ay nakaabàŋ at naghíhintay naŋ pagdatìŋ naŋ sípaʾ. Aŋ báwat isà ay nagìíŋat na hwàg bayáa ŋ lumagpàk sa lúpa aŋ pelóta. Kadalasàn aŋ maŋa nagsísipaglarò ay nagpàpakíta naŋ 15sarì-sári ŋ áyus naŋ pagsípaʾ. Aŋ maŋa magandà ŋ pagbabaluktòt naŋ paà sa harapàn o likuràn, aŋ maligsì at magaà ŋ lundàg, aŋ banáyad at magaà ŋ pagsípà sa pelóta, at aŋ pagpapadalà naŋ sípà sa káhit na alì ŋ bandà ay maŋa bágay na nagpàpagandà sa laro ŋ sípaʾ. Hindi rìn bihíra na aŋ balíkat, aŋ síko, aŋ túhod, o 20aŋ kamày ay sya ŋ ginàgámit sa pagpapabalìk naŋ pelóta.

When the players are skilful, they direct the ball to each one of the party, so that each one of them is alert and ready for the coming of the ball. Each one is careful not to let the ball fall to the ground. Often the players display various manners of sending the ball. The graceful bendings of the legs forward and backward, the quick and light leaps, the gentle and light kicking of the ball, and the sending of the ball in every possible direction, are features which give beauty to the game of sipa. Sometimes the shoulder, the elbow, the knee, or the hand is used in returning the ball.

Papáno aŋ pagkakatalò sa larò ŋ itò? Itò y maàári lámaŋ sa pagpapàtagálan naŋ hindí paglagpàk naŋ sípà sa lúpaʾ.

How is there any contest in this game? This can consist only in the test of endurance in keeping the ball from falling to the ground.

Kuŋ halimbáwa y íbig makipaglában naŋ isa ŋ paŋkàt naŋ maŋa màninípa o sipéros sa ybà ŋ paŋkàt, aŋ úna y maŋhàhámon 25sa alin mà ŋ paŋkàt na kanila ŋ màpíleʾ. Kuŋ itò y taŋgapìn, aŋ áraw, óras, at lugàr naŋ paglalarò ay agad nà ŋ nàbàbalíta sa maŋa pàhayagàn.

When, for instance, one team of football-players or siperos wants to contend with another team, the former challenges whatever team it has picked out. If the challenge is accepted, the day, hour, and place of the game are at once announced in the newspapers.

Sa óras naŋ paglalaròʾ ay hindí íilan lámaŋ na líbo ŋ táo aŋ nagsísipanoòd. Aŋ maŋhahámun karanyúwa y umùúpa naŋ 30isa ŋ bànda-ŋ-músika at tinùtugtugàn aŋ báwat paŋkàt sa kanilà ŋ paglalaròʾ. Karanyúwa y dalawà ŋ bànda aŋ músika, sapagkàt, kuŋ aŋ hinámon ay may kauntì ŋ gílas, ay íbig dìn namàn nilà ŋ ipakíta, at dáhil díto y nagdádala silà naŋ saríle nilà ŋ bànda naŋ músika.

At the time of the game thousands of people look on. The challenging party usually hires a band of musicians, and each team is played for during its innings. Usually there are two bands, for, if the challenged party has any pride, it wants to show it and so brings its own band.

35Pagkaraàn naŋ laròʾ aŋ hukòm ay syà ŋ nagpàpaháyag sa maŋa nanúnoòd kuŋ alì ŋ paŋkàt aŋ nanálo. Pagkárinig nilà naŋ paháyag naŋ hukòm ay agad-agàd inùumpisahàn aŋ pagisìgáwan at maŋa pagpúri sa nanálo ŋ paŋkàt. Aŋ mànanalò ŋ paŋkàt at aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa kaybígan magkakasáma ŋ tinùtugtugàn naŋ 40kanila ŋ bànda naŋ músika ay agàd-agàd na nagpàpaséyo sa maŋa lugàr na malápit sa kanilà ŋ pinaglaruàn. Kinàbukásan aŋ lahàt naŋ naŋyári ay nàkìkíta sa maŋa pàhayagàn.

After the game the judge announces to the spectators which team has won. When the announcement of the judge has been heard, there begins at once the yelling and the honoring of the victorious team. The winning team and their friends and followers, accompanied by the music of their band, at once begin to parade through the places near to the field of the game. On the next day the whole story appears in the newspapers.

Aŋ ganitò ŋ maŋa paglalarò naŋ sípa ay hindí karanyúwan [50]sa maŋa báya ŋ maliliìt sa provìnsiya, dátapuwat sa malalakì lámaŋ na báyan, gáya naŋ Maynílaʾ at iba pà.

Such games of sipa as these are not common in the little towns in the provinces, but only in the large cities, such as Manila. [51]
[Contents]

13. Aŋ kúra ŋ si Patúpat.

13. The priest Patupat.

Sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay máy-roo ŋ nagtirà ŋ isa ŋ táo noò ŋ 5maŋa hulì ŋ áraw naŋ panahòn naŋ Kastìlaʾ. Aŋ táo ŋ itò y nagáral at sa kanya ŋ katalinúhan ay nàintindihan nyà aŋ maŋa masamà ŋ palákad naŋ maŋa kúra na sya ŋ maŋa maliliìt na háre sa kanila ŋ bayàn-bayàn.

In the last years of the Spanish time there dwelt in the town of San Miguel a certain man. This man was educated and was intelligent enough to understand the evil ways of the priests, who were really little kings in their towns.

Sa San-Migèl aŋ kúra ŋ nàdistíno ay isa ŋ mabagsìk at maínit 10aŋ úlo. Aŋ táwag sa kanyà naŋ maŋa táo ay “si Patúpat.”

In San Miguel the priest who had the parish was a violent and hot-headed man. The people called him “Patupat.”

Isa ŋ liŋgo aŋ táwu ŋ nábaŋgìt sa itaàs nitò ay naparoòn sa simbáhan úpaŋ makinìg naŋ sèrmon naŋ páreʾ. Sapagkàt aŋ pári ŋ itò ay nagakála ŋ maŋa walà ŋ pinagarálan aŋ kanyà ŋ sinèsèrmunan ay hindí sya nagpílit na makapagsalità ŋ matwìd naŋ 15Tagálog. Aŋ kanya ŋ pananalitàʾ ay walà ŋ púno t dúlo, at halù-hálo ŋ pára ŋ kalámay. Gayon dìn aŋ kanya ŋ isinèsèrmun ay hindí nàìibà sa infiyèrno, purgatóriyo, maŋa salbáhi ŋ táo-ŋ-báyan, at katapusàn naŋ mundò.

One Sunday the man above mentioned went to church to hear the sermon of the priest. As this priest thought that the people to whom he was preaching were uneducated people, he took no pains to speak Tagalog correctly. His speech had neither beginning nor end and was mixed up like rice-pudding. Moreover, what he preached about was never other than Hell, Purgatory, what brutes the people of the town were, and the End of the World.

Naŋ aŋ sèrmon nya ay nagumpisa nà, pumások sa simbáhan 20aŋ áti ŋ kaybíga ŋ si Pransìsko.

When the sermon began, our friend Francisco entered the church.

Gáya naŋ karanyúwan inumpisahàn naŋ kúra aŋ kanya ŋ sèrmon sa ganitò ŋ pananalitàʾ: “Manà kapatìr-konkristyános!”

May ápat na pu ŋ taòn na sya sa lúpa ŋ Katagalúgan, ay hindí pa nya nàtutúha ŋ sabíhi ŋ matwìd aŋ “Maŋà kapatìd-Koŋkristyános.” 25

As usual, the priest began his sermon with this utterance: “Brezren and faylow-Christiannes!” Although he had been for almost forty years now in the Tagalog country, he had not yet learned to say correctly “Brethren and fellow-Christians.”

Si Pransìsko ay nàtàtayú sa isa ŋ lugàr na malápit sa pùlpito, pinakiŋgàn nya ŋ mabúte aŋ sèrmon na noò y wala ŋ ibà kuŋ hindí aŋ makàlìlíbo nà ŋ inúlit naŋ pári ŋ itò, at iyò y úkul sa maŋa hírap sa infiyèrno at purgatóriyo at pagtutúlus naŋ kandílaʾ 30at pagbibigày naŋ kwàlta sa simbáhan úpaŋ màligtasàn aŋ maŋa hírap na iyòn. Si Pransìsko ay siniglàn naŋ malakì ŋ gálit, sapagkàt nàpagkilála nya na nilòlóko naŋ páre aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa táo, at walá sya ŋ ibà ŋ pákay kuŋ hindí aŋ takútin lámaŋ aŋ maŋa namàmáyan úpaŋ kanilà ŋ payamánin aŋ simbáhan at maŋa 35kúra.

Francisco stood in a place near the pulpit and listened carefully to the sermon, which on that day contained nothing except what had already been a thousand times repeated by the priest, namely about the sufferings in Hell and Purgatory, the offering of candles and the giving of money to the church in order to escape from these sufferings.

Francisco was filled with great anger, for he saw that the priest was fooling his people and had no other aim than to frighten the townspeople so that they should enrich the church and priests.

Pagkaraàn naŋ sèrmon ay hindí umwé si Kíko na gáya naŋ karanyúwan, dátapuwat hinantày nya ŋ matápus aŋ mísa. Pagkaraàn nitò y nagpáiwan syà sa simbáhan. Kumúha sya naŋ maŋa papèl at sumúlat sya sa páre naŋ ganitò:

After the sermon Kiko did not go home as usual, but waited until mass was over. After mass he staid in the church until he was alone. He took some pieces of paper and wrote to the priest as follows:

40“Ámoŋ, nárinìg ko pòʾ aŋ inyu ŋ sèrmon kanína ŋ umága. [52]Nàpagkìkilála ko na kayò y nanìniwála ŋ may infiyèrno at may purgatóriyo. Akò y walà ŋ paniwála díto. Sa liŋgo ŋ dáratiŋ, kuŋ íbig mo, prubahàn mo sa iyo ŋ sèrmon sa maŋa táo na máy-roo ŋ infyèrno at purgatóriyo. Pagkatápos pùprubahàn kò namàn 5sa kanilà na walà ŋ infiyèrno ni purgatóriyo. Kuŋ ikàw aŋ paniwaláan naŋ maŋa táo hindí báli ŋ ipabítay mo akò dahilàn sa áki ŋ pagkatálo at hindí paniniwálaʾ. Dátapuwat, kuŋ akò y manálo aŋ hiníhiliŋ ko lámaŋ sa iyò ay pabayaàn mo akò ŋ makapagsábi sa madlàʾ na walà ŋ infyèrno ni purgatóryo.”

“Father, I heard your sermon this morning. It is apparent to me that you believe that there is a Hell and that there is a Purgatory. I do not believe in these things. Next Sunday, if you wish, you may prove to the people in your sermon that there is a Hell and a Purgatory. When you are done, I shall try to prove to them that there is no Hell and no Purgatory. If the people believe you, I do not mind if you have me hanged for my defeat and my unbelief, but, if I am the victor, [53]all I ask of you is to allow me to say to the people at large that there is neither a Hell nor a Purgatory.”

10Aŋ ilà ŋ kópya naŋ súlat na ytò ay idinikìt nya sa maŋa padèr naŋ simbáhan at aŋ isà y ipinaabòt nya sa kúra.

Several copies of this letter he pasted to the walls of the church, and one he sent to the priest.

Naŋ itò y màbása ni Patúpat sumubò aŋ kanya ŋ dugòʾ, at walà ŋ pagkàsyahàn aŋ kanya ŋ gálit. Ipinatáwag nya aŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sibìl, at sa gabi dìn naŋ liŋgò ŋ iyòn ay pinapanhikàn 15at pinahanápan nya aŋ maŋa bahày-bahày sa boo ŋ báyan, úpaŋ hulíhin si Kíkoʾ. Dátapuwat si Kíko ay hindí nila nàhúle. Naŋ hápon dì ŋ iyòn ay ibinalíta ni Kíko sa ilàn nya ŋ matálik na kaybígan aŋ kanyà ŋ ginawàʾ, at silà y naŋàpamaŋhàʾ. Itinanòŋ nilà kuŋ bákit niya ginawá iyòn at kuŋ hindí nya napagkùkúro 20aŋ maŋyàyári sa kanyà.

When Patupat read it, his blood boiled and his anger knew no bounds. He had the gendarmes called, and on the evening of that very Sunday he had all the houses in the town entered and searched, so as to catch Kiko. But they did not catch Kiko. That same afternoon Kiko told some of his intimate friends what he had done, and they were all astonished. They asked him why he had done this thing and whether he could not see what would happen to him.

Aŋ isà sa kanilà y nagsábi naŋ ganitò: “Magbalòt ka nà naŋ damìt, at umalìs ka ŋayon dìn, kuŋ hindí mo gustò ŋ màhúli ka naŋ maŋa sundálo ni Patúpat at maipabarìl ka kinàbukásan.”

One of them spoke thus: “Pack up some clothes and go away right now, if you don’t want to be caught by Patupat’s soldiers and shot tomorrow.”

Si Kíko ay áyaw sumunòd sa kanyà ŋ páyo, sapagkàt inakálà 25nya ŋ tàtaŋgapìn ni Patúpat aŋ kanya ŋ hámon tuŋkòl sa pagpapakilála sa maŋa táo na walà ŋ infiyèrno ni purgatóriyo at aŋ maŋa itò y paŋhúle lámaŋ naŋ maŋa páre naŋ kwàlta. Kanyá sya y nagpaábot naŋ gabì sa báhay naŋ isa nyà ŋ kaybígan.

Kiko refused to follow his advice, because he thought that Patupat would accept his challenge about showing the people that there was neither a Hell nor a Purgatory and that these things were merely a device of the priests for getting money. Therefore he allowed himself to be overtaken by night in the house of a friend of his.

Naŋ dumilim nà at aŋ báya y nagúgulo dahilàn sa paghahanàp 30naŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sibìl ay saká pa lámaŋ nya nàpagkilála aŋ malakì ŋ paŋánib na kanyà ŋ kinàbìbiŋítan. Sapagkàt itò y nàbalitáan nya agàd, kanyá nagkaroòn sya naŋ panahò ŋ makapagtágo sa isa ŋ líhim na súlok sa báhay naŋ kanya ŋ kaybígan.

Not until it was dark and the town was upset with the searchings of the gendarmes did he recognize the great danger which he was incurring. Since he had heard of this at once, he had time to hide in a secret corner of his friend’s house.

Naŋ makaraàn aŋ maŋa paghahanapàn sya y lumabàs sa 35kanya ŋ taguàn, umwí sya, nagbalòt naŋ ilà ŋ damìt, nagpasiŋkàw naŋ isa ŋ karumáta, at pagkakúha nya naŋ maŋa bála naŋ barìl, binitbìt nya aŋ barìl, sumakày sya sa karumáta, at napahatìd sa labàs naŋ báyan. Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ áraw ay namundok syà, kasáma naŋ ilà ŋ maŋa táo-ŋ-báyan na hindí makatirà sa loòb 40naŋ báyan, sapagkàt nàkagalítan sila naŋ kúra o naŋ iba pà ŋ Kastíla ŋ may katuŋkúlan sa báyan.

When the house-searchings were over, he went out from his hiding place, went home, wrapped up some clothes, had a wagon hitched up, and, taking some rifle-bullets, shouldered his gun, got into the wagon, and had himself driven out of town. After a few days he went to the mountains together with several townsmen who could not stay in the town because they had incurred the anger of the priest or of some other Spanish official of the town.

Díto sa pamumundok nyà sya y inabútan naŋ paghihìmagsíkan lában sa maŋa Kastílaʾ naŋ taò ŋ isa ŋ líbo walo ŋ daàn walò ŋ pu t ánim. [54]

There, in his stay in the mountains, he was overtaken by the revolution against the Spaniards in the year 1886. [55]
[Contents]

14. Si Maryáno at aŋ pári ŋ si Patúpat.

14. Mariano and the priest Patupat.

Si Maryáno ay isà sa íila ŋ botikáriyo sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Sya y nagìŋ isà sa maŋa nasawi-ŋ-pálad dahilàn sa pagswày sa maŋa kautusàn naŋ kúra ŋ si Patúpat. Sya y may famíliya; 5bukòd sa asáwa ay may dalawà sya ŋ anàk, isà ŋ dadalawáhi ŋ taòn at isà ŋ kabàbágu ŋ paŋanàk pa lámaŋ.

Mariano was one of the very few apothecaries in the town of San Miguel. He was one of the people who fell into misfortune through disobeying the orders of the priest Patupat. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children, one two years old and one new-born.

Isa ŋ áraw aŋ kanyà ŋ alíla ay nagkasakìt. Sya y may bayàw na médiko, kanyá aŋ alílaʾ ay ipinagamùt nya díto na walà ŋ báyad, at aŋ gamòt namàn ay ibinigày nya na walà ŋ báyad 10sa alílaʾ. Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ilà ŋ áraw ay gumalìŋ aŋ alílaʾ at itò y nagakála ŋ magpahiŋà ŋ sandalìʾ sa búkid. Kanyàʾ binayáran nya aŋ kanya ŋ útaŋ at napaálam sya kay Maryáno úpaŋ magtirà sa búkid. Hindí nalaúnan aŋ pagtitira nyà sa búkid at aŋ alíla ŋ itò y nagkasakìt na mulìʾ, at aŋ nagiŋ dúlo y aŋ kanya ŋ 15pagkamatày.

One day his servant fell sick. He had a brother-in-law who was a doctor, so he had him treat the servant without charge, and he gave the servant medicine without charge. After some days the servant got well and decided to rest for a while in the country. Accordingly he paid his debt and took his leave of Mariano for a stay in the country. His stay in the country did not last long, before he fell sick anew, and the end was his death.

Sa Filipínas naŋ maŋa panahò ŋ yaòn ay hindí maàári ŋ huwàg pabendisyunàn aŋ isa ŋ patày bágo mábaòn. Itò y hindí ipinahìhintúlot naŋ maŋa kúra, dátapuwat aŋ pagsasáma na hindí kasàl naŋ isa ŋ babáye at laláki ay hindí nila masyádo ŋ pinápansìn, 20palibhása y gawá rin namàn nilà.

In the Philippines in those days it was not allowable to bury a dead person without first having him blessed by a priest. The priests did not allow this, but they did not much mind the living together of a man and woman not married, for the reason that they did this themselves.

Aŋ patày na alílà ni Maryáno ay lubhà ŋ mahírap at aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa kamagának ay mahihírap dìn at walà ŋ ikakáya ŋ magbáyad sa halagà na sinísiŋìl ni Patúpat. Dáhil díto y walà ŋ magpabaòn sa katawàn naŋ alílaʾ.

The deceased servant of Mariano was very poor and his relatives also were poor and had not the means to pay the price demanded by Patupat. Thus there was no one to see to the burial of the servant’s body.

25Naŋ màláman itò ni Patúpat ay ipinatáwag nya si Maryáno at sinábi nya ŋ siyà aŋ dápat magpabaòn sa patày at siyà aŋ magbáyad naŋ gàstos. Sa akálà ni Maryáno ay lumálampàs aŋ kasalbahíhan ni Patúpat. Kanyá sinábi nya na hindi nyà sya bàbayáran sa pagbabaòn naŋ patày, káhit na anò aŋ maŋyáre.

When Patupat learned this, he had Mariano called and said that it was his place to have the dead man buried and to pay the costs. In Mariano’s opinion Patupat’s insolence was getting beyond bounds. Therefore he said that he would not pay him for the burying of the dead man, no matter what happened.

30Si Patúpat ay sinubhàn naŋ gálit. Ipinabaòn niya aŋ patày at sa áraw di ŋ iyòn ay naparoòn sya sa hùkúman at ipinagsakdàl nya si Mariyáno úpaŋ pagbayáran siyà naŋ gàstos sa pagbebendisyòn sa patày.

Patupat boiled with rage. He had the dead man buried and on the same day went to court and sued Mariano for the cost of blessing the dead man.

Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ paghuhùkúman si Maryáno y naparoòn at 35naŋ itinanòŋ naŋ hukòm kuŋ anò aŋ íbig nya ŋ sabíhin tuŋkòl sa sakdàl na iyòn, ay sinábi nya itò ŋ sumúsunòd:

When the session of the court came, Mariano was present, and when the judge asked what he had to say to this accusation, he spoke as follows:

“Ginoò ŋ Hwès, aŋ namatày na iyòn ay walá na sa áki ŋ kapaŋyaríhan, sapagkàt hindí ku nà sya alíla naŋ sya y namatày. Noo ŋ syà y máy sakit pa lámaŋ ay ipinagamòt ko syà ŋ wala ŋ 40báyad, at binigyàn ko syà ŋ wala ŋ báyad naŋ gamòt. Nagawá ku nà aŋ áki ŋ katuŋkúlan sa áki ŋ kápuwa táo at aŋ katuŋkúla ŋ iniyátas sa ákin ni Bathálaʾ. Isà sa maŋa katuŋkúlan naŋ [56]maŋa párèʾ ay aŋ magpabaòn naŋ maŋa patày. Ŋayò ŋ aŋ táo ŋ iyòn ay patay nà, bákit namàn hindí magawá naŋ pári ŋ itò aŋ kanya ŋ katuŋkúlan na walà ŋ úpa, yámaŋ ito namàn ay hindí maŋyàyári kuŋ may káya aŋ maŋa kamagának naŋ namatày?”

“Your Honor, this man who died was no longer in my care, for he was no longer my servant when he died. When he was still sick, I had him treated without charge and gave him medicine without charge. I have done my duty to my fellow-man and the duty placed upon me by the Lord. One of the duties of the priests is to provide burial for the dead. Now this man is dead, why cannot this priest do his duty without receiving pay, since even this would not happen, if the relatives of the deceased had means?”

5Pagkaraàn naŋ maŋa ilan pà ŋ maŋa tanòŋ naŋ hukòm sa kúra at kay Mariyáno ay tinápus nya aŋ paghuhùkúman, at ipinaháyag nya ŋ si Mariyáno ay nása katwíran at aŋ kúra y dápat magpasyènsya sa pagkábendisyon nyà naŋ patày na wala ŋ úpa.

After asking some further questions of the priest and of Mariano, the judge closed the hearing and announced that Mariano was in the right and that the priest would have to put up with having blessed the dead man without payment. [57]

Naŋ makaraàn itò y lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ gálit ni Patúpat kay 10Maryáno, at pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ áraw ay ipinagsakdàl niya ŋ mulí si Mariyáno. Ŋayòn ay iba namàn aŋ kanya ŋ sakdàl. Isinakdàl niya sa hùkúman na si Maryáno ay isà ŋ Masòn, sapagkàt sya y hindí nagsísimbà nì hindí naŋúŋumpisàl nì hindí rin nagmàmáno sa páreʾ. Aŋ maŋa Masòn ay kaáway naŋ Romanìsmo 15at sa makatwìd ay kaáway dìn naŋ pàmahalaàn sa Filipínas naŋ maŋa panahò ŋ iyòn, at dáhil díto y kanya ŋ ipináyo na si Maryáno y ipatápon sa ibà ŋ lupaìn.

When this had happened Patupat’s wrath against Mariano greatly increased, and after a few days he again entered a charge against Mariano. This time he made a different accusation. He complained to the court that Mariano was a Mason, because he did not come to church, did not confess, and did not kiss the priest’s hand. The Masons are enemies of the Catholic Church and, in consequence, were enemies also of the government in the Philippines in those days; and therefore he suggested that Mariano be deported.

Naŋ màbalitáan ni Maryáno aŋ sakdàl na yitò ni Patúpat ay inakálà nya ŋ walá na sya ŋ pagása kuŋ hindí aŋ magtagò o 20umílag sa maŋà maŋhuhúli sa kanyà. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya ay lumwàs sya sa Maynílaʾ at doòn sya nagtagòʾ.

When Mariano heard of this accusation of Patupat, he decided that his only hope was to hide or to escape from those who were to arrest him. Accordingly what he did was to go down to Manila, and there he hid.

Dátapuwat doon màn ay nàhúli rìn syà naŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sivìl. Kasáma naŋ pitò o walò ŋ taga iba t ibà ŋ báyan sya y inilúlan sa isà ŋ bapòr at dinalà sila sa ibabá naŋ kapuluà-ŋ-Filipínas. 25At doòn pagdatìŋ nilà aŋ ibà sa kanila ŋ magkakasáma ay pinagbábarìl naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ naghatìd sa kanilà, sapagkàt iyòn aŋ útos naŋ pinúno ŋ nagpatápon sa maŋa táo ŋ iyòn.

But even there he was caught by the gendarmes. Together with seven or eight men from various towns he was put into a steamboat and they were taken to the southern part of the Philippine Islands. And when they arrived there some of their number were shot by the soldiers who accompanied them, for this was ordered by the officials who sent these men into banishment.

Dátapuwat si Maryáno y hindí nagiŋ isà sa maŋa nábaril na 30iyòn. Doòn sya nátirà haŋgàŋ sa pananálo naŋ maŋa Amerikáno ay nagkaroòn sya naŋ kalayáa ŋ makabábalik sa kanya ŋ famíliya. Naŋ itò y datnan nyà aŋ isa nyà ŋ anàk ay pitò na ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ at aŋ ikalawà namàn ay limà na ŋ taòn.

However, Mariano was not one of those who were shot. He staid there until, after the victory of the Americans, he was given the liberty of returning to his family. When he came back to the latter, his one child was seven years old and the second, five.
[Contents]

15. Aŋ Intsìk na màŋaŋátam.

15. The story of the Chinese carpenter.

35Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ alwáge na may kápit-báhay na Intsèk na aluwáge rìn. Aŋ Intsèk na ytò ay isa ŋ magalìŋ na alwáge at aŋ kanya ŋ kínis ay nàpagkìkilála sa magalìŋ nya ŋ paggámit naŋ katàm. Isa ŋ áraw nakábili syà naŋ isa ŋ piráso-ŋ-káhoy na may ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ hábaʾ. Itù y kanya ŋ nilínis. Sinubúkan 40nya kuŋ makakùkúha syà naŋ pinagkatamàn na walà ŋ [58]patìd sa boò ŋ hábà naŋ káhoy. Dahilàn sa húsay naŋ kanyà ŋ kasaŋkápan at sa kanyà ŋ kabutíhan sa pagaalwáge, aŋ bágay na yòn ay nagìŋ pára ŋ walà ŋ ano màn sa kaniyà. Twì ŋ isùsúluŋ niya aŋ katàm ay nakakùkúha naŋ pinagkatamàn na walà ŋ patìd, 5ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ hábaʾ. Úpaŋ ipakilála nya sa kápit-báhay niya ŋ aluwági ŋ Tagálog aŋ kanyà ŋ galìŋ, itò y kanyà ŋ pinadalhàn naŋ isa ŋ pinagkatamàn áraw-áraw.

Juan was a carpenter who had for neighbor a Chinaman who also was a carpenter. This Chinaman was a skilled carpenter and his cleverness showed itself in his skilful use of the plane. One day he bought a piece of wood forty feet in length. This he proceeded to smoothe. He tried to see if he could obtain shavings without a break for the whole length of the wood. What with the excellence of his tools and his skill [59]at carpentry, this feat went off as if there was nothing to it. Every time he pushed his plane he obtained a shaving without a break, forty feet in length. In order to show this his skill to his neighbor, the Tagalog carpenter, he sent him one shaving every day.

Aŋ aluwági ŋ Tagálog na si Hwàn ay nàpagúlat sa galìŋ naŋ Intsèk. Úpaŋ gantihìn nya aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa tinaŋgàp na pinagkatamàn, 10sinubúkan dìn nyà ŋ kumatàm at ipadalà sa Intsèk aŋ pinagkatamàn. Dátapuwat aŋ pinakamahábà nya ŋ nàkúha na pinagkatamàn ay may-roon lámaŋ na labì ŋ limà ŋ paà. Itò y kahyá-hiyà ŋ ipadalà sa Intsèk.

The Tagalog carpenter, Juan, marvelled at the skill of the Chinaman. In order to make return for the shavings he had received, he too tried to use the plane and to send the shavings to the Chinaman. However, the longest shavings he succeeded in getting were only fifteen feet. These it would have been humiliating to send to the Chinaman.

Si Hwàn ay magalìŋ gumámit naŋ daràs at siya y nakapagpàpakínis 15naŋ tablà sa pamamagítan lámaŋ naŋ daràs. Hindí na kayiláŋa ŋ gamítan naŋ katàm aŋ ano mà ŋ káhoy na kanya ŋ darasìn, dátapuwat aŋ pinagdarasàn ay maŋa tátal na maiiklí lámaŋ, hindí súkat pagkàkilanlàn naŋ kanyà ŋ galìŋ, at hindí nya màipadalà sa Intsèk.

Juan was skilled in the use of the daras, and he was able to smoothe boards by the use of the daras alone. Any piece of wood which he had chopped smooth with the daras did not require the use of the plane; but the pieces he chopped off were only short splinters, not suited to show his skill, and he could not send them to the Chinaman.

20Hábaŋ si Hwàn ay walà ŋ màláma ŋ gawìn, aŋ Intsìk namàn ay hindí naglúlubày naŋ pagpapadalà naŋ pinagkatamà ŋ mahahábaʾ. Siniglàn si Hwàn naŋ gálit. Sinuŋgabàn nya aŋ kanya ŋ daràs at pinarunàn nya aŋ Intsèk. Itò y nàpagúlat at natákot naŋ màkíta si Hwàn.

While Juan did not know what to do, the Chinaman did not stop sending long shavings. Juan was filled with anger. He took his daras and went over to the Chinaman’s. The latter was surprised and frightened when he saw Juan.

25Sinábe nitò: “Anò aŋ gustu mu ŋ sabíhin sa maŋa ipinagpapadalà mo ŋ pinagkatamàn sa ákin? Akò y binuwísit mo at itò y iyo ŋ pagbàbayáran. Pùputúlin ko aŋ buhuk mò sa pamamagítan naŋ daràs na itò.”

The latter said: “What do you mean to say by sending me those shavings? You are offensive to me and you shall pay for it. I am going to cut your hair with this daras.”

Aŋ Intsèk ay natákot, sapagkàt, pag aŋ úlo nya y tinamaàn 30na naŋ daràs na iyòn, ay pího ŋ hindí sya mabùbúhay. Sya y nagkàkawalàʾ, dátapuwat sinuŋgabàn sya ni Hwàn, iginápus sya sa baŋkòʾ, at inumpisahàn nya ŋ dinaràs aŋ úlo naŋ Intsèk.

The Chinaman was frightened, for he knew that if that daras struck his head, he would surely not survive. He tried to escape, but Juan seized him, tied him to a bench, and began to use the daras on the Chinaman’s head.

Aŋ daràs ay isa ŋ kasaŋkápa ŋ malakì, gáya naŋ isà ŋ píko, at mabigàt, dátapuwat sa magalìŋ na kamày ni Hwàn itò y nagiŋ 35pára ŋ isa ŋ guntìŋ lámaŋ. Aŋ lagpàk naŋ daràs sa úlo naŋ Intsìk ay lubhà ŋ banáyad, at aŋ maŋa buhòk lámaŋ aŋ pinùpútol naŋ patalìm.

The daras is a large tool, the size of a pick, and heavy, but in Juan’s skilful hand it was like a mere pair of scissors. The descent of the daras on the Chinaman’s head was very gentle, and only the hair was cut by the edge.

Sa tákot naŋ Intsèk itò y nagsisigàw na sinábe: “Wapélo! Daluhàn ninyò kò, masamà táo si Hwàn, hindí Kilistyáno!”

The Chinaman in his fright shouted and said: “Wapelo! Come helpee me, Juan bad man, not Chlistian!”

40Itò y nárinig naŋ maŋa kápit-báhay at ibà ŋ nagsìsipaglakàd.

This was heard by the neighbors and passers-by.

Kanyá pumások silà sa gàwáan naŋ Intsèk at doòn ay sinábi sa kanilà ni Hwàn: “Hwag kayù ŋ makialàm díto! Aŋ Intsìk [60]na yitò y hindí ko sinàsaktàn. Ákin lámaŋ pinùputlàn naŋ buhòk.”

Accordingly they came into the Chinaman’s workshop, but there Juan said to them: “Don’t you mix in here! I am not hurting this Chinaman. I am just cutting his hair.”

At patúluy dìn aŋ kanyà ŋ pagdaràs.

And he kept on with his chopping.

Naŋ mapútul na nya ŋ lahàt aŋ buhòk naŋ Intsèk ay malakì 5aŋ nagìŋ pagkámaŋhà naŋ nagsìsipanoòd, sapagkàt aŋ buhòk naŋ Intsèk ay pára ŋ ginupìt naŋ guntìŋ naŋ isa ŋ bihasà ŋ barbéro. Aŋ Intsìk namàn, naŋ màkíta nya sa salamìn na wala ŋ súgat aŋ kanya ŋ úlo, ay malaki rìn aŋ nagìŋ pagkámaŋhàʾ, at hindí mapatìd aŋ pagpúri nya sa galìŋ ni Hwàn sa paggámit naŋ daràs.

When the Chinaman’s hair was completely cut, the onlookers were greatly astonished, for the Chinaman’s hair was as if cut by the shears of a skilful barber. The Chinaman too, when he saw in the looking-glass that his head was unhurt, was greatly astonished and did not stop praising Juan’s skill in the use of the daras. [61]
[Contents]

1016. Isa ŋ táo ŋ may birtùd naŋ usà.

16. A man who had the power of a deer.

Mínsan sa isa ŋ báyan sa kapuluà-ŋ-Filipínas ay náhayàg aŋ paŋálan naŋ isa ŋ táo sa kanya ŋ maŋa kababáyan at maŋa kápit-báyan, dahilàn sa hindí karanyúwa ŋ lakàs nya sa pagtakbò at pagluksò.

In a certain town in the Philippine Islands there once became celebrated the name of a certain man, both among his fellow-townsmen and the people of the neighboring towns, on account of his unusual strength in running and jumping.

15Sya y isa ŋ táo ŋ hindí mayábaŋ, dátapuwat may kauntì ŋ talíno sa paghahánap at gayon dìn may kauntì ŋ tápaŋ. Aŋ kanya ŋ hindí karanyúwa ŋ kapaláran ay hindí nya ipinagmayabàŋ ní hindí nya ipinagkayilàʾ kuŋ anò aŋ pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ kanyà ŋ dí karanyúwa ŋ lakàs. Sinábi nya sa maŋà mapagusísaʾ 20na aŋ pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ kanya ŋ lakàs ay aŋ aŋkìn niya ŋ birtùd naŋ usà. Hindí nya sinábe kuŋ papáno aŋ pagkápasa kanyà naŋ birtùd na iyòn, dátapuwat siya y hindí marámot sa pagbibigày-loòb úpaŋ ikatúluŋ niya sa maŋà kakilála o hindìʾ aŋ kanya ŋ lakàs.

He was not a proud man, but he had some astuteness in money matters and also some courage. He did not let his rare good fortune make him proud, nor did he lie about the source of his unusual strength. He told those who were curious that the source of his strength was the power of the deer which he had made his own.

He did not tell how this power had come into his possession, but he was not stingy about doing favors by helping with his strength both friends and strangers.

25Sya y may pagíbig na yumáman, gáya naŋ karamíhan naŋ táo, at díto nya ginámit aŋ kanya ŋ lakàs. Paráti sya ŋ nakìkipagtakbúhan, at aŋ maŋa takbúha ŋ itò y lágì na ŋ pinagkatalunàn naŋ marámi ŋ salapèʾ. Sya ay lágì na ŋ may malakì ŋ pustà. Walá sya ŋ itináŋì na pinakìkipagtakbuhàn. Kuŋ mìnsan 30nakìkipagtakbúhan sya sa kápwa táo, kuŋ mínsan ay sa kabáyo, sa áso, at sa iba pà ŋ háyop na matúli ŋ tumakbò.

Like most people, he wanted to get rich, and it was toward this end that he used his strength. He often entered into races, and these races were always means of winning much money. He always made large bets. He refused no one that wanted to race with him. Sometimes he ran races with people, sometimes with horses, with dogs, and with other animals that are fast at running.

Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ áraw ay dumámi aŋ naípon nya ŋ salapìʾ na pinanalúnan sa pustáhan. Gayon dìn aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kaybígan na nagsipustà sa kanyà ay nagkaroòn naŋ marámi ŋ kwàlta. 35Naŋ màpagaláman naŋ maŋa táo na syà y may birtùd naŋ usà ay hindí na sya íbig labánan sa takbúhan. Dáhil díto y úpaŋ hwag máhintoʾ aŋ kanya ŋ pananálo at pagkíta naŋ kwaltà, ay nagbíbigay syà naŋ malalakì ŋ palúgit sa kanya ŋ kinàkalában. Dáhil sa kalakhàn naŋ maŋa palúgit na ibinigay nyà ay marámi 40rì ŋ táo ŋ lumában sa kanyà. Dátapuwat tuwí nà y sya aŋ nagìŋ [62]mànanalò. Gayon dìn sa maŋa pakikipagluksúhan paráti nà ŋ syà aŋ nanànálo.

After a few days the money he had won in bets made up a large sum. His friends also, who had bet on him, got much money. When people came to know that he had the power of a deer, they did not want to run against him. Therefore, so as not to stop winning and making money, he gave large handicaps to his opponents. The handicaps which he gave were so great that many people contended with him. Still he always came out the winner. In jumping-matches also he was always victorious.

Dátapuwat, kuŋ malaki màn aŋ kabutíha ŋ nàkamtan nyà sa birtùd na ytò, ay máy-ron dì ŋ ilà ŋ kahirápan na nàkamtan 5nyà dahilan díto. Dahilan dìn sa kahirápa ŋ itò ay hindí nya natagalà ŋ aŋkinìn hábaŋ búhay nya aŋ birtùd na iyòn. Dahilàn sa birtùd na iyòn sya y nagìŋ lubhà ŋ magugulatìn. Aŋ maŋa kalabòg, íŋay, at tahòl naŋ áso kuŋ gabì ay hindí nagpatúlug sa kanyà. Dahilàn sa maŋa íŋay na yitò, kuŋ natùtúlug sya ay 10palági ŋ nàpàpaluksò. Lálù na, kuŋ isa ŋ tahòl naŋ áso, halimbáwaʾ, aŋ makàgísiŋ sa kanyà, sya y nàpàpaluksò naŋ lubhà ŋ mataàs sa kanyà ŋ hihigàn, at bágo sya pagsa-ulàn naŋ saríle, ay nagtàtatakbò na syà. Sa pagluksu nyà ŋ itò na hindí sinásadyaʾ ay walá sya ŋ nagígiŋ pagiíŋat at karanyúwa y umáabot 15syà sa ituktòk naŋ bubuŋàn, at sa kababáan nitò y lági ŋ nalálamog aŋ kanya ŋ katawàn o kayà y nagkàkabúkul syà sa úlo, dahilàn sa pagkáhampas nyà sa bubuŋàn. Gayon dìn sa kanya ŋ hindí sinásadya ŋ pagtakbò pagkágisiŋ nyà dahilàn sa pagkàgúlat, ay nagkàkaumpòg-umpòg aŋ boò ŋ katawan nyà sa maŋa 20dindìŋ naŋ kanya ŋ báhay.

However, though the advantages which he gained through this power were great, yet there were also some disadvantages which he obtained through it. On account of these disadvantages he did not manage to keep this power as his own through all his life. Through this power he had become very nervous. The sounds of falling bodies, noises, [63]and the barking of dogs at night, did not allow him to sleep. These noises often made him start up with a jump from his sleep. Especially when the barking of a dog, for instance, woke him up, he jumped high up from his bed, and before he recovered his wits he was running at full speed. He could exercise no care about his involuntary jumping up and usually went way up to the ceiling, and, since this was low, his body got full of bruises and his head full of bumps from striking against the ceiling. Likewise in his unintentional running whenever he woke up with a start, his whole body got knocked again and again against the walls of his house.

Itò y isà ŋ mahírap na tìísin, at inakálà nya ŋ hindí sya mabùbúhay nà ŋ malwàt dahilàn sa hindí pagkàkatúlog kuŋ gabì. Kanyá inakálà nya ŋ itápon aŋ birtùd na ytò pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ áraw. Naŋ sumápit aŋ ikapitù ŋ áraw naŋ kanya ŋ pagaáreʾ 25sa birtùd ay sya y lubhà ŋ hirap nà at inakálà nya ŋ sya y mamámatay nà sa hírap. Aŋ úlu nya ay bukulàn. Aŋ mukhá nya ay marámi ŋ pasàʾ at káhit na hindí sya nabalían naŋ butò, aŋ maŋa lamàn namàn nya ay lubhà ŋ lamòg.

This was hard to bear, and he thought that he should not live long, what with not sleeping of nights. Therefore he decided to get rid of this power in a few days. When the seventh day of his possession of the power came, he was very sore and thought he should die of soreness. His head was covered with bumps. His face was full of black and blue marks, and though he had broken no bones, his muscles were badly bruised.

Dáhil díto y walà ŋ kibú sya ŋ naparoòn sa isa ŋ páraŋ at 30itinápon nya doòn aŋ birtùd na nàpúlut nya, yámaŋ marámi na rìn lámaŋ siya ŋ salapì ŋ pinanalúnan.

Therefore, without saying a word, he went to a forest and there abandoned the power which he had got hold of, seeing that he had already won much money.
[Contents]

17. Aŋ alíla ŋ uŋgòʾ.

17. The pet monkey.

Siy Andrès ay máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ alíla ŋ uŋgò na kanyà ŋ lubhà ŋ minámahàl, sapagkàt aŋ uŋgu ŋ itò y nagbíbigay sa kanyà naŋ 35malakì ŋ serbísyo. Kuŋ gabì ipinaglàlátag sya naŋ banìg naŋ uŋgo ŋ itò; kuŋ umága ay iniháhandàʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ paŋhilámos, at aŋ ano mà ŋ kanya ŋ iyútos ay sinúsunod naŋ uŋgòʾ.

Andrés had a pet monkey which he prized very highly, because this monkey gave him much service. At night the monkey spread out his sleeping-mat for him; in the morning it handed him his water for washing, and whatever order he gave was obeyed by the monkey.

Gabì-gabì aŋ uŋgu ŋ itò y natùtúlog sa ilálim naŋ kátri ŋ tinùtulúgan naŋ kanya ŋ paŋinoòn. Itò y hindí gustò naŋ kanya 40ŋ paŋinoòn, sapagkàt, dahilàn sa kanya ŋ malakì ŋ kabuluhàn, ay íbig ni Andrès na syà y bigyàn naŋ isa ŋ mabúte ŋ lugàr na [64]tulugàn. Dátapuwat, káhit na gánu ŋ pagpílit aŋ gawìn ni Andrès, ay hindí nya mapatúlog sa ibà ŋ lugàr aŋ kanya ŋ alíla ŋ uŋgòʾ.

Every night this monkey slept underneath the bedstead on which its master slept. This was not pleasing to the latter, for owing to its great value, Andrés wanted to give it a good place to sleep in. However, no matter what efforts Andrés made to force it, his pet monkey [65]could not be brought to sleep in any other place.

Siy Andrès ay isa ŋ táwu ŋ may tákot at pagíbig sa Dyòs. 5Kanyá gabi-gabì bágu sya matúlog ay nagkúkurus syà at tumàtáwag sya sa Dyòs. Sa óras naŋ kanya ŋ paghigà gabi-gabì ay dinàratnan nà nyà na nása ilálim naŋ kanya ŋ kátri aŋ uŋgòʾ. Mínsan màn ay hindí sya náuna sa paghigàʾ sa uŋgu ŋ itò.

Andrés was a man who feared and loved God. Therefore, every night, before he went to sleep, he made the Sign of the Cross and called upon God. At his bed-time every night he found that his monkey was already under his bedstead. Not once did he get ahead of the monkey in going to bed.

Isa ŋ áraw aŋ párì sa báyan ay dumálaw kay Andrès sa 10kanya ŋ báhay. Pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ sandalì ŋ pagsasàlitáan ay ibinalítà niy Andrès sa páreʾ na sya y máy-roo ŋ isà ŋ alíla ŋ uŋgò na lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ kabuluhàn, sapagkàt sya y pinagsìsilbihà ŋ mabúte, at káhit na anò aŋ iyútos nya ay sinúsunod, at sinábi pa nyà ŋ masípag pa káy sa maŋa iba nyà ŋ alílaʾ aŋ uŋgo 15ŋ iyòn.

One day the priest of the town visited Andrés in his house. After some time had elapsed in conversation, Andrés told the priest that he had a pet monkey which was very useful, because it served him well and obeyed his every command, and he also said that this monkey was more diligent than his other servants.

Malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagtatakà naŋ páreʾ, at hiniliŋ nyà ŋ ipakíta sa kanyà aŋ uŋgò ŋ iyòn. Kanyá tináwag ny Andrès aŋ uŋgòʾ. Hindí gáya naŋ dáti, na sa isà ŋ táwag lámaŋ niy Andrès ay lumàlápit agad-agàd aŋ uŋgòʾ, ŋayòn makása-m-pu ŋ táwag 20nà ay walá pa syà. Siy Andrès ay nagálit, nagtindìg, at hinánap nya sa maŋa sulok-sulòk naŋ báhay aŋ uŋgòʾ.

The priest was much surprised and asked that the monkey be shown to him. So Andrés called the monkey. Usually the monkey came at once at a single call by Andrés, but on this occasion it did not appear even when he had called ten times. Andrés got angry, arose, and looked for the monkey in the nooks and corners of the house.

Ito y nàkíta nya sa isa ŋ súlok at nakakápit na mabúte sa isa ŋ halíge. Tináwag nya at kanya ŋ pinaáalis sa súlok, dátapuwat aŋ uŋgò y áyaw umalìs doòn, káhit na anò aŋ gawìn sa 25kanyà. Dáhil díto ay tináwag nya aŋ páreʾ, úpaŋ itò y doòn tiŋnàn sa súlok aŋ alílà nya ŋ uŋgòʾ.

He found it in a corner, clinging tightly to a post. He called it and tried to get it out of the corner, but the monkey would not come away, no matter what Andrés did to it. Therefore he called the priest to look at his pet monkey there in the corner.

Pagkálapit naŋ páreʾ aŋ uŋgò y kuminìg sa tákot. Nagkaroòn naŋ hinálà aŋ párèʾ na aŋ uŋgù ŋ iyòn ay isà ŋ dimónyo. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya y nagkurùs sya at pagkabendisyòn nya naŋ kauntì 30ŋ túbig ay niwisikàn nya aŋ uŋgòʾ.

At the approach of the priest the monkey trembled with fear. The priest conceived the suspicion that this monkey was an evil spirit. So he made the Sign of the Cross, and blessing a little water, sprinkled it over the monkey.

Pagdápoʾ sa katawàn nitò naŋ túbig ay pumutòk na pára ŋ isa ŋ barìl, at sa lugàr naŋ uŋgòʾ ay walá silà ŋ nàkíta kuŋ hindí asu lámaŋ na agàd nawalàʾ.

When the water struck the latter’s body, there was a report like that of a gun, and in the place of the monkey they saw only some smoke, which soon disappeared.

Pagkaraàn nitò siniyásat naŋ páre si Andrès tuŋkùl sa kanya 35ŋ paniniwála sa Diyòs. Sinábi ny Andrès na hindí nabàbágo aŋ matíbay nya ŋ paniniwálaʾ at gabi-gabì nagdádasal syà bágo matúlog. Siniyásat dìn naŋ páreʾ kuŋ saàn tumùtúlog aŋ uŋgòʾ. Sinábe ni Andrès na itò y tumúlog gabi-gabì sa ilàlim naŋ kanyà ŋ kátri ŋ tulugàn.

Thereupon the priest questioned Andrés concerning his faith in God. Andrés said that his firm faith had not changed and that he prayed every night before going to sleep. The priest then asked where the monkey used to sleep. Andrés answered that it slept every night under his bedstead.

40Pagkaraàn nitò y ipinakilála sa kanyà naŋ páreʾ na aŋ uŋgù ŋ iyòn ay isà ŋ dimónyo na umáabàŋ sa kanyà, at kuŋ syà y sumála naŋ pagtáwag sa Diyòs bágu matúlog, sa gabì di ŋ iyòn ay ihùhúlug sya naŋ dimónyo sa infyèrno. [66]

Thereupon the priest informed him that this monkey was an evil spirit which had been lying in wait for him, and that if he had ever failed to call upon God before he went to sleep, on that very night the evil spirit would have thrown him into Hell. [67]
[Contents]

18. Aŋ matandá sa punsò sa liwánag naŋ áraw.

18. The old man of the ant-hill by light of day.

Si Pédro ay isà ŋ matápaŋ na laláke. Paráti sya ŋ nakárinig naŋ maŋa kwènto tuŋkùl sa asuwàŋ, duwèndi, maŋkukúlam, at maŋà matandá sa punsò, dátapuwat aŋ ipinagtátakà ni Pédro 5ay kuŋ bákit hindí sya makátagpo nì káhit isà naŋ maŋà bágay na itò. Íbig niya ŋ makàkíta naŋ isa man lámaŋ sa kanilà, úpaŋ màláman nya kuŋ túnay ŋàʾ na silà y máy-roo ŋ maŋa kapaŋyaríha ŋ hindí karanyúwan sa karamíhan naŋ táo.

Pedro was a brave man. He had often heard stories about vampires, dwarves, sorcerers, and old men of the ant-hill, but what made Pedro wonder was why he had never chanced to meet even a single one of these creatures. He wanted to get a sight of at least one of them, so that he might know whether it was true that they had powers not common to most persons.

Sya y naglálakàd na isa ŋ gabì sa isà ŋ lugàr na madilìm 10at pinagkàkatakutàn, sapagkàt díto y marámi ŋ nakàkíta naŋ matandá sa punsò.

One night he walked about in a dark and haunted place, because he had heard that many people had there seen an old man of the ant-hill.

Aŋ tabáko naŋ matanda ŋ itò y nakatàtákot aŋ lakì, at kuŋ itò y hititin nyà aŋ liwánag na naŋyàyári ay pára ŋ liwánag naŋ isà ŋ sigàʾ.

The cigar of such an old man is of terrifying size, and when he draws at it, the light given forth is like the light of a bonfire.

15Sa gabi ŋ iyòn sa kanyà ŋ paglalakàd maláyù pa syà y nakàkíta na syà naŋ isà ŋ liyàb. Aŋ buhuk nyà y nagsitindìg at inakálà nya ŋ bumalìk, dátapuwat nàpigílan nya aŋ kanyà ŋ tákot at ipinatúloy din nyà aŋ kanya ŋ paglákad.

On this night he had gone some distance on his ramble, when he saw a flare of light. His hair stood on end and he thought of going back, but he overcame his fear and continued on his walk.

Sya y sinalúboŋ naŋ nagtàtabáko. Pagkálapit nya y inanínaw 20nya aŋ katawàn naŋ matandà ŋ iyòn, dátapuwat hindí rin nasyahàn aŋ kanya ŋ pagsisyásat, kanya iníbig nya ŋ màkíta sa síkat naŋ áraw aŋ matandà ŋ iyòn. Úpaŋ itù y maŋyári dápat nya ŋ pigílin aŋ matandàʾ, sapagkàt aŋ maŋa ispíritu ŋ itò ay bumábalik sa kanilà ŋ tàhánan sa impyèrno o iba pa mà ŋ lugàr 25sa paglápit naŋ umága.

He was met by the smoker. When he approached, Pedro examined the old man’s figure, but as he did not succeed in gratifying his curiosity, he was taken with the desire of seeing the old man by daylight. To bring this about, he would have to hold the old man fast, for these spirits return to their abode in Hell or some other place of the kind as soon as morning comes.

Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya y hinawákan nya agàd aŋ matandàʾ. Ito y nakipagbunò sa kanyà. Kuŋ mínsan sya y nása ilálim, kuŋ mínsan sya y nása ibábaw, dátapwat hindí nya pinakawalàn aŋ matandàʾ. Mahigpìt na mahigpìt aŋ kanya ŋ kápit at tinalaga 30nyà ŋ sumáma káhit na saàn sya dalhìn naŋ matandà kuŋ itò y malakàs káy sa kanyà.

Therefore what he did was suddenly to seize hold of the old man. The latter began to wrestle with him. Sometimes Pedro was below, sometimes he was on top, but he did not let go of the old man. He held him as tightly as possible and made up his mind that he would follow no matter where the old man bore him, should the latter prove stronger than he.

Silà y nagbunò haŋgàŋ alastrès. Si Pédro sa óras na itò ay pagòd na pagod nà at malakì aŋ paŋlalatàʾ, dátapuwat hindí rin nya binitáwan aŋ kanyà ŋ kabunòʾ. Naŋ magàalaskwàtru nà ay 35naglubày naŋ pagkílos aŋ kanya ŋ háwak. Naŋ makaraàn aŋ kalaháti-ŋ-óras aŋ sínag naŋ áraw ay nagumpisa nà naŋ pagtaŋlàw sa kanilà, dátapuwat hindí pa rìn lubhà ŋ maliwánag úpaŋ màpagkilála ni Pédro kuŋ anò aŋ kanyà ŋ táŋan. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ alasìŋko ay malaki nyà ŋ pagkámaŋhaʾ, naŋ màkíta 40nya ŋ sya y nààákap sa isà ŋ halígi ŋ hindí lubhà ŋ mataàs káy sa kanyà, dátapuwat nàtùtúlus sa lúpà at sunòg na sunòg. [68]

They wrestled till three o’clock. By this time Pedro was as tired as can be and ready to sink to the ground, but he did not let go of his fellow-wrestler. When four o’clock came his opponent ceased to move. When another half hour had passed, the rays of the sun began to fall upon them, but it was not yet light enough for Pedro to make out what sort of thing it was he had hold of. When five o’clock came, he was greatly surprised to see that he was embracing a post which was not much higher than he. It was, however, firmly fixed in the ground and completely charred. [69]
[Contents]

19. Aŋ tiyának ni Hwàn.

19. Juan’s goblin.

Isa ŋ gabè si Hwàn ay tumawìd sa ílog sa kanya ŋ paglilibòt. Naŋ sya y nása pasígan pa lámaŋ, nakáramdam syà naŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd, naŋ sya y mátuntuŋ nà sa 5kabuhaŋínan.

Naŋ úna ŋ gabè itò y hindí nya ininò. Naŋ ikalawà ŋ gabè, naŋ magdaàn sya ŋ ulè sa pasíga ŋ itò, nakáramdam sya ŋ mulí naŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd. Inakálà nya ŋ subúkan at hulíhin aŋ nagsàsábuy sa kanyà naŋ buháŋin, kanyàʾ sa 10kanya ŋ paglákad ay pamínsan-mínsan sya ŋ pumìpíhit na pabiglàʾ sa kanya ŋ likuràn, dátapwat walá sya ŋ màkíta káhit na anò.

One night Juan while rambling about, crossed a river. While he was still on the bank and just walking on the sandy beach, he felt some sand being showered on his back. He thought he would watch for the person who was throwing sand on him and catch him, so, while walking, he kept turning suddenly right about at short intervals, but he saw nothing.

Dáhil díto y siniglàn siya naŋ kaunti ŋ tákot at inakálà nya ŋ baká kuŋ anù ŋ matandá sa punsò o tiyának aŋ kanya ŋ nàkàkatúŋo. 15Kanyáʾ tinulínan nya aŋ pagtakbò, dátapuwat hábaŋ nagtùtúlin sya ay lálu namà ŋ dumádalas aŋ pagdápù naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd. Lumakì aŋ kanya ŋ tákot at dáhil díto y bumalik syà sa kanya ŋ báhay na patakbò naŋ úbus-lakàs.

This frightened him a little, and he began to wonder if he was not perhaps dealing with some old man of the ant-hill or some goblin. Therefore he hastened his running, but the faster he went, the more frequent grew the striking of sand on his back. His fear increased and he returned home running with all his might.

Naŋ dumatìŋ sya doòn ay hinàhábul nya aŋ kanya ŋ hiniŋà 20at hindí sya makaúsap. Naŋ sya y makapaghiŋa nà naŋ kauntèʾ ay saká pa lámaŋ sya nakasagòt sa marámi ŋ maŋa tanòŋ naŋ kanya ŋ amà at iba pà ŋ kasa-ŋ-bahày. Sinábi nya sa kanya ŋ amà na sya y sinùsundàn naŋ maŋa dwènde sa kanya ŋ paglalakàd at sinàsabúyan sya naŋ buháŋin.

When he got there he was out of breath and unable to speak. It was only when he had rested a while that he was able to answer the many questions of his father and the other members of the household. He told his father that he had been pursued by dwarves on his walk and showered with sand.

25Itinanòŋ naŋ kanya ŋ amà kuŋ saàn aŋ lugàr na iyòn at sinábi nya ŋ sa pasígan naŋ ílog. Aŋ kanya ŋ amà ay nápahalakhàk naŋ táwa at sinábi nya ŋ iyòn ay hindí dwènde, dátapuwat aŋ kanyà lámaŋ paà aŋ nagtátaŋày naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd sa báwat kanya ŋ paghakbàŋ.

His father asked him where the scene of this was, and he said on the bank of the river. His father burst into peals of laughter and said that these were no dwarves, but only his own feet, which sent the sand up on his back at every stride he made.

30Dátapuwat si Hwàn ay áyaw maniwálaʾ at máy ila ŋ áraw na hindí sya nanáog naŋ báhay. Dáhil díto y iníbig naŋ kanya ŋ amà na màipakilála sa kanyà aŋ katotohánan naŋ kanya ŋ sinábe, at isa ŋ gabè ay sinábi nya kay Hwàn na sya y magpasyàl at magdaàn sa lugàr di ŋ iyòn at sya y kanyà ŋ sàsamáhan.

But Juan refused to believe this, and for several days he did not leave the house. His father therefore wanted to show him the truth of what he had said, so one night he told Juan to go for a walk to that same place, and he would accompany him.

35Pumáyag si Hwàn at sila ŋ dalawà y naparoòn sa pasígan. Naŋ dumatìŋ na sila doòn ay nagpahúle aŋ ama ni Hwàn. Naŋ itu namàn ay naglálakad nà sa kabuhaŋínan at naŋ sya y nakáramdam naŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa likòd, siniglàn sya ŋ mulí naŋ tákot at isinigàw nya sa kanya ŋ amà na nagumpisa nà naŋ 40pagsábuy naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.

Juan consented and they both went to the river-bank. When they got there, Juan’s father dropped behind. When Juan walked on the sandy beach and felt the sprinkling of sand on his back, he was again filled with terror and shouted to his father that they were already starting to throw sand on his back.

Pinabalìk nya si Hwàn at kanya ŋ pinalákad na mulèʾ. Ŋayòn ay sinùsundan nyà sa likuràn. Dáhil díto y nàkíta naŋ [70]ama ni Hwàn na twì ŋ sya y háhakbàŋ aŋ sinélas na soòt nya ay nagtátaŋày naŋ buháŋin, at sa pagaalsà nitò naŋ paà aŋ buháŋi ŋ taŋày ay napàpasábuy sa likòd ni Hwàn.

He made Juan come back and walk on again. This time he followed at his back. Accordingly Juan’s father saw that every time Juan took a step, the sandals he was wearing carried along some sand, and when he raised his foot the sand thus carried along was sprinkled on his back.

Aŋ ginawá naŋ kanya ŋ amà ay ipinaalìs aŋ soòt nya ŋ 5sinélas at pinalákad sya ŋ mulìʾ. Ŋayòn, káhit na gáno kaláyoʾ aŋ lakáran ni Hwàn ay walá na sya ŋ nàràramdamà ŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.

His father now had him take off the sandals he was wearing and made him walk on again. This time, no matter how much ground Juan walked over, he felt no scattering of sand on his back.

Mulá noon ay nawalàn sya naŋ tákot sa maŋa matandàʾ, duwènde, asuwàŋ, at iba pà ŋ pinagkàkatakutàn.

From this time on he had no more fear of old men, dwarves, vampires, and other spooks. [71]
[Contents]

1020. Si Hwà ŋ maŋlilígaw.

20. Juan the suitor.

Aŋ dalága ŋ si Maryà ay balíta naŋ gandà sa kanya ŋ báriyo. Dátapuwat walà ŋ maŋlilígaw sa kanyà, líban na lámaŋ kay Hwàn. Ŋúnit aŋ amà ni Maryà ay malakì aŋ pagkáayaw kay Hwàn. Hindí màkaúsap ni Hwàn aŋ nilìligáwan kuŋ hindí palihìm, 15sapagkàt pag nàláman naŋ amà ni Maryà, itò y sinàsaktan silà kápwaʾ sa pamamagítan naŋ pamálòʾ. Kuŋ mìnsan at malakì aŋ gálit naŋ amà ay bambò aŋ ginàgámit nya kay Hwàn, at sa ganitò y malápit sya ŋ mabalían naŋ butò káylan man at sila y màhúli sa paguúsap.

Young Maria was famed for beauty in her district. She had no suitors, however, except only Juan. But Maria’s father had a great dislike for Juan. Juan could converse with the girl he was courting only in secret, for when Maria’s father knew of it, he would punish them both with his stick.

Sometimes, when the father’s anger was great, he used a club on Juan, so that he was in danger of getting his bones broken whenever they were caught talking together.

20Isa ŋ gabì ŋ madilìm aŋ amà ni Mariyà ay naglibòt. Naŋ itò y màláman ni Hwàn pinarunàn nya si Mariyà úpaŋ kausápin. Nalibàŋ sila sa paguúsap, kanyá sila y dinatnàn naŋ amà ni Maryà sa kanya ŋ pagwèʾ.

One dark night Maria’s father had gone out. When Juan found this out, he went to Maria’s to talk with her. They forgot themselves in their conversation, and so were surprised by Maria’s father on his return.

Siniglàn sya agàd naŋ gálit at pasigàw nya ŋ kinaúsap si 25Hwàn: “Anu kà, salbáhe? Sinábi ku nà sa iyò ŋ hwag kà ŋ tútuntoŋ díto sa áki ŋ pamamáhay. Ano aŋ íbig mo t nàrìrito kà?”

He was at once filled with anger and in a loud voice addressed Juan: “What do you want, you brute? I’ve told you not to set foot in my house here. What do you mean by coming here?”

At pagkasábe nitò y sinuŋgabàn nya aŋ isa ŋ bisìg naŋ kawáyan at inakmaàn nya ŋ bambuhìn si Hwàn. Sa malaki ŋ tákot 30nitò ay nagtalòn sya sa bintánàʾ, dátapuwat sinundàn din syà naŋ amà. Kanyá aŋ ginawá nya y tumakbò sya naŋ úbus-lakàs.

And when he had said this he seized a bamboo cane and made ready to give Juan a caning. In his terror the latter jumped out of the window, but he was followed by the father. So he took to running with all his might.

Aŋ gabì ay madilìm na pára ŋ úliŋ, at hindí nya màtumpakàn kuŋ saàn aŋ parunàn, dátapuwat patúloy rin sya naŋ pagtakbò. Nagkaŋdadápà sya sa pagtakbò, dátapwat maligsi syà ŋ 35nagbàbáŋon at patúluy din sa pagtakbò.

The night was dark as coal and he could not make out which way to go, but he kept running nevertheless. He fell on his face again and again as he ran, but he got up quickly and kept on running.

Hindí naláon at nakádaan sya naŋ isà ŋ malakì at maitìm na bágay. Nàkilála nya ŋ iyòn ay isa ŋ kalabàw, kanyá sya y lumundàg agàd sa likòd nitò, at kanya ŋ pinatakbò.

It was not long before he came upon a large black object. He recognized it as a carabao, so he leaped quickly on its back and made it run.

Aŋ pagsakày sa kalabàw ay hindí lubhà ŋ mahírap sa kalapáran 40naŋ likòd nitò at sa kahináan naŋ takbò. Kanyàʾ, káhit [72]na walà ŋ pamitìk si Hwàn ay dí natákot na sumakày. Sa kadilimàn naŋ gabì sa kanya ŋ pagsakày ay naŋyári ŋ náharap sya sa buntútan naŋ kalabàw at hindí sa uluhàn.

Riding on a carabao is not very difficult, owing to the breadth of its back and the slowness of its pace. Therefore, even though he had no reins, Juan was not afraid to ride. Owing to the darkness of the night it happened that in his mounting he faced the tail-end of the carabao and not the head.

Pinatúlin nya aŋ kalabàw. Naŋyári namà ŋ aŋ kalabàw na 5itò ay árì naŋ amà ni Maryà. Hindí nalaúnan at nakátanaw sya naŋ báhay na maílaw sa pinatùtuŋúhan naŋ kalabàw. Aŋ boò ŋ ása nyà aŋ báhay na iyòn ay sa kanya ŋ kápit-báhay. Kanyá bumabá sya sa kalabàw at patakbo syà ŋ pumanhìk sa báhay.

He urged on the carabao. Now it happened that this carabao was [73]owned by Maria’s father. It was not long before Juan saw a lighted house in the direction toward which the carabao was going. He confidently expected that this house was his neighbor’s. Therefore he got down from the carabao and went up into the house on the run.

Malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagkalitò nya at pagkatákot naŋ pagkápanhik 10nya y sinalúboŋ sya naŋ amà ni Maryà, at binambò sya sa katawàn at sinábi: “Anò t nagbalìk ka pà? Hindí ba pinaláyas na kità, wala ŋ hyàʾ?”

Great was his surprise and terror when, upon entering, he was met by Maria’s father and beaten all over his body and addressed: “What have you come back for? Haven’t I got rid of you yet, you shameless rascal?”

Naŋ pagsa-ulàn si Hwàn naŋ kanya ŋ saríli ay nagtalòn sya sa batalàn at tumakbò sya ŋ mulí patúŋo sa kanya ŋ báhay, 15dátapuwat ŋayò y hindí na sya sumakày sa káhit anò pa màn.

When Juan came to himself he jumped from the porch and ran toward home, but this time he did not ride on anything.
[Contents]

21. Si Mariyà ŋ marámot.

21. Maria the miser.

Naŋ nabùbúhay pa si Mariyà ay nátira syà sa kanya ŋ maínam na báhay sa gitná naŋ isa ŋ maláwak na bakúran na may magagandà ŋ hardìn at maŋa púnu-ŋ-káhoy. Sya y lubhà ŋ mayáman, 20kanyàʾ aŋ búhay nya y isa ŋ panày na kaginhawáhan.

When Maria was still alive, she lived in her pleasant house in the middle of wide grounds with beautiful gardens and trees. As she was very rich, her life was one constant pleasure.

Hindí sya nakaratìŋ naŋ ápat na pu ŋ taòn sa gúlaŋ at sya y namatày. Aŋ lahàt naŋ kanya ŋ yáman ay hinátì nya sa kanya ŋ kapatìd at sa simbáhan. Hindí nya nàalaála aŋ mahihírap nya ŋ kakilála at ilà ŋ kápit-báhay.

She had not reached the age of forty years, when she died. All her wealth she divided between her sister and the church. She did not remember the poor acquaintances and those of her neighbors who were poor.

25Aŋ kapatìd na naíwan ay nagpamísa naŋ sunòd-sunòd sa loòb naŋ pito ŋ áraw, úpaŋ aŋ káluluwa ni Mariyà ay papasúkin ni Sam-Pédro sa pintúan naŋ láŋit.

The sister who was left had a series of masses said during the seven days after death, so that Maria’s soul might be admitted by Saint Peter at the gates of heaven.

Naŋ aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd ay nabùbúhay pa itò y balíta ŋ balítà sa karamútan. Siya mìsmo ay bihíra ŋ magpamísa o magpatúlos 30naŋ kandílaʾ. Aŋ maŋa pulúbi ŋ nagpàpalimòs, kuŋ tumáwag sa kanyà, ay pinalàláyas nya at hindí nilìlimusàn. Kadalasàn ay ipinahàhábul pa nyà sa áso. Aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà ay pinapagtàtrabáho nya naŋ walà ŋ úpa, at kuŋ kanya ŋ pakánin, ay wala ŋ úlam,—asìn at kánin lámaŋ. Sa panunúyo sa kanyà 35naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà, twi ŋ silà y nagsìsiuwèʾ ay nagdádala sila naŋ maŋa manòk, itlòg, biìk, at maŋa búŋa naŋ gúlay o haláman, úpaŋ ibigày kay Maryà. Aŋ maŋa alaála ŋ itò ay hindí nila ibiníbigay dahilàn sa kanilà ŋ pagmamahàl kay Maryà, dátapwat pára ŋ isa ŋ súhol, úpaŋ sila y hwag masiyádu ŋ alipustaìn 40sa kanilà ŋ pagparoòn sa kanya ŋ báhay. Kuŋ si Maryà namàn [74]ay lumálabas sa búkid sa kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà, aŋ báwat màkíta nya sa pamamáhay nila na kanya ŋ màgustuhàn ay kinùkúha nya naŋ wala ŋ kibòʾ at hindí nya binàbayáran. Kuŋ halimbáwa y makàkíta sya sa kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà naŋ isà ŋ bágu ŋ yári ŋ 5bákol, biláo, bistày, bayòŋ, banìg, palayòk, lumbò, sandòk, kalàn, o iba pà ŋ kasaŋkápan sa báhay, ay kinùkúha nyà at ipinadádala nyà sa kanya ŋ báhay. Kuŋ hindí nya magámit aŋ maŋa pinagkúkuha nyà ay ipinagbíbili nyà. Gayon dìn aŋ gawá nya sa maŋa háyop naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà. Dáhil díto y yumáman sya ŋ 10agàd.

When her sister Maria was still alive, she was known far and wide for her avarice. She herself rarely had masses said or made offerings of candles. When beggars asking for alms called on her, she had them driven away and gave them no alms. Often also she had them chased with dogs. She forced her peons to work without pay, and when she gave them rations it was without meat or vegetables,—only boiled rice with salt. To propitiate her, her peons, whenever they went home, brought chickens, eggs, young pigs, and vegetables or fruits to give to Maria. They did not make these presents for love of Maria, but as a kind of bribe, so that they might not be too harshly treated during their stay in her house. But when Maria went to the country to her workmen, she appropriated without saying a word and without paying for it, everything she saw in their house that took her fancy. When, for instance, she saw at her workmen’s a new basket, tray, sieve, sack, mat, [75]pot, cup, dipper, brazier, or other household utensil, she took it and carried it off to her house. When she could not make use of the things she had taken, she sold them. She acted in the same way about animals that belonged to her servants. In this way she had quickly grown rich.

Naŋ sya y máy-roon nà ŋ tatlu ŋ áraw na namámatày, aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd ay nàròroòn sa kanyà ŋ báhay at doòn nagpàpalípas naŋ pagdadalamháteʾ. Isa ŋ hápun naŋ sya y naglálakad sa hàlamanàn, nátabi syà sa balòn na nása bakúran. Nàpagúlat 15sya, sapagkàt sa ilálim naŋ balòn ay may nárinig syà ŋ tumàtáwag sa kanya ŋ paŋálan. Itinuŋu nyà aŋ kanya ŋ úlo sa balòn at doòn ay lálu ŋ nárinig nyà ŋ mabúte aŋ pagtáwag, dátapuwat walá sya ŋ màkíta ŋ táo na káhit anò.

When she had been dead about three days, her sister was at her house, spending the period of mourning. One evening, when she was walking in the garden she came to the side of a well that was in the yard. She was surprised, for from the depth of the well she heard someone calling her name. She turned her head toward the well and there she again clearly heard the calling, although she could see nobody whatever.

Sinábi naŋ bóses: “Áki ŋ kapatìd, akò ay si Mariyà. Aŋ 20ginawá ku ŋ pamumúhay na karamútan, kasakimàn, at kalupitàn ay áki ŋ pinagbàbayáran ŋayòn. Akò ay nàrìrinè sa pàrusahàn ni Bathálà sa lahàt naŋ makasalánan. Kuŋ maàárì ay hwàg mu akò ŋ tuláran, at ikaw sána y humánap naŋ paraàn úpaŋ maháŋo mo akò díto sa kumúkulu ŋ laŋìs na áki ŋ tìráhan ŋayòn.”

The voice said: “My sister, I am Maria. I am paying now for my life of avarice, selfishness and cruelty. I am here in the Lord’s place of punishment for all sinners. If it may be, do not follow my example, but seek some means to save me from the boiling oil here which is now my place of dwelling.”

25Aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd ay lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagkahápis, at sya y naparoòn agàd sa páreʾ, úpaŋ ipagtanòŋ kuŋ papáno aŋ paraà ŋ magágawà nyà úpaŋ maháŋo nya sa infyèrno aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd. Ipináyo naŋ páriʾ na sya y magsadyá sa isa ŋ báyan na máy-roo ŋ laráwan ni Sam-Pédro na milagróso. Aŋ laráwa ŋ 30itò ni Sam-Pédro ay nakìkipagúsap sa maŋa táo at naghàhátol naŋ sarì-sári ŋ paraàn úpaŋ makapások sa láŋit. Iyùn aŋ kanya ŋ milágro.

Her sister was much grieved then and went at once to the priest to ask to what means she could resort to rescue her sister from Hell. The priest advised her to go to a certain town where there was a wonder-working image of Saint Peter. This image of Saint Peter talked with people and advised various means of getting into Heaven. This was its miracle.

Aŋ kapatìd ni Maryà ay nagsadyá agad-agàd sa báya ŋ kinàdòroonàn naŋ Sam-Pédro ŋ milagróso. Naŋ dumatìŋ sya roòn at 35nakìkipagúsap na syà kay Sam-Pédro, sinábi nya aŋ lahàt-lahàt. Sinábi nya ŋ aŋ sábi sa kanyà naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd ay aŋ kanya ŋ ginawà ŋ karamútan, kasakimàn, at kalupitàn ay sya nyà ŋ ikinahúlog sa infyèrno.

Maria’s sister went immediately to the town where stood the miraculous Saint Peter. When she got there and talked with Saint Peter, she told him the whole story. She said that her sister had told her that her avarice, selfishness, and cruelty had caused her to be thrown into Hell.

“Kuŋ gayòn,” aŋ wíkà ni Sam-Pédro, “humánap ka naŋ 40káhit íisa ŋ táo, háyop, o haláman na ginawaàn naŋ iyo ŋ kapatìd naŋ isà ŋ kabàítan. Kuŋ ikàw ay makàkíta nà, bumalik kà ŋ mulí sa ákin, at bìbigyàn kità naŋ paraà ŋ ikahàháŋo mo sa hírap sa iyo ŋ kapatìd.”

“In that case,” said Saint Peter, “find you but one single person, animal, or plant that was the object of an act of kindness on the part of your sister. When you have managed to find it, come back to me, and I shall give you a means to rescue your sister from damnation.”

Aŋ kapatìd ni Maryà ay umuwí agàd sa kanila ŋ báyan, at [76]díto y nagusísà sya sa lahàt naŋ namàmáyan kuŋ síno aŋ may útaŋ na loòb sa kanya ŋ kapatìd o kayá kuŋ síno aŋ kanya ŋ ginawàn o pinagsalitaàn naŋ mabúti. Dátapuwat káhit isà ay walà ŋ makasagòt. Aŋ maŋa háyop namàn sa maŋa kápit-báhay 5at sa bakúran ni Maryà aŋ kanya ŋ pinagusisàʾ, dátapuwat walá rin syà ŋ nàkíta na ginawaàn naŋ mabúti naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd.

Maria’s sister went home to their town at once and there she inquired of all the townspeople which of them owed any debt of gratitude to her sister, or which of them had been well treated or kindly spoken to by her. But not one of them was able to answer. The animals also of the neighbors and on Maria’s own grounds were interrogated by her, but here she found none that had been done a kindness by her sister.

Aŋ isa ŋ áso ŋ buto t balàt ay nagsábi sa kanyà: “Isa ŋ hápon akò y gutòm na gutòm. Nakádaan akò sa kanyà ŋ bakúran naŋ isa ŋ butò. Itò y kinagat kò at áki ŋ dinádala, naŋ màkíta 10nya akò. Ipinahábol nya akò ŋ agàd, at naŋ bitíwan ko aŋ butò itò y ipinabaon nyà sa lúpaʾ. Iyan bà y isa ŋ kabàítan?”

One dog, a creature of skin and bones, said to her: “One afternoon I was very hungry. I found a bone in her yard. I seized it and was carrying it off, when she saw me. She had me chased at once, and when I dropped the bone she had it buried in the ground. Was that an act of kindness?” [77]

Lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ hápis naŋ kapatìd ni Mariyà at untì-untì ŋ nawáwalà aŋ kanya ŋ pagása na maháŋo sa hírap aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Inumpisahan nyà ŋ usisáin aŋ maŋa haláman sa bakúran 15naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Inisa-isà nya ŋ lahàt aŋ maŋa kalabása, úpo, pipíno, síle, milòn, siŋkamàs, manèʾ, talòŋ, sítaw, at sibúyas, báwaŋ, at iba pà ŋ gúlay. Sa kanilà y walá sya ŋ nàkíta naŋ kanya ŋ hinàhánap. Isinunòd namàn nyà aŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy. Siniyásat nya isà-isà aŋ maŋa púnò naŋ síko, anúnas, 20átis, mabúlo, súhàʾ, dalandàn, dáyap, at balúbad. Ŋúnit walá ri ŋ nagìŋ katuturàn aŋ kanya ŋ págod; íisa na lámaŋ paŋkàt naŋ maŋa haláman aŋ hindí pa nya naùusísaʾ, at kuŋ díto y hindí sya makàkíta naŋ kanya ŋ hánap, ay walá sya ŋ magágawà sa pagdudúsa naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Nalíbot nya sila ŋ lahàt, dátapuwat 25walà ŋ nakapagsábi na tumaŋgàp sila naŋ isà ŋ gawà ŋ kabàítan sa kay Maryà.

The grief of Maria’s sister became much greater, and her hope of rescuing her sister from damnation was gradually failing. She began to question the plants in her sister’s yard. She took one by one all the gourds, pumpkins, cucumbers, chile peppers, melons, sincamas, peanuts, egg-plants, cow-peas, and onions and garlic, and other vegetables. She did not find among them that which she sought. She also went through the trees. She made inquiry, one after the other, of the chico, anona, custard-apple, mabolo, grape-fruit, orange, lime, and casoy trees. But here too her labor gave no result; only the group of the garden-plants she had not yet questioned, and if here she did not find what she sought, there would be nothing for her to do about the punishment her sister was undergoing. She went to them all, but there were not any who could say that they had received any kindness from Maria.

Sa kàhuli-hulíhan pumaroòn aŋ kapatìd sa tabì naŋ balòn, at doòn inusísà nya ŋ lahàt aŋ maŋa damò. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ gabì ay íisa na lámaŋ na púnu-ŋ-damò aŋ hindí nya naùusísaʾ. Itò y 30nilapítan nya na punò ŋ punú naŋ tákot at pagása.

At the very last the sister went to the side of the well, and there she questioned all the blades of grass. When night came there was only one head of grass which she had not yet questioned. Full of fear and hope she approached it.

Itinanùŋ nya sa púno naŋ damò na nàtàtanìm sa tabì naŋ balòn: “Naŋ nabùbúhay ba aŋ áki ŋ kapatìd, ay ginawàn ka nyà naŋ isà ŋ kabàítan?”

She asked the head of grass which grew by the side of the well: “When my sister was alive, did she ever do you an act of kindness?”

Isinagòt naŋ damò: “Ó! Aŋ iyo bà ŋ kapatìd? Siyà ŋàʾ, 35siyà aŋ nagbigày sa ákin naŋ bágo ŋ búhay. Noò ŋ tagáraw na nagdaàn, lantà ŋ lanta nà aŋ áki ŋ maŋa dáhon at akò y malápit na ŋ mamatày, dátapuwat aŋ iyò ŋ kapatìd ay nalígoʾ isa ŋ hápon sa tabì naŋ balo ŋ itò. Sa kanya ŋ pagpalígoʾ ay nàwisikan akò naŋ túbig at dáhil díto y lumakàs ako ŋ mulìʾ, at aŋ maŋa lantà 40ku ŋ dáhon ay nanaríwa ŋ muliʾ.”

“Oh, your sister?” answered the grass, “Yes, it was she who gave me new life. Last summer my blades were all withered and I was near to dying, but your sister bathed one evening by the side of this well. As she bathed, some water was sprinkled on me, so that I grew again and my withered blades became fresh once more.”

Wala ŋ pagkàsyahàn aŋ nagiŋ tuwá naŋ kapatìd ni Maryà, at sa gabì ri ŋ iyòn ay nagbalìk sya kay Sam-Pédro. Binigyan syà ni Sam-Pédro naŋ isa ŋ dàsálan, at sinábi sa kanyà na umuwé [78]sya at iláwit nya sa balòn aŋ dàsála ŋ iyòn. Tawágin nya si Maryà at pakapítin nya sa dàsálan, at dáhil díto y mahàháŋù nya sa hírap aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd.

Maria’s sister could not contain the joy which arose in her, and that very night she returned to Saint Peter. Saint Peter gave her a rosary and told her to go home and to hang this rosary down into the well. She was to call Maria and let her take hold of the rosary; by this means her sister could be rescued from damnation.

Nagbalìk sya ŋ agàd at sumìsíkat pa lámaŋ aŋ áraw naŋ sya 5y dumatìŋ sa bakúran ni nasíra ŋ Maryà. Lumápit sya sa balòn, inilawit nyà aŋ dàsálan, at tináwag nya aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Itò y lumitàw sa ibábaw naŋ túbig at humáwak sa dàsálan. Inumpisahàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd aŋ paghátak sa dàsálan at sya y nátaas nà untì-untèʾ.

She went home at once, and hardly was the sun shining, when she came to the yard of the deceased Maria. She approached the well, let down the rosary, and called her sister. Maria emerged from under the water and took hold of the rosary. Her sister began to pull at the rosary and she was slowly lifted up.

10Sa pagháŋo ŋ itò sa kanyà ay máy-roo ŋ ibà ŋ káluluwa na íbig di ŋ makaalìs sa infyèrno. Kanyá silà y nagsikápit sa paà ni Maryà, naŋ màkíta nilà na itò y nahàháŋù sa hírap. Dátapuwat naŋ aŋ paà ni Maryà ay sya na lámaŋ nàlùlubòg sa túbig aŋ ginawá nya y ikinawàg nya aŋ dalawa ŋ paà, úpaŋ aŋ maŋa káluluwa 15ŋ nàkàkápit sa kanyà ay maŋàkabitàw.

As she was thus being rescued, some other souls too wanted to escape from Hell. So they all took hold of Maria’s feet, when they saw that she was being rescued from damnation. But when only Maria’s feet were still under water, she shook her two feet, so that the souls who had hold of her should have to let go.

Naŋ itù y gawin nyà ay napatìd aŋ dàsálan at agad-agàd sya ŋ lumubùg sa balòn, at mulá noon ay hindí nà sya nàkaúsap naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd.

When she did this the rosary broke and she at once fell into the well, and from that time on her sister was never again able to communicate with her. [79]

Bumalìk itò kay Sam-Pédro at ibinalítaʾ aŋ naŋyáre, dátapuwat 20sinábe ni Sam-Pédro na walá na sila ŋ magágawa úpaŋ maháŋo sa infyèrno aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd.

The sister went back to Saint Peter and told him what had happened, but Saint Peter said that there was no longer anything that they could do to save her sister from Hell.
[Contents]

22. Tatlò ŋ káluluwa ŋ tumáwag kay Sam-Pédro.

22. Three souls who called upon Saint Peter.

Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ bágu ŋ táwu ŋ makísig. Dátapuwat naŋ dumatìŋ sya sa gúlaŋ na dalawa ŋ pù t dalawà, sya y nagkasakìt 25naŋ malubhàʾ at dí nalaúnan at namatày siyà. Aŋ kanya ŋ káluluwa ay naparoòn sa láŋit at tumuktòk sa pintúan nitò.

Juan was a gay bachelor. But when he reached the age of twenty-two he fell very sick and it was not long before he died. His soul went to Heaven and knocked at its gate.

Si Sam-Pédro ay sumagòt sa kanya ŋ pagtuktòk at itinanòŋ nitò: “Sínu ka? Anò aŋ sadyá mo ríto?”

Saint Peter answered his knock and asked: “Who are you? What brings you here?”

Isinagòt naŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn: “Akò aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn. 30Buksan mò aŋ pintòʾ, at íbig ko ŋ pumások.”

Juan’s soul answered: “I am Juan’s soul. Open the door, for I want to come in.”

Binuksàn naŋ bantay-pintòʾ aŋ pintúan, at bágu nya binayáa ŋ makapások aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn ay sinyásat múna nya naŋ ganitò: “Ano aŋ dáhil at naparíto ka? Ano aŋ kabànála ŋ ginawá mo sa lúpaʾ at nagakálà ka ŋ nàbàbágay sa yò aŋ kaginhawáhan 35sa láŋit? Ikàw bagà y may iníwa ŋ asáwa?”

The door-keeper opened the gate, but before he allowed Juan’s soul to enter, he questioned him as follows: “Why have you come here? What acts of piety have you performed on earth that you think you are entitled to the joys of Heaven? Have you left a wife behind you?”

Aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn ay nagsábi: “Naŋ akò y nása lúpà pa, madalàs aku ŋ magsimbà, magdasàl, at maglimòs, dátapuwat hindí ako nagkapálad na magasáwa.”

Juan’s soul said: “When I was still on earth I often went to church, prayed, and gave alms, but I did not have the good fortune to get married.”

Isinagòt naŋ bantay-pintòʾ: “Hindí ka dápat magtamò naŋ 40kaginhawáhan sa láŋit.” [80]

The door-keeper answered: “You are not fit to partake of the joys of Heaven.” [81]

At pagkàsábi nya nitò ay isinara nyà aŋ pintòʾ. Aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn ay hindí nakapások sa láŋit.

And when he had said this he closed the door. Juan’s soul was not able to enter Heaven.

Pagkaalìs ni Hwàn ay dumatìŋ namàn aŋ isa pa rì ŋ káluluwa.

When Juan had gone away, another soul arrived.

5“Sínu ka? At bákit mo gustò ŋ pumások sa láŋit? Ikaw bà y nagasáwa naŋ násàsa lúpà pà?” aŋ maŋa tanùŋ naŋ bantay-pintòʾ.

“Who are you? And why do you wish to come into Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?” asked the door-keeper.

Isinagòt naŋ káluluwa: “Akù y aŋ káluluwa niy Andrès. Nagasáwa akò naŋ akò y násàsa lúpà pa. Buksan mò aŋ pintòʾ 10at íbig ko ŋ pumások.”

The soul answered: “I am the soul of Andrés. I took a wife when I was yet on earth. Open the gate for I want to come in.”

Agad-agàd na binuksàn ni Sam-Pédro aŋ pintú naŋ láŋit at pagkàkíta nya sa káluluwa niy Andrès ay sinábi nya: “Ó! Kàwáwa ŋ káluluwa! Sa maŋà gáya mo nàtàtaàn at nàràrápat aŋ maŋa kaginhawáhan sa láŋit. Pumásuk ka!”

At once Saint Peter opened the gate of Heaven, and when he saw the soul of Andrés he said: “Oh, pitiable soul! For such as you the joys of Heaven are reserved and fitting. Enter!”

15Aŋ káluluwa ni Andrès ay tuwa ŋ twá at pumások sa masayà ŋ tàhánan.

The soul of Andrés was overjoyed and entered the abode of bliss.

Pagkásara naŋ pintò ay máy-roon na namà ŋ tumuktòk.

When the door was closed there was another knock.

“Sínu ka?” aŋ tanoŋ ulí naŋ bantày.

“Who are you?” the keeper asked again.

“Akò y aŋ káluluwa ni Mariyáno,” aŋ sagòt naŋ tumuktòk.

“I am the soul of Mariano,” answered the one who had knocked.

20“Bákit ka naparíto? Bákit ka nagakála ŋ marápat ka ŋ magtamò naŋ láŋit? Ikàw bagà y nagasáwa naŋ násàsa lúpa ka pà?”

“Why have you come here? Why do you think that you deserve to partake of Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?”

Sa maŋa tanùŋ na itò y isinagòt naŋ káluluwa ni Mariyáno: “Naŋ akò y násàsa lúpà pa madalàs akù ŋ magpamísa. Aŋ kalahátì 25naŋ yáman ko ay ibinigay kò sa simbáhan sa pagpapamísa at maŋa pagpapatugtòg naŋ kampánaʾ. Aŋ nàipatúlus kò ŋ kandílà ay hindí mahìhíla naŋ tatlò ŋ kalabàw, at kuŋ sa pagaasáwa namàn,” idinugtuŋ nyà, “akò y nagkaroòn naŋ dalawà. Nabáo akù at nagasáwa ŋ mulìʾ.”

To these questions the soul of Mariano answered: “When I was still on earth I often had masses said. Half of my wealth I gave to the Church for the saying of masses and the ringing of bells. The candles I offered up could not be drawn by three carabao, and as to getting married,” continued the soul, “I was married twice. I became a widower and married again.”

30“Áki ŋ ikinalúluŋkot aŋ hindí ko pagkaári ŋ papasúkin kità. Aŋ maŋa lóku ŋ gáya mo ay wala ŋ lugàr díto sa kahariyàn naŋ láŋit.”

“I am very sorry that I am not able to let you in. There is no place for madmen like you in the Kingdom of Heaven.”

At isinara nyà aŋ pintòʾ.

And he closed the door.
[Contents]

23. Si Hwà ŋ baŋkéro.

23. Juan the canoer.

35Isa ŋ áraw isa ŋ Kastílaʾ ay napatátawìd kay Hwàn sa kanya ŋ baŋkàʾ sa ibáyo naŋ ílog. Aŋ Kastíla ŋ sakay nyà ay marúnuŋ magsalitá naŋ Tagálog. Kanyàʾ, naŋ silà y nàlàlayú na sa pasígan, ay nagumpisa syà naŋ pakikipagúsap kay Hwàn.

One day a Spaniard was having Juan ferry him across the river in his canoe. The Spaniard, Juan’s fare, was able to speak Tagalog. Accordingly, while they were still far from shore, he began a conversation with Juan.

Aŋ Kastíla ŋ itò ay isa ŋ marúnoŋ na táo, sigúro ŋ isa ŋ 40gurù ŋ balítà sa Espánya, at itò y nàpagkìkilála sa pagsasalitá [82]nya kay Hwàn tuŋkùl sa heyugrafíya, aritmétika, at iba t ibà ŋ wíkà sa Ewrúpa.

This Spaniard was a learned man, no doubt a famous scholar in Spain, and this showed itself in his discourse to Juan regarding geography, arithmetic, and various languages of Europe. [83]

Naŋ matápus aŋ kanya ŋ pagsasalitàʾ, ay nagtanùŋ syà kay Hwàn naŋ ganitò: “Ikàw ba y nagáral naŋ hewgrafíya?”

When his discourse was ended, he asked Juan: “Have you studied geography?”

5“Hindí pòʾ,” aŋ sagòt ni Hwàn,—at katunáya y uwalà ŋ mwàŋ si Hwàn, sapagkàt sya y lumakì sa hírap at sa gayò y panày na pagtatrabáho lámaŋ aŋ pinagdàdaanan nyà ŋ búhay.

“No, sir,” answered Juan,—and in truth, Juan had no education, for he had grown up in poverty, so that his life at all times was nothing but ceaseless work.

Aŋ Kastílà ay nàpagúlat sa sagòt ni Hwàn at sinábe niya ŋ agàd: “Dináramdam ko, kaybígan, aŋ hindí mu pagkáalam 10naŋ hewgrafíya, sapagkàt dáhil díto y pára ŋ nawalàʾ aŋ kalahátì naŋ iyo ŋ búhay.”

The Spaniard was astonished at Juan’s answer and said at once: “I am sorry, friend, that you do not know geography, for in consequence half your life, as it were, is lost.”

Si Hwàn ay hindí kumibòʾ at patúluy dìn aŋ pagsagwàn.

Juan did not utter a word, and kept on paddling.

Hindí nalaúnan at tumanùŋ namàn aŋ Kastílaʾ: “Nagáral ka bà naŋ aritmétika?”

It was not long before the Spaniard again asked: “Have you studied arithmetic?”

15“Hindí pòʾ,” aŋ sagòt ni Hwàn.

“No, sir,” answered Juan.

“Kuŋ gayòn, kaybígan, ay pára ŋ nawalá sa iyò aŋ ikápat na baháge naŋ iyo ŋ búhay.”

“If that is the case, friend, a fourth of your life is lost to you, as it were.”

Si Hwàn ay natákot naŋ kauntìʾ, sapagkàt hindí nya màpagkúro aŋ íbig sabíhin naŋ Kastílaʾ.

Juan became a little frightened, for he could not make out what the Spaniard was trying to say.

20Sinábi nya sa kanya ŋ saríli: “Kàwáwà ka, Hwàn, walá nà ŋ nàtìtirà naŋ iyu ŋ búhay, kuŋ hindí isa ŋ ikápat na partè lámaŋ.”

He said to himself: “You poor fellow, Juan, only a fourth of your life is left now.”

Naŋ aŋ baŋká nila ay násàsa malálim na lugàr na naŋ ílog, at hábaŋ aŋ Kastílà namàn ay pinagkùkúro aŋ malakì ŋ kamaŋmaŋàn 25naŋ maŋa táo ŋ trabahadùr sa Filipínas, si Hwàn ay tumanùŋ naŋ ganitò sa kanya ŋ sakày: “Marúnoŋ pú ba kayo ŋ lumaŋòy?”

When their canoe had got to a deep part of the river, and while the Spaniard was reflecting upon the great ignorance of the working people in the Philippines, Juan asked his passenger this question: “Do you know how to swim, sir?”

“Hindìʾ!” aŋ sagut agàd naŋ Kastílaʾ.

“No,” answered the Spaniard at once.

“Kuŋ gayòn,” aŋ sagot ni Hwàn, “ay hindí lámaŋ pára 30kayù ŋ nawalàn naŋ boò ŋ inyo ŋ búhay, dátapwat nawalá na ŋà ŋ túnay.”

“In that case,” answered Juan, “you have lost your whole life, not only as it were, but you have lost it in all truth.”

At sinabayàn nya itù naŋ pagtataòb naŋ baŋkà ŋ sinàsakyan nilà. Si Hwàn ay lumaŋùy sa pasígan at aŋ Kastílà namàn ay tinaŋày naŋ ágos.

And while he spoke these words he tipped over the canoe they were riding in. Juan swam to the shore, but the Spaniard was carried away by the stream.
[Contents]

3524. Aŋ kabàítan sa maŋa háyop.

24. Kindness to animals.

Isà ŋ gabì ŋ madilìm ay naglálakad si Hwàn sa maŋa kaparáŋa ŋ malaláyoʾ sa maŋa báyan. Sya y patúŋo sa kanya ŋ báyan. Bágu sya makaratìŋ díto ay kinàkayiláŋa ŋ magdaàn sya sa maŋa ilàŋ na lugàr.

40Isa ŋ gabì na sya y naglálakad sa ganitò ŋ lugàr biglá sya [84]ŋ nàpagúlat sa pagdatìŋ naŋ isa ŋ púsa ŋ itìm na humúni at kinámot aŋ kanya ŋ paà. Aŋ ginawá nya y úbus-lakàs nya ŋ sinípa aŋ púsaʾ, at itò y nàpahitsà naŋ maláyoʾ. Ipinatúluy nya aŋ paglalakàd, dátapuwat hindí nalaúnan at nagbalìk na namàn 5sa kanyà aŋ púsaʾ. Lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ kanya ŋ gálit at sinípà nya ŋ mulìʾ aŋ púsaʾ. Inakálà nya ŋ aŋ púsa ŋ iyòn ay isà ŋ laruwàn naŋ tyának o asuwàŋ. Ipinatúluy nya aŋ paglákad. Hindí naluwatàn at aŋ púsa ŋ itèm ay nagbalìk na mulí sa kanyà. Ŋayòn, sa lugàr naŋ sipáin nya aŋ púsaʾ, itò y hinawákan nyà 10at dinala nyà sa kanya ŋ bisìg, kanya ŋ hinagòd, at pinagtátapìk, at sinábi nya sa púsaʾ: “Mabaìt na púsàʾ, anò aŋ gusto mò? Sàsáma ka ba sa áki ŋ paglalakàd?” at ipinatúluy nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ paglákad.

One dark night Juan was walking in some forests far from any towns. He was on his way to his home town. Before he could arrive there, he had to pass through some uncanny places. One night, when he was walking in such a place, he was suddenly startled by the arrival of a black cat which purred and scratched at his leg. What he did [85]was to kick the cat with all his might, and it was tossed a good distance. He kept on walking, but it was not long before the cat came back to him. His anger greatly increased, and he kicked the cat again. He thought that this cat was the plaything of some goblin or vampire. He kept on walking. It was not long before the black cat again came back to him. This time, instead of kicking the cat, he took hold of it, lifted it up on his arm, stroked it and patted it, and said to it: “Good little cat, what do you want? Are you going to come along with me on my journey?” and he continued walking.

Hindí nalaúnan at sya y sinumpòŋ naŋ antòk. Sa daàn ay 15máy nàkíta sya ŋ isa ŋ báhay, dátapuwat aŋ maŋa táo sa báyan ay may paniwála ŋ iŋkantádo aŋ báhay na iyòn. Dátapuwat walà ŋ iba ŋ màtulúgan si Hwàn, kaniyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya y pumanhik syà sa báhay úpaŋ doòn matúlog.

After a while he was attacked by sleepiness. He saw a house by the way, but the people in his town believed that this house was enchanted. However, Juan had no other place to sleep, so he entered the house to sleep there.

Sya y náhimbìŋ, dátapuwat naŋ naghàháti-ŋ-gabi nà ay 20nágisiŋ sya sa kàluskúsan naŋ maŋa dagàʾ. Aŋ ginawá nya y pinagsisipá nya at pinagdadagukàn aŋ maŋa dagàʾ úpaŋ kanya ŋ patayìn o kayà y palayásin. Dátapuwat aŋ maŋa dagàʾ ay dumámi naŋ dumámi haŋgàŋ sa napunòʾ aŋ kuwàrto at sya y kanilà ŋ pinagkakagàt.

He fell sound asleep, but at midnight he was awakened by the pattering of rats. He set about kicking and striking at the rats to kill them or drive them away. But the rats became more and more numerous until the room became full and they bit him and gnawed at him.

25Aŋ ginawá ni Hwàn ay kinúha nya aŋ kanya ŋ púsa ŋ itìm at sinábi nya ríto ŋ patain nyà aŋ maŋa dagàʾ. Aŋ púsàʾ ay ŋumiyàw at inumpisahàn aŋ paghábol sa maŋa dagàʾ. Malakì aŋ nagìŋ tákot naŋ maŋa dagàʾ, at aŋ maŋa hindí nápatay naŋ púsa ay nagsipagtakbò sa kaní-kanilà ŋ luŋgàʾ. Naŋ màkíta ni Hwàn 30na walá na ŋ nàtìtirà sa maŋa dagà kuŋ hindí dádalawa lámaŋ, ay pinapaghintú nya aŋ púsaʾ. Kanya ŋ hinúli aŋ dalawa ŋ dagàʾ at kanya ŋ inámoʾ at inakálà nya ŋ isáma rìn silà na gáya naŋ púsà sa kanya ŋ paglalakàd.

It was then that Juan took his black cat and told it to kill the rats. The cat miewed and began to chase the rats. Great fear seized the rats, and those that were not killed by the cat ran to their holes. When Juan saw that there were no rats left except only a single pair, he stopped the cat. He caught the two rats and petted them and decided to take them along on his journey, just like the cat.

Kinàbukásan ay ipinatúluy nya aŋ kanya ŋ paglalakàd. Inabútan 35sya naŋ gabè sa isa ŋ lugàr na wala ŋ báhay, kanyá aŋ ginawá nya y ipinatúluy nya aŋ paglalakàd papuntà sa isa ŋ báhay na árì naŋ isa ŋ matandàʾ. Nagkátaon namàn na aŋ matanda ŋ itò y isà ŋ eŋkantadòr. Pinatúluy nya si Hwàn at pinatúlog nya sa isa ŋ silìd. Si Hwàn ay natúlog naŋ walà ŋ paghihinálà 40naŋ anu màn.

On the next day he continued his journey. He was overtaken by night in a place where there were no houses, so he walked on toward a house owned by a certain old man. Now it happened that this old man was an enchanter. He took Juan in and gave him an alcove to sleep in. Juan went to sleep without suspecting anything.

Dátapuwat, naŋ mágisiŋ syà kinàbukásan, ay nàpagúlat sya at natákot naŋ màkíta nya ŋ sya y nàkùkulòŋ sa isa ŋ kahòn na walà ŋ bùkásan. Pinagsipá nya aŋ maŋa diŋdìŋ naŋ kahòn, dátapuwat [86]walá sya ŋ magawàʾ, itò y hindí nya mabuksàn. Malakì aŋ kanya ŋ pagdadalamháteʾ at walá sya ŋ màláma ŋ gawìn, naŋ màalaála nya ŋ sya y may kasáma ŋ isà ŋ púsa at dalawà ŋ dagá sa kanya ŋ kùlúŋan. Kinúha nya aŋ dalawa ŋ dagàʾ, inamù-amú 5nya, at sinábi nya ŋ bumútas silà sa kahò ŋ kanila ŋ kinàkùkuluŋàn. Aŋ maŋa dagà ay nagumpisà naŋ pagkagàt sa tablà at untì-untí sila ŋ nakagawá naŋ húkay sa makapàl na tablà, haŋgàŋ sa itò y nabútas. Naŋ makabútas na silà ay bumalìk silà ŋ mulí kay Hwàn at si Hwàn namàn ay pinabútas silà ŋ mulìʾ sa 10dindìŋ naŋ kùlúŋan. Sa paguúlit-úlit naŋ kanila ŋ paggawá naŋ maŋa bútas, sa kalaúnan ay nakagawá silà naŋ isà ŋ malaki ŋ bútas, at si Hwàn ay nakawalàʾ.

However, when he woke up on the next day, he was surprised and frightened when he saw that he was locked up in a box without any opening. He kicked at the walls of the box, but was not able to do anything: he could not open it. Great was his despair, and he did not know what to do, when he remembered that he had a cat and two rats with him in his prison. He took the two rats, petted them, and told them to make a hole in the box in which they were confined. The rats began to gnaw at the boards, and gradually they succeeded in making a hole in the thick board, until it was pierced through. When they had pierced it, they returned to Juan, and Juan had them again pierce the wall of the prison. When they had made holes again and again, they finally succeeded in making a large opening, and Juan was able to escape. [87]

Aŋ matandà ay hinánap ni Hwàn, dátapuwat itò y hindí nya màkíta káhit saàn. Kanyà ipinatúluy nyà aŋ pagwèʾ, at doòn naŋ 15dumatìŋ sya ay ipinamalítà nya aŋ malakì ŋ serbísyo na ginawá sa kanyà naŋ kanya ŋ tatlò ŋ kaybíga ŋ isà ŋ púsaʾ at dalawa ŋ dagàʾ.

Juan looked for the old man, but did not find him anywhere. So he continued on his way home, and when he arrived there, he told of the great service which had been done him by his three friends, a cat and two rats.
[Contents]

25. Si Hwà ŋ maŋdudúkit.

25. Juan the sculptor.

Nàbása ku sa isa ŋ nobéla ŋ Kastílaʾ na aŋ pamagàt ay “La 20tùmba de yèrro” aŋ sumúsunòd.

I once read, in a Spanish novel entitled La tumba de hierro, the following story:

Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ báta ŋ lilimáhi ŋ taòn, anàk naŋ isà ŋ kasamà naŋ mayáma ŋ si Andrès. Si Hwàn mulá pa sa pagkabátàʾ ay pípe, dátapuwat hindìʾ biŋè. Gayon dìn aŋ pagkapípe nya ay hindí malubhàʾ, sapagkàt kadalasàn sya y nakasísigàw, 25dátapuwat hindí ŋàʾ lámaŋ gáya naŋ tinìg naŋ karanyúwa ŋ bátaʾ aŋ sa kanyà.

Juan was a child of five years, the son of a workman of the wealthy Andrés. Juan was dumb from birth, but not deaf. Moreover, his dumbness was not complete, for often he was able to cry out, though his voice was not like that of a normal child.

Isa ŋ gabì si Andrès ay dumálaw sa báhay naŋ kanyà ŋ kasamà na ama ni Hwàn, at sa kanya ŋ pagdálaw na ytò y isináma nya aŋ kanya ŋ anàk na babáye, lilimáhin dì ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ. 30Káhit na pípe si Hwàn ay nakipagkayibígan sya sa anàk naŋ kanya ŋ paŋinoòn, at silà ŋ dalawà y nagsipaglaròʾ hábaŋ aŋ kanilà ŋ maŋa amà ay nagsàsàlitáan naŋ tuŋkòl sa pananìm. Ipinakíta nya kay Maryà (na sya ŋ paŋálan naŋ kanya ŋ kalaròʾ) aŋ maŋa larwan nyà na gawá naŋ kanya ŋ saríli ŋ kamày 35at talíno.

One evening Andrés visited the house of his workman, Juan’s father, and on this visit he brought along his daughter, who also was five years old. In spite of his dumbness, Juan made friends with his master’s child, and the two played together while their fathers were discussing matters of farming. He showed Maria (this was the name of his playmate) his toys, which he had made by his own hand and skill.

Aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa laruwàn ay sarì-sári ŋ mukhá naŋ táo na ginawá nya at nayàyárì naŋ pútik. Marámi rin díto aŋ maŋa buò ŋ táo na may sarì-sári ŋ anyòʾ. Aŋ ibà y nagtátanìm, aŋ ibà y nagsásayàw, aŋ ibà y nakahigàʾ, at gayon dìn may maŋa 40nagbúbunòʾ, nagtàtakbúhan, at iba t iba pà ŋ anyòʾ. Gayon dìn máy maŋa háyop syà; aŋ ibà y nayàyárì naŋ pútek at aŋ ibà y [88]nayàyári naŋ káhoy.

His toys were all kinds of faces of people which he had made, and they were made of clay. There were also many whole figures of people in all kinds of positions. Some were planting, some were dancing, some were lying down, and there were also some wrestling, running, and in many other positions. He also had animals; some were made of clay and others were made of wood.

Tumálik aŋ pagkakaybígan naŋ dalawa ŋ bátaʾ at nàwíli sila sa paglalaròʾ. Naŋ makatápus nà aŋ kanila ŋ amà sa pagsasàlitáan ay tináwag ni Andrès si Maryà úpaŋ umwí na silà, dátapuwat 5niyáyà múna ni Maryà aŋ kanya ŋ amà sa lugàr na kinàlàlagyàn naŋ maŋa larwàn ni Hwàn, at úpaŋ itò y màkíta nyà. Naŋ màmasdan ny Andrès aŋ maŋa larwa ŋ yòn ay nàpagúlat sya sa lakì naŋ talíno na ipinakìkilála naŋ dumúkit sa maŋa tao-taóha ŋ iyòn. Sinábi ny Andrès sa ama ni Hwàn na itò y matalíno at 10dápat ipadalà sa pàaralàn. Dátapwat isinagòt naŋ ama ni Hwàn na syà y wala ŋ kwàrta úpaŋ ipapagáral kay Hwàn.

The two children became good friends and were engrossed in play. When their fathers had finished their conversation, Andrés called Maria to go home, but Maria first asked her father to come to where Juan’s toys were, so that he might see them. When Andrés beheld the [89]toys, he was astonished at the great ability shown by the one who had shaped these manikins. Andrés told Juan’s father that Juan was gifted and ought to be sent to school. But Juan’s father answered that he had no money with which to let Juan study.

“Kuŋ gayòn,” sinábi ni Andrès, “ay akò aŋ ùúpa sa mayèstro. Búkas ay páparoon sa ámi ŋ báhay aŋ gurò ni Maryà. Sya y papagtùtuluyìn ku díto sa iyò, úpaŋ umpisahàn nya aŋ pagtutúroʾ 15at pagbubukàs naŋ ísip ni Hwàn.”

“In that case,” said Andrés, “I will pay the teacher. Tomorrow Maria’s teacher is coming to our house. I shall have him go on here to you, to begin the teaching of Juan and the opening up of his mind.”

Napasalámat naŋ marámi ŋ marámi aŋ ama ni Hwàn at silà y naghiwalày. Malakì aŋ ikinaluŋkòt ni Hwàn naŋ umalis nà aŋ kanyà ŋ kalaròʾ.

Juan’s father thanked him profusely, and they parted. Juan was very sorry when his playmate left.

Mulá sa áraw na itò kadalasàn si Hwàn ay ipinasúsundò naŋ 20ama ni Maryà úpaŋ doòn siyà sa kanya ŋ báhay makipaglaròʾ kay Maryà.

From that day on Maria’s father often sent for Juan that he might play with Maria there in his house.

Isa ŋ hápon na silà ŋ dalawà y naglálaro sa hàlamanan naŋ maláwak na bakúran ni Andrès ay nagdaà ŋ lumílipàd sa tabì naŋ dalawa ŋ bátaʾ aŋ isa ŋ paruparò. Itò y kanila ŋ hinábol. Nàùunà 25si Maryà at sumúsunòd si Hwàn. Sa pagtatakbò nilà ay nahúlog si Maryà sa isa ŋ sápa ŋ mabábaw na pàbyáyan naŋ maŋa isdàʾ niy Andrès. Si Hwàn ay nàpasigàw naŋ malakàs at pagsigàw nya ŋ itò y napatiràn sya naŋ lamàn sa lalamúnan at nagdudugòʾ aŋ kanya ŋ bibìg. Hindí nya itò inalintána at tumalòn din sya 30sa sápaʾ úpaŋ iligtàs si Maryà sa pagkalúnod. Sa kababáwan naŋ sápaʾ ay hindí naŋalúnod aŋ dalawà ŋ bátaʾ, dátapuwat siniglàn lámaŋ si Maryà naŋ malaki ŋ tákot na sya nyà ŋ ipinaghimatày naŋ násàsa túbig na syà. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá ni Hwàn ay hinawákan nya si Maryà sa likòd at itinaas nyà úpaŋ hwàg makáinom 35naŋ túbig, hábaŋ syà ay nàsìsísid sa túbig. Ganitò aŋ anyú nila naŋ màdatnan silà naŋ isa ŋ alíla ny Andrès at silà y hináŋo sa sápàʾ. Malakì aŋ pagkàgúlat niy Andrès at malakì aŋ nagiŋ twàʾ naŋ ama ni Hwàn naŋ si Hwàn ay márinig nila ŋ magsalitàʾ at ibalítà sa kanilà aŋ naŋyári.

40Dáhil sa pagsasalitá ni Hwàn ay lálu ŋ lumakàs aŋ kanya ŋ pagsúloŋ sa pagaáral, at gayon dìn lálu ŋ tumálik aŋ pagkakaybígan nila ni Maryà. Dumatìŋ aŋ áraw na sinábi naŋ gurú nya na sya y dápat lumípat naŋ báyan úpaŋ ipatúluy aŋ pagaáral, [90]sapagkàt sya y walá na ŋ màitúro sa kanyà. Itò y sinábi rin nyà kay Andrès. Aŋ ginawá ny Andrès ay ipinadalà si Hwàn sa isa ŋ eskwèlhan naŋ paŋdudúkit, at díto sya nagáral na may ánim na taòn.

One afternoon when the two were playing in the garden in the wide grounds of Andrés, a butterfly came flying past the two children. They ran after it. Maria ran ahead and Juan followed. As they were running, Maria fell into a shallow pool which Andrés used as a fishpond. Juan gave a loud cry, and, as he cried out, a muscle in his throat broke and his mouth bled. He paid no attention to this and jumped into the pool to save Maria from drowning. As the pool was shallow, the two children did not drown, only Maria was filled with great fear, which caused her to faint while still in the water. So what Juan did was to take hold of Maria by her back and lift her up, so that she should not swallow any water,—he himself meanwhile being immersed. They were in this position when a servant of Andrés came upon them and rescued them from the pool.

Great was the surprise of Andrés and great was the joy which came to Juan’s father, when they heard Juan talk and tell them what had happened. What with Juan’s talking, his progress in his studies became much greater and his friendship with Maria grew much stronger.

There came the day when his teacher said that he ought to go to another town to continue his studies, for he could teach him nothing more. He told this also to Andrés. Andrés sent Juan to a school for sculptors, and there he studied for about six years.

5Si Hwàn at si Maryà ay nagsilakì at aŋ kanila ŋ pagkakaybígan ay nagìŋ pagiìbígan. Twì ŋ bakasyòn ay umuwèʾ si Hwàn sa kanilà ŋ báhay sa búkid ni Andrès at doòn sya nagpàpalípas naŋ áraw sa píliŋ ni Mariyà.

Juan and Maria grew up and their friendship turned into love. Every vacation Juan went home to their house on Andrés’ estate, and there he passed the days at Maria’s side.

Dumatìŋ aŋ isa ŋ áraw naŋ pagtatanyágan naŋ maŋa dinúkit 10naŋ maŋa artísta, at dáhil díto y pinagarálan ni Hwàn aŋ isa ŋ áyos na kanya ŋ dápat dukítin parà sa áraw na itò. Aŋ manálo sa maŋa kasále ay bìbigyàn naŋ isa ŋ ganti ŋ pálà na may malaki ŋ kasáma ŋ kwàlta, bukòd sa pagdiríwaŋ sa karàŋálan naŋ mànanalò. May isà ŋ taò ŋ nagtrabáho si Hwàn sa kanya 15ŋ kumpusisyòn.

There came a day for the exhibition of the sculptures of the artists, and Juan had planned a design which he was going to carry out for that day. The victor among the contestants was to be given a prize that was to be accompanied by much money, in addition to a celebration in honor of the winner. For about a year Juan worked at his composition.

Dumatìŋ aŋ áraw naŋ pagtatanyàg naŋ maŋa dinúkit. Si Hwàn, aŋ kanya ŋ amà, si Andrès, at si Maryà ay naparoòn sa báhay na kinàdòroonàn naŋ maŋa dinúkit. Lubhà ŋ marámi aŋ maŋa táo, dátapuwat aŋ pinagkàkalipumpunàn nilà ay aŋ dinúkit 20ni Hwàn. Si Maryà ay nápaiyàk sa twàʾ sa gandà naŋ dinúkit ni Hwàn. Si Andrès namàn ay walà ŋ màláma ŋ sabíhin sa pagpúri. Dumatìŋ aŋ óras naŋ pagpapaháyag naŋ maŋa hukòm kuŋ síno aŋ nanálo, at aŋ dinúkit ni Hwàn ay sya ŋ binaŋgìt na nakakúha naŋ gantì ŋ pálaʾ.

The day for presenting the statues arrived. Juan, his father, [91]Andrés, and Maria went to the building where the statues were. Many people were there, but they were all crowding round Juan’s statue. Andrés did not know what to say in his admiration. The hour came when the judges announced who was the winner, and Juan’s statue was that named as having won the prize.

25Itò y isa ŋ grúpo ŋ máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ babáye ŋ nakatindìg. Aŋ kaliwà ŋ kamày ay may háwak na isa ŋ sulòʾ at aŋ kánan namàn ay isa ŋ koróna ŋ dáhon. Sa banda ŋ kánan naŋ babáe at sa ilálim naŋ koróna ŋ olíva ay may isà ŋ bináta ŋ nàlùluhod aŋ kána ŋ paà. Sa kanya ŋ kaliwàʾ ay may háwak sya ŋ librò 30at sa kánan ay isa ŋ pamukpòk. Sa kanilà ŋ paánan ay nàsàsábug aŋ iba t iba ŋ kasaŋkápan naŋ isa ŋ nagàáral.

It was a group with a standing woman. Her left hand held a torch and her right a crown of leaves. At the right of the woman and under the crown of olive a youth was kneeling on his right foot. In his left hand he was holding a book, and in his right a hammer. At their feet lay scattered various implements of a student.

Naŋ silà y umuwèʾ ipinagtapàt naŋ dalawa ŋ nagkàkàibígan sa kanila ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ aŋ kanila ŋ líhim. Aŋ ama ni Hwàn ay naluŋkòt lámaŋ, sapagkàt nàlàláman nya na aŋ pagkakasàl sa 35kanila ŋ dalawà ay hindí maàáriʾ, sapagkàt aŋ kanila ŋ lagày ay gáya naŋ sa isa ŋ busábos o alípin at isa ŋ paŋinoòn o háreʾ. Pagkáalam ni Andrès sa bágay na itò ay siniglàn sya naŋ malaki ŋ gálit. Ipinatáwag nya si Hwàn at kanya ŋ minúra. Sinábi nya ŋ sya y walà ŋ hyàʾ at hindí marúnoŋ tumanàw naŋ útaŋ 40na loòb, hindí marúnoŋ kumilála sa nagparúnoŋ sa kanyà, at sinábi nya ŋ hindí sya maàári ŋ màpakasàl kay Mariyà. Dáhil díto y sya y umalìs agad-agàd na walà ŋ nakààalàm káhit síno naŋ kanya ŋ patùtuŋúhan. [92]

On the way home the two lovers revealed their secret to their parents. Juan’s father was merely grieved, for he knew that the marriage of the two was not possible, for their position was like that of a slave or thrall and a lord or king. When Andrés learned of the matter, he was filled with great anger. He had Juan called to him and scolded him. He told him he was shameless and did not know how to appreciate favors,—did not know how to repay the man who had given him his education, and told him that he could not marry Maria. Accordingly Juan at once went away without anyone’s knowing his destination.

Nagdaàn aŋ limà o ánim na taòn at si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ paŋdudúkit ay káylan ma y hindí nalìlimútan si Maryà.

Five or six years passed, and Juan at his sculpture did not forget Maria.

Si Mariyà namàn ay nagpalípas naŋ ánim na tao ŋ itò sa kanya ŋ báhay. Nàlùlugmok syà hábaŋ panahòn sa isa ŋ malálim 5na kaluŋkútan at tuwí na y si Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ nààalaála. Si Maryà y nagkasakìt naŋ malubhàʾ at malápit na ŋ mamámatày.

Maria passed these six years in her house. She was sunk at all times in a deep grief, and it was always Juan of whom she was thinking. Maria fell seriously ill and was near to death.

Ipináyu naŋ maŋgagámot nya kay Andrès na, kuŋ íbig nya ŋ máligtas aŋ kanya ŋ anàk, ay sundìn nya aŋ gusto nitò tuŋkòl sa pagaasáwa kay Hwàn. Dátapuwat naŋ pumáyag siy Andrès 10ay lubhà ŋ huli nà. Palalá naŋ palalàʾ aŋ sakìt ni Maryà, at si Hwàn namàn ay hindí nya nàlàláman kuŋ saàn aŋ kinàdòroonàn. Marámi sya ŋ inutúsan sa malalaki ŋ báyan úpaŋ hanápin si Hwàn, dátapuwat nakaraan nà aŋ marámi ŋ áraw ay walá pa ŋ nagkapálad káhit isà sa kanilà na makátagpòʾ kay Hwàn.

Her physician advised Andrés that, if he wanted to save his daughter, he would have to follow her desire regarding marriage to Juan. But when Andrés consented, it was already too late. Maria’s sickness went from bad to worse, and he did not even know where Juan was. He sent many messengers to the large towns to look for Juan, but even when many days had passed, not one of them had succeeded in finding Juan.

15Sa kalaúnan aŋ isa sa kanilà y nàtagpuan itò sa báya-ŋ-Kamálig sa kanya ŋ gàwáan. Naŋ màbalitáan nya na ipinasúsundo syà ni Andrès úpaŋ ipakasàl sila ŋ dalawà ni Maryà, ay lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ kanyà ŋ nagiŋ twàʾ. Dátapuwat gayon dìn malakì aŋ kanya ŋ tákot na baká hindí nya abúta ŋ buhày aŋ 20kanya ŋ inìíbig. Sya y matúli ŋ matúli ŋ umwèʾ at naŋ dumatìŋ sya sa báhay niy Andrès ay nàkíta nya doòn aŋ butò t balàt na paŋaŋatawàn ni Maryà nàlàlátag sa kanya ŋ hihigàn. Naŋ sandalí ri ŋ iyòn ay nagpasundú si Andrès naŋ isa ŋ páreʾ, at si Hwàn at si Maryà y ipinakasàl. Hábaŋ aŋ pagkakasàl ay idinàdaos 25naŋ páreʾ aŋ hiniŋà namàn ni Maryà ay pumàpánaw. Naŋ mákasal na silà ay nagkaroòn lámaŋ si Hwàn naŋ panahò ŋ mahagkàn aŋ kanya ŋ asáwa, at itò y pinanáwan naŋ hiniŋà na aŋ mukhá y masayà at nàŋìŋitì aŋ bibìg.

At last one of them came upon him in the town of Kamalig in his workshop. When he was told that he was being sent for by Andrés that he and Maria might be married, his joy was very great. But he was also much afraid that he might not find his loved one alive. He went home with all possible speed, and when he arrived at the house of Andrés, he found there the body of Maria, mere bone and skin, stretched out on her couch. That very moment Andrés sent for a priest, and Juan and Maria were married. While the marriage-ceremony was being performed by the priest, Maria’s breath ceased. When they were married, Juan had but time to kiss his wife before her breath left her, her face glad and her mouth smiling. [93]
[Contents]

26. Si Markíta.

26. Marquita.

30Si Markíta ay isà ŋ dalága ŋ mabaìt at magandà, dátapuwat mahírap. Sya y máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ nóbyo na mahírap dìn, dátapuwat may empléyo sa gobyèrno sa Maynílaʾ at máy-roo ŋ mabúti ŋ swèldo.

Marquita was a good and beautiful young woman, but poor. She was betrothed to a man who also was poor, but had a position with the Government in Manila and received good pay.

Si Markíta ay máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ kápit-báhay na mayáman. Aŋ 35báhay ay tablà, at yéro aŋ bubuŋàn, malápad aŋ kanya ŋ bukirìn. Aŋ kápit-báhay na ytò y malakì aŋ pagkágusto kay Markíta, dátapuwat hindí nátin màsàsábe kuŋ túnay aŋ kanya ŋ pagíbig, sapagkàt maluwàg aŋ kanya ŋ tornílyo. Lahàt naŋ pagsúyoʾ ay ginawá nya kay Markíta, dátapuwat si Markíta y isa ŋ dalága ŋ [94]hindí sa-lawáhan aŋ loòb, at aŋ lahàt naŋ kanya ŋ pagsúyoʾ ay hindí pinansìn.

Marquita had a rich neighbor. His house was of wood, with an iron roof, and his estate was large. This neighbor had a great liking for Marquita, but we cannot say whether his love was true, for he had a screw loose. He paid every attention to Marquita, but Marquita was not a girl of fickle heart and paid no heed to all his attentions.

Sa kalakhàn naŋ pagíbig naŋ maŋlilígaw na si Markíta ay mápasa kanyà, aŋ ginawá nya y gumámit naŋ lakàs. Isa ŋ hápon 5pumások sa bakúran nila Markíta at nagkubli syà sa isa ŋ púno-ŋ-ságiŋ. Naŋ hápu ŋ yoòn ay nagkátaon namà ŋ aŋ bakúran nilà Markíta ay marumì. Kanyà itò y nanáog at niwalisàn aŋ bakúran. Pagkátabi nyà sa púno-ŋ-ságiŋ na pinagkùkublihàn naŋ laláke, itò y lumápit pagdáka, tinaŋnàn sya sa kamày at kanyà 10sya hinagkàn.

So great was the desire of this suitor to win Marquita that he decided to employ force. One afternoon he went into the yard of Marquita’s [95]family and hid in a banana-tree. It happened that on this afternoon Marquita’s yard was dirty. Accordingly she went and swept the yard. When she came near the banana-tree in which the man was hiding, he suddenly dropped down, seized her by the hand and kissed her.

Nàlàláman na ninyò na sa maŋa mahihinhì ŋ táo doòn sa átin aŋ isa ŋ halìk ay isa ŋ malakì ŋ kasiraàn naŋ púri. Dáhil díto naŋ si Markíta ay pumanhìk sa báhay na umíiyàk, at naŋ màláman naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ na syà y tinampalásan o 15hinagkàn naŋ laláki ŋ iyòn, inakálà nila na walà ŋ iba ŋ paŋtakìp sa kasiraà-ŋ-púri ŋ itò kuŋ hindí aŋ ipakasàl nilà sa laláki ŋ iyòn aŋ kanilà ŋ anàk na si Markíta. Káhit anò ŋ pagayàw aŋ ginawá ni Markíta at káhit na nàlàláman nilà na itò y may kaìbígan, ay kanila rì ŋ ipinatúloy aŋ pagkakasàl.

As you know, among reputable people in our country a single kiss is a great stain on a girl’s honor. Therefore, when Marquita came into the house weeping and her parents found out that she had been roughly handled or kissed by this man, they decided that there was no other way of covering up this disgrace than marrying their daughter Marquita to this man. No matter how much Marquita objected, and although they knew that she had a sweetheart, they nevertheless prepared for the marriage.

20Si Markíta ay isa ŋ báta ŋ lubhà ŋ masùnúrin sa kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ, kanyá hindí sya makasuwày naŋ tòtohánan ŋayòn. Aŋ ginawá na lámaŋ niyà ay isinúlat nya sa kanya ŋ nóvyo aŋ maŋa naŋyári at maŋyàyári at sinábi nya ŋ aŋ magígiŋ pagkakasàl sa kanyà ay isa lámaŋ pagsunòd sa maŋa magúlaŋ at siya 25rìn ay kanya ŋ inìíbig. Sa maŋa magúlaŋ namàn ni Markíta ay kanya ŋ sinábi na sya ay hindí nila pakìkinabáŋan, sapagkàt aŋ pagkakasàl nya sa táu ŋ kanya ŋ kinabùbuwisítan ay kanyà ŋ ikamámatay na madalìʾ.

Marquita was a daughter very obedient to her parents, so she could not actually disobey them now. All she did was to write her betrothed what had happened and what was going to happen and to tell him that her coming marriage was only an act of obedience to her parents, and that she loved only him. To her parents Marquita said that they would get no joy from her, for her marriage to the man whom she abhorred would soon be the death of her.

Ikinasàl silà. Hindí nalaúnan at inapuyàn si Markíta naŋ 30lagnàt. Mulá sa áraw naŋ kanya ŋ pagkakasàl ay hindí sya makakáin naŋ káhit anò, at áraw-gabì sya y lumùlúhaʾ. Aŋ maŋa magagalìŋ na médiko sa báyan, aŋ lahàt naŋ yáman naŋ kanya ŋ asáwa, at aŋ lahàt naŋ maŋa panaláŋin naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ ay hindí makapagligtàs sa kanyà sa kamàtáyan. Pagkaraàn 35naŋ pitù ŋ áraw naŋ kanya ŋ pagkákasàl ay sya y namatày. Itò y nagìŋ malakì ŋ kaluŋkútan naŋ kanya ŋ nagìŋ nóbyo at isa ŋ nakatúloŋ sa nagìŋ kasawià-ŋ-pálad nitò sa kanya ŋ búhay na dumatìŋ.

They were married. It was not long before Marquita was stricken with fever. From the day of her marriage she was not able to eat anything, and she shed tears day and night. The skilful physicians of the town, all the wealth of her husband, and all the prayers of her parents, failed to save her from death. Seven days after her wedding she died. This caused much grief to her former betrothed and contributed to his misfortune in his later life.
[Contents]

27. Aŋ maŋmàŋ na páreʾ.

27. The ignorant priest.

40Sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag ay máy nàdistíno ŋ isa ŋ pári ŋ wala ŋ [96]muwàŋ káhit anu màn. Hinìhinálaʾ naŋ maŋa táo na syà y isa ŋ sakatéro lámaŋ sa Espánya na nápadpad doòn at idinistíno sa kanilà ŋ báyan úpaŋ magkaroòn naŋ swèldo at sa gayò y máligtas sa pagkamatày naŋ gútom. Liŋgo-liŋgò syà y nagmìmísa, dátapwat 5aŋ maŋa nakíkinig naŋ mísa ay wala ŋ márinig sa kanyà kuŋ hindìʾ aŋ salità ŋ “Mísa, mísa, mísa,” at iba pà. Papasí-pasyal sa harapàn naŋ altàr; kuŋ mínsan ay humáharap sa maŋa táo, pinagdódoop aŋ kamày, at sa lahàt naŋ pagkílos nya ŋ itò y wala ŋ patìd nya ŋ sinàsábi aŋ “Mísa, mísa, mísa,” at iba pà.

To the town of Baliwag there was once assigned a priest who had [97]no education whatever. The people surmised that he was only a grass-cutter in Spain, who had been cast hither by chance and assigned as priest to their town so that he might have some income and so be saved from dying of hunger. Every Sunday he said mass, but those who heard the mass could hear nothing from him, except only the word “Mass, mass, mass,” and so on. He would walk round in front of the altar; at times he faced the people, brought his hands together, and, while making all these movements, he would keep saying his “Mass, mass, mass,” and so on.

10Aŋ maŋa táo y nagálit at ipinagsumbòŋ sya sa arsubìspo. Aŋ sagòt naŋ arsubìspo ay páparoon sya ŋ isà ŋ liŋgò at makíkinig naŋ mísa, úpaŋ màkíta kuŋ túnay ŋàʾ aŋ sumboŋ nilà.

The people got angry and reported him to the archbishop. The answer of the archbishop was that he would come some Sunday and hear the mass to see if their accusation was really true.

Dumatìŋ doòn aŋ arsubìspo. Sa kanyà y sinábi naŋ páriʾ na sya y hindí makapagmísa, sapagkàt aŋ maŋa ulòl na táo ay 15nagààlísan sa simbáhan paguumpisà nya naŋ mísa.

The archbishop arrived. The priest told him that he was not able to perform mass, because the silly people all left the church as soon as he began mass.

“Búkas,” sinábi pa nyà, “ay màmàmasdàn ninyò aŋ kanila ŋ pagtatakbúhan sa pagbebendisyòn ko pa lámaŋ.”

“Tomorrow,” he added, “you will see how they all run away as soon as I give the blessing.”

Kinàbukásan ay liŋgò at sa pagmimísa nya ay háharap aŋ arsubìspo. Umísip sya naŋ paraàn naŋ pagliligtàs sa kanya ŋ 20saríle. Kanyàʾ, bágu sya nagumpisà naŋ pagmimísa ay nagpakuló sya naŋ laŋìs. Hábaŋ sya y nagbìbíhis aŋ maŋa táo namàn at aŋ arsubìspo ay nàùupú na sa simbáhan. Aŋ arsubìspo ay malápit sa altàr at hábaŋ sya y nagbìbíhis aŋ laŋìs namàn ay kasalukúya ŋ kumúkulòʾ. Naŋ makapagbíhis na syà ay ibinúhus 25nya sa lalagyàn naŋ túbig na bendíta aŋ kumúkulu ŋ laŋìs. Aŋ ugálì nya ay magbendisyòn múna bágu magmísa, kanyàʾ pagpások nya sa simbáhan ay sya nyà ŋ iniwisìk sa maŋa táo aŋ kumúkulu ŋ laŋìs sa lugàr naŋ àgwa-bendíta. Aŋ maŋa táo ŋ dinapúan naŋ maiínit na patàk naŋ laŋìs ay nagsipagtindìg at úbus-làkása 30ŋ nagsipagtakbúhan papalabàs sa simbáhan. Naŋ màkíta itò naŋ arsubìspo ay hindí nya ipinatulòy aŋ pagmimísa sa áraw na iyòn, sapagkàt wala ŋ nátira sa simbáhan ní isa màn sa maŋa táo.

The next day was Sunday and at his mass the archbishop was to be present. He planned a way of saving himself. Accordingly, before beginning the mass, he caused some oil to boil. While he was putting on his vestments the people and the archbishop were seated in the church. The archbishop was near the altar, and, while the priest was putting on his vestments, the oil was boiling. When he had put on his vestments, he poured the boiling oil into the vessel for holy water. It was his custom to give the blessing before saying mass, so, when he entered the church, he sprinkled the boiling oil on the people instead of holy-water. The people, struck by the drops of hot oil, all jumped up and ran with all their might out of the church. When the archbishop saw this, he did not have the mass gone on with on that day, for there was not a single one of the people left in the church.

Sinábi naŋ arsubìspo sa párìʾ na sya y hindí mààalìs sa báya 35ŋ iyòn at hindí na nyà pàpansinìn aŋ anu mà ŋ ipagsumbòŋ naŋ maŋa táo.

The archbishop said to the priest that he would not have to leave the town and that hereafter he would not heed any accusation that the people made.
[Contents]

28. Aŋ pàkumpisálan.

28. The confessional.

Si Párì Mundò ay sya ŋ nàdistínu ŋ ilà ŋ taòn sa báya-ŋ-Marikína. Sya y isa ŋ táo ŋ maibigìn sa pagliliwalìw. Sa pagtupàd 40sa kanya ŋ maŋa tuŋkúlin sya y hindí nagkùkúlaŋ káylan [98]màn. Araw-áraw sya y nagmìmísa at kuŋ liŋgò ay makálawa sya ŋ magmísa. Gayon dìn sya y nagbíbinyàg naŋ maŋa bátaʾ, nagbèbendisyòn naŋ patày, nagháhatid naŋ biyátiko, nagpàpakumpisàl, at nagpakinábaŋ. Aŋ lahàt naŋ kanyà ŋ tuŋkúlin ay 5sinúsunod nyà ŋ mabúte, dátapuwat aŋ pagpapakumpisàl ay nilalúan nya naŋ kauntìʾ. Sa ganà ŋ kanyà sigúro ŋ itò y mabúte úpaŋ pauntiìn aŋ maŋa kasalánan naŋ kanya ŋ kinúkumpisàl, dátapuwat sa ibà sa kanya ŋ maŋa kinúkumpisal itò y may nagìŋ masamà ŋ dúlo.

Father Mundo was the priest assigned for some years to the town of Mariquina. He was a man who liked amusements. He was never deficient in the fulfilment of his duties. Every day he said mass, and [99]on Sunday he said mass twice. Also, he christened children, said blessings over the dead, carried the sacrament, heard confession, and gave holy communion. He performed all his duties well, but the confessing he overdid a little. From his point of view this was perhaps useful in lessening the sins of those whom he confessed, but for some of the latter it had its bad side.

10Mínsan máy-ro ŋ isà ŋ babái ŋ dalága na mapagsimbà at mapagkumpisàl. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ dalága ŋ itò sa dalawa ŋ pù ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ ay iníwan na nyà aŋ kabànála ŋ pagkukumpisàl, gayon dìn bihíra ŋ magsimbà. Naŋ mínsan usisáin aŋ babáye ŋ itò ay nagsábi naŋ ganitò:

Once there was a young woman who was fond of going to church and to confession. When this young woman reached the age of twenty years, she abandoned the pious duty of going to confession, and also went to church but rarely. Once when this woman was questioned, she spoke as follows:

15“Noo ŋ úna aŋ boò ŋ akálà ko si Párì Mundò ay isa ŋ sànto, dátapwat ŋayò y nàpagkìkilála naŋ marámi na sya y isa ŋ buwísit na táo. Kuŋ bahàʾ at aŋ maŋa táo y nagsìsipamaŋkàʾ sa bahàʾ, sya y sa baŋkàʾ naŋ maŋa babáe nakíkisakày at hindí sa maŋa laláki. Kuŋ umága pagkamísa nya ay màkìkíta na sya ŋ nakataluŋkò 20sa kanya ŋ pátyo na aŋ ábito y nagùgúmun sa lúpaʾ at sya y humàhágod naŋ manòk kaharàp naŋ ibà ŋ sabuŋéro.

“At first I really thought that Father Mundo was a saint, but now the people realize that he is a horrid man. At flood-time, when the people are all canoeing on the flood, he rides along in the women’s canoe, and not with the men. In the morning, after saying mass, he is seen squatting in his courtyard with his vestments trailing on the ground, petting fighting-cocks, in company with the other cock-fighters.

“Noo ŋ úna akò y madalàs magkumpisàl sa kanyà, dátapwat dumatìŋ aŋ isa ŋ áraw na panày na kaululàn lámaŋ aŋ ipagtatanòŋ nya sa ákin sa kumpìsálan. Súkat ba ŋ itinanòŋ 25nya sa ákin kuŋ ilàn aŋ manlilígaw sa ákin, kuŋ síno aŋ áki ŋ inìíbig, at kuŋ saàn akò makìkipagtagpòʾ? Sa loob-loòb ku lámaŋ ay nàpakawala-ŋ-hyàʾ aŋ pári ŋ itò. Kanyàʾ iníwan ku sya agàd sa kumpìsálan at mulá noon ay hindí na akò naŋumpisàl.”

“At first I often confessed to him, but there came a day when the things he asked me in the confessional were nothing but foolishness. Was it right for him to ask me how many suitors I had, whom I liked, and where I met them? What I thought was that this priest was extremely impudent. So I left him at once in the confessional, and since that time I have not been going to confession.”
[Contents]

3029. Si Hwà ŋ bíbas.

29. Juan the joker.

Si Hwàn ay isa táo ŋ mapaggawá naŋ kaululàn, dátapuwat itò y hindí nya sinásadyàʾ úpaŋ magpagálit naŋ kápwa táo, kuŋ hindí yon ay talagà ŋ sya nyà ŋ ugáliʾ na átas sa kanya naŋ kanya ŋ pagiísip.

Juan was a man given to doing nonsensical things, but he did not do them intentionally to anger his fellow-men; it was merely his natural habit, prompted by his character.

35Mínsan sya y naparòn sa fiyèsta naŋ isa ŋ báyan. May pasàn sya ŋ tatlò ŋ biìk, úpaŋ ipagbilè sa báyan. Naŋ sya y dumatiŋ nà, nàkíta nya sa pátyo naŋ simbáhan aŋ marámi ŋ táo ŋ nalìlípon at nakíkinìg naŋ biníbigkas na talumpátiʾ naŋ kápitan sa báyan. Masikìp aŋ pagkakátayo naŋ maŋa táo, dátapwat 40sya y nálapit dìn sa paanàn naŋ entabládo na kinàtàtayuàn naŋ nagtàtalumpátiʾ. Hábaŋ nakìkipagsiksíkan syà, aŋ tatlò ŋ biìk [100]ay wala ŋ lubày naŋ pagyàk. Naŋ syà y makaratiŋ nà sa harapàn naŋ kápitan, tinúkup nya aŋ maŋa bibìg, úpaŋ silà y patahanìn, dátapwat walá sya ŋ magawàʾ. Náino naŋ kápitan aŋ maŋa ìyákan naŋ biìk at tiniŋnan nyà kuŋ síno aŋ máy dala doòn 5naŋ maŋa biìk.

Once he went to the festival of a certain town. He was carrying three young pigs to sell in the town. When he got there, he saw many people gathered in the courtyard of the church and listening to a speech which the mayor of the town was delivering. The people stood in a dense crowd, but he succeeded in getting close to the foot of the platform on which the orator was standing. While he took part in the crowding, the three pigs kept squealing. When he had arrived in front of the mayor, he held his hand over their mouths to make them [101]keep quiet, but he did not succeed. The mayor took notice of the squealing of the pigs and looked round to see who had brought the pigs there.

Naŋ màkíta nya si Hwàn ay sinábi nya aŋ ganítò: “Huwán! Anò aŋ gustu mò ŋ sabíhin sa pagpapaiyàk mo díto naŋ iyo ŋ maŋa biìk? Lumáyas ka ŋayon dìn, at hwag kà ŋ makàtuntoŋ-tuntòŋ káylan màn sa lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos!”

When he saw Juan he addressed him as follows: “Juan! What do you mean by making your pigs squeal here? Get out of here at once and never again dare to set foot on the ground of Bustos!”

10Si Hwàn ay umalìs at umwèʾ sa kanya ŋ báyan sa San-Ildepònso. Nakaraàn aŋ isa ŋ taòn at dumatìŋ na mulìʾ aŋ fyèsta sa báyan naŋ Bùstos. Iníbig ni Hwàn na pumaroòn, dátapuwat nàalaála nya na tinaŋáan sya naŋ kápitan sa báya ŋ iyòn na, pag sya y nàkíta ŋ mulìʾ sa lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos, ay sya y 15ipabíbilaŋgòʾ at pahìhirápan. Umísip si Hwàn naŋ paraàn úpaŋ makaparòn.

Juan departed and went home to his town of San Ildefonso. A year passed, and the festival in the town of Bustos came round again. Juan wanted to go there, but he remembered that the mayor of that town had threatened him that, if he were seen again on the ground of Bustos, he would have him imprisoned and tortured. Juan thought of a way of going there none the less.

Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ fiyèsta ay máy-roo ŋ isà ŋ mísa ŋ malakì na dinaluhàn naŋ líbo-líbo ŋ táo. Si Hwàn ay isà sa maŋa táo ŋ itò at syà aŋ nàpàpansìn naŋ marámi ŋ táo, dahilàn sa anyò 20naŋ pagkálagay nyà doòn sa loòb naŋ simbáhan. Dí nalaúnan at isà sa maŋa táo ŋ nagmámasid sa kanyà ay nagsumbùŋ sa kápitan at sinábi na si Hwàn ay násàsa loòb naŋ simbáhan at nakasakày sa isa ŋ karéta na hinìhíla naŋ kalabàw, at aŋ lahàt, karéta, kalabàw, at si Hwàn ay násàsa loòb naŋ simbáhan. Si 25Hwàn ay hindí nanànáog sa karéta ŋ kanya ŋ tinùtuntuŋàn.

When the festival arrived, there was a high mass, which was attended by thousands of people. Juan was one of these people, and he it was whom all the people were watching, owing to the manner of his appearance there in the church. It was not long before one of the people who were watching him complained to the mayor, saying that Juan was in the church mounted on a wagon drawn by carabao, and that the whole thing, wagon, carabao, and Juan, was inside the church. Juan had not got down from the wagon on which he was standing.

Pumarùn aŋ kápitan sa simbáhan úpaŋ hulíhin si Hwàn. Naŋ málapit syà díto ay sinábi nyà: “Huwán! Sumunòd ka sa ákin at ibíbilaŋgú kità. Hindí ba sinábi ko nà sa iyò t hwàg kà ŋ tútuntoŋ naŋ lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos?”

The mayor went to the church to arrest Juan. When he got there he said: “Juan! Follow me, I am going to imprison you. Didn’t I tell you not to set foot on the ground of Bustos?”

30Isinagòt namàn ni Hwàn: “Ginoò ŋ Kápitan! Sinábi ŋàʾ po ninyò sa ákin iyàn. Kanyàʾ akò y hindí makaalìs sa áki ŋ karéta. Nàkìkíta pú ba ninyò itò ŋ lúpa ŋ lúlan naŋ áki ŋ karéta at sya kò ŋ tinùtuntuŋàn? Ito pòʾ ay hindè lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos kuŋ hindí lúpa-ŋ-San-Ildepònso. Doòn ko pòʾ sa áki ŋ báyan kinúha 35aŋ lúpa ŋ itò.”

But Juan answered: “Mr. Mayor! You certainly did tell me that. That is why I cannot get out of my wagon. Do you see this earth, sir, with which my wagon is loaded and on which I am standing? This is not the ground of Bustos, sir, but earth of San Ildefonso. I got this earth in my town.”

Pagkàsábi ni Hwàn nitò ay hindí nàpigílan naŋ kápitan aŋ pagtáwa, at sinábi na lámaŋ nya sa kanya ŋ saríli na syà y wala ŋ magágawa kay Hwàn, sapagkàt itò y nása katwíran.

When Juan had said this, the mayor could not restrain his laughter and only said to himself that he could do nothing to Juan, for the latter was in the right.
[Contents]

30. Tatlò ŋ magkakaybíga ŋ magnanákaw.

30. The three thieves.

40Si Hwàn, si Andrès, at si Dyégo ay tatlò ŋ magagalìŋ na [102]magnanákaw. Silà y balíta ŋ balítaʾ, at marámi ŋ táo aŋ nagsìsihúle sa kanilà, dátapuwat sa galìŋ nilà naŋ paŋiŋílag at pagnanákaw ay hindí sila màhúle. Aŋ tatlò ŋ itù y nagtìpána ŋ mínsan na magtatagpòʾ sila sa isa ŋ lugàr na tahímik at líhim 5úpaŋ pagusápan nilà aŋ kanilà ŋ pamumúhay at maŋa mabubúti ŋ bágo ŋ paraàn naŋ pagnanákaw. Silà ŋ tatlò ay nabùbúhay sa pagnanákaw lámaŋ. Ní isa màn sa kanilà ay walà ŋ paghahánap na mabúte. Mulá pa sa pagkabátàʾ ay ganito nà aŋ kanila ŋ pamumúhay, kanyàʾ silà y nagìŋ matalíno at lubhà ŋ makínis 10sa gawa ŋ itò.

Juan, Andrés, and Diego were three expert thieves. They were [103]very famous, and many people were trying to catch them, but their cleverness at dodging and stealing kept them from being caught. The three once made an appointment to meet at a certain quiet and secret place to discuss their means of livelihood and new good methods of thievery. Not one of them had an honest trade. This had been their mode of life from childhood on, so they had become skilful and very clever at this activity.

Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ áraw naŋ kanilà ŋ tìpánan, madali ŋ áraw pa lámaŋ ay nàròroòn na silà. Malakì ŋ pamamalítaʾ naŋ báwat isà at hindí magkàmáyaw aŋ kanila ŋ pagbabàlitaàn.

When the day of their meeting came, they were there already at dawn. Each one of them had much to tell, and, as they were all talking at once, their stories were indistinguishable.

Itinanòŋ ni Hwàn kay Dyégo: “Gánu ka na bà kakínis 15ŋayòn sa áti ŋ trabáho?”

Juan asked of Diego: “How skilled are you now at your work?”

“Sa damdam kò,” aŋ sagòt ni Dyégo, “ay akò aŋ pinakamakínis sa áti ŋ tatlò, sapagkàt akò y nakapagnànákaw naŋ maŋa itlòg na hinàhalimhimàn naŋ manòk na hindí nàlàláman nitò. At hindí itu lámaŋ,” idinugtuŋ nyà, “aŋ maŋa háyop màn na mababagsìk 20ay nànànakáwan ku naŋ kanila ŋ inakày naŋ walá sila ŋ málay.”

“In my opinion,” answered Diego, “I am the most skilful of us three, for I am able to steal the eggs a hen is brooding on without its knowing it. And not only this,” he continued, “I am able to rob wild animals of their young without their noticing it.”

“Ganyàn ba lámaŋ aŋ kínis mo?” isinabàd pagdáka ni Andrès, “Akò ay nakapagnànákaw sa háyop at gayon dìn sa táo. Aŋ maŋa aláhas naŋ táo na íbig ko ŋ nakáwin ay ninànákaw ko, 25káhit na natùtúlog o naglálakad aŋ may áreʾ. Mínsan ay ninákaw ko aŋ isa ŋ siŋsìŋ na hinìhigàn naŋ may áriʾ úpaŋ hwag mànákaw, dátapwat itò y nànákaw ko naŋ walá sya ŋ málay.”

“Is that all your skill?” Andrés quickly interrupted, “I am able to rob animals and men too. I have stolen all of people’s jewelry that I wanted to steal, whether the owner was asleep or up and about. Once I stole a ring that the owner was sleeping on to keep it from being stolen,—but I stole it without his noticing.”

“Ganyàn ba lámaŋ aŋ kínis ninyò?” itinanùŋ ni Hwàn, “Walá sa kalahátì naŋ kínis ko sa pagnanákaw aŋ inyù ŋ maŋa 30nagágawàʾ. Akò y nakapagnànákaw naŋ táo mìsmo at hindí naŋ kanila lámaŋ na maŋa pagaáreʾ.”

“Is that all the skill you two have?” asked Juan. “The things you do don’t come halfway up to my skill at stealing. I can steal people themselves, and not only their property.”

Nàpagúlat aŋ dalawà nya ŋ kaúsap, sapagkàt hindí nila inakála ŋ aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ buhày ay maàári ŋ mànákaw naŋ hindí nito nàlàláman, at úpaŋ subúkan nilà aŋ galìŋ ni Hwàn ay nakipagpustáhan 35silà ŋ dalawà kay Hwàn. Sinábi nilà ŋ nakáwin nya aŋ párìʾ sa báyan at ihatid nyà sa lugàr na kanila ŋ kinàdòroonàn ŋayòn. Kuŋ itù y magawá nya, bàbayáran sya ni Andrès at ni Dyégo naŋ limà ŋ daà ŋ píso. Dátapuwat kuŋ hindí nya magawàʾ, bàbayáran nya si Andrès at si Dyégo naŋ isa ŋ daà ŋ 40píso. Umáyon si Hwàn sa pustáha ŋ itò at silà y naghiwá-hiwalày.

The two he was talking to were surprised, for they did not think that a live man could be stolen without his knowing it, and, to test Juan’s ability, the two made a bet with Juan. They told him to steal the priest of the town and to bring him to the place where they now were. If he succeeded in doing this, Andrés and Diego would pay him five hundred pesos. But if he could not do it, he was to pay Andrés and Diego one hundred pesos. Juan agreed to this bet, and they parted.

Si Hwàn ay napatúŋu sa báyan at pinakibalitáan nya kuŋ saàn nàtìtirà aŋ párèʾ. Naŋ màláman nya itò ay nagisìp sya naŋ [104]paraà ŋ gágawin nyà na pagnákaw sa párèʾ. Sya y pumásuk na alílaʾ sa pári ŋ itò. Sa kanya ŋ pagkàpaalíla ŋ itò ay nàkilála nya aŋ maŋa ugáli naŋ páreʾ. Isà sa kanya ŋ ugáliʾ na hindí nabàbáliʾ káylan màn ay aŋ pagdadasàl naŋ rosáriyo sa harapàn 5naŋ isa ŋ poòn. Aŋ poò ŋ itò ay nayàyárì naŋ káhoy, at itò y si Saŋ-Hwàn. Aŋ lakì naŋ poò ŋ itò ay kasiŋpantày naŋ isa ŋ táo.

Aŋ ginawá ni Hwàn ay nagpagawá sya sa isa ŋ mandurúkit naŋ isa ŋ poò ŋ gáya rin nitò, dátapuwat hukày at wala ŋ lamàn 10aŋ loòb. Aŋ bútas na itò sa loòb naŋ katawàn naŋ poò ŋ itò ay maàári ŋ sootàn naŋ isa ŋ táo. Naŋ mayárì na aŋ poò ŋ pagawá ni Hwàn, ay pinalitan nyà aŋ poò ŋ si Saŋ-Hwàn na túnay naárì naŋ párèʾ.

Juan went to the town and found out by inquiry where the priest lived. When he had found this out, he figured out the plan he would pursue in stealing the priest. He entered the priest’s household as a servant. During his stay as a servant he became acquainted with the habits of the priest. One of his habits, from which he never deviated, was praying a rosary before the image of a saint. The image was made of wood, and it represented Saint John. The size of this image was equal to that of a man. Juan had a carver make an image just like this one, but with an opening, and hollow inside. This opening inside the body of the image of the saint was such that a man could enter it. [105]When the image which Juan had had made was ready, he replaced with it the image of Saint John which belonged to the priest.

Isa ŋ hápun bágu dumatìŋ aŋ orasyòn ay kumúha sya naŋ 15isa ŋ sáko naŋ bigàs at napaloòb sya sa loòb naŋ sànto ŋ ipinagawá nya. Pagkahápon naŋ párìʾ itò y pumaroòn sa kwàrto ŋ kanya ŋ pinagdàdasalàn úpaŋ magrosáryo. Naŋ magkákalahatí na aŋ kanya ŋ pagdadasàl at kátaon namà ŋ naŋàŋáwit na si Hwàn sa pagkátayòʾ, ay nagsalità ito: “Ihintú mu nà, Párì 20Lúkas, aŋ iyo ŋ pagdadasàl. Ako y pinàparíto sa iyò úpaŋ ihatìd kità sa láŋit.”

One afternoon before prayers he took a rice-sack and went into the inside of the saint he had had made. When the priest had eaten supper he went into the room in which he prayed, to say a rosary. When he was halfway through his prayers, and just about as Juan was getting tired of standing up, the latter spoke: “Cease your praying, Father Lucas. I have been sent here to conduct you to Heaven.”

Naŋ úna ay siniglàn naŋ tákot aŋ páreʾ, dátapuwat inakálà nya ŋ aŋ kanya ŋ poòn ay nagmìmilágro at totoo ŋà ŋ sinúsundú sya úpaŋ ihatìd sa kalaŋitàn.

25Sa kanyà ŋ hindí pagkibòʾ ay nagsalità ŋ mulí si Hwàn naŋ ganitò: “Marámi nà aŋ kabànála ŋ iyù ŋ ginawàʾ. Matagàl ka naŋ namùmúhay naŋ mabábaʾ, at dáhil díto y nàtàtaàn sa iyò aŋ lahàt naŋ kaginhawáhan sa láŋit. Sumáma ka sa ákin at iháhatid kità.”

At first the priest was filled with fear, but then he thought that his saint was doing a miracle and was really calling for him in order to take him to Heaven. As he did not say anything, Juan again spoke as follows: “Many are the works of piety which you have done. You have been patient in living a lowly life, therefore all the joys of Heaven have been reserved for you. Come with me, and I shall conduct you.”

30Isinagòt naŋ páreʾ: “Papáno aŋ gàgawin kò ŋ pagsáma sa iyò? Akù y matandá na at hindí ako makalàlákad mulà díto sa lúpaʾ haŋgàŋ sa láŋit.”

The priest answered: “How shall I manage to come with you? I am old and cannot walk from here on earth as far as Heaven.”

Isinagòt namàn ni Hwàn: “Yòn ay hwag mù ŋ alalahánin. Máy-ron ako ŋ isa ŋ sáko. Sumilìd ka díto at pàpasanin kità sa 35pagpuntà sa láŋit.”

Juan answered: “Never you mind that, I have a bag here. Get into it and I will carry you on my way to Heaven.”

At pagkàsábi nya nitò y iniladlad nyà aŋ sáko naŋ bigàs. Pagkásilid naŋ páreʾ ay tinalía ŋ mahigpìt ni Hwàn aŋ sáko. Lumabàs sya sa loòb naŋ poòn at pinasan nyà si Párì Lúkas patúŋo sa báhay na kanya ŋ pinagtipanàn sa dalawa ŋ kaybígan. 40Tiwalà ŋ tiwalá si Párì Lúkas na sya y papuntà sa láŋit, kanyàʾ walá sya ŋ kibòʾ sa loòb naŋ sáko.

When he had said this, he spread out the rice-sack. When the priest had got into it, Juan tied the bag tightly. He got out from inside the image and carried Father Lucas on his shoulder toward the house where he had his appointment with his two friends. Father Lucas really believed that he was going to Heaven, and so he staid still in the sack.

Dátapwat, naŋ nagbàbátis na si Hwàn sa isa ŋ mabábaw na [106]ílog, ay inakálà nya ŋ sya y nàlòlóko lámaŋ at hindí sa láŋit aŋ punta nilà.

However, when Juan was wading through a shallow river, it occurred to him that he was being fooled and that they were not going to Heaven at all.

Kanyà itinanùŋ nya kay Hwàn: “Anu ŋ ílog itò, at bákit táyo dápat tumawìd naŋ ílog sa pagpuntà sa láŋit?”

Therefore he asked Juan: “What river is this, and why must we cross a river on the way to Heaven?”

5Isinagòt ni Hwàn: “Sssst! Hwag kà ŋ maíŋay! Itò y ílog naŋ Hòrdan.”

Juan answered: “Shhh! Don’t make any noise! This is the river Jordan.”

Aŋ párì ay nagtahàn naŋ pagsasalitàʾ. Ipinatúloy ni Hwàn aŋ paglákad.

Naŋ sya y pumápanhik nà sa báhay na kanila ŋ tagpúan, 10nàpagúlat na mulìʾ aŋ páreʾ, at tumanùŋ sya ŋ mulìʾ: “Anu ŋ hagdánan itò? Ganito bà aŋ hitsúra naŋ hagdána ŋ papuntà sa láŋit?”

The priest desisted from speaking. Juan kept on walking. When he was already going up into the house that was their place of meeting, the priest was again surprised and again asked: “What stairway is this? Is this the way the staircase of Heaven looks?”

“Sinábi ko nà sa iyò at hwag kà ŋ maíŋay”, aŋ isinagòt ni Hwàn, “Ito ŋàʾ aŋ hagdána ŋ paakyàt sa láŋit.”

“I have told you already that you must not make any noise,” answered Juan, “This is the stairway that leads to Heaven.”

15Naŋ mápanhik nà silà sa báhay ay sinalúboŋ silà ni Dyégo at ni Andrès. Inilapàg ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ dalà, at sinábi nya sa dalawà: “Dala ko ríto aŋ iniyútos ninyo sa áki ŋ nakáwin. Dala ba ninyò aŋ lima ŋ daa ŋ píso?”

When they had come up into the house, they were met by Diego and Andrés. Juan dropped his burden and said to them: “I have brought here what you told me to steal. Have you brought the five hundred pesos?”

Aŋ dalawà y hindí naniwála ŋ agàd. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nila 20y binútas nilà aŋ sáko at sinílip nilà aŋ lamàn. Sa loòb ay nàkíta nila aŋ úlo naŋ párìʾ na may satsàt. Kanyàʾ iniyabòt nila kay Hwàn aŋ lima ŋ daa ŋ píso, at sila ŋ lahàt ay nanáog pagdáka. Iníwan nilà aŋ páreʾ úpaŋ sya ay magpakawalàʾ sa kanya ŋ saríle.

The other two did not believe him at once. So what they did was [107]to make a hole in the bag and peep at the contents. In it they saw the head of the priest with the tonsure. Accordingly they handed Juan the five hundred pesos and they all quickly left the house. They abandoned the priest, leaving him to get free as best he could.
[Contents]

31. Aŋ paŋhuhúli naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ.

31. How monkeys are caught.

25Hindí bihíraʾ sa maŋa gúbat na màtagpuàn aŋ malalakì ŋ káwal naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. Kuŋ walà ŋ armàs aŋ isà ŋ nàpápasa kanila ŋ lugàr, silà y mababagsìk, at may paŋánib na patayìn nilà aŋ táo ŋ kanila ŋ màpagkalipumpunàn. Silà kuŋ nagàgálit ay nagsìsipanáog sa maŋa púnù naŋ káhoy at pinagtùtulùŋ-tulúŋa 30ŋ kinákagat aŋ táo ŋ násàsa kapaŋyaríhan nilà. Dáhil díto aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ naglálakad sa maŋa gúbat na marámi ŋ uŋgòʾ ay hindí magpàpabáya ŋ magdalà naŋ barìl. Aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ kuŋ pinùputukan nà naŋ barìl ay wala ŋ tákot. Karamíhan ay hindí nagtàtakbúhan, dátapuwat tinìtiŋnan nilà aŋ pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ 35íŋay at naŋ asò. Aŋ maŋa dinàratnan namàn naŋ bála ay sinásaŋga itò naŋ kanya ŋ kamày, pára ŋ sumásaŋga sa isa ŋ pukòl lámaŋ. Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa pálad nilà ay nàbùbútas dìn naŋ bála kuŋ silà y tamaàn.

In the jungle one not rarely meets with large herds of monkeys. When the one who comes into their haunts is unarmed, there is danger of their killing the man whom they overpower by their numbers. When angry, they climb down from the trees and all bite at the man who is in their power. Therefore a man who is going into jungles where there are many monkeys will not neglect to carry a gun. When the monkeys hear the noise of the gun, they are unafraid. Most of them do not run away, but look at the place where the noise and smoke come from. Those who are reached by a bullet try to ward it off with their hand, like one who is warding off a mere throw. Therefore, when they are shot, their palms too are pierced by the bullet.

Hindí bihíraʾ aŋ maŋa táo y naŋhùhúle naŋ buhày na uŋgòʾ 40úpaŋ kanila ŋ aliláin at ipagbilì sa maŋa taga iba t ibà ŋ lupaìn [108]na nagsìsipuntà sa Filipínas. Aŋ paŋhuhúle naŋ buhày na uŋgòʾ ay hindí naŋàŋailáŋan naŋ malakì ŋ págod, dátapuwat aŋ paraàn naŋ paghúle sa kanila ay isà ŋ paŋlolóko lámaŋ sa kanilà. Ito ŋ sumúsunòd ay isa ŋ halimbáwà naŋ paghúle sa kanilà.

Not infrequently people catch live monkeys, so as to domesticate them and sell them to the various foreigners who come to the Philippines. The catching of live monkeys does not involve much labor, for the method of catching them is simply to trick them.

5Kuŋ aŋ isa ŋ táo ay íbig humúle naŋ uŋgòʾ, karanyúan ay naglùlútoʾ o nagpàpalúto sya naŋ kakanìn, at itò y hinàhalúan o pinahàhalúan niya naŋ balasìŋ. Aŋ balasìŋ ay isa ŋ butò naŋ haláman na nakalálasìŋ o nakapagáantòk naŋ malálim na antòk sa maŋa háyop na makàkáin. Gayon dìn ginàgámit itò sa paŋhuhúle 10naŋ isdá sa ílog. Pagkalútò naŋ kakanìn itò y dinádala naŋ táo sa lugàr na kinàdòroonàn naŋ káwal naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. Dátapuwat kuŋ itò y ilagay nyà naŋ mahúsay sa lúpàʾ aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ ay hindí magsìsipanáog úpaŋ kumáin. Hinìhinálà nilà na aŋ kakanì ŋ iyòn ay páin lámaŋ sa kanilà úpaŋ silà y hulíhin o 15patayìn. Dáhil díto aŋ ginágawa naŋ táo ay nagtàtakut-takútan pagkátanaw nyà sa maŋa uŋgòʾ, at sya y nagtátakbò na súnoŋ aŋ biláo naŋ kakanì ŋ may balasìŋ. Sa kanya ŋ pagtakbò ay nagdàdapa-dapáan syà, at dáhil díto y aŋ súnuŋ nya ŋ kakanìn ay nàpàpalagpàk at nàsàsábog sa lúpaʾ. Kuŋ itù y maŋyári nà, 20ipinatùtúloy din nyà aŋ kanya ŋ pagtakbò, at sya y naŋúŋublè sa isa ŋ lugàr, úpaŋ tanawìn nya aŋ pagkakàínan naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. Pagkàkíta naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ sa patakbò ŋ pagalìs naŋ táo at pagkákubli nitò, silà y nagsìsipanáug sa maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy at nagsìsipagagawàn naŋ kakanìn. Nagkàkàdagàn-dagàn silà sa 25pagaagawàn, at lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ íŋay, sapagkàt aŋ báwat isa ŋ káwal naŋ uŋgò ay máy-roo ŋ limà ŋ daàn o isà ŋ líbo aŋ bílaŋ. Pagkakáin nilà hindí nalàláon at sinúsumpoŋ silà naŋ antòk, nagsìsipaŋhínaʾ at hindí makaakyàt sa káhoy. Isa ŋ nakàtàtawa ŋ panoorìn aŋ maŋa uŋgò ŋ itò, matandàʾ at bátàʾ, ay naŋàtàtaluŋkò 30sa lúpaʾ at nagsìsipagyukayòk báwat isà. Aŋ ibà ŋ hindí nagkapálad na makàágaw naŋ kakanìn ay nagsísiyakyàt sa púno-ŋ-káhoy at pinanónood aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa lasìŋ na kasamahàn. Pagaanyòʾ naŋ ganitò naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ, aŋ táo ŋ nàkùkublì ay saká pa lámaŋ lumàlápit at isa-isà ŋ sinùsuŋgabàn aŋ maŋa natùtúlug 35na uŋgòʾ. Hindí maláo ŋ panahòn aŋ pagubrà naŋ balasìŋ na itò, at aŋ maŋa uŋgò y nagsìsihúsay pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ áraw.

When one wants to catch monkeys, one usually cooks or has cooked [109]some sweetmeats, and into these one mixes or has mixed some balasing. Balasing is the seed of a plant which intoxicates or puts into a deep sleep the animals which eat it. It is used also in catching fish in rivers. When these sweetmeats have been cooked, the man carries them to where the herd of monkeys is. However, if he should place it carefully on the ground, the monkeys would not climb down to eat it. They suspect that these sweetmeats are only a bait for them, that they may be caught or killed. Therefore what the man does is to pretend that he is frightened and when he sees the monkeys, he starts running, carrying on his head the tray of drugged sweetmeats. While running he pretends to take a fall on his face, so that the sweetmeats he is carrying on his head fall down and are scattered over the ground. When this happens, he keeps on running just the same, and hides somewhere or other to watch the monkeys eat. When the monkeys see the man running away, and when he is hidden, they climb down from the trees and all start grabbing the sweetmeats. They all crowd on top of one another in their greed, and the noise is very great, for each herd of monkeys is about five hundred or a thousand strong. When they have eaten it is not long before they are attacked by sleepiness. They get weak and cannot climb into the trees. It is a laughable sight to see these monkeys, old and young, squatting on the ground and nodding, everyone of them. The ones who did not succeed in grabbing any sweetmeats climb up into the trees and look down at their drunken companions. When the monkeys are in this state, and not before, does the man who is hidden come up and take the sleeping monkeys one by one. The effect of the drug is not of long duration, and the monkeys get well after a few days.

Aŋ ikalawà ŋ karanyúa ŋ gawìn sa paŋhuhúli naŋ uŋgòʾ ay aŋ pagpapáin sa kanila naŋ nyòg. Aŋ isa ŋ boò ŋ nyòg ay nilàlagyan 40naŋ bútas. Aŋ lakì naŋ bútas na itò ay hustò lámaŋ na màipásuk naŋ uŋgòʾ aŋ kanya ŋ kamày kuŋ walà ŋ táŋan. Sa loòb naŋ báo naŋ nyòg ay inilálagay aŋ isa ŋ pirásu-ŋ-lamàn naŋ nyùg, at aŋ lahàt na itò y inilálagay sa lugàr naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. [110]Aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ ay magustúhin sa nyòg, at pagkàkíta nilà díto ay dinùdúkot nilà aŋ lamà ŋ nása loòb naŋ báo. Kuŋ masuŋgabàn na namàn nilà aŋ lamàn naŋ nyòg, aŋ kanila ŋ kamày ay hindí nila màilabàs sa bútas, ní íbig namàn silà ŋ bitíwan aŋ 5lamàn naŋ nyòg. Dáhil díto silà y pára ŋ nakapaŋàw at paglápit naŋ táo ŋ maŋhuhúle ay hindí sila makaalìs, sapagkàt aŋ niyog namàn ay mabigàt at kuŋ mínsan ay máy-roo ŋ pabigàt. Kanyàʾ paglápit naŋ maŋhuhúle, ay wala ŋ hírap nya ŋ nasùsuŋgabàn aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ o matsìŋ na naŋàpàpaŋàw.

Another common way of catching monkeys is to use cocoanuts as bait. A hole is made in an unopened cocoanut. The size of this hole is just large enough for a monkey to put in his hand when it is not holding anything. Inside the cocoanut-shell is placed a piece of the meat of the cocoanut, and the whole thing is placed in a spot where there are monkeys. Monkeys like cocoanut, and when they see it, they grasp the meat that is inside the shell. But when they have hold of the cocoanut-meat, they can no longer take their hand out through the opening, but they will not let go of the cocoanut-meat. Consequently they are as though in stocks, and when the man who is catching them approaches, they cannot get away, for the cocoanuts are heavy and sometimes are weighted in addition. So when the catcher comes up, he is able without difficulty to capture the handcuffed monkeys, grown or young. [111]
[Contents]

1032. Aŋ fiyèsta ni Saŋ-Hwàn.

32. The festival of Saint John.

Aŋ abéynte-kwátru naŋ Húnyo ay sya ŋ áraw na kapyestáhan ni Saŋ-Hwàn, at itò y ipinagdìdíwaŋ sa maŋa bayàn-bayàn sa lalawígan naŋ Bulakàn. Sa bwàn naŋ Húnyo ay kasalukúyan aŋ ulàn at mapútik. Aŋ paniwálà naŋ maŋa táo si Saŋ-Hwàn 15ay sya ŋ sànto ŋ nagpàpaulàn, dáhil díto y maibigìn sa túbig at pútik. Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa pagdiríwaŋ na ginágawàʾ sa kanya ŋ kaarawàn ay lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ pagkáiba sa pagdiríwaŋ na ginágawa sa kaarawàn naŋ ibà ŋ sànto. Sa báya ŋ malalápit sa dágat kuŋ bwàn naŋ Húnyo ay bumábahàʾ, at aŋ túbig ay 20umàáhon sa báyan. Sa maŋa báya ŋ malaláyoʾ sa dágat ay lubhà ŋ maulàn dìn, at karanyúwa y aŋ maŋa pagbahà ŋ itò at pagulàn ay nàtàtaòn sa kaarawàn ni Saŋ-Hwàn. Aŋ maŋa táo ŋ kasáli sa pagdiríwaŋ ay nagsìsipagbasàʾ sa bahàʾ o sa ulàn. Sa maŋa báyan naŋ Malólos at Hagúnoy kuŋ nàtàtaòn aŋ fyèsta ŋ itò sa 25isa ŋ bahà ŋ malakì, hálos lahàt naŋ táo ay naglúlublob sa túbig o kayà y nagsìsipamaŋkàʾ. Kuŋ hindí namàn bahàʾ, aŋ maŋa táo y nagsìsipaglibòt lámaŋ sa ulàn. Marámi ŋ taga búkid at taga báriyo ay nagsìsipagpalimòs sa kaarawà ŋ itò. Karamíhan sa kanilà ay maŋa bátaʾ o kayà y maŋa binátaʾ. Bihíra ŋ máy 30maŋa babáye. Paŋkat-paŋkàt sila ŋ nagsìsipagpalimòs, at báwat isa ŋ paŋkàt ay máy maŋa kasáma ŋ músiku ŋ buŋbòŋ. Aŋ maŋa hindí nagsísitugtòg aŋ katuŋkúlan ay kumantà o kayà y sumayàw. Sila ŋ lahàt ay uwalà ŋ pamamároʾ hálos, gáya naŋ maŋa Igoróte, dátapuwat aŋ boò ŋ katawàn mulá sa paà haŋgàŋ úlo, patì maŋa 35matà at taíŋa, ay nàkùkulapúlan naŋ pútek.

The twenty-fourth of June is the festival of Saint John, and it is celebrated in the various towns of the province of Bulacán. In the month of June there is usually rain and mud. The people believe that Saint John is the saint who makes the rain fall, and therefore is fond of water and mud. Hence the celebrations performed on his day are very different from those performed on the days of other saints. In the towns near the sea there are floods in the month of June and the water comes up into the town. In the towns farther from the sea it is also very rainy, and usually these floods and rains fall on the day of Saint John. The people who take part in the celebration get themselves drenched in the flood or in the rain. In the towns of Malolos and Hagúnoy, when this holiday falls into a time of large flood, almost all the people get into the water or else go canoeing. If there is no flood, the people walk about in the rain. Many people from the country and the suburbs go about collecting alms on this holiday. Most of them are boys or young men; rarely are there any women. In separate groups they go about collecting alms, and each group has with it a band that plays on bamboo instruments. Those who do not play are supposed to have the task of singing or dancing. All of them are almost without clothing, like Igorots, but their whole body, from head to foot, including even the eyes and ears, is caked over with mud.

Aŋ maŋa paŋkàt na itò ay tumàtáwag sa bahay-bahày. Naghíhintó sila sa harapàn naŋ báhay, at díto y tumútugtog silà o kayà y nagsìsikantà o nagsásayàw. Aŋ karanyúa ŋ kanila ŋ kantahìn ay úkol sa nagìŋ pamumúhay ni Saŋ-Hwàn o kayà y naŋ 40iba ŋ sànto ŋ kaybígan nitò. Sa kanila ŋ pagtutugtúgan aŋ kanila ŋ áyos ay makahiléra ŋ pabilòg, kuŋ mínsan ay nakatayòʾ, [112]kuŋ mínsan ay nakataluŋkòʾ, o kayà y nakaluhòd. Kuŋ máy-roo ŋ nagkákantà o sumásayàw, itò y násàsa loòb naŋ bílog naŋ maŋa mànunugtòg, at doòn nya ginágawà aŋ kanya ŋ pagkantà o pagsayàw. Pagkaraàn naŋ dalawà o tatlò ŋ tugtúgan, kantáhan, 5o sàyáwan, sila y nagsìsipaghintòʾ at sabày-sabày na nagsìsipaŋhiŋìʾ naŋ limòs sa maŋa táo ŋ nanúnood sa kanilà. Kuŋ sila y hindí limusàn, kumùkúha silà naŋ pútik sa kanila ŋ katawàn at pinúpukul nilà aŋ maŋa táo ŋ mararámot.

Aŋ boò ŋ maghápun ay inùúbus nilà sa ganitò ŋ pagdiríwaŋ. 10Aŋ maŋa maŋlilímos na itò ay lubhà ŋ marámi rìn, kanyàʾ silà y nakatùtúluŋ na magpasiglà sa báyan káhit na lubhà ŋ maulàn.

These groups go calling from house to house. They stop in front of a house and there they play music or sing or dance. They usually sing about the life of Saint John or of some other saint who was a friend of his. While their music is playing, their order is in single file in a circle, sometimes standing, sometimes squatting or kneeling. When there is a singer or dancer, he is within the circle of musicians and there performs his singing or dancing. After two or three pieces of music, songs, or dances they stop and all go round asking alms of the people who are watching them. If they receive no alms, they take [113]mud from their body and throw it at the stingy people. They spend the whole day in such celebration. As these alms-gatherers are very numerous, they help to make the town gay, even though it is very rainy.

Sa maŋa pagbabaŋkáan namàn ay hindí bihíràʾ aŋ magkalunòd aŋ maŋa táo. Kanyà aŋ ugáli ŋ itò ay unti-untì ŋ nawáwalàʾ. 15Gayon dìn sa maŋa panahò ŋ itò aŋ maŋa táo y nagígiŋ kuríput at bihíra ŋ maglimòs. Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa maŋhihiŋí naŋ limùs sa kaarawàn ni Saŋ-Hwàn ay untì-untì ŋ nawáwalàʾ.

When there is canoeing it is not uncommon for people to get drowned. Consequently this custom is gradually disappearing. Moreover, in these days people are getting stingy and rarely give alms. Hence the gatherers of alms on the festival of Saint John are gradually disappearing.
[Contents]

33. Aŋ maŋa paŋiŋílin naŋ maŋa kamagának naŋ isa ŋ namatày.

33. Family celebrations after a death.

Aŋ isà ŋ aŋkà ŋ namàmatayàn ay hindìʾ aŋ kanila ŋ loòb 20at káluluwa lámaŋ aŋ nagtátamu naŋ hírap, kuŋ hindìʾ patì aŋ bulsà rìn nilà. Itù y dahilàn sa lubhà ŋ malalakì ŋ dámi naŋ ginùgúgul naŋ namàmatayàn sa pagdadáos naŋ sarì-sári ŋ kaugaliàn.

A family that has suffered a loss by death suffers not only in its mind and soul, but also in its purse. This is on account of the great expense borne by the bereaved ones in conforming with various customs.

Sa áraw naŋ pagkamatày naŋ isa ŋ táo, sa aŋkàn nitò ay 25marámi ŋ lubhàʾ aŋ nagsìsidálaw, at aŋ maŋa nagsìsidálaw namà ŋ itò ay hindí nasìsyahàn naŋ pakikipagdalamhátì lámaŋ sa kamaganákan naŋ namatày, dátapuwat silà y nagtútumirà sa báhay naŋ namatayàn. Dáhil díto aŋ aŋkàn naŋ namatày ay napìpilíta ŋ maghandá naŋ paŋpakáin sa maŋa dálaw. Karanyúwa y hindí 30inilílibiŋ agàd aŋ patày, dátapuwat ibinùbúrol múna ŋ dalawà o tatlo ŋ áraw mulá sa pagkalagùt naŋ hiniŋà. Sa maŋa áraw na itò áraw-gabì ay walà ŋ patìd aŋ dálaw naŋ maŋa táo. Karamíhan ay maŋa kamagának at ibà y maŋa kaybígan, kápit-báhay, o ibà ŋ kakilála sa báyan. Kuŋ aŋ namatày ay isa ŋ táo 35ŋ marámi ŋ kaybígan o kamaganákan sa iba ŋ báyan sila màn ay dumàdálaw rìn, at silà y dápat na bigyàn naŋ tìráhan at pagkáin naŋ aŋkàn naŋ namatày. Itò y ganitò sapagkàt sa maŋa bayàn-bayàn sa provìnsiya ay walà ŋ báhay-tùlúyan.

Sa pagpapakáin sa marámi ŋ dálaw na itò hindí bihíra ŋ 40nakaùúbus silà naŋ kabyàk na báka at ilà ŋ túpa, kambèŋ, at [114]hindí mabílaŋ na maŋa manòk. Aŋ kosinéro karanyúwa y upahàn, at aŋ malalápit na kamagának naŋ namatày ay nagsìsitúluŋ na maglútoʾ. Dáhil díto sa báhay naŋ namatayàn aŋ lugàr na kinàbùburúlan naŋ patày ay tahímik na tahímik at káhit na marámi 5ŋ táo aŋ nàròroòn, pabulòŋ lámaŋ kuŋ silà y magsàlitáan. Dátapuwat sa kainàn at lutuàn aŋ íŋay ay hindí karanyúan. Isa t isà y nagùútos sa maŋa alílaʾ, may naghùhúgas naŋ piŋgàn o kayà y maŋa palayòk, may nagpàpakintàb naŋ maŋa tinidòr at kutsílyo, may nagháhandàʾ sa lamésa, at iba pà. Sa kusínà namàn 10aŋ sagitsìt naŋ kawáleʾ ay wala ŋ lubày. Aŋ pagtatadtàd naŋ karnè ay wala ŋ patìd at aŋ tinìg naŋ kosinéro at kanya ŋ alagàd ay sya na lámaŋ nàrìrinìg.

On the day when someone has died very many people call on his family, and these visitors do not content themselves with condoling with the dead person’s family, but make a long stay in the house of mourning. Consequently the bereaved family is compelled to serve food to the visitors. Usually the dead person is not buried at once, but is first placed in state for two or three days from the time when he ceased to breathe. During these days people’s visits stop neither by day nor by night. Most of them are relatives and others are friends, neighbors, and other acquaintances in town. If the deceased had many friends or relatives in other towns, they too come to visit, and they have to be given board and lodging by the dead person’s family. This is because in the small towns in the provinces there are no hotels. In feeding all these guests they often use up half a cow, several sheep and goats, and innumerable chickens. The chef is usually hired, and the near relatives of the deceased help with the cooking. For this reason in the house of death the place where the deceased is lying in state is very quiet, and even when many people are there, when they talk it is only in whispers. But in the dining-room and kitchen the noise is extraordinary. Everyone is giving orders to the servants, some are [115]washing dishes or pots, some are polishing knives and forks, some are serving at the table, and so on. In the kitchen the sputtering of the frying-pans never stops, and one can hear only the voices of the chef and his assistants.

Dátapuwat sa isa ŋ silìd namàn naŋ báhay ay doòn nàròroòn at nàlùlugmòk sa pagdadalamháteʾ aŋ maŋa aŋkàn naŋ namatày. 15Sila y nagsísiyàk naŋ úbus-lakàs at kuŋ mínsa y nagdúduklày-duklày silà naŋ kuŋ ano-anò aŋ maŋyàyári sa kanila ŋ pamumúhay dahilàn sa pagpánaw naŋ namatày.

But in one chamber of the house stays the immediate family of the deceased and is plunged in grief. They all cry as hard as they can and from time to time blurt out questions as to what will happen to them because of the departure of the one who has died.

Kuŋ mayáman aŋ namatày, itò y ipinadàdápit sa párèʾ at iniháhatid sa simbáhan. Pagdatìŋ doòn sa simbáhan binèbendisyunàn 20naŋ párèʾ aŋ patày at pagkatápos ay iniháhatid dìn nya sa lìbíŋan. Aŋ lahàt naŋ maŋa dálaw ay kasáma sa paglilibìŋ na itò at kadalasà y nàsàsakay silà sa maŋa karumáta. Aŋ maŋa karumáta ŋ itò namàn ay upahàn, líban na lámaŋ sa ilà ŋ árì naŋ maŋa dálaw.

If the deceased is wealthy, a priest comes to get him and escorts him to the church. Arriving at the church, the body is blessed by the priest and after this the priest escorts it also to the cemetery. All the visitors are present at the burial, and usually they ride in carriages. These carriages are hired, except for a few which belong to some of the visitors.

25Pagkálibiŋ naŋ patày aŋ maŋa dálaw na taga iba ŋ báyan ay doon dìn aŋ wèʾ sa báhay naŋ namatày. Kadalasàn silà y nagsìsialìs agàd, dátapuwat kuŋ magkàbihíraʾ ay silà y nagtítira na tatlu ŋ áraw úpaŋ makàsále sa pagtatatlo-ŋ-gabè. Aŋ tatlù ŋ gabè ay idinàdáos sa báhay naŋ namatày. Díto ay dumàdálaw 30aŋ maŋa kamaganákan at silà y nagsísipagdasàl. Sa pagdadasàl na itò ay aŋ maŋa matatandá lámaŋ aŋ kasáli, at aŋ maŋa binátà at dalága ay nagsìsipagbugtúŋan namàn. Aŋ ganitò ŋ paŋiŋílin ay ginágawa sa loòb naŋ tatlu ŋ gabè. Sa katapusà ŋ gabè karanyúa y lubhà ŋ marámi aŋ táo, at aŋ handàʾ ay malakì 35káy sa dalawà ŋ gabì ŋ nagdaàn. Marámi rìn namàn sa maŋa nagsísidalò aŋ nagbíbigay naŋ limùs sa namatayàn. Karanyúwa y maŋa paŋpakáin sa maŋa dálaw.

When the dead has been buried the guests who come from other towns go along back to the house of mourning. Most commonly they soon depart, but sometimes they stay three days, to take part in the Three Nights’ Celebration. The Three Nights are celebrated in the house of the deceased. At this time the relatives call and all pray together. In this praying only the older people take part, and the young men and young women tell each other riddles. These ceremonies are performed during the Three Nights. On the last night there are usually many people, and the entertaining is more elaborate than on the two preceding nights. Many of those who come give presents to the bereaved ones. Usually these are things to eat for the guests.

Sa maŋa aŋkà ŋ mahihírap aŋ maŋa paŋiŋíli ŋ ito ay ginágawá rìn, dátapuwat aŋ pagdápit at paghahatìd lámaŋ naŋ pári 40sa patày ay walàʾ. Sa pagbebendisyòn naŋ patày aŋ isa ŋ táo y makabàbáyad sa páreʾ naŋ gustuhìn nyà. Aŋ pinakamúra ay aŋ pagbebendisyòn sa patày sa pintúan lámaŋ naŋ simbáhan at sa sahìg nàlàlapàg. Aŋ sumúsunòd ay aŋ pagbebendisyòn naŋ patày [116]sa pintúan dìn, dátapuwat nàpàpátuŋ lámaŋ aŋ ataòl sa isa ŋ altàr. Aŋ maŋa mahahalagà ŋ pagbebendisyòn ay ginágawàʾ sa tabì naŋ altàr. Mulá sa isa ŋ daà ŋ píso haŋgàŋ sa lima ŋ daàn aŋ maŋa halagà nitò.

In poor families these ceremonies are also performed, but the priest’s calling for and escorting the corpse does not take place. For the blessing of the corpse one may pay the priest whatever one desires. The cheapest thing is the blessing of the corpse at the door of the church and placed on the ground. The next in order is the blessing of the corpse also at the door of the church, but with the coffin placed on an altar. The most expensive blessings are performed right by the altar. The price of these is from one-hundred to five-hundred pesos. [117]
[Contents]

534. Aŋ takbúhan sa Amerikáno.

34. Fleeing from the Americans.

Aŋ maŋa táo sa San-Migèl ay nagìŋ pára ŋ maŋa káwal naŋ háyop na umìílag sa maŋa pamáloʾ naŋ maŋa pastòl at paŋhahábol naŋ maŋa áso ŋ mababagsìk. Silà y lubhà ŋ maibigìn sa katahimíkan at kapayapaàn. Gayon dìn sila y lubhà ŋ pàniwalaìn 10sa sabi-sabì, at itò ŋ maŋa bágay na yitò ay sya ŋ hindí ikinàpátag naŋ marámi sa kanilà sa báyan sa panahòn naŋ maŋa paghihìmagsíkan lában sa Kastílaʾ at sa Amerikáno. Totoò rìn namàn na marámi sa kanilà ay naŋagsipagtakbò dahilàn lámaŋ sa katakútan o kadwágan.

The people of San Miguel were like herds of animals fleeing before the whips of the herdsmen and the pursuit of savage dogs. They are very fond of peace and quiet. Also they are very credulous toward hearsay, and these circumstances are what did not allow most of them to stay at ease in the town during the time of the revolutions against the Spaniards and the Americans. It is also true, however, that many of them ran away merely from fright or cowardice.

15Naŋ maŋyári aŋ paghihìmagsíkan lában sa Kastílaʾ naŋ taò ŋ isa ŋ líbo walu ŋ daàn at siyàm na pu t ánim, akò y àápat na taòn pa lámaŋ sa gúlaŋ. Áyon sa sinábi sa ákin naŋ áki ŋ nánay, kamì ay nagsipuntà sa Maynílaʾ sa lugàr naŋ umáhon sa bundòk. Walá ako ŋ marámi ŋ natàtandaàn naŋ maŋa naŋyári sa panahò 20ŋ yaòn, kuŋ hindí aŋ bágay naŋ ámi ŋ pagpuntà sa estasyòn naŋ trèn. Pagdatìŋ sa Maynílaʾ ay hindí kami nakapások sa loòb naŋ báyan kuŋ hindìʾ may pahintúlot naŋ isa ŋ pinúnoʾ sa báya ŋ iyòn.

When the revolution against the Spaniards of the year 1896 took place, I was only four years old. According to what my mother has told me, we went to Manila instead of going up into the mountains. I do not remember much of what happened at that time, except the fact that we went to the railroad station. When we arrived at Manila we were not able to enter the city unless we had a permit from an official of this city.

Aŋ sumúsunod na bágay na nátalàʾ sa áki ŋ paŋalaála ay 25aŋ pagkátira námin sa Bigaà, sa báhay naŋ isa ŋ mànanaŋgòl na aŋ paŋála y si Don-Nasáryo. Aŋ dahilàn naŋ ikinalípat námin sa báya ŋ itò ay aŋ pagílag sa paglalabanàn naŋ maŋa Katipúnan at maŋa Kastílaʾ sa Maynílaʾ. Sa Bigaà ay maŋa sundálo ŋ Tagálog sa kanila ŋ pagsasánay sa pakikipaglában.

The next thing which has become fixed in my memory is our stay in Bigaá, in the house of an attorney, whose name was Don Nasario. We went to this town to escape the fighting of the forces of the Katipunan and the Spaniards in Manila. In Bigaá were Tagalog soldiers drilling to take part in the fighting.

30Hindí nalaúnan at kamì ay nápasa báyan naŋ Bùstos. Aŋ báya ŋ itò ay nasàsákup dìn sa maŋa panahò ŋ iyòn naŋ maŋa Katipunéros. Aŋ báya ŋ iyòn ay lubhà ŋ magandà dahilàn sa sarì-sáre ŋ hitsúra naŋ maŋa bágay-bágay na nàkìkíta. Aŋ ílug ay lubha ŋ maláwak, aŋ pasígan ay malápad, may maŋa buntòn 35naŋ batò at buháŋin sa pasígan. Aŋ ámi ŋ maŋa kaybíga ŋ tinulúyan ay mababaìt na táo. Akò at aŋ áki ŋ kapatìd na babáye ay kanila ŋ paráti ŋ ipinalílibàŋ, at aŋ paglilibàŋ na itò ay aŋ pagpapasísid naŋ páto sa malínaw na túbig sa ílog.

A little later we went to the town of Bustos. This town also was at that time in the hands of the Katipunan. This town is very pretty because of the various aspect of the things one sees. The river is very broad, the banks are wide, and on the banks are hills of stone and sand. The friends with whom we stayed were kind people. They often played with my sister and me, and the game was to make ducks dive in the clear waters of the river.

Kuŋ anò aŋ naŋyári sa maŋa paglalabanàn naŋ maŋa panaho [118]ŋ iyòn ay hindí ku nàalamàn, dahilàn sa kaliitàn at kawalàn pa naŋ málay.

What took place in the fighting of those times I did not find out, for I was still small and had not yet any understanding.

Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ takbúhan sa Amerikáno, akò y may gúlaŋ na naŋ kauntìʾ, at marámi akù ŋ natàtandaàn sa ámi ŋ pagtakbò 5sa bundòk. Naŋ aŋ maŋa Amerikáno ay nagsìsipanálo na lában sa maŋa sundálo ni Aginàldo aŋ maŋa táo sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay pinagsisiglàn naŋ tákot. Lumagánap sa báyan aŋ balítaʾ na aŋ maŋa Amerikáno ay maŋa táo ŋ salbáhe, malulupìt, at mababagsìk at wala ŋ pìtágan sa káhit anu pa màn. Itò y sigúru ŋ 10isa ŋ balíta ŋ pakálat naŋ maŋa Kastílaʾ at lálù na naŋ maŋa kúra sa Filipínas.

Dáhil sa pagkatákot naŋ maŋa táo sa maŋa Amerikáno hálus kami ŋ lahàt na namàmáyan ay nagsipagbalùt at nagsiáhun sa bundòk. Kamì ay nàtìtirà noòn sa báhay naŋ isa ŋ áli naŋ áki 15ŋ nánay, at doòn ay kasúno rìn námin aŋ aŋkàn naŋ kúya naŋ áki ŋ nánay. Áki ŋ natàtandaàn na máy-roò ŋ mahigìt na sà m pu ŋ áraw aŋ pagbabastáan at aŋ paghahàkútan naŋ maŋa kasaŋkápan námi ŋ magkakasúnoʾ. Aŋ maŋa karitòn na máy lúla ŋ kasaŋkápan ay gabì kuŋ ipalákad, úpaŋ aŋ maŋa kalabàw na 20humìhíla ay huwàg magsisáyad sa kainítan naŋ áraw. Aŋ maŋa karitòn ay pùnúan haŋgàŋ sa ituktòk naŋ káraŋ nitò at aŋ maŋa kalabàw ay lubhà ŋ nahirápan sa paghíla naŋ mabibigàt na lúlan. Naŋ walá na ŋ nàtìtirà sa maŋa abúbot ay kamì namà ŋ maŋa táo aŋ nagsilúlan sa karitòn úpaŋ ihatìd sa bundòk.

When the flight from the Americans came, I was already a little older, and I remember much of our flight to the mountains. When the Americans had defeated the soldiers of Aguinaldo the people of San Miguel were filled with terror. The report circulated in the town that the Americans were wild people, cruel and fierce, and without respect for anything. This no doubt was a rumor which the Spaniards caused to be spread, and especially the Spanish priests in the Philippines. [119]Owing to people’s fear of the Americans, almost all of us townspeople packed up our belongings and went up into the mountains. We were living at that time in the house of an aunt of my mother’s, and there dwelt with us also the family of my mother’s oldest brother. I remember that the packing and hauling of the goods of all of us who lived in the house took more than ten days. The wagons laden with our goods were despatched at night, so that the carabao that drew them should not get exhausted in the heat of the sun. The wagons were filled up to the top of the covering, and the carabao were much wearied by the drawing of the heavy loads. When no belongings of ours were left, we ourselves got into the wagon to be carried to the mountains.

25Aŋ lugàr na ámi ŋ pinarunàn ay tinàtáwag na Paà-ŋ-Bundòk, kalaháti-ŋ-áraw na lakárin mulá sa Sibòl. Doòn aŋ dinatnàn námi ŋ titirhàn ay isa ŋ kúbo lámaŋ na may atìp na kúgon at lubhà ŋ maliìt. Aŋ sahìg ay maŋa saŋà naŋ káhoy na pinutúlan naŋ maŋa maliliìt na saŋà, dátapuwat hindí makikínis ní 30hindí pantay-pantày. Gayon dìn lubhà ŋ maliìt at pinàpások naŋ háŋin at lamìg. Ganoòn aŋ ámi ŋ tinirhàn na may ila ŋ bwàn, sa lugàr naŋ báhay na tablà naŋ áli naŋ áki ŋ nánay.

The place we went to was called Paang-Bundóc, half a day’s walk from Sibul Springs. The dwelling we came to there was a mere hut with a roof of cugon-grass, and very small. The floor consisted of branches of trees with the twigs cut off, but not smooth or even. It was very small and was penetrated by wind and cold. Such was the place we lived in for several months, instead of the frame house of my mother’s aunt.

Doòn sa Paà-ŋ-Bundòk ay nakátagpu kamì naŋ maràmi ŋ kababáyan na nagsiílag dìn, at aŋ maŋa náhuli ŋ nagsidatìŋ ay 35nagbalíta ŋ aŋ lahàt naŋ táo sa báyan ay naŋása bundok nà o kayà y naŋása ibà ŋ báyan nà. Aŋ báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay nawalàʾ, dátapuwat aŋ maŋa báhay ay sya lámaŋ nàròroòn.

There in Paang-Bundóc there came to us many fellow-townspeople who were also fleeing, and the last comers reported that all the people of the town were by now in the mountains, or at any rate gone, and only the houses were left.

Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ bwà ŋ pagtitirà námin sa Paà-ŋ-Bundòk ay lumípat kamì sa isa ŋ lugàr na líhim. Aŋ lugàr na iyòn ay 40isà ŋ kaiŋìn sa kagubátan. Walà ŋ nakààalam ní sínu man sa ámin aŋ paŋálan naŋ lugàr, at aŋ ibà ŋ nakààalàm ay inilíhim na lubhàʾ, úpaŋ hwag màpagalamàn naŋ iba ŋ táo aŋ ámi ŋ kinàtàtagúan. Iyòn ay paraàn naŋ paŋiŋílag hindí sa kaáway [120]lámaŋ, dátapuwat sa tulisàn at magnanákaw dìn. Aŋ báhay na tinirhàn námin doòn ay lubhà ŋ malakì, mahába ŋ mahábaʾ sa ilálim naŋ isà ŋ bubuŋàn. Aŋ kabahayàn ay hináti naŋ magkakasiŋlakì ŋ kwàrto. Máy-roo ŋ walò aŋ bílaŋ nitò. Sa báwat 5kwàrto ay isà ŋ aŋkàn aŋ nátirà. Díto ay máy-roon dì ŋ ila ŋ bwàn aŋ ámi ŋ ikinàpagtirà.

After several months’ stay at Paang-Bundóc we went from there to a secret place. This place was a clearing in the jungle. Not one of us was allowed to know the name of the place, and those who knew it kept it very secret, so that our hiding-place should not be known by any outsider. This was a way of escaping not only the enemy, but also robbers and thieves. The house we lived in there was very large, a very long building, all under one roof. The building was cut up into rooms of equal size. The number of these was about eight. In each room one family lived. Here too we were compelled to stay for several months.

Naŋ màlàlapit nà sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl aŋ maŋa Amerikáno, nàbalitáan námin na aŋ maŋa táo ŋ itò y hindí gáya naŋ maŋa sabì-sabè, kanyàʾ umuntí naŋ umuntìʾ aŋ ámi ŋ tákot sa kanilà. 10Dáhil díto y umalìs kamì sa ámi ŋ malálim na taguàn, at naparoòn kamì sa Páhoʾ. Itò y isà ŋ lugàr sa bundok dìn, dátapuwat malápit naŋ kauntìʾ sa báyan. Díto y lubhà ŋ marámi kamì ŋ dinatnàn naŋ maŋa kababáyan at tagà iba t ibà ŋ lugàr. Karamíhan sa kanilà ay máy maŋa sakìt, dahilàn sa 15pagtitirà sa bundòk. Díto nagkaroòn naŋ malakì ŋ kagamitàn aŋ maŋa gamòt na ipinaáhon ni Nánay sa bundòk, at hindí iníwan sa báyan. Aŋ maŋa gamòt na itò y árì ni Tátay at kanya ŋ iníwan sa pagkapatápun sa kanyà naŋ maŋa kúra sa Holò. Isa ŋ umága máy-roo ŋ tumáwag sa ámi ŋ báhay úpaŋ bumilì naŋ 20gamòt. Hinánap ni Nánay aŋ kahò ŋ kinàlàlagyàn naŋ gamòt. Naŋ itò y mabuksan nà ay nàkíta námin aŋ isà ŋ áhas na nakaíkid at natùtúlog sa ibábaw naŋ ipà na nàtàtábon sa maŋa bóte. Malaki ŋ twàʾ naŋ ibà ŋ táo ŋ nakàkíta, dátapuwat si Nánay ay natákot lámaŋ. Hindí nya nàlàláman aŋ kahulugàn naŋ áhas 25na iyòn. Pagkaraàn naŋ kàtwáan ay itinanùŋ ni Nánay kuŋ anò aŋ dáhil at silà y nagkàkàtwáan. Isinagòt nilà kay Nánay na aŋ kahulugàn naŋ áhas na iyòn ay aŋ pagpatúŋo sa pagyáman naŋ may árì naŋ gamòt. Si Nánay ay nàpatawà lámaŋ sa kanilà ŋ sábi, at hindí sya nanìniwálà sa maŋa bágay na iyòn.

When the Americans were already near the town of San Miguel, it was reported to us that these people were not as hearsay described them, so that our fear of them gradually gave way. Accordingly we left our deep concealment and went to Paho. This too is a place in the mountains, but nearer to the town. There we were met by many fellow-townsmen and people from various other places. Most of them were sick from staying in the mountains. Here the medicines which Mother had taken up into the mountains instead of leaving them in the town, were of great use. These medicines belonged to Father; he had left them behind when he was banished [121]to Sulu by the Spanish priests. One morning someone called at our house to buy some medicine. Mother went to the chest in which the medicine lay. When it was opened, we saw a snake coiled up and sleeping on the rice-hulls that covered the bottles. The people who saw this rejoiced greatly, but Mother was only frightened. She did not know the meaning of the snake. When the rejoicing was over, Mother asked why they were all so glad. They answered that the meaning of the snake was that the owner of the medicine was going to get rich. Mother only laughed at what they said, for she did not believe in these things.

30Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ilà ŋ bwàn ay iníwan námin aŋ Páhoʾ at umwí kamì sa báyan. Naŋ kamì ay dumatìŋ na doòn, marámi sa ila ŋ kasaŋkápan na naíwan námin ay pinagnakàw naŋ ila ŋ táo ŋ naŋaíwan sa báyan. Aŋ tablà na sahìg naŋ báhay naŋ áli ni Nánay ay walá na, at hindí nila nàláman kuŋ síno aŋ kumúha.

After a few months we left Paho and went home to our town. When we got there, most of the few belongings we had left there had been stolen by the few people who had been left in the town. The boards of the flooring of the house of Mother’s aunt were gone, and they did not know who had taken them.

35Hindí nalaúnan aŋ ámi ŋ pagdatìŋ sa báyan at nàbalíta ŋ aŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Amerikáno ay malápit na sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Kamì ay hindí nabagábag sa balíta ŋ itò, at hinintày námin aŋ kanila ŋ pagdatìŋ. Isà ŋ kataŋhalían ay matahímik aŋ báyan. Aŋ maŋa sundálu ŋ naŋása báyan ay naŋagsialìs at aŋ ibà ŋ 40hindí umalìs ay ipinagtapòn aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa barìl. Aŋ dahilàn naŋ bágay na iyòn ay aŋ pagpások naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Amerikáno. Sa dulúhan naŋ bakúran naŋ báhay na ámi ŋ kinàtirhàn [122]ay nàkíta ko aŋ paglápit naŋ maŋa sundálo. Aŋ salawàl nilà ay káki at aŋ kamiséta asùl. Bitbìt nilà aŋ maŋa barìl at nakahiléra sila naŋ pagtakbò sa bukirìn at patúŋo silà sa daàn.

Not long after our arrival in town it was reported that the American soldiers were now near to the town of San Miguel. We were not made uneasy by this news, and awaited their arrival. One noon the town was quiet. The soldiers who were in the town went away and those who did not go away threw away their guns. The reason for this was the entry of the American soldiers. From the back yard of the house in which we were living I saw the approach of the soldiers. Their trousers were khaki and their shirts blue. They carried their guns and ran in single file across the fields and came toward the road.

Naŋ aŋ maŋa Amerikáno y sya nà ŋ namàmahálaʾ sa báyan, 5may ila ŋ bwà ŋ aŋ maŋa útos ay mahihigpìt. Aŋ maŋa ílaw ay ipinapápatay sa alasès naŋ gabì, at wala ŋ táo ŋ pinahìhintulúta ŋ maglakàd pagkaraàn naŋ óras na itò. Sa maŋa bundòk na malápit sa San-Migèl ay marámi ŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Tagálog at madalàs nila ŋ sinalakáyan aŋ báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Dáhil sa 10maŋa pagsalákay na itò, aŋ maŋa báhay sa San-Migèl ay pinagsunòg naŋ maŋa Amerikáno. Kuŋ gabi-gabì aŋ pagsalákay naŋ maŋa sundálo, gabi-gabì rìn namàn aŋ ginawà ŋ panunúnog naŋ maŋa báhay. Aŋ ámi ŋ maŋa kápit-báhay ay nagsìsilípat sa ámin gabi-gabì úpaŋ doòn makitúlog, sapagkàt sa ámi ŋ báhay 15ay hindí lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ paŋánib sa maŋa bála naŋ nagsìsipaglabanàn. Aŋ maŋgagamòt naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Amerikáno na násàsa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay nagìŋ kaybígan naŋ áki ŋ tátay, at dáhil díto y náligtas sa súnog aŋ ámi ŋ tìráhan. Mínsan ay sinábi naŋ maŋgagámot na itò kay Tátay na madalàs sya ŋ sumáma sa 20maŋa patrúlya at sinàsábi nya ríto na hwag sunúgin aŋ ámi ŋ báhay. Sa kalaúnan, naŋ hindí mapaalìs naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Tagálog aŋ maŋa Amerikáno sa báyan, ay hinintuàn na nilà aŋ pananalákay, at aŋ báya y tumahímik nà. [17]

When the Americans were in possession of the town, orders for some months were strict. Lights were ordered extinguished at six o’clock in the evening, and no one was allowed to walk about after this hour. In the mountains near San Miguel were many Tagalog soldiers, and they often attacked the town of San Miguel. On account of these attacks the Americans set fire to houses in San Miguel. Night after night when the soldiers attacked, the houses were regularly set fire to. Our neighbors came to us every night to sleep with us, because in our house the danger from the bullets of the contestants was not so great. The doctor of the American soldiers who were in the town of San Miguel had become a friend of my father’s, and for this reason our house escaped being burned. Once this doctor told Father that he often accompanied the patrols and told them not to burn down our house. Finally, as the Tagalog soldiers did not succeed in driving the Americans out of the town, they stopped their attacks, and the town became quiet. [133]
[Contents]

II. GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS.

Note.—The following grammatical analysis of Mr. Santiago’s speech can, of course, lay no claim to completeness: he surely uses some constructions and very many forms which I have not heard or have failed to note. Such fulness as will be found is due to Mr. Santiago’s intelligence and patience under questioning and in conversation. A very few of the examples represent his form of sentences in MacKinlay’s Handbook. The full representation of derivatives of the root pútol cut is due to Mr. Santiago’s kindness in listing these forms, wherever they seemed possible to his speech-feeling, in accordance with my list of morphologic elements, and in then forming sentences to illustrate them.

In the use of accent-marks and of the symbol y I have deviated from the practice of the International Phonetic Association. Where roots did not occur as independent words, I have prefixed a hyphen and given a theoretical meaning. In the explanation of constructions I have allowed myself the use of distorted English; although this time-honored device does not really reproduce the foreign expression (substituting, as it does, impossible constructions for natural ones), it does enable the reader to follow the general trend of the foreign idiom. [134]

[Contents]

A. PHONETICS.

1. Distinctive sounds.

1. The distinctive sounds are the following:
Labial Dental Palatal Velar Laryngeal
5 Stops: unvoiced p t k ʾ
Stops:
,,
voiced		 b d g
Spirants (unvoiced) s h
Nasals (voiced) m n ŋ
Trill (voiced) r
10Lateral (voiced) l
High vowels i(e,y) u(o,w)
Low vowel a

2. a is a low unrounded vowel, as in Standard English far, but more tense and with the corners of the mouth (lips) slightly 15drawn back: hàlamanàn garden.

3. i and u, in what may be regarded as the normal form, are about as high as the Standard (American) English vowels in pit and put, but more tense; moreover, the lips are well drawn back for i and well rounded for u: ínit heat, lutúin be cooked.

204. In the final syllable of a phrase (or of a word spoken alone) the tongue position of i and u is as a rule lowered, often all the way to mid position; the tenseness and lip position are, however, kept, so that the resulting sound often resembles French è and lower o.

255. u is nearly always so lowered: bágo new, buhòk hair. It is not lowered in pùʾ ten.

6. i is not lowered before dentals: káhit though, ákin my, pígil compulsion. It is usually kept high also before velars: sahìg flooring, siŋsìŋ ring. Some words ending in velars more or less 30regularly have the lowering: pútik, pútek mud; so especially some proper names: Intsèk Chinese, Lóleŋ Lola.

Even in other cases the higher variants of i are commoner than the lower; hindìʾ not, kamì we, gabì night, mulìʾ again are commoner than these words with e; a very few words, such as [135]ulèʾ again have oftener e than i; others, such as itèm black are fairly regular in their variation.

7. Within a closely unified phrase the lowering is as a rule omitted: ulí sya again he (ulèʾ), Hintú na! Stop! (hintòʾ). In 5this regard the habits are variable; the form chosen depends mostly on the speaker’s momentary attitude toward the closeness of joining of the words.

A dissimilative factor also seems to be involved: a following i or u favors the lowering:

10Natùtúlug aŋ áso. The dog is sleeping.

Natùtúlog si Hwàn. Juan is sleeping.

8. o occurs in a number of words as the vowel in the last two syllables: in all of them the intervening consonant is the glottal stop: óʾo yes, doʾòn there; boʾòʾ whole has occasionally buʾòʾ. 15The raised variant is not used within the phrase: Óʾo pòʾ. Yes, sir. Yes, ma’am. doʾòn sya there he.

e occurs in the same way in leʾèg neck, beside liʾìg.

9. In word-formation, when, by the addition of suffixes, the i or u is no longer final, it is not lowered: lútoʾ cook, lutúin be 20cooked; itèm black, itimàn be made black. Occasionally, however, the lowered vowel is retained: táo human being, ka-taó-han mankind, beside kataúhan, tao-taó-han manikin, pupil of the eye, beside tautaúhan.

The words with oʾo (§ 8) keep the lowered vowel when uncontracted: 25pina-roʾon-àn was gone to (doʾòn there); these words are also reduplicated with o: kinà-dò-roʾon-àn is been in.

10. e and o occur also in unassimilated loan-words: bèsbol baseball, Silà y nag-bè-bèsbol, They are playing baseball, estudiyànte, istudiyànte student, polìs, pulìs policeman, sipéro football 30player, baŋkéro canoer (both with Spanish suffix -éro added to Tagalog words: sípaʾ football, baŋkàʾ canoe).

For e see also § 29.

11. As the variation between i and e and between o and u is thus never distinctive, there is no need of indicating it in transcription; 35I have, however, used the characters e and o wherever I heard markedly lowered variants.

12. i and u occur also as non-syllabics; I use, respectively, the characters y and w: yaòn that, gáya like, wíkaʾ speech, word, táwag call. In final position they are always lowered: thus in 40patày dead person, ikàw thou, y represents non-syllabic e, w non-syllabic o.

13. In word-formation before suffixes vowels are in certain cases lost, see Morphology: kánin be eaten, -káin eat with suffix -in. [136]

14. The laryngeal (glottal) stop occurs as a distinctive sound only after a vowel at the end of words: bátaʾ child, boy, girl, hindìʾ not, hintòʾ stop.

As a non-distinctive sound it is used as a vowel-separator 5wherever syllabic vowels follow each other without an intervening distinctive non-syllabic. In this use I shall not indicate it in transcription, as it may be taken for granted wherever vowels are written together. Such words as those in § 8 will therefore from now on be transcribed without the sign for glottal stop: 10doòn, óo, boòʾ. So táo (§ 9) means táʾo, etc. Cf. below.

15. The distinctive final glottal stop is usually lost before a following word in the phrase: hindí sya not he, Hintú na! Stop!

It is always lost before the words ŋ, t, and y: aŋ báta ŋ mabaìt the good child.

1516. p, t, k are unvoiced fortis stops; they differ from the corresponding English sounds primarily in that they are only slightly aspirated. In sentence-final the implosion only is made.

t (in contrast with the English sound) is postdental, often near to interdental.

20k is always articulated in back velar position (as in English coo), no matter what sound follows. The closure of k is occasionally imperfect, so that a rather open velar spirant (resembling Slavic x) is heard: malaxàs for malakàs strong; this variation has not been noted in transcription.

25In word-formation p, t, k alternate, respectively, with m, n, ŋ; see Morphology.

17. b, d, g correspond in position to p, t, k. They are fully voiced lenis stops; in sentence-final often implosive only, and then weakly voiced.

30The closure of b is occasionally imperfect, so that a bilabial spirant is produced: túVig for túbig water; this variation has been ignored in transcription.

In word-formation b alternates with m; see Morphology.

Final d in word-formation is always replaced by r before the 35vowel of a suffix: lákad walk, lakar-àn walking-party.

Initial d becomes r in the sentence frequently after the final vowel of a preceding word and occasionally even after a final non-syllabic, in the words daàn hundred (not in daàn road), damò, dàw, dìn, díne, díto, diyàn, doòn; e. g. ako rìn I too.

40In word-formation some words frequently change d to r after the vowel of a prefix or a reduplication, and others do not: pa-raàn means (daàn road, way), but i-pa-dalà be sent (dalà bring, [137]carry). The words (or roots) that have changeable d- are those mentioned in the preceding paragraph and daàn, -dáka, damdàm, dámi, dámot, daŋàl, dapàʾ, dápat, dáti, -dátig, -datìŋ, dikìt, -dinìg, -díwaŋ, -dúkit, -dumè, dúnoŋ, dúsa.

518. s is the normal unvoiced sibilant, spoken in postdental position. Before y and iy it is somewhat palatalized (more, for instance, than Russian palatalized s),—a variation that is not distinctive and need not be noted in transcription: siyà, syà he, she, pronounced with palatalized s.

10s alternates in word-formation with n; see Morphology.

In the affricate combination ts, which is felt and treated as a single sound, the s is always palatalized: Intsèk Chinese.

19. h is the unvoiced glottal spirant; as in English, it occurs only in syllable-initial: hindìʾ not, báhay house, mukhàʾ face.

15In word-formation h is often spoken before the initial vowel of a suffix that is added to a final vowel: -bása read, basa-hàn reading room. See Morphology.

20. The nasals m, n, ŋ correspond in position to the stops. In word-formation they alternate, respectively, with p, t, k; m 20also with b, and n also with s; ŋ is often prefixed to an initial vowel; see Morphology.

Both in word-formation and in the phrase the nasals are occasionally assimilated in position to a following consonant: sà m pùʾ ten (m for ŋ), Saàŋ ka páparon? Where are you going? (for 25saàn).

In the sentence, final n is lost before the words ŋ, t, and y: aŋ áki ŋ amà my father (for ákin my).

21. r is the voiced tongue-tip trill, postdental. It occurs between vowels within simple, underived words: áraw sun, day,—no 30doubt as a substitute for d, which never occurs in this position; everywhere else r is merely a variant of d (§ 17).

22. l is postdental; the timbre is much as in Standard French or German, the mid-tongue not lowered.

23. f and v (both labiodental) occur in unassimilated foreign 35words; they are occasionally replaced (especially in derivatives) by p and b. Filipínas the Philippines, infiyèrno, impiyèrno Hell, fiyèsta, piyèsta fiesta, but always ka-piyestá-han day of a festival, sivìl, sibìl civil, provìnsiya province, bintánaʾ window, báso drinking-glass.

40r occurs freely in all positions in foreign words (cf. § 21): trèn train, trabáho work, krùs cross, relòs watch, sombréro hat, beside Tagalized sambalílo. [138]

The occurrence of ts (§ 18) is probably limited to foreign words.

24. When in word-formation a vowel is lost before a suffix (§ 13), the non-syllabics thereby brought together are subject to 5various changes: sigl-àn be filled, silìd with suffix -an. See Morphology.

2. Syllabication.

a. In the word.

25. If a single non-syllabic follows a stressed vowel, the latter 10is spoken with open syllable accent, and the non-syllabic begins the following syllable: bá-hay house, sù-sú-lat will write.

If a single non-syllabic follows an unstressed vowel, the latter has close syllable accent,—that is, no stress-division is made between the syllables (just as in English): itò this, kasakimàn selfishness, 15sumú-lat wrote.

If two non-syllabics intervene between two syllabics, the syllable-division is made between the non-syllabics: luk-sò jump, muk-hàʾ face, In-tsèk Chinese. Stressed ay seems, however, to have open syllable accent: káy-lan when?

20Syllabics never follow each other without an intervening non-syllabic. If no other non-syllabic intervenes, a non-distinctive glottal stop is spoken. I have not written the glottal stop in this position, as it may always be taken for granted (§ 14). Hence daàn road is pronounced daʾàn, siìk young pig siʾìk, doòn there 25doʾòn, táo human being táʾo.

Nor do more than two non-syllabics ever follow each other in a native word. The following are examples of unusual combinations in foreign words: An-drès, Pé-dro, beside Tagalized Píro, ká-tre bedstead, sèr-mon, trabá-ho work, but in reduplication mag-tà-trabá-ho 30will work, krùs cross, but in reduplication nag-kú-kurùs crosses himself, cf. baráso arm, lóbo balloon (Sp. globo).

26. In frequently used words, especially in more rapid speech, the intervocalic glottal stop is often lost.

If like vowels thus meet, they coalesce into a single vowel of 35no more than normal length: pumaròn went there beside pumaroòn. When oo is thus contracted, the resulting o may be raised to u (cf. § 9): pinarunàn was gone to, beside pinaronàn and pinaroonàn.

If unlike vowels meet, the non-syllabic corresponding to the 40higher vowel (i. e. y with i, e and w with u, o) takes the place of the glottal stop. So táwo beside táo. The combinations so [139]resulting are treated in every way like those discussed in the next §.

27. If the non-syllabic intervening between two vowels is y or w, the combination involves no peculiarity, provided that neither 5of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic: bá-yan town, pag-dirí-waŋ celebration, gayòn thus.

If, however, one of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic (i. e. i, e with y and u, o with w) and is not stressed, it is spoken shorter than a normal unstressed vowel: in such words 10as iyòn that, buwàn moon, month the i, u are spoken shorter than in other positions. So also in táwo (see preceding §) the o.

After consonants these short vowels are often entirely omitted: bwàn beside buwàn, syà he, she beside siyà. The syllable-division remains, however, as in the longer form: kápwàʾ fellow- beside 15kápuwàʾ is pronounced ká-pwàʾ (not kap-waʾ).

Even in other positions these reduced vowels are often omitted, especially in frequently used combinations: Ano yòn? What’s that? beside Ano iyòn?, occasionally táw for táwo, táo.

28. Conversely, one hears now and then a superfluous short 20i, e with a y, and an u, o with a w: iyaòn for yaòn that, máye for máy having, uwalàʾ for walàʾ without.

29. The combinations ay and ai are occasionally replaced by a long open e: kélan beside káylan when?, mé báhay beside máy báhay wife, housewife, me áreʾ beside may áreʾ master, owner, 25téŋa beside taíŋa car.

b. In word-formation.

30. When in word-formation affixes or reduplicative syllables are added to a root, the syllabication is as in a simple word: sulá-tan be written to (súlat writing with suffix -an), sumú-lat 30wrote (same, with infix -um-), umuwèʾ, umwèʾ (§ 27) went home (-uwèʾ go home, with prefixed -um-).

When vowels meet, they are as a rule separated by the non-distinctive intervocalic glottal stop: maà-á-reʾ will be possible (áreʾ property reduplicated and with prefix ma-).

3531. The intervocalic glottal stop is rarely reduced, except in certain much-used combinations, the commonest being those with the prefix i- and with the prefix ka- and the suffix -an in certain uses (see Morphology): iniútos was commanded (útos command with prefixes in- and i-), usually iniyútos; laruàn, toy (laròʾ play, 40game with suffix -an), usually laruwàn, larwàn, but (with a different use of the suffix -an) làrúan playground; kayibígan, kaybígan [140]friend (íbig love, desire, with prefix ka- and suffix -an), but kaìbígan sweetheart and kaibigàn affection. For -íwan abandon with prefix i- only the contracted form íwan be abandoned is spoken. Cf. further ikaápat, ikápat fourth (ápat four with prefixes 5i- and ka-).

32. Conversely, an original y or w is sometimes under emphasis replaced by glottal stop; thus, for patayìn be killed (patày dead person, kill with suffix -in), occasionally pataìn.

33. When a word is doubled, when two words are united in 10a compound word, and after the prefixes that end in g, the syllable-division is however made as though separate words were meeting in a sentence,—that is, according to the rules in the following paragraphs.

c. In the phrase.

1534. When words come together in the phrase, the word-division is maintained (as in English) as a syllable-division.

In the case of initial consonants the division is thus like that within a word: Sumúlat ka. Write (thou), Sumúlat siyà, Sumúlat syà. He wrote, Sumáma ka. Go along, Sumáma siyà, Sumáma 20syà. He went along.

Before a vowel-initial the word-division is maintained as a syllable-division by the use of a non-distinctive glottal stop (as in German): Sumúlat akò. I wrote, i. e. sumú-lat-ʾakò; Sumáma akò. I went along, i. e. sumá-ma-ʾakò.

25Doubled words, compound words, and forms with prefixes ending in g (namely, mag-, nag-, pag-, tag-) are similarly treated (§ 33): agàd-agàd immediately (agàd at once doubled), i. e. agàd-ʾagàd; báhay-aklátan library-building (compound of báhay house and aklátan place for books), i. e. bá-hay-ʾak-lá-tan; pagsúlat an 30act of writing (súlat writing with prefix pag-), i. e. pag-sú-lat; nagáral studied (áral teaching with prefix nag-), i. e. nag-ʾá-ral.

Occasionally, in emphatic speech, the same division is made within other formations: umakiyàt, umakyàt climbed (-akiyàt climb with prefixed -um-), occasionally, but rarely, um-ʾakiyàt, 35usually umakiyàt, umakyàt (by § 30).

35. Reduction of the glottal stop and contraction of vowels occur only in a few much-used combinations of words: si Andrès (si is the article of proper names), also siy Andrès, sy Andrès; Ano iyàn? What’s that?, also Ano yàn? and even An yàn?; na 40itò this (na is a particle expressing attribution), also na yitò, na ytò. [141]

36. Occasionally such reductions go even farther, as in anò in the preceding paragraph, and occur where the glottal stop is not involved: as, sà for isà one in sà m pùʾ ten, for isà ŋ pùʾ.

37. The words at, ay, and na have also a shorter form, t, y, 5and ŋ, respectively, which occurs only (but not always) after a final vowel, glottal stop, or n. When these forms are used, the final glottal stop or n is lost (§§ 15, 20) and the t, y, or ŋ is treated in every way exactly as though it were part of the preceding word: butò at balàt, butò t balàt bone and skin, i. e. butòt-balàt; Iyòn 10ay mabúti, Iyò y mabúti. That’s good, i. e. iyòy-mabú-ti; aŋ bátaʾ na mabaìt (clumsy, as in the speech of a child just learning to speak, for:) aŋ báta ŋ mabaìt the good child, i. e. aŋ-bá-taŋ-mabaʾìt.

3. Accentuation.

15a. Word-accent.

38. In a word of more than one syllable at least one syllable is normally spoken with a greater degree of stress than the others.

The unstressed syllables have short vowels (about as long as the vowel in English pit or put) and close syllable-stress (§ 25).

2039. A non-final syllable ending in a non-syllabic (i. e. a closed non-final syllable) never has the stress; such words as luk-sò jump, muk-hàʾ face, ak-làt book are therefore always oxytone. The only exceptions are syllables ending in ay; this combination seems to be felt as a unit capable of open syllable-stress: káy-lan, 25ké-lan when; further, the words mín-san once, pín-san cousin, and nàn-don, by-form of ná-roòn is there; and, finally, unassimilated foreign words: bès-bol, sèr-mon, kwàr-ta, kwàl-ta money (Spanish cuarto), but also Tagalized kwaltà.

Words like ká-pwàʾ (beside ká-puwàʾ) are not exceptions, for 30the first syllable is not closed (§ 27).

40. The stressed syllables fall into two grammatical classes which are only in part phonetically distinct; we may call them primary and secondary word-accent.

41. The primary word-accent on a final syllable or (in the 35cases mentioned in § 39) on a closed non-final syllable, consists merely in greater stress than that of an unaccented syllable, accompanied by a pitch-rise of about half a note.1 I use the grave [142]accent-sign: gabì night, hindìʾ not, kamày hand, buhòk hair, nàndon is there, sèrmon sermon.

42. On a non-final open syllable the primary word-accent involves an increase of stress (less than in English), a pitch-rise 5of two notes, lengthening of the vowel to about one and one-half times the duration of an unstressed vowel, and open syllable-stress (§ 25). I use the acute accent-mark: báhay house, báyan town.

So also, irregularly, syllables in ay: káylan, kélan when?, and even finally: káy, ké than, máy, mé having; also mínsan, pínsan.

10If an unaccented syllable precedes, the pitch-rise really begins on the latter: in sumúlat wrote, for instance, the first syllable is spoken above the usual pitch, and the two-note pitch-rise is merely completed in the accented syllable.

43. The secondary word-accent on a final syllable has weaker 15stress than the primary accent in the same place, and ordinarily lacks the pitch-rise. Grammatically, it is recognizable by the presence of the primary accent on another syllable; I use the grave accent-mark: áakiyàt, áakyàt will climb, nárinìg was heard.

44. On a non-final open syllable the secondary accent differs 20from the primary accent in similar position in two respects: its pitch-rise is less marked, varying from three-quarters to one and three-quarters notes, and its vowel-lengthening is greater, reaching twice the length of an unstressed vowel. I use the grave accent-mark: sùsúlat will write.

25When the primary accent is on the last syllable and therefore weak (§ 41), the secondary accent often approaches a non-final primary accent in character: the first syllable of a word like nàbuksàn came open is often phonetically the same as that of a word like nárinìg was heard.

30If an unaccented syllable precedes the secondary accent, the pitch-rise really begins in the former: in such a word as sumùsúlat is writing the first syllable is spoken with higher than normal pitch, in the second syllable the pitch is brought up to a note and three-fourths above normal, and in the third the two-note rise is 35completed.

Of two secondary accents following each other the preceding is the more marked: nàràramdamàn is felt (nà- has more marked accent than rà-). This helps to make the primary accent distinct, for it is stronger than a preceding secondary accent: sùsúlat will 40write (the second su- is stronger, not weaker, than the first); nàlàláman is known (if the third syllable had a secondary accent, [143]it would be less marked than the first and second, but its pitch and stress are actually higher).

b. Sentence-accent.

45. Certain words are atonic, i. e. are always spoken unstressed 5in the phrase: e. g. aŋ áso the or a dog, sa ákin to me.

The atonic words are: aŋ, at, ay, kay to (not káy, ké than), kuŋ, na attributive (not nà already), naŋ, ni of (not nì nor), o or (not ò oh), pag, sa, si.

The short variants of at, ay, and na, namely t, y, and ŋ 10(§ 37), having no vowel, cannot be stressed; they are treated in every way as though they formed part of the preceding word.

46. In closely united phrases the last word keeps its accent, while the preceding ones often weaken theirs. Especially a final syllable often loses its accent before another word in the phrase:

15dáhil díto on account of this, often: dahil díto,

aŋ maŋà báhay the houses, often: aŋ maŋa báhay,

aŋ kanyà ŋ báhay his or her house, aŋ kanya ŋ báhay,

aŋ malakì ŋ báhay the large house, aŋ malaki ŋ báhay.

47. Opposed to the preceding rule is the treatment of certain 20words which we may call enclitics. These very frequently, to be sure, receive the normal treatment: that is, they are stressed and the preceding word either keeps its stress or, if oxytone, often loses it; but frequently, instead, the enclitic loses its accent:

Umakyàt siyà, Umakyat syà. He climbed, but also Umakyàt 25sya.

Áakyàt siyà, Áakyat syà. He will climb, but also Áakyàt sya.

Gánu ka na bà kakínis? How clever are you now? (kà, nà, bà are all enclitic).

Enclitics have the further (and more easily recognized) peculiarity 30that they follow the first orthotonic (i. e. neither atonic nor pretonic, § 48) word of the expression to which they belong (either as modifiers or as subject):

aŋ mahahába nya ŋ paà his (niyà, enclitic) long legs.

When several enclitics come together the last one is often 35stressed. Monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic:

Nahánap na nyà aŋ sombréro. He has already looked for the hat. (nà and niyà are enclitics; the latter is treated as disyllabic even when in the contracted form nyà).

The enclitics are:

40(1) always: the monosyllabic forms of the personal pronouns, namely kà, kò, mò, and the words (particles) bà, bagà, dàw, dìn, màn, múna, nà, namàn, nawàʾ, ŋàʾ, pà, palà, pòʾ, sána, tulòy. [144]

(2) frequently or in certain senses: the disyllabic forms of the personal pronouns (including siyà, syà and niyà, nyà) except ikàw (which is never enclitic), the demonstrative pronouns, and the words díne, díto, diyàn, doòn, kayàʾ, lámaŋ, ulèʾ; occasionally 5short phrases (§ 88).

For details about these words see Syntax.

48. Opposed to the rule in § 46 are also certain words (particles) which we may call pretonics. Their treatment is often regular: that is, the pretonic as well as the following word keeps 10its accent, or the pretonic loses its accent before a following word; but sometimes the pretonic keeps its accent and the following word, if oxytone, is unaccented:

máy sakìt, may sakìt having sickness, i. e. sick, but also máy sakit. Only máy and nása actually appear with this accentuation.

15The other pretonics are so classed because they share with these two words the peculiarity that an enclitic belonging to the phrase follows not the pretonic word, but the first orthotonic word:

Máy katawàn sya ŋ pára ŋ táo. He has a body like a human 20being. (siyà he, enclitic follows not máy, which is pretonic, but katawàn body, the first orthotonic word of the predicate).

The pretonics are the particles báwat, káhit, kapàg, kinà, maŋà, máy, nagìŋ (together with its other forms, § 250), nása (together with its other forms, § 212), nì nor (not ni of), ninà, 25pagkà, sinà, tagà (tigà). See Syntax.

49. A final syllable ending in glottal stop (§ 14) often receives a higher degree of stress than a corresponding syllable with a different final.

If the syllable ending in glottal stop has not the word-accent, 30it often receives an accent resembling the secondary accent on a non-final syllable; this is especially common if the glottal stop is lost before another word in the phrase: páreʾ, párèʾ priest, Párì Hwàn Father Juan.

If the syllable has a word-accent and the glottal stop is lost 35in the phrase, its accent is often spoken like a primary word-accent on an open syllable: Walá sya. He has none (walàʾ), Naglálarú sya. He is playing (naglálaròʾ).

If, however, the glottal stop is lost before t, y, or ŋ, this heightening of accent does not take place, since the syllable is then 40treated as ending in t, y, or ŋ: Syà y walà ŋ aklàt (i. e. walàŋ-ʾak-làt), Sya y wala ŋ aklàt. He has no book or no books.

50. In a succession of otherwise unstressed syllables a rhythmical [145]movement is usually produced by means of grammatically insignificant stresses weaker than a secondary word-accent; the distribution, and, indeed, the occurrence of these is so variable that I have not tried to indicate them in transcription, especially 5as they are never distinctive. Thus, in the phrases in § 46 an accent of this kind may fall on the next-to-last syllables of the words that lose their normal word-accent: aŋ màŋa báhay, aŋ kànya ŋ amà his father, aŋ malàki ŋ báhay.

51. The successive accents in a sentence bear a well-marked 10relation to each other: the early and especially the middle ones have higher absolute pitch than the last; an accent on the last syllable of a sentence often entirely loses its pitch-rise. As a consequence of this rather fixed melody, the differences of pitch-movement between statements, questions, commands, and exclamations 15of various kinds are not so marked as in English; the higher stress of emotionally dominant (emphatic) words, also, is less marked than in English.

In exclamation or under emphasis the accent of a final syllable may be like that of a medial syllable, and may, in addition 20take on a falling accent after the rise: Hwán! (with rising-falling stress and pitch) Juan!, for normal Huwàn, Hwàn. Other disturbances of accent also occur in exclamation. [146]

[Contents]

B. SYNTAX.

1. Sentence and word.

a. Syntactic relations.

52. The sentence consists of one or more words: Aráy! 5Ouch! Umúulàn. It’s raining. Ina kò! Mother of mine! (as exclamation). Sya y sumùsúlat. He or she is or was writing.

53. The relations between the words in a sentence are the usual ones: (1) Attribution: Ina kò! Mother (of) mine! (2) Predication: Sumùsúlat syà. Literally: Is-writing he. (3) The 10serial relation: butò t balàt bone and skin.

54. Some of the particles (§ 55) seem, however, to stand in none of these relations, but rather to express these relations themselves. Thus the particle t and in the preceding example is expressive of the serial relation. So further: malakì ŋ báhay 15large house; the particle ŋ expresses the attributive relation; Sya y sumùsúlat. The particle y expresses the predicative relation.

It is to be remarked, further, that the sphere of attribution includes some cases in which the attribute markedly alters the sense: sakìt sickness: máy sakìt (máy is an attribute) having 20sickness, sick.2

b. Parts of speech.

55. Tagalog distinguishes two parts of speech: full words and particles.

The particles either express the syntactic relations between 25full words (as illustrated in § 54) or act as attributes of full words (so máy in the example in § 54): Hindí sya sumùsúlat. He is not writing. The particle hindìʾ not is an attribute of sumùsúlat.

In contrast with the particles, full words act not only as attributes, but also as subject or predicate, and any full word may, 30in principle, be used in any of these three functions:

(1) Subject: Aŋ sumùsúlat ay si Pédro. The person writing [147]is Pedro. Aŋ pulà naŋ panyò ay matiŋkàd. The red of the handkerchief is intense.

(2) Predicate: Sya y sumùsúlat. He is writing. Pulà aŋ panyo ŋ itò. This handkerchief is red.

5(3) Attribute: aŋ báta ŋ sumùsúlat the writing child, the child who is writing; aŋ pulà ŋ panyò the red handkerchief.

56. Independent of this classification into parts of speech are certain less important groupings of words and certain phrase types, some of which will appear in the course of the analysis. 10Others, however, demand mention at the outset.

c. Static and transient words.

57. Transient words express an element of experience viewed as impermanent, i. e. belonging to some limited portion of time, so sumùsúlat above, as opposed, e. g., to siyà, pulà, panyò, bátaʾ, 15Pédro. Words which are not transient may be called static. Only a few particles are transient; among the full words the transient group is large and important.

d. Personal names.

58. Except in exclamations and in address, names of persons 20(or animals) are distinguished from other words by being always (but see § 78) preceded by the atonic particle si: Hwàn! Juan! si Hwàn Juan, si Salamìn Glass, Mirror (as name of a dog).

59. Many terms of relationship and titles may be used in place of the name of an individual and then belong to the personal 25name class: aŋ amà the father, aŋ áki ŋ amà my father, but: si Amà Father. Thus are used, further: si Inà Mother, si Tátay Papa, si Nánay Mama, si Kúya or si Kúyaŋ Oldest brother, si Atè Oldest sister, si Iŋkòŋ Grandfather, si Indàʾ or si Impò Grandmother, si Áli or si Tiyà Aunt, si Mámaʾ Uncle; si Bathálaʾ God, but: aŋ 30Dyòs.

So also phrases in which these and other titles as attributes precede a name, see § 256.

60. The particle sinà or silà, pretonic, in place of si forms an expression denoting the person named together with his family 35or group of adherents: sina Hwàn or sila Hwàn Juan and his family or Juan and his crowd. With a series of names sinà implies that those named form a group: si Hwàn, si Andrès, at si Mariyáno Juan, Andrés, and Mariano; sina Hwàn, Andrès, at Mariyáno the group consisting of Juan, Andrés, and Mariano; sina Hwàn, sina [148]Andrès, at sina Mariyáno Juan, Andrés, and Mariano, each with his group.

e. The object construction.

61. When a word or phrase denotes an element of experience 5viewed as an object, it is, with certain exceptions, preceded by the atonic particle aŋ: aŋ bátaʾ the or a child, boy, girl; children, aŋ báhay the, a house; houses, aŋ báyan the, a town, aŋ kabàítan goodness, kindness; an act of kindness, aŋ kataúhan mankind, aŋ pagsúlat the or an act of writing, aŋ mabúte that which 10is good, the best thing.

The following are the exceptions:

62. Personal names preceded by si or sinà (silà) do not take aŋ; they always, of course, denote an object idea. See the examples in § 58 ff.

1563. The personal pronouns (which always express an object idea) do not take aŋ. They are: akò I; kità we, i. e. thou and I, inclusive dual; táyo we, i. e. thou (or ye) and I (or we), inclusive dual and plural; kamì we (but not you), exclusive dual and plural; ikàw, kà thou (singular); kayò ye, you (dual, plural, and 20polite singular); siyà he, she; silà they.

All of these except ikàw are often enclitic; kà is always so: Ikàw ay talúnan. You are defeated. Sumúlat ka. Write (thou).

Siyà is used only of living beings, except for a single peculiar construction to be described below (§ 106 f.).

25Kità in the sense here given is not much used, táyo being commoner: Palìt kità naŋ sombréro. Let’s trade hats. Kità ay pumaroòn sa teyátro. Or, more commonly: Táyo ay pumaroòn sa teyátro. Let us go to the theatre. Kità is more used in another meaning, as we shall see (§ 182).

30Kamì differs from these two words in excluding the person or persons addressed: Kàkáin táyo. We shall eat. Nakitúluy kamì kina Pédro. We asked hospitality of Pedro’s. In both of these sentences (as also in that with táyo already given) two or more people may be meant. It will be seen, therefore, that the 35distinction between dual and plural is not categoric (obligatory).

That between singular and plural is categoric in these pronouns; everywhere else it is not obligatory; the idea of plurality is inherent in many words and forms, but these are used only where the idea of plurality is explicitly prominent.

4064. The demonstrative pronouns as object expressions also reject aŋ. They are: irè this (on the person of the speaker or [149]within his immediate reach); itò this (more generally, of anything nearer to the speaker than to the person addressed); iyàn, yàn that (nearer to the person addressed); iyòn, yaòn, yoòn, yòn that (of things distant from both speaker and person addressed).

5Itò and iyòn are used also anaphorically: the former—the latter.

The demonstrative pronouns are often enclitic.

Aŋ is omitted also before an object expression in which a demonstrative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see § 130.

1065. Similarly before object expressions in which an interrogative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see §§ 131.168.

66. The use of aŋ is optional before the numerative pronouns. The use of aŋ seems sometimes to lend these greater definiteness, sometimes to be indifferent.

15The numerative pronouns used as object expressions are: ibà other, ilàn few, karamíhan most, lahàt all. (The other numerative pronouns, namely boòʾ whole and the particles bála any and báwat every are not used as object expressions).

ibà others; ilàn a few; Aŋ ilàn ay malalakàs at aŋ ibà ay 20mahihínaʾ. Some are strong and others are weak. Lahàt naŋ táo sa báya ŋ itò ay dápat umalìs. All people (who are) in this town ought to leave (naŋ táo of people, of the people is an attribute of lahàt). Aŋ lahàt naŋ táo sa báya ŋ itò ay máy sakìt. All the people in this town are diseased. karamíhan sa kanilà 25most of them; aŋ karamíhan the majority.

The use of aŋ is optional also before object expressions in which a numerative pronoun stands first as an attribute, see § 132.

67. The use of aŋ is optional before the cardinal numerals: isà sa kanilà, or: aŋ isà sa kanilà one of them.

30The simple cardinal numerals are: isà one, dalawà two, tatlò three, ápat four, limà five, ánim six, pitò seven, walò eight, siyàm, syàm nine.

Similarly, the use of aŋ is optional before an object expression in which a cardinal numeral stands first as a modifier, see 35§ 133.

In dates and for the hours of the day the Spanish numerals are commonly used; these demand aŋ: aŋ abéynte-kwátru naŋ Húnyo the twenty-fourth of June.

68. Aŋ is omitted, further, before object expressions beginning 40with the particle nì (§ 253) and optionally before those beginning with the particle káhit (§ 248). All object expressions lack aŋ when forming an indefinite object predicate (§ 109), in [150]expressions of indefinite quantity (§ 69), when used indefinitely after pára (§ 275), haŋgàŋ (§ 293), patì (§ 305), and in exclamation or address (§§ 75.78).3

f. Expressions of indefinite quantity.

569. Object expressions are used (without aŋ, § 68) to express indefinite objects (roughly speaking such as would lack the article the in English) or indefinite quantities of objects, when preceded by certain modifiers. These modifiers are the pretonic particle máy, expressing existence or forthcomingness (§ 252), and 10the full words máy-roòn, equivalent with máy; walàʾ the negative of these; malakì great; maláon long; marámi much, many (§ 138). The phrases so formed may be described as expressions of indefinite quantity. Beside the omission of aŋ before the object expression, they have the peculiarity that in certain constructions 15they express (without further accompaniments) the possessor of that designated: may súŋay there are horns or having horns, horned; máy-roo ŋ aklàt there are books or having a book, books; wala ŋ aklàt there are no books or without a book, having no books; malakì ŋ kagamitàn great usefulness, there is great use, or having 20great usefulness; maláo ŋ panahòn long time or taking a long time; marámi ŋ salapèʾ much money, there is much money or having much money; marámi ŋ kaybígan many friends, there are many friends or having many friends.

Máy expresses also approximateness (where the object expression 25is one of number): may ápat na pu ŋ paà about forty feet or having, measuring about forty feet.

70. An expression of indefinite quantity may, as a unit, stand in object construction; in this case the first three have possessive value, but not the others: aŋ máy sakìt the or a person having 30sickness, the or a sick person; aŋ máy-roo ŋ aklàt the (a) person who has a book or books; aŋ wala ŋ hiyàʾ the (a) shameless person; but: aŋ malakì ŋ báhay the, a large house; aŋ marámi ŋ bágay the many things.

71. Marámi may by itself stand in object construction; it 35then has the meaning: aŋ marámi the many, the crowd, the people, hoi polloi. [151]

2. Subject and predicate.

72. Most sentences consist of a subject and a predicate, showing the construction of Sumùsúlat syà, Sya y sumùsúlat (§§ 53, 54). Indeed, this goes farther than in English; many commands, 5for instance, have the subject-and-predicate structure: Sumúlat ka. Write thou, i. e. Write.

Nevertheless, much of the syntax is determined by the use of constructions which lack subject-and-predicate structure.

a. Non-predicative sentences.

1073. The sentences which lack subject-and-predicate structure are of two general types: (1) exclamatory, and (2) impersonal-anaphoric.

74. To the exclamatory type belongs the use in independent sentences of certain particles, the primary interjections: Abà! 15Ah! Aráy! Ouch! Ó! Oh!

As in other languages, some of these violate the normal phonetic structure, that is, are “inarticulate”: Sss! Whew!, uttered when the weather is very hot. One whistles when one wants the wind to blow.

2075. To the exclamatory type belong, further, words and phrases used as secondary interjections: Anò! What! (unpleasant surprise). Inà ko! or: Ina kò! Mother of mine! Ano ŋ hína mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are!

As the second example shows, object expressions are here used 25without aŋ (§ 68).

76. Certain words with the prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology), with their attributes: Kaitìm naŋ gabi! What-blackness of-the night! i. e. How black the night is!

77. Certain words with the prefix ka- and reduplication expressing 30recent completion of an act (see Morphology), with their modifiers: Karáratiŋ ko pa lámaŋ! Just-arriving by-me still only! i. e. I have only just arrived.

78. Vocatives, in calling or address: Kayò ŋ maŋa makasalánan! Ye sinners! In this use personal names lack si and all 35object expressions lack aŋ (§ 68): Hwàn! Juan! Mámaʾ! Sir! Áli! Madam! Wala ŋ hiyàʾ! Shameless one!

79. Commands of certain brusque or familiar types, used, e. g., to children, servants, animals, in haste or excitement: Hintú na! Stop! Ílag na! Get out of the way! Súloŋ! Go ahead! 40Hurry up! Panáog nà sa báhay! Come down from the house! [152]Come on out! Tàbí poʾ Look out please! (Cry of drivers to people on the street. The accent is irregular by § 51 for tabì).

80. Certain set expressions, such as greetings: Maganda ŋ áraw pòʾ! Good-morning! Salámat. Thanks. Salámat sa iyò. 5Thank you.

81. Expressions of affirmation and negation: Óo. Yes. Oo ŋàʾ. Yes indeed. Támaʾ. That’s right, Exactly. Hindìʾ. No. Walàʾ. None, Nothing, There isn’t.

82. The mere naming of an idea, as in counting or giving 10the title of a story: Isà, dalawà, tatlò, ápat, limà.... One, two, three, four, five....

83. (2) Of the impersonal-anaphoric type are many answers to questions or continuations of dialogue: Kahápon. Yesterday. Akò. I, It’s I, It was I. (Never “Itò y akò,” or the like).

1584. Certain occurrences, especially meteoric phenomena, are not analyzed into subject and predicate: Umúulàn. It’s raining. Kabilúgan naŋ bwàn. Roundness of-the moon, i. e. There is a full moon. Bumábahàʾ. There is a flood. Naàáreʾ. It is possible, allowable. Hindí nalaúnan. It did not take long, It was not long. 20Taginit nà. It is summer already.

85. Very common in impersonal construction are expressions of indefinite quantity (§ 69). In this use they express existence or forthcomingness (or the opposite) of indefinite objects: Mày maŋa babáye. There are women. Máy-roo ŋ aswàŋ sa báyan. 25There was a vampire in the town. Walà ŋ papèl. There is no paper. Walà ŋ anu màn! There is nothing. Also: Not at all! You’re welcome! Malaki ŋ twàʾ naŋ iba ŋ táo. There was great rejoicing by the other people. Sa dalága ŋ itò y marámi ŋ maŋlilígaw. For this young woman there were many suitors.

3086. Less common in impersonal construction are expressions of occurrences involving indefinite or indifferent persons or things: Humúkay. One should dig. Nagumpisa nà naŋ pagsábuy. “They” have already begun to throw.

87. There is great freedom as to presence or absence of anaphorically 35determined elements (i. e., such as have been recently mentioned or, less commonly, are about to be mentioned), including the subject; when this is wanting, the subject-and-predicate structure is, of course, lost: Hiníla nya sa pasígan. Was-dragged by-him to-the shore, i. e. He dragged it or the tree (sc. itò, or: 40aŋ púnoʾ, from the preceding sentence) to the shore. Hindí makabùbúti sa kanilà. (It, the scheme mentioned) will do them no good. [153]

Many constructions later to be noticed depend on this habit of omitting anaphorically determined elements, cf. e. g.: Aŋ púnoʾ ay tumúbo haŋgàŋ sa magbúŋa. The tree grew until (sc. it) bore fruit. Pagdatìŋ niya ay sabíhin mo ŋ maghintày. At-the-coming 5of-him be-said (impersonal) by-you that (sc. he) should-wait, i. e. When he comes, tell him to wait.

b. The subject.

88. The subject of a sentence is always an object expression. The only exceptions are complex sentences with entire predications 10(§ 115) or quotations (§ 329) as subject.

89. The subject may have two positions:

(1) Non-enclitic: it precedes or follows the predicate; in the former case the predicate is introduced by the atonic particle ay, y (y often after syllabic vowel, n, or ʾ; see Phonetics): Sumùsúlat 15aŋ bátaʾ. The child is writing; or: Aŋ bátaʾ ay sumùsúlat. Aŋ báta y sumùsúlat. Siyà ay sumùsúlat. Sya y sumùsúlat. He, she is writing. Here siyà, syà is not enclitic.

(2) Enclitic: it follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate: Hindí sya sumùsúlat. Not he is-writing, i. e. He is not writing. 20Sumùsúlat sya naŋ líham. He is writing a letter, letters. In these examples siyà is enclitic.

Not only enclitically used pronouns (§§ 63. 64), but even short phrases are thus used: Pinapútol nila si Hwàn naŋ káhoy. Was-ordered-to-cut by-them Juan (subject) some wood, i. e. They ordered 25Juan to cut wood. Here the position of si Hwàn after the first orthotonic word of the predicate (pinapútol) but before the rest of the predicate (naŋ káhoy) shows it to be (like nilà) an enclitic element. With the same subject not enclitically used the sentence would be: Pinapútol nila naŋ káhoy si Hwàn, and this, 30indeed, is the more usual locution.

90. On the use or non-use of an anaphoric subject (siyà, silà, itò) see § 87.

c. The predicate.

91. The predicate may be (1) a transient word with its 35modifiers, (2) a static word with its modifiers, or (3) an object expression.

(1) Transient predicate.

92. Transient words fall into four classes according to the four relations which a subject may bear to them when they are [154]used as predicate. We may designate these classes by the following names:

1. active: the subject is viewed as an actor: Sumùsúlat sya naŋ líham. He (subject) is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pumútol 5naŋ káhoy. He (subject) cut some wood. Umalìs syà. He went away.

2. direct passive: the subject is viewed as an object fully affected or produced: Sinúlat nya aŋ líham. Was-written by-him the letter (subject), i. e. The letter was written by him, He wrote 10the letter. Pinútol nya aŋ káhoy. Was-cut by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut the wood.

3. instrumental passive: the subject is viewed as a means, an instrument, something given forth or parted from: Isinúlat nya aŋ kwènto. Was-written-down by-him the story (subject), i. e. 15He wrote the story. Ipinútol nya aŋ gúlok. Was-cut-with by-him the bolo (subject), i. e. He used the bolo for cutting, He cut with the bolo.

4. local passive: the subject is viewed as an object partly or less fully affected, as a place or sphere: Sinulátan nya akò. Was-written-to 20by-him I (subject), i. e. He wrote me. Pinutúlan nya aŋ káhoy. Was-cut-from by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut a piece off the wood.

For a detailed description of these classes of transient words, see Morphology.

2593. In general the choice between these four constructions is made in accordance with the logical situation: the definite, known object underlying the predication as starting-point of discourse is chosen as subject: Binigyàn nya akò naŋ aklàt. Was-given-to (local passive) by-him I (enclitic subject) a book, books, 30i. e. He gave me a book, books. Ibinigay nyà sa ákin aŋ aklàt. Was-given (instrumental passive) by-him to me the book (subject), i. e. He gave me the book. In the first example the speaker is talking about himself, in the second about a certain book.

94. However, the active construction is avoided whenever 35any object other than the actor is available as subject. Especially are active constructions with an anaphoric subject (siyà, silà, itò) avoided wherever a passive construction is at hand. Thus, in the instance in § 93, even if “he”, the actor, were the real subject of discourse, one would rarely use the active construction: Sya y 40nagbigày sa ákin naŋ aklàt. He (subject) gave (active) me a book, books. Even elements which we should look upon as somewhat indefinite are preferred as subjects to an actor: Kinúha nya aŋ [155]isa ŋ aklàt. Was-taken (direct passive) by-him a book (subject), i. e. He took a (certain) book (he knew, or I know which one or what kind).

The active construction is thus confined to instances in which 5the object-ideas other than the actor are entirely vague and undetermined or lacking: Umalìs syà. He went away. Sya y kumúha naŋ aklàt. He took a book, some books (no matter to him or to me which one or what kind). Sumùsúlat sya naŋ líham. He is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pumútol naŋ káhoy. He cut some 10wood. Kumáin sya naŋ kánin. He ate some boiled rice; but: Kináin nya aŋ kánin. Was-eaten (direct passive) by him the boiled rice (subject), i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

If, in spite of the presence of other definite objects, the actor is very decidedly emphasized, a different construction (§§ 104.107.) 15is used.

(2) Static predicate.

95. The predicate may consist of a static word with its modifiers: Aŋ bátà ay mabaìt. The child is good. Iyà y masamàʾ. That’s bad, wrong. Pulà aŋ panyo ŋ itò. This handkerchief is red.

2096. This type of predicate is regular in word-questions: the question word is used as predicate; it precedes the subject: Páno aŋ pagkágusto ninyò sa trabáho-ŋ-kanyunéro? How (predicate) your liking for (i. e. How did you like) the artillery-service? Papáno aŋ pagsasábi sa wíka ŋ Tagálog naŋ salità ŋ Inglès na 25“scissors”? How (predicate) the saying in the Tagalog language of the English word “scissors”? i. e. How does one say “scissors” in Tagalog? Gaáno aŋ pagkakagalìt nila? How great, How serious was (predicate) their quarrel?

97. This is the construction of the interrogative pronouns in 30questions asking for the identity of an object,—unless, indeed, these belong rather under type (3). The interrogative pronouns are the following:

(a) síno who? (singular and plural), síno-síno (explicit plural, § 63, end) is used of persons only, and then only when the answer 35expected is a name or the equivalent; it asks for the identity of a person: Sínu ka? Who are (predicate) you (subject)? Sínu yàn?—Akò. Who’s that? i. e. Who’s there?—I. Sínu ya ŋ tumútuktók? Who’s that knocking? Síno aŋ nagbigày sa iyò? Who (predicate) the one-who-gave (sc. it, anaphoric) to you (subject)? 40i. e. Who gave it to you? Síno aŋ nagsábi sa iyò? Who told you? Who told you so? Síno sa kanila ŋ dalawà aŋ nagnákaw? Which [156]of the two committed the theft? The two are known by name or, at any rate, as personalities. Síno-síno sa maŋa bátaʾ aŋ iyo ŋ nàhúle sa paŋuumìt? Which ones of the children (predicate) did you catch pilfering? literally: the ones caught by you at pilfering, 5subject.

(b) anò what? what kind of? how?, explicit plural anò-anò, asks for the identity of a thing or for the description, character, condition of a person or of a thing: Ano yàn?—Itò y librò. What (predicate) is that you have there (subject)?—This is a book. An 10yòn?—Yo y súnog. What’s that over there?—It’s a fire. Anò aŋ ŋálan mo? What is your name? Ano aŋ sábi mo? What do you say? Ano aŋ íbig mo? What do you want? Ano-anò aŋ pinagsabè ni Hwàn sa iyò? What things did Juan tell you?, literally: What things (predicate) the things said by Juan to you? Anu kà? 15What sort of person are you? Anò aŋ lagày naŋ maŋa bátaʾ?... naŋ asáwa mo? ... naŋ mé báhay? What (or How) is the condition of (i. e. How are) the children? ... your husband or wife? ... your wife?

(c) alìn which? which one? which ones?, explicit plural alìn-alìn, 20is used of persons and things; it asks neither for identification (persons, síno; things, anò) nor for characterization (anò), but for indication, by pointing or by description of the place or some other unessential feature, of persons or things: Alìn aŋ gustu mò? Which one, Which ones do you want? Alìn sa kanila 25ŋ dalawà aŋ nagnákaw? Which of the two (e. g., of these two strange men) committed the theft? Alin-alìn sa maŋa púnu-ŋ-káhoy aŋ iyo ŋ tinagàʾ? Which ones of the trees did you cut down?

98. Of the numerative pronouns (§ 66), boòʾ, ibà, and ilàn 30(in this use interrogative) are used as static predicates: Itò y buòʾ. This is entire, complete, unbroken. Hindí ko gusto iyàn; ibà aŋ áki ŋ gustò. Not by-me wanted (static predicate) that (subject); different (predicate) that by-me wanted (subject), i. e. I don’t want that; what I want is different, I want something 35else. Ilàn aŋ maŋlilígaw? How many are the suitors?

99. Of the modifiers of indefinite quantity (§ 69) several are used as static predicates: Sya y walá na. He is or was gone already. Itò y walàʾ. This does not take place, does not appear, falls away. Malakì aŋ súnog. The fire was great. Marámi aŋ 40nagsàsábi nitò. Many are they who say this.

100. For the disjunctive forms of personal pronouns and of síno as static predicates, see § 169. For local expressions, see [157]§ 211. For entire predications as static predicates, § 112 f., quotations, § 114.

(3) Object expression as predicate.

101. If the predicate is an object expression, it may have 5three different forms: (A) definite, (B) circumlocutory definite, and (C) indefinite.

102. (A) A definite object predicate consists simply of a word or phrase in the object construction (§ 61 ff.); it has therefore the same structure as a subject. Usually this predicate precedes 10and is emphatic (emotionally dominant): Itò aŋ áki ŋ tìráhan. This is (predicate) my dwelling (subject), i. e. Why, it’s here I’m at home!

103. The definite object predicate is especially emphatic in sentences that have as subject a transient word (with or without 15modifiers) in object construction: Si Hwàn aŋ nagnákaw. It was Juan who did the stealing. Siya rìn aŋ kanya ŋ inìíbig. It was he whom she loved. Both nagnákaw and inìíbig are transient.

104. When an emphatic actor cannot be used as subject of a transient predicate (owing to the presence of other definite object 20ideas, § 94), it is often used as the predicate in this construction,—the transient part of the sentence being put into object construction and used as subject. Thus, if, in the sentence: Itò y ginawá ni Hwàn. This (subject) was-done (direct passive) by Juan, the idea of “Juan”, the actor, should become dominant, 25one would not use the active transient predicate (”Si Hwàn ay gumawá nitò”), for the idea of “this” is too definite to allow of the actor’s functioning as subject; one says instead: Si Hwàn aŋ gumawá nitò. It was Juan who did this, with “Juan” as definite object predicate and the rest of the sentence, objectivized, as subject. 30So: Siyà aŋ nagbigày sa ákin naŋ aklàt. It was he that gave me the (or a) book, books. (cf. § 93). Ikaw ŋàʾ aŋ nagsábi niyàn. It was you yourself who said that.

105. Less commonly the subject precedes the predicate. In this case the construction is quite normal and unemphatic; if 35there is a transient element it usually stands in the predicate: Itò y aŋ áki ŋ tìráhan. This (subject) is my dwelling. Si Hwàn ay aŋ nagnákaw. Juan is the one who did the stealing.

106. (B) In the circumlocutory definite object predicate the central element is the pronoun siyà (in this use never enclitic), 40which is followed by modifiers which express the real content of the predicate. In this use siyà may apply to inanimate [158]objects and to two or more objects (§ 63). The subject, which has always a moderate degree of emphasis, usually precedes: Itò ay sya kò ŋ tìráhan. This is what is my home, i. e. This is where I live. In most cases the real content of the predicate is a transient 5word (with or without modifiers): Si Pédro ay sya ŋ tumútuktòk. Pedro is the one (siyà) who is knocking. (Less emphatic than the violently transposed Si Pédro aŋ tumútuktòk. It’s Pedro who is knocking, of type A). Aŋ pagkátahol naŋ áso ay syà ŋ ikinágisiŋ naŋ bátaʾ. The barking of the dog is what woke up the 10child. Aŋ maŋa paŋparikìt ay sya kò ŋ pinamutúlan. The kindlings are what I have cut up. Occasionally the predicate precedes: Baká sya ŋ ikapútol naŋ piŋgà aŋ kabigatàn naŋ buháŋin. Perhaps that which may break the carrying-pole (predicate) the weight of the sand (subject), i. e. See that the weight of the sand 15doesn’t break the carrying-pole.

107. This construction, like that of type (A), is often used when a transient predicate is not permissible with an actor-subject; here, however, the sentence is not, as in (A), reversed, but the actor is used as subject and the rest of the sentence as true 20content of the circumlocutory predicate: Si Hwàn ay syà ŋ gumawá nito. Juan is the one who did this. Si Pédro ay syà ŋ nagbigày sa ákin naŋ aklàt. Pedro is the person who gave me the book.

108. A predicate of this type may, in its entirety and as a 25unit, be objectivized with aŋ and used as subject of a sentence of type (A): Aŋ médiko lámaŋ ay sya nyà ŋ màkàkatálo. The doctor alone will be the one to oppose him (literally: he by-him who will-be-opposed, direct passive): Aŋ médiko lámaŋ aŋ sya nyà ŋ màkàkatálo. It is the doctor alone who will be the one to 30oppose him. Aŋ bintána ŋ iyàn aŋ syà ŋ kahùhulúgan naŋ bátaʾ! It’s that window that will be the place where the child will fall out!

109. (C) The indefinite object predicate has the structure of an object expression, but lacks aŋ (§ 68). In meaning it corresponds, 35roughly, to an English noun-predicate without the: Itò y librò. This (subject) is a book (predicate). Yo y súnog. That’s a fire. Itò y mabúti ŋ librò. This is a good book. Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ magnanákaw. Juan is a thief. Masípag na táo itò. Industrious people (predicate) these (subject), i. e. These are industrious 40people.

110. As indefinite object predicates occur especially the expressions of indefinite quantity (§ 69). In this use they have possessive [159]value: Sya y máy famílya. He has a family. May ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ hábaʾ. Having forty feet (predicate) the length (subject), i. e. The length is about forty feet. Sya y máy-roo ŋ aklàt. He has a book, books. Sya y wala ŋ aklàt. He has no book, 5no books. Sya y marámi ŋ salapèʾ. He has much money. Hindí maláo ŋ panahòn aŋ kanya ŋ paghihimatày. Her fainting-spell did not last long. Itò y malakì ŋ kagamitàn. This has great use, is much used.

It is to be noted that all the modifiers of indefinite quantity, 10except máy, which is pretonic, are orthotonic and therefore followed by an enclitic subject (§ 89): Máy-roon sya ŋ aklàt. He has no book. But: May dalawà sya ŋ anàk. He has two children.

d. Subordinate predications.

111. An entire predication may be used as subject, predicate, 15or attribute in a longer sentence. The use of such subordinate predications is, however, limited (as opposed, e. g., to English usage) by the habit of freely using transient words (with their modifiers) as attributes: aŋ súpot naŋ kwaltà na kanila ŋ ibinigày pagdáka sa kanila ŋ magúlaŋ the bag of money by-them given 20at once to their parents, i. e. ... which they gave.... It is limited, further, by the freedom of omitting anaphoric elements (§ 87): Aŋ púnoʾ ay tumúbo haŋgàŋ sa magbúŋa. The tree grew until (sc. it, subject) bore fruit.

112. Predications as predicates occur very frequently. Aŋ 25ginawá nya ay umalìs sya. That done by-him (subject) was went-away he (predication, as predicate), i. e. What he did was, he went away. Aŋ mabúti ay itápun nilà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. The best thing (to do) was that they should abandon the children. Aŋ ísip ko y balat lámaŋ naŋ itlòg itò. My thought was (i. e. I 30thought) this was only an egg-shell.

113. Especially common is a whole predication as a predicate describing or characterizing the subject: Aŋ kúba ay mahínaʾ aŋ katawàn. The hunchback was: weak was his body, i. e. was weak of body. Aŋ ikapitu ŋ bátaʾ ay hindí kináin aŋ kanya 35ŋ tinápay. The seventh child was: not was-eaten his bread, i. e. did not eat his bread. Aŋ isa nyà ŋ anàk ay pitò nà ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ. His one child was now seven years of age. This construction, together with the use of impersonal expressions (§ 84) makes possible such a sentence as: Aŋ maŋa karitòn ... ay gabì kuŋ 40ipalákad. The wagons ... were: it-was-night when (sc. they, anaphoric subject) were-made-to-go, i. e. The wagons were driven at night. [160]

114. Direct quotations as predicates are frequent: “Isà!” aŋ sábi naŋ bulàg. “One!” was what the blindman said. “Túnay bagà ŋ akò y inìíbig mo?” aŋ tanòŋ naŋ dalága ni Andrès sa kanyà. “Is it really true that you love me?” was the question 5of Andrés’ young lady to him.

115. A predication as subject is rare: Mabúti táyo y dumoòn sa isa ŋ lugàr.... It is best (predicate) that we go to a place.... Hindí bihíraʾ aŋ maŋa táo y naŋhùhúle naŋ buhày na uŋgòʾ. It is not rare that people go catching live monkeys. 10It will be noted that these predications are not objectivized, cf. § 88.

116. Occasionally, however, the predication used as subject is objectivized: Hindí bihíraʾ aŋ magkalunòd aŋ maŋa táo. It is not rare that people get drowned, or The occurrence that people 15get drowned is not rare. Súkat nà aŋ ikàw ay magpasalámat. It is fitting now that you be thankful.

117. For predications as attributes see the section on attribution.

e. Omission of predicate.

20118. The use of a predicate, or of the central element of a predicate is (like that of any other element, § 87) optional when, if used, it would be anaphoric: (Si Hwàn namàn ay sumagòt: “Matàr!” at sa hulè) si Andrès aŋ kanya ŋ “Sì!” (Then Juan answered “Matar!” and last) Andrés his “Si!” The form of 25the sentence with the predicate (which is anaphoric from the preceding sumagòt answered) would be: ... si Andrès ay isinagòt aŋ kanya ŋ “Sì!” ... Andrés was: was-answered his “Si!”, i. e. Andrés answered his “Si!”,—a sentence of the kind described in § 113.

303. Attributes.

119. We may distinguish four constructions in which an attribute may stand: 1. Conjunctive attribution: the attribute is joined by means of the particle na or ŋ: isa ŋ táo a person, one person; 2. Disjunctive attribution: the attribute, which is always 35an object expression, stands in a special disjunctive form, aŋ, for instance, being changed to naŋ: aŋ púno naŋ uŋgòʾ the tree of the monkey; 3. Local attribution: the attribute, which is always an object expression, stands in a special local form, aŋ, for instance, being always changed to sa: nalìlígo sa ílog bathing in the 40river; 4. Absolute attribution: the attribute merely precedes or follows: hindí támaʾ not correct. [161]

In a sense the last three constructions, which do not employ the particle na, ŋ, stand opposed to the first, which does. Constructions 2 and 3 make it possible to speak, in a very wide sense, of three “cases” in which an object expression may stand: “subjective” 5aŋ ílog the river, “disjunctive” naŋ ílog of the river, and “local” sa ílog in the river; but it is to be observed that these “cases” are not confined to any class of words, but appear in any word or phrase when it stands in the object construction.4

120. In position attributes may be:

10A. Loosely joined. In this position occur only attributes of a predicate (or of an entire non-predicative sentence). Their treatment resembles that of a non-enclitic subject (§ 89): they either precede the rest of the sentence with ay, y, or follow at the end of the sentence: Doòn ay syà y nahigàʾ. There (doòn, loosely 15joined) he lay down. Nahánap ko nà aŋ sombréro sa lahàt naŋ súlok. I have looked for the hat in every corner. The phrase beginning with sa is loosely joined; it follows all the rest of the sentence, including even the subject, aŋ sombréro.

In the placing of enclitics a loosely joined attribute is ignored: 20Pagulàn ay gamítin mo aŋ kapóte. When it rains use your rain-coat. The enclitic mò follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate (which it modifies), not counting the loosely joined pagulàn.

When a loosely joined attribute precedes, the ay, y is in some 25cases left off: Dahil díto tináwag nya aŋ kaybígan nya. Therefore he called his friend. The position of the enclitic niyà shows that dahil díto is loosely joined, but ay, y is not used.

Occasionally a loosely joined attribute is preceded by the subject and only one ay, y is used: Karanyúwa y aŋ kosinéro y 30upahàn. Usually (loosely joined) the cook is hired; but also: Aŋ kosinéro karanyúwa y upahàn.

B. Closely joined. The attribute immediately precedes or follows that modified: hindí támaʾ not correct; aŋ púno naŋ uŋgòʾ the tree of the monkey.

35C. Enclitic. They follow immediately on the first word of the expression modified, counting closely joined attributes, but not loosely joined: Hindí ko nàlàláman. Not by-me (it) is-known, i. e. [162]I don’t know. aŋ mahahába nya ŋ paà his (niyà enclitic) long legs.

121. Some attributes always precede (so e. g. hindìʾ, § 239); others always follow (so, for instance, disjunctive attributes, 5§ 171).

a. Conjunctive attributes.

122. A conjunctive attribute is connected with the word or phrase which it modifies by the atonic particle na. Normally ŋ takes the place of na after a vowel, n, or the glottal stop (see 10Phonetics): mabúti ŋ aklàt good book, or: aklàt na mabúti.

However, na and ŋ are not exactly equivalent. Predications, longer phrases, and, frequently, transient expressions are joined with na even where ŋ is possible: isa ŋ malakì ŋ higànte na nalìlígoʾ a big giant who was bathing.

15On the other hand, some constructions use na rarely or not at all: where ŋ cannot be used the particle is then omitted and we have absolute attribution. These constructions will be described under the latter heading.

In the formation of compound words (see Morphology) na is 20never used, while ŋ is a regular element. This latter circumstance sometimes makes it difficult to determine whether a given expression is a conjunctive phrase or a compound word.

123. Conjunctive attributes are closely joined and either precede or follow; for this reason it is sometimes undetermined 25which of the elements connected is the attribute, which the element modified.

124. The elements connected by conjunctive attribution are viewed as constituting a single larger element. Conjunctive attribution is the normal and general relation between modifier and 30modified and includes relations that in many other languages (such as English) are viewed in manifold ways. We may divide the construction roughly into three types, although these actually merge into each other: (1) quality, (2) manner, and (3) complement.

35Not included in this division are the cases where conjunctive attribution alternates with absolute (§ 122), which will be treated of under the latter heading, and a type which in meaning is so closely parallel with disjunctive attribution that it will be more economical to treat it under this head (§§ 165.168).

40(1) Conjunctive attributes of quality.

125. Conjunctive attributes of the quality type are used [163]chiefly in object expressions. They have no fixed order: aŋ mabúti ŋ aklàt the (a) good book, or: aŋ aklàt na mabúti. aŋ sumùsúlat na bátaʾ the writing child, the child that is writing, or: aŋ báta ŋ sumùsúlat.

5126. When they precede a personal name the whole expression is preceded by aŋ, but when they follow si suffices: aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn the child Juan, little Juan, si Hwà ŋ Talúnan Juan who is always defeated (as a nickname).

127. Conjunctive attributes of quality tend to precede when 10they are emphatic or in contrast; when fixed they tend to follow: Aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ at aŋ ulòl na uŋgòʾ. The clever turtle and the foolish monkey. Si Hwà ŋ Pípe ay nàkíta námin sa tulày. We saw Dumb Juan on the bridge. aŋ báo ŋ babáye the lower half of the cocoanut shell, aŋ báo ŋ malambòt the soft shell of the 15cocoanut, aŋ wíka ŋ Kastílaʾ the Spanish language. Especially those expressing material tend to follow: aŋ báhay na batò a stone house, aŋ koróna ŋ tinìk a crown of thorns, aŋ atsára ŋ papáya papaw salad, pickled papaw, aŋ tinóla ŋ manòk chicken stew, aŋ sáko ŋ pálay a sack of rice. A modifier expressing the 20special kind always follows: aŋ sála ŋ pagnanákaw the crime which is (i. e. of) theft, aŋ bísyo ŋ paginòm the vice of drinking, aŋ larò ŋ taguàn the game which consists of hiding, the game of hide-and-seek, kanína ŋ umága a little while ago in the morning, i. e. this morning, ilà ŋ óras na pagsasàlitáan a few hours of conversation, 25aŋ bandà ŋ kataasàn (or: itaàs) the direction (which is) north, i. e. the north; so: aŋ bandà ŋ kababáan (or: ibabàʾ) the south, siláŋan (or: sìlaŋánan) the east, kalunúran the west, aŋ gawì ŋ kánan the right-hand side, kaliwàʾ the left.

128. Titles and the like precede: aŋ báo ŋ si Maryà the 30widow Maria.

129. The personal pronouns precede their conjunctive attributes: sila ŋ tatlò they three, Si Pédro ay syà ŋ tumútuktòk. Pedro is the one who is knocking (§ 106 ff.).

130. The demonstrative pronouns as conjunctive attributes 35usually follow: aŋ táo ŋ itò this person, this man, aŋ tatlò ŋ itò these three, Aŋ korbáta ŋ irè ay bágo. This necktie is new.

Occasionally, however, they precede, especially with a longer expression. In this case aŋ is not used (§ 64, end): ito ŋ súpot ko naŋ kwàlta this bag of money of mine; iyo ŋ úna ŋ kumalabòg 40that first thing which made a thud; Itò ŋ báhay aŋ binili kò. This house is what I bought, It’s this house I’ve bought, This is the house I’ve bought (§ 102 ff.).

Under emphasis the demonstrative pronoun may both precede [164]and follow: ito ŋ táo ŋ itò this man here, iyo ŋ táo ŋ yaòn that man over there.

131. The interrogative pronouns precede; aŋ is not used (§ 65). See also kaníno, § 168. The meanings of the interrogative 5pronouns as conjunctive attributes are:

síno which? (of several known people): sínu ŋ táo? which one? which ones?

alìn which? (of several known things): alì ŋ lugàr which place, which places? alì ŋ bandà? which way? (e. g. at a cross-roads) 10alì ŋ maŋa búŋa? which fruits? which ones of the fruits?

anò what? what kind of? (of persons or things not known), also, in exclamations, what...! what great...! Anu ŋ ílog itò? What river is this? ano ŋ bandà? what direction? which way? (of all possible points of the compass) anu ŋ táo what sort 15of a person? what sort of people? who? Ano ŋ hínaʾ! What weakness!

132. The numerative pronouns mostly precede, and the use of aŋ is optional (§ 66, end); ibà other, however, requires aŋ when, as conjunctive attribute, it begins an object phrase. Of the 20others, karamíhan most and the particle báwat every are not used in this construction, and lahàt all occurs only as modifier of the personal pronouns, which (by § 129) precede. The particle bála any, on the other hand, occurs only as conjunctive attribute: aŋ iba ŋ báhay the other house, another house, sila ŋ lahàt they all, 25all of them, bála ŋ táo any person, anyone, aŋ bála ŋ táo any one (of a given group), boò ŋ báyan all the town, everybody in town, aŋ boò ŋ báyan the entire town, everybody in the town, ilà ŋ táo ŋ matalíno a few intelligent men, aŋ ilà ŋ sandalèʾ a few moments.

133. The cardinal numerals usually precede; aŋ is optional 30(§ 67): isa ŋ itlòg one egg, an egg; aŋ isa ŋ itlòg the one egg.

134. The tens, hundreds, etc. of the cardinal numerals are always modified by isà one or a higher unit. The phrase so formed precedes that counted. The higher numerals are: pùʾ ten, daàn, raàn hundred, líbo thousand, laksàʾ million, yútaʾ billion: isa ŋ 35pù ŋ táo, sà m pu ŋ táo ten men, ápat na raà ŋ báhay four-hundred houses.

135. The teens are expressed by labì preceding the simple numerals as conjunctive modifier: labì ŋ isà ŋ aklàt eleven books, labì ŋ tatlò ŋ áraw thirteen days.

40136. The Spanish numerals, however, (used in dates, § 67) follow: aŋ taò ŋ míle-nobisyèntos-dòs the year 1902.

137. saríle self (see § 175) is used as a conjunctive attribute [165]in the sense of own: Walá sya ŋ saríli ŋ baìt. He has no self-respect (literally: own respect).

138. Of the modifiers that form expressions of indefinite quantity all except máy precede as conjunctive attributes; for 5examples see § 69 f. In object expressions maláon, malakì and marámi do not differ from normal conjunctive attributes; examples in § 70.

139. Expressions of indefinite quantity as units may stand in conjunctive attribution. They then have possessive value: aŋ 10háre ŋ may súŋay the king who had horns; aŋ kapútol na wala ŋ dáhon the part without leaves.

140. Conjunctive attribution includes many cases which in English would be envisaged rather as appositions of two objects: aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn the boy Juan, si Hwà ŋ Bíbas Juan the Jester, 15Sya y may táŋa ŋ pamáloʾ. He has hold of a stick. Táŋan that grasped, thing grasped is conjunctive attribute of pamáloʾ club, stick. aŋ magának na sina Bantòg the Bantog family, tatlò ŋ magkakayibíga ŋ estudyànte ŋ magkababáyan three friends (ŋ) students (ŋ) fellow-townsmen, i. e. three student friends from the 20same town; aŋ tatlú ŋ magkakaybíga ŋ si Pédro, si Hwàn, at si Andrès the three friends, Pedro, Juan, and Andrés; aŋ salità ŋ “bámos” the word “vamos”.

141. When a longer expression is used as a conjunctive attribute of quality, it usually follows, and na is often preferred 25to ŋ: aŋ parúsa na hindí mo gustò the punishment not by-you liked, i. e. the punishment you don’t like; isà ŋ usà ŋ naŋìŋináin sa gúbat a deer grazing in the jungle; aŋ isà (sa maŋa kaybígan nilà) na sya ŋ magígiŋ hukòm one (of their friends) who will be judge; cf. the predicates described in § 106. aŋ maŋa kúra na 30sya ŋ maŋa maliliìt na háreʾ the priests (who are) those (who are) little kings, i. e. the priests, those veritable little kings.

142. An object expression is frequently followed by an entire predication of the type described in § 113, as conjunctive attribute: Aŋ tagahúle ay isa ŋ táo ŋ aŋ katuŋkúlan ay humúle 35naŋ ano màn o síno màn. A catcher is a person (whose) duty is to catch anything or anyone. aŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy na masasaràp aŋ búŋa trees (whose) fruits are tasty; isa ŋ táo ŋ malakì aŋ kapaŋyaríhan a person (whose) power is great.

(2) Conjunctive attributes of manner.

40143. Conjunctive attributes of manner precede or follow. When they precede a predicate they stand as the first orthotonic [166]word and are immediately followed by enclitics (such as an enclitic subject pronoun, § 89), after which comes the na or ŋ, and then the central element of the predicate: Syà y mabúte ŋ tumugtòg. She plays (music) well. This example illustrates the 5identity of conjunctive attributes of manner and of quality, for mabúte ŋ tumugtòg may be looked upon indifferently as a transient predicate (§ 92) with mabúte well as attribute of manner, or as an indefinite object predicate (§ 109) a good player, in which mabúte good is an attribute of quality. Other forms of the same 10sentence are: Mabúti sya ŋ tumugtòg. (siyà enclitic), Syà y tumugtòg na mabúti. So further: Isípin mo ŋ mabúti. Consider it well. Literally: Be-considered by-you (mò enclitic) well. Iyòn ay tùtúbo na mabúti. It will grow well. Silà y magkakasáma ŋ nagsipamarìl. They as-companions (i. e. in company, together) 15went hunting. Or: They were companion (quality) hunters. Madalí sya ŋ tumakbò. Quickly he ran. Talagà ŋ mahigpìt aŋ tapòn naŋ bóte ŋ iyàn. The stopper of that bottle is certainly tight. Mahigpìt tight, as central element of the predicate, is modified by talagà fated, by fate, by nature, certainly. Putikà ŋ dumatìŋ 20si Salamìn sa báhay. “Mirror” (as name of a dog) came home all muddy. Or: ... was a muddy comer. Paputòl nya ŋ tinagàʾ aŋ bisìg ni Hwàn. He cut Juan’s arm transversely. Kinalaykay kò ŋ patipòn aŋ maŋa saŋà ŋ maliliìt naŋ káhoy. I raked into-a-heap the twigs of-the trees.

25144. A phrase of more than one word usually follows that modified; frequently na is used instead of ŋ: Nádala nyà na hindí sinásadyàʾ sa kanya ŋ pagalìs aŋ áki ŋ páyoŋ. Was-taken by-him not intendedly in his departing my umbrella, i. e. In leaving he inadvertently took my umbrella.

30145. The numerative pronoun lahàt is used as a conjunctive attribute of manner in the sense of entirely, completely. It follows that modified: Aŋ maŋa lalagyàn ay pùnúa ŋ lahàt. The containers are entirely full.

146. Expressions of indefinite quantity as conjunctive attributes 35of manner follow: Aŋ maŋa táo ay nagtakbúha ŋ walà ŋ túto. The people all ran without order, in disorder.

147. The particles lubhàʾ very and láloʾ more usually precede: Lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ gálit ni Pédro. Pedro’s wrath was very great. Lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ kanya ŋ gálit. His wrath grew still 40greater.

148. The particle mulíʾ again follows: Tátakbo sya ŋ mulìʾ. He will run again. Aŋ kamakalawà ay hindí na dáratiŋ na mulèʾ. The day before yesterday will never come again. [167]

149. A conjunctive attribute of manner may express the time throughout which: Syà y naŋgupìt at naŋáhit na maláo ŋ panahòn. He did hair-cutting and shaving for a long time. Silà y nagtítira na tatlu ŋ áraw. They stay three days. May ila ŋ 5bwà ŋ aŋ maŋa útos ay mahihigpìt. For several months (literally: having several months, § 69, end) the orders were strict.

150. A word repeated as its own conjunctive attribute of manner expresses a high degree (intensity): Sya y biŋì. He is deaf. Sya y biŋì ŋ biŋì. He is stone deaf. Inìt si Pédro. Pedro 10is hot, is angry. Inìt na inìt si Pédro. Pedro is in a rage. líhim na líhim very secretly, malakì ŋ malakì very large.

(3) Conjunctive attributes as complements.

151. The general sphere of conjunctive attribution includes cases where one element involves another as result or content. The 15latter follows and is in many instances plainly viewed as the attribute. In some instances, however, the former may just as well be looked upon as a modifier, usually of quality, sometimes also of manner. The transition from these latter types to that of the complement appears, indeed, in all possible stages, and no 20real boundary can be drawn. Sya y mabúti ŋ tumugtòg (naŋ piyáno). She is a good player (of the piano), or She plays (the piano) well,—see § 143—can be analyzed also: She is good that (she, anaphoric subject omitted, § 87) plays the piano; and in some instances this last analysis is the only possible one.

25Other examples illustrating the merging of the three types we have set up are the following: Malápit na siya ŋ makatápos naŋ karéra. He was already near that (he) end his course, i. e. near ending his course, almost through his course; or: a near ender, cf. isa ŋ báya ŋ malápit a near-by town. Aŋ pagmamarúnoŋ 30ni Hwàn ay ginágawa ŋ katatawanàn naŋ maŋa nakàkàkilála sa kanyà. Juan’s pretending to be wise is made fun of by those who know him, literally: ... is-being-made (ginágawàʾ) that (it) is a laughing-stock, or else: ... a being-made laughing-stock. Cf. aŋ gawì ŋ húkay the to-be-made ditch, i. e. the ditch that is to be 35made, where only the quality interpretation is possible. Magtúlin ka ŋ lumákad. Walk faster. This can be interpreted as Be a fast walker, or Walk faster, or Be-quick that (you) walk; and this last interpretation comes nearest to the original in so far as magtúlin is an active transient form used in commands rather than an expression 40suited to an idea of quality or of manner. Sya y nagdàdahilà ŋ may sakìt. He alleges that (he) is sick. Aŋ pagsakày [168]sa kabáyo ay hindí magaà ŋ pagarálan. Riding horseback is not easy that (it) be-learned, i. e. not easy to learn, or: not an easy thing-to-be-learned. aŋ pinakamahúsay na magsalitàʾ naŋ Latìn the best that (he) should speak Latin, or: the best speaker of 5Latin; Hwag kà, Hwàn, pumásuk na sekréta. Don’t go as a spy (or to be a spy), Juan. Ginawá nya si Hwàn na barbéro naŋ háreʾ. Was-made by-him Juan that (he) be barber of-the king, i. e. He made Juan barber royal. Si Hwàn ay pinamàmagatàn naŋ marámi na isa ŋ doktò. Juan is reputed by the people that 10(he) is (i. e. as) a learned man.

152. The simplest cases are those where both of the expressions connected by na, ŋ refer to the same person or thing, as in the above examples. The following are less doubtful cases of complement construction of this kind: Nagpùpumílit sya ŋ màtúto. 15He strives to get educated. Si Hwàn at si Maryà ay nagkásundo ŋ pakasàl. Juan and Maria have agreed that they (i. e. to) get married. Inanyáhan silà ni Hwàn na magpasyàl. They were invited by Juan that they (i. e. to) go walking. Maári mo ŋà ŋ ihúlug sa koréyo aŋ áki ŋ súlat? Can you please mail my 20letter? Literally: maári ... ŋ ihúlug a possible thing-to-be thrown or capable that (it) be thrown. Naàári akò ŋ malígo makálawa maghápon. I am able that (I) bathe (i. e. to bathe) twice a day. Pinabayáan niya kamì ŋ umalìs. We were permitted by him to depart. Hinantày nya ŋ matápus aŋ mísa. The mass was-awaited 25by-him that it end, i. e. He waited until the mass was ended. Anò aŋ gustu mu ŋ sabíhin? What is desired by-you that (it) be-said? i. e. What do you mean to say? Hindí ko gustò ŋ màkatálo si Hwàn. Not by-me desired that (he) be-opposed is Juan, i. e. I don’t want Juan to be my opponent.

30153. Clear cases of the complement construction are those in which the two elements connected refer to different persons or things: Nagyayá sya ŋ umuwèʾ. He advised that (they, anaphoric) go home. (34, 12.) Aŋ pagkámasìd nya sa láŋit ay syà ŋ nagpakilála sa kanyà na úulàn. His glance at the sky was what 35showed him that (it, see § 84) was going to rain.

154. When the former of the two elements is an object expression (or similar element) the complement construction is evident: aŋ kaibigà ŋ màtúto the desire that (he) get educated, i. e. the desire to get an education. aŋ pagkágusto nyà na kumáin naŋ 40nyòg his desire that (he) should-eat cocoanuts, i. e. to eat.... Anu ŋ tagàl nya ŋ sumísid! What endurance of-him that (he) stay under water! i. e. How long he stays under water! Ano ŋ hína mo ŋ lumákad! What slowness of-you that (you) walk! i. e. How [169]slowly you walk! Aŋ tagasulsè ay isa ŋ babáye ŋ may katuŋkúla ŋ manahìʾ o manulsè naŋ maŋa púnit naŋ damìt. A darning-woman is a woman having the duty that (she) patch or mend the small holes in clothing, i. e. ... whose duty is to....

5155. A further sign that the speech-feeling envisages the complement construction as different from the constructions of quality or manner appears when enclitics follow the first word of the complement (i. e. of the second of the connected elements) rather than the first word of the sentence: this shows that the 10complement is viewed as a relatively independent element within the sentence: Maári ŋà ŋ ihúlug mo sa koréyo aŋ áki ŋ súlat? Should-be-capable that (it) be-thrown by-you into the mail (predicate) my letter (subject)? i. e. Can you please mail my letter? Cf. under § 152 above.

15156. Very frequently the complement is an entire predication: aŋ panukálaʾ na aŋ púnoʾ ay tùtúboʾ the thought that the tree will grow; pagkátanaw nyà na dumáratiŋ aŋ susòʾ (at the) seeing by-him i. e. when he sees that the snail is arriving; aŋ áraw na kayò ay dápat magsipagsísi the day that (i. e. when) you ought 20to repent; Nagkàkapálad aŋ manùnúbok na màkíta nya aŋ kúlam. The spier has the good fortune that be-seen by-him the magic principle, i. e. ... to see....

157. A predication as complement is often parallel with a disjunctive object modifier, i. e. with an object expression used 25as direct, instrumental, or local object (§ 184 ff.): Sya y nagsábi ŋ sya y marúnoŋ gumupìt naŋ buhòk. He said that he knew how to cut hair. Aŋ bulàg ay nagakála ŋ gawì ŋ katatawanàn aŋ pagkahúlog naŋ kúbaʾ. The blindman thought that the falling of the hunchback should be made (sc. niyà by-him, anaphoric) that (it) 30be a laughing-stock, i. e. decided to make fun of the falling ...; that which one says or thinks, with sábi and akálaʾ, is also expressed as a direct object.

158. Similarly, predications as complements are, in impersonal constructions, parallel with a subject: Sinábi nya ŋ sya y 35marúnoŋ gumupìt naŋ buhòk. Was-said by-him that he was able to cut hair, i. e. He said he knew how to cut hair. Hindí bihíraʾ na aŋ isa ŋ táo y pamagatà ŋ médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam. It is not rare that a man is reputed as a witch-doctor. Cf. the example of predication as subject in § 116. Hinilìŋ nya sa uŋgòʾ na dikdikìn 40sya sa lusòŋ. It was begged by him of the monkey that he be brayed in the mortar, i. e. He begged the monkey to bray him in the mortar. Pinabayáan niya na kamì y umalìs. It was allowed by him that we depart, i. e. He allowed us to depart, a less usual [170]form than that in § 152. Totoo ŋá na akò y naparoòn sa Balíwag. It is true that I went to Baliwag. Maàári pú ba ŋ kayò y maghintòʾ? Will it be possible please that you should stop? i. e. Can you please stop? Inísip nya ŋ magnákaw sa isa ŋ tindáhan. It 5was planned by him that (he) rob a shop, i. e. He planned to.... Iniyútus nya ŋ humúkay. It was ordered by him that (one, see § 86) should dig, i. e. He ordered people to dig. Hindí mo gustò ŋ màhúle ka. Not by-you it-is-desired that you be-caught, i. e. You don’t want to be caught.

10159. A direct quotation may have the same construction as a predication: Sinábi nya ŋ “Bámos!” It-was-said by-him, namely “Vamos!” i. e. He said “Vamos!”

b. Disjunctive attributes.

160. Only object expressions are used as disjunctive attributes, 15and all object expressions have a special form for this use.

161. Those beginning with aŋ substitute for this particle the atonic particle naŋ: aŋ púno naŋ uŋgòʾ the tree of the monkey, aŋ laruwàn naŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn the toy of the boy Juan; little Juan’s toy, toys.

20162. Those beginning with si (§§ 59. 126) substitute for this the atonic particle ni; those beginning with sinà (or silà, § 60) substitute nilà (or ninà), pretonic: aŋ amà ni Hwàn Juan’s father, aŋ báhay nila Hwàn the house of Juan and his family.

163. The personal pronouns as disjunctive attributes take 25the following forms: kò my, nità of us two, nátin our (inclusive), námin our (exclusive); mò thy, niniyò, ninyò your; niyà, nyà his, her, nilà their.

The monosyllabic forms kò and mò are always enclitic, the others usually: Hindí ko nàlàláman. I don’t know, literally: Not 30by-me (it) is-known. aŋ báhay nya his, her house, aŋ mahahába nya ŋ paà his long legs, aŋ hindí karanyúwa ŋ talíno nyà his unusual talents (niyà not enclitic).

164. When these enclitics meet an enclitic subject, they precede, unless by the general rule (§ 47) the monosyllabic subject 35kà precedes a disyllabic disjunctive (including niyà, nyà): Saàn mo sya nàkíta? Where by-you he was-seen? i. e. Where did you see him? Binigyàn nya akò naŋ aklàt. Was-given by-him I a book, i. e. He gave me a book. Baká mo iyàn màbúlag. Perhaps by-you it might-be-blinded, i. e. See that you don’t blind it. Hindí ka 40námin dinatnàn. Not you by-us were found-there, i. e. We did not find you in. [171]

165. The personal pronouns have another form, which is used as a conjunctive attribute of quality (cf. § 124, end) and always precedes that modified: its meaning, however, is the same as that of the disjunctive forms just given. These prepositive forms are: 5ákin my, kanità thy and my, átin our (inclusive), ámin our (exclusive); iyò thy, iniyò, inyò your; kaniyà, kanyà his, her, kanilà their, kaní-kanilà their respective, several, various.

Examples: Anò aŋ iyo ŋ ŋálan? What is your name? or: Anò aŋ ŋálan mo? aŋ áki ŋ amà my father, or: aŋ ama kò, aŋ 10kanya ŋ báhay his, her house, aŋ kanyà ŋ mahahába ŋ paà his long legs, aŋ kanità ŋ kwaltà our money (i. e. thine and mine), aŋ kaní-kanilà ŋ báhay their several houses.

Only a demonstrative pronoun modifier precedes these prepositive forms: iyà ŋ iyo ŋ sambalílo ŋ lúmaʾ that old hat of 15yours. Exceptions are rare: aŋ karanyúwa ŋ kanila ŋ kantahìn their usual song; what they usually sing.

166. The demonstrative pronouns, whether standing alone (§ 64) or as modifiers at the beginning of an object expression (§ 130), have the following disjunctive forms: nirè of this (right 20here), nitò of this, niyàn, nyàn of that, niyòn, nyòn, noòn of that (over there). Aŋ kúlay nirì ŋ korbáta ŋ irè ay nàpàpagítan sa itèm at sa pulà. The color of this necktie (I have on) is between black and red. aŋ dúlo nitò the end of this, aŋ anàk niyòn that one’s child (e. g. with pointing gesture), aŋ báhay niyo ŋ táo ŋ 25yaòn the house of that man over there, aŋ anàk noo ŋ táo ŋ iyòn the child of that man over there. The form noòn is used chiefly when the disjunctive attribute expresses time (§ 192).

167. The interrogative pronoun síno, whether used alone or standing first in an object expression as attribute (§ 131), has 30the disjunctive form níno whose? This form, however, is little used, for, while the interrogative pronoun is usually emphatic and tends to come first (§ 96), a disjunctive attribute follows that modified (§ 171). Hence the form níno is used only under peculiar conditions of emphasis: Aŋ sambalílo níno? Whose hat (did you 35say)? Ibinigày sa iyò níno? Given to you by whom? Sinábi sa iyo níno? Told to you by whom?

168. Instead of níno a prepositive form, kaníno, explicit plural kaní-kaníno, is ordinarily used; like the prepositive forms of the personal pronouns it stands in conjunctive attribution and 40precedes that modified. Before it the use of aŋ is optional (§§ 65.131); when aŋ is used the expression is more definite: Kaníno ŋ sambalílo? Whose hat? (the ownership of a given hat is inquired [172]after) Aŋ kaníno ŋ sambalílo? Whose hat? (the ownership of each hat is known; the question asks merely which of them is involved) Kaníno ŋ aklàt iyàn? Whose book have you there?

169. The prepositive forms of the personal pronouns and of 5síno are used also as static predicates expressing possession: Aŋ librò ŋ binàbása mo kahápon ay ákin. The book you were reading last night is mine. Kaníno aŋ aklàt na iyàn? Whose is that book? Kaní-kaníno aŋ maŋa báhay na itò? Whose are these houses? The personal pronouns may be followed by saríle own (cf. § 137): Aŋ 10laruwà ŋ itò y áki ŋ saríle. This toy is my own.

170. All other expressions which lack aŋ,—that is, the remaining interrogative pronouns, the numerative pronouns, the cardinal numerals, and object expressions in which these as modifiers stand first (§ 131 ff.),—prefix naŋ, atonic, when used as disjunctive 15attributes: Sa itaàs naŋ anò? On top of what? Takìp naŋ alì ŋ kahòn itò? Of which box is this the cover? aŋ panukálà naŋ karamíhan the opinion of the majority; Nakàkíta akò naŋ isa ŋ táo. I saw a man.

171. All disjunctive attributes are closely joined and follow 20that which they modify. The only exceptions are the enclitic pronoun forms and expressions of time (§ 192). A disjunctive attribute precedes a subject: Binigyàn nya naŋ aklàt si Hwàn. He gave Juan some books. When the subject is enclitic, it of course precedes: Binigyàn nya si Hwàn naŋ aklàt. Real exceptions, in 25which a non-enclitic subject precedes a disjunctive attribute, are not common: Ipinakìkipagpútol ni Hwàn si Pédro naŋ labòŋ. Juan is asking someone to cut some bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

172. In meaning disjunctive attribution includes almost all cases in which an object element is viewed as the attribute of another 30element in the sentence. The only exception is the sphere of relations expressed by local attribution (§ 195 ff.). The meanings may, very roughly, be divided into seven groups: (1) possessive-partitive, (2) agent, (3) direct object, (4) instrumental object, (5) local object, (6) manner, (7) time.

35173. (1) Possessive-partitive modifier: aŋ kanya ŋ báhay, aŋ báhay nya his house, aŋ púno naŋ uŋgòʾ the tree of the monkey, aŋ púno naŋ káhoy the tree (literally head of wood), aŋ púno naŋ ságiŋ the banana-tree, Sa itaàs naŋ anò? On top of what? Nasúnog aŋ kalahátì naŋ púnoʾ. Half of the tree got burned up. 40Aŋ báyad sa útaŋ ni Pédro ay lábis naŋ dalawà ŋ píso. The payment made to settle Pedro’s debt is too great by two pesos. aŋ óras naŋ alaskwátro the hour of four o’clock, Isà ŋ sundálo ŋ [173]marúnuŋ naŋ Latìn. A soldier who knew Latin, literally: having-knowledge of Latin. aŋ sáko naŋ pálay a rice-sack (cf. § 127), aŋ larú naŋ baráha a game of cards, cf. aŋ larò ŋ taguàn (§ 127) a game consisting of hiding, hide-and-seek, aŋ katapusàn naŋ gabì 5the end of the night; cf. aŋ katapusà ŋ gabì the night which was the end, the last night, aŋ ilà ŋ sandalì naŋ pagsasàlitáan a few moments of the conversation; cf. aŋ ilà ŋ sandalì ŋ pagsasàlitáan a few moments (which consisted) of conversation. Note: aŋ báyan naŋ Balíwag the town of Baliwag, aŋ provìnsya naŋ Pampànga 10the province of Pampanga.

174. The pronoun lahàt as an object expression is followed by this kind of attribute: lahàt naŋ táo all (of) the people.

175. As an object expression saríle self is modified by disjunctive pronouns: aŋ kanyà ŋ saríle his self. Similarly saríle as 15conjunctive attribute, in the sense of own: Walá sya ŋ baìt sa kanya ŋ saríli. He does not do even himself any good. aŋ saríle nila ŋ bànda naŋ músika their own band of music; Aŋ kanya ŋ saríli ŋ barìl aŋ kanya ŋ ginámit. It was his own gun he used, What he used was his own gun. Cf. §§ 137 and 169, end.

20176. The modifier may be an entire predication: sa lugàr naŋ magkasirá silà in place of the (occurrence that) they should become enemies, i. e. instead of their becoming enemies.

177. Here belongs further the disjunctive attribute with words expressing association, companionship, or equality: Si 25Hwána ay siyà ŋ kabùlúŋan ni Maryà. Juana is the one with whom Maria is whispering. Aŋ mésa ŋ itò ay kasiŋkúlay naŋ kahòn. This table is of the same color as the chest. Si Hwàn ay kapantày ni Pédro. Juan is of the same height as Pedro. Kalákip naŋ súlat ko ŋ itò ay limà ŋ píso. Enclosed with this my letter are 30five pesos. gáya ko like me.

178. Similar is the use of a disjunctive modifier expressing one of the objects, with expressions involving dual or plural ideas: silà ni Maryà they with Maria, i. e. Maria and he (88,42), silà ŋ dalawà ni Maryà (92,17).

35179. Here belongs the disjunctive attribute in exclamatory sentences expressing the high degree of a quality; these are formed with anò (§ 131) and with words with prefix ka- (§ 76): Ano ŋ hína mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are! Anu ŋ luwàt naŋ hindí nya pagdatìŋ! What duration of his not arriving! 40i. e. How long he is getting here! Kapulà naŋ panyo ŋ iyòn! What-great-redness of that handkerchief! i. e. How red that handkerchief is! Karúnoŋ naŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn! How much little [174]Juan knows! Kaytipìd na bátaʾ ni Hwàn! How-saving a child of Juan! i. e. What an economical boy Juan is!

180. In the preceding and related constructions the attribute may be an entire predication: Kamuntí naŋ màtamaàn aŋ bátaʾ! 5What-little-lack of the (occurrence that) the child should-be-hit! i. e. How near the child came to being hit! Muntí naŋ máliguwak aŋ dala nyà ŋ pulòt. Little-wanting of-the (occurrence that) should-be-spilled the borne by-him honey, i. e. The honey he was carrying came near being spilled.

10181. (2) A disjunctive attribute expressing the agent corresponds in sense to the subject of an active transient predicate. When it modifies a transient word, the corresponding active can be formed: Sinúlat nya aŋ líham. He wrote the letter; literally: Was-written by-him (agent) the letter. Isinúlat nya aŋ kwènto. 15He wrote down the story. Sinulátan nya akò. He wrote to me. The corresponding active is: Syà y sumúlat.... He wrote.... Cf. § 92. So further: Pinútol nya aŋ káhoy. The wood was cut by him; active: Syà y pumútol naŋ káhoy. He cut some wood. Kinúha nya aŋ librò. The book was taken by him; active: Syà 20y kumúha naŋ librò. He took some book. Áki ŋ binitíwan aŋ bóte. By-me was-let-go-of the bottle, i. e. I let go of the bottle; active: Bumitìw akò.... Aŋ hiniràm nya ŋ kampìt ay iyo ŋ kúnin. The borrowed by-him (agent) kitchen-knife by-you (agent) is to be taken, i. e. Take the kitchen-knife he borrowed.

25When the word modified is not transient no clear line can be drawn between disjunctive attributes of agent and of possessor: aŋ kanyà ŋ pagdatìŋ his arrival, his arriving, or: the arriving by him, aŋ gámit nya ŋ librò the book used by him, aŋ paupó ni Hwà ŋ sùgálan the gambling-party invited by Juan, aŋ 30dala nyà ŋ pulòt the honey he is or was carrying, Aŋ larò ŋ taguàn ay gustò naŋ maŋa bátaʾ. The game of hide-and-seek is liked by children. Hindí ko gustò aŋ librò ŋ itò; ibà aŋ áki ŋ gustò. I don’t want this book; it is a different one I want.

182. When disjunctive agent is the speaker (kò by me 35or its substitute áki ŋ) and the subject is the person addressed (ikàw, kà thou), the pronoun kità usually takes the place of both. This is the commoner value of kità (cf. § 63): Sùsuŋaŋáin kità. I’ll smash your face; the subject of this direct passive expression is the person addressed, the agent the speaker: Ikàw ay áki ŋ 40sùsuŋaŋáin would be an unidiomatic equivalent. Ipaglálaba kità naŋ damìt. I shall wash your clothes for you. The predicate is instrumental passive, with you, the person for whom, as subject. [175]Hàhatdan kità naŋ gátas. I shall deliver milk to you; local passive.

Occasionally the agent is redundantly added: Kità ay áki ŋ parùrusáhan. I shall punish you.

5183. A disjunctive agent is used with the words expressing recent completion of an act with prefix ka- and reduplication: (§ 77): Karáratiŋ ko pa lámaŋ! I have only just arrived. Kakàkáin ko pa lámaŋ! I have only just finished eating.

184. (3) A disjunctive attribute expressing the direct object 10corresponds to the subject of a direct passive transient predicate: Sya y kumáin naŋ kánin. He ate some boiled rice. Passive: Kináin nya aŋ kánin. Was-eaten by-him the boiled rice, i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

It will be seen that when the direct object is definite it is 15more likely to serve as subject of a passive predicate (§ 94); hence the disjunctive attribute expressing a direct object has often an indefinite partitive value. Syà y sumúlat naŋ líham. He wrote some letters. Syà y pumútol naŋ káhoy. He cut some wood. Bigyàn mo akò niyà ŋ túbig. Give me some of that water. Katátagpi 20ko niyòn! I have just finished mending that! Sya y naghintày naŋ sàsabíhin naŋ sundálo. He awaited that which was going to be said by the soldier.

185. (4) A disjunctive attribute expressing the instrument corresponds to the subject of an instrumental passive transient 25predicate: Syà y sumúlat naŋ kwènto. He wrote down a story, stories. Passive: Isinúlat nya aŋ kwènto. Was-written-down by-him the story, i. e. He wrote down the story.

The indefinite value of the disjunctive attribute is here due to the same relation as in the preceding type. Pinútol nya naŋ 30gúlok aŋ káhoy. The wood was cut by him with a bolo; instrumental passive: Ipinútol nya naŋ káhoy aŋ gúlok. Was-used-for-cutting by-him of wood the bolo, i. e. He cut wood with the bolo. Binigyàn nya akò naŋ aklàt. He gave me a book.

186. So a direct quotation or an entire predication: Aŋ 35bulàg ay sumigàw naŋ “Tatlò!” The blindman shouted “Three!”; passive: Isinigàw naŋ bulàg aŋ “Tatlò!” Aŋ báwat isa sa kanilà ay sumagòt naŋ súŋay aŋ kanila ŋ nàkìkíta. Each one answered that horns were what they saw.

187. (5) Disjunctive attributes of place correspond to the 40subject of a local passive transient predication: Syà y pumanhìk naŋ báhay. He entered a house; passive: Pinanhikàn nya aŋ báhay. He entered the house. Aŋ pagòŋ ay nagumpisà naŋ pagsisigàw. [176]The turtle began (a) shouting; passive: Inumpisahàn naŋ pagòŋ aŋ pagsisigàw.

These attributes are in meaning rather close to local attributes (§ 203); as opposed to the latter they are, however, the 5real correspondents of the subject of a local passive transient predication, expressing a real participation of the object in the action or occurrence,—whereas the local attributes express the place of the action as something more or less unaffected and independent.

10188. (6) Disjunctive attributes of manner do not correspond to any kind of subject. When they are used with a transient word the sentence may, however, be reversed so as to make of the attribute a transient predicate of a sentence in which the action (as subject) is spoken of as being “made such and such”. 15Tumakbò sya naŋ matúlin. He ran fast. The words naŋ matúlin are the disjunctive form of an object expression, aŋ matúlin, which would resemble German das schnelle. Our sentence corresponds to: Tinulínan nya aŋ pagtakbò. Was-made-fast by-him his running, He ran fast. Syà y tumáwa naŋ malakàs. He 20laughed aloud, cf. Inilakas nyà aŋ pagtáwa. He made his laughing loud. ... mànákaw naŋ hindí nito nàlàláman should be stolen in the manner of not by-him known, i. e. should be stolen without his knowing it. mataàs naŋ kauntèʾ higher by a little, a little higher.

25189. Expressions of indefinite quantity are used in this way: Silà y nagtakbúhan naŋ wala ŋ hintòʾ. They ran without stopping. This construction is in rivalry with that of conjunctive attribution (§ 146).

190. The demonstrative pronouns and the interrogative pronoun 30anò are not used as attributes of manner; for this value they have separate derivatives: ganitò, ganiyàn, gayòn or ganoòn, and gaáno or gáno. These forms, moreover, occur also as static predicates and as conjunctive attributes of quality: aŋ báwat sumagòt naŋ ganitò every one who answered in this way; this could be 35viewed also as an instrumental object. Ganitò aŋ kalàgáyan nilà. Their condition was like this. aŋ ganitò ŋ maŋa paglalaròʾ such games as this; Ganyàn ba lámaŋ aŋ kínis mo? Is your skill merely like that? Nakàsúlat akò kay Hwàn naŋ gayòn dahilàn sa malakì ko ŋ pagkagálit. I came to write like that (or such things, cf. 40instrumental object) to Juan through my great anger. Ganoòn aŋ áki ŋ pagkárinìg. That was the way (i. e. the form in which) I heard the thing. Aŋ gayù ŋ pananalitàʾ that manner of speaking, that expression. gánu ŋ pagpílit? how much effort? Gaáno [177]aŋ pagkakagalìt nila? How great, how serious is their quarrel? (Cf. § 96).

191. A special case of the disjunctive attribute of manner is the repetition of a word as its own disjunctive modifier, expressing 5continuity or insistence of action: Humábà naŋ humábaʾ. It grew longer and longer. Aŋ kanila ŋ báon ay umuntí naŋ umuntìʾ. Their provisions grew less and less. Si Hwàn ay táwa naŋ táwa. Juan laughs and laughs. Bilì naŋ bilì si Hwàn naŋ pálay. Juan keeps buying rice.

10192. (7) Disjunctive attributes of time express the time when of an occurrence in the past. They differ from other disjunctive attributes in being often loosely joined, in which case they may precede. Pumaroòn sila naŋ hápon. They went there in the afternoon. So: naŋ umága in the morning, noò ŋ tagáraw 15(naŋ taò ŋ míle-nobisyèntos-dòs) in the summer (of the year 1902). Naŋ umulàn ay ginámit ko aŋ kapóte. When it rained I used my rain-coat. Nàlákad sina Pédro naŋ hindì óras. Pedro and his party had to start at a time not planned; literally: when not time.

20193. Complete predications as disjunctive attributes of time are common. It is as though the whole predication were objectivized: Naŋ dumatìŋ ako doòn ay sya y walá na. When I arrived there he was already gone. Noo ŋ sya y bágo ŋ táo pa lámaŋ.... When he was still but a young man....

25194. Anaphorically determined disjunctive attributes are often omitted. Íbig nya ŋ kánin aŋ súhaʾ. Desired by-him that be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. Naŋhiŋí sya sa kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd. He asked his brothers and sisters (for some). Hindí nila sya binigyàn. He was 30not given (any) by them, They did not give him any.

c. Local attributes.

195. An object expression in local attribution expresses a local circumstance of that which is modified, such as the place in, to, or from which, that from whose midst, that about which 35or owing to which, the person to whom, etc.

196. In this construction initial si is replaced by kay (atonic), sinà by kinà (pretonic), and aŋ by sa (atonic); object expressions which begin with none of these particles take sa: Si Pédro ay galìt kay Hwàn. Pedro is angry at Juan. Nakitúluy 40kamì kina Pédro. We asked hospitality of Pedro’s family. Syà [178]y nanáog sa báhay. He came out of his house. sa boo ŋ báyan in the whole town.

Rarely both sa and kay precede a personal name: Itò y nàtúto sa kay Mayèstro ŋ Hwàn. This one got his training from 5Teacher Juan. aŋ pagkàbúhay naŋ médiko sa kay Hwàn the doctor’s saving of Juan’s life.

197. The personal pronouns and síno take their prepositive forms after sa: Ibinigày nya sa ákin aŋ aklàt. Was-given by-him to me the book, i. e. He gave me the book.

10198. In a peculiar construction these prepositive forms are preceded by the particle ganà as a conjunctive attribute, in the sense of so far as ... is concerned: Sa ganà ŋ ákin sya y maàári ŋ umalìs. So far as I am concerned he may leave.

199. The demonstrative pronouns and anò never stand in 15local attribution, see § 263 f.

200. Whole predications are rarely used as local attributes:

Dumatìŋ aŋ dalága ŋ itò sa dalawa ŋ pù ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ. This young woman arrived at (the time when) her age was twenty years, i. e. reached the age of twenty years.

20201. Local attributes are mostly closely joined and as a rule follow that which they modify, taking precedence of a disjunctive attribute or of a subject: aŋ nagbigày sa ákin naŋ aklàt na itò the giver to me of this book, the one who gave me this book (Bayad nà) aŋ útaŋ sa ákin ni Hwàn. Juan’s debt to me (has 25been paid). Ibigày mo kay Hwàn aŋ librò. Be-given by-you to Juan the book, i. e. Give Juan the book.

Often, however, a disjunctive attribute which is felt to belong closely to what precedes, comes before a local attribute: Bayad-útaŋ ni Hwàn sa ákin aŋ relòs na itò. This watch is Juan’s 30debt-payment to me.

Occasionally the local attribute precedes the expression modified: Syà y sa baŋkàʾ naŋ maŋa babáe nakíkisakày. He goes along into the canoe of the women. Sa kabilà ŋ bandà mo ibwàl aŋ púno ŋ iyàn. Make that tree fall in the direction away from me.

35202. Very frequently, however, local attributes are loosely joined, preceding or following; in the former case ay, y is sometimes omitted: Sa Báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay naŋyáre aŋ isa ŋ nakawàn. In the town of San Miguel a robbery took place. Hindí makadádala si Pédro naŋ kahòn sa kabigatàn nilà. Pedro will not 40be able to carry any boxes, on account of their heaviness. Sa ganà ŋ ákin sya y maàári ŋ umalìs. So far as I am concerned he can go. (§ 198). [179]

203. We have seen that disjunctive attribution expresses the relation of objects (direct object, local object, instrumental object, §§ 184, 185, 187) to an action, provided that these objects are more or less indefinite. If they are quite definite, they are 5preferably made subjects in a passive construction. Frequently, however, they are instead put into local attribution, which thus competes with these types of disjunctive attribution, but involves a more definite object: Aŋ báhay na batò ay aŋ áki ŋ pinaghàhatdàn naŋ gátas. The stone house is the place to which I am 10delivering milk (instrumental object), i. e. I am delivering milk to the stone house; but: Aŋ báhay na batò ay aŋ áki ŋ pinaghàhatdàn sa bátaʾ. The stone house is where I am bringing the child. (naŋ bátaʾ would be a child or children).

It follows that the personal pronouns, which always refer to 15definite persons, cannot stand as disjunctive objects of transient words, but stand instead in local attribution: Aŋ báhay na batò ay aŋ áki ŋ pinaghàhatdàn sa kanyà. The stone house is the place where I am taking him.

Similarly a personal name: Ibigày mo kay Hwàn aŋ librò. 20Give Juan the book; cf. Bigyàn mo naŋ librò si Hwàn. Give Juan a book; “Juan” could not figure as disjunctive local object.

204. In many cases, however, these local attributes differ from disjunctive attributes and from the corresponding subjects of passive constructions: the local attribute represents the object 25as more externally involved and less thoroughly concerned in the occurrence: Humúkay sila naŋ bakúran. They dug up some yards. Hinukáyan nilà aŋ bakúran. They dug up the yard. In both sentences a serious change, such as unauthorized tampering, is implied; but: Humúkay sila sa bakúran. They dug in the yard, 30merely tells where they did their digging. Sya y pumanhìk naŋ báhay. He entered a house (or houses), perhaps illicitly; the house is viewed as in some way affected or intimately involved in the action; so also: Pinanhikàn nya aŋ báhay. He entered the house; but: Sya y pumanhìk sa báhay. He went into the house, 35He went into his house.

205. In other cases, where a transient predicate is not involved, the same difference appears: the local attribute is a mere scene or attendant circumstance, the disjunctive a real factor: Aŋ pagtatábon naŋ maŋa húkay na itò ay tapus nà. The filling 40up of these ditches is now finished, i. e. These ditches are filled up now; but: Aŋ pagtatábon sa maŋa húkay ay mahírap. Filling earth into ditches is hard work. karamíhan naŋ maŋa táo most [180]of the people; karamíhan sa kanilà most of them; sa ganitò under these circumstances; naŋ ganitò (§ 190) thus, in this manner.

206. Expressions of time as local attributes denote future time when; occasionally also past time: Páparoòn akò sa makalawà. 5I shall go there the day after tomorrow. So: sa lúnes next Monday, cf. noò ŋ lúnes last Monday. Pího akò ŋ páparoòn sa alasìŋko. I will surely go there at five o’clock. Sa gabi ŋ iyòn.... That night....

207. With jussive words with prefix pa- (see Morphology) 10the person ordered to do so-and-so is viewed as a local feature: Ipinagupìt ko sa barbéro ŋ si Hwàn aŋ buhòk ni Andrès. Was-ordered-to-be-cut by-me of-the barber Juan the hair of Andrés, i. e. I ordered the barber Juan to cut Andrés’ hair.

208. Rarely an expression in local attribution is used as a 15conjunctive attribute in an object expression: it precedes and has the meaning of a disjunctive attribute of possessor: aŋ sa ibà ŋ táo ŋ kawáyan other people’s bamboo, or: aŋ kawáyan naŋ ibà ŋ táo.

209. This construction is much commoner when that owned 20is anaphorically omitted: aŋ sa pagòŋ that of the turtle, the turtle’s, i. e. aŋ púno naŋ pagòŋ. So: aŋ sa kanyà his, hers.

210. In other cases anaphoric omission of an element modified by a local attribute is less common: aŋ pagsakày sa trèn sa lugàr naŋ sa karumáta the riding on the train in place of the 25(sc. pagsakày riding) in the carriage.

211. A static predicate may have the form of a local attribute: Sa liŋgò aŋ áki ŋ lúlan sa trèn. On (next) Sunday my embarking on the train, i. e. Next Sunday I shall take the train. Aŋ uupà ŋ itò ay sa háreʾ. This seat is for the king.

30212. The particle sa has a number of derivatives which are transient in meaning, but otherwise have the same construction as sa; they are pretonic. Sya y nása Maynílaʾ. He is in Manila. Sya y nása kanya ŋ báhay. He is in his house. Aŋ tinterúhan ay nása bíŋit naŋ lamésa. The inkwell is at the edge of the table. 35For these forms see Morphology.

d. Absolute attributes.

213. Absolute attribution, in which no particle is used, is confined to certain expressions and types of expressions. Some absolute attributes and some of the particles introducing absolute 40attributes end in -ŋ or -t; these may contain the particle ŋ or at (§ 313).

We may divide the cases of absolute attribution into six types, [181]although these are not fully distinct from one another: (1) enclitic particles, (2) prepositive particles, (3) single words used as attributes of manner and time, (4) absolute complements, (5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes, (6) words introducing 5subordinate phrases or predications.

(1) enclitic particles.

214. The enclitic particles which are used as absolute attributes follow a monosyllabic enclitic pronoun (kà, kò, mò) but precede a disyllabic enclitic pronoun (including niyà, nyà, siyà, syà). 10Among themselves they follow the general rule: monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic enclitics (§ 47).

215. bà is expressive of interrogation in yes-and-no questions and often in others: Máy-roon ba silà ŋ ginawàʾ? Have they done anything? Máy-roon ka bà ŋ gàgawìn? Have you anything 15to do? Ipinùpútol mo ba akò naŋ tubò? Will you cut some sugar-cane for me? Pinapagpùpútol ba nila syà naŋ káhoy? Does he get ordered by them to cut wood? i. e. Do they have him cut wood? Ano bà aŋ inilùlútu mo? What is it you are cooking? Anu ba kayò? What sort of people are you? Hindí mu ba nàkíta si 20Hwàn sa teyátro? Didn’t you see Juan at the theatre? Aŋ iyo bà ŋ kapatìd? Your sister? See §§ 223. 229.

216. bagà throws more stress on the interrogation: Ikàw bagà y nagasáwa? Did you (ever) get married? See §§ 290. 317.

217. dàw, ràw expresses that the sentence represents the 25saying of someone other than the speaker; the person so quoted may be the agent of the sentence itself: Pagkà pinapagpútol mo ràw sya naŋ kawáyan ay làláyas syà. When he is ordered by you to cut bamboo, he will leave, I am told, or: he will leave, he says. Aŋ paguupú raw nya sa damò ay mabúti sa kanyà. He 30says (or: They say) his habit of sitting on the grass is good for him. It is sometimes used pleonastically, see the example in § 278.

218. dìn, rìn expresses that the expression modified (which may be the whole sentence or an element within the sentence) is 35like a corresponding earlier idea: Ako rìn aŋ nagpalígo sa bátaʾ. It was I, too, that bathed the child (beside the other things I did), i. e. I also bathed the child. Si Hwan dìn aŋ naglínis naŋ kabalyerésa. Juan also cleaned a stable or stables (beside the other things he did). Si Hwàn ay naglínis rìn naŋ kabalyerésa. 40Juan, too, cleaned stables. Here dìn is an attribute of naglínis naŋ kabalyerésa: this act has been performed by Juan even as [182]by others previously spoken of or known of. Si Hwána ay naglúto naŋ estopádo; kamakalawà naglútu rin akò naŋ estopádo. Juana cooked meat-stew; day-before-yesterday I too cooked meat-stew. Iyo ŋ úna ŋ kumalabòg ay akò, aŋ ikalawà ay ako rìn. 5That first thing which came down with a thud was I, the second was I again. Nahúlog dìn syà. He fell down again. Káhit na madilìm aŋ gabì ay nagpasyal dìn si Pédro. Although the night was dark, Pedro none the less (i. e. even as at other times) took a walk.

10Thus dìn is especially common in expressions of identity: Kahápon ay nakàkíta ako naŋ isa ŋ táo sa Maynílaʾ, at ŋayòn ay nàkíta ko aŋ táwo rì ŋ iyòn sa báya ŋ itò. Yesterday I saw a man in Manila, and today I saw the same man in this town.

In some instances dìn modifies an element not actually identical 15with another. Nagtalòn sya sa bintánaʾ, dátapuwat sinundàn din syà naŋ amà. He jumped out of a window, but he was followed, too, by the father. See §§ 221. 227. 238. 239. 262, (11).

219. kayàʾ expresses doubt or possibility of choice: Anò kayàʾ aŋ ipinagútos mo sa kanyà? What perchance did you order 20him to do? Màpàpagkúroʾ kayá nya sa súlat na iyàn aŋ íbig mo ŋ gawìn nya. Perhaps he may be able to make out from this letter of yours what you want him to do. Baká kayàʾ magkaputòl aŋ maŋa tubò sa kalakasàn naŋ háŋi ŋ itò. I am afraid that perhaps the sugar-cane may all break off, what with the strength 25of this wind.

For another use of kayàʾ see § 297; cf. §§ 317. 321.

220. lámaŋ only: Isà lámaŋ aŋ mansánas na nátira sa lamésa. Only one apple is left on the table. So: íisa lámaŋ only a single one. Sila ŋ tatlò ay walà ŋ pagkáin kuŋ hindí aŋ itlòg 30lámaŋ na nàtìtirà. The three had no food except only the egg that was left.

Occasionally lámaŋ follows the expression it modifies: isa ŋ ikápat na partè lámaŋ only a fourth part.

Sometimes a na is left off after lámaŋ: Ákin lámaŋ pinùputlàn 35naŋ buhòk. By-me (for ákin ... na, ŋ) only (he, anaphoric) is-getting-cut of hair, i. e. I am only cutting his hair. siya lámaŋ kàkáin naŋ itlòg he (who; normally this relation is expressed by na, ŋ) will-eat the egg, i. e. the one who is alone to eat the egg. See §§ 227. 243.

40221. màn expresses contrast with what precedes; it is the opposite of dìn, and the two are often used in one sentence to emphasize the point of difference and that of identity: Si Hwan màn ay naglínis (rìn) naŋ kabalyerésa. Juan, too, cleaned stables [183](as did others). Lálù nà lumakì aŋ gálit ni Hwàn, naŋ màbalitáan niya ŋ aŋ ikalawà màn nya ŋ anàk ay nagsundálo rìn. Juan’s anger grew even greater when he learned that his second son too had (like the other) become a soldier.

5With interrogatives màn produces indefinites: Walà ŋ anu màn. There is nothing at all; also: Not at all, i. e. You’re welcome. aŋ ano mà ŋ pasákit any kind of injury; aŋ alin mà ŋ paŋkàt any team; sínu màn any person whatever, anyone at all. See §§ 227. 248. 262, (7. 10). 290. 317.

10222. múna expresses that that modified precedes another thing: Magàwítan múna táyo, bágo táyo maghiwá-hiwalày. Let’s sing a song together (first) before we part. Maŋáko ka múna... First promise....

223. nà takes into view the maturity of a situation (cf. 15German schon): Aŋ librò y gamit nà. The book is used already, i. e. is second-hand. Agad nà ŋ lálamìg. It will soon be cold now. Paálam na akò (sa iyò). Good-bye (to you). Nahánap ko nà aŋ sombréro. I have already looked for the hat. Nahánap na nyà aŋ sombréro. He has.... aŋ maláon na nila ŋ pagpupuyàt 20gabi-gabì their long staying up now every night, i. e. the fact that they have staid up late every night now. íisa na lámaŋ paŋkàt only a single group now. It precedes bà (§ 215): Nakahandá na ba aŋ áki ŋ paŋpalígoʾ? Is my bath ready? Gánu ka na bà kakínis? How clever are you by this time?

25It is used also in brusque or familiar commands: Pálù na sa kanya ŋ kamày! Hit him on his hand! Sáma na sa ákin. Come to me (to a child). Ílag ka na riyàn! Be off there! See §§ 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244.

224. namàn expresses transition to another subject, hence 30often also mild contrast: Hábaŋ si Hwána ay naglùlútoʾ, si Hwàn namàn ay naglìlínis naŋ báhay. While Juana is cooking, Juan cleans the house. Anu ka ba namà ŋ táo? What sort of person are you, anyway? Ibà namàn aŋ gawìn mo ŋ lúto sa manòk. You are to cook the chicken in a different way. siya rìn namàn 35nyà ŋ karanyúwa ŋ kinàkáin that which, however, is usually eaten by him.

The combination nà namàn means again: Maínit na namàn. It’s hot again.

225. nawàʾ pray, please expresses imprecation: Kaawaàn 40nawàʾ ninyo kamì, poo ŋ Dyòs! Take pity on us, O Lord!

226. ŋàʾ is assertive and emphasizing: Oo ŋàʾ. Yes indeed. Ikaw ŋàʾ aŋ nagsábi niyàn. You yourself are the one who said that. It is used in polite requests: Itúru ŋa ninyò sa ákin aŋ [184]daàn. Please show me the way. Ipakipútol mo ŋàʾ, Hwàn, aŋ tinibàn sa áki ŋ bakúran. Please, Juan, cut down for me the banana-stump in my yard. It follows nà: Pakipútol na ŋàʾ aŋ sinúlid na itò. Please cut this string for me. See § 229.

5227. pà expresses the immaturity or continuance of a situation (cf. German noch) and stands in contrast with nà. Its meaning is often emphasized by lámaŋ: mabúti pà better yet, Íbig ko pà naŋ kánin. I should like some more rice. Hampasìn mo pa syà. Whip him some more. Saríwà pa aŋ damìt. The clothes are 10still wet. It precedes dìn and màn (cf. § 248): aŋ isa pa rì ŋ káluluwa another (i. e. one more) soul; Hindí pa rìn lubhà ŋ maliwánag. It was, however, not yet light enough. Kagìgísiŋ ko pa lámaŋ. I have only just waked up. See §§ 243. 248.

228. palà, used after hindìʾ (§ 239), expresses contrast with 15one’s expectation, reversal: Aŋ ísip ko y balat lámaŋ naŋ itlòg itò, hindí palà, kun díʾ itlòg na boòʾ. I thought this was only an egg-shell, but no, it was a whole egg.

229. pòʾ is expressive of politeness toward the person addressed: Oo pòʾ. Yes, sir; Yes, ma’am. Patàtawárin pòʾ! Pardon 20me; used also in refusing to give alms. Patàtawárin po naŋ ilà ŋ sandalèʾ. Excuse me for a few moments, please. Maghintú pu kayò. Please stop (plural or polite singular). Magsihintú pu kayò. Please stop (explicit plural). Umupú po kayò. Please sit down. Maupú po kayò. Please be seated. Ikinalúluŋkot ko pòʾ 25aŋ kasawià-ŋ-pálad na naŋyáre sa inyò. I lament the misfortune which has come to you. aŋ iyo pò ŋ Kamàhálan your Majesty. pòʾ precedes bà and follows nà and ŋàʾ: Kaawaàn na pòʾ ninyo kamì, poo ŋ Dyòs! Take pity on us, O Lord! Maàári pu bà ŋ kayò y maghintòʾ? Can you please stop? Occasionally pòʾ follows 30that modified: Magandà ŋ áraw pòʾ! Good day; How do you do?

230. sána expresses unreal futurity in the past or doubtful futurity in the present; in the latter sense it expresses modesty in a request: Ipaglálaba sána kità naŋ iyo ŋ damìt, ŋúnit walàʾ ako ŋ sabòn. I would wash your clothes for you, but I have no soap. 35Isinúlat ko sa kanyà ŋ pilítin sána niya ŋ màparíto sa átin, pag sya y nàrìritò sa báya ŋ itò. I wrote to him to try to get round here to us when he gets to this town.

231. tulòy further, in continuation: Sinábi tulòy niyà.... He said further....

40232. ulèʾ again, equivalent with mulìʾ (§ 148), has two irregularities: it is often not enclitic but closely joined postpositive, and, in this case, it may, entirely like mulìʾ, be conjunctive instead [185]of absolute: Nahúlog ulí sya. He fell again; but: Umakyàt sya ulèʾ. He climbed again; and even: ... naŋ magdaàn sya ŋ ulèʾ sa pasíga ŋ itò.... when he again walked on this beach.

(2) prepositive particles.

5233. Certain particles used as absolute attributes always precede that modified. They fall into two groups: (A) regular closely joined modifiers, and (B) particles which immediately precede single words or short phrases.

234. (A) The closely joined particles usually receive regular 10treatment, being followed, for instance, by enclitics. Occasionally, however, the feeling seems to be that the particle is, as it were, placed before the whole sentence; in this case a non-enclitic subject or a loosely joined attribute or a second closely joined attribute may follow the particle, and the last-named may (instead 15of the particle) be followed by some or all of the enclitics.

In the case of huwàg (§ 240) we meet for the first time alternation of absolute and conjunctive attribution, which mostly follows the principle that the latter construction is used where ŋ (as opposed to na) is possible (§ 122).

20235. bakàʾ is expressive of an undesired contingency; it is the negative of wishes and fears: Baká ka maputúlan naŋ dalíriʾ, Hwàn. You might get your finger cut off, Juan, i. e. See that you don’t ... or I hope you won’t.... Baká nya ikátawà aŋ iyo ŋ sàsabíhin. Perhaps what you intend to say will only make 25him laugh. Baká táyu aŋ pagbintaŋàn naŋ páreʾ. I am afraid the priest may suspect us. See § 317.

236. bákit why? Bákit ka naparíto? Why have you come here? Bákit mo inakálaʾ...? Why do you think...? Bákit hindí ka magáral...? Why don’t you learn...?

30237. dìʾ not is often used instead of hindìʾ (§ 239) before shorter expressions: dí maláyoʾ not far, dí karanyúwan unusual, Si Hwàn ay dí natákot na sumakày. Juan was not afraid to mount. See § 301.

238. gayòn (§ 190), in this use always followed by dìn 35(§ 218), also, furthermore: Sya y isa ŋ táo ŋ may kauntì ŋ talíno at gayon dìn may kauntì ŋ tápaŋ. He was a man of some cleverness and also of some courage.

239. hindìʾ not is used where the specific negatives áyaw (§ 267), bakàʾ (§ 235), huwàg (§ 240), and walàʾ (§§ 61. 81. 89) 40are not applicable. Occasionally it is replaced by dìʾ (§ 237). Hindìʾ. No. Hindí akò. (It is, was) not I; I don’t, didn’t, etc. [186]Hindí bále. It doesn’t matter. Hindí ko nàlàláman. I don’t know. Hindí ko sya nàkíta. I didn’t see him. Hindí ko mabása iyàn. I can’t read that. Aŋ túnay na lakì naŋ buwàn ay hindí sya ŋ nàkìkíta naŋ maŋa táo kuŋ gabè. The real size of the moon is not 5that which people see at night. aŋ kanya ŋ tákot na baká hindí nya abúta ŋ buhày aŋ kanya ŋ inìíbig his fear that (perhaps) he should not see his loved one alive.

Hindìʾ negates only the material part of a word, not its grammatical (affixal) elements: Aŋ kamahalàn naŋ manòk ay sya ŋ hindí 10ikabilì nitò naŋ marámi ŋ táo. The high price of chicken is that which not causes-to-buy it many people, i. e. causes many people not to buy it; the idea of buying is the material element of i-ka-bilì (see Morphology); the causal idea, which is expressed by the prefixes i-ka- is not negated. Aŋ pagkukublì naŋ maŋa sundálo ay 15siyà nilà ŋ hindí ikinamatày. The hiding of the soldiers is what caused them not to be killed, i. e. saved them from death.

Note hindí rìn (§ 218) also not, nor, and gayòn dìn hindìʾ (§ 238): Aŋ dalága ŋ si Mariyà y sumayàw sa bála ŋ táo ŋ humilìŋ sa kanyà sa sàyáwa ŋ pinaroonàn niya kagabè: sya y hindí 20namíli naŋ kanya ŋ sinamáhan at hindí rin namàn namíli naŋ tugtòg na kanya ŋ sinayawàn; gayon dìn hindí nya ininò aŋ bílaŋ at aŋ kadalasàn naŋ kanyà ŋ pagsayàw. Miss Maria danced with any man that asked her at the dance to which she went last night: she chose neither her partners nor the music to which she danced; 25nor did she mind the number and the frequency of her dances. See §§ 228. 237. 301. 319.

240. huwàg, hwàg is the negative of commands, purpose, obligation. Where ŋ is possible conjunctive attribution takes the place of absolute: Aŋ haŋàd ay aŋ huwàg bayáa ŋ lumagpàk sa 30lúpà aŋ bóla. The aim is not to let the ball fall to the ground. (46, 36) Sinàsábi nya ríto na hwàg sunúgin aŋ ámi ŋ báhay. He told them not to burn our house. Aŋ túro sa ákin naŋ mayèstro ay hwàg akò ŋ mapagawày. The teacher’s order to me is that I must not be quarrelsome. Hwag mò ŋ tawánan si Hwàn. Don’t 35laugh at Juan. Hwag kà ŋ umyàk. Don’t cry. Hwag kà, Hwàn, pumásuk na sekréta. Don’t go as a spy, Juan. See § 239.

241. kaniyàʾ, kanyàʾ therefore, as a result, consequently: Bumitìw aŋ bátaʾ sa lúbid, kanyá náparapàʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ kahatakàn. The child let go of the rope, and so the one he was pulling 40against fell. Kanyàʾ hindí tulàʾ aŋ kanya ŋ kinantà. Therefore what he sang was disconnected. Kanyàʾ sa katapusàn ay sinábi nya... Therefore in the end he said.... Occasionally it is loosely [187]joined: Kanyà y sya y umalìs. Therefore he went away. See §§ 295. 324.

242. láloʾ (§ 147), in this use always followed by nà (§ 223), especially, very: Lálù na kuŋ isa ŋ tahòl naŋ áso aŋ makàgísiŋ sa 5kanya, sya y nàpàpaluksò. Especially when the barking of a dog awoke him, he would involuntarily jump. Sya y naŋàŋáin naŋ táo lálù nà naŋ maŋa bátaʾ. It makes its food of people, especially children.

243. sakàʾ after that, then: Pagkà pinapagpùpútol ko nà 10sya naŋ káhoy ay saká sya nagdàdahilà ŋ may sakìt. As soon as I order him to cut wood, (then) he alleges that he is sick.

Especially saká pa lámaŋ (§ 227) only then, not till then: Kapag ipinamùmútol na nya naŋ káhoy aŋ lagáriʾ ay saká mo pa lámaŋ kúnin itò sa kanyà. When he uses the saw for cutting wood, 15only then do you take it from him.

244. tuwèʾ when followed by nà (§ 223) is used as a loosely joined prepositive attribute: every time: Tuwí nà y syà aŋ nagìŋ mánanalò. He turns out victorious every single time. See §§ 307. 317.

20245. (B) The particles of the second group are mechanically prefixed, as it were, to that modified.

246. The pretonic particle báwat every precedes that modified, forming an object expression with or without aŋ (§ 66, end): Báwat marúnuŋ naŋ leksyòn ay makaáalìs pagdatìŋ naŋ alasìŋko. 25Everyone who knows the lesson will be allowed to leave at five o’clock. Aŋ báwat hindí marúnuŋ naŋ leksyòn ay màtìtirà haŋgàŋ alasès. Every one of those who do not know the lesson will have to stay till six o’clock. báwat táo everyone, each person.

247. gaáno, gáno how? (§ 190) is used absolutely before 30words with prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology and cf. §§ 76. 179): gáno katabàʾ? How fat? gáno kaláyoʾ? How far? Gánu ka na bà kakínis? How clever are you now?

248. The pretonic particle káhit precedes interrogatives and 35isà one absolutely or with na; its force is generalizing, more emphatically than màn (§ 221). The expression so formed is an object expression used with or without aŋ (§ 68): aŋ káhit na síno, aŋ káhit síno, káhit na síno, káhit síno anyone, anyone whatever, no matter who, káhit anò anything whatever, káhit na anu ŋ 40táo any sort of person whatever, káhit na sínu ŋ táo any person whatever, sa káhit alì ŋ bandà in any direction, káhit isà anyone whatever, even one.

These expressions are often strengthened by màn (§ 221) or [188]pà màn (§ 227): Hindí na sya sumakày sa káhit ano pa màn. This time he did not ride on anything. káhit sínu màn anyone at all.

Expressions beginning with káhit have the peculiarity that 5in the two normally conjunctive constructions in which they stand na, ŋ is often omitted before them:

After walàʾ (§ 138): Walá káhit anò. There isn’t a thing. Walá sila káhit anò. They haven’t a thing. So even when walàʾ does not immediately precede: Nàbuksàn aŋ pintú naŋ wala ŋ 10nakàmálay káhit sínu màn. The door came open without anyone noticing it. Walá pa sila ŋ nàhùhúli káhit anò. They had not yet caught anything, literally: anything that was caught. Walá sya ŋ nàlàláman káhit isa ŋ hóta. He did not know a single iota. Occasionally na, ŋ is used: Walá sya ŋ màkíta ŋ táo ŋ káhit anò. 15He saw no person whatever.

As (normally conjunctive, § 149) attribute of time during which: Sya y hindí màtahímik káhit isà ŋ sandalèʾ. He cannot keep quiet even for a single moment. See §§ 253. 294.

249. kápuwàʾ, kápwàʾ fellow-, equally, applied to one of a 20pair, is sometimes used with personal pronouns: in this case it follows (cf. § 129): Si Pédro at si Hwàn ay dalawa ŋ kápwa magnanákaw. Pedro and Juan are two fellow thieves. aŋ kápwa nya magnanákaw his fellow-thief, Kápuwa maínam aŋ tinìg nila ŋ dalawà. The voices of the two are equally pleasant. Kápwa 25sila malakàs. They are equally strong. Sinàsaktan silà kápuwaʾ. They both get hurt. Redundantly: Namílog si Hwàn naŋ úlo naŋ kápwa nya kalaròʾ. Juan fooled (literally: rounded the head of) his (fellow) playmate.

The word modified may be anaphorically omitted: Aŋ táwo 30y hindí dápat sumakìt naŋ kanya ŋ kápwaʾ. One must not injure one’s fellow (sc. táo man).

250. The transient pretonic particle magìŋ and its other transient forms (see Morphology) express that the word or phrase modified is something coming into being, arising, at the time 35specified by the tense-form of the particle: Sya y nagìŋ hukòm. He became judge. aŋ nagìŋ pagkáhulè the falling-behind which arose, Nagìŋ isa syà sa maŋa hindí nátaŋgàp. He turned out to be one of those who were not accepted.

251. The pretonic particle maŋà is the sign of explicit plurality 40with object expressions. It precedes the central element immediately, not even the na, ŋ necessitated by a preceding conjunctive attribute comes between; only ibà may come after maŋà: aŋ kanyà ŋ magúlaŋ, or: aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ his, her [189]parents, aŋ maŋa ibà ŋ táo other people. Redundantly: Sa tapàt naŋ báhay ni Pédro ay marámi ŋ maŋa bulaklàk. In front of Pedro’s house there are many flowers. Aŋ áraw ay sya ŋ pinópoon naŋ ilà ŋ maŋa salbáhe sa Áfrika. The sun is worshipped 5by some savages in Africa. And even: aŋ maŋa ilan pà ŋ maŋa tanòŋ several further questions. With maŋà compare the prefix of the same form, see Morphology.

252. The pretonic particle máy belongs here. For examples see §§ 69. 70. 85. 110. 139.

10253. nì pretonic, is a frequent substitute (Spanish) for káhit (§ 245) in negative sentences. The object expressions which begin with it never take aŋ (§ 68): Ní isa y walà ŋ nátira. There isn’t a single one left. Walá ní isa. There isn’t a single one. Nàbuksàn aŋ pintú naŋ wala ŋ nakàmálay nì sínu màn. The door 15came open without anyone noticing it. Walà ŋ nátira ní isa naŋ maŋa péras sa mésa. Not one was left of the pears on the table.

Occasionally nì seems to take the place of naŋ before káhit: Bákit hindí sya makátagpo nì káhit isà naŋ maŋa bágay na itò? Why could he not meet even a single one of these things? Cf. 20§ 319.

254. The pretonic particle tagà, tigà preceding an expression of place forms an expression denoting a person from that place: Sya y isa ŋ taga Kapampáŋan. He is a Pampangan. aŋ taga búkid, aŋ tiga búkid: aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ túbo sa búkid a country-man: 25a person raised in the country, aŋ mayáma ŋ taga iba ŋ báyan the rich man from another town, stranger, foreigner, aŋ maŋa taga iba t ibà ŋ lupaìn people from various countries. So: taga báyan, tiga báyan townsman, taga Filipínas Filipino, taga Amérika American, taga Espánya Spaniard (beside Amerikáno, 30Kastílaʾ). Cf. in Morphology, the prefix taga-.

255. Numerative pronouns and cardinal numerals are used as absolute attributes before katáo persons, men: sa m pú katáo ten people, ten men; or: sa m pù ŋ táo; Ilàn katáo (or: Ilà ŋ táo) aŋ bumúhat sa báhay? How many men lifted at the house?

35256. The terms of relationship and titles which are treated as personal names (§ 59) precede a name as absolute attributes; after most of those that end in a syllabic, n, or ʾ, ŋ is however used. Some titles occur only in this construction: si Kúya ŋ Pédro my oldest brother Pedro, si Atè Lóleŋ my oldest sister 40Lola, si Iŋkòŋ Píro Grandfather Pedro, si Indà ŋ Hwána, or: si Impò ŋ Hwána Grandmother Juana, si Áli ŋ Maryà, or: si Tiyà Maryà Aunt Maria, si Mà ŋ Andrès Uncle Andrés, Don Andrés, si Ginoò ŋ Polikàrpiyo Mr. Policarpio, si Gíniŋ Màrkes Miss or [190]Mrs. Marques, si Párì Hwàn Father Juan, si Mayèstro ŋ Pédro Teacher Pedro, Master Pedro, si Báo ŋ Mariyà Widow Maria, si nasíra ŋ Mariyà the deceased Maria.

(3) words used as absolute attributes of manner and time.

257. The words used as absolute attributes of manner and 5time resemble in meaning conjunctive attributes and are frequently used in the latter construction. As a rule they are loosely joined and absolute. In this way are used:

258. Derivatives by doubling of words of time, in the sense of every (day, night, etc.). With these goes the compound áraw-gabè 10day and night. For both formations see Morphology. Hinàhatdan nyà akò naŋ gátas áraw-áraw. He delivers milk to me every day. Gabi-gabì ay tinùtulúgan naŋ bantày aŋ áki ŋ báhay. Every night the sentry makes our house his sleeping-place.

259. Words with prefix ka- referring to past time (see Morphology): 15Aŋ pàtáya ŋ naŋyári kagabì ay paglalasìŋ aŋ nagìŋ sanhèʾ. The killing that occurred last night had drunkenness as its cause. Aŋ maŋa áso sa báya ŋ itò ay nagtàhúlan kagabè. The dogs in this town all bayed last night. Aŋ kabáyo ay namatày kahápon. The horse died yesterday. Pumaroòn akò kamakalawà. 20I went there day before yesterday.

These may be followed by a disjunctive attribute telling the specific time when: Nagsipútol kamì naŋ tubò kahápon naŋ hápon. We cut sugar-cane yesterday afternoon. So: kahápon naŋ umága yesterday morning.

25260. Words of time with prefix kinà- and suffix -an expressing actual past time (see Morphology): Kinàháti-ŋ-gabihàn ay nágisiŋ syà. When midnight came he woke up. Kinàbukásan hinánap silà naŋ kanila ŋ amà. On the next day they were called by their father.

30With disjunctive attribute telling the special time: Kinàbukásan naŋ hápun ay naparoòn sila sa simbáhan. On the next day in the afternoon they went to church.

261. Words of time preceded by the pronouns boòʾ and isà as conjunctive modifiers: Sila y nagsipagsugàl gabi-gabì boò ŋ 35magdamàg. They gambled all night every night. Isa ŋ áraw naupó sya sa taburéte. One day he sat down on his chair. Aŋ iyò ŋ kapatìd ay nalígo isa ŋ hápon. Your sister bathed one afternoon. Isa ŋ gabì ay nárinig ko.... One evening I heard.... So: isa ŋ kataŋhalían one midday, isa ŋ liŋgò one Sunday, isa ŋ 40taŋháleʾ one noon, isa ŋ umága one morning. As conjunctive attributes: Sya y naglálakad na isa ŋ gabì. He was walking one [191]night. Páparoon sya ŋ isa ŋ liŋgò. He will come one Sunday. Those with boòʾ also as local attributes: Nakatahul nà aŋ maŋa áso sa boò ŋ magdamàg. The dogs have been barking all night.

262. Various words of time:

5(1) antimáno beforehand (Spanish).

(2) búkas tomorrow: Magpàpapútol ba táyo naŋ káhoy búkas? Are we going to have some wood cut tomorrow? With disjunctive attribute of specific time: Magsìsipútol kamì naŋ tubò búkas naŋ umága. We are going to cut sugar-cane tomorrow 10morning.

(3) dáti for a long time already; formerly; it is sometimes closely joined: aŋ mukhá naŋ babáye, na dáti y nagpàpakilála naŋ malakì ŋ paghihírap the face of the woman, which before had been showing great suffering; Dáti náriyàn aŋ mansà ŋ iyàn. 15That spot has been there for a long time. As conjunctive attribute: Dáti sya ŋ napàparíto sa áki ŋ báhay. He has been coming to my house since long ago.

(4) kadalasàn often, usually: Aŋ kanya ŋ pinasàsakítan kadalasà y nagáanyo ŋ pára ŋ ulòl. The person he is injuring 20usually acts as if crazy.

(5) kanína a little while ago, just now: Sinábi ko na pò sa inyo kanína, na.... I just told you a little while ago that....

With a conjunctive attribute of the specific time in the phrase kanína ŋ umága this morning, which may be closely 25joined: Kumáin ka ba kanína ŋ umága naŋ karnè?—Hindí ako kumáin naŋ karnè kanína ŋ umága. Did you eat meat this morning?—I did not eat meat this morning.

(6) karanyúwan mostly, usually: Aŋ kosinéro karanyúwa y upahàn. The cook is usually hired.

30(7) káylan, kélan when? Káylan ako malìlígoʾ? When shall I bathe? Káylan pa kayà paŋhìhinayáŋan naŋ maŋa táo aŋ maŋa áni ŋ taòn-taò y nàsìsíra naŋ luktòn o naŋ túyot? When, pray, will the people regret the harvests every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? So káylan màn at any time, ever, always 35(§§ 221. 317): Káylan mà y hindí nilìlimútan si Maryà. Maria was never forgotten.

(8) makálawà twice, when with maghápon per day: Naàári ako ŋ malígo makálawa maghápun, dahilàn sa kainítan. I can bathe twice a day on account of the heat. Alone makálawà is a 40conjunctive attribute: Makálawa ko ŋ itinanùŋ kuŋ saàn sya páparoòn, dátapuwat hindí nya ako sinagòt. I asked him twice where he was going, but he did not answer me. Maghápon does not occur alone. [192]

(9) mámayàʾ, mámyàʾ after a while, soon, with a disjunctive attribute of the specific time when: Mámyá naŋ kauntìʾ ay áalis akò. In a little while I am going. As conjunctive modifier; the phrase so formed is used like mámayàʾ alone: Mámaya ŋ gabì 5ay pàpások táyo sa teyátro. This evening we shall go to the theatre.

(10) mínsan once, once upon a time: Mínsan sila y nakáraàn naŋ isa ŋ púno-ŋ-nyòg. Once upon a time they came across a cocoanut-tree. With màn at any one time (§ 221): Mínsan 10màn ay hindí sya náuna. Not a single time did he succeed in getting ahead. As conjunctive attribute: Aŋ tatlo ŋ itù y nagtìpána ŋ mínsan. These three once made an appointment.

(11) ŋayòn now, just now, today (cf. § 302): Sya y nása Mayníla ŋayòn. He is in Manila today. Ŋayòn ay maŋàkàkatúlog 15silà. Now they will be able to sleep. So ŋayon dìn right now (§ 218): Umalìs ka ŋayon dìn. Go away this minute.

(12) paráti often: Mahína aŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn at paráti sa sakìt. Her body was weak and often in sickness. Also conjunctive: Akò y paráti ŋ nàhàhábol. I am often pursued.

20(13) siyèmpre (Spanish) always: Aŋ paggalàw na pagtagílid ay syèmpre (or: káylan màn ay) sa kaikliàn naŋ baŋkàʾ, dátapuwat aŋ pagtikwàs ay sa kahabáan. The movement of rocking is always along the short axis of a boat, but pitching is along its length.

25263. Four words of place, which serve also as local forms of the demonstrative pronouns (§ 199). They are, corresponding to the four demonstrative pronouns: díne, ríne; díto, ríto; diyàn, dyàn, riyàn; doòn, roòn. They occur in every position which an attribute can have:

30Loosely joined, preceding: Doòn ay sinalúboŋ sya naŋ susòʾ. There he was met by the snail. Díto nàmálas nya ŋ.... Here he perceived that....

Loosely joined, following: Taginit nà naŋ sya y dumatiŋ díto. It was already summer when he arrived here. Aŋ alílaʾ ay 35ipinagamùt nya díto. The servant was-ordered-to-be-cured by-him of-the-latter, i. e. He had the latter cure the servant. Alis dyàn! Get away there! (e. g. to a dog). Alìs na riyàn, Pédro. Go away from there, Pedro. Mátira ka dyàn. Stay there.

Closely joined, preceding: Díne ako maúupòʾ. I am going 40to sit right here. Díto ka na makikáin sa ámin. Eat here with us. Díto nya ginámit aŋ kanya ŋ lakàs. For this he used his [193]strength. Doòn sila magpalípas naŋ bakasyòn. There they are to spend the vacation.

Closely joined, following: Hwag mò ŋ ilagay díto aŋ palatòn. Don’t put the plate here.

5Enclitic: Dalhìn mo ríto iyò ŋ librò ŋ binàbása ko kagabì. Bring here the book I was reading last night. Magdalà ka díto naŋ kasapwégo. Bring some matches.

These words often precede a local attribute: Ílag ka dyàn sa daàn. Get out of the road there. Nakitúloy silà sa ámin doòn 10sa búkid. They asked us to take them in out there in the country. Note also: Sa isa ŋ karitò ŋ dí maláyo sa báhay, doòn sya nahigàʾ In a cart not far from the house, there he lay down.

264. Similarly saàn where? which serves also instead of a local form of anò (§ 199). It is closely joined and, as a question-word, 15precedes: Saàn nároon aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd?—Hindí ko nàlàláman kuŋ saàn nároon aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Where is his brother?—I don’t know where his brother is. Saan nàndon sya? Where is he? Saàn mo sya nàkíta? Where did you see him? Saàŋ ka maúupòʾ? Where are you going to sit? Saàŋ ka gáliŋ? 20Where do you come from? (Cf., for the local value, the answer, e. g.: Gáliŋ ako sa Maynílaʾ. I come from Manila.) Saàn ka naŋgàgáliŋ? Where are you coming from? Saàn ka naŋgáliŋ? Where have you come from? Saàŋ ka páparon? Where are you going? Saàn ka púpunta? Where are you bound for? So: káhit 25saàn anywhere at all (§ 248): Itò y hindí nya màkíta káhit saàn. He could not find the latter anywhere.

As local form of anò, saàn stands also in conjunctive attribution (§ 131): Saà ŋ gawèʾ mulá ríto aŋ báya-ŋ-Kamálig?—Sa gawì ŋ kánan mulá ríto aŋ báya-ŋ-Kamálig. In what direction 30from here is the town of Camalig?—The town of Camalig is to the right of here. Pagkaísip mo, Hwàn, kuŋ saà ŋ báyan ka maghàhánap-búhay ay sabíhin mo sa ákin. When you have decided, Juan, in what town you will try to earn your living, tell me.

35As a question-word, further, saàn may form a static predicate (§ 96): Saàn aŋ làgáyan mo naŋ iyo ŋ sapátos? Where is your place for putting away your shoes?

265. Several words of manner:

(1) The particle agàd at once and its doubled form agad-agàd 40immediately (see Morphology) are closely joined; where ŋ can be used, they are mostly conjunctive: Tumakbò sya agàd. He ran at once, or: Tumakbò sya ŋ agàd. Minulàn nya agàd aŋ pagtatalumpáteʾ. He at once began his speech. Agad nà ŋ lálamìg. [194]It will soon be cold now. Agad-agàd inùumpisahàn aŋ pagsisìgáwan. At once the yelling begins.

(2) halimbáwaʾ for example, for instance is loosely joined: Kuŋ halimbáwa y makàkíta sya naŋ isa ŋ bákol.... When, for 5instance, she saw a basket ... isa ŋ tahòl naŋ áso halimbáwaʾ the barking of a dog, for instance.

(3) hálos almost is closely joined: hálos lahàt naŋ táo almost all the people, walà ŋ pamamároʾ hálos almost without clothing.

(4) isa-isà one by one is closely joined; it is more often conjunctive 10than absolute: Siniyásat nya isa-isà aŋ maŋa púnoʾ. She questioned the trees one by one. Itò y sya nyà ŋ isa-isà ŋ inilaglàg. These he dropped one by one.

(5) karáka-ráka right away, quickly (cf. pagdáka, pagkaráka, below): “Hindí akò!” winíka nya karáka-ráka. “It wasn’t 15I!” he said at once.

(6) katunáyan truth, as absolute attribute, loosely joined, truly; in this sense also conjunctive: Katunáya y uwalà ŋ mwàŋ si Hwàn. Really Juan was ignorant. Katunáya ŋ walá sya ŋ nàlàláman káhit isa ŋ hóta. He really did not know a single iota.

20(7) mìsmo (Spanish) himself, herself, intensive: aŋ nàkùkúlam mìsmo the bewitched person himself; siya mìsmo he himself, she herself.

(8) palibhásaʾ is loosely joined and precedes. It expresses that what follows is stated as a reason; the construction is apparently 25not subordinating, but parallel with that of halimbáwaʾ above: Aŋ pagsasáma ... ay hindí nila pinápansìn, palibhása y gawá rin namàn nilà. The living together ... was not minded by them, the reason being that they did it themselves.

(9) pagdáka and pagkaráka immediately, quickly (synonymous 30with karáka-ráka above): Pagdáka y tinaŋnan nyà aŋ dalawà ŋ hintutúroʾ naŋ babáye. He quickly seized the woman’s two forefingers. Also closely joined: Itinanòŋ pagdáka naŋ médiko.... The doctor at once asked....

(4) absolute complements.

35266. After certain words which are followed by a complement construction, as described in § 151 ff., the conjunctive particle is often omitted, especially where the form na is required; where ŋ is possible its use is preferred. They are:

267. íbig desired, synonymous with gustò (of whose regular 40construction examples have been given in §§ 152. 158), and áyaw the negative of íbig. These are usually accompanied by a [195]disjunctive agent: Anò aŋ íbig nya ŋ sabíhin? What is that desired by-him that (sc. by-him it, both anaphoric) be said? or: What is the desired by-him thing-to-be-said? i. e. What does he want to say? Anò aŋ íbig mo ŋ gawìn nya? What do you want 5him to do? Hindí na sya íbig labanàn. He was no longer sought as an opponent. Itò y íbig na gawì ŋ úna. This is desired to be done first, i. e. One wants to do this first. Aŋ áyaw ko ŋ màkíta ay isa ŋ núnoʾ. What I don’t want to see is a ghost. Itò y áyaw nya ŋ gawìn. He does not want to do this.

10Very frequently the construction is impersonal, in which case the complement (and quasi-subject, § 158) may consist of an entire predication: Íbig nya ŋ kumáin naŋ súhaʾ. It-is-desired by-him that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit. Íbig nya ŋ kánin aŋ súhaʾ. It-is-desired by-him that 15be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. Áyaw ipamána naŋ maŋkukúlam aŋ kanya ŋ kúlam. The sorcerer does not want to bequeath his magic power.

When the person desiring is at the same time the agent of the complement, the whole expression may serve as predicate or 20attribute of the person desiring; this construction is rarely used with other than active complements: Sya y íbig kumáin naŋ súhaʾ. He is desired (by-him) that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit, equivalent to Íbig nya ŋ kumáin naŋ súhaʾ. Aŋ kúbaʾ ay hindi rìn íbig umakyàt. The 25hunchback too did not want to climb. isa ŋ Kastílaʾ na íbig malígoʾ a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Aŋ sundálo ay áyaw pumáyag. The soldier did not want to consent.

Without complement (or with anaphorically omitted complement): Anò aŋ íbig mo? What is it you want? Íbig ko pà 30naŋ kánin. There-is-desire by-me still of boiled rice, i. e. I want some more boiled rice. Aŋ larò ŋ taguàn ay íbig naŋ maŋa bátaʾ. Children like the game of hide-and-seek. Áyaw ko. I don’t want to; less commonly: Áyaw akò.

268. dápat proper, necessary and súkat fitting, right: Itò 35y dápat gawìn. This ought to be done. Sya y dápat palúin. He ought to be thrashed. Anò aŋ dápat nya ŋ gawìn? What ought to be done by him? i. e. What ought he do? Aŋ isà y dápat múna ŋ magsilbè sa dimóniyo. One must first serve the demon. Hindí mo súkat ikagálit aŋ maŋa tuksò. It is not right for you 40to get angry at jokes, literally: Jokes are not by-you a fitting cause of anger. [196]

Without complement: Itò y súkat nà. This is right, sufficient.

269. Words with prefix ma-, expressing the possessor of a quality, and their derivatives (see Morphology), have occasionally 5an absolute instead of a conjunctive complement. Those so used are:

(1) madalàs often, frequent, regular: Akò y madalàs magkumpisàl. I was regular at going to confession, or: a regular confessor. But: Madalàs nila ŋ sinalakáyan aŋ báyan. They frequently 10attacked the town.

(2) magalìŋ skilful, clever, polite: Si Hwàn ay magalìŋ gumámit naŋ daràs. Juan was clever at using the adze, or: a clever user of the adze, or: cleverly used the adze. But: Magalìŋ sya ŋ tumugtòg naŋ piyáno. She plays the piano well.

15(3) mahírap suffering, destitute, difficult (i. e. having hardship, actively or passively): Aŋ aswàŋ ay mahírap mápatay. A vampire is hard to-be-killed, i. e. hard to kill. Regular constructions: Aŋ pagabùt naŋ búŋa ŋ itò ay mahírap. The reaching this fruit is hard, i. e. The fruit is hard to reach. aŋ mahírap 20na kasamà the poor laborer.

(4) mahúsay able, good (at doing something), in good shape: Aŋ maŋa táo sa báyan ay mahuhúsay sumunòd sa kautusàn. The people in the town are good law-abiders. But: aŋ pinakamahúsay na magsalitàʾ the best at speaking; Aŋ lípà naŋ lúpaʾ ay 25mahúsay. The smearing (with sticky mud) of the ground (in the threshing-room for rice) is well done.

(5) maínam pleasant, tasty, good: Aŋ manòk na kawalàʾ ay hindí maínam patayìn. Chickens that run free are not good for killing. Cf.: isa ŋ maínam na siŋsìŋ a pretty ring.

30(6) malakàs strong, powerful, loud: Sya y malakàs kumáin. He is great at eating, or: a great eater; also: malakàs na kumáin. Cf.: aŋ maŋa táo ŋ malalakàs strong men, Sya y tumáwa naŋ malakàs. He laughed aloud.

(7) maluwàt, malwàt long (in time), slow: Aŋ pagpútol 35naŋ buhòk ay maluwàt màtutúhan. Hair-cutting takes long to learn. Cf.: Syà y nagkalatimbà ŋ maluwàt. He squatted on heels (as exercise or punishment) many times. Natùtúlog akò naŋ maluwàt. I sleep late.

(8) marúnoŋ wise, knowing how: Sya y marúnuŋ gumupìt 40naŋ buhòk. He knew how to cut hair. But: Marúnoŋ sya ŋ sumakày sa kabáyo. He knows how to ride horseback. aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ the clever turtle; Isa ŋ sundálo ŋ marúnuŋ naŋ Latìn. A soldier who knew Latin. [197]

(5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes.

270. Certain words form with their attributes phrases that are used as absolute attributes, for the most part loosely joined. The phrase-forming attributes are either (A) disjunctive or (B) 5local.

271. (A) akálaʾ a thought followed by a disjunctive possessor: as so-and-so thinks: Akála ko y gamit nà aŋ sombréro ŋ itò. I think this hat has been used already, is second-hand. More commonly these phrases are used as local attribute: Aŋ haraŋà 10ŋ iyòn na naŋyári kagabè sa akála ko y paháraŋ ni Andrès. The hold-up which took place last night was, in my opinion, planned by Andrés.

272. gáya like, resembling, in the manner of; for the disjunctive attribute cf. § 177: aŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy, gáya naŋ 15tsíko trees like the custard-apple; Gáya naŋ karanyúwan inumpisahàn naŋ kúra aŋ kanya ŋ sèrmon. As usual, the priest began his sermon. Magaàn aŋ sípaʾ, hindí gáya naŋ bóla ŋ gámit sa bèsbol. The football is light, unlike the ball used in baseball. These phrases occur also as conjunctive attributes: Hindí umuwé 20si Kíko na gáya naŋ karanyúwan. Kiko did not go home as usual. Normal constructions: Aŋ húni naŋ íbo ŋ pipìt ay gáya naŋ isa ŋ sutsòt. The chirp of the humming-bird is like a whistling. aŋ maŋa gáya mo those like you, people like you.

273. kasáma (in normal constructions companion): as companion 25of, in company with: Namundok syà kasáma naŋ ilà maŋa táo-ŋ-báyan. He took the mountains along with a few fellow-townsmen.

274. Abstracts of action with prefixes in p- (see Morphology) express the time when or (so pagka- and pagkà-) the time 30immediately after which. They sometimes occur without a disjunctive modifier. Cf. § 300. Pagulàn ay gamítin mo aŋ kapóte. When it rains use your raincoat. Pagdatìŋ niya ay sabíhin mo ŋ maghintày. When he arrives tell him to wait, literally: At the arriving of him be-it-said by-you that (he) wait. Pagkasúnog 35naŋ báhay ay hinánap nilà aŋ aláhas. When the house had burned down they looked for the jewelry. Pagakpakan mò si Hwàn pagkaraàn naŋ kanyà ŋ talumpáteʾ. Applaud Juan when his speech is done.

275. pára like is followed by a conjunctive (instead of a 40disjunctive) object expression whenever an indefinite object is meant (§ 68). The phrase so formed is often a conjunctive attribute. It is closely joined: Si Pédro màn pára ni Hwàn ay [198]nábilaŋgòʾ. Pedro too, like Juan, was put in jail. But: May katawàn sya ŋ pára ŋ táo. He has a body like a human being. Normal constructions: Pára ka ŋ kúra. You are like a priest. Aŋ lamìg naŋ kanya ŋ kamày ay pára ŋ sa patày. The coldness of 5his hand is like that of a dead person. (Cf. § 209).

276. sábi saying, that said: Sábi daw nyà ay malakì aŋ súnog. He says, I am told, that the fire was big.

277. (B) alintána despite: Nàbálot ko nà aŋ maŋa librò, alintána sa karamíhan nitò. I have managed to pack the books, 10in spite of their number.

278. áyon according to (giving the source of a statement): Áyon sa sábi naŋ marámi ay màpàpaghuli na ràw aŋ maŋa magnanákaw. According to what people say, the robbers are now near to being caught.

15279. bukòd beside, in addition to: Bukòd sa asáwa ay may dalawà sya ŋ anàk. Beside his wife, he had two children.

280. dáhil reason, cause and its derivative dahilàn, both here in the sense: on account of: Hindí nakatahòl aŋ áso dáhil sa kanya ŋ kahináan. The dog was not able to bark, on account 20of his weakness, i. e. was so weak that he could not bark. Hinúle si Hwàn naŋ pulìs dahilàn sa pagháraŋ na ginawá nya kina Andrès at kanila ŋ maŋa kaybígan. Juan was arrested by the policeman for having held up Andrés’ party and their friends. Dahilàn sa kanya ŋ pagkàgúlat ay nápaupú sya. In his surprise he 25sank down on his chair.

Note especially dáhil díto, dahil díto on account of this, therefore; the omission of ay, y is especially frequent, see § 120, A, and the example there given. Dáhil díto ay nadílat aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa matà. Through this his eyes were opened.

30281. The particle káy, ké than, more than: Aŋ búŋa ŋ itò y matamìs káy sa asúkal. This fruit is sweeter than sugar. malakàs ké sa kanyà stronger than he.

The combination káy sa has so much unity that the sa is often repeated or used where unnecessary: so always before a 35proper name: Aŋ báta ŋ si Pédro ay mataàs naŋ kauntèʾ káy sa sa lamésa. Little Pedro is a bit taller than the table. lálu ŋ mabagsìk káy sa ríto more fierce than this; Aŋ báta ŋ si Pédro ay mataàs naŋ kauntèʾ káy sa kay Hwàn. Little Pedro is a bit taller than Juan. Sya y mabúte ŋ tumugtùg ké sa kay Hwána. 40She plays better than Juana. Si Hwàn ay magúlaŋ káy sa kay Pédro. Juan is older than Pedro.

Owing to the construction described at § 120 this construction [199]may be ambiguous: Lálo ŋ malakì aŋ gálit ni Hwàn káy sa kay Pédro. Juan’s anger is greater than Pedro’s.

282. lában against: aŋ gálit lában sa kanyà anger against him, Aŋ kapaŋyaríhan ay ginàgámit nya lában sa kanya ŋ maŋa 5kaáway. He uses his power against his enemies.

283. líban except: Aŋ maŋa karumáta ŋ itò ay upahàn, líban na lámaŋ sa ilàn. These carriages are hired, except only for a few.

284. The particle mulàʾ from and its derivative magmulàʾ 10starting from: aŋ gitnàʾ mulá sa magkábila ŋ dúlo the middle from both ends; aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa súgat mulá sa paà haŋgàŋ úlo his wounds from feet to head; mulá ríto from here. With disjunctive attribute of time instead of local attribute: mulá noòn from then on, from that time.

15285. Words of manner with prefix pa- (see Morphology): Aŋ maŋa táo ay nagsipagtakbúhan papalabàs sa simbáhan. The people ran leaving (i. e. out of) the church. Ipinatúluy nya aŋ paglalakàd papuntà sa isa ŋ báhay. He continued walking (directed) toward a certain house.

20Commonest is patúŋo directed towards, aiming for: Tumakbo syà patúŋu sa ílog. He ran towards the river.

Regular construction: Sya y papuntà sa láŋit. He was on the way to Heaven.

286. The particle parà, pára (Spanish) for, equivalent to 25úkol (§ 288): Nagbwàl sila naŋ isa ŋ báka pára sa fiyèsta. They slaughtered a cow for the fiesta. Humúkay sila naŋ malálim parà sa patày. They dug a deep pit for the corpse. Pumútol ka bà naŋ damò parà sa kabáyo? Have you cut any grass for the horse? Also as conjunctive attribute, modifying an object expression: 30Sulat nà aŋ líham na pára kay Hwána. The letter for Juana is written.

287. tuŋkòl about, concerning: Nasiyásat naŋ hukòm aŋ lahàt naŋ bágay tuŋkòl sa kanila ŋ úsap. The judge inquired into all the matters relating to their suit. Cf.: aŋ tuŋkùl sa súnog 35the details about the fire.

288. The particle úkol is synonymous with parà (§ 286) and tuŋkòl: Humúkay sila naŋ malálim úkol sa patày. This phrase as predicate: Iyò y úkol sa maŋa hírap sa infiyèrno. This was about the sufferings in Hell. [200]

(6) words introducing subordinate phrases or predications.

289. Certain words precede words, phrases, and whole predications which are thereby subordinated to the main sentence as absolute attributes, loosely joined.

5The syntactic relation of these words to the expressions which they introduce seems to be the peculiar one described in § 54. However, some of them are plainly joined to their phrase by na, ŋ, and others end in -ŋ or -t. Most of them merely precede the phrase, others are closely joined.

10Finally, in a few cases predications apparently not introduced by any subordinating word are used as absolute attributes.

290. bagà (§ 216), in this sense always followed by màn (§ 221), although, is less used than káhit (§ 294). See also § 317. Baga màn nakapagpasyàl si Pédro, nátira kamì sa báhay. Although 15Pedro managed to take a walk, we staid home.

291. bágo, in this use before (in point of time), has closely joined position as regards its phrase: Aŋ maŋa kabáyo ŋ ginàgámit naŋ maŋa kanyunéros naŋ gubyèrno ay pinaíinum múna, bágo pakánin. The horses used by the artillery of the government 20are watered first, before they are fed. Nagkantáhan silà bágo naguwían. They sang together before they went home. Bágo sya y sumúlat ay makipagúsap ka sa kanyà. Before he writes have a talk with him. Magísip ka bágo ka sumagòt. Think before you answer. Balatan mò aŋ maŋgà bágu mo kánin. Peel the mango 25before you eat it. maluwat pà bágo mamatày aŋ maŋkukúlam long before the sorcerer dies.

In normal constructions bágo has the sense of new, recent: aŋ bágu ŋ báhay the new house; aŋ bágo ŋ táo an unmarried man, a youth; aŋ maŋa manòk na bágo ŋ bilè the chickens just 30bought; Bágu ŋ gáliŋ sya sa sakìt. He is recently recovered from an illness.

292. hábaŋ throughout, during, while probably consists of hábaʾ length plus ŋ. Hábaŋ sya y natùtúlog ay nakaraàn aŋ susòʾ. While he was sleeping the snail passed. Hábaŋ pinagusápan 35nilà itò aŋ ikapitù ŋ bátaʾ ay nása isa ŋ bitàk naŋ baŋkòʾ. While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack of the bench. Nàlùlugmok syà hábaŋ panahòn sa isa ŋ malálim na kaluŋkútan. She was sunk constantly (literally: throughout time) in a deep sadness. A short phrase with hábaŋ may be 40closely joined: Hindí nya natagalà ŋ aŋkinìn hábaŋ búhay nya [201]aŋ birtùd na iyòn. He did not succeed in keeping this quality as his own throughout (his) life.5

293. haŋgàŋ as far as, to, until may be haŋgàn limit, end plus ŋ; instead of the absolute construction the phrase is, however, 5often in local form. For lack of aŋ in the phrase see § 68. Naghintày sya haŋgàŋ kataŋhalían. He waited till noon. Aŋ púnoʾ ay tumúboʾ haŋgàŋ sa magbúŋa. The tree grew until (it) bore fruit. Silà ay nagtakbúhan haŋgàŋ sa dumatìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ báyan. They both ran until they arrived in their town. 10As predicate: Aŋ kúlaŋ naŋ gátas ay haŋgàŋ sa leèg naŋ bóte. The lack of milk is as far as the neck of the bottle, i. e. The milk goes only up to the neck of the bottle.

294. káhit (§ 245), with or without na, in the sense of although, no matter (cf. §§ 290. 317). The subordinate word or 15phrase has usually the form of a question; when it is an entire predication the predicate stands first: Tinalaga nyà ŋ sumáma, káhit na saàn sya dalhìn. He decided to go along, no matter where he was carried. Káhit na anò aŋ iyútos nya ay sinúsunòd. No matter what it was he ordered, (it) was obeyed. Káhit na 20madilìm aŋ gabì ay nagpasyal dìn si Pédro. Though the night was dark, Pedro nevertheless took a walk. Káhit na bahagyà aŋ ulàn ay nakabasàʾ naŋ karsáda. Though the rain was scanty, it sufficed to wet the streets. Káhit ulòl aŋ áso ay áyaw nya ŋ patayìn. Although the dog was mad, he did not want to kill it.

25Note the following instance, in which káhit na precedes its phrase as a closely joined attribute: Nàramdaman kò aŋ kalabìt nya sa ákin, káhit na akò natùtúlog. I felt his touch against me, even though I was asleep.

Phrases with káhit may be closely joined to the main sentence: 30Nàpùpútol nya káhit na walá sya ŋ kasaŋkápan aŋ bákal naŋ kanya ŋ bìlaŋgúan. He managed, even though he had no tools, to cut the iron of his prison. aŋ táo káhit laláki o babáye na nagàári sa kanyà the person, man or woman, who owns it.

295. kaniyàʾ, kanyàʾ (§ 241) expressive of result, may with 35its phrase be subordinated. It then stands as a closely joined attribute of its phrase: Kanyá nya iníwan aŋ páyoŋ ay sapagkàt nagtígil aŋ ulàn at lumiwánag aŋ láŋit. The reason he left his umbrella (quasi-subject) was because the rain let up and the sky cleared. Accordingly we may analyze as subordinate such [202]clauses as the following: Náupó sya sa tinìk, kanyá sya nápatindìg agàd. He sat down on a spine, so as to jump at once, i. e. that is why he jumped up at once. Cf., however, § 324.

296. The particle kapàg if, in case (of single events viewed 5as completed in the future, synonymous with pagkà, § 304), see § 300: Aŋ hiniràm nya ŋ kampìt ay iyo ŋ kúnin, kapag ipinùpútol na nyà naŋ káhoy. Take away the knife he borrowed if he uses it to cut wood.

297. kayàʾ (§ 219) is sometimes used exactly like kaniyàʾ 10(§ 295): Kayàʾ aku naparíto ay kùkúnin ku aŋ hiniràm mo ŋ librò. I am going to take the book you have borrowed, so that I have come here, i. e. I have come here to.... The act is expressed as a subordinate element, the purpose as the principal sentence. Nagpùpútol si Hwàn naŋ káhoy, kayá sya y wala ríto. 15Juan is cutting wood now, that is why he is not here.

298. The atonic particle kuŋ preceding an expression of time states the time when of repeated occurrences: Gumàgámit kamì naŋ makapàl na damìt kuŋ tagulàn. We use thick clothing in the rainy season. Nagtìtípon naŋ pagkáin aŋ maŋa 20laŋgàm kuŋ tagáraw. The ants collect food in summer. Aŋ hùníhan naŋ maŋa íbon kuŋ umága ay nakalìligáya. The chirping of the birds in the morning is gladdening. Aŋ iba ŋ táwo y mabúti pa ŋ makisáma káy sa isà ŋ kapatìd kuŋ mínsan. An unrelated person is better to associate with than a brother at 25times. So: kuŋ gabè at night, of nights, kuŋ fiyèsta naŋ báyan during the (periodic) fiesta of the town, kuŋ madilìm at dark, when it is dark, kuŋ bahàʾ at flood-times, kuŋ buwàn naŋ Húniyo in June.

Occasionally the phrase with kuŋ is closely joined: Hindí 30hasàʾ kuŋ mínsan aŋ maŋa bágu ŋ patalìm sa Filipínas. In the Philippines new cutlery is sometimes without an edge (i. e. sold without an edge, to be sharpened by the purchaser).

299. With phrases in the form of a question (minus bà § 215 or bagà § 216) kuŋ expresses indirect question. The expression 35so formed stands as quasi-subject or quasi-object (cf. §§ 157. 158) or as predicate: Naalaála nya kuŋ papáno aŋ paggawàʾ naŋ salamaŋkà. He managed to recall how the trick was done. Ipináyu nya na kuŋ sínu sa kanilà aŋ pinkamahúsay na magsalitàʾ naŋ Latìn ay siya lámaŋ kàkáin naŋ itlòg. He advised 40that whoever (kuŋ síno) among them was the best at speaking Latin should be the one who alone ate the egg. Si Pédro ay nagíisìp kuŋ saàn nya naíwan aŋ kanya ŋ páyoŋ. Pedro is trying to recall where he left his umbrella. Nàlàláman mo bà kuŋ [203]saàn sya nároon? Do you know where he is? Aŋ maŋa táo-ŋ-báyan ay nagsiyásat kuŋ maàári sila ŋ magtayò naŋ isa ŋ mákina naŋ bìgásan sa kanila ŋ báyan. The townspeople considered whether they could put up a machine for thrashing rice in their 5town. Aŋ siyásat ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pagparíto ay kuŋ ilà ŋ kúra aŋ nàrìritò sa áti ŋ báyan. Juan’s inquiry when he got here was how many priests there are in our town.

300. Introducing other phrases kuŋ has the sense of if, whenever (of non-actual occurrences viewed as unreal, hypothetical, 10or repeated); compare disjunctive attributes of time (§ 192, single actual occurrence), pag (§ 303, single non-actual occurrence, simultaneous), kapàg and pagkà (§§ 296, 304, single non-actual precedent occurrence), words with prefixes in p- (§ 274, single occurrence, actual or non-actual), tuwèʾ (§ 307, repeated 15actual): Kuŋ dumatìŋ si Hwàn ay umalis kà. If Juan comes, go away. Kuŋ dumatìŋ sya ay sabíhin mo ŋ maghintày. If he comes, tell him to wait. Kuŋ úulàn ay gamítin mo aŋ kapóte. If it rains, use your raincoat. Bìbilhin kò aŋ kabáyo ŋ iyòn kuŋ máy-roon akò ŋ marámi ŋ kwaltà. I should buy this horse, if I 20had enough money. Note: Kuŋ sa pagaasáwa namàn, akò y nagkaroòn naŋ dalawà. And as to (literally if) taking a wife, I had two.

301. In the same sense kuŋ with dìʾ (§ 237) or hindìʾ (§ 239) if not, precedes the second, positive member of a contrast: 25unless, but rather, beside, except (Cf. palà § 228): Hwag kà ŋ makàpakikáin-káin kuŋ hindí ka inàanyáhan. Don’t be taking meals with people unless you are invited. Walà ŋ ibà ŋ nagpàpahírap sa kanyà kuŋ hindí kayò. There is no one else who causes suffering to him, beside you.

30302. ŋayòn (§ 262), when subordinating, is conjunctively joined to its clause: Ŋayò ŋ áraw na yitò y dáratiŋ silà. On this very day they will arrive. Ŋayò ŋ táo ŋ iyòn ay patay nà, bákit namàn...? Now that this man is dead, why...?

303. The atonic particle pag gives the time when of a 35single non-actual occurrence; cf. § 274 and see § 300. Pag akò ay pagòd, natùtúlug akò naŋ maluwàt. When I am tired, I sleep late. Pag paputòl mo ŋ hiníwaʾ aŋ pakuwàn ay hindí màbìbilì aŋ banda ŋ púnoʾ. If you cut the watermelon crosswise, you will not be able to sell the stem-end. Magmùmurahàn sila ŋ dalawà 40pag nagkíta. The two will revile each other when they meet.

304. The particle pagkà (synonymous with kapàg, § 296) gives the time immediately after which of a single non-actual [204]occurrence; cf. § 274 and see § 300. Pagka ikàw ay nahúlog ay masàsaktan kà. When you have taken a fall you will be hurt.

305. The particle patì including; cf. § 68. aŋ boò ŋ katawàn patì maŋa matà at taíŋa the whole body, including eyes 5and ears.

306. The particle sapagkàt (sa pagkà at ?) because, for: Sapagkàt aŋ pári ŋ itò ay nagakála ŋ maŋa walà ŋ pinagarálan aŋ kanyà ŋ sinèsèrmunan ay hindí sya nagpílit.... Because this priest thought his hearers were uneducated people, he took no 10pains.... Ipinapútol nya aŋ kanya ŋ dalíreʾ, sapagkàt tinubúan naŋ kànser. He had his finger amputated because there was a cancer on it. For a phrase with sapagkàt as predicate see example under kanyàʾ, § 241.

307. The particle tuwèʾ (§ 244) in this use tells the time 15when always of actual repeated occurrences: whenever, every time. It is conjunctively joined to its clause: Pinaghàhatdan nyà naŋ gátas aŋ báyan twì ŋ umága. He delivers milk in the town every morning. Pumàparíto aŋ médiko twi ŋ makalawà. The doctor comes every other day. Si Hwàn ay nakìkipagluksúhan 20twi ŋ idinàdáos aŋ maŋa palaròʾ kuŋ fyèsta naŋ báyan. Juan takes part in the jumping contest whenever games are held in the fiesta of the town. Twì ŋ papásuk akò sa síne sa áki ŋ kúyaŋ ay áyaw sya. Every time I ask my brother to take me to the moving-picture show, he refuses.

25308. úpaŋ in order to, so that (úpa pay, wages ?): Sila y naúupo pa lámaŋ úpaŋ manaŋháleʾ. They are just sitting down to eat the noon meal. Syà y tumayòʾ sa bubuŋàn naŋ báhay úpaŋ tanawìn aŋ súnog. He stood up on the roof of the house to watch the fire. Kantahàn ninyò aŋ máy sakit úpaŋ sya y 30malibàŋ. Sing for the sick man so that he may be cheered. Tináwag nilà aŋ isa ŋ kálaw úpaŋ siya ŋ magìŋ hukòm. They called an owl so that (it) might be the one who served as judge.

309. yámaŋ while, as: Aŋ púno naŋ uŋgò ay namatày yámaŋ aŋ sa pagòŋ ay tumúboʾ. The tree of the monkey died while 35that of the turtle grew.

310. Predications and similar phrases (impersonal or anaphoric) as absolute attributes, in the meaning of disjunctive attributes of time, are not uncommon: Madali-ŋ-áraw pa lámaŋ ay nàròroòn na silà. (When) it was still but dawn, they were 40already there. Makása-m-pu ŋ táwag nà ay walá pa syà. (At) the tenth call he was still not there. Makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay sinábi nya sa susòʾ.... (When) a few moments had passed, he said to the snail.... May ápat na pu ŋ taòn na sya sa lúpa [205]ŋ Katagalúgan ay hindí pa nya nàtutúhan ... (When) he had already been in the Tagalog country for about forty years, he had not yet learned.... Mínsan pumásuk sya sa simbáhan ay nárinig nya.... Once (when) he went to church, he heard.... 5Other examples at 26,21. 28,11. 66,15. 9213.

4. Serial groups.

311. The serial relation is expressed in part explicitly by particles and in part by parataxis, parenthesis, and anacolouthic constructions.

10(1) coordinating particles.

312. The most important of the coordinating particles is at, t; as some of the others end in -t, they may be felt to contain at; cf. the similar ending in other particles, § 213; t is used after syllabics, n, and ʾ (see Phonetics), but even here at is commoner.

15When a sentence begins with a coordinating particle, the latter gives expression to the connection with the preceding sentence (as in English sentences beginning with And ... or But ...)

313. at, t and connects words, phrases, or entire predications. 20báro t salawàl blouse and trousers (native costume), aŋ tapunàn naŋ béha at upòs the place for throwing cigarette-ends and cigar-stubs, dalawa ŋ, pù t dalawà twenty-two, kuŋ mínsan at malakì aŋ gálit naŋ amà ... sometimes, when the father’s anger was great ... (kuŋ goes with both of the members connected 25by at).

When more than two elements are connected, at is used generally between the last two: sina Pédro, Hwàn, at Andrès the group consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andrés. isa ŋ líbo, walo ŋ daàn, walo ŋ pu t ánim 1886.

30314. at is used in a few common phrases: isà t isà everyone ibà t ibà various: aŋ maŋà taga ibà t iba ŋ báyan people from various towns; Iba t ibà aŋ kúlay naŋ kanya ŋ pananamìt. His clothes are of various colors. at ibà pà and so forth, and other; aŋ tsíko, súhaʾ, santòl, ... at iba pà the custard-apple, grape-fruit, 35santol, and so forth; aŋ maŋa háyop at iba pà ŋ árì naŋ pàmahalaàn the live stock and other belongings of the government.

315. at has occasionally a decidedly adversative tone; so, for instance, at 78,31.

40316. Frequently at has subordinative coloring, the second of the members joined expressing: [206]

cause: Hintày ka múna t hindí pa akò nakapápahiŋà. Make a halt first, for I am not yet rested. Íbig mo bà ŋ kumáin sa ámin?—Salámat, áyaw ko t kakàkáin ko pa lámaŋ. Do you want to eat with us?—Thank you, no, for I have only just eaten. Buksan 5mò aŋ pintòʾ at íbig ko ŋ pumások. Open the door, for I want to go in.

result: Ano t dí ka lumákad naŋ matúlin? Why don’t you walk fast? Ano aŋ íbig mo t nàrìrito kà? What do you want that you have come here? i. e. What have you come here for? So 10especially: anò aŋ dáhil at...? what is the reason that...?

purpose: Umalìs sya t makìkipútol naŋ damò. He has gone to help cut grass.

temporal succession: Hindí sya nakaratìŋ naŋ ápat na pu ŋ taòn sa gúlaŋ at sya y namatày. She had not reached forty years 15in her age, when she died.

a subordinate quasi-subject: Sinábi naŋ maŋhuhúla sa iyò t hindi maláyo ríto aŋ kawàwalan naŋ iyo ŋ siŋsìŋ. The fortune-teller told you that the place where you would lose your ring is not far from here. Sinábi ko nà sa iyò at hwag kà ŋ maíŋay. I 20have told you already not to make any noise.6

317. The subordinating value of at appears especially in certain expressions which it forms with other particles:

(1) at bakàʾ lest (cf. § 235): Hwag kà ŋ magpatihúlog diyàn sa kátre at baká ka masaktàn. Don’t throw yourself from 25that bed, for you might hurt yourself.

(2) at naŋ so that (cf. § 192 f.): Magiinùm ka naŋ gátas at naŋ ikàw ay tumabàʾ. Drink milk so that you may grow stout.

(3) bagà màn at although (cf. § 290): Baga màn at umúulàn ay nagsísipaglarò silà. Although it is raining they are at 30play.

(4) kayàʾ at so that (cf. § 297): Napapúpunta nilà aŋ pelóta kayà t báwat isa sa kanilà ay nakaabàŋ. They direct the ball so that every one of them is on guard.

(5) káylan màn at every time that, whenever, synonymous 35with tuwè ŋ, § 307 (cf. káylan màn § 262): Si Hwàn ay táwa naŋ táwa káylan mà t márinig nya aŋ maŋa katatawanà ŋ bahági naŋ kwènto. Juan laughs and laughs every time he hears the funny parts of the story. [207]

318. dátapuwat but is the commonest adversative coordinating particle. It is used also when the two members are not logically but only formally in contrast: Aŋ húni naŋ pipìt ay mahínaʾ, dátapuwat mataàs aŋ tóno. The chirping of the stone-sparrow 5is weak, but high-pitched. Pùputúlin ko aŋ lúbid kuŋ máy-roon akò ŋ laséta, dátapuwat walá ako. I should cut the rope if I had a knife, but I have none. Si Pédro ay hindí dumatìŋ, dátapuwat iba ŋ táo aŋ naparíto. Pedro did not arrive; it was someone else who came here.

10319. The particles nì hindìʾ (§§ 253. 239) connect coordinate elements in the sense of nor: Sya y hindí nagsísimbà nì hindí naŋúŋumpisàl nì hindí rin nagmàmáno sa páreʾ. He neither went to church nor confessed nor kissed the priest’s hand. The hindìʾ may, as an anaphoric element, be left off after another 15hindìʾ: Aŋ kanila ŋ kamày ay hindí nila máilabàs sa bútas nì ibig namàn sila ŋ bitíwan aŋ lamàn naŋ nyòg. They cannot take out their hands from the opening, nor are they willing to let go the cocoanut-meat.

320. The particle ŋúnit is equivalent with dátapuwat, but 20is less common: Hindí sya nagísip, ŋúnit sumagòt karáka-ráka. He did not reflect but answered at once.

321. The atonic particle o or (probably Spanish): isa ŋ malakì ŋ áso o báboy a large dog or pig; Dikdikìn kità sa lusòŋ o lunúrin kita sa ílog? Shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you 25in the river? Frequently the combination o kayàʾ (§ 219) is used; it is loosely joined: Aŋ kapaŋyaríha ŋ itò y gáliŋ sa dimóniyo o kayà y mána sa magúlaŋ. This power comes from a demon or else is inherited from one’s parents.

322. The particle subálit but is less common than its equivalents 30dátapuwat and ŋúnit: Aku sána y páparoon sa Balíwag, subálit hindí ako nátulòy, dahilàn sa isa ŋ karamdáman. I was going to Baliwag, but I did not keep on, on account of an illness.

(2) paratactic sentences.

323. A vocative joins another sentence: Hintú na kayò, 35maŋa bátaʾ! Stop, children! Té na, baláe! or: Tara nà, baláe! Come on, old man!

324. Contrast, cause, result, detail, etc. are sometimes paratactically expressed; in some cases it seems uncertain whether the second element is paratactic or subordinate, so especially when it 40begins with kaniyàʾ (§§ 241. 295): Sina Pédro, Hwàn, at Andrès ay magkakasamahà ŋ nagtánod sa isà ŋ dúlo naŋ tulày; sina [208]Felípe, Andùy, at Mariyáno sa ikalawà ŋ dúlo. Pedro, Juan, and Andrés are standing guard together at one end of the bridge; Felipe, Andoy, and Mariano at the other. Hindí ko gustò iyàn, ibà aŋ áki ŋ gustò. I don’t like that, I want something else. 5Hwag kà ŋ umyàk, Maryà, baká ka himatayìn. Don’t weep, Maria, you might have a fainting-fit. Aŋ kantà naŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn ay kanya ŋ nalimútan, kanyà hindi tulàʾ aŋ kanya ŋ kinantà. Little Juan forgot his song, that is why what he sang was disconnected. Siya ŋàʾ, siyà aŋ nagbigày sa ákin naŋ bágo ŋ búhay. Yes, she; 10it was she who gave me new life. Sya y may famíliya; bukòd sa asáwa ay may dalawà sya ŋ anàk. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children.

(3) parenthesis.

325. Not infrequently explanatory elements are inserted into 15a sentence parenthetically: Tatlò ŋ magkakaybígan, isa ŋ páreʾ, isa ŋ maŋgagámut, at isa ŋ sundálo ... Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier ... sa háyop namàn, karanyúwa y aŋ bábuy ... against animals, usually a pig ... wala ŋ ulàm, asìn at kánin lámaŋ there was no meat, only salt and boiled rice. 20Further cases at 54,5. 86,21. 100,23. 108,29.

326. Often the parenthetic element is descriptive: malakàs kumáin, katimbàŋ naŋ dalawà katáo great at eating, a match for two persons; naŋ pinagkatamàn na walà ŋ patìd, ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ hábaʾ shavings without a break, forty feet in length. Similar 25cases at 80,39. 86,29. 118,43. 120,2.

327. Especially common are parentheses describing the temporary state or situation of something: Aŋ mànanalò ŋ paŋkàt at aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa kaybígan, magkakasáma ŋ tinùtugtugàn naŋ kanila ŋ bànda naŋ músika, ay agad-agàd na nagpàpaséyo. The 30winning team and their friends, all together accompanied by the playing of their band, at once form a parade. Nakaratìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ báhay, dalà nila aŋ súpot naŋ kwaltà. They arrived at their house, bearing the bag of money. Other cases at 92,22. 98,21. 114,42.

35(4) anacolouthon.

328. In other cases a breaking off of the construction rather than an insertion seems to take place: Aŋ maŋa hindí nagsísitugtòg aŋ katuŋkúlan ay kumantà. Those who do not play, their duty is to sing. Gáya ko, akò y paráti ŋ nàhàhábul naŋ maŋa 40áso. Like me, I am often pursued by dogs. Pabulòŋ lámaŋ kuŋ [209]silà y magsàlitáan. In whispers only (predicate) when they talk together. The organic construction would probably be: Pabulòŋ lámaŋ aŋ kanila ŋ pagsasàlitáan. Their conversation is only in whispers. Kuŋ kanya ŋ pakánin ay wala ŋ ulàm. When (they, 5anaphoric) are fed it is without meat.

329. While direct quotations often enter into normal constructions as predicate (§ 114), as conjunctive complement (§ 159), or as disjunctive object (§ 186), they are often joined by a breaking off of construction. In this case their relation to the rest of 10a sentence may resemble that of a subject; this happens especially when the sentence begins with the quotation or with part of it. If ay, y were used many of these sentences would be regular: “Magáral ka ŋ mabúti,” sinábi ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ anàk. “Study well” was said by Juan to his son. “Dalawà!” isinigàw naŋ 15bulàg. “Two!” was shouted by the blindman. “Sa damdam kò,” aŋ sagòt ni Dyégo, “ay akò aŋ pinakamakínis.” “In my opinion,” was Diego’s answer, “I am the cleverest.” Similarly their relation may resemble that of a disjunctive object (instrumental type, § 186), but naŋ is not used. This happens if the 20quotation follows active words of saying: Si Hwàn namàn ay sumagòt: “Matàr!” Juan then answered: “Matar!”

330. This peculiar construction of direct quotations is extended to some cases that are not exactly quotations but may be viewed as such: Aŋ boò ŋ ása ko aŋ kandidáto ŋ si Manikìs aŋ 25nàgùgustuhàn naŋ maŋa táo; hindí palà, kuŋ hindí aŋ kandidáto ŋ si Sàntos. It was my whole expectation that the candidate Maniquís would be the one chosen by the people; but no, it was the candidate Santos. Aŋ paniwála naŋ maŋa táo si Saŋ-Hwàn ay sya ŋ sànto ŋ nagpápaulàn. It is the belief of the people that 30San Juan is the saint who makes rain. [210]

[Contents]

C. MORPHOLOGY.

1. Composition.

331. Compound words (i. e. words resembling in form a succession of two or more words, but diverging in meaning from 5such a succession) are treated phonetically like groups of words in the phrase (§§ 33. 34).

If the first member ends in syllabic, n, or glottal stop, the particle ŋ appears before the second member.

In meaning, compound words resemble a phrase in which the 10word corresponding to the first member is modified, in disjunctive attribution, by the word corresponding to the second: báhay-aklátan library-building: báhay naŋ aklátan. The meaning of the compound is, however, more specialized than that of the phrase.

Exceptions as to meaning are: (1) the copulative compound 15áraw-gabì, formed on the model of doubled words, such as áraw-áraw, gabi-gabì (§§ 258. 343.); (2) kapatìd-koŋkristiyános, a foreign product; (3) máy-roòn, equivalent to máy, which has been viewed as a compound because its construction (§ 138) differs from that of the phrase máy roòn (which would not require the 20particle ŋ, §§ 252. 263).

Similar in form to compound words are words derived from a phrase (§ 332).

Examples of regular compounds: aŋ báhay-bátaʾ the womb, báhay-gúyaʾ the womb of an animal (gúyaʾ the young of an animal), 25báhay-pàhayagàn newspaper office, publishing house, Báhay-Paníki Bat-House (name of a town, paníki a bat), báhay-pintáhan paint-shop; Itò y bigay-loòb lámaŋ nya sa ákin. This is merely a concession he makes to me as a favor; aŋ lalawíga-ŋ-Pampàŋga, aŋ provìnsiya-ŋ-Pampàŋga Pampanga Province, cf. aŋ 30provìnsiya naŋ Pampàŋga; pilìk-matà eyelash (pilìk fin, lash); aŋ Sàmáha-ŋ-Sumúloŋ the Sumulong Company; aŋ tánud-báhay the watchman of a house, tánud-pálay watchman of a rice-field.

A member of a compound may consist of an entire phrase (cf. § 332): Bìgása-ŋ-Sumúloŋ-at-Kasamahàn Rice-mill of Sumulong 35and Company (equivalent to Bìgásan nila Sumúloŋ at Kasamahàn); [211]aŋ dúlo-ŋ-bandà-ŋ-kánan the right-hand end (aŋ bandà ŋ kánan the right).

Specialization and transference of meaning are especially marked in hampas-lúpaʾ (literally: beating of the ground) tramp, 5vagabond; kápit-báhay not only neighboring house, but also neighbor: Aŋ báhay ni Hwàn ay áki ŋ kápit-báhay, but also: Si Hwàn ay áki ŋ kápit-báhay; kápit-báyan neighboring town, but also person from a neighboring town; Sawi-ŋ-pálad siyà. He is unlucky (literally unhandy of the palm).

10For the other occurrences of compounds see Index under báhay, bakàs, bànda, bantày, básag, báyad, báyan, búŋa, bútas, daàn, hánap, ílog, kalabàw, kapuluàn, kasamaàn, kasawiàn, kasiraàn, kinamatayàn, lúpaʾ, médiko, paà, pamatày, pantày, piráso, púnoʾ, sàmáhan, táo, trabáho, úbos.

152. General features of word-formation.

332. Many words are analyzed into (1) recurring affixes, (2) doubling, (3) reduplication, and (4) a recurring unanalyzable element bearing the material meaning, the root. The place of the root may be taken by a word in turn showing derivation by 20these processes, or by a compound word, or even by a phrase. Other words, root-words, contain only the unanalyzable element.

Other modifications affecting the meaning are shifting of the accent toward the end of the word, and the use of secondary accents.

25Modifications not affecting the meaning, but merely accompanying those already named, are sound-variation and retraction of the accent toward the beginning of the word.

The same morphologic elements may be variously distributed; it is most convenient and corresponds most nearly to the speech-feeling 30to describe these differences as though they were due to different successions in which the modifications are applied: sumùsúlat is súlat reduplicated and with infix -um-; but (nag-)tùtumirà is tirà with infix -um-, then reduplicated (plus prefix nag-).

The part of a word to which a modification is (in this sense) 35said to be added will be called the underlying word (or phrase): in sumùsúlat the infix -um- is added to the underlying word sùsúlat, in (nag-)tùtumirà reduplication is added to the underlying word tumirà; in ikasa-m-pùʾ the tenth the prefixes ka- and i- are successively added to the underlying phrase sa m pùʾ ten.

40Roots not actually occurring in this book as independent words [212]will be written with a hyphen prefixed (-káin), except in unmistakable lists of roots.

333. The root. Except for some pronoun forms and particles, the roots have two or more syllables and are almost always 5accented either on the last (oxytone roots) or on the next-to-last (barytone roots): báhay house, kamày hand.

Some disyllabic roots are formed as though a single syllable were repeated: bitbìt, budbòd, buŋbòŋ piece of unsplit bamboo, damdàm, dibdìb chest (part of body), dikdìk, diŋdìŋ (dindìŋ, § 20), 10gága, hinhìn, ladlàd, laglàg, liŋkìŋ, lublòb, maŋmàŋ, niŋnìŋ, padpàd, paŋpàŋ, pukpòk, satsàt, siksìk, siŋsìŋ, sísi, súso breast, nipple, sutsòt, tadtàd, tiktìk, tiŋtìŋ (tintìŋ), tugtòg, tuktòk, tuŋtòŋ (tuntòŋ), ulòl.

Of the roots of more than two syllables some similarly repeat 15one or two syllables: alaála, babáye (see § 345), bulaklàk, lipumpòn (beside lípon).

Others appear as though a syllable -al- or -ag- were infixed (or prefixed) before the first syllabic: alagàd (cf. agàdʾ), balahíbo fur, hair on the body, balíkat, balítaʾ, Balíwag, balúbad, 20baluktòt, dalága, dalamháteʾ, dalandàn, dalaŋhítaʾ, daláŋin, halakhàk, haláman, halíge, halimbáwaʾ, halimhìm, kalabòg, kalákal, kalasìŋ, kalaykày, kaluskòs, palakàʾ, salakàb, salákay, salakòt a rain-hat of palm-leaves, salapèʾ, salawàl, salaysày, salitàʾ, salúboŋ, salúkoy, talastàs, taluŋkòʾ,—bagábag, bagáso bare stalk, of sugar-cane 25or corn (Spanish brazo, whence Tagalog baráso arm, assimilated to this type?), Hagúnoy, lagablàb, lagánap, pagakpàk, sagásaʾ, sagitsìt.

In some instances roots of the same or similar meaning resemble each other in form. This is commonest in loan-words, where 30different degrees of assimilation exist side by side: biróke, bitóke blow-gun bullet (Spanish bodoque); palànsa, pirìnsa flatiron (Spanish plancha). It occurs also, however, in native (or anciently assimilated) roots: aniyáyaʾ, yáyaʾ; ánib, sánib (for sa ánib?); balítaʾ, salitàʾ; bitàw, bitìw; bugòk, bulòk; buŋáŋaʾ 35mouth, maw (naŋ hurnò of the oven, naŋ kalàn of the stove), suŋáŋaʾ a blow on the mouth; dinìg, kinìg; ípon, lípon (lipumpòn, above), típon; laàn, taàn; luhòd, túhod; maŋhàʾ, taŋhàʾ; matày, patày; hantày, hintày.

When syllables of a root resemble affixes, there is always 40possibility that the root may be interpreted as a derived word by the speech-feeling, no matter whether historically it be such or not. Thus the Index will show many roots whose initial syllables [213]are identical with prefixes; the other cases will be mentioned under the various affixes.

334. Affixation. Prefixes are added to the initial of the underlying word: nag-tirà; infixes before the first syllabic: t-um-irà, 5um-alìs; suffixes to the end: tìrá-han.

Affixes are occasionally accompanied by retraction of accent: itò, d-íto. See §§ 343,c. 358,c.e. 481,c. 485,a. 523. 528,d.

In the following cases affixes are accompanied by sound-variation:

10(a) prefixes:

(1) The prefixes ending in g are treated phonetically as though they were separate words; this happens occasionally with other prefixes (§ 34).

(2) Initial d of the underlying word becomes r after the 15syllabic of a prefix in the roots listed in § 17. The change is constant only in the commonest formations: always pa-raàn, but naká-daàn beside naká-raàn. Striking irregularities at §§ 407,a. 468.

(3) The prefix i- and in some formations the prefix ka- contract 20with a following syllabic (§ 31): iy-ánib (for i-ánib), íwan (for i-íwan), ka-yibíg-an (for ka-ibíg-an), kàwáwaʾ (for ka-áwa-áwaʾ). See §§ 368. 401. 421. 426,b. 475,a. 481,c. 485,a.

(4) The prefixes ending in ŋ (maŋ-, naŋ-, paŋ-) alter a following initial, always in much-used words, frequently in others.

25Before an initial syllabic the ŋ is treated as though it belonged to the underlying word and not to the prefix. This appears in reduplication (§ 336).

Initial p, b, t, d, s, are often, initial k is always changed to the corresponding nasal: pamáloʾ (páloʾ with paŋ-), but also paŋ-pa-rikìt; 30pamilmìt (bilmìt), but also paŋ-bambò; panáliʾ (táliʾ), but also paŋ-takìp; panaláŋin (daláŋin), but also paŋ-dilìg; na-naríwaʾ (saríwaʾ), but also paŋ-sakày; naŋapàʾ (kapàʾ). Where the change is not made, the ŋ may be assimilated to dentals (§ 20): mandurúkit beside maŋdudúkit.

35Before nasals the ŋ is usually lost: namahálaʾ (mahálaʾ with naŋ-).

See paŋ- and maŋ- in List of Formations.

(5) The prefix hin- and its compounds give rise to a few similar changes, see §§ 357,b. 376,a. 518.

40(6) For occasional irregularities of prefixes see §§ 347,b. 481,d. 528. [214]

(b) infixes:

(1) Where -in- is infixed in a word beginning with l, w, or y, this initial is usually interchanged with the n, so that, practically, we have a prefixed ni- instead of an infixed -in-: ni-lútoʾ (beside 5less common l-in-útoʾ), ni-walìs (beside w-in-íkaʾ), ni-yáyaʾ. See §§ 359 ff. 374 ff.

(2) Where words beginning with syllabic, h, l, w (and y) have the prefix i- and the infix -in-, the latter is almost always used as a prefix, preceding the i-: in-iy-útos, in-íwan (for in-i-íwan), 10in-i-hatìd, i-ni-lútoʾ (beside less common i-l-in-útoʾ), in-i-wisìk. See § 368.

(3) On -um- see § 348,b.

(c) suffixes:

(1) The suffixes (-an and -in) after a syllabic take an initial 15h: luksú-han.

(2) Final d always becomes r before a suffix: lakar-àn (lákad).

(3) When used in the formation of transient derivatives, as well as in some other of their uses, the suffixes are accompanied 20by irregular modifications of certain roots.

Some roots ending in syllabic are treated as if they ended in glottal stop; they are amà, kíta, matà: ama-ìn, kitá-an, matá-an.

Others are treated as though they ended in n; they are paà, tálo, táwa: paa-nàn (beside regular paa-hàn), talú-nan, tawá-nan.

25Other roots lose the syllabic of the last syllable, as well as a final glottal stop which may follow this; if the syllabic is final, the suffix adds h: asìn asn-àn, bigày bigy-àn, bilì bil-hàn, mulàʾ mul-àn. The roots so treated are: asìn, bigày, bilì, bukàs, dalà, hatìd, higàʾ, ibà (but also regular iba-hàn), eskuwéla, gawàʾ, káin, 30kamìt, lagày, lakì, likòd, masìd, mulàʾ, punòʾ, pútol (but also regular putúl-an), sakày, sákit, subò, sunòd, táŋan, tibàʾ, tiŋìn, tirà (but also regular tirá-han), ulìʾ, upòʾ, walàʾ.

Still other roots add assimilation, dissimilation, or metathesis of consonants to the loss of vowel: ának aŋk-àn, atìp apt-àn, 35danìw (? see § 421) ka-raniyúw-an, datìŋ datn-àn, gílid ta-ligd-àn (beside regular ta-gilír-an), halìk hagk-àn, haŋgà haŋg-àn (i. e. the h of -han is lost), kinìg kiŋg-àn, silìd sigl-àn, tanìm tamn-àn, tuwìd ka-tu-tur-àn.

Entirely irregular are the following: alaála alala-hánin (-hánin 40for -hin), aniyáya anyá-han, háriʾ ka-hariy-àn ka-hary-àn (beside regular pag-harí-an), íhip híp-an, ílag inlag-àn (for ilag-nàn? [215]but also regular ilág-an), kawáyan kwayan-àn (beside regular kawayan-àn), kilála kilan-làn (for kilal-nàn?), kúha kú-nin, laròʾ laruw-àn larw-àn (beside regular laru-àn), pulòʾ ka-puluw-àn ka-pulw-àn (beside regular ka-pulu-àn), sála saŋ-làn (for sal-nan? 5also ka-salá-nan and regular salá-han), sundòʾ pagkà-sunduw-àn (beside regular -sundu-àn), táo ka-taw-àn (? see § 422, also regular ka-taú-han), totoò tòto-hánan (-hánan for -hàn).

335. Doubling. In certain formations the underlying word, if disyllabic, is repeated; the phonetic treatment is the same as 10that of successive words in a phrase (§ 34): agad-agàd, gabi-gabì, ápat-ápat, pa-lígid-lígid.

If the underlying word has more than two syllables, only the beginning of it, inclusive of the second syllabic, is repeated, and the final syllabic of this repeated part has a primary accent: kaní-kaníno, 15kaní-kanilà, nag-kagá-kagalìt (underlying word ka-galìt).

336. Reduplication. In some formations the beginning of the underlying word, including the first syllabic, is repeated, sù-súlat, á-akiyàt. Words with reduced i or u (§ 27) reduplicate with i, u: maka-sí-siyà, maka-sí-syà.

20Note the foreign words: krùs nag-kú-kurùs, trabáho nag-tá-trabáho.

Initial d of the roots listed in § 17 often becomes r after the reduplication: k-in-à-dò-roon-àn (doòn), nag-dá-daàn (daàn).

When a prefix which involves change of initial comes before 25a reduplicated form, the latter has the changed initial both in the reduplicative syllable and in the underlying part: nà-rò-roòn (doòn), pa-ŋu-ŋumìt (umìt with paŋ-, § 334, a, 4; also: paŋ-u-umìt) pútol pa-mu-mútol (pútol with paŋ-).

337. Accent-shift. In certain formations the accent is displaced 30one syllable toward the end of the word: súlat sulàt. This is especially the case before suffixes forming transient words: súlat sulát-an. In some formations with suffixes the accent moves two syllables toward the end of the word: súlat sulat-àn.

Certain roots are especially given to this change and show it 35in formations where it is not regular. In these roots the accent-shift is more or less clearly and regularly connected with a modification of meaning. The roots are: ábot overtake, with shift: reach for, take hold of, pass, hand; e. g. pa-ábot let oneself be overtaken, pa-abòt something caused to be handed, ákay, álam, 40áwaʾ, áyaw, bábaʾ, báhay, báyaʾ, búlag, gálit, gísiŋ, háyag, húli, lápit, láyoʾ, múra, sákit, sáma, síraʾ, tálo, támaʾ, táwa, túloy, [216]úna. See Index. A few pairs of roots differing only in accent may possibly belong here, e. g. -ának family and anàk child.

338. Secondary accents. (1) In some formations a secondary accent is spoken on the initial syllable of the underlying word: 5alìs àlís-an, ka-galìt kàgalít-an, iyàk ìyák-an. If the first syllable is closed, the secondary accent is omitted: luksò luksú-han; so also if it is followed by consonant plus reduced vowel (§ 27): taniyàg tanyàg tanyág-an; and also if its own vowel is reduced: niyòg nyòg niyúg-an nyúg-an. There are some irregularities. See 10§§ 377,b. 383. 421. 421,b. 426,b.

(2) Prefixes and reduplications often take a secondary accent: nà-pútol (different in meaning from na-pútol), sù-súlat.

These secondary accents have phonetically the quality of primary accents when they come before short oxytone underlying 15words: ná-rinìg, á-akiyàt. If, however, the word is accented on a suffix, the accent on this is more audible and the secondary accent remains: nà-buks-àn. So also if there are two secondary accents: nà-rì-rinìg. Longer oxytone words not accented on a suffix vary; they have been transcribed as heard in each case: nag-sì-si-pag-laròʾ 20nag-sí-si-pag-laròʾ.

339. Indications. In the following description formations will be indicated as follows:

prefixes thus: nag-; infixes: -um-; suffixes: -an; secondary accent on prefixes: nà-;

25doubling by “D”, e. g. nag- D -an represents the formation seen in nag-aswàŋ-aswáŋ-an;

reduplication by “r”, with secondary accent by “R”, e. g. pag- r (pag-pu-pútol), nag- R (nag-pù-pútol), -um- R (s-um-ù-súlat), nag- R -um- (nag-tù-t-um-irà);

30secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word by “S”, e. g. S -an (àlís-an);

accent-shift by “(1)” or “(2)”, e. g. (1) describes the formation of sulàt from súlat; (1) -an (sulát-an); (2) -an (sulat-àn).

35340. Summary of formations. The various formations group themselves into eight classes: 1. simple formations without characteristic prefix, expressing simple actions, objects, etc.; 2. formations with characteristic prefix pag-, expressing chiefly transitive actions; 3. characteristic prefix paŋ-, deliberate actions; 4. si-, 40action by more than one actor; 5. paki-, action along with others; 6. ka-, reciprocal, involuntary, and accidental; 7. pa-, causative; 8. pati-, reflexive. [217]

These indications are a mere rough guide: neither the characteristic prefix nor the meaning indicated runs through the entire group. The first three groups are the most important, and, to a large extent, each formation of the other five groups belongs also 5to one of the three primary groups.

In each group there are four types of words: simple static, transient, abstracts of action, and special static. The simple static words involve no idea of active or passive; the transients are accompanied by abstracts, in which the transient occurrence is viewed 10as a static concept, and by special static words, which, though static, involve the idea of voice: simple static súlat a document, writing, letter; transient sumúlat wrote, sulátan is to be written to; abstract pagsúlat an act of writing; special static sulatàn a writing-desk (with idea of local passive).

15Each (active or passive, § 92) transient formation exists in two modes, actual and contingent, and each of these has two aspects, punctual and durative; the durative always has accented reduplication. The actual mode envisages the occurrence as actually having taken place or taking place: in the punctual aspect the 20occurrence is viewed in its entirety, without regard to duration, and hence always as past: nagáral studied, learned; in the durative aspect of the actual the occurrence is viewed as a process going on in time, past or present: nagàáral was studying, is studying, used to study, studied (repeatedly), studies. The contingent 25mode views the occurrence as not having actually taken place: the punctual aspect views it as possible, hypothetical, or commanded: magáral should study, study (as command); the durative as future from the point of view of the past or present: magàáral will study, was going to study. The punctual contingent 30form is used not only in commands and hypothetical clauses, but in subordinate predications and complements generally, even, for instance, after naŋ (§ 192 f.), and often, in such constructions, in competition with actual forms. It is often used, further, after hindìʾ (§ 238). When objectivized with aŋ, it expresses the possibility 35or circumstance of the occurrence: aŋ magáral a hypothetical studier, the circumstance that one might study.

The abstracts of action are much used in the construction described at § 274.

In addition to these more or less regular and systematized 40forms, there are various isolated formations, which will be discussed after the others.

A systematically arranged list of formations precedes the Index. [218]

3. Description of formations.

I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, paŋ-).
A. Simple static forms.
(1) Root-words.

5341. The uses of root-words cover a wide range of meanings, the diversity of which is due to the various material meanings of the roots. The rough grouping here made is a matter of convenience; the speech-feeling seems not to distinguish classes of roots or diverse employments of root-words.

10While a complete list of the examples occurring in the Texts and illustrative sentences will be given for nearly all other formations, the root-words are so numerous that it will be expedient merely to refer to the Index.

(1) Root-words in many cases express object-ideas which are 15viewed as simple: aŋ báhay house, aŋ táo human being.

(2) If the words containing a root have in common the idea of a quality rather than of an object, the root-word may express either the quality itself, or an object possessing the quality.

(a) In the former case, it is generally a single occurrence of 20the quality that is expressed, not the quality in general, which is expressed rather by a collective with ka- and -an (§ 421 ff.), but this distinction is not fully carried out. The root-word generally stands in object construction. Examples: Aŋ búte ni Hwàn ay walá sa kanya ŋ úlo, dátapuwat násàsa kanya ŋ púsoʾ. Juan’s 25good quality lies not in his head, but in his heart. Si Pédro ay táo ŋ wala ŋ daŋàl. Pedro is a person without honor. aŋ ínit naŋ tagáraw the heat of summer. Aŋ lálim naŋ balòn ay isà ŋ pantay-kawáyan. The depth of the well is the length of a bamboo-tree. Aŋ lamìg sa Amérika ay masyádo. The cold in America is 30excessive. Aŋ ligsè naŋ usà ay hindí gáya naŋ sa áso. The speed of the deer is not equal to that of the dog. Aŋ samá naŋ ságiŋ na itò ay nása ugàt. The trouble with this banana-tree is at the root. aŋ taàs naŋ káhoy the height of the tree.

(b) When expressing an object endowed with a quality, the 35root-word is in competition with words formed with the prefix ma- (§ 454). It usually stands as a predicate or as conjunctive attribute of another word. aŋ túbig na álat salt-water, aŋ dágat na álat the salt-sea, the ocean. Aŋ pákoʾ ay baluktòt. The nail is crooked. Aŋ patalìm ay báwal sa maŋa bátaʾ. Children are not 40allowed to have sharp tools. Aŋ itlùg na yitò y bugòk (or: bulòk). [219]This egg is rotten. Sya y bugòk. He is crazy. aŋ buwísit na alílaʾ a repulsive servant. Ikàw ay bwísit. You are a bore. Maŋa gíliw ko ŋ ginoò! Honored sirs! isa ŋ táu ŋ hámak a no-account person. aŋ táu ŋ lasìŋ the drunken man. Sya y lasìŋ. 5He is drunk. aŋ pulúbe ŋ lumpò the lame beggar. Sya y lumpò. He is lame. Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ mahàl na bátaʾ sa kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ. Juan is a child dear to his parents. Múra aŋ maŋa síle sa panahò ŋ itò. Peppers are cheap at this time. Hindí pansìn aŋ piklàt sa mukhà naŋ dalága ŋ si Maryà. The scar on young 10Maria’s face is not noticeable. aŋ táo ŋ panòt a bald-headed man. isa ŋ báya ŋ payápaʾ a tranquil town. Sya y pípe. He is dumb. Aŋ pintà naŋ bintánaʾ ay putèʾ. The window is painted white. Sagàd aŋ kanya ŋ gupìt. His hair-cut is close. Sina Hwàn ay salàt sa pananamìt. Juan and his family are short of clothing. 15Akò y sawí sa pagsusúboʾ sa bátaʾ. I am in an awkward position for feeding the child. Sáyaŋ aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn. Little Juan is to be regretted. Isa ŋ táo ŋ sinuŋáliŋ si Pédro. Pedro is a liar. Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ táo ŋ tanyàg. Juan is a renowned man. Tanyàg sya sa kanya ŋ kláse. He is at the head of his class. aŋ 20tigàs naŋ káhoy the hard part of the log. aŋ daà ŋ tumpàk the right road. si Untèʾ Shorty (as nickname).

(3) If the words containing the root refer rather to an action or occurrence, the uses of the root-word are more varied.

(a) The root-word may refer to the action itself; it is used 25of a single instance rather than of the action in general, which is expressed rather by abstracts of action, though the distinction is not always clear. The root-word so used is mostly in object construction. Examples: Aŋ anyáya sa ákin ni Hwána ay áki ŋ tinaŋgàp. I accepted Juana’s invitation. May bálìʾ aŋ kawáyan. 30The bamboo has a break in it. May búhay pa aŋ púsa ŋ itò. This cat is still alive. Aŋ dalamhátì naŋ kanya ŋ inà ay malakì. His mother’s grief is great. Sa damdam kò y nagumpisa nà aŋ malalamìg na áraw. I think (literally: In my feeling) the cold days have begun. Si Hwàn ay sya ŋ pumáyag sa hilìŋ nilà sa kanya 35ŋ sasakyàn. Juan was the one who acceded to their request for his vehicle. Aŋ húgas naŋ piŋgàn ay marumè. The washing of the dishes is dirty, i. e. The dishes have been poorly washed. Aŋ kantà naŋ íbon ay maínam. The bird’s song is pleasant. Aŋ kasàl ni Pédro at ni Maryà ay sa liŋgò. The wedding of Pedro and 40Maria will be on Sunday. aŋ áki ŋ lúlan sa trén my embarking (with all my goods) on the train. Aŋ pagakpàk naŋ maŋa táo ay nakabíbiŋi. The applause of the people was deafening. Aŋ [220]pásoʾ sa paà ni Pédro ay malakì. The burn on Pedro’s foot is large. Aŋ pútol naŋ buhòk ni Hwàn ay bakìl-bakìl. Juan’s hair-cut is uneven. Sa lúnes aŋ tagpú nila sa daà-ŋ-Balíwag. They are to meet on the Baliwag road next Monday. aŋ tahòl ni Batò 5ŋ Bákal the barking of Iron Stone (name of a dog). Aŋ támà naŋ bátaʾ ay sa úlo. The child was struck on the head. Binigyàn ni Hwàn naŋ isà ŋ tapìk aŋ kaybígan nya ŋ si Pédro. Juan gave his friend Pedro a nudge. Aŋ kanya ŋ túlog ay mabábaw. His sleep is light. Aŋ upú naŋ Intsìk ay pataluŋkòʾ. The Chinese sit 10squatting. Butíhan mo aŋ yárì naŋ sambalílo. Put a good finish on (the making of) the hat.

(b) The root-word may express an object by virtue of which the action becomes possible or has concrete manifestation; this use closely approaches transient passives of various kinds. Root-words 15in this use are most commonly conjunctive attributes, but the object construction, especially in the predicate, is frequent. Aŋ ágaw nya ŋ laruwàn ay inilagay nyà sa kahòn. The toys he snatched were put by him into a box. Síno sa maŋa táo aŋ ináko ni Mariyáno? Aŋ áko ni Mariyáno ay si Pédro. 20Which one of the men did Mariano relieve?—The one whom Mariano relieved is Pedro. Hwag kayò ŋ mamútol naŋ kawáya ŋ hindí ninyo áriʾ. Don’t make a cutting of bamboo not owned by you; aŋ áriʾ property, aŋ may áriʾ the owner or master. Aŋ bigay nyà sa ákin naŋ Paskò naŋ Paŋaŋanàk 25na nagdaàn ay isa ŋ tabakéra. For last Christmas he gave me a tabatiere. aŋ bíhis nya ŋ damìt the (good) clothes she has put on (in place of her others). isa ŋ bíroʾ a joke. aŋ byày na isdàʾ sa palàisdáan the fish allowed to swim free in the fish-reservoir. aŋ dalà that carried; Dalà ni Hwàn aŋ lumbò. Juan is carrying 30the cup. aŋ dikìt naŋ apòy the blazing of the fire. Aŋ orasàn ni Hwàn ay gáliŋ sa Parìs. Juan’s watch comes from Paris. Aŋ tornìlyo ŋ itò y gámit sa mákina. This screw is used in the machine. aŋ gantì nya ŋ pálaʾ the gift he gave in return. Aŋ kwáko ŋ itò ay ganti ŋ pálaʾ sa ákin ni Hwàn. This cigar-holder 35is a return-gift to me from Juan. May hálo ŋ iba ŋ bágay aŋ gátas na itò. This milk has something else mixed in with it. háti ŋ gabì midnight. Aŋ hampàs na tinaŋgàp ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ paŋinoòn ay isà ŋ kabàn. The whipping Juan got from his master was twenty-five strokes. May háraŋ na púno-ŋ-káhoy aŋ daà ŋ 40patúŋo sa báriyo naŋ San-Visènte. The road toward the district of San Vicente has a tree obstructing it. Húle si Hwàn naŋ pulìs. Juan was arrested by the policeman. Aŋ igìb nya ŋ túbig ay [221]marumè. The water he dipped from the spring is dirty. Aŋ binàbása nya ŋ librò ay kathà ni Risàl. The book he is reading was written by Rizal. Laàn (or: taàn) kay Pédro aŋ alaála ŋ itò. This present is reserved for Pedro. Aŋ lákad ni Hwàn ay aŋ 5paŋhihiràm. Juan’s errand is to borrow something. Aŋ lúlan ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ karitòn ay maŋa kahòn naŋ álak. Juan’s load on his wagon is cases of liquor; aŋ lúla ŋ kasaŋkápan the loaded utensils. Aŋ manòk na yitò y lúto sa durúan. This chicken is roasted on the spit. Nàhúle si Hwàn sa tabì naŋ kanya ŋ nákaw 10na kabáyo. Juan was caught with the horse he stole. Aŋ pásak naŋ baŋkàʾ ay bunòt naŋ nyòg at pagkìt. The boat is calked with cocoanut fibre and wax. Aŋ pígil ni Hwàn ay aŋ kabáyo. Juan is trying to restrain the horse. Aŋ pintàs ko kay Hwàn ay aŋ kanya ŋ bísyo ŋ paginòm. What I don’t like about Juan is his 15vice of drunkenness. aŋ púlot anything picked up; an adopted child. aŋ isa ŋ pútol na púno-ŋ-káhoy a tree that has been cut up; Aŋ pútol naŋ káhoy ay nàpakaiklèʾ. The wood has been cut too short. Aŋ librò ay aŋ sadyá ko sa báhay ni Hwàn. The book is what I went to Juan’s house for. Aŋ sakày sa trèn ay limà ŋ 20kompanyà ŋ sundálo. The people in the train are five companies of soldiers. Aŋ saŋkàp naŋ manòk ay kalabása. The chicken is cooked with pumpkin. “Magsipagsísi kayò, maŋa táo ŋ makasalánan,” aŋ sigàw naŋ kúra mulá sa pùlpito. “Repent, ye sinners,” was the cry of the priest from the pulpit. isa ŋ súboʾ a 25mouthful. Marámi sya ŋ tágo ŋ kwaltà. He has much money saved away. Aŋ tanìm naŋ búkid ay pálay na malagkìt. The field is planted with a sticky rice. Aŋ taŋgàp nya ŋ bílin ay lubhà ŋ marámi. The commissions he received were numerous. Malakàs aŋ táwa ni Hwàn. Juan’s laughter was loud. Aŋ táwag sa lugàr 30na itò ay Kinamatayà-ŋ-Kabáyo. They call this place Dead Horse. aŋ tuŋtòŋ that on which something stands; a mat on which dishes are set (specific name: dikìn). Aŋ túrù naŋ bátaʾ ay aŋ mansánas sa mésa. The child is pointing at the apple on the table. Aŋ usísaʾ sa ákin ni Hwàn ay kuŋ saan nàndon aŋ kanya ŋ sombréro. 35What Juan asked me was where his hat was. Walá sya ŋ uwì ŋ maŋa librò. He did not bring home any books. Aŋ talìm naŋ gúlok ay yári sa Yurúpa. The cutting-edge of the bolo is made in Europe.

(c) Especially with the particle nà (§ 223) the root-word 40often expresses a brusque command; in this use it is in competition with transient forms. Dalí ka naŋ iyo ŋ pagtakbò. Hurry your running, i. e. Run faster. Hampàs na kayò, maŋa bátaʾ, sa maŋa [222]laŋgàm. Whip at the ants, boys. Hátì na naŋ mansánas. Divide up the apples. Hintú na kayò, maŋa bátaʾ. Stop, children. Ísip na kayò kuŋ anò aŋ kahulugàn naŋ áki ŋ bugtòŋ. Guess the meaning of my riddle. Láyas na! Get out! Lígù na! Take a bath! 5Luksu nà sa tinìk na iyàn. Jump across those spines. Sáma nà sa kanyà. Go to him. Táwag na naŋ maŋa polìs. Call the police. Tayòʾ. Stand up. Upú na. Sit down.

(d) Repeated with naŋ (§ 191) root-words, as predicates, denote an actor in repeated and continuous action: Nàkíta ko ŋ 10pútol naŋ pútol si Hwàn naŋ tubò. I saw Juan cutting away at the sugar-cane. Similarly (see Index) bilì and táwa.

342. Root-words with accent-shift. Barytone roots are used as root-words with shift of accent to the last syllable to denote something which has been affected by the action, quality, or (in 15fewer cases) thing, which is denoted by the root. The particle nà is usually added. Agaw nà sa súnog aŋ maŋa laruwàn. The toys have been snatched from the fire. Awá na si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pinarùrusáha ŋ anàk. Juan is already overcome with pity for his child, whom he is punishing. Aŋ áso ni Hwàn ay bahày. Juan’s 20dog is grown up in the house, is completely domesticated. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn ay bahày. Little Juan is shy, is unused to strangers. Bayad nà aŋ útaŋ sa ákin ni Hwàn. Juan’s debt to me is paid now. Bihis nà aŋ bátaʾ. The child’s clothes have been changed, The child is dressed up now. Bilaŋ nà aŋ maŋa itlòg 25na itò. These eggs are already counted. Aŋ úlo ni Hwàn ay bilòg. Juan’s head is round; or: Juan has been fooled; aŋ bilòg na táboʾ the round dipper. Buhày aŋ áki ŋ inà. My mother is living. Sya y bulàg. He is blinded; or: He is blind; aŋ babáye ŋ bulàg the blind woman. Daiŋ nà aŋ isdàʾ. The fish has been 30laid open. isa ŋ táo ŋ gutòm a hungry (or: gluttonous) person. Hatí na aŋ tubò. The sugar-cane is cut in two. Huli nà si Hwána sa trén. Juana is late for the train. Aŋ karnè ay ihaw nà. The meat is done. Init nà aŋ gátas. The milk is heated. Kayas nà aŋ kawáya ŋ itò. This bamboo is already smoothed. Aŋ 35pagkùkúnan nya naŋ itlòg ay aŋ kahò ŋ kulaŋ nà. He will take eggs from the box that is already started (literally: incomplete, cf. Ápat na sèntimos aŋ kúlaŋ nitò. This lacks four cents, is four cents too little). Lakàd kamì ŋ umwèʾ. We went home on foot. Lipas nà aŋ gamòt (aŋ pabaŋòʾ). The medicine (the perfume) is stale, has lost its strength. Lipas nà aŋ 40áki ŋ gútom. My hunger has disappeared. Pasòʾ aŋ lugàr na itò naŋ kanya ŋ kamày. This spot on his hand is burned; aŋ pasòʾ a pottery dish. Aŋ pagkakàgalítan ni Hwàn at ni Pédro ay pawí [223]nà. The quarrel between Juan and Pedro is now allayed. Pigil nà aŋ kabáyo. The horse is under control now. Aŋ káhoy ay putul nà. The wood is now cut. Itò y sirá na. This is already ruined. Sunòg aŋ damìt na kanya ŋ pinirìnsa. The clothes which 5she ironed are scorched; sunòg na asúkal burnt sugar. Tamá na aŋ iyo ŋ pagkwènta. Now you have figured it correctly. Tipun nà an maŋa kalabàw. Now the carabao are rounded up. Tulis nà aŋ lápis. The pencil is sharpened. Turòʾ aŋ kanya ŋ dalíreʾ. His finger is stiff.

10This form occurs, in this book, also from the following roots (see Index): básag, búnot, gálit, gámit, hásaʾ, kilála, lápad, límaŋ, págod, sákop, sánay, súlat, tápos, tiwálaʾ, túloy.

(a) In the case of some roots this form is used like a simple root-word without accent-shift; these are roots in which the accent-shift 15expresses a modification of the material meaning; see § 337. So: alàm that known (see Index); Babá na riyàn sa iyò ŋ kinàùupàn! Come down from your perch! Aŋ sakìt na kanya ŋ tinítiis ay aŋ lagnàt na típus. The sickness from which he is suffering is typhoid fever. 20(aŋ sákit na kanya ŋ tinítiìs the grief he is enduring). Sama táyo sa pagbilì naŋ pálay. Let us be partners in buying rice. Cf. also hulì, above.

(b) In oxytone roots, where the accent-shift cannot occur, our form is homonymous with the simple root-word: Bigti nà si 25Pédro. Pedro is now strangled. Bukas nà aŋ láta. The can is opened. Busug nà aŋ maŋa háyop. The animals have been fed their fill. Hintú na aŋ trén naŋ akò y sumakày. The train had stopped when I got on. Hubad nà aŋ bátaʾ. The child is undressed now. 30Aŋ maŋa Igoróte ay hubàd. The Igorote go naked. Huŋkuy nà aŋ bigàs. The rice is fanned now. Sya y kasàl. He (she) is married. Pantay nà aŋ lúpaʾ. The ground has been levelled. Nàkíta ko ŋ patìd aŋ sampáyan naŋ damìt. I saw that the clothes-line was broken. Punú na aŋ bóte ŋ itò. This bottle is already full. 35Tayú na aŋ báhay. The house is already erected. Tikwas nà aŋ káhoy. One end of the log is down.

Similarly are used: aŋkìn, bilì, tadtàd, tuwàʾ.

(2) Doubling.

343. Simple doubling. Simple doubling expresses explicit 40plurality or repetition, often with the idea of variation, intensity, or diminution: ápat-ápat four by four, four at a time, aŋ mata-matà [224]trellis-work. Aŋ dúrù nya naŋ karáyom ay hindi parè-parého. Her stitches with the needle are not even. Sabày-sabày sila ŋ umalìs. They all went away at the same time. Similarly from: agàd, alìn, anò, áraw, bágay, bakìl, baluktòt, barà, gabì, 5gibàʾ, halòʾ, isà, lahàt, líbo, liŋgò, loòb, pantày, sáriʾ, síno, sunòd, tulàʾ, untìʾ.

(a) The simple root does not occur and the meaning is discrepant in paru-parò butterfly.

(b) From derived words, in the same meaning: kaní-kanilà 10(ka-n-ilà § 528), kaní-kaníno (ka-n-í-no § 528), dalá-dalawà two by two, two at a time (da-lawà § 345), tatlu-tatlò three by three, three at a time (ta-tlò § 345).

(c) With retraction of accent: Dálì-dáli sya ŋ tumakbò. He ran off like a flash.

15344. (1) D. In some cases the accent is shifted; the meaning is the same: Putòl-putòl aŋ katawàn ni Hwàn naŋ áki ŋ màkíta. Juan’s body was all cut up when I saw it. This form from: báhay, báyan, púnit, sábi, súlok.

(3) Reduplication.

20345. Simple reduplication. In a very few cases the place of the root-word is taken by the root with reduplication. The only clear case is tutulè ear-wax, root -tulè. The numerals dalawà two and tatlò three seem to be irregularly reduplicated forms of roots -lawà and -tlò (for -talò?), as a few of the derivatives 25seem to indicate. A number of words, treated in the following as simple roots, have, however, the aspect of this formation: babáye, bibiŋkà, bubuwìt a kind of mouse, gagambà, laláki, papáya (Spanish), tutubè, totoò.

346. Accented reduplication. Accented reduplication is used 30chiefly in transient forms (§ 348); distinct from this use seems to be that of numerals, in the meaning of only so many: àápat, íilàn, íisà; similarly dá-dalawà only two (from da-lawà) (§ 345).

mámayàʾ, mámyàʾ seems to be felt as a simple root-word and has been treated as such.

35(4) paŋ-.

347. Of the two prefixes round which primary forms are grouped (§ 340), pag- is used only for abstracts of action (§§ 348. 350. 351); with paŋ- are formed words denoting the thing used for doing so and so, or as such and such: Nawalàʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ 40paŋakálaʾ. His power of thought left him. aŋ paŋatìp that used [225]for roofing, a shingle. Magpapútol ka, Pédro, naŋ maŋa kawáya ŋ paŋbákod. Have some bamboo cut for a fence, Pedro. aŋ paŋbambò a stick or club used for beating. paŋbayò instrument for pounding rice, pestle. paŋdilìg implements used for sprinkling. 5paŋgápas a slicer, a curved knife with saw-toothed edge. Aŋ ginámit nya ŋ paŋgupìt na guntìŋ sa damìt ay mapuròl. The scissors he used for cutting cloth were dull; also simply: aŋ paŋgupìt scissors, shears, aŋ paŋhampàs a whip. Aŋ ginawà ŋ paŋháraŋ sa daàn naŋ maŋa tulisàn ay isa ŋ gibà ŋ karitòn. The robbers used 10a broken-down wagon to make the obstruction on the road. Aŋ laséta ŋ itò ay paŋháteʾ naŋ dáyap. This knife is used for cutting limes. aŋ paŋlípaʾ the sticky mud used for smoothing the threshing-floor. aŋ paŋagínip a dream. pamitìk a single rein (one guides the animal by flicking it in various ways, cf. pitìk a fillip, a flick, 15a snap). pamatày in pamatay-kúto thumb, literally: that with which one kills head-lice (kúto). Pamútol naŋ buhòk aŋ guntìŋ na itò. These shears are used for cutting hair. Aŋ salawàl na yitò y sya kò ŋ paŋsakày sa kabáyo. These are my trousers for horseback-riding. Aŋ maŋa pintò ŋ may paŋsarà na gámit ay 20sumásara ŋ kúsaʾ. Doors that have closing attachments close themselves automatically. aŋ panáliʾ a halter or rope for tying up an animal. Aŋ kulilìŋ na ytò y sya kù ŋ panáwag naŋ alílaʾ. This bell is what I use for calling the servants; also: paŋtáwag. Aŋ paŋtayò naŋ halíge ay hindí dumatiŋ. The instruments for 25setting up posts (i. e. the cranes) did not arrive. Aŋ kalaykày ay sya kò ŋ ginámit na paŋtípon naŋ maŋa bunòt na damò. I used the rake for piling up the uprooted grass. aŋ panúroʾ a pointer, anything used for pointing. Sya y may salawàl na paŋupò sa damúhan at gayon dìn máy-roon syà ŋ paŋupò sa sùgálan. 30He has trousers for sitting on the lawn and others for when he sits at the gaming-table.

Similarly from, the following roots: áhit, ákoʾ, alaála, anàk, bilì, bilmìt, daláŋin, gamòt, hilámos, húli, ísip, ŋalán, páloʾ, pukpòk, sáboŋ, takìp, tanìm, tiwálaʾ.

35(a) This derivative from numerals denotes a thing used to fill such and such a place: aŋ paŋápat that used as fourth, as: the fourth horse in a team; of similar meaning: paŋlimà fifth, paŋánim sixth, pamitò seventh, paŋwalò eighth, paŋsiyàm ninth. From the ordinal (§ 416,a) is formed paŋúna first. From phrases 40the higher numbers: paŋsa-m-pùʾ the tenth (sa m pùʾ ten), paŋlabi-ŋ-isà the eleventh (labi ŋ isà), paŋdalawa-ŋ-pùʾ twentieth, pamito-ŋ-pùʾ seventieth. [226]

(b) A few formations show irregularities: panukálaʾ equivalent to paŋakálaʾ above, is felt to belong with akálaʾ; cf. the similar insertion of u in paubáyaʾ (§ 481,d); paŋinoòn master, does not seem to be felt as a derivative of ginoò and has therefore been 5treated as a separate root.

Second and third are derived from the reduplicated form (§ 345) and show phonetic irregularity: aŋ paŋalawà the second; one’s second in a duel; paŋatlò third, third horse in a gun-carriage; similarly paŋatlo-ŋ-pùʾ the thirtieth.

10(c) From root with accent shift (§ 337) only paŋhulè the last (of an established series).

B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words.
(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-.

348. Of the active forms of the primary groups, that of the 15type with prefix zero expresses the actor in a simple action or process. Both of the punctual forms, actual and contingent, are made with infix -um-; the actual durative consists of the root reduplicated, with infix -um-; the contingent durative is reduplicated, but lacks the infix; the reduplication is in both cases accented. 20The abstract of action consists of the root with prefix pag-. Thus the forms are: p-um-útol, p-um-ù-pútol, p-um-útol, pù-pútol, pag-pútol. Examples:

Umabaŋ kà naŋ maglalakò naŋ gátas. Watch for a milkman. Sya y umágaw naŋ maŋa laruwàn. He snatched some toys. Sya 25y umáhon sa ílog (sa bundòk, sa gulòd). He went up the river (up into the mountains, up the hill). Pumútol ka, Hwàn, naŋ búhoʾ, pagáhon mo sa bundòk. When you go up into the mountains, Juan, cut some slender bamboo. Umámin sila Pédro sa harapàn naŋ hukòm. Pedro and his band confessed before the judge. 30umámot sold, of other than a regular merchant. Umánib ka kay Pédro. Let your mat overlap Pedro’s, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Umaŋkìn ka naŋ laruwàn. Take some toys for yourself. Aŋ pagáyaw nya ŋ kumáin naŋ karnè ay sya ŋ nakabùbúte sa kanyà. His not being willing to eat meat is what does him good. Aŋ 35halíge naŋ báhay ay bumábaʾ sapagkàt hindí káya naŋ lúpaʾ aŋ bigàt na kanya ŋ dinádala. The post of the house sank because the weight it was bearing was too great for the ground. Bàbábag si Hwàn naŋ kanya ŋ kalaròʾ. Juan will fight with one of his playmates. Bumaluktot kà naŋ yantòk. Bend a piece of rattan. 40Aŋ áhas ay bumaluktòt. The snake doubled itself up. Bumálot [227]ka naŋ súman (naŋ sigarìlyo, naŋ kúmot). Roll up some suman (sticky rice cooked in banana-leaves; some cigarettes, a blanket). Aŋ pagbása ay mahírap. Reading is hard. Sya y bumigtì naŋ táo. He choked a man to death. Aŋ pagbigtì ay isa ŋ pagpatày 5sa kápwa táo sa pamamagítan naŋ pagsakàl. Strangling is killing a person by means of choking. Bumílog si Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ turumpò. Juan turned out (on a lathe) a spinning-top. Bumíŋit sya sa malaki ŋ paŋánib. He went (voluntarily) to the brink of a great danger. Bumitìw sa lúbid aŋ isà sa inyò. One of you let 10go of the rope. Bumúbukàs aŋ maŋa bulaklàk sa hàlamanàn. The flowers in the garden are opening. Sya y bumúnot naŋ damò. He plucked up some grass. Lahàt naŋ táo sa báya ŋ iyòn ay bumóto sa kandidáto ŋ si Manikìs. All the people in that town voted for the candidate Maniquís. Aŋ halíge ay dumádala naŋ 15tahílan. The post bears up girders. Dumamdàm si Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ mabigàt na sakìt. Juan felt a severe pain. Sya y dumapàʾ. He lay down on his face. Aŋ kanità ŋ kwaltà sa baŋkò ay kasalukúya ŋ gumàgána naŋ buwìs. Your money and mine in the bank is even now earning interest. gumantì act in retaliation. 20gumápas cut with the paŋgápas. Aŋ máy sakìt ay guminháwa. The patient became more comfortable ... ay gumìginháwa nà ... is getting more comfortable now. Sya y humalìk sa kanya ŋ nánay. She kissed her mother. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn aŋ humampàs sa anàk ni Áli ŋ Maryà. It was little Juan 25who hit Aunt Maria’s little boy with a whip. aŋ paghánap a seeking (especially of one’s daily bread). Sya y humáraŋ naŋ maŋa táo ŋ nagháhatid naŋ kabáyo sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. He held up some people who were taking horses to the town of San Miguel. Akò ay humátì naŋ mansánas. I cut an apple in two. Humátì 30ako naŋ maŋa itlòg na binilè ni Hwána. I took half of the eggs Juana bought. Iŋátan mo aŋ pagháwak sa mákina ŋ iyàn, sapagkàt baká ka maputúlan naŋ dalíriʾ na gáya naŋ naŋyári sa ibà. Be careful how you take hold of that machine, for you might get your finger cut off like others before you. Humínà naŋ pagtakbò 35aŋ kabáyo. The horse lost its speed as a runner. aŋ paghiŋìʾ a requesting, a request. Híhiram kamì naŋ librò sa libreríya. We shall borrow books from the library. humúlaʾ predicted, prophesied. umigìb get water by dipping from a well, spring, or stream. Akò y umìíhip naŋ píto. I was blowing the small flute. Umìíhip 40aŋ háŋi ŋ habágat. The spring wind is blowing. Umílag ka. Get out of the way. Aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa pagilàŋ ay lubhà ŋ makínis. His little dodges are very clever. Umínit aŋ plànsa. The flatiron [228]became hot. Umínit aŋ túbig. The water got hot. Aŋ paginùm naŋ álak ay masamàʾ. Drinking liquor is harmful. Sya y uminùm naŋ gátas. He drank some milk. Umísip ka, Nánay, naŋ isa ŋ kwènto. Try to think of a story, Mother. Aŋ pagísip naŋ 5bugtòŋ na itò ay mahírap. This riddle is hard to solve. aŋ kanyà ŋ pagiyàk her weeping. kumabiyàw press sugar-cane. Kumaluskòs sa súlok aŋ dagàʾ. The rat pattered in the corner, i. e. I heard the pattering of a rat in the corner. Aŋ íbon ay kumákantà. The bird is singing. Kumapá si Hwàn naŋ itlòg sa púgad naŋ manòk. 10Juan felt out some eggs in the hen’s nest. Kumákapá sya naŋ isa ŋ palakàʾ. He felt around for a frog. Sya y kumáyas naŋ isa ŋ kawáyan. He smoothed a stick of bamboo. Hwag kà ŋ kumuròt ŋayòn! Don’t pinch now! Si Pédro ay lumabàs. Pedro went out. Aŋ áso y lumàlámon. The dog is feeding. Si Pédro 15ay lumàlámon at hindí kumàkáin. Pedro is eating like an animal, not like a human being. Lumáyag si Manuwèl sa Amérika. Manuel sailed (i. e. voyaged) to America (aŋ láyag a sail). Aŋ bantay-pálay ay lumáyas. The watchman of the rice-field left his post. Isa ŋ sundálo ay lumáyas sa ínit naŋ paglalabanàn. A soldier 20deserted in the heat of the battle. Sya y lumíbot. He went for a walk. Magpútol ka, Pédro, naŋ maŋa kúgon, úpaŋ lumínis aŋ búkid. Cut the cugon-grass, Pedro, so that the field may become clear. Si Pédro ay lumípat sa iba ŋ báyan. Pedro moved to another town. Lumuhod kà, Hwán. Kneel down, Juan. Si 25Hwàn ay lumuhòd sa haràp naŋ háreʾ. Juan knelt down before the king. Sya y ŋumíŋitìʾ. She is smiling. Pumagítan sya sa dalawà ŋ dalága. He placed himself between two young ladies. Akò y pumána naŋ usà. I shot an arrow at a stag (pánaʾ an arrow). Pumánaw aŋ kanya ŋ hiniŋà. His breath departed, i. e. 30He gave up the ghost. Si Hwàn aŋ pumáso sa áki ŋ kulugò. It was Juan who burned out my wart for me. Huwàg kà ŋ pumatìd naŋ sampáyan! Don’t you break the clothes-line! Si Hwàn ay sya ŋ pumáyag sa paraà ŋ itò. It was Juan who agreed to this plan. Sya y pumàpáyag. He is willing. Pumíli akò naŋ malakì 35ŋ mansánas. I chose a big apple. Pumìpílit sya ŋ magbukàs naŋ kabà ŋ bákal. He was trying hard to open an iron safe. (But punctual: Pumílit sya ... He forced open...). pumitìk give a fillip, snap at with one’s finger. Sya y pumúpukpòk naŋ bunòt naŋ nyòg. He is pounding cocoanut husks. Pumùpútol naŋ kawáyan 40si Mariyáno. Mariano is cutting bamboo. Pùpútol ... will cut.... Aŋ sumàsábuy na túbig ay naŋgàgáliŋ sa bubuŋàn naŋ báhay. The water that was splashing on us came from the [229]roof of the house. sumagásaʾ jostle. sumaguwàn paddle. sumáhod put something under to catch what flows or falls. Sya y sumásakay sa baŋkaʾ naŋ akò y dumatìŋ. He was getting into the canoe when I arrived. Sumála siyà sa siŋsìŋ. He missed the ring (in 5the juego de anillo, in which one tries to catch a ring on a stick). sumálok dip out water (aŋ sálok a dipper, a basket for catching fruit when it is cut from the tree; a net for catching insects). Sya y sumandòk naŋ sináiŋ. She dipped out some boiled rice. Sumánib ka kay Pédro, (same meaning as umánib above). Sumíkad aŋ 10kabáyo. The horse struck out, gave a kick. Sumikìp aŋ daàn sa karamíhan naŋ táo. The road became crowded with the multitude of people. Sumikìp aŋ damìt. The garment shrank and became tight. Sumiksìk si Hwàn sa púloŋ naŋ maŋa táo. Juan crowded his way into the gathering of people. Sumilakbò aŋ apòy (aŋ 15kanya ŋ gálit, aŋ kanya ŋ tuwàʾ). The fire (his anger, his joy) welled up. Aŋ pagsintà ni Pédro ay hindí tinaŋgàp naŋ dalága. The young lady did not accept Pedro’s proffer of love. Siyà aŋ sumuklày sa kanya ŋ anàk. It was she herself who combed her child’s hair (aŋ suklày a comb). sumúlid spin thread. sumúloŋ 20push ahead, progress; also as family name: Sumúloŋ. Si Pédro ay sumundòʾ naŋ páreʾ. Pedro fetched a priest. Hindí sya nagkapálad sa pagsundò naŋ médiko. He did not succeed in fetching a doctor. Pagsuntok nyà ay tumakbo kà. When he strikes you, run (suntòk a blow on the head). Sya y sumúsutsòt. He is whistling. 25Aŋ báta y tumahímik. The boy quieted down. Tumátahòl aŋ áso. The dog was barking. Sya y tumámà sa hwétiŋ. He won in the lottery. Tumátandá siyà. He is getting old. Sya y tumánod sa báhay sa boò ŋ magdamàg. He guarded the house all night. Tumanùŋ akò kay Hwàn. I asked Juan. Tumanùŋ akò naŋ 30kwàlta kay Hwàn. I asked Juan for money. tumaŋhàʾ wonder. Sya y tumátaŋòʾ. He is willing, He assents. Tumàtáwa siyà. He is laughing. Ikàw aŋ tumáwag kay Hwàn. Do you call Juan. Nárinig ko aŋ iyò ŋ pagtáwag sa ákin. I heard you calling me. Sya y tumayòʾ. He stood up. tumibàʾ cut bananas off the tree. 35tumilàd cut wood small along the grain, shave off, cut into small parts. Sya y tumimbá naŋ túbig. He drew water with a bucket. aŋ pagtiŋìn the act of looking at something, observation. Aŋ pagtipìd sa kwaltà ay ginágawa naŋ marámi. Many people practise economy in the matter of money. Aŋ pagtípon sa maŋa káhoy 40kuŋ tagulàn ay mahírap, sapagkàt mapútik. It is hard to collect logs in the rainy season, on account of the mud. Tumirà si Hwàn [230]na isa ŋ taòn sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. Juan lived one year in the town of Baliuag. tumukàʾ pick with the beak (tukàʾ the beak of a fowl). Sya y tumúlak sa isinùsúloŋ na kahò ŋ bákal. He pushed (i. e. took part in pushing) at the iron safe they were moving. Also: 5Sya y tumúlak. He “shoved off”, i. e. He went away. Si Hwàn ay tumúlog sa báhay ni Pédro. Juan went and slept in Pedro’s house. Aŋ kanya ŋ pagtúlog ay mabábaw. His sleep is light. Tumúŋo sya sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. He went toward Baliuag. Aŋ pagubrà naŋ maŋa barìl na ytò sa pamamarìl naŋ kalabàw-ramò 10ay hindí pinakamabúte. These guns are not the best for shooting wild carabao. Umubrà aŋ ininùm nya ŋ purgà. The purge he drank took effect. Umubrà sa kakanàn aŋ kanya ŋ ginawà ŋ lamésa. The table he made was suitable for the dining-room. Umubrà ŋ nagámit aŋ tornìlyo ŋ bákal sa lugàr naŋ tansò. It was possible 15to use the iron screw instead of the copper. Sya y umupòʾ. He sat down. Aŋ pagupòʾ sa háŋin ay isa ŋ mahírap na parúsa. “Sitting on the air” (standing in sitting position with the forefingers pointing up) is a hard punishment. Umùúruŋ aŋ trèn. The train is backing. Umútaŋ ka naŋ salapì kay Pédro. Borrow 20some money from Pedro. Umuwé si Hwàn. Juan went home, Yumáyà si Hwàn naŋ kanya ŋ maŋà kaybígan. Juan invited some of his friends. aŋ pagyáyaʾ the invitation.

Other roots occurring in these forms (and roots occurring above out of their alphabetical order): abála, ágos, ákay, akiyàt, 25alìs, ása, áyon, bábaw, bahàʾ, balìk, bílaŋ, bilì, búhat, bútas, daìŋ, dála, dalàs, dálaw, dalò, dámi, dápit, dápoʾ, daràs, datìŋ, dilìm, dúkit, dumì, doòn, galàw, gámit, gamòt, gápaŋ, gastà, gawàʾ, gúlaŋ, gupìt, gustò, hábaʾ, hábol, hágod, hakbàŋ, háŋoʾ, haràp, hátak, higàʾ, híla, hilìŋ, hiŋà, húkay, húli, húni, íbig, kagàt, káin, 30kalabòg, kápit, katàm, kibòʾ, kilála, kílos, kinìg, kíta, kúha, kulòŋ, kuwènta, lában, lagánap, lagpàk, lákad, lakàs, lakì, lamìg, lampàs, laŋòy, lápit, lígaw, lindòl, lipàd, litàw, liwánag, lubòg, lúhaʾ, luksò, luwàs, nákaw, ŋiyàw, panhìk, pasàn, pások, patày, páwis, píhit, pitàs, pukòl, púri, putòk, sagòt, sakàl, sákop, salákay, sáma, 35saŋgà, sápit, sarà, sayàw, sigàw, síkat, silìd, sípaʾ, sísid, subò, súgat, súlat, sumpòŋ, sunòd, suwày, súyoʾ, tabàʾ, tagàʾ, takbò, tálik, talòn, tanàw, taŋlàw, taráto, tawìd, tíbay, tiktìk, tikuwàs, túboʾ, tugtòg, tuktòk, túloŋ, tuŋtòŋ, tupàd, ulàn, ulìʾ, untìʾ, úpa, yáman.

(a) Kumusta kà? How d’you do? may be felt to belong here.7

40(b) An irregular inflection in which variation of the initial [231]consonant takes the place of the infix is known to Mr. Santiago from a few traditional phrases: Hwag kà ŋ matày (for: pumatày) naŋ kápwa táo. Thou shalt not kill.

(c) Forms with accent shift owe this feature to the root 5(§ 337): Umabòt ka naŋ isa ŋ mansánas. Help yourself to an apple. Aŋ sumunòd na silakbò naŋ lagablàb ay siya ŋ umabòt sa bubuŋàn. The next leap of the flame reached the roof. Aŋ pagabùt naŋ búŋa ŋ itò ay mahírap. This fruit is hard to reach. Nárinig ko syà sa kanya ŋ pagayàw sa sinábe ni Hwàn. I heard him 10disagree with what Juan had said. Nagálit akò sa kanya ŋ pagayàw sa lamésa. I was angered at his leaving the table. Si Pédro ay umayàw na. Pedro has left the table. Similarly from bábaʾ and sákit.

(d) From a phrase: Hindí marúnoŋ gumanti-ŋ-pálaʾ si 15Hwàn. Juan does not know how to make return for kindness (gantì ŋ pálaʾ).

(e) From derived words: tumagílid, pagtagílid (ta-gílid § 523); tumalíkod, pagtalíkod (ta-líkod § 523). See also §§ 404. 488.

20349. The doubled root with the same formation is used of actions aimlessly repeated at intervals. Nátinik syà sa kanya ŋ pagtakbò-takbò sa bakúran. In his constant running about the yard, he got a splinter into his foot. Tumàtáwa-táwa si Hwàn hábaŋ nagbíbigkàs naŋ talumpáte si Pédro. Juan kept laughing at 25intervals while Pedro was making his speech. Si Hwàn ay tumàtáwa-táwa naŋ sya y hampasìn ni Pédro. When Juan kept laughing every little while, Pedro finally struck him with the whip.

(a) From a root with accent shift (§ 337): Tumátawa-tawà si Hwàn twì ŋ ákin sya ŋ màmasdàn hábaŋ nagbíbigkas naŋ talumpáte 30si Pédro. Juan kept snickering every time I happened to look at him while Pedro was delivering his oration.

(2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag-r.

350. Many roots form their active with the prefix mag- for the contingent, nag- for the actual mode; the durative is reduplicated 35before the prefix is added. The corresponding abstract of action has unaccented reduplication and prefix pag-. Thus: nagpútol, nag-pù-pútol, mag-pútol, mag-pù-pútol, pag-pu-pútol. These actives express, generally, a more deliberate action than those with -um-; often also one involving more effect on external objects than 40do those with -um-. We take up first those roots from which forms with -um- do not occur in our material:

Akò y nagáantòk. I am sleepy. Aŋ lúsoŋ kay Hwàn sa [232]kanya ŋ pagaaráro ay nagsidatiŋ nà. The helpers for Juan in his plowing have arrived (aŋ aráro a plow). Si Pédro ay magàasáwa. Pedro is going to take a wife. Si Pédro ay magàasáwa kay Hwána. Pedro is going to marry Juana. Silà y nagàáway. They are fighting. 5magbáhay build a house. Akò y nagbastà naŋ áki ŋ damìt. I packed up my clothes. Sya y nagbáyad naŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa útaŋ. He paid off his debts. magbayò pound rice in a mortar. magbigàs hull rice (i. e. make bigàs, hulled rice, out of pálay, rice in the grain). Sya y nagbigày naŋ librò sa ákin. He gave me 10some books. Sya y nagbíhis kanína ŋ umága. She put on her good clothes this morning. Aŋ pagbibiyábo ay isa ŋ ugáli naŋ maŋa Intsèk. Swinging the feet when sitting is a habit of the Chinese. Nagbiyày si Hwàn naŋ isdàʾ sa kanya ŋ palàisdáan. Juan put some fish into his fishpond. magbuhòl tie a knot. Nagbwàl 15sila naŋ isa ŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy. They felled a tree. Aŋ ságiŋ ay nagdàdáhon. The banana-tree is putting out leaves. Aŋ paghahásaʾ naŋ paŋáhit ay mahírap. Sharpening razors is difficult. Sya y nagháhatìd naŋ maŋa laráwan sa simbáhan. He is delivering images to the church. Maghubad kà naŋ damìt. Take off your 20clothes. Sya y naghùhúgas naŋ piŋgàn. She is washing dishes. Naghuŋkòy sya. He fanned rice. magíhaw roast (something). Nagkamìt sya naŋ marámi ŋ túboʾ. He obtained much profit. Sya y nagkúkuble. He is in hiding. maglakòʾ peddle (something). Maglálarú na siyà. He is going to play after all. Naglarú na 25akò. I have played enough now. Naglálaro silà. They are playing. Naglawìt akò naŋ lúbid sa bintánaʾ. I hung a rope out of the window. maglúgaw prepare rice-broth. Naglùlúto siyà naŋ gúlay. She is cooking vegetables. Sya y magpápasyàl. He is going to take a walk. Nagpùpúnas sya naŋ sahìg. He is scrubbing 30floors. Nagpúyat akò kagabì. I staid up last night. magsáiŋ cook rice dry (with little water). Nagsampày sya naŋ damìt. She hung out some clothes. Sya y nagtábon naŋ isa ŋ húkay. He dammed up a ditch. Magtahàn ka naŋ paglalaròʾ. Stop playing. Naŋ nárinig nya iyòn ay malakì aŋ kanya ŋ nagìŋ pagtatakà. 35When he heard this, his surprise was great. Sya y nagtálì naŋ bábuy sa halíge. He tied a pig to the post. Magtúrù ka naŋ wíka ŋ Kapampáŋan sa iyo ŋ pàaralàn. Teach the Pampanga language in your school. Sya y nagtùtúroʾ. He is teaching. Támà aŋ kanya ŋ pagtutwìd. His reckoning is correct. Sya y nagusísaʾ. 40He made inquiry. Sya y nagusísa naŋ marámi ŋ bágay. He inquired into many things. Hindí ba akò nagútos sa iyò ŋ gumawá itò? Didn’t I order you to do this? Aŋ pagwawalá naŋ [233]maŋà bíhag ay pinarùrusáhan naŋ kamàtáyan. The escaping of captives is punished with death. Sya y nagwáwalìs. She is sweeping.

Other roots so used: akálaʾ, alaskuwátro, alsà, aluwáge, aniyòʾ, 5áriʾ, balítaʾ, bantày, báŋon, bátis, baòn, bigkàs, bendisiyòn, biniyàg, bintàŋ, bunòʾ, búŋa, daàn, dalamhátiʾ, dasàl, dáos, dáyaʾ, díwaŋ, dugòʾ, dúsa, rosáriyo, hágis, handàʾ, háriʾ, hátol, hinálaʾ, hintày, hintòʾ, hírap, hiwalày, íŋat, kasàl, kúlaŋ, kumpisàl, kurùs, kuwènto, lasìŋ, libàŋ, libìŋ, ligtàs, limòs, litsòn, liwalìw, lubày, lublòb, 10mahàl, máno, masìd, milágro, mísa, mulàʾ, niŋnìŋ, pasiyènsiya, paséyo, sábi, sábog, sáboŋ, sadiyàʾ, salitàʾ, sánay, silbè, simbà, sísi, siyásat, súboʾ, sugàl, sumbòŋ, sundálo, tabáko, tadtàd, tágoʾ, tálo, talumpátiʾ, tamò, taniyàg, taŋày, taŋgòl, tígil, tindìg, trabáho, túlin, túlos, umpisà, úsap, wíkaʾ.

15351. When a root is used both with -um- and mag-, the latter form usually differs by adding another object affected (dumalà bear, bear up: magdalà carry to someone, to a place; bumalìk go back; magbalìk return to a place, to someone); in some instances the added object is the actor himself (reflexive); in others the 20mag- form expresses a general activity, that with -um- a specific act (so, in part, pútol). Examples:

Sya y nagàáral. He is studying (umáral is known as an archaic word for teach morals, instruct; aŋ áral that taught, precept, moral doctrine). Magbaluktot kà naŋ yantòk. Curve some 25pieces of rattan (bumaluktòt, § 348, intransitive or of a single specific transitive action). Magbálot ka naŋ súman, naŋ sigarìlyo. Roll up some suman, some cigarettes (more general than -um-); Magbálot ka naŋ kúmot. Wrap yourself up in a blanket (cf. -um-, § 348). Si Hwàn ay nagbigtì. Juan hanged himself; aŋ pagbibigtì 30suicide by hanging. Nagbilè si Hwána naŋ marámi ŋ sombréro. Juana sold many hats. Nagbíbile si Hwána naŋ sombréro. Juana is selling hats (bumilì buy). Siya y nagdádala naŋ túbig sa kabáyo. He is bringing water to the horse. Aŋ bátaʾ ay nagdádala naŋ káhoy. The boy is bringing wood. Hwag kà ŋ magdamdàm 35sa hindí ko pagkatupàd naŋ áki ŋ paŋákoʾ, sapagkàt iyò y hindí ko sinadyàʾ. Don’t feel bad about my not having fulfilled my promise, for I did not do it intentionally (dumamdàm feel something). Si Hwàn ay naghampàs noò ŋ Byerne-sànto ŋ nagdaàn. Juan performed flagellation last Good Friday. Maghánap 40kayò naŋ inyo ŋ ikabùbúhay. Go and find a living for yourselves. Sya y nagháraŋ naŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy sa daàn. He blocked the road with a tree. Aŋ paghaháraŋ sa daàn ay báwal. It is forbidden [234]to make obstructions on the roads. Naghátì ako naŋ maŋa buŋa-ŋ-káhoy sa maŋa bátaʾ. I distributed fruits among the children; ... naŋ damò sa maŋa kabáyo ... grass to the horses. aŋ paghaháti naŋ maŋa búŋa-ŋ-káhoy sa maŋa bátaʾ the distribution of 5fruits to the children. Naghínà sya naŋ pagtuktòk sa pintòʾ. He made his knocking at the door gentle. Sya y nagìínit naŋ gátas. She is heating some milk. Magísip ka. Bethink yourself, Be reasonable. Si Hwàn ay nagísip na nakáwan si Pédro. Juan planned to rob Pedro. Aŋ kanya ŋ pagiísip ay matálas (mahínaʾ). His 10thinking-power is acute (weak). Silà y nagkàmáyan naŋ magkíta. They shook hands when they met. Maglabas kà naŋ maŋa sìlya. Bring out some chairs. aŋ paglalákad the drawing of something on foot; Naglákad aŋ maŋa estudyànte naŋ isà ŋ karósa. The students drew a float. Sya y naglíbot naŋ isa ŋ bandílaʾ. He 15walked about bearing a flag. Sya y naglìlínis naŋ mésa. He cleans tables. Aŋ pagnanákaw ay isa ŋ kasalána ŋ mabigàt. Thievery is a serious offense (numákaw of a single theft). Nagpìpílit sya ŋ magbukàs naŋ kaba ŋ bákal. He tries (often) to force open safes. Pagpupútol ni Hwàn naŋ búhoʾ ay pumaroòn ka t tulúŋan 20mo syà. When Juan cuts bamboo (as an occupation throughout a longer period of time), go along and help him. Magpùpútol kamì naŋ maŋa kawáya ŋ gàgamítin sa pagtatayò naŋ báhay. We shall cut bamboo for use in building houses. Magpùpútol akò naŋ kukò. I am going to cut my fingernails (reflexive). Nagpútol naŋ buhòk 25aŋ Intsèk na si Yàp. The Chinaman Yap cut his queue. Nagsakày sya sa kanya ŋ baŋkà naŋ dalawa ŋ estudyànte. He took two students into his canoe. Nagsikìp aŋ daàn. The road grew crowded (apparently equal to -um-, but cannot be used of a garment). Nagsísiksik si Hwàn naŋ bigàs sa sáko. Juan was stuffing 30rice into the sack. Sya y nagsuklày. She combed her hair. Aŋ pagtatahòl naŋ áso ŋ itò sa maŋa nagdàdàánan ay masamà ŋ ugáleʾ. This dog’s way of barking at passers-by is a bad habit. Aŋ Kastílaʾ ay nagtátanòŋ. The Spaniard was asking questions. Nagtanùŋ akò kay Hwàn kuŋ saàn aŋ daàn. I asked Juan where 35the road was (mag- with indirect questions or questions implied). Si Hwàn ay syà ŋ nagtáwag naŋ bágo ŋ léyi. It was Juan who announced (as town crier) the new law. Aŋ pagtatáwag ni Hwàn ay hindí márinig naŋ karamíhan dahilàn sa mahínà nya ŋ tinìg. Juan’s announcement was not audible to the majority, owing to 40his weak voice. Sya y nagtayó naŋ bágu ŋ báhay. He built a new house. Aŋ pagtatayó naŋ maŋa báhay díto ay lubhà ŋ mahalagà. The building of houses here is very expensive. Nagtikwàs si Pédro naŋ maŋa suléras naŋ báhay. Pedro put some of the joists [235]of the house out of level. Aŋ pagtitipìd naŋ kwàlta ay ginágawá naŋ maráme. Many people save money. Nagtipìd si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pananamìt. Juan was saving of his clothing. Aŋ pagtitípon naŋ maŋa àrmas ay báwal. Storing up arms is forbidden. 5Magtípun ka naŋ káhoy. Store up some wood. Sila y nagtípon naŋ káhoy sa likòd naŋ kanila ŋ báhay. They stored up wood in the rear of their house. Nagtípon siya naŋ manèʾ sa isa ŋ súlok naŋ bakúran. He kept a pile of peanuts in a corner of his yard. Sya y nagtúlak naŋ isinùsúloŋ na kahò ŋ bákal. He did the shoving 10of the iron chest that was being moved (-um- shoved at, took part in the shoving). Magúubra aŋ karitò ŋ itò sa mahírap na daàn. This wagon will be suitable for difficult roads. Nagupó sya naŋ maŋa báta sa baŋkòʾ. He seated some children on the bench.

15Similarly: balìk, bukàs, kantà, sáboy, sáma, sarà, sayàw, takbò, talòn, tánod, tirà, yáyaʾ.

352. Transients with mag- are much used with derived words; in so far as these belong to secondary groups, they will be treated below; see §§ 384. 405. 410. 427,a. 430,a.b.c. 453,a. 489. 20489,a. 513.

(a) From phrases: Nagmàmadali-ŋ-áraw. The day is dawning (madalì ŋ áraw proximate day, i. e. dawn, daybreak), nagmèmè-áriʾ is possessing, has mastery of (may áriʾ owner, master). naghàháti-ŋ-gabì. It is midnight (háti ŋ gabì midnight). pagtatatlo-ŋ-gabì 25the three nights’ celebration (tatlò ŋ gabì).

(b) From compound words: pagbibigày-loòb (bigày-loòb); Aŋ maghampas-lúpaʾ ay nakasìsíraʾ naŋ púri. Being a vagabond is dishonorable (hampàs-lúpaʾ); maghàhánap-búhay (hánap-búhay).

30(c) From derived words: Transients with mag- from the contingent of transients with -um- express insistent and prolonged action: Káhit na walá sya ŋ talíno ay nagpùpumílit sya ŋ màtúto. Although he has no gifts, he is trying very hard to get educated. Sya y nagpùpumílit na pumaroòn sa pìknik. He is 35trying hard to be able to go to the picnic (pumílit). Similarly, nagtùtumirà (tumirà).

From words with prefix ma- (§ 454) in the sense of making something or making (claiming) oneself to have a quality: Magmámadalì táyo naŋ paglákad, úpaŋ hwàg táyo ŋ máhuli sa trèn. 40We will hurry our pace, so as not to be late for the train (madalìʾ). Nagmámaligsì si Kulàs sa pagsunòd sa maŋa útos sa kanyà. Nicolás is quick about obeying the orders that are given [236]him (maligsì). Nagmalwàt sya naŋ pagparíto. He took a long time coming here. Hwag kà ŋ magmaluwàt naŋ pagparíto. Don’t take too long about coming here (maluwàt). Similarly, pagmamarúnoŋ (marúnoŋ).

5From various words: Sila y naghimagsìk. They came to an armed conflict (-himagsìk § 518). Si Hwána ay naghíhimatày. Juana is fainting (himatày). Si Hwána ay nagkàkakanìn. Juana makes sweetmeats (for sale) (kakanìn, § 367,e). Sya y nagkalatimbà naŋ marámi. He did the well-bucket exercise many times 10(kala-timbàʾ, § 519).

(d) Especially common are transients with mag- from special static words with suffix -an; they express mutual or concerted action by two or more actors.

From the forms in S -an (§ 377): Nagàlísan aŋ maŋà aluwáge 15no ŋ lúnes nan hápon. The carpenters all left last Monday afternoon (àlís-an). Naglàlàbásan silà. They were all going out. Silà y nagpìtásan naŋ maŋa biyábas. They all picked guavas together. Magsìsìgáwan múna táyo bágo tapúsin aŋ mítiŋ. We will all give a yell together before we close the meeting. Aŋ maŋa áso 20sa báya ŋ itò ay nagtàhúlan kagabì. The dogs in this town all barked last night. Similarly, from: baŋkàʾ, bastà, daàn, hukòm, iyàk, kamày, kantà, salitàʾ, takbò, tampò, taniyàg, tipàn, tugtòg, uwìʾ. The form in S -an is itself from a derived word in: Naghìmagsíkan aŋ maŋà sundálo ŋ Tagálog at Kastílaʾ. The Tagalog 25and Spanish soldiers fought each other (hìmagsíkan from -himagsìk, § 518).

From the forms in S (1) -an (§ 378): Nagààwítan silà naŋ akò y dumatìŋ. They were singing in chorus when I arrived. Magìbígan kayò. Love one another. Nagììbígan si Pédro at si 30Hwána. Pedro and Juana love each other. Aŋ ginawá nya ŋ pagmumùráhan naŋ kanyà ŋ maŋà kalákal ay dahilàn sa kanya ŋ paŋaŋailáŋan naŋ kwàlta. His putting down the prices of his goods was due to his need of money. Similarly: hákot, káin.

From forms in (2) -an (§ 379): Hwag kayò ŋ magmurahàn 35sa daàn. Don’t abuse each other on the street. Nagmùmurahàn silà. They were engaged in an abusive quarrel. Aŋ kàgalítan ni Pétra at ni Kulása ay natápus sa hàyága ŋ pagmumurahàn. The hostility between Petra and Nicolasa ended in an abusive quarrel in public. Nagpurihàn aŋ dalawa ŋ magkaybígan sa kanila ŋ pagtatalumpáteʾ. 40The two friends praised each other in their speeches. Nagpùpurihàn aŋ maŋa kaybíga ŋ itò sa pàhayágan. This group of friends praise each other in the newspapers. Si Hwána at si Maryà ay nagputulàn naŋ kukò. Juana and Maria cut their fingernails. [237]Silà y nagsàgasaàn. They all jostled one another. Aŋ pagsasàgasaàn naŋ maŋa táo ay lubhà ŋ magulò. The jostling of all the people was most confused. Nagsugatàn silà. They inflicted wounds on one another. magtaanàn flee. Aŋ kanila ŋ pagtutuluŋàn 5ay hindí nátulòy. Their plan to help each other was not carried out. Similarly: ágaw, balítaʾ, dáhil, hánap, haráŋ, lában.

From diminutives in D -an (§ 381): Magàaswaŋ-aswáŋan daw si Pédro sa karnabàl. Pedro says he will dress up as a bogey-man for the carnival. Hwag kà ŋ magaswàŋ-aswáŋan. Don’t 10play bogey-man. Nagmanòk-manúkan si Hwàn sa karnabàl. Juan masqueraded as a rooster at the carnival. Silà y nagùuŋgú-uŋgúan. They are playing at being monkeys. Nagusà-usáhan siyà. He pretended he was a deer. So also: dapàʾ. From (1) D -an: Sya y nagbabá-babayíhan. He went dressed as a woman. 15So also from tákot.

353. Transients with accent shift and mag- may owe the shift to the root; so from ábot (§ 337): Nagáabòt si Hwàn naŋ sigarìlyo sa kanya ŋ maŋa kaybígan. Juan is passing cigarettes to his friends. Aŋ pagaabòt naŋ sigarìlyo ay isa ŋ ugáli ŋ magálaŋ. 20Passing cigarettes is a polite custom (umabòt, § 348,c, does not involve a person to whom). So also múra.

In the great majority of instances, however, the accent shift is not peculiar to the root, but constitutes a special formation, which expresses a more plentiful and diverse action than the transient 25with -um- or simple mag-. Silà y nagbábabàg. They are fighting each other. Magbarú ka. Get dressed, Put on your clothes. Sya y nagbunòt naŋ damò. He plucked up a lot of grass. Maghanàp kayò naŋ maŋa bulaklàk sa páraŋ. Go and look for flowers in the woods. Pabayaàn nawá ninyò na sya y maghanàp. 30Please allow him to make an inspection. Naghatí ako naŋ maŋa itlòg na pinatigasàn ni Hwána. I halved a quantity of eggs which Juana had hard-boiled. aŋ paghahatè naŋ maŋa mansánas the halving of the apples. Magisip kà naŋ maŋa lugàr na maàári ŋ kinaiwánan mo naŋ iyò ŋ librò. Think of the various places where 35you may have left your book. Si Hwàn ay nagíisip naŋ maŋa iháhandá nya sa fiyèsta. Juan is thinking of what things he will serve at the fiesta. Hwag kà ŋ magputòl naŋ abakà, Hwàn. Don’t cut up any hemp, Juan. Magpúputol kamì naŋ búhoʾ, yantòk, at bayúgin, pagdatìŋ námin doòn. We shall cut slender bamboo, rattan, 40and thick bamboo when we get there. Nagputòl si Hwàn naŋ tubò sa pinások nya ŋ tubúhan. Juan cut down a lot of sugar-cane in the cane-field he got into. Nagpúputol naŋ kawáyan na hindí nya árì si Hwàn. Juan cuts down bamboo that does not [238]belong to him. Nagpuyàt akò sa maŋa gabì ŋ nagdaàn. I have repeatedly staid up late the last few nights. Hindí ko màputúlan naŋ tahìd aŋ kátyaw, sapagkàt itò y nagsísikàd. I couldn’t cut the rooster’s spur, because it kept struggling with its feet. Sya y 5nagsísinuŋalìŋ. He is telling lies. Pagsusulàt nya naŋ maŋa súlat ay pumaroòn ka t linísin mo aŋ kanyà ŋ aralàn. While he is writing all his letters, go and clean his study. Aŋ paŋinoò y nagtawàg naŋ maŋa alílaʾ. The master called various servants. Nagtátawag syà naŋ maŋa kitèʾ, naŋ ákin sya ŋ datnàn sa bakúran. 10She was calling to a lot of little chicks when I came upon her in the yard. Aŋ pagtatawag nyà sa maŋa kitèʾ at aŋ maŋa pùtákan naŋ maŋa manòk ay nakabíbiŋì. Her constant calling to the chicks and the clucking of all the hens made a deafening noise. Aŋ báta y nagtúturó naŋ kanyà ŋ gustò. The child points at the various 15things it wants. Hwag kà ŋ magutàŋ. Don’t go about asking for credit. Aŋ magutàŋ sa marámi ŋ tindáhan ay hindí maínam na ugáleʾ. Buying on credit in many shops is a bad habit. Similarly from: bálot, íŋay, lákad, láyag, líbot, tágoʾ.

(a) When transients with mag- are made from derived words, 20the accent of the underlying word is occasionally shifted, apparently without change of meaning: Sya y nagmayabàŋ. He boasted (mayábaŋ, § 454). Similarly: magkákalahatèʾ (kalahátiʾ § 519).

(b) In one such case there is not only accent shift, but also secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word: Sya 25y nagmápuri. He praised himself. Sya y nagmàmàpurì. He is praising himself. Aŋ pagmamápuri ay hindí magandà ŋ ugáliʾ. Praising oneself is not a becoming habit (ma-púri, § 454).

354. The corresponding form from oxytone roots is made with unaccented reduplication of the underlying word: mag-si-sigàw, 30mag-si-si-sigàw, nag-si-sigàw, nag-sí-si-sigàw; the abstract, however, lacks the extra reduplication, coinciding with that of §§ 350. 351: pag-si-sigàw.

Sya y naggugupìt naŋ maŋa papèl. He cut some pieces of paper into bits. Sya y naggúgugupìt naŋ maŋa papèl. He is cutting 35up some pieces of paper. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn, kuŋ walà ŋ mágawaʾ, ay sya ŋ nagháhahampàs sa maŋa púnu-ŋ-ságiŋ. It is little Juan who goes whipping at the banana-trees when he can’t find anything to do. Hwag kà ŋ magpupukòl naŋ batò, sapagkàt baká mo tamáan aŋ bintána ŋ salamìn. Don’t be always throwing 40stones; you might break a window. Nagpúpuputàk aŋ inahì ŋ manòk na nása kuluŋàn. The hen in the crate keeps up a constant cackling. Ilágan mo aŋ dumáratiŋ na kabáyo na nagtátatakbò. [239]Look out for the horse that’s coming there; it’s a run-away. Nagúuupú sya sa damò. He always sits on the grass. So also: dugòʾ, inòm, lundàg, sigàw, tagpòʾ.

(a) In one instance a barytone root has this reduplication 5with explicit plural meaning: magkikíta see one another, meet (of more than two people, cf. magkíta).

355. Accent shift and reduplication of the root appear in barytone roots in the same sense as accent-shift alone, with perhaps a somewhat greater intensity of the action: Nagpúpuputòl 10naŋ retáso aŋ bátaʾ. The child was cutting some rags into small bits. Aŋ kátyaw ay nagsísisikàd. The rooster kept struggling with its legs. Sya y nagtátatawàg naŋ maŋa kitèʾ. She kept calling to the chickens.

356. With doubling of the root, transients in mag- express 15either action repeated at intervals or reciprocal action of explicitly more than two actors: Nagisà-isà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ naŋ paglápit sa ákin. The children came to me one by one. So from: duklày, hiwalày, úlit.

(a) In one instance the root has accent shift: Naguna-unà 20aŋ maŋa bátaʾ naŋ paglápit sa ákin. The children vied with each other for the first place in coming to me.

(3) Active with maŋ- and abstract with paŋ- r.

357. The active with maŋ- has the forms: ma-mútol, ma-mù-mútol, na-mútol, na-mù-mútol, pa-mu-mútol (from pútol); it expresses 25action more deliberate, selective, or in larger quantity (professional, habitual) than mag-; like the latter, but more clearly, it is used for the making or using of such and such an object. Examples:

Sya y naŋabála sa ámin. He made trouble for us. Naŋano 30kà naŋ iyo ŋ maŋa kalaròʾ? What did you do to your playmates? Naŋáyap lámaŋ aŋ bátaʾ. The child ate only relishes. Sya y naŋbábambo naŋ áso. He is a caning a dog. aŋ pamamaŋkàʾ canoeing. Namilì akò sa báya-ŋ-Malólos. I shopped in Malolos. Sya y naŋdídilig naŋ karsáda. He sprinkles streets. aŋ 35paŋdidilìg street-sprinkling (as vocation). Aŋ kasalatàn nina Hwàn sa pananamìt ay naŋgálin sa pagsusugàl ni Hwàn. Juan’s family’s want of clothing is due to his gambling. Hwag kà ŋ maŋhampàs. Don’t go whipping people. Sya y naŋháraŋ naŋ maŋa táo. He made a practice of holding people up. Sya y hinúli naŋ 40pulìs dahilàn sa paŋhaháraŋ naŋ maŋa táo. He was arrested by the police for highway robbery. Naŋháte si Hwána naŋ kalákal. Juana shared orders for goods. Aŋ paŋhaháte ni Hwána naŋ kalákal na ipinagbíbili nyà ay sya nyà ŋ ikinalúge. Juana’s getting [240]her stock of goods for sale by sharing in orders of fellow-retailers is what made her lose money. Naŋhínà naŋ pagtakbò aŋ kabáyo sa kalaúnan naŋ pagkàgámit sa kanyà. The horse slackened its pace because it had been driven too long. Silà y naŋhínaʾ. They 5grew faint. Maŋhiràm ka naŋ palakòl. Go borrow a hatchet. maŋhúlaʾ practise fortune-telling. Naŋhùhúli kamì naŋ isdàʾ sa kagamitàn naŋ dála. We catch fish by means of nets. Aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa paŋiŋílag sa sakìt ay lubhà ŋ malakè. His precautions against sickness are elaborate. Sya y naŋàŋabáyo. He rides 10horseback. Naŋapá si Pédro naŋ isdàʾ. Pedro caught fish in his hands (by feeling for them in mud-holes). Sya y naŋàŋaséra. He eats in a boarding-house. maŋáwit cut twigs with the káwit (a small, hook-shaped pruning-knife); also: get tired of a position or occupation. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn ay naŋàŋáya naŋ maŋa kápwa 15nya bátaʾ. Little Juan lords it over the other children. Sya y naŋúŋublè. He is keeping himself in hiding. Hwag kà ŋ maŋuròt, Pédro. Don’t be pinching people, Pedro. Aŋ kanya ŋ pananagínip ay hindí nátuloy, sapagkàt nágisiŋ syà sa kalabòg naŋ púsaʾ. His dream was interrupted by his being awakened by the 20falling of the cat. Sya y nanànagínip. He is dreaming. Akù y nanagínip kagabè. I had a dream last night. Namáso sya naŋ dalíri naŋ kápwa nya bátaʾ. He scorched his playmate’s finger. Pamumútol nya naŋ kawáya y sundàn mo syà t baká magliwalìw lámaŋ sa kalakhàn naŋ panahòn. When he goes bamboo-cutting, 25follow him to see that he doesn’t loaf most of the time. Aŋ pamumútol naŋ kawáyan ay mahírap. Bamboo-cutting is hard work. Namútol si Hwàn naŋ kawáyan. Juan cut bamboo. Namùmútol kamì naŋ damò úpaŋ ipagbilè. We are cutting grass for sale. Mamùmútol kamì naŋ tubò sa bakúran ni Áli ŋ Pétra. We are 30going to cut sugar-cane in Aunt Petra’s yard. Aŋ báta ŋ may sakìt ay namùmúyat sa kanya ŋ inà. The sick child keeps its mother awake. Aŋ maláwig na pananalitàʾ ay hindí maínam. Roundabout speeches are not pleasant. Pédro, hwag kà ŋ manyásat naŋ gawá naŋ máy gawàʾ. Pedro, don’t be inquiring into 35other people’s business. aŋ panunúlat writing in quantity, clerkship. aŋ pananahèʾ the occupation of sewing, the being a seamstress. Silà y nanahímik. They quieted down. Aŋ bàta y nanahímik. The boy quieted down to take a rest. manáwag call, summon (people). aŋ panunúroʾ the act of pointing things out. Sya 40y naŋúna. He went first, He led. Sya y maŋùŋúna. He will be in the lead. Aŋ báta y naŋupò sa buntòt naŋ sáya naŋ babáye. The boy went and sat right down on the lady’s train. Aŋ paŋuupò [241]naŋ báta sa buntòt naŋ sáya ay ipinahintú sa kanyà naŋ kanya ŋ nánay. The boy’s trick of sitting down on people’s trains was put a stop to by his mother. Sya y naŋusísa naŋ maŋa babáye. She interrogated a number of women. Naŋútaŋ sya sa ákin naŋ 5limà ŋ píso. He made a loan of five dollars from me.

Similarly from: áhit, ákoʾ, anàk, báhay, balítaʾ, barìl, bároʾ, báyan, bílog, bíroʾ, búhay, bundòk, damìt, dúkit, gamòt, gupìt, hábol, hámon, hiŋìʾ, igìb, ílin, káin, kumpisàl, latàʾ, lóko, mahálaʾ, noòd, pagítan, píliʾ, púlot, salákay, saríwaʾ, siŋìl, súbok, sulsè, súnog, 10súyoʾ, tálo, taŋháliʾ, tiwálaʾ, umìt, yári.

(a) From derived words: aŋ paŋhihìmagsíkan in the same meaning as paghihìmagsíkan (from hìmagsíkan, § 377,a); so from kalahátiʾ (§ 519), kináin (§ 365). See also §§ 421,a. 422,a.

(b) From words with prefix hin- (§ 518) we may derive, 15theoretically, the transients with prefix maŋhin-, though the underlying word in most cases does not exist. For the phonetic irregularities see § 334,a,5.

Sila y naŋhimagsìk. They came to an armed conflict (bagsìk). Hwag kà ŋ maŋhigantì sa kanilà, Hwàn; aŋ kababáan naŋ 20loòb ay lálo ŋ magandà. Don’t take revenge against them, Juan; meekness of spirit is more becoming. Maŋhíhigantì kamì dahilàn sa maŋa kalupità ŋ ginawá nila sa ámin. We will take vengeance on them for the many cruelties they have committed against us. maŋhinukò cut the fingernails (kukò). Naŋhìhináyaŋ silà sa pagkamatày 25ni Del-Pilàr. They were mourning the death of Del Pilar. Malakì aŋ kanila ŋ paŋhihináyaŋ sa namatày na báta ŋ si Hwàn, dahilàn sa hindí karanyúwa ŋ talíno nya. Their grief at little Juan’s death was great, on account of his unusual talents. (sáyaŋ). maŋhiniŋà pick the teeth (aŋ tiŋà foreign substance between 30the teeth). maŋhinulè clean out the ears (tu-tulè earwax, § 343).

(c) In one instance the root is doubled; its accent shift is due to the meaning of the root: Nanawà-nawà si Pédro naŋ márinig nyà na sya y nàpíli ŋ magìŋ bóbo sa laròʾ. Pedro could not 35keep from snickering when he heard that the choice had fallen on him to be clown in the play.

(4) Special static words.

358. A few individual forms of the preceding group have static value; of transients, umága morning (§ 348) and aŋ mamásoʾ 40a blister (pásoʾ); of abstracts, aŋ pagkáin food (beside the act of eating), cf. also pagdáka, § 265,9. The following are the regular formations of special static words of this type: [242]

(a) Dual collectives with mag-: aŋ magáli aunt and niece or nephew. Aŋ magamà ŋ si Maryà at si Pédro ay naparoòn sa búkid. Pedro and his daughter Maria have gone to the country. Aŋ magasáwa ŋ Pédro at Hwána ay naparoòn sa teyátro. Pedro and 5his wife Juana have gone to the theatre. Aŋ magatè ŋ si Maryà at si Maryáno ay nagsipagpasyàl. Mariano and his oldest sister Maria went for a walk. Sila y magatè. She is his oldest sister. aŋ magbaláe ŋ si Hwàn at si Andrès Juan and Andrés, whose children have married each other. magbayàw two men, one of 10whom has married the other’s sister. magbilàs two men who have married two sisters (aŋ bilàs the husband of one’s wife’s sister). maghípag two women, one of whom has married the other’s brother (each of the two is the other’s hípag). magimpò grandmother and grandchild. maginà mother and child. magkúya the oldest brother 15and a younger brother or sister. magnánay mother and child. magtátay father and child.

Slightly divergent is magának: it includes the whole family, a given person plus his aŋkàn (§ 379): Nagsimbà aŋ boò ŋ magának. The whole family went to church. aŋ magának na sina 20Hwàn Krùs the Juan Cruz family. Irregular in meaning are also magdamàg and maghápon, of periods of time.

From a compound word: aŋ magkápit-báhay two neighbors.

From a phrase: Sila y magkápwa-táo. They act toward each other as fellow men should (kápuwà táo).

25From a derived word: magamaìn uncle and nephew or niece (ama-ìn, § 367,a); see also §§ 408. 412,a. 490.

(b) mag- r similarly forms explicit plurals: aŋ magaamà the group of a father with two or more of his children. aŋ magbabaláe a group of three or more people whose children have intermarried. 30aŋ magiinà mother and children. aŋ magkukúya a group of brothers and sisters including the oldest brother. magnanánay mother and children. magpipínsan a group of cousins. magtatátay father and children.

From a compound: magkakápit-báhay.

35From a derived word: magkakasiŋlakì (kasiŋlakì, § 520). See also §§ 412,a. 427,d.

(c) mag- r also forms static words denoting a professional agent: aŋ magaaráro a plowman, magbibistày woman who sieves the rice in a mill, magnanákaw thief.

40From oxytone roots also with retraction of accent: aŋ magbabáyo a rice-pounder, magbibígas a dealer in hulled rice.

(d) Barytone roots usually shift the accent: aŋ maghuhugàs a dish-washer, maglalakàd traveller, maglilinìs a cleaner, maglilipàʾ [243]plasterer, maglulutòʾ cook; Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ magpuputòl naŋ káhoy. Juan is a wood-cutter; aŋ magsusulàt a clerk scribe, magsusuyòd a harrower (súyod a harrow), maguutàŋ a habitual borrower. So also from: lákoʾ, táwag.

5(e) màŋ- r has the same value. The accent of the prefix can appear only in an open syllable (§ 338); aŋ màŋiŋisdàʾ a fisherman; mànanalakàb fish-trapper (salakàb an inverted basket used as a fish-trap). So: dúkit, hámon, húlaʾ, kúlam, lígaw, sákop, sípaʾ, taŋgòl, tugtòg.

10Oxytone roots often have retraction of accent: maŋgagámot maŋgagamòt; maŋgugúpit maŋgugupìt; Sya y màŋiŋínum naŋ álak. He is a drunkard; also: maŋiínom (with the prefix kept apart by glottal stop, § 34, and no effect on initial vowel); máŋaŋatàm màŋaŋátam; màŋlilímos; aŋ mànanáheʾ a seamstress 15(aŋ tahèʾ a seam); aŋ mànanánim a planter.

(f) Barytone roots usually have accent shift: aŋ maŋhuhugàs a dish-washer, maŋlalagarìʾ a wood-sawer, mámumulòt a gleaner (púlot); Aŋ maŋa mámumutòl naŋ káhoy ay nagsiáhon nà sa bundòk. The wood-cutters have already gone up into the 20mountains. aŋ mánunulàt a scribe, clerk, aŋ màŋuŋutàŋ a habitual borrower, a “sponger”. So also from: káyo, tálo.

(5) Direct passive.

359. The simple direct passive has suffix -in with accent shift of one syllable in the contingent, infix -in- (§ 334,b,1) in the 25actual: putúl-in, pù-putúl-in, p-in-útol, p-in-ù-pútol. It corresponds to actives with -um- and abstracts with pag- and, to a large extent, also to actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r. It expresses, transiently, an object viewed as fully affected, taken in by the actor, or created by a simple action.

30Irregularities of form are as listed in § 334,c.

Ináko ni Hwàn aŋ útaŋ ni Pédro. Pedro’s debt was taken over (pledged for) by Juan. Inàalaála ni Pédro aŋ kanya ŋ inà. Pedro was thinking of his mother. Hindí nya inàalaála iyòn. He does not mind that. Hindí nya àalalahánin iyòn. He won’t 35mind that (§ 334,c,3). Inàámin nya na ginawá nya iyòn. He admits that he did it. Àamínin nya aŋ kanya ŋ kasalánan. He will own up to his misdeeds. Ináaŋkin naŋ báta ŋ si Hwána aŋ maŋa laruwàn ni Maryà. Little Juana appropriates Maria’s toys. Aŋkinin mò aŋ laruwàn. Take the toy for yourself. 40Pag úulàn ay ararúhin mo aŋ punláan. When the rains come, plow the germinating-plot. Inàáso naŋ inà aŋ kanya ŋ bátaʾ. The mother is running and shouting after her child (áso [244]a dog). Ináyap námin aŋ atsára. We used the mixed pickles as a condiment. (aŋ áyap condiment). Aŋ aklàt niya ŋ kaybígan mo ŋ binaŋgìt ay áki ŋ nabása. I have read the book of that friend of yours whom you mentioned. Binátis nya aŋ ílog. He forded the river. Aŋ gúlok na yàn ay bàbawíin ko sa iyò, kapag ipinamútol mo naŋ kawáyan. I shall take back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo. Aŋ táboʾ 5ay binílog ni Hwàn. Juan turned the dipper (on a lathe). Aŋ úlo ni Hwàn ay binìbílog naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kalaròʾ. Juan’s playmates are fooling him (literally: turning his head). Binyàk ni Hwàn aŋ kawáyan. Juan has split the bamboo. Dináiŋ nya aŋ isdàʾ. He laid open the fish. Aŋ maŋa isdà ŋ itò ay dinála niyà sa ílog-Pásig. He caught these fish with the net in the Pasig 10river. Yòn ay áki ŋ dináramdàm. I am very sorry, That’s too bad. Diligìn mo aŋ maŋa haláman. Sprinkle the plants. Durúin mo aŋ áki ŋ mamásoʾ. Prick my blister for me. Ginágabi kamì. We were overtaken by night. Hanápin mo aŋ magnanákaw. Look for the thief. Hinápis nya akò. He made me sad. Hinátì 15ko aŋ maŋa búŋa-ŋ-káhoy sa maŋa bátàʾ. I distributed the fruits among the children. Iníhaw nya aŋ karnè. He roasted the meat. Inísip nya ŋ magnákaw sa isa ŋ tindáhan. He thought of stealing from a store. Isípin mo kuŋ saàn mo naíwan aŋ iyo ŋ sombréro. Think where you left your hat. Aŋ kabutì ŋ itò ay hindí kinàkáin. 20One does not eat this mushroom. Ipatipìd mo sa bátàʾ aŋ kinàkáin nya. Make the child be moderate in its eating. Kinapá ko sa kadilimàn aŋ áki ŋ hìgáan. I fell out my bed in the dark. Kúnin mo aŋ aklàt sa bátaʾ. Take the book from the child. Hwag mò akò ŋ kurutìn. Don’t pinch me. Nilákad námin aŋ lahàt 25naŋ daàn. We walked all the way. Laruin mò aŋ bátaʾ. Play with the child. Nilìlínis nya aŋ mésa. She is cleaning the table. Nilúsoŋ mo bà aŋ balòn? Did you go down into the well? Lusúŋin mo aŋ balòn. Go down into the well. Nilùlúto niya aŋ gúlay. She is cooking the vegetables (also: linùlútoʾ). Minámahàl 30naŋ maŋa magúlaŋ aŋ bátaʾ. The parents love the child. pinalànsa was ironed (palànsa). Pinána ko aŋ usà. I shot the stag with an arrow. Hindí nya pinápansìn iyòn. He doesn’t pay any attention to that. Pinatày ko aŋ manòk. I killed the chicken. Aŋ pinílì nya ŋ manòk ay matabàʾ. The chicken she picked out 35is a fat one. Pinílit nya ŋ gumawá naŋ páyoŋ aŋ alílaʾ. He forced the servant to make an umbrella. Pitasin mò aŋ maŋa búŋa naŋ maŋgà. You pick the mangoes. Pinútol ni Hwàn aŋ tanikalàʾ. The chain was cut by Juan. Pagka pinútol mo aŋ lúbid na iyàn ay lálagpak aŋ tulày. When you have cut that rope 40the bridge will fall. Pag pinútol mo aŋ buntòt naŋ tútaʾ ay malápit iya ŋ mamatày. If you cut off the puppy’s tail, it is likely to die. Pinùpútol ko aŋ káhoy. I was cutting the wood. Putúlin [245]mo aŋ lúbid. Cut the rope. Pùputúlin nya aŋ búhoʾ. He will cut the bamboo. Pinúyat nya akò. He kept me up late. Hwag mò ŋ sagasáin, Lúkas, aŋ kainítan naŋ áraw sa iyo ŋ paglabàs sa búkid. Don’t hit upon the hottest part of the day for going 5out to the field, Lucas. Sinísintà ni Pédro aŋ dalága. Pedro is in love with the young woman. Akò y sinípà naŋ kabáyo. I was kicked by a horse. Sinuklày nya aŋ buhòk naŋ kanya ŋ anàk. She combed her child’s hair; also: Sinuklày nya aŋ kanya ŋ anàk. Aŋ gámit nya ŋ librò ay sinúlat ni Daruwìn. The book he uses 10was written by Darwin. Kuŋ sinuntòk nya aŋ bátaʾ ay suntukìn mo siyà. If he hits the boy, do you hit him. Sinúsuntok nyà aŋ bátaʾ. He hits the boy on the head. Tagpuìn mo akò sa estasyòn naŋ trèn. Meet me at the railroad station. Tanawin mò aŋ súnog! Look at the fire! Aŋ tábon sa ílog ay tinaŋày naŋ ágos. 15The dam in the river was carried away by the current. Hwag mò ŋ taŋgapìn aŋ úpa. Don’t accept the pay. Tawágin mo si Hwàn. Call Juan. Tinipìd ni Hwàn aŋ ibinigày ko ŋ ságiŋ. Juan was saving with the bananas I gave him. Aŋ dúsa ŋ kanya ŋ tinítiìs ay hindí lubhà ŋ mabigàt. The suffering he is undergoing 20is not very severe. Tinísod ko aŋ bakyàʾ. I kicked away the sandal. Inúna si Hwàn naŋ hukòm. Juan was dealt with first by the judge. Inusísa akò ni Hwàn. Juan questioned me. Aŋ inusísa sa ákin ni Hwàn ay kuŋ saan nàndon aŋ kanya ŋ sombréro. What Juan asked me was where his hat was. Inútaŋ ko iyò ŋ 25salapì ŋ ibinigày ko sa kanyà kahápon. I borrowed that money I gave him yesterday. Niwáwalis nyà aŋ alikabòk sa mésa. She is sweeping the dust from the table (also: wináwalìs). Aŋ niyáyà ko ŋ magpasyàl ay si Hwàn. The one I invited to come for a walk was Juan.

30Similarly from: ágaw, akálaʾ, ákay, akiyàt, alílaʾ, alintána, alipustàʾ, alìs, ámoʾ, anínaw, ásal, bálak, bambò, bása, batò, báwiʾ, bigkàs, bigtì, bílaŋ, bilì, bitbìt, búhat, bútas, buwísit, dalà, daràs, dikdìk, dúkit, dúkot, gámit, gamòt, gantì, gawàʾ, gúgol, gupìt, gustò, gútom, hábol, hágod, hampàs, hámon, hantày, háŋoʾ, háraŋ, 35haràp, hátak, híla, hilìŋ, hinálaʾ, hintày, hiràm, hitìt, híwaʾ, húkay, húli, íbig, inò, inòm, kagàt, kalaykày, kámot, kantà, kúlam, kumbidà, kumpisàl, lála, lóko, lúnod, loòb, matà, múra, nákaw, páloʾ, pasàn, pások, pígil, pího, piráso, pirìnsa, pukòl, sábi, sadiyàʾ, sagòt, salúboŋ, sampàl, saŋgà, sapantáhaʾ, sílip, siŋìl, siyásat, sumpòŋ, 40sundòʾ, sunòd, súnog, suŋáŋa, tagàʾ, tákot, talagà, tálo, tampálas, tápos, túkop, tuntòn, úbos, ugáliʾ, úlit, wíkaʾ.

(a) From derived words: Inùumága silà sa kanila ŋ pagsasàlitáan. They were being overtaken by their morning in their conversation [246](um-ága, § 358). Si Hwána ay hinimatày. Juana was attacked by a fainting-fit (himatày, § 518).

(b) From root with shifted accent: Ináabùt naŋ bátaʾ aŋ góra. The boy was reaching for his cap.

5(c) Accent shift lacking: Mínsanin mo, Hwàn, aŋ paginòm naŋ gamòt. Take the medicine all at one swallow, Juan.

(d) From doubled root, with meaning of repeated action: see isà; barytone root with accent shift: ámoʾ.

360. A few roots which have actives with mag- form the 10direct passive from the root with pag- prefixed. On the analogy of other forms (cf. § 369) one should expect this to be the case with roots whose active with mag- stood in contrast with -um- (§ 351); this is clearly the case, however, only in pag-isíp-in, pag-ì-isíp-in p-in-ag-ísip, p-in-ag-ì-ísip: Pinagísip nya ŋ magnákaw sa 15isa ŋ tindáhan. He laid plans for robbing a store (cf. in-ísip, § 359). The other roots which have pag- in the direct passive are: barìl, doòp, kúroʾ, tapìk.

361. To the active with mag- (1) (§ 353) corresponds a direct passive with pag- and accent shift: pag-putul-ìn, p-in-ag-putòl, 20etc. (pútol): Pinaghatí ko aŋ maŋa itlòg na pinatigasàn ni Hwána. I halved each of the eggs Juana had hard-boiled. Pinagisìp nya aŋ kahulugàn naŋ maŋa sènyas na nàkíta nya ŋ ibiníbigay naŋ isa ŋ sundálo sa isa nyà ŋ kasamahà ŋ nàhúle naŋ kaáway. He figured out the meaning of the signals he saw a soldier 25make to a comrade who was captured by the enemy. Pinagpúputul naŋ bátaʾ aŋ sinúlid. The child is cutting the thread to bits. Pagputulin mò, Hwàn, aŋ maŋa siìt. Cut out the bamboo-spines, Juan. Pinagusisá naŋ hukòm aŋ maŋa magnanákaw. The judge cross-examined the robbers. Similarly from kúha, nákaw, 30sábi, sípaʾ, súnog.

362. Likewise, corresponding to the active with mag- r (§ 354), is a direct passive with pag- r; see gawàʾ, kagàt.

Passive with pag- (1) r (cf. § 355) from sípaʾ.

363. Passive with pag- (1) D (cf. § 356): Pinagsabì-sabi 35nyà sa ibà t ibà ŋ táo na si Pédro ay nàhúli sa pagnanákaw. He told various people on various occasions, that Pedro was arrested for thievery.

364. The direct passive is made from the root with prefix paŋ- to correspond to actives with maŋ- (§ 357): pa-mitas-ìn, pa-mì-mitas-ìn, 40p-ina-mitàs, p-in-a-mí-mitàs (pitàs). Examples: Inamútan ko si Hwàn naŋ pinamilì ko ŋ maŋa librò. I let Juan purchase from me some of the books I had bought up. Pinamímitas [247]nilà aŋ maŋa kamatsilè. They picked the fruits of the tannic acid tree. Pamìmitasìn námin aŋ maŋa búlak. We shall pick the capoc cotton. Pinamùlot námin aŋ maŋa laglàg na búŋa. We picked up the fallen betel-fruits. Pinaŋútaŋ ko iyà ŋ salapìʾ sa 5kanyà. I had to borrow that money you have there from him. Also from noòd.

(6) Special static words.

365. The infix -in- produces static words denoting things which are produced by such and such a process or treated so and 10so: aŋ pinítak each of the small sections into which a rice-field is divided by the irrigation trenches (pítak divide; as root-word, division). So from bátaʾ, hiŋà, káin, lúgaw, púnoʾ, sáiŋ, súlid.

(a) With accent shift: inakày.

(b) A number of roots (here treated as simple) have the form 15of words with infix -in- (cf. § 333): hinálaʾ, kinábaŋ, linamnàm, sinuŋáliŋ, tinápay, tinóla.

366. -in- R: aŋ ináamà godfather, iníinà godmother; cf. § 412,a.

367. Suffix -in with secondary accent on the first syllable of 20the underlying word forms static words denoting something which undergoes such and such an action: Aŋ kalasìŋ naŋ kwàlta sa ibà y pára ŋ isa ŋ tugtúgin. The clinking of money is for others (than the spender) like music. So from bandà, damdàm, tiìs (only here does the S show itself), tuŋkòl.

25(a) Static words with (1) -in, with irregularities (§ 334,b), person or animal like something: amaìn uncle; so from inà. Also of things consumed: inumìn drinking water, kánin (káin) boiled rice ready to eat.

(b) The same with paŋ- in pa-naú-hin guest, if from táo.

30(c) (2) -in, collective, of places: bukirìn estate, fields, terrain; lupaìn country, part of the world. Of animate creatures, tendency: gulatìn scary, shy.

From derived word, in the latter sense, with S on the first of three syllables: pàniwalaìn credulous (paniwálaʾ, § 347).

35(d) -in with reduplication, from numerals, in the sense of with so many: lilimáhin; from da-lawà (§ 345), da-dalawá-hin.

(e) r (2) -in, with irregularity: ka-kan-ìn sweetmeat (káin).

(f) The following roots end in -in (§ 333): bayúgin, buháŋin, daláŋin prayer, kaiŋìn, muláwin, salamìn.

40(7) Instrumental passive.

368. The instrumental passive corresponding to the active with -um- and, to a large extent, to that with mag-, is formed with [248]the prefix i- (§ 334,a,3); the actual taking also the infix -in- (§ 334,b,2): i-pútol, i-pù-pútol, i-p-in-útol, i-p-in-ù-pútol. It denotes, transiently, an object given forth, parted from, or used as instrument or the person for whom in such and such an action 5or process.

Iniyalìs nilà aŋ háraŋ naŋ daàn. They removed the obstruction on the road. Iyánib (or: isánib) mo aŋ iyu ŋ banìg sa kay Pédro. Make your sleeping-mat overlap Pedro’s, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Ibinàbágay naŋ maŋkakayò aŋ damìt sa namímilè sa 10kanyà. The cloth-merchant is suiting the cloth to her customer. Ibinàbágay ni Hwàn sa kanyà ŋ kalàgáyan aŋ kanya ŋ paggastà. Juan adapts his expenses to his situation. Ibinilaŋgò naŋ hukòm si Hwàn. The judge has put Juan into prison. Ibiníŋit nya sa lamésa aŋ orasàn. He put the clock on the edge of the table. 15Idaan mò sa báhay ni Pédro aŋ bábuy na itò. Leave this pig at Pedro’s house as you pass. Aŋ bantáyan sa púno naŋ tulày ay inihágis naŋ maŋa lasìŋ na táo sa ílog. The sentry-box at the head of the bridge was thrown into the river by the drunken men. Ihásà mo aŋ paŋáhit na ytò. Sharpen this razor. Ihinúkay nila 20naŋ malálim aŋ patày. They dug a deep grave for the dead. Íwan mo díto aŋ bátaʾ. Leave the child here (so: ì-íwan will be left, in-íwan was left, in-ì-íwan is being left). Inilálaàn ko kay Pédro aŋ ságiŋ na itò. I am putting aside this banana for Pedro (also: itinátaàn). Inilùlúto nya aŋ gúlay. She is cooking the vegetables 25(also: ilinùlútoʾ). Ipinagítan sya sa dalawà ŋ dalága. He was placed between two young women. Ipináyag ko sa hinilìŋ nilà aŋ áki ŋ sasakyàn. At their request I let them have my vehicle. Ipinútol nya akò naŋ sinúlid. She cut off some thread for me. Ipútol mo akò naŋ maìs. Cut some corn for me. Ipùpútol nya 30ikàw naŋ tubò. He will cut some sugar-cane for you. Aŋ kampìt na iyàn ay mapúpurol kapag ipinútol mo naŋ káhoy. That kitchen-knife will grow dull, if you cut wood with it. Kawáyan aŋ isinásahìg ni Pédro sa kanya ŋ báhay. Pedro is using bamboo for flooring his house. Pag pinùpútol ko nà aŋ liìg naŋ manòk, ay isáhod 35mo aŋ maŋkòk na lalagyàn naŋ dugòʾ. When I am cutting the chicken’s neck, hold under the basin to catch the blood. Isinále nya si Hwàn. He included Juan. Isáli mo si Hwàn. Take Juan along. Isinampày nya sa kanya ŋ balíkat aŋ kúmot. He slung the blanket across his shoulder. Isigaŋ mò aŋ sináiŋ. Put the rice 40on the fire. Isilid mò sa bóte aŋ álak. Put the wine into the bottle. Pagulàn ay isoot mò aŋ kapóte. When it rains put on the rain-coat. Itináwag naŋ magpapatawàg aŋ bágo ŋ kautusàn. The crier cried out the new law. Itinayú nya aŋ báhay. He erected the [249]house. Itinira nyà sa ákin aŋ tinápay. He left the bread for me. Itúru mu sa kanyà aŋ simbáhan. Show him the church. Itúru mo sa ákin aŋ laròʾ. Teach me the game. Iwalá mo iyà ŋ iyo ŋ sambalílo ŋ lúmaʾ. Get rid of that old hat of yours.

5Similarly, from: álay, átas, bagsàk, balítaʾ, bigày, budbòd, búhos, bulìd, búrol, buwàl, dáos, dikìt, distíno, dugtòŋ, gápos, hánap, handàʾ, hatìd, hintòʾ, hitsà, húlog, kasàl, kawàg, labàs, ladlàd, lagày, laglàg, lákad, lakàs, lalàʾ, lapàg, lawìt, libìŋ, ligtàs, líhim, lúlan, luwàʾ, páyo, sabàd, sáboy, sagòt, sakdàl, sánib, sarà, sigàw, sèrmon, 10súloŋ, sunòd, taàn, taàs, tágoʾ, táliʾ, tanìm, táŋiʾ, tápon, tuktòk, túloy, túŋo, úbos, útos, wisìk.

(a) From root with shifted accent: Iniyáabùt nya sa ákin aŋ librò. He was handing me the book. Iyabùt mo sa ákin aŋ librò. Hand me the book.

15369. The instrumental passive is made from the root with prefix pag- when it corresponds to an active with mag- which stands in contrast with an active with -um- from the same root (§ 351); it is used also to express the instrumental relation more explicitly than the simple form, especially the person for whom. 20Forms: i-pag-pú-tol, i-pag-pù-pútol, i-p-in-ag-pútol, i-p-in-ag-pù-pútol.

Ito ŋ báhay aŋ ipinagbili kò. This house is the one I have sold (cf. bumilì buy, magbilì sell). Aŋ áraw naŋ kapaŋànákan ni Risàl ay ipinagdìdíwaŋ sa boò ŋ Filipínas. Rizal’s birthday is 25celebrated all over the Philippines. Síno aŋ ipinaglùlúto mo? Whom are you cooking for? (inilùlútoʾ in preceding section). Ipagpútol mo ŋàʾ akò naŋ yantòk. Please cut some bamboo for me. Ipagpùpútol kità naŋ tubò. I will cut you some sugar-cane. Ipinagpútol mo ba akò naŋ pamilmìt? Did you cut me a pole 30for fishing? Ipinagpùpútol niya akò naŋ siìt na gàgawì ŋ pípa. He is cutting me some bamboo reeds for cigarette-holders. Aŋ guntìŋ na iyàn ay mapúpurul agàd, kapag ipinagpútol mo naŋ damìt. Those scissors will get dull very soon, if you keep using them to cut cloth with. Iyo ŋ kúnin aŋ guntìŋ, kapag ipinagpùpútol 35nya naŋ káyo. Take the scissors, if he uses them for cutting cloth. Aŋ paupó ni Hwà ŋ sùgálan ay ipinagsábi sa pulìs naŋ kanya ŋ kápit-báhay. The gambling party Juan invited was exposed to the police by his neighbor (sinábi was said). Ipinagsakay kò si Hwàn sa áki ŋ karumáta. I took Juan into my carriage. 40Aŋ bágo ŋ léyi ay ipinagtáwag ni Hwàn. The new law was called out by Juan. Hindí ko bà ipinagútos sa iyò ŋ gawìn mo itò? Didn’t I order you to do this? [250]

Also from: kayilàʾ, labà, látag, sakdàl, sumbòŋ, takà, tanòŋ, tapàt.

(a) From derived words: ipinaghimatày (himatày, § 518); Ipinagúbus-làkásan niya aŋ pagtakbò. He exhausted all his 5strength in his running (úbus-làkásan, § 377,b).

370. i-pag (1), corresponding to mag- (1), § 353: from tápon; also from derived word ma-yábaŋ (§ 454, cf. § 353,a).

371. i-pag r, corresponding to mag- r (§ 354), from tanòŋ.

372. The instrumental passive from the root with prefix 10paŋ- corresponds to the active with maŋ-: Ipinaŋháraŋ nila Pédro aŋ maŋa barìl na inágaw nilà sa maŋa pulìs naŋ báyan. In holding people up Pedro’s gang used the guns they had snatched from the police of the district. Ipinamútol ko naŋ yantòk aŋ gúlok. I used the bolo for rattan-cutting. Ipinamùmútol nya akò 15naŋ kawáyan. He is cutting bamboo for me. Ipinamùmútol nya naŋ kawáyan aŋ bágo ŋ gúlok. He is using the new bolo for bamboo-cutting. Ipamútol mo naŋ tubò aŋ kampìt na itò. Use this kitchen-knife for cane-cutting. So also: ákoʾ, balítaʾ.

(8) Special static words.

20373. Special static words with prefix i- express the part of something in such and such a direction, or the direction: ibábaw, ibáyo, ilálim, itaàs, ituktòk; with shifted root: ibabàʾ.

(9) Local passive.

374. The simple local passive, corresponding to the active 25with -um- and largely to that with mag-, has the suffix (1) -an with the irregularities described in § 334. The forms of the actual mode have also the infix -in-: putúl-an, pù-putúl-an, p-in-utúl-an, p-in-ù-putúl-an. The local passive denotes the thing affected as place in which or the person to whom.

30Inabútan akò naŋ ulàn. I was caught by the rain. Agáhan mo aŋ iyo ŋ pagparíto. Make early your coming here, i. e. Come here early. Pagkagupìt naŋ áki ŋ buhòk ay inahítan nya akò. When he had cut my hair he shaved me. Alisan mò naŋ maŋa tinìk aŋ áki ŋ salawàl. Take the thorns out of my trousers. Inanyáhan 35silà ni Hwàn na magpasyàl. They were invited by Juan to go for a walk. Arálan mo aŋ maŋa Kapampáŋan. Teach morals to the Pampangas. Asnan mò aŋ dáiŋ na isdàʾ. Salt the fish you lay open. Aptan mò naŋ páwid aŋ báhay. Roof the house with nipa-palm. Awítan mo aŋ maŋa panaúhin. Sing for the 40guests. Bakúran mo aŋ sagíŋan sa tabì naŋ ílog. Fence in the banana-grove by the river. Bakúran mo aŋ báhay. Put a fence round the house. Binalitáan ko si Hwàn naŋ maŋa naŋyári sa [251]ákin sa labanàn. I related to Juan my adventures in the war. Bantayan mò aŋ pálay. Guard the standing rice. Basáhan mo akò naŋ maŋa kwènto. Read me some stories. Bigasan mò aŋ tinóla ŋ manòk. Make the chicken-stew with rice. Si Pédro aŋ 5binilhàn ko naŋ kabáyo ŋ itò. It was Pedro I bought this horse from. Sa katapusàn ay kanya ŋ nàpagkilála aŋ malaki ŋ paŋánib na kanya ŋ biniŋítan. In the end he recognized the great danger into which he had betaken himself. Binuksàn ni Hwàn aŋ pintòʾ. Juan opened the door. Dinaanàn naŋ trèn aŋ báboy. The pig 10was run over by the train. Dinaanàn ko si Hwàn. I called for Juan on the way (and took him with me). Dalhàn mo naŋ túbig aŋ kabáyo. Bring water to the horse. Dalian mò aŋ pagdadala ríto naŋ librò. Bring the book here soon. Aŋ pabása sa bisíta naŋ San-Antònyo ay dinaluhàn naŋ marámi ŋ táo. The reading 15at the chapel of San Antonio was attended by many people. Dinamíhan nya aŋ kinúha nya ŋ ságiŋ. He took many bananas. Dinamuhàn nyà aŋ damúha ŋ malápit sa simbáhan. He cut grass on the pasture near the church. Dinapúan naŋ maŋa íbon aŋ saŋà naŋ káhoy. Birds alighted on the branch of the tree. Dinatnàn 20kamì naŋ ulàn. We were overtaken by the rain. Diniláan nya akò. She stuck out her tongue at me (aŋ dílaʾ the tongue); also: Diláan mo aŋ mansánas. Lick the apple. Hwag mò ŋ durúan naŋ karáyom aŋ áki ŋ panyò. Don’t leave needles sticking in my handkerchief. Hagkan mò si Nánay. Kiss Mother. Hinalúan 25naŋ álak aŋ gátas. Some wine was mixed into the milk. Hinampasàn ni Pédro aŋ mukhá ni Hwàn. Pedro hit Juan in the face with a whip. Aŋ daàn ay hinaráŋan. The road was obstructed. Hasáan mo aŋ gúlok na itò. Sharpen this bolo. Hintuan mò aŋ iyo ŋ pagsusugàl, Pédro, kuŋ íbig mu ŋ yumáman ka. Put a stop 30to your gambling, Pedro, if you want to get rich. Hinùhugásan niyà aŋ maŋa piŋgàn parà sa maŋa babáye. He is washing dishes for the women. Hulíhan mo naŋ isdàʾ aŋ palàisdáan. Catch fish in the fish-pond. Aŋ maŋa sampày na damìt ay hinípan naŋ haŋin, kanyàʾ nahúlog sa lúpaʾ. The clothes on the line were 35blown by the wind and fell to the ground. Hinípan ko aŋ píto. I blew the whistle. Hinípan ko aŋ apòy úpaŋ palakihìn. I blew on the fire to make it larger. Inilágan nya aŋ simbáhan. He kept away from the church. ... aŋ kabáyo. He got out of the way of the horse. Inlagan mò aŋ dumáratiŋ na tumátakbo ŋ kabáyo. 40Get out of the way of the horse that is coming on the run. Itiman mò aŋ lubòg naŋ damìt. Make the dye of the garment black. Inìiyakàn ni Hwána aŋ kanya ŋ namatày na kaybígan. Juana is weeping over her dead friend. Hwag mò ŋ kurutàn, Pédro, aŋ [252]isdà ŋ nása dúlaŋ. Don’t you take a pinch from the fish on the table, Pedro. Hwag mù ŋ labánan, Pédro, aŋ kapatid mù ŋ matandàʾ. Don’t oppose your older brother, Pedro. Aŋ landàs na gawì ŋ kaliwàʾ ay aŋ iyo ŋ lakáran. You must take the path which 5goes to the left. Lakasan mò aŋ túlak sa baŋkàʾ. Push hard on the boat. Lakhan mò, Hwàn, aŋ pirasúhin mo ŋ matamìs. Break off a big piece of the sugar, Juan. Nilalíman nilà aŋ húkay naŋ patày. The grave for the corpse was made deep by them. Aŋ bantày naŋ maŋa kanyòn ay nilayásan aŋ kanya ŋ lugàr. The 10guard of the cannon deserted his post. Ligsihan mò aŋ pagílag sa lugàr na iyàn. Get out of that place quickly. Hwag mò ŋ luksuhàn aŋ tinìk na iyàn. Don’t jump on that spine. Lulánan mo naŋ maŋgà aŋ karitòn. Load up the wagon with mangos. Luluran mò si Pédro pagbababàg ninyò. Kick Pedro in the shin when you 15fight him. Nilusúŋan mo bà si Pédro? Did you help Pedro? Lutúan mo naŋ bigàs aŋ manòk. Cook some rice in with the (already cooked) chicken. Masdan mò aŋ bwàn. Look at the moon. Minàmasdan kò aŋ maŋa nagdádaa ŋ táo. I am looking at the people who pass by. Minuráhan nya akò sa pagbibilì naŋ talòŋ. He made 20me a low price on the egg-plant. Muráhan mo aŋ pagbibilì naŋ labanòs. Sell your large radishes cheap. Aŋ taŋgápan naŋ maŋa saŋlàʾ sa báhay-saŋláan ni Pédro ay ninakáwan kagabè. The receiving-place of pledges in Pedro’s pawn-shop was robbed last night. Nakáwan mo syà naŋ kanyà ŋ salapèʾ. Rob him of his 25money. Sa pagbubunòʾ ni Hwàn at ni Pédro si Pédro ay pinaahàn ni Hwàn. Juan caught Pedro by the leg (or: hurt Pedro in the leg) as they wrestled together; but: Pinaanan nyà aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd na natùtúlog. He lay down with his feet toward his sleeping brother. Hwag mò ŋ paanàn sa iyò ŋ paghigàʾ aŋ kapatìd mo 30ŋ natùtúlog. When you go to bed don’t lie with your feet toward your sleeping brother. Pinanáwan sya naŋ pagiísip. He lost his mind. Patayàn mo naŋ pitsòn aŋ nilúgaw. Kill a pigeon for the stew. Patisan mò aŋ isdàʾ ŋ itò. Put shrimp-sauce on this fish. Pinayágan nya aŋ paraà ŋ itò. He agreed to this plan. Pilikàn mu aŋ 35isdàʾ. Cut the fins off the fish. Pintahan mò aŋ padèr na ytò. Paint this wall. Hwag mò ŋ pintasàn aŋ damìt na yàn. Don’t find fault with that garment. Pitasan mò naŋ búŋa aŋ maŋgà. Pick some fruits from the mango tree. Aŋ pinulútan nilà naŋ manèʾ ay aŋ bakúran ni Hwána. The place where they gathered 40peanuts was Juana’s yard. Pinùpunásan nya aŋ sahìg. She is scrubbing the floor. Punan mò, Pédro, naŋ isà ŋ salapèʾ aŋ kwàlta ŋ ibinigày mo sa ákin. Add half a dollar to the money you gave [253]me, Pedro. Putíkan mo aŋ kanya ŋ salawàl. Put mud on his trousers. Pinutúlan ko naŋ usbòŋ aŋ maŋa kamóte. I cut shoots from the sweet-potatoes. Pinùputlan nyà naŋ maŋa saŋà aŋ káhoy na nabwàl. He is cutting the branches off the tree that was 5blown down. Putúlan mo naŋ téŋa aŋ áso. Cut the dog’s ears. Putlan mò naŋ súŋay aŋ kalabàw. Cut the horns of the carabao. Pùputúlan ko naŋ súŋay aŋ usà. I shall cut off the stag’s horns. Pùputlàn dàw nya naŋ buntòt aŋ áso. He says he will cut off the dog’s tail. Sinakyàn námin aŋ baŋká ni Hwàn. We rode in 10Juan’s canoe. Sakyan mò aŋ baŋka ŋ itò. Get into this canoe. Hwag mù ŋ saláhan aŋ iyo ŋ maŋà pagpások sa eskwèlhan. Don’t skip going to school, Don’t play hookey; but: Sinaŋlan nyà aŋ siŋsìŋ. He missed the ring (in the juego de anillo). Hwag mù ŋ saŋlàn aŋ usà. Don’t fail to hit the stag. Samáhan mo si Pédro. 15Go with Pedro. Sayawan mò kamì, Hwána. Dance for us, Juana. Sinigawàn naŋ páreʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ munisilyò. The priest yelled at his sacristan. Sinikáran naŋ kabáyo aŋ karumáta. The horse kicked at the carriage. Siglan mò naŋ álak aŋ bóte. Fill the bottle with wine. Untì-untí mo ŋ subúan aŋ pitsòn. Feed the squabs 20little by little. Sinugátan sya ni Pédro. He was wounded by Pedro. Sinukláyan nya aŋ kanya ŋ anàk. She combed her child’s hair. Sulátan mo si Pédro. Write to Pedro. Tinabúnan na ni Pédro aŋ húkay. Pedro has already filled up the hole. Tagalan mò aŋ pagkábitbit naŋ tablà. Keep holding the board that way. 25Tagalan mò aŋ pagtitira díto sa ámin. Stay here with us a long time. Tagpian mò aŋ báro ŋ itò. Mend this shirt. Tagpuan mò naŋ iba ŋ káyo aŋ kaluwáŋan naŋ sáya. Fill out (literally: cause to meet) the width of the skirt with other cloth. Tamnan mò naŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-nyòg aŋ bakúran. Plant the yard with cocoanut 30trees. Tinanúran nya aŋ báhay sa boò ŋ magdamàg. He guarded the house all night. Hwag mù ŋ taŋgapàn naŋ úpa aŋ kaybígan ko ŋ iháhatid mò sa estasyòn naŋ trèn, sapagkàt akò aŋ ùúpa sa iyò. Don’t take any fare from my friend whom you will bring to the railroad station, for I shall pay you. Tapunan mò aŋ bóte. 35Cork up the bottle. Hwag mò ŋ tawánan si Hwàn. Don’t laugh at Juan. Tawágan mo si Bathálaʾ. Call on the Lord. Tinayuan nyà naŋ kamálig aŋ bakúran. He erected a granary in his yard. Tigasan mò aŋ lúto naŋ halayà. Cook the jelly hard. Tinirhàn nya akò naŋ tinápay. He left some bread for me. Tirhàn mo akò 40naŋ inúyat. Leave me some molasses; but: Hwag mò ŋ tirahàn aŋ báhay na iyàn. Don’t live in that house. Aŋ báhay na iyòn ay aŋ kanya ŋ tinìtirahàn. That house over there is where he lives. [254]Tinulínan nya aŋ paglákad. He hurried his pace. Tulísan mo aŋ tasà naŋ lápis. Sharpen the point of the pencil. Untian mò, Pédro, aŋ ibíbigay mò ŋ damò sa kabáyo. Give the horse less grass, Pedro. Ùupàn naŋ maŋa panaúhin aŋ maŋa baŋkù ŋ itò. The 5guests will sit on these benches. Orásan mo aŋ iyo ŋ pagkáin. Have your meals at stated times. Utáŋan mo naŋ salapí si Pédro. Borrow money from Pedro. Oóhan mo aŋ tanòŋ. Answer the question in the affirmative. Niwàwalisàn niyà aŋ sahìg. She is sweeping the floor.

10Other roots: akmàʾ, ámot, apòy, balàt, báyaʾ, báyad, bigày, bendisiyòn, búti, dagán, retráto, gámit, gawàʾ, gupìt, halimhìm, hatìd, háwak, higàʾ, hitsà, húkay, húlog, íŋat, kamìt, kantà, labàs, lagày, láloʾ, lápit, lígaw, ligtàs, limòs, mulàʾ, pagakpàk, palìt, panhìk, pások, prubà, puntà, putòk, sabày, sáboy, sagásaʾ, sákit, salákay, 15silakbò, subò, súbok, sunòd, suŋgàb, soòt, táliʾ, támaʾ, táŋaʾ, táŋan, tíbay, tibàʾ, tiŋìn, túboʾ, tugtòg, túlad, túlog, túloŋ, tuŋtóŋ, umpisà, úpa, útos, wisìk.

(a) From derived words: Sya y tinagilíran ni Pédro. Pedro hit him in the side (ta-gílid, § 523), but: Tinaligdàn ni Hwàn si 20Pédro pagdadaàn nitò sa kanya ŋ harapàn. Juan turned away from Pedro when the latter came before him. Tinalikdàn ni Hwàn si Pédro. Juan turned his back on Pedro (talíkod, § 523).

(b) Irregularly without accent shift before the suffix: Áki ŋ binitáwan (or: binitíwan) aŋ bóte. I let go my hold on the bottle. 25Bitíwan mo aŋ lúbid. Let go of the rope. Dinaánan siyà naŋ isa ŋ silakbò naŋ gálit. A fit of anger came upon him. ... naŋ isa ŋ masamà ŋ pagiísip. An evil thought came to him. Dinàdaánan sya naŋ isa ŋ malakì ŋ kaluŋkútan. A great grief is upon him. ... naŋ pagkaulòl. He is under an attack of madness. Cf. daanàn, 30above. Minatáan naŋ bágo ŋ táo aŋ aswàŋ. The young man looked round for the vampire. Matáan mo aŋ magnanákaw. Keep an eye open for the thief. So from: sèrmon.

(c) From root with accent shift (so that the total shift is two syllables): Aŋ utusàn naŋ kapitàn ay tinamaàn naŋ bála. The 35captain’s orderly was hit by a bullet. Aŋ lulòd ni Pédro ay tinamaàn naŋ bála. Pedro got shot in the shin. Tinamaàn naŋ kulòg (naŋ lintìk) aŋ isa ŋ púnu-ŋ-maŋgà. A mango tree was struck by the thunder (by lightning). Tamaàn ka naŋ lintìk! May the lightning strike you! (curse.)

40375. The local passive is formed from the root with pag- when it corresponds to an active in which mag- is contrasted with -um- (§ 351) or when the local relation, especially of person for whom, is highly explicit: pag-putúl-an, pag-pù-putúl-an, p-in-ag-putúl-an, [255]p-in-ag-pù-putúl-an. Examples: Aŋ pagsakày sa kabáyo ay hindí magaà ŋ pagarálan kuŋ salbáhe aŋ kabáyo. Riding horseback is not easy to learn if the horse is unruly. Hindí káya ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ pinagàarálan. Juan’s studies are too hard 5for him. Pagbàbalikàn kità. I will come back to you. Pagbalikàn mo akò. Come back to me. Aŋ útaŋ ni Maryà ay pinagbayáran naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd na babáye. Maria’s debt was paid off by her sister. Aŋ áki ŋ kapatìd na laláki aŋ pinagbilhàn ko nito ŋ báhay. I sold this house to my brother. Napatìd aŋ lúbid na kanya 10ŋ pinagbìbiyabúhan. The rope on which he was swinging broke. Aŋ pinagharáŋan kina Hwàn ay isa ŋ lugàr na malápit sa maŋgáhan sa daà-ŋ-Balíwag. The place where Juan and his company were held up was a spot near the mango-grove on the Baliuag road. Pagharían mo ŋ mabúte aŋ pulò ŋ itò. Rule righteously over this 15island. Paghasáan mo naŋ maŋa paŋáhit aŋ hasaà ŋ itò. Use this whetstone to sharpen razors on. Aŋ pinaghatdan kò naŋ gátas ay maláyoʾ. The place to which I delivered the milk was a long way off. Sa pasíga ŋ itò y walà ŋ lugàr na pinaghùhubaràn naŋ damìt. At this beach there is no place for undressing. aŋ pinagibhàn the 20point of difference, the difference. Pagiŋátan mo ŋ dalhìn aŋ túbo ŋ kristàl na iyàn, sapagkàt baká magkàputòl-putòl iyàn kuŋ hindí ka maíŋat naŋ pagdadalà. Carry that glass tube carefully, because it might get smashed if you are not careful about the carrying it. Pinagkabyawàn nilà aŋ lugàr na itò. This place is where they 25pressed sugar-cane. Aŋ pinagkàkabyawàn námin ay isa ŋ lugàr na mataàs káy sa tubúhan. The place where we press sugar-cane is a place higher than the cane-field. Pagkabyawàn ninyò naŋ tubò aŋ bágo ŋ kabyáwan. Press the cane in the new press. Pagkàbyawàn nilà aŋ bágo ŋ tayò ŋ kabyáwan. They will press sugar-cane 30in the newly-erected press. Aŋ hwátaw aŋ sya mò ŋ pagkánan. The Chinese bowl is what you are to eat from. Si Pédro aŋ pinagkúnan naŋ maŋa kasaŋkápa ŋ itò. Pedro is the one from whom we got these tools. Si Migèl aŋ pinagkùkúnan nya naŋ kwàlta ŋ paŋbilè naŋ kalabàw. Miguel is the one from whom he gets money 35to buy carabao. Aŋ pagkúnan mo naŋ pálay ay aŋ sáko ŋ may kúlaŋ. The place for you to take rice is the sack that is already broken. Hwag mò ŋ paglaruwàn, Hwàn, aŋ kutìŋ, sapagkàt baká mo iyàn màbúlag. Don’t play with the kitten, Juan, for you might inadvertently blind it. Paglarwan mò aŋ bóla. Play (with the) 40ball. Aŋ kutìŋ ay nàbálot sa pinaglàlaruwàn nya ŋ damìt. The kitten got wrapped up in the piece of cloth with which it was playing. Pagmasdan mò aŋ bwàn. Look carefully at the moon. [256]Hwag mò ŋ pagputúlan naŋ ano màn aŋ saŋkála ŋ iyàn. Don’t cut anything on that cutting-block. Pinagsalitaàn ni Hwàn aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa báta ŋ kapatìd. Juan gave his little brothers a talking-to.

5Similarly: bintàŋ, daàn, daràs, dasàl, hátiʾ, hinálaʾ, katàm, kublì, patày, pílit, sábi, silbì, sísi, tagpòʾ, tipàn, úsap.

(a) From a phrase: pinagsa-ulàn (sa ulèʾ).

(b) From a derived word: Maŋà pinagpìpìtagánan ko ŋ ginoò! Respected sirs, Dear sirs (in oral or written address).

10(c) Irregularly without accent shift: pinagdaánan (daàn), cf. § 374,b.

(d) With extra accent shift, corresponding to active with mag- (1): Pagputulàn mo, Hwàn, naŋ maŋa usbòŋ aŋ kalabása. Cut a bundle of shoots from the pumpkin, Juan.

15As bitìw lacks the accent shift before -an (§ 374,b), the form with pag- and shift of one syllable belongs here: Pinagbitiwan nyà aŋ maŋa manùk na kanya ŋ táŋan. She let go of all the chickens she was holding.

(e) With reduplication of the root, corresponding to the 20active with mag- r (§ 354): pinagsisiglàn (silìd).

(f) With both extra accent shift and reduplication, corresponding to § 355: Pinagdàdadagukàn nya aŋ maŋa kaáway niyà. He was dealing blows to his enemies right and left (dágok a blow with the fist).

25(g) From doubled root (cf. the active, § 356): pinagtùtulùŋ-tulúŋan (túloŋ).

376. The local passive with paŋ- corresponds to actives with maŋ-: pa-mutúl-an, pa-mù-mutúl-an, p-in-a-mutúl-an, p-in-a-mù-mutúl-an.

30Saàn aŋ pinaŋgalíŋan mo?—Aŋ pinaŋgalíŋan ko ay an báya-ŋ-Maynílaʾ. Where have you come from?—I come from Manila. Aŋ maŋa pinítak na kadátig naŋ sápaʾ ay sya nyà ŋ pinaŋgágapásan (or: sya nyà ŋ pinamùmutúlan naŋ pálay). The sections of the rice-field bordering on the ditch are the ones he is cutting rice 35from. Pinaŋitlugàn naŋ manòk aŋ kahò ŋ itò. The hen laid its eggs in this box. Hwag mò ŋ pamitasàn naŋ búŋa aŋ átis na nása tabì naŋ balòn. Don’t pick the fruits from the atis tree by the side of the well. Siya kò ŋ pamìmitasàn naŋ búŋa aŋ byábas na nása gitná naŋ bakúran. I shall pick fruits from the guava tree 40in the middle of the yard. Ali ŋ lugàr aŋ iyo ŋ pinamutúlan naŋ damò? Which place did you cut grass from? Sinundó ni Pédro aŋ kapatìd na babáye sa báhay na pinanànahían. Pedro fetched [257]his sister from the house where she was working as seamstress. So also from: tálo, tiwálaʾ.

(a) With paŋ-hin- the local passive corresponds to the active with maŋ-hin- (§ 357,b); the reduplication affects the hin- which, 5theoretically, we may regard as part of the underlying word. “Magáral ka ŋ mabúti at paŋhinayáŋan mo aŋ mahalagà ŋ panahòn,” sinábi ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ anàk. “Study hard and take account of the precious time,” said Juan to his son. Káylan pa kayá paŋhìhinayáŋan naŋ maŋa táo aŋ maŋa áni ŋ taòn-taò y nàsìsírà 10naŋ luktòn o naŋ túyot? When will the people at last regret the harvests that are every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? Pinaŋhinayáŋan nilà aŋ nálubog na baŋkàʾ. They were sorry about the canoe that had sunk. Pinaŋhìhinayáŋan námin aŋ marámi ŋ búhay na ginúgol naŋ báyan sa pagtataŋgòl sa katwíran. 15We regret the many lives lost by the country in the defense of its rights. (sáyaŋ); similarly from gantì: paŋhigantihàn.

(10) Special static words.

377. With S -an special static words are formed from oxytone roots, without the irregularities described in § 334. In meaning 20they fall into two types, which, however, are not always clearly distinct.

(a) They express an action by two or more actors, a kind of plural of root words of the type described at § 341,3,a. Aŋ àlísan naŋ maŋa aluwáge ay sa lúnes naŋ hápon. The leaving of the carpenters 25is fixed for Monday afternoon. aŋ ìnúman a drinking party. Aŋ ìyákan naŋ maŋa bátaʾ ay nárinig ko sa kalsáda. I heard on the street the crying of the children. Aŋ kàlabúgan naŋ maŋa nalaglàg na nyòg dahilàn sa malakàs na háŋin ay nárinig haŋgàŋ sa maláyo ŋ lugàr. The thud of the cocoanuts that were 30thrown down by the strong wind was audible for some distance away. Aŋ kàlasíŋan naŋ maŋa kwaltà ŋ laglàg sa bulsà ni Hwàn ay sya ŋ nakàgísiŋ kay Pédro. The rattling of the coins falling from Juan’s purse was what woke Pedro up. Aŋ kantáhan naŋ maŋa íbon ay ginágawà nila kuŋ umága. The birds sing together 35in the morning. Aŋ kùrútan nilà sa nilúto ko ŋ isdàʾ ay lubhà ŋ madalàs. They often pinched pieces out of the fish I had cooked. Aŋ litsúnan nila Hwàn ay hindí nátulòy. The barbecue of Juan and his friends did not come off. Aŋ luksúhan naŋ maŋa luktòn ay totoò ŋ maiiklèʾ. The leaps of the small grasshoppers are very 40short. Aŋ pàgakpákan naŋ maŋa táo pagkaraàn naŋ talumpáteʾ ay lubhà ŋ mahábaʾ. The applause of the people after the speech was very long. Aŋ pintásan ni Hwána at ni Maryà ay parého ŋ hindí totoò. The criticisms of Juana and Maria make of each other [258]are equally untrue. Aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa lalagyàn naŋ tubaʾ ay pùnúa ŋ lahàt. His containers for the sap are all full. Aŋ kanila ŋ sàkáyan sa trèn ay sa liŋgò naŋ umága. They are all to take the train Sunday morning. Naparoòn akò kagabè sa isa ŋ sàyáwan. 5I went to a dance last night. Aŋ sìgáwan naŋ maŋa bátaʾ sa kalsáda ay nakabíbiŋì. The shouting of the children on the street is deafening. aŋ tàhúlan naŋ maŋa áso the baying together of the dogs. aŋ tàyáan a staking, a putting up of stakes (aŋ tayàʾ a stake in a bet or game). Nárinig sa isa ŋ ùpúan naŋ maŋa Intsèk aŋ 10kwènto ŋ itò. This story was heard in a gathering of Chinamen.

Similarly, from: kaluskòs, patày, pustà, putàk, salitàʾ, sugàl, takbò, tipàn, tugtòg, umpòk.

From derived word: Aŋ hìmagsíkan sa Filipínas ay natápus nà. The fighting in the Philippines is over. (as though from a form 15-himagsìk, see § 518).

This formation underlies further derivatives, see §§ 352,d. 357,a.

(b) The other meaning of the formation S -an is that of an object viewed, rather explicitly (cf. § 380), as the scene of plural 20action or the place of things. So: aŋ bìgásan the place where hulled rice is made, threshing floor for rice, rice-mill. Si Hwàn aŋ bìgáyan nilà naŋ kanilà ŋ maŋa ninákaw na aláhas. Juan is the one to whom they give the jewelry they have stolen. aŋ bìlangúan a prison (aŋ bilaŋgòʾ a prisoner). Aŋ kanila ŋ bìlíhan naŋ pálay 25ay sa kamálig ni Hwàn. The place where they buy rice is in Juan’s storehouse. Aŋ dàánan naŋ maŋa sundálo ay aŋ landàs na itò. The usual route of the soldiers is this path. aŋ hampásan the whipping-bench. Aŋ maŋa magkakápit-báhay na si Andrès, Kulàs, at Pédro ay nagtàtálo tuŋkùl sa kaní-kanilà ŋ haŋgáhan naŋ bakúran. 30The neighbors Andrés, Nicolás, and Pedro are disputing about the boundaries of their grounds. Sa pagítan naŋ báya-ŋ-Balíwag at báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay máy-roo ŋ isa lámaŋ na hintúan aŋ maŋa naglálakad. Pedestrians have only one stopping-place between the towns of Baliuag and San Miguel. Si Pédro ay sya ŋ hìráman naŋ 35salapìʾ naŋ maŋa táo sa báyan. Pedro is the one from whom the people in the town borrow money. aŋ huŋkúyan a machine for fanning the pounded rice. Aŋ isa ŋ taburéte lámaŋ aŋ ginawá nila ŋ làgáyan naŋ kanila ŋ maŋa sombréro, sapagkàt aŋ sabitàn ay punú nà. A chair was all they had to lay their hats on, for the 40hat-rack was already full. Aŋ làŋúyan sa ílog ay bumábaw. The swimming-place in the river grew shallow. aŋ làrúan the playground. Aŋ lìbáŋan sa maŋa bátaʾ sa maŋa bapòr na naglálayag [259]sa dágat naŋ Pasífiko ay lubhà ŋ malilínis na lugàr. The play-rooms for children on the steamers that ply on the Pacific Ocean are very neat places. aŋ nyúgan a cocoanut grove. Aŋ pàtáyan naŋ bábuy ay nasúnog. The pork slaughter-house burned down. 5aŋ pàtísan a factory for shrimp-sauce (patìs, made of the small shrimp called hípon). Aŋ báro ŋ punìt-punìt ay sya nyà ŋ ginawà ŋ tagpían naŋ maŋa retáso. She sewed the patches all on to the ragged blouse. Aŋ kanila ŋ tagpúan ay aŋ daà-ŋ-Balíwag. Their meeting-place is the Baliuag road. aŋ tanyágan an exhibition, exposition. 10aŋ timbáŋan a pair of scales. aŋ tindáhan a shop, store (aŋ tindà the goods for sale in a store).

Similarly, from: aklàt, bantày, bigtì, biniyàg, bukàs, buntòt, dasàl, gawàʾ, hagdàn, higàʾ, hukòm, kabiyàw, kublì, kulòŋ, libìŋ, luksò, maŋgà, pintà, pintò, pitàg, punlàʾ, sampày, saŋlàʾ, simbà, 15sahàn, taŋgàp, taraŋkà, tirà, upòʾ.

A very few show irregularities: eskwèl-han, paá-nan, tòto-hánan the truth (totoò); the secondary accent is lacking in damú-han, tubú-han; irregular in kumpìsál-an.

From a compound word: úbus-làkásan (úbos-lakàs).

20From a phrase: sà-lawáhan changeable, fickle, as though from sa lawà; for the latter see § 345.

From derived words: aŋ ìnumínan place for drinking-water, water-shelf (inum-ìn, § 367,a); aŋ sìlaŋán-an the east (silaŋ-àn, § 379.

25378. The formation (1) S -an is made from barytone roots and corresponds in meaning to (a) in the preceding type; the suffix is added as a rule without irregularity.

Aŋ ìbígan ni Maryà at ni Hwàn ay natápus sa pagtatampúhan. The love-affair of Maria and Juan ended through their contrariness. 30Aŋ làyásan naŋ maŋa sundálo ay hindí maampàt naŋ kanila ŋ maŋa pinúnoʾ. The deserting of the soldiers could not be stopped by their officers. Sa miyèrkules aŋ lùlánan nilà sa trèn. On Wednesday they are to embark on the train. Aŋ pùlútan nilà naŋ kwaltà ay náhintòʾ naŋ márinig nilà aŋ putòk. Their scrambling 35for money ceased when they heard the crash. aŋ tìpúnan a meeting.

So: háyag, húni, káin, kílos, sáma, túloy.

Irregular in form is: Aŋ tàwánan nila Hwàn ay náhinto dahilàn sa kanila ŋ pagkàgúlat. The laughter of Juan’s crowd stopped on account of their surprise (táwa).

40Irregular in meaning, as though local instead of plural, is: Aŋ gulòd na itò ay sya ŋ sìláŋan naŋ áraw. This hill is the place where the sun rises (sílaŋ). [260]

379. The form from barytone roots corresponding to the type in § 377,b and often also to type a, is: (2) -an, without irregularities: Aŋ agawàn naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ ay magulò. The grabbing by the monkeys was confused. aŋ basahàn a reading-room, library. 5Bulakàn Bulacán (name of a province, if from búlak a cluster of capoc cotton). Aŋ maliìt na úna ŋ itò ay sya kò ŋ duruàn naŋ maŋa aspilè. This little cushion is where I stick my needles. aŋ haluàn a mixing-vessel. aŋ hugasàn a place for washing dishes. aŋ hulihàn naŋ isdàʾ a fishing-expedition. Si Hwána ay isa ŋ babáye 10ŋ kutuhàn. Juana is a lousy woman. Aŋ labanàn naŋ maŋa Tùrkos at Iŋgléses ay kasulukúyan pa lámaŋ. The warfare between the Turks and the English is only now taking place. Aŋ kanila ŋ lakaràn ay lubhà ŋ masayà. Their walking party is very merry. Aŋ kanila ŋ lusuŋàn ay hindí natápus na mabúte, sapagkàt marámi 15sa maŋa táo ay matamàd. Their cooperative scheme did not turn out well, because most of the people were lazy. Aŋ murahàn ni Hwána at ni Maryà ay nárinig naŋ boò ŋ báyan. The revilings of Juana and Maria were heard by the whole town. Sa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay naŋyáre aŋ isa ŋ nakawàn. In the town of San Miguel a 20robbery took place. Aŋ tablà ŋ itò ay ginawà ŋ pakuàn naŋ maŋa bátaʾ sa maŋa páku ŋ aspilè na kinúha nilà. The children used this board for hammering in the tacks they had taken. Aŋ bútas naŋ baŋkaʾ ay sya ŋ ginawà ŋ pasakàn ni Pédro naŋ pagkìt. The leak in the canoe was where Pedro calked in the wax. aŋ putikàn a clay-pit; 25a person or thing covered with mud. Aŋ isà ŋ labaŋàn ay syà ŋ nagìŋ silaŋàn kay Hesùs. Jesus was born in a manger; aŋ kátri ŋ silaŋàn ni Hwána the bed in which Juana’s children were born. Sya y sugatàn He is wounded; aŋ sugatàn the wounded (as, after a battle). aŋ sulatàn a writing-desk. Aŋ síloŋ naŋ báhay ay sya nyà ŋ 30taguàn naŋ maŋa kasaŋkápan sa pagaalwáge. The ground-floor of his house is where he keeps his carpentry tools. Aŋ kuwàrto ŋ itò ay sya kò ŋ tulugàn. This room is my sleeping-place. Aŋ tulugàn naŋ báhay ni Hwàn ay nása bubuŋàn. The sleeping-quarters in Juan’s house are on the roof. aŋ utusàn a servant, a waiter, an 35orderly.

Similarly: áral, búkol, dáhil, háraŋ, hásaʾ, íhaw, ílaw, káin, lútoʾ, sábit, sáboŋ, tápon, túlis, úlo, úpa, óras.

With irregularities: hàlamanàn garden, flower-pot (haláman) has secondary accent on the first of three syllables; aŋkàn the members 40of a given person’s immediate family, not including himself: aŋ aŋkàn ni Hwàn Krùs Juan Cruz’ wife and children (from -ának, cf. mag-ának, § 358,a); kwayanàn, beside kawayanàn (kawáyan). [261]

With irregularity and reduplication: ka-kan-àn (-káin).

380. (1) -an with irregularities forms static words denoting objects by the action for which they are locally used or by the things they are the place of; the local meaning is less explicit, and 5the object has more fixed identity apart from its local relation than is the case in the preceding forms. This distinction is very clear where both forms occur from the same root (cf. kulòŋ, lagày); it may disappear where only one form is made (sagíŋan, atísan have the same value as nyúgan).

10aŋ atísan a grove of atis trees. Aŋ asuhàn naŋ báhay ni Pédro ay nasúnog. The chimney in Pedro’s house burned out. Bigasàn aŋ kanya ŋ sináiŋ. Her boiled rice has raw rice in it, is not done. Aŋ kanya ŋ damìt ay pulahàn. Her clothes are all red. Sya y isà ŋ pulahàn. He is a Red, a member of the Red party. aŋ siláŋan the east, also Siláŋan Silangan (name of a town). aŋ taanàn a fugitive. aŋ manòk na talúnan 15the defeated game-cock; lúto ŋ talúnan a dish in which the defeated game-cock is cooked with ginger. Similarly: bákod, bubòŋ, dúlo, gawàʾ, haŋgà, haràp, kulòŋ, labàŋ, laròʾ, likòd, lulòd, paà, ságiŋ, tintéro.

(a) Some roots which begin with l and most of those whose 20irregularity involves contraction, have reduplication in this form: Aŋ lalagyàn ko naŋ librò ay aŋ mésa ŋ itò. This table is my bookstand. Aŋ uupà ŋ itò ay gàgamítin naŋ maŋa panaúhin. The guests will sit on these seats. Aŋ uupà ŋ itò ay sa háreʾ. This seat is for the king. luluràn shin. Similarly: hihigàn (higàʾ), lalamúnan (lámon), 25lalawígan (láwig), sasakyàn (sakày), titirhàn (tirà).

(b) From derived words: Napútol nilà aŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy sa kalahatían. They cut the tree at the middle. Nalagòt aŋ lúbid sa kalahatían. The rope broke at the middle. (kalahátiʾ, § 519). Aŋ bútas naŋ baŋkàʾ ay nása tagilíran. The leak in the canoe is in the 30side. Nilagyàn ni Hwàn naŋ tagilíran aŋ kanya ŋ báhay. Juan put side-walls on his house. (tagílid, § 523).

381. D -an, with accent shift if the root is barytone, forms words denoting an object which is an imitation or miniature of such and such: aŋ dagat-dagátan a lake; aŋ kabá-kabayúhan a play-horse; 35aŋ tao-taúhan a manikin, doll; the pupil of the eye; aŋ baril-barílan a toy-gun. Further derivatives from this formation, see § 352,d.

382. Many roots here treated, because felt, as simple, end in -an: baŋàn, batalàn, dalandàn, hagdàn, haláman, kánan, kápitan, 40kapitàn, kawáyan, laráwan, pagítan, pakuwàn, paŋnàn a hand-basket, pasígan (Pásig is the name of a river), piŋgàn, saguwàn a paddle, saŋkálan, tampalásan, tahílan.

383. Similar formations with paŋ- prefixed add the element [262]of meaning present in the transient formations with maŋ- and paŋ-; they have secondary accent on the prefix, as though it formed part of the underlying word:

(a) pàŋ- -an (cf. § 377): Aŋ kahò ŋ itò ay sya ŋ pàŋitlúgan 5naŋ manòk. This box is the place where the hen lays its eggs.

(b) pàŋ- (1) -an (cf. § 378): Si Hwàn ay sya ŋ paráti ŋ pàmunúan naŋ básag-úlo. Juan is the one who always starts the fighting.

(c) pàŋ- (2) -an (cf. § 379): pàŋaserahàn boarding-place.

10II. Secondary groups.
1. Prefix si-.

384. The prefix si- is used only in active transient forms, and is always preceded by mag- or nag-: mag-si-pútol, mag-sì-si-pútol, nag-si-pútol, nag-sì-si-pútol. In meaning these forms are explicit 15plurals of the primary active forms. Occasionally the plural value is emphasized by infixation of -aŋ- into the mag- or nag-.

385. From the simple root the explicit plural with si- corresponds to the primary actives with -um- or, in many cases, with mag-. Nagsiílag sila sa báyan naŋ itò y pasúkin naŋ maŋa kaáway. 20They all fled from the town when the enemy entered it. Aŋ maŋa áso ay nagsìsilámon. The dogs are eating. Magsiligáya kayò. Rejoice, Be glad. Aŋ maŋa laŋgàm ay nagsìsilipumpòn (or: nagsìsilípon) sa nápatay nila ŋ gagambà. The ants are crowding all over the spider they have killed. Nagsìsipútol sila ŋ lahàt naŋ tubò 25naŋ kamì ay dumatìŋ. They were cutting sugar-cane when we arrived. Magsipútol kayò naŋ tubò. Do you all cut sugar-cane.

So from: akiyàt, alìs, dálaw, dalò, datìŋ, húli, húsay, iyàk, kantà, kápit, lakì, lípat, lúlan, pígil, puntà, pustà, sáyad, tindìg, tugtòg, túloŋ, túŋo, uwìʾ.

30(a) Plurality emphasized: Naŋagsiúroŋ aŋ maŋa sundálo. The soldiers retreated. So also from alìs.

386. This formation is made from the root with pag- prefixed when it corresponds to primary actives with mag- in contrast with -um- (§ 351). Nagsìsipagáral silà. They are studying. Magsipagáral 35kayò. Study. Aŋ maŋa bátaʾ ay áyaw magsipagbíhis. The children don’t want to change their clothes, get dressed up. Aŋ maŋa laŋgàm ay nagsìsipagípon (or: nagsìsipaglípon) naŋ pagkáin kuŋ tagáraw. The ants store up food in the hot season. Magsipagpútol kayò, Pédro, naŋ káhoy na gàgamítin sa paglilitsòn. Pedro, 40do you folks cut some wood to be used in the barbecue. “Magsìsipagpútol dàw sila naŋ dikóla,” aŋ sábi ni Hwána. “They say [263]they are going to cut off the trains of their skirts,” said Juana. Napsipagpútol naŋ buhòk aŋ maŋa Intsèk. The Chinamen cut off their queues. Nagsìsipagpútol naŋ buhòk aŋ maŋa Intsèk na si Yèŋ at Tsàŋ, naŋ sila y datnàn ko sa kanila ŋ tindáhan. The Chinamen 5Yeng and Chang were cutting their queues when I came upon them in their shop. Nagsipagtipìd aŋ sundálo. The soldiers economized.

So from: basàʾ, dasàl, hintòʾ, laròʾ, pasiyàl, sísi, sugàl, takbò, tindìg, yukayòk.

10(a) Plurality emphasized: naŋagsipagtakbò.

(b) The pag- is used when the underlying word is a derived word: Aŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Tagálog ay nagsipaghimagsìk. The Tagalog soldiers revolted (-himagsìk, § 518). Nagsipaghìmagsíkan silà. They fought each other (hìmagsíkan, § 377,a). So 15from: agawàn (§ 379), -bugtúŋan (§ 377,a), labanàn (§ 379), takbúhan (§ 377,a). Cf. § 406.

(c) The same formation with accent shift of the root corresponds to primary actives with mag- (1), § 353. It occurs from: bálot, lákad, líbot.

20387. With paŋ- prefixed to the root, this formation corresponds to the primary active with maŋ- (§ 357). Magsipamaŋká táyo. Let’s all go canoeing. Magsìsipamiyábas kamì sa maŋa gúbat na malápit. We are going guava-picking in the jungles near here. Si Pédro at si Hwàn ay umáhon sa bundòk úpaŋ magsipamútol 25naŋ káhoy na asanàʾ. Pedro and Juan went up into the mountains to cut asana. Àáhon kamì sa bundòk at magsìsipamútol kamì naŋ muláwin. We are going up into the mountains to cut molave.

So from: barìl, hínaʾ, hiŋìʾ, noòd, tahímik, tálo.

30(a) With paŋ-hin-, cf. § 357,b: Silà y nagsipaŋhimagsìk. They made a revolution.

2. The prefix paki-.

388. The prefix paki-, which forms simple static forms, transients, and abstracts, expresses that the subject of the sentence 35performs or undergoes the action along with others that were involved in it before,—this either through interference or by favor of someone else.

389. Simple static form: aŋ pakikinábaŋ the obtaining of profit (kinábaŋ) in trade with others; also: holy communion. So 40pakipútol, in command (cf. § 341,3,c), cut as a favor.

390. The active transient and the abstract have the forms: [264]maki-pútol, makì-ki-pútol, naki-pútol, nakì-ki-pútol, paki-ki-pútol, i. e. the reduplication affects the syllable -ki-.

Aŋ kapitàn ay nagpadalà naŋ isa ŋ sekréta sa lúpà naŋ kaáway úpaŋ makiramdàm naŋ kanila ŋ kìlúsan. The captain sent 5a spy to the enemy’s country to spy out (literally: perceive along) their movements. Makìkikáin akò kina Lílay. I am going to Lilay’s for a meal. Si Pédro ay nakikáin kina Hwàn. Pedro took a meal at Juan’s house. Nakipútol akò naŋ damò sa lúpà ni Mariyáno. I obtained permission to cut grass from Mariano’s 10land. Sila y nàròroòn sa búkid ni Pédro at nakìkipútol naŋ damò. They have gone to Pedro’s field and are cutting grass there by his permission. Pumaroòn ka t makipútol naŋ damò. Go and ask them to let you cut some grass. Pakikipútol díto ni Hwàn naŋ damò ay siŋilìn mo aŋ útaŋ nya. When Juan asks to be allowed 15to cut grass here, dun him for his debt. Sila y nakisúno kay Mariyà. They had Maria let them live in her house with her.

So: sakày, sáma, túloy, túlog.

(a) With accent shift of the root (§ 337): makialàm look after someone, nose into others’ affairs (álam).

20391. The root has pag- when the formation corresponds to a primary active with mag- in contrast with -um- (§ 351): Nakìkipagáway aŋ báta ŋ itò, kanyàʾ hindí dápat pahintulúta ŋ madalàs na manáog naŋ báhay. As this boy gets into fights, he should not often be allowed to leave the house. Nakipagáway si Pédro. 25Pedro got into the fight. Nasaktàn si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pakikipaglaròʾ. Juan got hurt when he joined into the game. So from: bunòʾ, dalamhátiʾ, lában, tagpòʾ, úsap.

(a) From derived words: Hwag kà ŋ makipaglàŋúyan, Hwàn, at baká ka malúnod. Don’t go swimming with the crowd, 30Juan, I am afraid you might get drowned. Makìkipaglàŋúyan ka bà, Pédro? Are you going along swimming, Pedro? Nakipagluksúhan si Hwàn naŋ idáos aŋ maŋa laròʾ. Juan entered in the jumping-contest when the games were held. Similarly, from: pustá-han, siksík-an, takbú-han. All these belong under § 377,a. 35See also § 427,b.

(b) Corresponding to primary active with mag- (1) § 353: Nakipagbabàg si Pédro. Pedro got into a free fight (bábag).

392. The root has paŋ-, corresponding to a primary active with maŋ-: Sya y hindí pinahintulútan sa kanya ŋ pakikipamútol 40naŋ tubò. His request to be allowed to cut cane was not granted.

393. In the passive the paki- expresses that the subject undergoes the action along with others, often as a favor on the part of the actor. So direct passive: paki-putúl-in be cut, as a favor [265]on the part of the one who does the cutting; the recipient of the favor is the speaker.

394. In the instrumental passive the meaning is similar; sometimes, however, the instrumental passive is used with the person 5asking the favor as agent.

Maárì mo ŋà ŋ ipakihúlog sa kuréyo aŋ súlat? Will you please mail my letter for me? (literally: Can my letter please be thrown-along-with-yours or thrown-as-a-favor into the mail by you?). Ipinakihúlog ni Pédro aŋ áki ŋ súlat. Pedro mailed my 10letter (along with his or as a favor) for me. Ipinakìkihúlog ko lámaŋ kay Pédro aŋ áki ŋ maŋa súlat. I am asking Pedro to mail my letters for me; here ipinakìkihúlog is not that thrown as a favor, but that asked to be thrown as a favor. Ipakìkipútol daw ni Hwàn aŋ buhòk naŋ alílà nya ŋ Intsèk. Juan says he will ask 15someone to cut his Chinese servant’s hair; ipakìkipútol is here that asked to be cut as a favor, and the relation of asking is the only thing expressed by the instrumental (rather than the direct) passive.

395. The root has pag-, corresponding to § 351: Ipakipagpútol 20mo ŋàʾ naŋ buhòk aŋ guntìŋ na itò, úpaŋ áti ŋ masubúkan aŋ húsay naŋ talìm. Please use this shears in cutting hair, so that we may test the quality of the edge (genuine instrumental passive). Ipakìkipagpútol daw nya akò naŋ búhòʾ pagáhon nya sa bundòk. He says he will cut some bamboo for me when he goes 25up into the mountains. (genuine instrumental passive). Ipinakipagpútol akò ni Hwàn naŋ tubò. Juan had someone cut me some sugar-cane (literally: I was asked to be cut for as a favor). Ipinakìkipagpútol daw ni Hwàn si Pédro naŋ labòŋ. Juan says he is having someone cut bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

30396. Local passive with paki-: pinakibalitáan was ascertained by the actor getting people to tell him as a favor.

(a) From shifted root: pinakialamàn.

(b) With pag- (cf. § 352): pinakìkipagtakbuhàn.

3. The prefix ka-.

35397. Secondary forms with the prefix ka- are of most varied meaning; the principal types express association of two individuals or groups and involuntary action. In accented form the prefix kà- expresses chiefly accidental occurrence. In certain passives associated with this group the prefix itself does not appear.

40(1) Simple static forms.

398. Words with prefix ka- denote objects (or groups) standing [266]in such and such a relation to another object (or group). Sya y áki ŋ nagìŋ kabaláe. He (she) has become my fellow-parent-in-law, i. e. Our children have intermarried; the form ka-baláe merely makes explicit the element of relation present in the simple word: 5Si Bantùg ay áki ŋ baláe. Bantug’s son (daughter) has married my daughter (son). Aŋ maŋa áso ay nása kabilá naŋ bákod. The dogs are on the other side of the fence (the simple -bilàʾ does not occur; the idea of other side is always envisaged as relative). Aŋ búkid ni Hwàn ay karátig naŋ kay Pédro. Juan’s field borders 10on Pedro’s. Aŋ mésa ŋ itò y kakúlay naŋ kahòn. This table is of the same color as the chest. Si Hwàn aŋ kalában ny Andrès sa larò ŋ dáma. Juan is Andres’ opponent at checkers. Kamatà si Hwàn ni Pédro. Juan and Pedro took to each other from first sight. Aŋ tagpí naŋ báro ni Pédro ay hindí kamukhá naŋ bároʾ. 15The patch on Juan’s blouse does not match the blouse. aŋ áki ŋ kapatìd na si Hwàn my brother Juan. aŋ áki ŋ kapútol na si Hwàn my brother Juan; aŋ kapútol naŋ tubò a piece (broken off) of the sugar-cane. Aŋ kasánib naŋ áki ŋ banìg ay aŋ banìg ni Manuwèl. Manuel’s sleeping-mat and mine overlap (kasánib one 20of two things of which one overlaps the other). walà ŋ kasaŋkàp without accompaniments, trimmings, affixes. Si Mariyáno aŋ kasunod kò ŋ lumàlákad sa kalsáda. Mariano was the one who was walking behind me on the street; aŋ kasunod kò ŋ naparoòn sa simbáhan the one who followed me in going to church (kasunòd 25one of two persons one of whom is following the other). aŋ katúŋo the person one is dealing with, the other party. Si Pédro aŋ kaugáli naŋ kanya ŋ kaybíga ŋ si Hwàn. Pedro has the same habits as his friend Juan.

Similarly from: áway, báyan, biyàk, bunòʾ, ribàl, haràp, kilála, 30kláse, lákip, laròʾ, pantày, partè, sabuwàt, sáli, sálo, sáma, súnoʾ, tapàt, timbàʾ, untìʾ, úsap, walàʾ.

Divergent in meaning are katáo (§ 255), kagabì, kahápon (§ 259). Cf. also § 520.

(a) From derived words: Syà y isa kò ŋ kamagának. He is 35a relative of mine (mag-ának, § 358,a), and kamakalawà (§ 259, from maka-lawà, § 453).

(b) From a phrase: aŋ kasa-ŋ-báhay a person dwelling in the same house with another, a housemate (isà ŋ báhay).

(c) From shifted root (§ 337): Si Hwàn ay kagalìt ni Pédro 40at ni Kulàs. Juan is at odds with Pedro and Nicolás. aŋ kanyà ŋ kagalìt the person or persons with whom he is at odds. Si Pédro aŋ nagìŋ kasirá ni Hwàn. It is Pedro with whom Juan is angry. Hindí ko katalò si Párì Hwàn. I don’t play winning-and-losing [267]games with Father Juan. Similarly from álam, sáma.

(d) The root is reduplicated in a few cases: Si Pédro aŋ áki ŋ kababáyan. Pedro is my fellow-townsman (beside kabáyan); katutúboʾ native, ingrown, inborn, inherited.

5399. kà-ka-. With accented reduplication of the prefix these forms emphasize the incompleteness of the correlative object: Kàkapútol lámaŋ na tubò aŋ áki ŋ nàkúha. I got only a little piece of the sugar-cane. So also kákauntèʾ.

400. ka- R. With accented reduplication of the underlying 10word ka- forms words expressing the recent completion of an act; they are used impersonally (§ 77) or as conjunctive attributes. Kaàáway pa lámaŋ ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ kalaròʾ. Juan has only just now quarreled with his playmate. Kabàbáŋon ko. I have just got up. Kagàgáliŋ sa báyan naŋ kapatìd ko ŋ babáye. My 15sister has just come back from town. Kahíhiga ko pa lámaŋ. I had just then lain down. Kalàlarú ku pa lámaŋ sa bátaʾ. I have just finished playing with the child. Kapùpútol ko pa lámaŋ naŋ yantòk. I have only just now cut some rattan. So gísiŋ, káin.

(a) ka-pag- R, with the usual value of pag- (§ 369, etc.): 20Kapagpùpútol lámaŋ ni Hwàn naŋ kawáyan. Juan has just come from cutting bamboo.

(b) ka-paŋ- R, corresponding to active with maŋ- (§ 357): kapamùmútol (pútol).

401. ka- D. With doubling of the root ka- has causative 25value: it expresses that which causes such and such an involuntary action, specifically, such and such an emotion: Aŋ dumatìŋ na bálaŋ ay katákot-tákot aŋ dámi. The locusts that came were frightful in quantity. So from hiyàʾ, takà. Vowel-contraction in kàwáwaʾ pitiable, piteous (for ka-áwa-áwaʾ). Slightly divergent 30in meaning is karáka-ráka (§ 265,5).

402. In a different use ka- has the form kay- in some words; these formations express a remarkable degree of a quality; they are used impersonally (§ 76), as predicate (§ 247), occasionally as conjunctive attributes: kaálat kayálat what saltiness! (of 35water); kay-asùl what blueness! Katáyog naŋ púno-ŋ-niyòg na iyòn! How tall that cocoanut tree is! Kayuntìʾ naŋ ibinigày nya ŋ laruwàn sa ákin! How few toys he gave me! So: kay-dámot, ka-rámot, ka-rúnoŋ, ka-itìm, kakínis, ka-láyoʾ, ka-muntìʾ, ka-pulà, ka-tabàʾ, kay-tipìd.

40(a) With reduplication of the root, this form refers to the quality in an explicit plurality of objects: kaiitèm what blackness! [268](of several things); Kalalamìg naŋ paà naŋ maŋa bátaʾ! How cold the children’s feet are!

(b) With doubled root these forms intensify the quality: Kaydámot-dámot naŋ báta ŋ itò! What a terribly stingy child! 5(kaydámot, karámot what stinginess! aŋ dámot stinginess).

403. A few forms with accented ka- prefixed to the root envisage the accidental nature of the reciprocal relation: Aŋ maŋa damìt na itò ay kásiya sa baòl. These clothes will fit into the trunk. Akò aŋ kásundoʾ ni Pépe sa pagpapalaròʾ naŋ bèsbol 10sa maŋa bátaʾ. I am at one with Pepe as to letting the children play baseball. Hábaŋ akò y nagdádaàn, kátaon namà ŋ isinábuy nya aŋ túbig. He threw out the water at the very time, it happened, that I was passing by. aŋ kàtiwálaʾ a confidential agent, manager, overseer.

15The words káluluwà and kápuwàʾ, which resemble this formation, seem to be felt as simple roots and have been so treated here.

(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

404. k-um-a-. An active with -um- is made from ka-úsap as underlying word: Si Hwàn ay kumàkaúsap sa ákin. Juan 20was talking at me, haranguing me.

405. mag-ka- pag-ka-ka-. Actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r from underlying words with ka- express a partial affection of the actor or of a group of actors; ka- here has its involuntary force: the actor is not a rational and voluntary agent. 25Nagkaroòn ako naŋ trabáho kanína ŋ umága, sapagkàt nagpasakày akò sa trèn naŋ maŋa kamátis naŋ tátay ko. I was kept busy this morning, for I attended to the shipping by train of my father’s tomatoes. Nagkaroòn sya naŋ gálit. He harbored ill-feeling. Nagkagulò aŋ maŋa Amerikáno sa pagdatìŋ naŋ Dòytsland. The 30Americans were surprised at the coming of the “Deutschland”. Nagkagustò sya ŋ kumáin naŋ súhaʾ. He conceived a desire of eating grape-fruit. Nagkàkalípon aŋ maŋa laŋgàm sa púto. The ants are getting all over the cake. Akò y nagkamálay pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ sandalì ŋ paghihimatày. I returned to consciousness 35after a few moments’ fainting-spell. Nagkapálad si Hwàn na makaratìŋ díto ŋ maluwalhátiʾ. Juan was fortunate enough to get back here safe and sound. Aŋ pakwàn ay nagkasíraʾ. The watermelon got partly spoiled. Aŋ maŋa ságiŋ ay nagkasíraʾ sa kalaúnan naŋ pagkàtágoʾ sa lalagyàn. Some of the bananas got spoiled on 40account of the long time they were kept stored. Nása simbáhan. silà naŋ magkasúnog. They were at church when a fire occurred. Twi ŋ papasúkin ko sa kuràl aŋ maŋa kalabàw ay nagkákawalá [269]silà. Every time I put the carabao into the corral, they get away.

So: búkol, hinòg.

406. mag-ka- (1) pag-ka-ka- (1). Accent shift in this formation serves various uses:

5(a) It may be due to the root: Si Hwàn ay nagkasakìt noo ŋ bwà ŋ nagdaàn. Juan had a sickness last month. Si Hwàn ay hindí makapútol naŋ káhoy, sapagkàt mahínà pa sya dahilàn sa pagkakasakìt. Juan cannot cut wood, because he is still weak on account of his recent illness.

10(b) It expresses plurality: Magkákaputòl aŋ maŋa tubò. The sugar-cane will get broken in numbers. Nagkaputòl aŋ maŋa tubò sa lakàs naŋ háŋin. The sugar-cane broke in quantity under the violence of the wind. Nagkákaputòl aŋ maŋa tubò sa kalakasàn naŋ háŋin. Much sugar-cane is breaking under the force of 15the wind.

So also from lúnod.

(c) The form is really a simple active with mag- from an underlying word of the form ka- (1), § 398,c; three words of this kind occur: Sila y nagkagalìt. They quarreled. aŋ pagkakagalìt 20the quarrel. Aŋ Hapòn at aŋ Tsína ay nagkasiràʾ. Japan and China had a break. Silà y nagkatalò. They played a winning-and-losing game. Nagkatalu nà aŋ maŋa nagsúsugàl. The gamblers have lost and won, have finished their winning-and-losing game.

In accordance with § 356, the underlying word is doubled with 25distributive plural meaning: Sila ŋ ápat ay nagkagá-kagalìt. The four of them all got angry at one another.

Similarly, an explicit plural with mag-si-pag- is formed (cf. § 386,b): Nagsipagkasirá silà. They had a falling out.

407. (a) mag-ka- r pag-ka-ka- r. The reduplication of the 30root expresses repeated action in a form with retraction of accent and irregular insertion of ŋ after the prefix: Sya y nagkàkaŋdadápaʾ. He kept falling on his face.

(b) mag-ka- D pag-ka-ka- D. Doubling of the root seems a more regular expression of the same value: nagkàkaumpòg-umpòg. 35

408. Special static words with mag-ka- are simply dual collectives with mag- (§ 358,a) from underlying words with ka- (§ 398): Aŋ banìg ni Hwàn at ni Pédro ay magkaánib (or: magkasánib) sa pagkàlátag. Juan’s and Pedro’s sleeping-mats overlap 40each other as they are spread. aŋ magkabaláe a pair of persons related by intermarriage of their children (more insistent on the relational element, but practically equal to magbaláe, § 358,a). Aŋ dalawa ŋ manòk ay magkabukòd naŋ kuluŋàn. The two chickens [270]were in separate crates. Aŋ búkid ni Hwàn at ni Pédro ay magkarátig. Juan’s field and Pedro’s border on each other. Si Pédro at si Hwàn ay magkapantày. Pedro and Juan are of the same height. aŋ magkapatìd two brothers or sisters, a brother and 5a sister. aŋ magkapútol na si Andrès at si Rafayèl the brothers Andrés and Rafael. Magkapútol kamì ni Hwàn naŋ bároʾ. Juan and I have blouses made of the same cloth. dalawà ŋ bágay na gàgawi ŋ magkasunòd two things that are to be done one after the other.

10(a) From kababáyan (§ 398,d): dalawà ŋ estudyànte ŋ magkababáyan two students from the same town.

409. mag-ka-ka. As the explicit plural corresponding to these duals reduplicates the underlying word (§ 358,b), the syllable ka- is repeated in this meaning: aŋ magkakapatìd a group of 15three or more brothers and (or) sisters; in the same meaning aŋ magkakapútol. So also from: bukòd, sáma, súnoʾ.

(a) The form magkababáyan (§ 408,a) rejects the extra reduplication, and is therefore plural as well as dual: tatlo ŋ estudyànte ŋ magkababáyan three students from the same town.

20410. mag-kà- pag-ka-kà-. The transient with mag- and abstract with pag- r from underlying words with kà- have the accidental value of the latter prefix, usually with a dual reciprocal meaning. Sa kabilà ŋ bandà mo ibwàl aŋ púno ŋ iyàn, sapagkàt kuŋ irè ay ibuwal kò y baká magkádagan aŋ dalawa ŋ púnoʾ. 25Fell your tree in the direction away from me, so that if I fell this one, the two trees won’t fall one on top of the other. Magkàkàdagàn aŋ dalawa ŋ púno ŋ itò, kapag hindí mo ibinwàl sa kabilà ŋ bandà iya ŋ pinùpútol mo. These two trees will fall one on top of the other, if you don’t make the one you are cutting down fall 30the other way. Nagkádagan aŋ dalawa ŋ bátaʾ naŋ mahúlog sila sa hagdàn. The two children landed one on top of the other when they fell from the ladder. Ilabas mò sa búkid, Kulàs, aŋ dalawa ŋ sáko ŋ pálay na nagkàkàdagàn na nása baŋàn. Nicolás, take out to the field the two bags of rice that are lying one on top of the 35other in the granary. Aŋ pagkakáiba naŋ ugáli ni Pédro at ni Hwàn ay gáya naŋ pagkakáiba naŋ túbig at naŋ apòy. The difference in character between Pedro and Juan is like the difference between water and fire. magkáhiwalày part from each other (by force of circumstances, of two people). Aŋ ikinahátì naŋ palayòk 40ay aŋ masamà ŋ pagkakálagay nitò. What caused the rice-pot to break was the bad way it was placed. magkàmáyaw harmonize. aŋ pagkakásabày the happening at the same time of two events. Sya [271]y nagkàsála. He sinned (against the moral order, God, etc.) Aŋ pagkakàsála kay Bathálaʾ ay pinarùrusáhan sa infiyèrno. Sinning against God is punished in hell. Bìbilhin kò aŋ kabáyo ŋ iyòn, kuŋ magkàkàsya aŋ áki ŋ kwaltà. I shall buy this horse, if my 5money is sufficient. Walá sila ŋ pagkakásundòʾ. The two don’t agree on anything. aŋ pagkakátaòn the coincidence in time of one event with another, of two events. aŋ pagkakátayòʾ the standing up together (even of more than two people).

(a) Somewhat different are kuŋ magkàbihíraʾ at odd times; 10kuŋ magkágayòn when things turn out thus, when this is the state of affairs. So also, with static value: Aŋ magkábila ŋ dúlo naŋ lápis ay matúlis. Both ends of the pencil are sharpened.

411. mag-kà- D pag-ka-kà- D. With doubled root plurality is expressed: Nagkàhiwá-hiwalày aŋ maŋa dáhun naŋ librò. The 15leaves of the book came apart. Aŋ maŋa ginágawá nya ŋ paŋísip naŋ maŋa makabuluhà ŋ fétsa naŋ istòriya ay aŋ pagkakàsunòd-sunòd at pagítan nilà. He remembers the important dates of history by their sequence and their intervals.

(a) With accent shift, from a barytone root: Nagkàputol-putòl 20aŋ katawàn naŋ táo ŋ nàsagasáan naŋ trèn. The body of the man who was run over by the train got all mangled. Nagkàkàputol-putòl aŋ katawàn naŋ bála ŋ táo ŋ màsagasáan naŋ trèn. The body of a person run over by a train is cut to pieces. Magkàkàputol-putòl aŋ túbo ŋ kristàl na iyàn kapag iyo ŋ ibinagsàk. If 25you drop that glass tube, it will break into a thousand pieces.

412. ka- (1) -in, k-in-a-. The simple direct passive is formed from an underlying derived word with ka- with normal meaning. So from ka-lában, ka-úsap.

(a) A special static word corresponding to those in § 366 is 30aŋ kinákapatìd the child of one’s godparents (from ka-patìd).

From it are derived the dual collective (§ 358,a) magkinákapatìd a pair of such, and the plural (§ 358,b) magkikinákapatìd three or more, as a group.

413. i-ka- i-k-in-a-. The instrumental passive with prefix ka- 35has a specialized meaning: it expresses transiently, an inanimate, or at least irrational and involuntary, object or circumstance which causes such and such an action: and this latter action is in turn also involuntary or out of control of the actor (as, for instance, the ability to do a thing), see § 432 ff.

40Aŋ kawalàn ni Andrès naŋ hánap-búhay sa báya ŋ itò ay sya nyà ŋ ikinaalìs. Andrés’ inability to make a living in this town is what forced him to leave. Aŋ malì ŋ anyò naŋ pulúbe ay siyà [272]ŋ ikinaáwaʾ sa kanya ni Hwàn. The bad condition of the beggar was what made Juan pity him. Aŋ pagsasakày naŋ kutséro naŋ maŋa táo ŋ may sakìt na nakàhàháwa ay sya ŋ ikinabáwì naŋ kanya ŋ pahintúlot. The driver’s taking people with contagious 5diseases into his carriage was what caused his license to be withdrawn. Aŋ ikinaháraŋ naŋ maŋà naglálakàd ay aŋ pagkáalam naŋ maŋa tulisàn na silà y may dalà ŋ kwaltà. What caused the wayfarers to be held up was the robbers’ happening to know that they had money with them. Ikinaháte ni Hwàn sa búŋa aŋ kanya 10ŋ laséta. Juan’s knife enabled him to cut the betel fruit. Aŋ pagkasála nya sa siŋsìŋ ay aŋ hindí niya ikinakúha naŋ ganti ŋ pálaʾ. His missing the ring is what kept him from winning the prize. Yòn ay áki ŋ ikinalúluŋkòt. I am sorry, I am sorry to hear that. Aŋ paŋuŋublì naŋ maŋa sundálo ay sya nilà ŋ hindí ikinamatày. 15The soldiers’ keeping in hiding is what saved their lives. Ikinapútol naŋ yantòk na pamáloʾ aŋ pagkàpálu kay Hwàn. The caning Juan got broke the rattan that was used on him. Ikinapùpútol naŋ marámi ŋ tubò aŋ malakàs na háŋin. The strong wind is making much sugar-cane break. Ikapùpútol naŋ maŋa saŋà naŋ 20káhoy aŋ malakàs na háŋi ŋ itò. This strong wind will cause many branches of trees to break off. Ikapùpútol nya sa maŋa kawáyan aŋ paggúlaŋ nitò. The aging of the bamboo plants will force him to cut them down. Aŋ pagkalúnod naŋ Kastílaʾ ay ikinatákot naŋ tatlò ŋ magkakaybígan. The drowning of the Spaniard frightened 25the three friends. Aŋ kanyà ŋ pagmamasìd sa maŋa tálaʾ sa gabì ay sya nyà ŋ malakì ŋ ikinatútuwàʾ. His observation of the stars at night is his great source of pleasure.

Similarly, from: biŋì, búhay, búti, gálit, háŋoʾ, húlog, káya, lípat, lúgi, túloŋ, walàʾ.

30414. i-pag-ka- i-p-in-ag-ka. With pag- this instrumental passive corresponds to the active with magka- (§ 405). The reduplication of the durative forms affects the ka-.

Aŋ ipinagkagusto nyà ŋ kumáin naŋ sorbétes ay aŋ kainítan. It is the heat which makes him want to eat ices. Ipagkákamatày 35naŋ maŋa manòk aŋ masamà ŋ túbig. The bad water will make the chickens die. Aŋ kalamigàn sa tagulàn ay sya ŋ ipinagkàkamuò naŋ túbig sa ílog. The cold weather in winter is what makes the water in the river congeal. Baká ipagkawalá naŋ maŋa manòk sa kuluŋàn aŋ pagpapapások mo doòn niyà ŋ 40áso. See that your putting that dog into the enclosure doesn’t make the chickens try to get away. Ipagkákawalà naŋ bíhag aŋ pagkàbalítaʾ sa kanyà naŋ parúsa ŋ kàkamtan nyà. The captive’s being told of the punishment he will get, will make him try [273]to escape. Ipinagkawalá nya sa kùlúŋan aŋ pagpapahírap sa kanyà. Their torturing him made him escape from his confinement. Ipinagkákawalà nya sa bìlaŋgúan aŋ masamà ŋ pagpapakáin sa kanya díto. The bad food they gave him in the jail made 5him try to escape.

415. Similarly, with accent shift this passive corresponds to the active with mag-ka- (1), § 406,b. Ipinagkàkabalèʾ (or: ipinagkàkaputòl) naŋ maŋa saŋà naŋ káhoy aŋ bagyò ŋ itò. This hurricane is breaking off many branches of trees. Naŋ ipagkaputòl naŋ 10áki ŋ maŋa tubò aŋ háŋin ay naluŋkùt akò. When the wind broke down my sugar-cane I was dismayed. Ipinagkaputòl naŋ maŋa tubò aŋ malakàs na háŋi ŋ nagdaàn. The recent strong wind broke down much sugar-cane.

Similarly: ipinagkasakìt (sákit).

15416. Special static forms with i-ka- are made from the numerals, with occasional contraction, forming ordinals and fractions: ikaánim ikánim the sixth; ikaápat ikápat the fourth, a fourth, a quarter; ikalawà the second; ikalimà the fifth; ikapitò the seventh; ikatlò the third. Cf. § 347,a.

20(a) The ordinal corresponding to isà one is however the independent root úna first; half is kalaháteʾ, § 519.

(b) From phrases, of course, the higher numbers: ikaisa-ŋ-daàn hundredth; ikaisa-ŋ-laksàʾ millionth; ikaisa-ŋ-líbo thousandth; ikasa-m-pùʾ tenth; ikalabi-ŋ-isà eleventh; ikadalawa-ŋ-pùʾ twentieth; 25ikadalawa-ŋ-pù-t-isà twenty-first.

417. i-kà- i-k-in-à-. The instrumental passive from the root with accented kà- differs from that with unaccented ka- (§ 413) in that the action or occurrence caused is not only involuntary but accidental and entirely out of the control of the actor (see 30§ 458 ff.).

Aŋ ikinàgùgusto kò sa kayibígan ko ŋ si Hwàn ay aŋ kanya ŋ mabaìt na ugáliʾ. What makes me have a liking for my friend Juan is his lovable character. Aŋ ginawá nya ŋ paggugupìt sa maŋa retáso ŋ itinàtágo naŋ kanya ŋ nánay ay sya nyà ŋ ikinàpáloʾ. 35His cutting up the patches his mother was saving is what made it necessary to thrash him. Aŋ ikinásakay nyà sa kabáyo ŋ bara-barà ay aŋ kawalàn nya naŋ iba ŋ kabáyo. What made him get on the wild horse was his lack of other horses. Ikinátahol naŋ áso aŋ pagkádapá ni Hwan. Juan’s falling down made the dog 40bark.

So also from: iyàk, pátag.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Aŋ pagkátahol naŋ áso [274]ay sya ŋ ikinágisiŋ naŋ natùtúlug na bátaʾ. The barking of the dog was what made the sleeping child wake up. Ikàtàtawa nyà aŋ iyo ŋ sàsabíhin. He won’t be able to keep from laughing when you say that. Ikinàtàtawà ni Hwàn aŋ sinábi ni Pédro. What 5Pedro said makes Juan laugh in spite of himself.

418. Corresponding to primary actives with mag- contrasted with -um-, and with maŋ-, we should expect pag- and paŋ- to be retained before the root in these formations; the only example is: ikinápagtirà, corresponding to magtirà, in contrast with tumirà 10(§§ 348. 351).

419. ka- (1) -an, k-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with ka- is used when the action is an involuntary one, especially an emotion, of a rational actor, or when the actor is inanimate or irrational.

15Aŋ hulihàn naŋ maŋa kinagalítan ni Patúpat ay idináos naŋ maŋa gwàrdiya-sibìl kagabè. The arrest of the people who have incurred Patupat’s anger was carried out by the gendarmes last night. Kahiyaàn mò aŋ táo ŋ matandàʾ. Reverence the aged. aŋ kinahulúgan naŋ bátaʾ the place from which the child fell. Aŋ 20bintána ŋ iyàn aŋ syà ŋ kahùhulúgan naŋ bátaʾ, pag hindí mo isinarà. The child will fall out of that window, if you don’t shut it. Baká ninyo kalunúran aŋ ílog, maŋa bátaʾ. See that you don’t get drowned in that river, children. Aŋ kanya ŋ kalùlunúran ay aŋ ílog na itò. He will get drowned in this river some day. 25aŋ báhay na kinamatayàn the house where someone died, aŋ báhay naŋ kinamatayàn the house in which someone died, the house of the bereaved family. Kinapatiràn naŋ lúbid aŋ lugàr na malápit sa dúlo-ŋ-bandà-ŋ-kaliwàʾ. The rope broke at a point near the left-hand end. Aŋ kapàpatiràn naŋ sinúlid ay malápit sa buhòl. 30The place where the thread will break is near the knot there. Kinatakútan nya aŋ báhay na pinagpatayàn sa kúraʾ. He was afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Aŋ kinatàtakútan naŋ maŋa bátaʾ ay aŋ núnoʾ. The children are afraid of the ghost. Katakútan ninyò aŋ núnoʾ. You had better be afraid of ghosts. Kinatamaràn 35ni Hwàn aŋ kanyà ŋ pagaáral. Juan became neglectful about his studying. Naŋ katamaràn ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ pagaáral ay malápit na syà ŋ makatápos naŋ karéra. When Juan became lazy about his studies, he was already near the end of his course. Katàtamaran nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ pagaáral, pag binigyàn mo syà naŋ 40marámi ŋ salapèʾ. He will be lazy about his studies, if you give him too much money.

Similarly from: buwísit, íwan, kíta, walàʾ. [275]

(a) With shifted root: Isa ŋ pulúbe aŋ kinaàawaàn ni Hwàn. It was a beggar who aroused Juan’s pity.

420. pag-ka- (1) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (1) -an; pag-ka- (2) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (2) -an. Local passives with pag- before the ka- involve 5a plurality of actors. The durative reduplication affects the ka-; barytone roots have an extra accent-shift.

Aŋ kináin naŋ usà ay malakì ŋ pinagkàkagustuhàn naŋ maŋa Ilóko. The Iloco are very fond of the contents of deers’ stomachs. Pinagkàkalipumpunàn naŋ maŋa laŋgàm aŋ púto. The ants are 10swarming all over the cake. Aŋ pinagkamatayàn naŋ maŋa kambèŋ ay aŋ lugàr na itò. This is the place where the goats perished. Hwag mò ŋ dalhìn sa bundòk aŋ maŋa manòk, sapagkàt iyò y kanilà ŋ pagkàkamatayàn. Don’t take the chickens into the hills, for they would die there.

15Barytone roots: Pinagkatakutàn nilà aŋ báhay na pinagpatayàn sa kúraʾ. They were afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Pinagkàkatakutàn nilà aŋ maŋa mababagsìk na háyop. They are afraid of wild animals. Hwag mò ŋ ipamalítaʾ aŋ nàkíta nátin díto, sapagkàt baká aŋ lugàr na itò y pagkatakutàn. 20Don’t tell what we have seen here, for this place would be feared. Pagkàkatakutàn nilà aŋ lugàr na itò, pag nàláman nilà aŋ naŋyári ŋ paghaharaŋàn díto. They will be afraid of this place when they know of the hold-ups that occurred here. aŋ pinagkatalunàn that which was the occasion of winning by many (tálo).

25421. ka- S -an. Special static words, corresponding to those with S -an (§ 377) are formed with prefix ka- from oxytone roots; in meaning they are collectives and abstracts of quality: aŋ kasàyáhan gladness; Aŋ katàmáran ni Patrísiyo ay katutúboʾ sa kanya ŋ láhiʾ. Patricio’s laziness is inborn in his family. So from the 30roots: baìt, banàl, damdàm, daŋàl, duwàg, lagày, luŋkòt, luwàŋ, mahàl, malìʾ, matày, pintàs, saŋkàp, tuŋkòl, tuwàʾ, tuwìd.

Divergent in meaning is aŋ Kapampáŋan a Pampanga, if from paŋpàŋ.

The secondary accent is lacking, irregularly, in kalayáan 35(layàʾ); with contraction in kayiláŋan, kayláŋan (beside kailáŋan, from ilàŋ).

(a) This latter word underlies an active with maŋ-, an abstract with paŋ- r, and a simple direct passive: naŋàŋayiláŋan requires; aŋ paŋaŋayiláŋan need, necessity; Kàkayilaŋáni ŋ magdaàn 40si Pédro ríto bágu sya umalìs. Pedro will have to come here before he leaves.

(b) From a derived word, with the secondary accent irregularly placed: Boo ŋ báyan ay nagdíwaŋ sa kapaŋànákan ni Risàl. [276]The whole country celebrated Rizal’s birthday; also: aŋ áraw naŋ kapaŋànákan birthday,—from paŋanàk (§ 347).

422. ka- (2) -an. Barytone roots have, in the same sense, an accent shift of two syllables, corresponding to § 379. Boò ŋ 5kabahayàn aŋ nàkíta námin sa gitnà naŋ daàn. We saw a whole set of household goods in the middle of the road; also: aŋ kabahayàn a house containing several dwellings. Marámi sa maŋa táo aŋ nakàkìkilála naŋ kanila ŋ karapatàn, dátapuwat nakalìlímot naŋ kanila ŋ katuŋkúlan. Many are the people who know their 10rights but forget their duties. Aŋ karamútan naŋ páreʾ ay nagìŋ kasabihàn. The stinginess of the priest is proverbial. Aŋ katakutàn sa Dyòs ay isa ŋ kabàítan. Fear of the Lord is a virtue. Aŋ pagbibigày naŋ sigarìlyo ay isa sa maŋa matatandà ŋ kaugaliàn sa Filipínas. Giving cigarettes is one of the old customs in the Philippines. 15aŋ kawikaàn a proverb.

So from abála, áraw, búlo, gámit, húlog, íbig, láŋit, payápaʾ, síraʾ, tápos, útos.

With contraction: kahariyàn, kaharyàn (háriʾ), and, if from táo, katawàn body.

20(a) From the latter word there is an abstract of action, with paŋ- r: aŋ paŋaŋatawàn physique (cf. pananamìt, etc., § 357).

423. ka- (1) -an. Corresponding to the formation (1) -an (§ 378), the collective-abstracts of this type with ka- have formal irregularities and, where there is any contrast (e. g. mahàl), less 25explicit and more specialized meaning than the preceding two groups.

aŋ kaalátan saltiness (of water). Sa gabì ŋ itò aŋ kabilúgan naŋ buwàn. The fullness of the moon is tonight. Aŋ kadalamhatían ay isa ŋ damdámi ŋ hindí nàràrápat sa táo. Grief is an 30emotion not becoming to a man or woman. aŋ karunúŋan wisdom. aŋ kahaŋalàn foolishness (aŋ haŋàl a fool). aŋ kaibhàn the difference. aŋ kalinísan cleanness, cleanliness. aŋ kamatsiŋàn monkey-tricks, naughtiness. aŋ kamuráhan cheapness. Sawìʾ aŋ kanya ŋ kapaláran. His luck is bad. Sa kapanayàn naŋ ulàn kuŋ tagulàn 35ay hindí masiglà aŋ báyan. The town is not cheerful during the unabated rains of the rainy season. Aŋ maŋa táo y marámi ŋ kasalánan. People have many sins. aŋ kasamaàn badness. kasawiàn poor position, awkwardness. kasinuŋalíŋan falsehood, a lie. kasipágan diligence. Aŋ desgrásya ŋ naŋyári kay Hwàn ay isa ŋ 40hampàs naŋ katalagahàn. The misfortune which has come to Juan is a blow of fate. Aŋ kanila ŋ pagílag ay hindí katapáŋan. Their fleeing was not a brave act. aŋ boò ŋ kataúhan all mankind. aŋ [277]katipúnan a meeting, Katipúnan a secret society organized against the Spaniards; a member of this. kayabáŋan pride.

So from: bábaʾ, bábaw, bigàt, buháŋin, búhay, búti, dalàs, dámi, dámot, dániw (if karaniyúwan is so to be analyzed), dilìm, 5ginháwa, gúbat, hábaʾ, hínaʾ, hírap, iklìʾ, ínit, lakàs, lakì, lamìg, lápad, láon, liìt, lóko, lúnod, lupìt, mahàl, maŋmàŋ, páraŋ, fiyèsta, pulòʾ, sakìm, salàt, salbáhi, salúkoy, taàs, Tagálog, tahímik, tákaw, tákot, talíno, tampalásan, taŋháliʾ, túlin, túnay, totoò, ulòl, walàʾ, yáman.

10(a) From a phrase: Iyò y kawala-ŋ-hyaàn ni Pédro. That was a shameless action of Pedro’s (walà ŋ hiyàʾ).

(b) From derived words: aŋ Kakapampaŋánan the Pampanga country (Kapampáŋan, § 421).

aŋ boò ŋ kamaganákan nina Krùs, Bantòg, at iba pà the whole 15relationship of the Cruz’s, Bantogs, and so on; aŋ boò ŋ kamaganákan ni Pédro Vyóla the whole family of Pedro Viola (magának, § 358,a).

aŋ kapaŋyaríhan power (-paŋyári, as though by § 347).

424. ka- r (1) -an, ka- r (2) -an. With reduplication of the 20root and accent shift of one syllable for an oxytone root, of two in barytone roots, ka- and -an form special static words denoting something surprising or provocative of such and such an emotion.

Itù y kagagawàn ni Hwàn! This is some of Juan’s work! cf. Itù y gawá ni Hwàn. Juan did this, made this. Aŋ pagkáupo 25ni Pédro sa sùgálan ay kagagawàn naŋ isa nyà ŋ kaybígan. Pedro’s sitting at the gaming-table was the work of one of his fine friends. Aŋ pàtáya ŋ naŋyári kagabì ay kagagawàn ni Pédro. The killing which occurred last night was some of Pedro’s doing. So: katuturàn a correct outcome (tuwìd).

30Barytone roots: Aŋ katatakutàn naŋ bátaʾ ay aŋ núnoʾ. The thing that arouses the child’s fear is a ghost. Aŋ kanya ŋ katatawanàn ay aŋ uŋgòʾ. His source of laughter is the monkey. aŋ salità ŋ katatawanàn a jest-word, a funny expression.

425. With secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying 35word, ka- and -an form also words denoting one of two reciprocal actors. This is the form for oxytone roots, aŋ kabìgáyan a person with whom one exchanges gifts. Si Hwána ay siya ŋ kabùlúŋan ni Maryà. Juana is the one Maria whispers with. aŋ kahampásan one of two who perform mutual flagellation, kahìráman 40one of two who borrow from each other. kaìnúman person one drinks with. kakàlabítan one of two who touch each other. Aŋ kapàtáyan ni Hwàn ay si Pédro. Juan is engaged in a mortal conflict with Pedro. Aŋ kapàtíran ni Hwána naŋ sinúlid ay aŋ [278]kanya ŋ kaybíga ŋ si Maryà. Juana cuts thread with her friend Maria. aŋ kasàlitáan the person with whom one converses. Si Hwàn ay kaùlúlan ni Pédro. Juan and Pedro fool each other. aŋ kaùpúan one of two who sit together.

5426. Barytone roots add accent shift of one syllable. Aŋ kahùlúgan nya naŋ súhaʾ ay aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd. The one with whom he takes turns at dropping down grape-fruit from the tree is his brother. aŋ kahùníhan one of two birds that chirp at each other. aŋ kaìbígan one of two who love each other. aŋ kakàínan 10one of two who eat together. Si Hwána ay siya ŋ kapùtúlan ni Maryà naŋ kukò. Juana and Maria cut each other’s fingernails. aŋ kasùlátan one’s correspondent. aŋ katàlúnan one’s opponent in a dispute.

(a) The shift is due to the root in: Si Maryà ay syà ŋ kaàbútan 15ni Hwána naŋ maŋa mabaŋù ŋ bulaklàk. Maria and Juana hand each other fragrant flowers (as in some ceremony or game).

(b) With contraction and lack of secondary accent: aŋ kayibígan, kaybígan a friend (contrast kaìbígan above).

(c) In a few instances barytone roots have accent shift of 20two syllables without secondary accent. Si Maryáno ay kahatakàn ni Kulàs naŋ lúbid. Mariano is pulling at the rope against Nicolás. aŋ kamurahàn one of two who curse at each other (with meaning ordinarily peculiar to the shifted root, § 337). Sumúloŋ at Kasamahàn Sumulong and Company. kasulatàn one’s correspondent 25(equal to kasùlátan, above). Aŋ katuruàn ni Pédro ay aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn. Pedro and little Juan are pointing at each other.

427. These formations serve as underlying words of a few derivatives:

(a) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r (§ 352): aŋ 30pagkakayibígan the joining in friendship of two people.

(b) Secondary active with maki- from the preceding: makipagkayibígan win one’s way into someone’s friendship, become friends with someone.

(c) Dual collective with mag- (§ 358,a): Si Pédro at si Hwàn 35ay magkahìráman naŋ sambalílo at sandàlyas. Pedro and Juan lend each other hats and sandals. magkaìbígan a pair of lovers. magkaybígan a pair of friends.

(d) Where the dual value of the underlying form is weak, explicit plurals of the preceding with mag- r (§ 358,b) occur: aŋ 40magkakaybígan a group of three or more friends. aŋ magkakasamahà ŋ si Pédro, si Hwàn, at si Andrès the party consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andrés. aŋ magkakasamahà ŋ sina Pédro the [279]party of Pedro and his followers. Aŋ magkakasamahà ŋ nagsipagpasyàl ay sina Maryà, Hwána, Pédro, at Kulàs. The party that went for a walk consisted of Maria, Juana, Pedro, and Nicolás. Aŋ magkakasamahà ŋ napasa húloʾ at napaluwásan ay sinà 5Mariyáno, Pépe, at Kulàs at sina Pédro, Húlyo, at Andrès. The groups that went upstream and downstream were, respectively, Mariano, Pepe, and Nicolás and Pedro, Julio, and Andrès. Aŋ tatlo ŋ manòk na ytò y magkakasamahà ŋ inihatid díto, aŋ ibà y magkakabukòd. These three chickens were brought here together, 10the others each by itself.

428. kà- (1) -an, k-in-à- (1) -an. Local passives with kà- denote the place where someone or something happens to be. Hwag kà ŋ kumibòʾ sa iyò ŋ kinàdòroonàn. Don’t stir from the spot (where you happen to be). Sa alì ŋ bandà aŋ kinàdòroonàn naŋ 15báya-ŋ-Kamálig?—Sa bandà ŋ kaliwàʾ. In which direction is the town of Camalig?—Toward the left. Aŋ báya-ŋ-Balíwag ay aŋ kinàmahalà ŋ úna ŋ úna naŋ pálay. The town of Baliuag was the first place where rice got dear. Aŋ kàpàpatayàn sa táo ŋ iyàn ay aŋ bigtíhan. This man will end on the gallows. Aŋ báya-ŋ-Balíwag 20aŋ iyu ŋ kàtùtuŋúhan pag tinuntùn mo aŋ landàs na iyàn. You will get to the town of Baliuag if you follow that path.

Similarly from: bíŋit, búrol, kulòŋ, lagày, tágoʾ, tayòʾ, tirà, upòʾ.

Divergent in meaning are kinàbukásan (§ 260) and, from a 25phrase, kinàháti-ŋ-gabihàn (§ 260, háti ŋ gabì).

429. pag-kà- (1) -an, p-in-ag-kà- (1) -an. Local passives of this type with pag- reduplicate the kà-; they refer to other local passive relations than place in which; so: pagkàkilanlàn be the occasion of showing something; pagkàsyahàn be the container of 30something that fits in; pagkàsunduwàn, pagkàsunduàn be agreed upon.

430. Special static words with kà- and -an are few and differ in meaning.

(a) Aŋ kàgalítan nila Andrès, Hwàn, at Mariyáno ay napáwì 35na. The quarrel between Andrés, Juan, and Mariano has been appeased; this is no doubt merely a plural with S -an (§ 377,a) from the underlying word kagalìt (§ 398,c).

It forms the underlying word of a simple active with mag- and abstract with pag- r: aŋ pagkakàgalítan a quarrel (of two or more 40people).

(b) Si Pédro ay kàibígan ni Maryà. Pedro is liked by Maria. Sina Pédro, Kulàs, at Hwàn ay sya ŋ maŋa kàibígan ni Mariyáno. [280]Pedro, Nicolàs, and Juan are the ones whom Mariano likes. This is probably a real special static word corresponding to the transient with kà- (1) -an (§ 428).

Derived active with mag-: Nagkàkàibígan si Pédro at si 5Hwána. Pedro and Juana are in love with each other, have come to like each other.

(c) Aŋ kàtwáan ay náhintòʾ sa pagdatìŋ naŋ isa ŋ magnanákaw. The rejoicing was stopped by the coming of a robber. This is, in form at least, a plural with S -an from an underlying -katuwàʾ, 10which is not known.

Derived active with mag-: magkàtwáan rejoice together, be merry together.

The same form is seen in kàliŋkíŋan; little finger, fifth finger; if this is from a root -liŋkìŋ.

15431. ka- (1) D -an. With doubling of the root and radical accent shift: Kàunà-unáha ŋ dumatìŋ si Hwàn. Juan got there the very first. So: kàhulì-hulíhan the very last.

(3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

432. The prefix ka- in its involuntary meaning and the prefix 20kà- in its accidental meaning appear in an additional set of transients and abstracts with maka-, makà- prefixed for the active, ma-, mà- for the passives, and pagka-, pagkà- for the abstract. The meanings of these forms are most varied; especially in the direct passive, where the involuntary or accidental character of the actor 25sometimes reaches the point where an actor is entirely left out of view or lacking, and the passive borders closely on active meaning. For this reason it will be convenient to divide the uses into a number of somewhat arbitrarily defined groups. The forms are as follows:

30433. The active forms with ka- are: maka-, maka- R, naka-, naka- R; abstract pagka-.

The active expresses an inanimate object or circumstance causing an emotion or feeling; the meaning, then, is the same as in the forms with i-ka- (§ 413), except that here the thing causing 35the emotion is viewed as an actor. Nakabùbúlag aŋ ílaw. The light is blinding. Aŋ gamòt na itò aŋ nakaginháwa sa máy sakìt. This medicine is what relieved the patient. Itò y makapàpáwì naŋ gútom (úhaw, ginàw, ínit, págod). This will relieve the hunger (thirst, cold feeling, hot feeling, fatigue). Aŋ áwit naŋ maŋa 40íbon ay nakatútuwàʾ. The song of the birds is gladdening. Similarly from: bigàt, biŋì, búti, lasìŋ, ligáya, síraʾ, tákot.

434. The active expresses, further, an inanimate object [281]which has got (in the past) into such and such a condition or position.

Aŋ baŋkàʾ ay nakaáyon sa ágos. The canoe is righted with the stream. Aŋ pagkáin ay nakahandá nà. Dinner is served. Nakasábit 5sa pákoʾ aŋ áki ŋ amerikána. My coat is hanging on the nail. Nakasigàŋ aŋ palayùk naŋ sináiŋ. The rice-pot is on the fire. Hindí ko bìbilhìn aŋ kabáyo ŋ iyòn, káhit na makasísiya aŋ áki ŋ kwaltà. I would not buy this horse, even if my money should be sufficient. Similarly: daàn, lawìt, táliʾ, túloŋ.

10435. Very similar is the use of the active to describe an animate actor in such and such a position (into which he has got): Nakadapàʾ aŋ maŋa táo sa kanila ŋ báhay hábaŋ lumílindòl. The people lay prone in their houses during the earthquake. Si Pédro ay nakaháwak sa taburéte naŋ sya y retratúhan. Pedro 15had hold of a chair when he was photographed. Nakasakày aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn sa áso naŋ sya y màkíta ko sa bakúran. Little Juan was mounted (i. e. riding) on the dog when I saw him in the yard. Nakatayó si Pédro naŋ ákin sya ŋ màkíta. Pedro was standing up when I saw him. Nakaupó sya sa baŋkòʾ. He was 20seated on the bench. So from: abàŋ, hiléra, íkid, kápit, luhòd, paŋàw, taluŋkòʾ, tindìg.

436. The active may denote an animate actor who is able, succeeds in doing so and so; the involuntary element inheres in the matter of ability, which is not dependent on the actor’s will: 25Sa gana ŋ ákin sya y makaáalìs. So far as I am concerned, he may go. Sa tigàs naŋ kanya ŋ loòb ay walà ŋ makabáleʾ. There is no one (or, under the type in § 433, nothing) can break the firmness of his will. Nakagágawàʾ aŋ alílà naŋ páyoŋ. The servant is able to make umbrellas. Nakagupìt sya naŋ makapàl na 30damìt. He succeeded in cutting thick cloth. Si Pédro ay hindí makaháwak naŋ palakòl, sapagkàt masakìt aŋ kanya ŋ kamày. Pedro cannot hold an ax, because his hand is sore. Naàári ŋ sya y makahigàʾ. He may lie down. Hindí ako makahiŋí naŋ kwaltà kay Hwàn. I cannot (bring myself to) ask Juan for money. Nakahúlog 35sya naŋ isa ŋ nyòg sa kanya ŋ pagpukòl sa kumpòl. He succeeded in bringing down a cocoanut, in his throwing at the cluster. Aŋ bátaʾ ay hindí makakáin, sapagkàt kumáin sya naŋ marámi ŋ kakanìn. The child can’t eat because he has eaten so many sweets. Si Pédro ay hindí nakapùpútol naŋ káhoy, sapagkàt 40bágu ŋ gáliŋ sya sa sakìt. Pedro cannot cut any wood, for he has just recovered from sickness. Sa tantyà raw nyà ay makapùpútol na sya naŋ káhoy, sapagkàt sya y malakas nà. He reckons he will be able to cut wood, for he is strong again. Nakasásakay [282]syà sa kabáyo. He is able to mount the horse. Aŋ báta y nakasùsúlat nà. The child is already able to write. Hindí ako makasúlat. I can’t write. Aŋ máy sakit ay nakatátayú nà. The patient is already able to stand up. Hindí ako nakatípon naŋ maŋa 5dáhon, sapagkàt walá ako ŋ kalaykày. I was not able to pile up the leaves, because I had no rake. Aŋ húle ŋ isdá ni Hwàn ay nakawalàʾ. The fish Juan caught got away. Similarly from: akiyàt, balìk, báyad, dalà, datìŋ, kílos, kúha, lákad, pások, sagòt, sigàw, suwày, tahòl, takbò, tirà, úbos, úsap.

10Abstracts: Aŋ mákina ay syà ŋ dahilàn naŋ pagkagawá ni Pédro naŋ páyoŋ. The machine is the cause of Pedro’s ability to make umbrellas. Aŋ pagkasakáy nyà sa kabáyo ŋ bara-barà ay hindí dahilàn sa kanya ŋ tápaŋ, dátapuwat dahilàn sa marámi ŋ iba ŋ táo ŋ nagsipígil sa kabáyo. His ability to get on the wild 15horse was not due to his courage, but to the many other people who controlled the horse. Aŋ kanya ŋ pagkatípon sa maŋa kalabàw ay nanyári dáhil sa marámi ŋ túloŋ. His success in rounding up the carabao was due to much aid.

437. Closely bordering on the preceding type is the active, 20mostly with the particle nà, expressing the actor of a completed action. Nakaalìs na siyà. He has already (succeeded in going, i. e.) gone away. Nakapútul nà si Pédro naŋ káhoy. Pedro has now finished cutting wood. Si Pédro ay nakapútul nà naŋ káhoy, bágo ko ŋ inutúsa ŋ maŋigìb. Pedro had already cut the wood, 25before I asked him to fetch water. Similarly from: bútas, datìŋ, kúha, límot, tápos.

The abstract lends itself especially to the use as absolute attribute (§ 274): Pagkagawá nya naŋ bákod ay naglasìŋ siyà. When he had finished making the fence, he got drunk. Pagkaháraŋ 30naŋ maŋa tulisàn sa koréyo ay nagsitúŋo silà sa bundòk. When the bandits had robbed the mail, they took to the hills. Pagkaháte ni Hwàn naŋ maŋa mansánas ay umalìs sya. When Juan had distributed the apples, he went away. Pagkahúli naŋ pulìs sa magnanákaw ay dinala nyà itò sa bìlaŋgúan. When the policeman 35had caught the thief, he took him to the jail. Pagkapatày nya sa táo ŋ kanyà ŋ hináraŋ ay tumakbo syà. When he had killed the man he had held up, he ran away. Pagkapútol ni Hwàn naŋ tahìd naŋ kátyaw ay nagdudugòʾ aŋ paà nitò. When Juan had cut the spur of the rooster, its foot kept bleeding. Pagkasakày 40sa kabáyo ay naparoòn akò sa hàlamanàn at pumitàs ako naŋ isa ŋ pakwàn úpaŋ áki ŋ kánin. When I had had my horseback ride, I went to the garden and picked a melon to eat. Pagkasakày [283]ni Hwàn sa trèn ay lumákad ito ŋ agàd. When Juan had got on the train, it soon started to move. Aŋ pagkasúnog naŋ báyan ay ikinaluŋkòt naŋ marámi. The people grieved at their town having burned down. Pagkatanàw naŋ uŋgòʾ sa pagòŋ ay nagbalik 5syà sa púno-ŋ-ságiŋ. When the monkey had looked at the turtle, he went back to the banana tree. Pagkatáwag naŋ pagòŋ sa uŋgòʾ ay sumunòd itò agàd. When the turtle had called the monkey, the latter came at once. Pagkatayó nya sa kanya ŋ ùpúan ay minulàn nya agàd aŋ pagtatalumpáteʾ. When he had 10stood up from his seat he at once began making his speech. Pagkatípon mo naŋ maŋa bayábas ay umuwí ka. When you have piled up the guavas, go home. Pagkaúna nya sa takbúhan ay naghintú sya. When he had got ahead in the running, he stopped. Similarly from: alìs, bendisiyòn, gupìt, hápon, ísip, káin, kúha, 15lagòk, lútoʾ, mísa, sábi, sánay, tápos, típon, tupàd.

438. The forms of the direct passive are: ma-, ma- R; na-; na- R.

The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active in § 436, and denote the object directly affected by an action which 20an actor is able to perform.

Hindí nya mabásag aŋ bóte. He did not succeed in breaking the bottle. Sa kalakasàn ni Páblo ay nadala nyà aŋ kabà ŋ bákal. Pablo, with his strength, managed to lift the iron chest. Nadalà naŋ bátaʾ aŋ káhoy. The boy managed to carry the wood. 25Hindí madalà ni Pédro aŋ kahòn sa kabigatàn. Pedro cannot lift the box; it is too heavy. Hindí ku magámit aŋ páyoŋ na itò. I can’t use this umbrella. Hindí nakáin naŋ bátaʾ aŋ matigàs na tinápay na iyàn. The child was not able to eat that hard bread of yours. Nakáya ko ŋ buhátin aŋ isà ŋ maliìt na púno-ŋ-káhoy. 30I managed to lift one small tree. Nakàkáya ko aŋ pagaáral naŋ Iŋglès. I manage to get along with the study of English. Nakáyas ni Pédro aŋ báo. Pedro managed to smooth the cocoanut shell. Nalákad námin aŋ lahàt naŋ daàn. We managed to walk the whole way. Nalìlípon naŋ maŋa laŋgàm aŋ kanila ŋ pagkáin. 35The ants succeed in amassing their food. Hindí ko mapatày aŋ báta ŋ itò. I cannot (get myself to) kill this child. Hindí ko mapútol naŋ kamày aŋ bákal na itò. I can’t break this iron with my hand. Mapùpútol daw nyà ŋ wala ŋ túloŋ aŋ lahàt naŋ kawáya ŋ magúlaŋ. He says he will be able to cut all the old bamboo 40without any help. Hindí nya masíraʾ aŋ kandáro naŋ pintòʾ, káhit na iniyúbus nya aŋ kanya ŋ lakàs. He did not succeed in [284]breaking the lock of the door, although he used up all his strength. Natátalastàs mo bà aŋ sinàsábi ko sa iyò? Do you understand what I am saying to you? Similarly: ágaw, akiyàt, alaála, ampàt, gawàʾ, háŋoʾ, híla.

5439. Similarly, the direct passive may correspond regularly to the active of the type in § 437 and denote an object directly affected by an action which has been (successfully) completed by an actor.

Naáso ko nà sa boo ŋ báyan aŋ bátaʾ. I have hunted and 10called the child all over town. Nabálot ko nà aŋ maŋa librò. I have already wrapped up the books. Nabása ku nà aŋ diyáriyo. I have finished reading the paper. Nahampàs ko nà aŋ bátaʾ. I have already whipped the child. Nahánap na nyà aŋ librò. He has already looked for the book. Napatày ku nà aŋ manòk. I 15have already killed the chicken. Kapag napùpútol na nyà aŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy ay saká mo hatákin aŋ lúbid na nakatáli sa saŋà nitò. When he is getting the tree cut, then do you pull at the rope that is tied to the branch. Natipìd nya aŋ pagkáin naŋ kánin. He has been saving of the rice. Natípon ko nà aŋ maŋa 20dáhon. I have already heaped up the leaves. Natísod ku nà aŋ bakyàʾ. I have kicked off the sandal. Naúnat ku nà aŋ baluktòt na káwad na ibinigày mu sa ákin. I have straightened the bent wire you gave me. Nausísà ku nà si Hwàn. I have already questioned Juan. Similarly from: ágaw, gawàʾ, ípon, íwan, líbot, 25sákop, siyásat.

440. We come now to direct passives which do not correspond regularly to any active; these have their own abstracts with pagka-.

The commonest type expresses an object which undergoes or 30has undergone a process due to an inanimate actor or to no actor in particular; it differs from the simple direct passive in the involuntary and often perfectic nature of the action. Nabáleʾ aŋ saŋà naŋ káhoy. The branch of the tree is broken. Aŋ túlis naŋ lápis ay nabáleʾ. The point of the pencil is broken. Hwag mò ŋ 35ilagay dyàn aŋ palatòn, sapagkàt baká mabásag. Don’t put the plate there, for it might get broken. Aŋ kanila ŋ kàínan ay nagambála sa pagdatìŋ naŋ maŋa pulìs. Their dinner-party broke up when the police arrived. Aŋ boo ŋ báyan ay nagulò. The whole town became riotous. Naháteʾ aŋ mansánas. The apple is 40in halves. Nalagòt aŋ lúbid. The rope broke. Aŋ kanya ŋ dalíriʾ ay napásoʾ. His finger is blistered. Napatìd aŋ lúbid. The rope broke. Aŋ batò ŋ hasaàn ay napiráso. The whetstone went to pieces. Napitas nà aŋ maŋa bulaklàk. The flowers have been [285]picked. Napùpútol aŋ maŋa saŋà naŋ káhoy sa lakàs naŋ háŋin. The branches of the trees are being broken off by the force of the wind. Napútol nà aŋ káhoy. The tree has been cut down. Napútol aŋ dúlo naŋ káhoy. The end of the log is cut off. Napútol 5aŋ saŋà naŋ káhoy. The branch of the tree broke off. Nasáyaŋ aŋ trabáho ni Hwàn. Juan’s work went for naught. Aŋ búkid ay nasíraʾ. The field is waste. Similarly, from: áriʾ, bágo, buwàl, dílat, gúmon, hinòg, laglàg, lamòg, láon, páwiʾ, punòʾ, puròl, súnog, tápos, úbos, utàs, walàʾ, yáriʾ.

10The abstract is regular: daàn, hinòg, lagòt, pások, súnog, walàʾ.

441. The passive is used, further, to denote the animate performer of an involuntary act, which, then, is looked upon rather as an undergoing than as a performing.

15This is the clearest where the subject is undergoing an emotion or sensation: Naáwà si Hwàn sa pulúbe. Juan pitied the beggar. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn ay nadúduŋò. Little Juan is bashful. Naginàw sya sa kanya ŋ pagpalígoʾ. He got cold while taking his bath. Akú y nagùgútom. I am hungry; isa ŋ táo ŋ nagùgútom 20a hungry person. Nahàhápis siyà. He is sad. Nahíhiyá ka bà? Are you ashamed? Nahíhiyá sya. He is ashamed. Akù y nailàŋ. I was nonplussed, I didn’t know what to do. Akò y naíinip nà naŋ paghihintày kay Hwàn. I am impatient with waiting for Juan. Sya y nalímaŋ sa kanya ŋ pagbílaŋ. He got confused in 25his reckoning. Sya nalúluŋkòt. He is sorry. Akò y naùúhaw. I am thirsty. So: bagábag, gálit, libàŋ, tákot, tuwàʾ.

This form is used also of processes of life, especially physiological and morbid: Nalumpò syà. He got lame. Napípe sya. He got dumb. So: naáriʾ got the ability, nabáo got widowed, nabúhay 30lived, naíŋay was noisy, nakinìg heard, nalúnod got drowned, namatày died, natúlog slept.

It is used, finally, in nahúlog fell (from a place to the ground), and, strangely enough, for two voluntary actions which consist of a relaxing of the muscles: Sya y nahigàʾ He lay 35down. Sya y nahíhigàʾ. He was in the act of lying down. Naupó sya sa baŋkòʾ. He sat down on the bench. Naúupó sya sa taburéte. He was in the act of sitting down on the stool.

Further, irregularly, in: Sya y nalígoʾ. He took a bath. Sya y nanáog. He came down from the house. See § 488,c.

40Abstracts: Aŋ pagkaáwà ni Hwàn sa pulúbe Juan’s pity for the beggar. aŋ pagkabátaʾ one’s childhood. aŋ pagkabúhay ni Hesùs the resurrection of Jesus. Aŋ pagkagúlat ni Hwána ay sya nyà ŋ ipinagkasakìt. Juana’s scare was what made her sick. [286]Pagkalúnod naŋ Kastílaʾ ay lumáyas aŋ maŋa estudyànte. When the Spaniard had got drowned, the students hurried away. aŋ kanya ŋ pagkamatày his death. aŋ kanya ŋ pagkasála sa siŋsìŋ. his missing the ring. Pagkaupú nya sa baŋkòʾ ay minulàn nya 5aŋ pagkukwènto sa maŋa bátaʾ. When she had sat down on the bench, she began her story-telling to the children. So: áriʾ, hápis, húlog, litò, lóko, pípi, tákot, tálo, ulòl.

442. An explicit plural of both active and direct passive is formed by the infixation of -aŋ- into the prefix.

10In the active the syllable after this infix often receives a secondary accent: Naŋàkaupú na silà sa pagkáin, naŋ kamì ay dumatìŋ. They had already sat down to their meal when we arrived. So also from: bitàw, biyábit.

With reduplication of the ka- instead of root initial: Naŋàkàkaupó 15silà sa pagkáin. They are able to sit up for their meals.

Direct passive: Aŋ dinala nyà ŋ maŋa manòk ay naŋamatày. The chickens he brought all died. Naŋapútol aŋ tubò sa lakàs naŋ bagyò. The sugar-cane broke under the strength of the typhoon. Naŋapùpútol aŋ karamíhan naŋ tubò naŋ kasalukúyan 20aŋ bagyò. During the typhoon most of the sugar-cane got broken. So from: bulòk, íwan, lúnod, luŋkòt, tákot, tuwàʾ.

443. From a compound word, passive: nasawi-ŋ-pálad (sawì ŋ pálad).

From a derived word, active: makataanàn (taanàn, § 378).

25444. Accent shift is due to the root. Si Pédro ay nakaayàw nà. Pedro has left the table. So from ábot, sákit.

Passive: Naabut nyà aŋ ilawàn. He managed to reach the lamp. Hindí nya maabùt aŋ itlòg. He can’t reach the egg. Aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn ay nabábahày. Little Juan is shy.

30Abstract: Pagkaabòt naŋ bátà naŋ kanyà ŋ laruwàn ay tumakbò sya ŋ agàd. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran.

445. With pag- before the root, this active is made from roots whose primary active has mag-. The reduplication affects either the ka-, or the pag-, or the root initial: makà-ka-pag- or maka-pà-pag- or maka-pag- R.

35Aŋ bátaʾ ay nakapagdalà naŋ káhoy. The boy managed to bring the wood. Aŋ bátaʾ ay nakapagdádalà (or: nakàkapagdalà, or: nakapàpagdalà) naŋ káhoy. The boy is able to bring the wood. Nakàkapaglasìŋ si Ánoŋ, káhit na sya y hindí binàbayáan naŋ kanya ŋ asáwa na makapagpabilè naŋ álak. Anong manages to 40get drunk, even though his wife does not allow him to have liquor purchased for him. Nakapagpútol na si Hwàn naŋ káhoy. Juan has finished cutting wood. Nakapagpùpútol nà si Hwàn naŋ káhoy. Juan is already able to cut wood. Hindí makapagpútol naŋ [287]káhoy si Hwàn, dahilàn sa súgat nya sa kamày. Juan cannot cut wood, on account of the wound on his hand.

Similarly: antòk, áral, bíhis, ligtàs, mísa, nákaw, pasiyàl, sábi, salitàʾ, tágoʾ, takà.

5446. Direct passive: ma-pag-; ma-pag- R or ma-pà-pag-. Hindí ko mapagáyos aŋ maŋa damìt na itò. I can’t straighten out these clothes. Mapàpagáyos nya aŋ maŋa lipàs sa úso ŋ damìt na itò. She will be able to fix these out-of-date clothes. Hindí ko mapagkúroʾ kuŋ anò aŋ íbig nya ŋ sabíhin. I couldn’t make 10out what he wanted to say. Naŋ mapagkúrò ni Hwàn kuŋ anò aŋ maŋyàyári, ay hindí nya itinúloy aŋ kanya ŋ bálak. When Juan saw what was going to happen, he did not carry out his plan. Hindí ko mapagkúro aŋ kahulugàn naŋ súlat na itò. I can’t get at the meaning of this letter. Napagtalastàs ko aŋ maŋa sinàsábi 15mo sa iyo ŋ súlat. I understand all you say in your letter. Napagtátalastàs (or: napàpagtalastàs) kò aŋ íbig mo ŋ sabíhin. I understand what you mean.

447. maka-pag- (1), cf. § 353. Naŋ nakapaghanap syà ay umuwé sya sa kanya ŋ báhay. When he had finished searching, 20he went home. Kuŋ makapaghanap syà ay úuwé sya. When he has finished searching, he will go home.

448. maka-paŋ-, corresponding to maŋ-, § 357. Nakàkapaŋhiràm kamì naŋ kwaltà kay Áli ŋ Kulása. We can borrow money from Aunt Nicolasa. Makàkapaŋhiràm ka ŋ wala ŋ sála kay 25Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ sombréro. You will surely be able to borrow a hat from Juan. Nakapaŋàŋabáyo sya ŋ patayòʾ, sapagkàt hindí gulatìn aŋ kanya ŋ kabáyo. He is able to ride standing up, because his horse is not given to shying.

Abstract: pagkapaŋákoʾ (ákoʾ).

30(a) The root is reduplicated for plurality: Aŋ pagkapaŋhaháraŋ nila Hwán ay hindí nila sána magawàʾ, kuŋ hindí sa karamíhan naŋ táo nila na máy barìl. The highway robberies by Juan and his gang could not have been perpetrated by them, if it had not been for the number of them that had guns.

35(b) From a derived word: makapaŋináin (kináin, §§ 365, 357,a).

449. ma- D; expressive of slow activity: Hindí sya mamatày-matày. He is lingering on the death-bed. Aŋ pàgakpákan naŋ maŋa táo ay hindí matápus-tápus. The applause of the people 40could find no end.

450. In the instrumental passive, which seems to occur only with pag- and paŋ-, the i- follows the ma-: Aŋ pagkàtáwag naŋ kúra sa maŋa pulìs ay hindí nya ikinabúte, sapagkàt silà y kàkauntí [288]lámaŋ úpaŋ maipagtaŋgòl sya sa maŋa magnanákaw. The priest’s having called in the police did him no good, for they were too few to defend him from the thieves.

With paŋ-: naipaŋáŋanàk (anàk, cf. § 357).

5451. The local passive has the prefix ma- and the suffix (1) -an.

Namatayàn sina Hwàn. Someone has died in Juan’s family. Namatayàn sa báhay ni Hwàn. There has been a death in Juan’s house. Naputúlan si Hwàn naŋ dalíreʾ sa pagpapalákad naŋ mákina. 10Juan got a finger cut off in running the machine. Napùputúlan naŋ médiko aŋ maŋa táo naŋ kanila ŋ kamày o paà kuŋ kayiláŋan. When necessary, people get their hands or feet cut off by a doctor. Mapùputúlan ka naŋ dalírìʾ, pag hindí ka nagíŋat sa iyo ŋ pagtatrabáho sa mákina ŋ iyàn. You will get your 15finger cut off, if you aren’t careful about the way you work that machine. Nasakyàn ko nà aŋ kabáyo ŋ bara-barà. I have succeeded in mounting the wild horse. Naskyàn ko nà aŋ baŋka ŋ itò. I have already been in this canoe. Nawalàn naŋ málay aŋ babáye sa kanyà ŋ paghihimatày. The woman lost consciousness 20in her swoon.

Similarly: báliʾ, bukàs, halìk, hírap, láon, límot, luwàt, patìd, pílit, sákit, síraʾ, siyà, súbok, súgat, suŋgàb, tagàl, tandàʾ, úbos.

(a) bitìw lacks accent shift: mabitíwan, cf. § 374,b.

452. Local passive with explicative pag-: Hindí námin mapaglagarían 25naŋ káhoy aŋ kabáyo ŋ káhoy na ginawá mo. We cannot saw wood on the saw-buck you have made. Napagputúlan námin naŋ kawáyan aŋ bágo ŋ gawá mo ŋ kabáyo ŋ káhoy. We were able to cut bamboo on the sawbuck you have just made.

453. Special static words resembling the active; the following 30occur: Si Bantùg ay isa ŋ táo ŋ makabáyan. Bantog is a patriotic man. damò ŋ makahyàʾ the sensitive plant, Mimosa pudica.

Of irregular use are makalawà (§ 262,8), and makatuwìd (tuwìd).

35(a) From a word of this kind an active with mag- is derived in: nagmàmakaáwaʾ provoking pity (as though from makaáwaʾ).

(b) The abstract is like a special static word in: Aŋ bigàs ay sya ŋ pinakamahalagà ŋ pagkabúhay naŋ táo sa Filipínas. Rice is the most important staple food in the Philippines. Cf. 40also pagkaráka, § 265,9.

454. ma- forms special static words denoting that which by nature or circumstance possesses such and such, usually a quality. [289]Maalikabok nà aŋ mésa. The table is dusty already. Maásim aŋ súka ŋ itò. This wine is sour. aŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy na mabábaʾ a low tree; isa ŋ mabába ŋ táo a humble person. Aŋ labàŋ ay mabábaw. The trough of the manger is shallow. Madálaŋ aŋ maŋa lindòl 5díto. Earthquakes are rare here. Sya y isa ŋ ginoò ŋ magálaŋ. He is a polite gentleman. Maginháwa aŋ umupó sa sìlya ŋ itò. This chair is comfortable to sit in. Si Maryà ay isa ŋ babáye ŋ mapúri. Maria is a decent woman. Maluwàŋ aŋ báro ŋ itò. This blouse is too loose. matamìs sweet, aŋ matamìs sugar. Matipìd na 10bátaʾ si Hwàn. Juan is a saving child.

The plural is made with ma- r: Aŋ maŋa táo sa báyan ay mahuhúsay sumunòd sa kautusàn. The people of the town are all good law-abiders.

These forms are made from so many roots that the Index will 15be as convenient as a list.

Derivatives: §§ 352,c. 353,a.b. 370. 499,a. 500,b.

(a) Note masiyádo excessive, extreme, as though from a root -siyádo (and so listed), still felt by Mr. Santiago to be from Spanish demasiado.

20(b) Accent shift due to the root in masakìt.

(c) From derived words: Aŋ pagtayú sa bubuŋàn ay mapaŋánib. It is dangerous to stand on the roof. So from kasalánan (§ 423), kabuluhàn (§ 422).

455. ma-pag- someone given to doing so and so: Aŋ inà ni 25Pédro ay mapagbigày sa kanya ŋ maŋa kaululàn. Pedro’s mother always gives in to his foolishness. Sya y mapagtipìd. He is very economical. So from: gawàʾ, kumpisàl, simbà, siyásat, usísaʾ.

(a) From a phrase, probably: Aŋ táo ŋ si Hwàn ay mapagpáku-m-babàʾ. That man Juan is overmodest (páko ŋ babàʾ low 30peg?).

(b) With accent shift: Mapaghunì aŋ maŋa kabáyo ŋ itò, kanya hindí dápat dalhìn sa labanàn. These horses are given to neighing and therefore should not be taken to war. So also: mapagawày.

35456. In the same sense, but transitive in value, ma-paŋ-: mapaŋgúlat given to surprising or frightening people, mapaŋhágis given to flinging things; Aŋ táo ŋ si Hwàn ay mapaŋhiràm. The fellow Juan is a great borrower. mapaŋhiyàʾ given to embarrassing people. mapamukòl given to throwing things. So from: 40hilìŋ, matà.

457. In similar meanings, with suffix -in:

(a) ma- S -in: So magustúhin, masùnúrin. [290]

(b) ma- (2) -in: Aŋ maŋa táo y hindí maibigìn sa pagkakàsála. People are not fond of sinning.

(c) ma- r (2) -in: matatawanìn easily made to laugh; Sya y matutulugìn. He is a sleepy-head. So also: magugulatìn.

5458. The transients with kà- refer to accidental actions. The active has the forms: makà-, makà- R, nakà-, nakà- R, but the reduplication sometimes affects the kà- instead of the root initial. The abstract has pagkà-. The meanings are various, much like those of maka-.

10459. The active sometimes expresses an inanimate object as the agent of an accidental action: Aŋ guntìŋ naŋ maŋgagamòt ay nakágupit naŋ isa ŋ ugàt na malakè, kanyàʾ namatày aŋ kanya ŋ ginágamòt. The physician’s scissors accidentally cut a large artery, in consequence of which his patient died. Similarly, from 15gísiŋ, háwa.

460. More frequent is a rational actor of an accidental action; as such is viewed any action the exact form of which is out of the actor’s control. Si Pédro ay nakàháwak naŋ káwad na mày elektrisidàd. Pedro got hold of a charged wire. Hindí nya kilalà 20aŋ maŋa kwayanà ŋ iyòn, kaniyà nakàpútol sya naŋ sa iba ŋ táwo ŋ kawáyan. As he did not know those bamboo-groves, he inadvertently cut some bamboo that belonged to other people. Sundan mò silà sa kawayanàn, sapagkàt baká sila nakàpùpútol naŋ kawáya ŋ hindí nasàsákop naŋ áti ŋ lúpaʾ. Follow them to the 25bamboo-grove, for they may be cutting some bamboo that is not included in our land. Hwàn, usisáin mo ŋ mabúti aŋ haŋgáhan naŋ kawayanàn, bágo ka tumagá naŋ kawáyan, sapagkàt baká ka makàpútol naŋ kawáya ŋ hindí átin. Juan, find out exactly the borders of the bamboo-grove before you cut any bamboo, for else 30you might cut some bamboo that is not ours. Pího ŋ makàpùpútol silà naŋ kawáya ŋ hindí sakòp naŋ lúpaʾ, kapag hindí mo sila pinakialamàn, sapagkàt aŋ haŋgáhan naŋ lúpa ŋ iyòn ay lubhà ŋ balú-baluktòt. They will surely cut some bamboo not included in the piece of ground, if you don’t look after them, for the boundary 35of the land is very irregular. Nakàtísod akò naŋ isa ŋ áhas. I hit a snake with my foot. Nakàtúlog si Hwàn sa báhay na gibà-gibàʾ. Juan hit upon a broken-down house as a place to sleep in, was constrained by circumstances to sleep in a broken-down house. Nakàusísà sya naŋ nawalà ŋ kwaltà. It came to her mind to inquire 40about the lost money. Nakàusísà sya naŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ nakààalàm naŋ líhim. He happened to ask a man who knew the secret. Similarly: bilì, daàn, inòm, káin, súlat, tagpòʾ.

Abstract: In the abstract the element of accident often takes [291]the form of expressing the way something turned out. Limàŋ aŋ pagkàbílaŋ nya sa maŋa itlòg na itò. His count of these eggs has turned out wrong. Aŋ pagkágawá ni Hwána sa páyoŋ ay masamàʾ. The umbrella Juana made turned out poorly. Aŋ pagkágupìt 5sa úlo naŋ bátaʾ ay hindí pantày-pantày. The boy’s hair-cut isn’t (hasn’t turned out) even. Aŋ pagkàháti naŋ mansánas ay hindí parého. The halving of the apple is not exact. Aŋ pagkàísip nya sa bugtòŋ ay hindi támaʾ. His guess at the riddle is not correct. Aŋ pagkálagok nyà sa itlòg ay kanya ŋ pinagsisíhan. 10He repented his having (in a moment of weakness) swallowed the egg. Aŋ pagkàpások ni Hwàn naŋ tapòn sa bóte ay malálim. Juan got the cork too deep into the bottle. Aŋ pagkápatay sa magnanákaw ay hindí sinadyàʾ. The killing of the thief was not done on purpose. Aŋ pagkápatay sa manòk ay masamàʾ. This chicken 15has not been slaughtered in the proper manner. Aŋ pagkàpútol naŋ páloŋ naŋ kátiyaw ay hindí sagàd. The cock’s comb is not cut off clean. Aŋ pagkátahul naŋ áso ay sya ŋ inilalá naŋ sakìt nya sa lalamúnan. The dog’s barking made the pain in its throat worse. Aŋ pagkátanaw kò sa púno-ŋ-káhoy ay itò y may madidilàw 20na dáhon. The way I looked at that tree made it seem as if it had yellow leaves. Aŋ kanya ŋ pagkátayòʾ (or: pagkátindìg) ay dahilàn sa kanya ŋ pagkàgúlat. He jumped to his feet because of his surprise. Aŋ pagkàtípon naŋ maŋa dáho ŋ itò ay hindí mabúte. These leaves have not been well heaped up. So from: 25bendisiyòn, bitbìt, hampàs, higàʾ, páloʾ, tágoʾ, tirà, upòʾ.

461. The active may denote a rational actor successful, thanks to outer circumstances, in such and such an action. Nakáhampas aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ tutubè. Little Juan succeeded in hitting a dragon-fly with his whip. Nakàháte si Hwàn 30naŋ maŋa mansánas. Juan got a chance to divide up the apples. Nakàkàkapá sya naŋ isa ŋ palakàʾ. He has got hold of a frog (as, in grasping for frogs in mud-holes). Nakàpána akò naŋ usà. I hit a deer with an arrow. Nakàtípun nà akò naŋ maŋa dáhon, naŋ pumaròn si Tátay. By the time Father got there, I had already 35had time to get some leaves heaped up. So also: ágaw, hiŋìʾ, sáli.

Abstract: Aŋ pagkàbúhay naŋ médiko sa kay Hwàn ay isà ŋ malakì ŋ ikinatwá naŋ kanya ŋ kababáyan. The doctor’s saving of Juan’s life was a cause of great gladness to his fellow-townsmen. Aŋ pagkàtáwag nyà sa médiko ŋ nagligtàs naŋ búhay naŋ kanya 40ŋ anàk ay dahilàn sa pagkàgámit nya naŋ teléfono. His chance of calling the doctor who saved his child’s life was due to the use he was enabled to make of the telephone. Aŋ nagìŋ pagkágupit [292]nyà sa makapàl na damìt ay naŋyáre dahilàn sa paggámit nya naŋ guntìŋ naŋ láta. The fact that he was able to cut the thick cloth was due to his using the tin-shears. Aŋ pagkáhampas nyà sa maŋa bátàʾ ay dahilàn sa kahabáan naŋ kanya ŋ pamáloʾ. He can hit the children 5because of the length of his stick. Aŋ pagkàháraŋ kina Hwàn ay sya nilà ŋ ikinawalá naŋ kanila ŋ salapèʾ. Juan and his party’s having been held up was what deprived them of their money. Aŋ pagkàháti nya sa tubù ay hindí maŋyàyáre kuŋ gumámit sya naŋ mapurùl na gúlok. He would not have been able to slice the sugar-cane 10down its length (as a game or trick), if he had used a dull bolo. Pagkàísip nya kuŋ anò aŋ dápat nya ŋ gawìn sa magnanákaw na nàhúli nya, ay ginawá nya iyòn agàd. When he had at last hit upon the idea of what to do with the thief he had caught, he immediately carried it out. Naŋhináyaŋ aŋ boo ŋ báyan sa 15pagkápatay kay Risàl naŋ maŋa Kastílaʾ. The whole country mourned over the killing of Rizal by the Spaniards. Aŋ ámi ŋ pagkásakay sa baŋkàʾ ay syà ŋ nagligtàs sa ámi ŋ búhay. Our having been able to get into the canoe is what saved our lives. Aŋ pagkàsúnog naŋ maŋa magnanákaw sa báyan ay pinarusáhan naŋ 20gubyèrno. The thieves’ burning the town was punished by the government. Aŋ pagkátayo naŋ isa ŋ báhay-pàmahaláa ŋ batò ay dahilàn sa pagpapaalaála ni Hwàn naŋ paŋánib sa súnog. The fact that a stone government-building came after all to be built, was due to Juan’s calling attention to the danger from fire. Anu 25ŋ pagkátipid ni Hwàn! How saving Juan has been! So from: sábi, táwag.

462. The active is used of certain acts of sensation whose occurrence is out of the control of the subject: aŋ nakàkìkilála, aŋ nakàkàkilála one who has got knowledge of a person or thing, has 30come to know his habits, recognizes his nature. Aŋ pagkàgúlat ni Hwána ay syà ŋ ikinátawà naŋ marámi ŋ nakàkàkíta. Juana’s astonishment amused many who saw it. With kilála compare nakáramdàm felt; with kíta, nakàmálay, nakátanàw, and nakárinìg heard.

35Abstract: Malínaw aŋ pagkàkíta ko sa naŋyáre. I had a clear view of what took place. So: dinìg, masìd, tanàw.

463. The direct passive has the forms mà-, mà- R, nà-, nà- R.

It may correspond regularly to the active type in § 460, and 40denote an object undergoing an accidental action of a rational actor.

Nàáso ko sa boo ŋ báyan aŋ bátaʾ, káhit na hindí ko gustò. [293]I was forced to go shouting after the child all over town, though I didn’t like to do it. Hindí mu ba nàbása sa diyáriyo aŋ tuŋkùl sa súnog? Haven’t you come across the details of the fire in the paper? Baká mo màbásag, Hwána, iyà ŋ pinaglàlaruwan mò ŋ 5kandeléro. See that you don’t break that candlestick you’re playing with, Juana. Nádala nyà naŋ hindí sinásadyàʾ sa kanya ŋ pagalìs aŋ áki ŋ páyoŋ. When he went away he inadvertently carried off my umbrella. Nàgambála ku aŋ pagaáral ni Hwàn dahilàn sa áki ŋ pagdatìŋ na walá sa óras. I disturbed Juan in 10his studying by my untimely arrival. Nàgámit ni Hwàn aŋ áki ŋ, sombréro dahilàn sa kanyà ŋ pagmamadalí naŋ pagalìs. Juan used my hat in the haste of his departure. Nàgísiŋ nya sa kanya ŋ pagiiŋày aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. What with his racket he woke up the children. Náhampàs naŋ hindí sinásadyá ni Pédro aŋ bábuy naŋ 15kanya ŋ kápit-báhay. Pedro inadvertently hit his neighbor’s hog with his whip. Nàíwan din nyà sa ákin aŋ kanyà ŋ anàk, káhit na itò y áyaw nya ŋ gawìn. She was also forced to leave her child with me, although she disliked to do this. Nápatày ko naŋ barìl-barílan aŋ manòk. I accidentally killed the chicken with my toy-gun. 20Kánin mo aŋ milòn, kuŋ iyu ŋ gustò, o kayàʾ aŋ ságiŋ, kuŋ sya mo itò ŋ nàpìpíleʾ.—Nàpìpíli ko aŋ milòn. Eat the banana, if you like, or the melon, if you prefer it.—I prefer the melon. Nápitas nyà aŋ bulaklàk naŋ hindí sinásadyàʾ. She picked the flower without intending to. Nàpútol ko naŋ hindí sinásadyàʾ aŋ lúbid na 25itò. I chanced, without intending it, to cut this string. Baká mo màsíraʾ, Hwàn, aŋ patágo sa iyù ŋ kwàlta naŋ iyu ŋ kapatìd. See to it, Juan, that you don’t do away with your brother’s money that is entrusted to you. Nàusísà ni Hwána aŋ inumìt na siŋsìŋ naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd. Juana happened to inquire for the ring her 30sister had filched. So from: aŋkìn, búlag, bútas, hábol, patày, púlot.

464. The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active described in § 461, and denote an object undergoing an action which a rational actor was enabled to perform by virtue of 35outer circumstances.

Aŋ úlo ni Hwàn ay nàbìbílog naŋ kanya ŋ kalaròʾ. Juan’s playmates are succeeding in making a fool of him (literally: in rounding his head). Nágupit nyà aŋ makapàl na damìt. It turned out that he was able to cut the thick cloth. Hindí ku màípon 40aŋ maŋa karáyum na naŋàsábug sa lúpaʾ. I did not succeed in gathering up all the needles that were scattered over the floor. Hindí ko mápatay aŋ púsa ŋ itò. I cannot kill this cat (i.e. its life is tough, it gets away, etc.) Kapag nàpútol mo aŋ bákal na [294]iyàn, ikàw ay makawáwalàʾ. If you can get a chance to cut through that iron, you can make your escape. Nàpútol nya aŋ káhoy. He got the wood cut all right. Hindí nya màpútol aŋ leèg naŋ manòk. He couldn’t get the chicken’s neck cut through. 5Màpùpútol na raw nyà aŋ púno naŋ káhoy na nabwàl. He says he will be in a position to cut through the tree that has fallen. aŋ kanyà ŋ násiŋìl the money he was able to collect. Similarly, from: bálot, gawàʾ, húli, kúha, kúlam, nákaw, pitàs, sábi, taàs, táwag.

465. Similarly, the direct passive is regularly used to correspond 10to the active in § 462, of objects of sensation. Nàkilála ko si Hwàn doòn sa sàwáyan. I got acquainted with Juan at that dance. So from: alaála, dinìg, inò, kíta, málas, pansìn.

466. Other uses of the direct passive do not regularly correspond to any active, cf. § 440 f.; these have their own abstract 15with pagkà-.

The direct passive is used to denote an object which has accidentally got into such and such a condition; the actor is either indifferent or entirely lacking. There seems to be no abstract principle clearly separating this form from the passive with na- 20described in § 440; where position of the object is involved, the accidental form is preferred.

Nàbúte aŋ kanyà ŋ pagkatákot. His fear reached a high point. Aŋ kanya ŋ baŋkà y patúŋo sa bandà ŋ kalunúran, dátapuwat pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ sandalìʾ ay náiba aŋ kanya ŋ bandáhin. 25His canoe was headed toward the west, but after a while his direction changed. Aŋ ìnumínan naŋ báhay ay dápat málagay sa lugàr na malílim. The shelf for drinking-water of a house should be in a shady place. Násakay sa trèn aŋ ipinahatìd mo ŋ maŋa dalaŋhítaʾ. The tangerines you sent have been shipped. Nàtúlin aŋ pagpapadulàs 30naŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn sa pútek. Juan’s sliding on the mud got faster and faster (in spite of him).

Similarly from: bágay, balítaʾ, baòn, dápat, doòn, hintòʾ, húsay, kápit, lapàg, látag, ligtàs, liguwàk, lípat, lubòg, lúlan, mána, nákaw, pagítan, pákoʾ, patày, pátuŋ, sábog, taàn, tábon, 35tágoʾ, talàʾ, tanìm, taòn, tayòʾ, tirà, túlos, únat.

Abstract: Pagkásakay naŋ maŋa sáko naŋ kamóte sa trèn ay lumákad itò agàd. As soon as the bags of sweet-potatoes had been put on board the train, the latter started to move. So from: balítaʾ, gámit, ibà, látag, libìŋ, sarà.

40466a. This irregular passive is used also of animate, rational subjects, whose actions, then, are viewed rather as an accidental undergoing; this type is not clearly definable from that with ma- [295]in § 441, except where both forms are used in contrast (-higàʾ); the habit with regard to each root is, however, entirely fixed.

In some cases the accidental actor is imaginable: Náakyàt si Pédro sa itaàs naŋ láŋit dahilàn sa ginawá nya ŋ pagkápit sa 5pinalipàd na lóbo. Pedro got carried up into the air owing to his grip on the loosed balloon. Nàháraŋ sina Hwàn sa daà-ŋ-Balíwag. Juan and his company chanced to get held up on the Baliuag road. Hwag kà, Hwàn, pumásuk sa sekréta, sapagkàt baká ka máhigàʾ sa ihawàn, kuŋ ikàw ay màhúle. Don’t go as a spy, Juan, for you 10might get laid on the gridiron, if you got caught. Similarly: baŋgìt, barìl, bilaŋgòʾ, distíno, húli, ligtàs, píliʾ, taŋgàp, táwag.

Processes of life: Sya y nábiŋì. He got deaf. Nàbúte si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pagkatákot. Juan was bettered by his fright. Si Pédro at si Maryà ay màkàkasàl. Pedro and Maria will get 15married some day. So: himbìŋ, lóko, tahímik, tinìk, túto, wíli.

Abstract: Aŋ pagkàgúlat ni Hwána sa maíŋay na putòk naŋ kanyòn ay sya nyà ŋ ikinabiŋì. Juana’s shock at the loud report of the cannon was what made her deaf. Malakì aŋ kanila ŋ nagìŋ pagkàgúlat. Their astonishment was great. Aŋ pagkàsúnog sa 20maŋa sundálo sa loòb naŋ báhay ay naŋyári dáhil sa pagkásara naŋ maŋa bintánaʾ. The fact that the soldiers were burned in the house was due to the circumstance that the windows had been closed. Aŋ pagkátinìk sa lalamúnan naŋ bátaʾ ay sya nyà ŋ ikinamatày. The boy’s getting a fishbone into his throat was what 25killed him. Pagkátinik naŋ uŋgòʾ ay sya y nagálit. When the monkey had got a spine into his foot he got angry. Aŋ pagkàwíle ni Hwàn sa báhay ny Andrès ay dahilàn sa anàk na dalága nitò. Juan’s being spell-bound in Andres’ house was due to the latter’s daughter. So: gustò, kasàl, maŋhàʾ.

30Movements, especially the resultant position: Sya y nárapàʾ. He fell on his face. Náriyan kamì sa iyo ŋ báhay kahápon naŋ umága, dátapuwat hindí ka námin dinatnàn. We were at your house yesterday morning, but we did not find you there. Náluhod sya sa kanyà ŋ harapàn. He knelt down in front of her. Nàpàpagítan si Hwàn sa dalawà ŋ dalága. 35Juan chanced to get placed between two young ladies. Sila y nàùupòʾ. They are seated. Similarly from: ákap, alìs, bálot, díne, díto, dulàs, doòn, haràp, kublì, kulòŋ, lákad, lugmòk, padpàd, panhìk, sakày, sísid, tabì, tágoʾ, tayòʾ, tirà, tuŋtòŋ.

Abstract: Aŋ ikinátahol naŋ maŋa áso ay aŋ pagkádapá ni 40Hwàn. What made the dogs bark was Juan’s falling on his face. Pagkásakay ni Hwàn sa trèn ay lumákad ito ŋ agàd. When Juan was on board the train, it soon started to move. So also: dulàs, kublì, lagày, panhìk, silìd, tabì, tayòʾ. [296]

467. The passive forms an explicit plural in which -aŋ- is infixed into the nà-: Tibáyan mo aŋ maŋa itátayú mo ŋ kúbo sa búkid, sapagkàt baká iyo y maŋágibàʾ kuŋ lumakàs aŋ háŋin. Prop up the huts you are going to build in the fields, for otherwise 5they might break down when the wind gets stronger. Maŋàgìgibàʾ aŋ maŋa báhay na itò, sapagkàt hindí támaʾ aŋ pagkátayòʾ. These houses will break down, because they are not built right. So from: paŋàw, sábog, taluŋkòʾ.

468. An irregular form is nàndon beside ná-roòn.

10469. Accent shift is due to the root: Aŋ pagpapatahòl ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ áso ay nakàtàtawà. Juan’s making his dog bark is a funny sight. So álam, túloy.

Passive: Náabut nyà sa kanyà ŋ paglulundàg na may táŋa ŋ pamáloʾ aŋ ilawàn, kanyàʾ itò y nabásag. In his climbing with 15the stick in hand, he accidentally reached the lamp, and so it got broken. Sya y nábulàg. He went blind. So: gísiŋ, háyag, húli, lápit, láyoʾ, túloy.

Abstract: Aŋ pagkáhuli naŋ susòʾ ay malakè. The snail was left way behind. Aŋ pagkáabot nyà sa bóte ay hindi magálaŋ. The way he reached for the bottle was not polite. So: álam, áyaw, gísiŋ, lápit, úna.

20470. From phrases: Aŋ paánan naŋ hìgáan ay nàbàbandà-ŋ-kataasàn, dátapwat dápat màbanda-ŋ-ibabàʾ. The foot of the bed is turned toward the north, but should be turned to the south (bandà ŋ ibabàʾ, bandà ŋ kataasàn).

From derived words: Passive: Nàtàtagílid aŋ baŋkàʾ. The 25boat has a list to one side (ta-gílid, § 523).

(a) Passives from words with prefix ka- (§ 398) are frequent. Aŋ búkid ni Hwàn ay nàkàkarátig naŋ kay Pédro. Juan’s field borders on Pedro’s. Nàkasále nya sa kanya ŋ paglalaròʾ aŋ kanya ŋ pínsan. He took his cousin for playmate. Si Maryáno ay nàkatálo 30ni Hwàn. Mariano was Juan’s opponent. Si Narsíso aŋ lági ŋ nàkàkatálo ni Pédro sa maŋa pagtatálo ŋ idinàdáos liŋgo-liŋgò sa kanila ŋ sàmáhan. Narcisso is always Pedro’s opponent in the debates which they hold every Sunday at their club. Si Lúkas aŋ màkàkatálo ko. Lucas will be my opponent. nàkàkatúŋo the person 35one happens to be dealing with. nàkaúsap be by chance able to be conversed with.

Underlying word non-existent: Nàkatúlog si Hwàn sa panunoòd naŋ teátro. Juan fell asleep while watching the play. Umulàn kagabì at lumamìg, kaniyàʾ ako nàkatúlog naŋ mahimbìŋ. Last 40night it rained and got cool; in consequence I fell sound asleep, got a sound sleep. Hindí ako màkatúlog. I couldn’t get any sleep. Abstract: aŋ pagkàkatúlog.

(b) Explicit plural of the preceding: Naŋàkàkatúlog sila ŋ [297]lahàt, naŋ pumások sa báhay aŋ magnanákaw. They had all fallen asleep, when the thief came into the house. Pagpilítan ninyò ŋ hwag kayò ŋ maŋàkatúlog sa inyo ŋ pagbabantày sa maŋa háyop at iba pà ŋ árì naŋ pàmahalaàn. See to it that you don’t fall 5asleep when on guard over the animals and other property of the government. Ŋayòn ay maŋàkàkatúlog silà, dahilàn sa maláon nila ŋ pagpupuyàt gabi-gabì. Now they will be able to sleep, owing to their staying up late night after night.

471. Passive with pag- (cf. § 445): the reduplication affects 10the pag-. Hindí ko màpagáway aŋ tamìs at aŋ ásim naŋ limonáda ŋ itò. I cannot produce a balance of sweet and sour in this lemonade. Sa kalaúnan ay nàpagkilála ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ kamàlían. Finally Juan saw where he was wrong. Hindí nya nàpagkúroʾ agàd kuŋ anò aŋ gàgawin nyà. He was not able to decide at once 15what he was going to do. Nàpàpagkúrù mo bà aŋ lahàt naŋ sinábi ko sa iyò kahápon? Are you able to figure out all I said to you yesterday? Hindí ko màpagkúro kuŋ anò aŋ íbig nya ŋ sabíhin. I simply couldn’t make out what he was trying to say.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Áyon sa sábi naŋ marámi 20ay màpàpaghuli na ràw aŋ maŋa magnanákaw. According to what people say, the thieves will soon be caught.

472. Passive with paŋ-: Nàpanagínip niya ŋ nàkíta nya aŋ kanya ŋ amà. He dreamt he saw his father.

473. makà- D is used in prohibitions: Hwag kà ŋ makàláyas-láyas! 25Don’t ever run away! So from tuŋtóŋ.

(a) with paki-: Hwag kà ŋ makàpakikáin-káin kuŋ hindí ka inàanyáhan. Don’t ever take a meal with people unless they invite you.

474. The instrumental passive is rare: badiyà, màilabàs, màipások, 30màitúroʾ.

475. Local passive with mà-.

Nàmàmasdan kò mulá sa banda ŋ itò naŋ bintánaʾ aŋ báhay ni Áli ŋ Maryà. I get a view of Mistress Maria’s house from this side of the window. Pagiŋátan mo aŋ iyo ŋ kwaltà sa bulsà pagluwàs 35mo sa Maynílaʾ, at naŋ hwag kà ŋ mànakáwan. Look carefully to the money in your purse when you go to Manila, so as not to get robbed. Nàpasúkan nya sa kwàrto aŋ magnanákaw. In entering the room he came upon the thief. Nàputúlan ku naŋ tahìd aŋ kátyaw. I managed to cut the game-cock’s spur. Nàpùputúlan 40ko nà naŋ páloŋ aŋ kátyaw. I am succeeding in cutting off the game-cock’s comb. Màpùputúlan daw nyà naŋ maŋa páloŋ aŋ maŋa kátyaw nya ŋ paŋsáboŋ. He will manage to cut off the combs of his pit game-cocks, he says. Nàsagasáan naŋ trèn aŋ isa [298]ŋ táo. A man got run over by the train. Nàsakyan námin aŋ baŋká ni Hwàn. We happened to get into Juan’s canoe. Aŋ kamàtáya ŋ màtagpuàn naŋ isa ŋ magnanákaw ay lági ŋ hindí mabúte. The death a robber meets is usually not good. Baká mu 5màtamáan aŋ úlu naŋ bátaʾ. See that you don’t hit the child’s head (and disfigure him).

Similarly: balítaʾ, bukàs, damdàm, datìŋ, gustò, intindì, kamìt, kulápol, ligtàs, málay, pígil, tanìm, túlog, tumpàk, túto, wisìk.

(a) With contraction of prefix and initial: màláman (álam).

10(b) Accent shift lacking: nàmatáan (matà).

(c) Extra accent shift is due to the root: Kamuntí naŋ màtamaàn naŋ kanya ŋ pukòl aŋ bátaʾ. He nearly hit the child with his throw. Baká mu màtamaàn aŋ bátaʾ. See that you don’t hit the child. So also: nàalamàn (álam).

15476. Local passive with mà-pag-: Nàpaghìhinaláan naŋ kápitan aŋ mabaìt na si Hwàn. Even honest Juan falls under the mayor’s suspicion. Nàpàpaghinaláan nilà si Kulàs sa pagkawalá naŋ aláhas. They are capable of suspecting Nicolás in connection with the disappearance of the jewelry. Màpàpaghinaláan ka ŋ kasabuwàt 20naŋ maŋa sundálo sa bundòk, kapag hindí ka tumahímik sa báhay. You will risk suspicion as having connection with the soldiers in the mountains, if you do not stay quietly in your house. Similarly: álam, bintàŋ.

(a) Extra accent shift (plural): mà-pag-alam-àn.

25477. Local passive with mà-paŋ-; the only example lacks accent shift: nà-paŋ-aginàldo-han.

478. Local passive with mà- from underlying word with ka- (cf. § 398): nàkagalítan, màkatuwaàn.

(a) with pagka-, corresponding to an active with magka- 30(§ 405): màpagkalipumpunàn (lipumpòn).

479. Special static words with makà- are formed from numerals in the sense of so many times: makàánim six times; makálawà twice; makálimà five times; makásiyàm nine times. So: makáilàn several times.

35From phrases, the higher numbers: makása-m-pùʾ ten times.

With irregularities: makáitlò, makáyitlò three times; makàápat, makàípat four times.

Reduplicated: makàlìlíbo a thousand times.

4. The prefix pa-.

40480. The general sense of the prefix pa- is to denote something caused or ordered to undergo such and such an action. With accent pà- an increase of the action is expressed. [299]

(1) Simple static forms.

481. The root with prefix pa- denotes an object or person ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action. The person caused to undergo may be the same as the person ordering 5or allowing.

Aŋ paakyàt ni Hwána na púno naŋ kakàw ay aŋ nása súlok naŋ bakúran. The cocoa-tree Juana ordered climbed is the one in the corner of the yard. Aŋ panyo ŋ itò ay paalaála sa ákin niy Áli ŋ Maryà sa anàk nya ŋ dalága. This handkerchief is a souvenir 10to me from Aunt Maria which she sent by her daughter. Inihandá naŋ ámi ŋ kaséra aŋ atsára ŋ papáya úpaŋ siya námi ŋ magìŋ paáyap. Our landlady served some pickled papaws for us to use as condiment. Pabalìk ni Hwàn aŋ lìbru ŋ itò. Juan sends this book back. Itò aŋ pahátiʾ sa ákin ni Pédro. This is what 15Pedro ordered me to deal out. Aŋ maŋa tubò ŋ itò ay papútol sa ákin ni Pédro. Pedro ordered me to cut this sugar-cane. Aŋ táo ŋ itò aŋ pasakày ni Hwàn sa karumáta ko. This is the man whom Juan asked me to take into my carriage. Aŋ binása ni Hwà ŋ kautusàn ay patáwag naŋ kúra. The ordinance Juan read was 20given out for proclamation by the priest. Aŋ báhay na ytò y patayó ni Hwàn. Juan had this house built. Patípon ni Hwàn sa ákin aŋ maŋa nyòg na itò. Juan ordered me to gather up these cocoanuts. Aŋ pauwé ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ inà ay isa ŋ maínam na siŋsìŋ. What Juan sent home to his mother was a beautiful 25ring.

As conjunctive attribute the word with pa- may express manner: aŋ daà ŋ pabalìk sa Balíwag the road back to Baliuag. Papások sya ŋ lumàlákad sa gitná naŋ báhay. He was 30going farther in toward the inside of the house. Pasakày sya ŋ lumuksò sa kabáyo. He jumped on the horse as if mounting to ride. Naŋ mahúlug aŋ bátaʾ sa káhoy, ay paupó sya ŋ lumagpàk sa lúpaʾ. When the boy fell from the tree, he landed on the ground in a sitting position. Pauròŋ sya ŋ lumákad. He went 35backwards.

With movements pa-, reflexive, is often weakened to a mere indication of direction: Paakyàt sa púnù naŋ káhoy aŋ uŋgòʾ naŋ sya y abútan naŋ lóbo. The monkey was just climbing the tree, when he was overtaken by the wolf. Pabalìk si Hwàn. Juan 40is going back. Patúŋo si Hwàn sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. Juan was headed for the town of Baliuag.

Similarly: álam, biglàʾ, bulòŋ, gawàʾ, háraŋ, kálat, lágiʾ, lalàʾ, puntà, sigàw, tágoʾ, takbò, taluŋkòʾ, tayòʾ, túloy. [300]

(a) From a derived word: paitaàs (itaàs, § 373).

(b) The peculiar meaning is weakened in some words: aŋ paága a kind of rice which matures early, aŋ pakinábaŋ profit, advantage, aŋ palabàs a theatrical performance, aŋ palígoʾ a bath, 5aŋ pamagàt an appellation, a nickname. So from: baŋòʾ, bása, bayò, bigàt, daàn, dúsa, háyag, hintúlot, lákad, lígid, lúgit, sákit, talìm.

(c) With retraction of accent and contraction: páno (anò).

(d) Irregular: Aŋ pagkáparoon kò sa bèsbol ay paubáyaʾ 10naŋ áki ŋ guròʾ. My going to the baseball game was by permission of my teacher (báyaʾ).

482. pa- (1) is made from barytone roots when they express manner, or, more especially, direction: Aŋ baŋkàʾ ay hindí paayòn sa ílog. The boat is not headed with the stream. Pahagìs nya ŋ iniyabòt sa ákin aŋ aklàt. He handed me the book by tossing it. Iníwan nya ŋ 15paharàŋ sa daàn aŋ karitòn. He left the wagon blocking the road. Paharàŋ nya ŋ inihágis sa ílog aŋ púno-ŋ-ságiŋ. He threw the banana tree crosswise into the river. Aŋ paglakè naŋ lámat naŋ piŋgàn ay pahatèʾ. The increase in the crack of the dish is going towards halving it. Aŋ búŋa ŋ itò y pahatèʾ kuŋ mapiráso pagkahinòg. 20This fruit goes into halves when it breaks on ripening. Similarly: líhim, pútol.

(a) The accent shift is due to the root and the value of the formation is as in § 481, in: Aŋ paabòt mo ŋ súlat ay tinaŋgàp ko. I have received the letter you sent to me. Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ 25báta ŋ pabayàʾ. Juan is a neglectful boy.

(b) The accent shift is like that of a root word in: Paligú na aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. The children are bathed now (pa-lígoʾ).

483. pa- r, as explicit plural: see ábot.

484. pa- D. The action is repeated at short intervals; the 30reflexive value is frequent. Sya y lumàlákad na pahintò-hintòʾ. He goes on, stopping every little while. Pamalí-malìʾ aŋ kanya ŋ pagbílaŋ. His count contains repeated errors. Alam nyà aŋ maŋa pasíkot-síkot sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. He knows all the ins and outs of the district of Baliuag. So from: iyàk, lígid, mínsan, pasiyàl, 35túlog.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Patúlog-túlog at pagisìŋ-gisìŋ siyà. He sleeps and wakes by fits and starts. Patawà-tawà at paiyàk-iyàk siyà. She giggles at one moment and weeps the next.

485. pa-pa- has durative-iterative meaning: Papaalìs sya 40naŋ akò y dumatìŋ. He was just going away when I arrived. Papauròŋ sya ŋ lumàlákad. He was going backwards. So from labàs. [301]

(a) papáno (anò) seems equivalent to páno (§ 481,c).

486. As appears in the example of paligòʾ above (§ 482,b), the forms with pa- are apparently capable of all the modifications that are found in simple roots: Thus:

5(a) with prefix paŋ- (§ 347): Paŋpakáin sa bátaʾ aŋ gátas na itò. This milk is for the children’s food. Paŋpakáin sa panaúhin aŋ pinatay kò ŋ túpa. The sheep I have slaughtered is for serving to the guests. Paŋpatukà sa manòk aŋ pálay na itò. These rice-grains are to be given to the chickens to pick (tukàʾ the beak 10of a fowl). So from: dikìt, lígoʾ.

(b) with ka- R (§ 400): Kapàpapútol ko pa lámaŋ naŋ maŋa káhoy na itò. I have just had this firewood cut.

(c) with ka-pag- R (§ 400,a): Kapagpàpapútol ko lámaŋ naŋ siìt kay Hwàn. I have just ordered Juan to cut up the bamboo 15spines.

(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static words.

487. The root with pa- is sometimes used as a transient contingent punctual, with the value of a reflexive passive; more commonly the form with ma-pa- (§ 506) fulfils this function. There 20are three types:

(a) Genuine reflexive passive: Paábut ka sa maŋà nagsìsihábul sa iyò. Let yourself be overtaken by your pursuers. Paakyat kà kay Hwàn sa itaàs naŋ káhoy. Ask Juan to take you up into the tree. Twì ŋ papásuk akò sa síne sa áki ŋ kúyaŋ, ay nasìsiráan 25aŋ mákina. Every time I ask my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show, something goes wrong with the machine. So: kasàl, ligàw.

(b) Reflexive of interest: one who orders that something undergo such and such an action for him: Paakyàt ka kay Hwàn naŋ 30isa ŋ búŋa-ŋ-nyòg. Ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for you.

(c) Reflexive of motion; the pa- has faded value; thus are used the local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns and a few other words. Paríni ka. Come here. Tuwì ŋ aku y paroòn sa kanya ŋ báhay ay hindí ku sya inàabútan. Every time I go to his 35house, I fail to find him in.

(d) If the pa- is accented, the action is more intense: Pàága ka naŋ pagparíto. Be very early in your coming here.

(e) A contingent durative is formed with pa- R. (a) Paáakyat akò kay Hwàn sa itaàs naŋ káhoy. I shall ask Juan to take me 40up into the tree with him. Papàpások akò sa síne sa áki ŋ kúyaŋ. I shall ask my brother to take me to the moving-picture show. (b) [302]Paáakyat akò kay Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ búŋa-ŋ-nyòg. I shall ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for me. Papùpútol akò naŋ buhòk kay Hwàn. I shall ask Juan to cut my hair.

488. For the reflexive of motion (§ 487,c) a set of transients 5and an abstract are formed with -um- and pag-. These also are equivalent to the forms with ma-pa- (§ 506).

(a) Regularly from the four roots serving as locals of the demonstrative pronouns. Pumaríni ka! Come here! Pumaríne ka sa áki ŋ tabì. Come close here to my side.

10Madálaŋ aŋ pagparíto naŋ maŋa bálaŋ. Locusts come here but rarely. Pího ako ŋ pàparíto sa alasìŋko. I will surely come here at five o’clock.

Pápariyàn sána kamì, dátapuwat nagkaroòn kamì naŋ malakì ŋ kaabalahàn, kanyà hindí kami nátuloy. We were coming to you, 15but we had so much trouble that we did not carry out our intention.

Pagparoòn ko ay sàsabíhin ko sa kanyà aŋ ibinalítà mo. When I get there I shall tell him what you have told me. Kità ŋ dalawà ay páparon sa teyátro. We two are going to the theatre.

(b) Occasionally from loòb: pumaloòb.

20(c) Also the abstracts pagpalígoʾ, pagpanáog; these form the transient with ma- from the root (§ 441); and pagpatúŋo, which forms its transient with -um- from the root.

(d) Plurals: magsipalígoʾ, nagsìsipanáog.

489. mag-pa-, pag-pa-pa-. Active with mag- from the root 25with pa- denotes one who causes, orders, or allows such and such an action to be performed on something else or (reflexively) on himself.

Nagpaáyap aŋ ámi ŋ kaséra. Our landlady served a relish. Si Hwàn ay nagpabáyaʾ sa kanya ŋ tuŋkúlin. Juan grew lax 30about his duties. Nagpabyày si Hwàn naŋ isdàʾ sa kanya ŋ palàisdáan. Juan had some fish put into his fishpond. Aŋ médiko aŋ nagpaginháwa sa máy sakìt. The doctor made the patient feel comfortable. Nagpagupìt akò sa barbéro. I had the barber cut my hair. Aŋ pagpapagupìt ko sa barbéro ŋ si Hwàn ay hindí ko 35lubhà ŋ gustò. I don’t like very much to have my hair cut by barber Juan. Paráti aŋ maŋa pagpapaháraŋ ni Andrès sa maŋa táo ŋ naglálakàd. Andrés often orders travellers to be held up. Si Pédro ay nagpaháte sa ákin naŋ pálay. Pedro had rice dealt out to me. Aŋ kàtiwála y syà ŋ nagpahátì naŋ pálay sa maŋa 40kasamà. It was the agent who ordered rice distributed to the field-workers. Aŋ pagpapaháte naŋ kàtiwála sa maŋa lariyò sa maŋa magkakápit-báhay ay hindí iniyútos naŋ paŋinoòn nya ŋ si Hwàn. The agent’s having bricks distributed among the neighbors [303]was not in accordance with the orders of his master Juan. Sya y nagpahíkaw sa kanya ŋ alílaʾ. She had her maid put her earrings on her. (híkaw an earring). Si Pédro ay nagpápahiŋà. Pedro is taking a rest (literally: allowing himself to breathe). Aŋ 5inà y nagpahubàd (or: nagpahubàd naŋ damìt) sa kanya ŋ anàk. The mother ordered her daughter to undress her. Sya y nagpakáin naŋ gúlay sa maŋa panaúhin. She served vegetables to the guests. Sya y nagpàpakaséra. She keeps a boarding-house. Sya y nagpàpalabàs naŋ lamòk. He is driving out the gnats. Nagpápalabàs 10naŋ teyátro aŋ sàmáha-ŋ-ópera. The opera company is producing a play. Nagpalígo si Hwàn naŋ kabáyo. Juan bathed some of the horses. aŋ pagpapalígoʾ the bathing something or someone. Nagpapútol si Hwàn naŋ labòŋ. Juan had some bamboo shoots cut. Nagpàpapútol kamì naŋ káhoy. We are having some 15wood cut. Aŋ pagpapapútol nya sa Intsèk naŋ buhòk ay hindí sinunòd nitò. When he ordered the Chinaman to cut his queue, the latter did not obey. Aŋ pagpapasakày sa trèn ni Hwàn naŋ maŋa kamátis ay hindí nautàs bágo lumákad aŋ trèn. Juan had not finished having his tomatoes loaded on the train, when the train 20started. Si Hwána ay nagpasákit naŋ marámi ŋ maŋlilígaw sa kanyà. Juana caused grief to many who wooed her. Si Hwána ay nagpasuklày sa kanya ŋ alílaʾ. Juana ordered her maid to comb her hair for her. Aŋ pagpapasundú nya sa ákin sa alílaʾ ay ikinagálit ko. His ordering me to fetch the servant made me 25angry. Sya y nagpàpatalìm naŋ isa ŋ gúlok. He is sharpening a bolo. Nagpatáwag akò naŋ isà ŋ kasamà. I had a workman called. Aŋ pagpapatáwag ko sa maŋa alíla ay hindí sinunòd naŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn. Little Juan did not obey my order to him to call some servants. Aŋ pagpapatáwag naŋ kúra sa léyi ay hindi nátuluy, 30sapagkàt binatò naŋ maŋa táo aŋ magtatawàg. The priest’s order that the law be proclaimed was not carried out, for the crier was stoned by the people. Nagpatayó sya naŋ isa ŋ kúbo. He had a hut built. Aŋ pagpapatayó ni Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ kúbo ay hindí natápus bágo sya nàtáwag sa pagsusundálo. The hut Juan was 35having built was not finished before he was called to military service. Nagpatipìd sya sa maŋa kasamà naŋ kanila ŋ pagkáin. He had his workers be sparing with their food. Nagpatípon si Hwàn naŋ káhoy sa kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà. Juan ordered his workmen to gather wood. Aŋ pagpapatípon ni Hwàn sa maŋa kalabàw ay 40hindí sinunòd naŋ kanya ŋ kàtiwálaʾ. Juan’s order that the carabao be gathered together was not obeyed by his overseer. Sya y nagpatotoò sa úsap ni Maryà at ni Hwána. She gave testimony in the lawsuit between Maria and Juana. Si Hwána ay naparoòn [304]sa ákin at siyà ŋ nagpatotoò na ikàw ay dumalò sa isa ŋ sabuŋàn. Juana came to me and assured me that you had attended a cock-fight. Aŋ pagpapatotoò nyà ay hindí tinaŋgàp naŋ hukòm. The judge did not accept his testimony. Sya y nagpaupòʾ naŋ ilà ŋ 5eskwéla. He had a few of the pupils sit down. Aŋ pagpapaupò naŋ maèstro sa maŋa eskwéla ay hindí nila sinunòd agàd. The teacher’s order to the pupils to sit down was not promptly obeyed. Magpaútaŋ ka naŋ kwaltà sa maŋa mahihírap. Lend money to the poor. Nagpauwí ba si Hwàn naŋ sìlya sa kanya ŋ inà?—Hindìʾ. 10Aŋ kanya ipinauwèʾ ay isa ŋ siŋsìŋ. Did Juan send a chair home to his mother?—No, he sent home a ring.

Similarly: ábot, alaála, balìk, baòn, dalà, dulàs, dúnoŋ, dúsa, galìŋ, gálit, gandà, gawàʾ, háyag, hírap, húli, ísip, iyàk, kilála, kinábaŋ, kintàb, kíta, kulòʾ, kumpisàl, lagày, lákad, laròʾ, láyas, 15láyaw, limòs, lípas, lútoʾ, magàt, mísa, pások, siglà, siŋkàw, sísid, tahòl, tugtòg, túlog, túlos, ulàn.

(a) Plural with magsi- (§ 386); nagsìsipagpalimòs.

(b) From a derived word: Huwag kayò ŋ magpaumága sa inyo ŋ pagsasàlitáan. Don’t let yourselves be overtaken by the 20morning in your conversation (umága, § 358).

(c) Root with accent shift: Sya y nagpaabòt naŋ súlat sa ákin. He had a letter handed to me.

(d) The pa- is accented, expressing extreme degree of action; from shifted root: Nagpáuna si Hwàn sa lakaràn. Juan managed 25to get himself into the very first place in the walking-party. So from: íwan.

(e) Doubled root, shifted: Nagpáuna-unà si Hwàn sa lakaràn naŋ maŋa magkakasáma. Juan got himself too far ahead in the boys’ walking-party.

30(f) Special static word (of the kind in § 358,d): aŋ magpapatawàg a town-crier.

490. pa- (1) -in, p-in-a. The direct passive from words with pa- denotes the person ordered to do so and so, the thing caused to be so and so.

35Padaláŋin mo aŋ iyo ŋ pagparíto. Make your coming here infrequent. Pagka pinapútol ka nyà naŋ káhoy ay sumunòd ka ŋ agàd. When he orders you to cut wood, do you obey at once. Pinapùpútol námin naŋ tubò si Pédro. We are having Pedro cut some sugar-cane. Paputúlin mo si Hwàn naŋ kúgon. Have Juan cut 40the cugon-weeds. Papùputúlin námin kayò naŋ yantòk. We shall ask you to cut some rattan. Pinatahòl ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ áso. Juan made his dog bark. Pinatalìm nya itò. He made this sharp. Pinatayó ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ pálad aŋ kapatìd nya ŋ maliìt na si [305]Maryáno. Juan stood his little brother Mariano up on his open hand. Hindí ako pinatúlog naŋ pagtahòl naŋ áso. The barking of the dog kept me from sleeping. Patulúgin mo aŋ bátaʾ. Put the child to sleep. Pinaupú nya aŋ maŋa eskwéla. He had the 5pupils sit down. Pinaupú ko aŋ áki ŋ bisíta. I asked my visitors to be seated.

Similarly: alìs, balìk, bilì, bútas, díto, hintòʾ, inòm, káin, kápit, lákad, láyas, lípad, pások, tahàn, takbò, táwad, túlin, túloy, untìʾ, yáman.

10(a) With accented pà-: Pàbusugin mò aŋ maŋa háyop. Feed the animals till they have had enough. Pàhampasìn mo siyà. Whip him harder. Hwag mò ŋ pàputiìn aŋ pintà naŋ báhay. Don’t paint the house too white.

(b) pà- with accent shift: Pàdalaŋin mò aŋ iyo ŋ pagparíto. 15Come here very rarely.

491. pa-pag- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-. The direct passive has pag- before the root when it corresponds to simple actives with characteristic mag- (§ 351). Màpàpahámak lámaŋ aŋ báta ŋ ito, kapag hindí nátin pinapagáral naŋ sapàt. This boy will turn out 20a mere good-for-nothing, if we do not make him study enough. Pinapaghubàd naŋ inà aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa anàk. The mother ordered her children to undress. Pinapagpútol námin naŋ ságiŋ sina Hwàn. We asked Juan and his people to cut bananas. Papagputúlin mo si Hwàn naŋ buhòk. Tell Juan to get a hair-cut. Papagpùputúlin 25nila kamì naŋ kanila ŋ maŋa kawáyan. They will order us to cut all their bamboo. Pinapagsuklày ni Hwána aŋ kanya ŋ alílaʾ. Juana told her maid to comb her (the maid’s) hair.

Similarly, from: bíhis, hintòʾ, trabáho.

(a) From a derived word: Sya y pinapagkalatimbàʾ. He was 30forced to do the well-bucket exercise (kalatimbàʾ, § 519).

(b) With extra accent shift: papagtùtuluyìn (túloy).

492. With paŋ-: Paráti ŋ pinapaŋhàháraŋ ni Andrès aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kampòn. Andrés often orders his companions to commit highway robberies. Papaŋhiramìn mo si Pédro naŋ lúbid. 35Have Pedro go and borrow some rope. Papamutúlin mo naŋ damò si Pédro. Have Pedro cut grass. Papamùmutúlin silà ni Hwàn naŋ damò. Juan will order them to cut grass.

493. pa-pag-pa- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-pa-. With both pag- and pa- preceding the root the direct passive with pa- denotes someone 40caused to cause something: Pinapagpatotoò naŋ tagapagtaŋgòl ni Andrès aŋ táo ŋ si Mariyáno na syà ŋ nakàkíta sa naŋyáre. Andrés’ lawyer called as a witness the man Mariano, who had seen the occurrence (cf. magpatotoò, § 489). [306]

494. i-pa-, i-p-in-a-. The instrumental passive with pa- denotes the object ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action.

Ipinaálam ko sa kanyà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. I made known to him 5the departure of the children with me. Ipinaalìs nila aŋ háraŋ naŋ daàn. They ordered the obstruction of the road to be removed. Aŋ ipinadala mò ŋ súlat ay tinaŋgàp ku nà. I have received the letter you sent me. Aŋ sapátos na may lapàd na suwélas na yitò ay syà ŋ ipinagàgámit na paŋtayòʾ sa bátaʾ. This flat-soled shoe 10is given children to be used in learning to stand up. Aŋ mayáma ŋ taga iba ŋ báyan na pàparíto ay ipinaháraŋ naŋ púno naŋ tulisàn. The rich stranger who was going to come here was held up by order of the chief of the bandits. Ipinahátì sa ákin ni Pédro aŋ mansánas. Pedro ordered me to divide the apples. Itò y ipinaháte 15ni Pédro parà sa ákin. This was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me as my share. Isinakày sa trèn aŋ ipinahatìd mo ŋ maŋa dalaŋhítaʾ. The tangerines you shipped were put on board the train. Ipinaísip nya sa maŋa eskwéla aŋ fétsa naŋ pagaáway naŋ maŋa Rúso at Hapunès sa Port-Àrtur. He asked his pupils to think of 20the date of the fighting between the Russians and the Japanese at Port Arthur. Ipakíta mo aŋ dílaʾ sa maŋgagamòt. Show the doctor your tongue. Ipinapùpútol ni Hwàn aŋ maŋa káhoy sa kanya ŋ bakúran. Juan is having the trees in his yard cut down. Ipapùpútol ko aŋ maŋgàs naŋ áki ŋ bároʾ. I am going to have the sleeves 25of my blouse cut off. Ipapútol mo, Hwàn, aŋ iyo ŋ kukò. Have your fingernails cut, Juan. Aŋ ipinasakày ni Tátay na maŋa súhaʾ sa trèn ay naŋabúlok sa daàn. The grape-fruit Father sent by train got spoiled on the way. Ipinasundú ko kay Hwàn aŋ médiko. I told Juan to fetch the doctor. Ipinatáwag ko sa alílaʾ si Hwàn. I had 30Juan called by a servant. Ipinatayó ni Hwàn aŋ báhay na itò. Juan had this house built. Ipinatipìd nya sa bátà aŋ pagkáin naŋ lansónes. He made the child eat sparingly of the lansones. Ipinatípon ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ kàtiwálaʾ aŋ maŋa kalabàw. Juan had his agent gather the carabao. Ipinatúluy nya aŋ pagkantà, káhit 35na maíŋay aŋ maŋà nakíkinìg. He went on with his singing although the audience was noisy.

So: áhon, balìk, baòn, bilaŋgòʾ, bítay, dápit, dúsa, gamòt, gawàʾ, gupìt, hábol, háyag, hintòʾ, hintúlot, kasàl, kilála, lákad, libàŋ, mána, patày, sákit, tápon, uwìʾ.

40(a) Different in meaning is the corresponding form from díto; it is the primary instrumental passive corresponding to pumaríto, etc. (§ 488): Aŋ pagsákop niyà naŋ táu ŋ makasalánan ay sya [307]nyà ŋ ipinaríto. His saving of sinful man is what he came here for.

(b) Accent shift is due to the root: Ipaalàm ka sa kanyà aŋ áki ŋ patùtuŋúhan. Let him know where I am going. Ipinaalam 5nyà sa ákin aŋ kanya ŋ nilóloòb. He made his intentions known to me. Ipinatulòy ni Pédro aŋ pagpapatayò naŋ báhay. Pedro had them go on with the construction of the house. Similarly: ábot.

(c) With pag- (cf. § 491): ipapagáral.

10(d) With pa- prefixed to the root, the instrumental passive with pa- denotes that ordered to be caused. The only example has radical accent shift: Ipinapatulòy ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ kàtiwálaʾ aŋ pagtatanìm naŋ maŋa kasamà. Juan had his agent order the field-workers to go on with the planting.

15495. i-pag-pa-, i-p-in-ag-pa-. When the relation of the object ordered to undergo an action is explicitly that of a thing given forth (§ 368), a kind of double instrumental passive is made by prefixing pag- to the pa- (cf. the explicit use of pag- in primary passives, §§ 369. 375): Ipinagpaháteʾ sa ákin ni Pédro aŋ pálay. 20The rice was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me. Aŋ kwàlta ŋ nàpaŋaginàldohan ni Hwàn ay sya nyà ŋ ipinagpasakày sa tiyobíbo sa kanya ŋ kapatìd na maliìt. Juan used his Christmas money to treat his little brother to a ride on the merry-go-round. Aŋ kautusàn ay ipinagpàpatáwag naŋ kúra. The law is being called out 25by order of the priest.

(a) With additional pa- (as in § 494,d): ipinagpapadalà.

496. i-paki-pa-, i-p-in-aki-pa-. Before a word with pa- the instrumental passive with paki- denotes the thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to undergo such and such an action. Hwag mò ŋ ipakipapútol 30aŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy, dátapuwat pakiputúlin mo na mìsmo. Don’t ask someone else to cut down the tree for me, but cut it down for me yourself. Ipakìkipapútol ni Hwàn sa inyò aŋ maŋa tinibàn sa kanya ŋ bakúran. Juan will ask you to have the banana-stumps in his yard cut down. Ipinakipapútol nya kay Hwàn aŋ maŋa 35damò sa bakúran. He asked Juan to have the grass cut in his yard.

(a) The thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to do so and so: Ipinakipakáin lámaŋ niya aŋ kanya ŋ anàk hábaŋ sya y walàʾ. She asked someone else to feed her child while she was away. Ipinakìkipasúso lámaŋ nya kay Maryà aŋ kanya ŋ anàk, sapagkàt walá 40sya ŋ gátas. She is asking Maria to nurse her child for her, because she has no milk. [308]

497. pa- (1) -an, p-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with pa- denotes that caused to undergo an action as local object.

Paaláman mo sa kanyà kuŋ saàn ka páparon. Let him know where you are going. Pinaasuhàn ni Pédro aŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-maŋgà. 5Pedro smoked (i.e. warmed, so as to speed flowering) the mango trees. Pinabayáan ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa tuŋkúlin. Juan neglected his duties. Pabayáan mo syà. Leave him alone. Aŋ pagpatày sa maŋa magnanákaw ay hindí pinarùrusáhan naŋ hukòm. The judge does not punish one for killing robbers. Pinahatían akò 10ni Pédro naŋ pálay sa kàtiwálaʾ. Pedro had the agent give me my share of rice. Pinahubaràn naŋ inà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ. The mother had her children undressed. Pakiŋgàn nawá ninyò aŋ áki ŋ pagtáwag. Pray give hearing to my call. Pinalìligúan naŋ pagòŋ aŋ ílog. The turtle bathed in the river. Pinalìligúan naŋ babáye aŋ 15bátaʾ. The woman was bathing the child. Hwag mò ŋ pamaláyan sa marámi na ikàw ay marámi ŋ kayamánan sa báhay, úpaŋ hwag kà ŋ nakáwan. Don’t let people know that you have many valuables in your house, lest you be robbed. Pinanaúgan nya aŋ báhay. He went down from the house. Pinaputúlan ni Hwàn naŋ taíŋa 20aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa biìk, úpaŋ hwag máaŋkin naŋ iba ŋ táo. Juan had the ears of his little pigs cut, so that they might not be inadvertently taken by anyone else. Pinapùputúlan ni Hwàn naŋ buntòt aŋ lahàt naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa manòk. Juan has all his chickens’ tails clipped (for identification). Paputúlan mo naŋ kauntiʾ aŋ 25mahábà mo ŋ buhòk. Have your long hair cut a little. Papùputúlan ko naŋ buntòt aŋ maŋa manòk na bágo ŋ bilè. I shall have the tails clipped of the chickens I have just bought. Aŋ baŋka ŋ itò ay pinasakyàn ko kay Hwàn. I allowed Juan to ride in this canoe. Pinatunáyan sa ákin ni Hwàn na ikàw ay nagsúsugàl. Juan proved 30to me that you are gambling. Ano ŋ bandà aŋ kanilà ŋ pinatùtuŋúhan? What direction are they headed for?

So also: bendisiyòn, dalà, hintúlot, hírap, doòn, kinábaŋ, magàt, mána, panhìk, sákit, tábon, tigàs, walàʾ.

(a) Accent shift, due to the root: pabayaàn, equivalent, however, 35to pabayáan.

(b) pà-: Pàagáhan mo aŋ pagsúloŋ. Get away very early. Pàináman mo aŋ súlat. Write very neatly. Pàitiman mò aŋ kúlay naŋ túbig. Make the color of the water very black. Hwag mò ŋ pàputian aŋ pintà naŋ báhay. Don’t put too much white into the 40paint for the house.

(c) pa- also prefixed to the root: Pinapahatían akò ni Pédro naŋ pálay sa kàtiwálaʾ. Pedro told the agent to have me given my share of rice. Pinapahatían ni Pédro naŋ pálay aŋ maŋa kasamà. [309]Pedro ordered that the laborers be given their share of rice.

498. Special static words are formed with pà- and -an to denote place or plurality of habitual causative action; barytone roots have accent shift of two syllables, sometimes optionally of one 5syllable:

Aŋ maliìt na sápa ŋ itò ay sya ŋ pàbiyáyan ni Alfònso naŋ maliliìt na isdà ŋ nàhùhúli nya sa ílog. This little pool is where Andrés turns loose the little fish he catches in the river. Aŋ pàlaŋúyan naŋ maŋa páto ni Hwàn ay malálim. Juan’s duck-pond is 10deep. Aŋ kanila ŋ pàtagálan naŋ pagsísid ay ginawá nila sa Sibùl. Their diving-contest took place at Sibol.

aŋ pàrusahàn penitentiary; hell. aŋ pàliguàn bathroom, bathtub.

So also: pàkumpisálan, pàaralàn, pàhayagàn pàhayágan, pàmahalaàn 15pàmahaláan.

(a) Derived from these a transient and abstract in mag-: aŋ pagpapàtagálan a contesting for endurance.

(3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka-.

499. mag-pa-ka-, pag-pa-pa-ka-. The active with mag-pa- 20(§ 489) from words with ka- expresses a reflexive actor: Aŋ pagpapakahírap sa pagaáral ay máy ganti ŋ pálaʾ. Exerting oneself at studies has its reward. Nagpakamatày si Lúkas. Lucas committed suicide. Magpápakamatày si Lúkas. Lucas will commit suicide. aŋ pagpapakamatày the act of suicide. So also from: walàʾ.

25(a) From forms with ma-, in more intensive sense than mag- alone (§ 352,c): Aŋ pagpapakamarúnoŋ serious effort at learning things.

With irregularities of accent, as in § 353,a.b.: Sya y nagpakamápuri. He praised himself very much. Sya y nagpakamayabàŋ. 30He boasted much.

500. pa-ka- (1) -in, p-in-a-ka-. The direct passive with pa-ka- denotes something caused to be too much so and so: Hwag mò ŋ pakalalímin aŋ gawi ŋ húkay. Don’t make the hole you are to dig too deep. Hwag mò ŋ pakalàlalímin aŋ hùhukáin mo ŋ balòn. 35Don’t make the well you are going to dig too deep. Pinakalálim ni Hwàn aŋ húkay. Juan made the ditch too deep.

(a) The form with p-in-a-ka- occurs as special static word: pinakamahàl most expensive, dearest; pinakamúra cheapest.

(b) More commonly from words with ma- (§ 454): Si Risàl ay 40syà ŋ nagiŋ pinakamarúnoŋ na táo sa kapulua-ŋ-Filipínas. Rizal was the most learned man in the Philippines. pinakamalakàs [310]strongest; pinakamalínis cleanest. So from: búti, hábaʾ, halagà, húsay, kínis.

501. i-kà-pa-, i-k-in-à-pa-. The instrumental passive with i-kà- (§ 417) from words with pa- expresses the thing or circumstance causing someone to be made to do so and so. Ikinàpaalìs sa kanyà sa báhay ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ paŋuŋumìt. His petty thievery caused him to be ordered to leave Juan’s house, to be dismissed from Juan’s house. Ikinàpàpaalìs nila sa kanyà aŋ kanya ŋ pinaggagawà ŋ katampalasánan sa maŋa háyop. His constant cruelty to 10the animals is forcing them to dismiss him. Aŋ kaibigàn nya ŋ màtúto ay sya nyà ŋ ikináparoon sa Espánya. His desire to get an education is what made him go to Spain. Baká mo ikàpahámak aŋ iyo ŋ pagparoòn. I am afraid your going there may cause you to be unfortunate. Ikàpàpahámak nya aŋ kanya ŋ pagsusundálo. 15His military service will cause him to fall into bad ways.

(a) With pag- either before or after the kà- a voluntary actor is implied who is caused to make someone or something do or be so and so. Aŋ ipinagkàpasakày ni Hwàn sa kanya ŋ máy sakit na kapatìd sa trèn sa lugàr naŋ sa karumáta ay aŋ katulínan naŋ 20trèn. What made Juan have his brother ride on the train rather than in a carriage was the speed of the train. Nagpaísip sya sa kanya ŋ maŋa eskwéla naŋ maŋa paraà ŋ ikàpagpàpalakè nilà sa kanila ŋ aklátan. He had his students think of means that would help them to make their library (get) larger.

25502. pa-ka- (1) -an. Local passive with pa- (§ 497) from a word with ka- (§ 398): pinakawalàn was allowed to go free.

503. ka-pa- (1) -an. Local passive with ka- (§ 419) from a word with pa- (§ 481): kapàpatuŋúhan the place one will be headed for.

30(a) Static words with ka-pa- -an are forms with ka- -an from words with pa-:

With S (§ 421): Si Hwàn aŋ kapàtagálan ni Maryáno sa pagsísid sa túbig. Juan contends with Mariano in staying under water as long as possible.

35With S (1), (§ 423); accent irregularly placed: Aŋ báta ŋ si Pédro aŋ sya ŋ kàpakitáan ni Maryà naŋ kanyà ŋ larwàn. Little Pedro is the child to whom Maria showed her toys and who showed her his.

With (2), (§ 422): Aŋ kapabayaàn nya sa maŋa tuŋkúlin ay 40syà ŋ malakì nya ŋ kapintásan. His neglectfulness of his duties is his great fault.

504. maka-pa-. With maka- in the usual meanings (§ 433 ff.) a few transients are made from words pa-. Nakapahiŋà sa lílim [311]aŋ maŋa kalabàw. The carabao rested in the shade (irrational actor). Bayáan mo ŋ makapahiŋà aŋ maŋa dalà mo ŋ kalabàw bágu ka bumalìk sa búkid. Let the carabao that brought you rest before you go back to the country. Makapàpahiŋa nà aŋ maŋa 5háyop bágo sya dumatìŋ. The carabao will have rested before he arrives. So from: doòn, lígoʾ.

505. Commoner is maka-pag-pa- (corresponding to mag-pa-); the abstract has pagkapa-. Nakapagpapútol na akò naŋ káhoy na gàgamítin ko sa boò ŋ tagulàn. I have already had wood cut for 10the entire rainy season. Si Lílay ay nakàkapagpapútol naŋ káhoy sa alílà ni Kíkaʾ. Lilay has permission to order Kika’s servant to cut the wood. Hindí ako makapagpapútol naŋ tubò kay Hwàn, sapagkàt marámi sya ŋ trabáho sa ibà. I cannot have Juan cut sugar-cane, because he has already too much work to do for other 15people. Makàkapagpapútol akò naŋ labòŋ, kuŋ iyò ŋ gustò. I can have some bamboo-shoots cut, if you wish.

So from: bilì, kínis, tápon.

506. The passive with ma- from words with pa- varies in meaning, owing chiefly to the various values of words with pa-.

20(a) Genuine passive: Hindí nya napahinòg aŋ maŋa ságiŋ. He did not succeed in getting the bananas to ripen. Mapahíhiram mo ba akò naŋ lima ŋ píso ŋ gintò? Can you let me borrow five dollars gold? Napapások ko sa kuràl aŋ maŋa kalabàw. I succeeded in bringing the carabao into the corral. Napatátalim ni Pédro 25aŋ mapuròl na gúlok. Pedro is able to sharpen dull bolos. So from: alìs, puntà, sáboy, túlog.

(b) Reflexive passive: Aŋ máy sakit ay napadapàʾ sa maŋa nagàalágà sa kanyà, sapagkàt sya hindí makakílos. The sick man had the people who were caring for him lay him on his face, because 30he could not move. Napagísiŋ si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ kapatìd sa óras naŋ alaskwátro naŋ umága. Juan had his brother wake him up at four o’clock in the morning. Napapások akò sa síne sa áki ŋ kúyaŋ. I asked my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show. Mapapàpások.... I shall ask to be taken in. 35Silà y napatùtúloŋ. They are asking for help. So: álam, hatìd, tawìd.

(c) Reflexive of interest: Napaakiyàt akò kay Hwàn naŋ isa ŋ búŋa-ŋ-nyòg. I asked Juan to climb for a cocoanut for me. Napapútol silà naŋ káhoy. They asked to have wood cut for them. 40Napapùpútol aŋ maŋa anàk naŋ kanila ŋ kukò kay Nánay. The children ask Mother to cut their fingernails. Napapùpútol akò naŋ gàgawi ŋ pípa kay Hwàn. I am asking Juan to cut me some wood for a cigarette-mouthpiece. Napatilàd akò naŋ tubò kay Nánay. [312]I asked Mother to slice me some sugar-cane.

(d) Movement: Napabíŋit sya sa malaki ŋ paŋánib. He got into a very dangerous situation. Naparíne sa tabi kò aŋ bátaʾ. The child came up close to me. Aŋ magkaybíga ŋ si Pédro at si 5Maryáno ay naparoòn sa Maynílaʾ. The two friends, Pedro and Mariano, have gone to Manila. Sya y napaóo. He assented. So from: díto, loòb, salámat, túŋo. Also from the derived word luwásan: napaluwásan.

507. Instrumental passive only in: maipabarìl.

10508. Passive with mà- (§ 463 ff.) from words with pa-. Bumitìw aŋ bátà sa lúbid, kanyá nàparapàʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ kahatakàn. As the child let go of the rope, the one who was pulling against him fell on his face. Nàparíto si Hwàn sa kanyà ŋ pagtatagòʾ sa maŋa tiktèk. Juan happened to come here in his hiding from the 15spies. Nàpàparíto sya ŋ madalàs. He often gets round here. Màpàparíto raw syà sa báya ŋ itò. He will get round to our town, he says. Nàpahámak sya sa ginawá nya ŋ pagsusugàl at pagsasáboŋ. He became good-for-nothing through his gambling and cock-fighting. Nàpàpahámak aŋ báta ŋ si Hwàn, dahilàn sa lubòs na pagpapaláyaw 20sa kanyà naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ. Little Juan is getting spoiled through his parents’ complete indulgence. Hwag kà ŋ duwàg, Hwàn, at naŋ hwàg ka ŋ màpahámak lámaŋ sa iyo ŋ pagsusundálo. Don’t be a coward, Juan, so that you may not merely come to misfortune through your military service. Màpàpahámak 25lámaŋ aŋ báta ŋ itò, kapag hindí nátin pinapagáral naŋ sapàt. This boy will turn out a good-for-nothing, if we don’t make him study enough. Hindí nàpahinòg na maága ni Hwàn aŋ maŋa ságiŋ. Juan didn’t get his bananas ripe early enough. Hindí nya nàpahinòg aŋ maŋa ságiŋ, sapagkàt naúbus agàd. He did not get 30his bananas ripe, because they were all eaten up too soon. Si Pédro ay nàpàpahiŋà. Pedro is resting. Nàpatayó si Pédro dahilàn sa kanya ŋ pagkàgúlat. Pedro leaped to his feet in his surprise. Dahilàn sa kanya ŋ pagkàgúlat ay nàpaupú siya. In his surprise he fell into his chair.

35So from: gúlat, halakhàk, hitsà, iyàk, kasàl, lagày, lagpàk, luksò, sigàw, tindìg.

(a) Plural with -aŋ-: Aŋ maŋa kalabàw ay naŋàpàpahiŋà. The carabao are resting. So: naŋápamaŋhàʾ.

(b) Accent shift: Nàpagisìŋ si Hwàn sa kalakasàn naŋ putòk 40naŋ barìl. The report of the gun was so loud that Juan woke up. So: táwa.

(c) Abstract, of movements, pagkàpa-. Aŋ dáhil naŋ kanya [313]ŋ pagkàparíto ay aŋ paniniŋìl. What brought him here was the collecting of debts. Aŋ pagkàpalígo naŋ kabáyo ay marumè. The horse has not been bathed clean. So from: alílaʾ, doòn.

(d) With makà- D (§ 473) from -paríto: Hwag kà ŋ makàparí-paríto. Don’t you ever come round here!

509. Instrumental passive, mà-i-pa-, from: dalà, kilála, kíta, 5túlos.

510. Local passive, mà-pa- (1) -an. Màpàparusáhan kità. I shall have to punish you. So: kinìg.

511. Special static words with nà-pa-ka- denote something having a high degree of such and such a quality. Aŋ sákit na iyo 10ŋ ipinarùrúsa sa ákin ay nápakabigàt. The grief you cause me is very severe. Nàpakabúte aŋ kanya ŋ pagkatákot. Her fear reached a high degree. Aŋ sakày na táo naŋ kutséro sa karumáta ay nàpakatabàʾ. The man the driver has taken into his carriage is very stout. So also: iklìʾ.

15(a) From a phrase: nàpakawala-ŋ-hiyàʾ.

5. The prefix pati-.

512. pati- before a root expresses that such and such a movement (of one’s own person) is suddenly performed.

513. With mag- it denotes the voluntary performer. Barytone 20roots seem to have accent shift. Aŋ báta y nagpatihigàʾ sa sahìg. The child suddenly lay down on the floor. Nagpatihulòg si Pédro sa bintánaʾ sa isa ŋ pagsumpòŋ naŋ kanya ŋ pagkalóko. Pedro suddenly threw himself from the window in an attack of his madness. Nagpàpatihulòg si Hwàn sa hagdánan kuŋ sinúsumpòŋ 25naŋ kalokóhan, kaniyàʾ sya y itináli nilà sa isa ŋ halígi naŋ báhay. They tied Juan to one of the posts of the house, because when he is assailed by a fit of insanity he throws himself down the stairs. Magpàpatihulòg daw sya mulá sa ituktòk naŋ kanya ŋ bìlaŋgúan úpaŋ sya y makataanàn. He says he will throw himself from the 30roof of his prison so as to make an escape. Sya y nagpatiluhòd. He suddenly knelt down. Aŋ pagpapatiluhòd naŋ bátaʾ ay sya ŋ nakasakìt sa kanya ŋ túhod. The boy’s throwing himself on his knees is what injured his knee.

514. The passive with mà- denotes the involuntary performer. 35Nàpàpatihigàʾ aŋ báwat mádulàs sa lugàr na itò. Every one who slips at this place falls on his back. Hwag kà ŋ magpadulàs, sapagkàt baká ka màpatihigàʾ. Don’t slide, for you might fall on your back. Sya y nàpatiluhòd. He fell, landing in a kneeling position. Nàpatiupú sya sa kanya ŋ pagkádulàs. He fell into a sitting 40position when he slipped. Nàpàpatiupòʾ aŋ báwat táo ŋ magdaàn sa lugàr na itò, dahilàn sa madulàs na lúmot naŋ lúpaʾ. [314]Everyone who comes through this place falls and lands in a sitting position, owing to the slippery moss on the ground.

III. Irregular Derivatives.
(1) Transients and abstracts of the particles sa and -giŋ.

5515. The particle sa has transient forms as follows:

(a) A normal transient: with pà-sa, pá-pà-sa, ná-sa, ná-sà-sa. Nása simbáhan silà. They are (were) at church. Násàsa simbáhan silà naŋ maŋyáre aŋ súnog. They were at church when the fire occurred. Naŋ pása simbáhan silà.... When they went to 10church.... Pápàsa simbáhan silà. They will go to church.

Plural: Naŋása simbáhan silà. They are (were) at church.

(b) An accidental passive (of movement): má-pa-sa, má-pà-pa-sa, ná-pa-sa-, ná-pà-pa-sa-; abstract: pagká-pa-sa. Naŋ mápasa simbáhan silà ay malálim nà aŋ gabì. When they got to the church, 15it was already late at night. Mápàpasa simbáhan silà sa gabì. They will strike the church at nightfall. aŋ pagkápasa simbáhan a chance coming upon the church.

516. The (transient) forms of -giŋ are ma-gìŋ, ma-gí-giŋ, na-gìŋ, na-gí-giŋ; abstract: pa-gi-gìŋ. Magpùpútol daw naŋ buhòk 20aŋ Intsèk na si Yèŋ pagigìŋ binyágan nya. The Chinaman Yeng says he will have his queue cut when he gets baptized.

(2) Odd affixes.

517. ba- seems to appear in ba-lasìŋ.

518. hin-, with irregular nasalization of initials, in one simple 25derivative: Aŋ kanya ŋ himatày ay hindí nalaúnan. Her fainting-fit did not last long (matày). -himagsìk (bagsìk) does not occur, but underlies many derivatives, especially maghimagsìk (§ 352,c) and hìmagsíkan (§ 377,a). Many such underlying forms can be postulated from the various transients with maŋhin- 30(§ 357,b).

(a) With r: aŋ hintutúroʾ the forefinger (túroʾ).

519. kala- in aŋ kalaháteʾ a half; aŋ kalatimbàʾ dipping on the heels and rising, hands holding opposite ears (as trick or imposed as a punishment), from hátiʾ and timbàʾ a well-bucket; these 35have various further derivatives, see Index.

520. kasiŋ- having such and such a quality in common with something else; hence partly equivalent with ka-: Kasiŋkúlay naŋ áki ŋ bároʾ aŋ kanya ŋ salawàl. His trousers are of the same color as my blouse. Aŋ bóla ŋ itò ay kasiŋlakì naŋ itlòg. This ball is [315]the same size as an egg. Si Hwàn ay kasiŋpantày ni Pédro. Juan is of the same height as Pedro.

521. mala- (Spanish ?) derogatory: aŋ malasutsòt a young lout, a half-grown boy (literally: a bad whistler).

5522. pala- expresses extreme tendency to such and such an action:

(a) pala- S -in, from oxytone roots: Sya y isa ŋ palabintáŋin. He is very distrustful. Aŋ maŋa isdà y palabùlúkin sa tagáraw. Fish easily spoil in the hot season. aŋ palaluŋkútin a 10melancholy person, palapùtákin a fowl given to cackling, palasumbúŋin tattle-tale, palasutsútin one who is always whistling, palatuntúnin one who is always trying to follow up his stolen property, palatuwáin palatwáin one who is easily amused.

From root with shifted accent: palasàkítin person who is always 15getting sick. Irregularly: palahùníhin an animal given to neighing, chirping, etc.

Lack of secondary accent: palaiyákin a cry-baby.

(b) pala- (2) -in, from barytone roots: palagalitìn a hot-head, palagisiŋìn a poor sleeper, palagutumìn one who is always 20getting hungry, palagulatìn nervous person, palahilawìn a kind of rice that is hard to cook through; Palaputulìn aŋ maŋa tiŋtìŋ naŋ walìs na ytò. The fibres of this broom are very brittle. palatakutìn a timorous person.

(c) palà- -an the place for such and such a thing: aŋ palàisdáan 25a fish-pond, palàsiŋsíŋan the ring-finger, the fourth finger, palàtuntúnan a set of rules, rules of order.

523. ta- in ta-gílid the side; with retraction of accent: -talíkod.

524. tag- in names of seasons: tagáraw, tagulàn, the two 30Philippine seasons; aŋ taglamìg cold weather, the (American) winter. With accent-shift: taginìt the hot season.

525. taga- person whose duty it is to do so and so, especially upon some particular occasion: aŋ tagaalìs naŋ gwarnisyòn naŋ kabáyo the one detailed to unharness the horses, tagabílaŋ accountant, 35counter, tagaíkid sa gawaàn naŋ lúbid the one who rolls up a rope in the rope-factory; Ikàw ay tagainùm lámaŋ. Your job here is only to drink; so: tagakáin one whose only duty is to eat. Tagapútol naŋ káhoy aŋ katuŋkúlan niyà. He is delegated to cut wood. tagasúlat the one who does the writing; tagatahèʾ one who does the 40sewing. So from: húli, sulsì.

(a) With pag-: tagapagbigày, tagapagtaŋgòl.

(b) With pag-pa- one whose duty it is to oversee the doing of [316]so and so: aŋ tagapagpaalìs naŋ tapòn naŋ maŋa bóte head bottle-opener; tagapagpainùm sa fiyèsta bartender at a fiesta; Isa ŋ tagapagpainùm ay isa ŋ tagapagbigày naŋ inumìn sa maŋa háyop o maŋa bátaʾ. So: aŋ tagapagpakáin who gives food to animals or 5children, tagapagpalígoʾ who bathes children or horses, tagapagpasúlat head writer, tagapagpatotoò witness.

526. tara-, tra- is felt to be a prefix in: aŋ táo ŋ tarabúko, trabúko a bald-headed person, felt as derivative from búko smooth, unripe cocoanut.

10527. -éro (Spanish) as suffix of agent; final vowel (or vowel plus n or glottal stop) is lost: baŋkéro, sabuŋéro, sipéro (sipéros, plural); from derived word: Katipunéros (ka-tipún-an, § 423); from compound word: básag-uléro a brawler, ruffian (básag-úlo).

(3) Pronoun forms.

15528. The various forms of the pronouns and objectivizing particles show some regular derivation.

(a) n- with irregularities, for disjunctive forms: n-aŋ, n-i (si), n-inà n-ilà (sinà silà), n-íno (síno), n-irè, n-itò, n-iyàn, n-oòn (iyòn, yaòn); n-ità (kità), n-iyà (siyà), n-ilà (silà). From the 20prepositive form: n-átin, n-ámin, n-iniyò.

Similarly, the particle nawàʾ, root áwaʾ pity.

(b) ka- for local and prepositive forms: ka-y (si), k-inà (sinà); from the disjunctive form: ka-níno, ka-nità, ka-niyà. ka-nilà.

25(c) With si compare sí-no, with aŋ, a-nò.

(d) Local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns (treated as separate roots): d-íne (irè), d-íto (itò), d-iyàn, d-oòn.

(e) Words of manner with ga-: ga-áno, gá-no (anò), ga-yòn (iyòn). From disjunctive forms: ga-nitò, ga-niyàn, ga-noòn. Cf. 30also gáya like.

Of similar formation: Aŋ butò naŋ haláma ŋ itò y gabútil naŋ pálay. The seed of this plant is as large as a grain of rice (bútil a kernel of grain).

(f) saàn (for sa anò?) is felt as a simple word. [325]

1 I owe this and the following statements about the degree of pitch-rise to the kindness of Dr. C. Ruckmich of the Department of Psychology of the University of Illinois. ↑

2 It might perhaps be more correct not to include such cases under the term attribution (as will be done in the following analysis), but to set up instead an additional syntactic type of “exocentric modification”. ↑

3 In the proverbial expression at 16,18, balàt skin, skins is used as an object expression without aŋ, contrary to the normal habit. ↑

4 Although grammatical terms are necessarily and properly employed in different meanings when referring to different languages, the Tagalog constructions in question are so different from what is ordinarily understood by “cases” that the above terminology has been avoided in the following discussion. ↑

5 At 16, 2 hábaŋ, instead of standing at the beginning of its clause, follows the subject, taking the place of ay. I take it that this sentence has been handed down in this form from an older generation of speakers. Cf. § 316. ↑

6 Once, at 16, 18, at is used concessively, even though, and is placed not at the beginning of its phrase, but after the subject, where ay would normally stand. The sentence is no doubt traditional; it has currency as a proverb. See § 68 and cf. § 292. ↑

7 Cf. Kern’s derivation of liŋgò from Spanish domingo, felt as containing infix -um- (Sanskritsche woorden). ↑

[Contents]

III. LIST OF FORMATIONS.

The formations with irregular affixes (515 ff.) have been omitted from this list.

The following regular features have been ignored:

(1) Prefixes beginning with n-; these are the actual-mode forms of prefixes beginning with m-, and are treated in the same paragraphs as the latter.

(2) Forms with doubling or reduplication of the root; also those with accented reduplication (of root or prefix) expressing durative aspect; these are treated in the same paragraphs as the corresponding forms without reduplication.

(3) Secondary accent, when not peculiar to prefixes.

(4) Variations in position of accent.

The numbers refer to paragraphs.

[Contents]

A. Forms without prefix.

(1) No affix: 332. 336. 338. 341–346. 348. 358.

(2) Suffix only:
-an 31. 334,c. 374. 377–381.
-anan 377,b.
-han, -hanan see -an.
-hanin, -hin see -in.
-in 334,c. 359. 367.
-inan 377,b.
-nan see -an.
-nin see -in.

(3) Infix only:
-in- 334,b,1. 359. 365. 366.
-in- -um- 359,a.
-um- 348. 349. 358.

(4) Infix and suffix:
-in- -an 374.
-um- -in 359,a.

[Contents]

B. Forms with prefix.

[328]

[Contents]

INDEX OF WORDS.

The words are arranged by roots, in accordance with the speech-feeling, so far as ascertainable. The forms díne, díto, diyàn, doòn have, however, been given separate places.

In using the index the sound-variations described in § 334 should be kept in view. The forms are given with fullest accentuation and vocalism (iy for y, uw for w after consonant), regardless of actual occurrence. For e see i, for o see u. Foreign r is under d, f under p, v under b.

The brief indication of meaning after each form ignores shades of meaning that would require long definitions; so especially factors of involuntary or completed action and of ability (ka-, maka-, ma-) and of accident or ability due to external causes (kà-, makà-, mà-).

The references to occurrence have been limited by considerations of space; the numbers refer to page and line; when in heavy type, to paragraphs of the Grammatical Analysis.

The following abbreviations are used: arch.: felt as archaic. C.: Chinese. disj.: disjunctive form. E.: English. excl.: exclusive. id.: the same meaning. incl.: inclusive. intr.: English definition to be taken in intransitive sense. loc.: local. n.: name. pl.: the Tagalog form is an explicit plural. prep.: prepositive. S.: Spanish1. tr.: English definition to be taken in transitive sense.

A | B(V) | D(R) | G | H | I(E) | K | L | M | N | Ŋ | P (F) | S | T | U (O) | W | Y
[Contents]

A

a- see anò, aŋ.

abà ah 151(14).

abakà S. hemp 237(37).

-abála: pagabála a bothering; see Corrigenda.
naŋabála made trouble 239(29).
kaabalahàn trouble 302(14).

-abàŋ: umabàŋ watch for 226(23).
umáabàŋ is lying in wait 64(41).
nakaabàŋ is on guard 48(12).

ábito S. vestment 98(20).

abéynte-kuwátro S. twenty-fourth 110(11).

abúbot belongings 118(23).

-ábot (a) overtake: abútan be [329]reached 92(19). 299(38).
inabútan was overtaken 52(42). 84(34). 250(30).
inàabútan is being reached 301(34).
paábot let oneself be overtaken 301(21).
paaábot pl. 46(11).
nagpaábot let himself be overtaken 52(28).
—(b) with accent-shift; reach for, take: umabòt reach for 231(5). 237(20). reached for 231(6).
umáabòt reaches for 62(14).
pagabòt a reaching for 231(7).
nagáabòt is handing 237(17).
pagaabòt a handing 237(19).
inabòt was taken 30(10).
ináabot is being reached for 246(3).
iyabòt be handed 249(13).
iniyabòt was handed 30(13). 106(21).
iniyáabòt is being handed 249(12).
kaàbútan one of two who hand to each other 278(4).
maabòt he reached 286(28).
maáabòt will be reached 20(27).
naabòt was reached 286(27).
pagkaabòt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
náabòt was reached 296(13).
pagkáabòt a reaching for see Corrigenda.
paabòt caused to be handed 300(23).
nagpaabòt caused to be handed 304(21).
ipinaabòt was caused to be handed 52(11).

-ága: umága morning 50(40). 62(36). 66(25). 120(19). 163(23). 190(24). 241(39). 262(5).
inùumága is being overtaken by morning 245(42).
magpaumága let oneself be overtaken by morning 304(18).
agáhan be done early 250(30).
maága early 312(27).
paága early rice 300(3).
pàága be very early 301(36).
pàagáhan be done very early 308(36).

agàd soon 32(22). 42(31). 48(26). 265(1).
agàd-agàd immediately 36(5). 48(37.40). 265(1).

ágaw that snatched 220(17).
agàw snatched 222(16).
umágaw snatched 226(24).
inágaw was snatched 250(11).
agawàn a grabbing together 260(3).
pagaagawàn a scrambling 108(25).
nagsìsipagagawàn are scrambling 108(24).
naàágaw can be seized 40(8).
makàágaw seize 108(31).

aginàldo S. Christmas present; as n. 118(6).
nàpaŋaginàlduhan was given as a Christmas present 298(26). 307(21).

ágos stream 16(3).
umàágos is streaming 44(42). àguwa-bindíta S. holy-water 96(28).

áhas snake 120(21).

-áhit: paŋáhit razor 232(17).
naŋáhit did shaving 167(2).
inahítan was shaved 250(32).

-áhon: umáhon go up 116(18). went up 226(25).
umàáhon is going up 110(20).
àáhon will go up 263(26).
pagáhon a going up 226(27).
nagsiáhon went up, pl. 118(13).
ipinaáhon was caused to go up 120(16).

akálaʾ opinion 20(8). 98(15). 271.
paŋakála panukálaʾ thought 16(9). 224(40). 226(1).
nagakálaʾ thought, planned 24(17). 50(13).
inakálaʾ was thought 18(17.24).
inàakálaʾ is being thought 11(86).

-ákap: nààákap is embracing 66(40).

-ákay (a) lead: umàákay is leading 22(31).
inákay was led 26(36).
(b) with accent-shift inakày [330]young of animal 102(20). 247(13).

ákin prep. and loc. of akò: my, me, by me 165. 169. 182.

-akiyàt: umakiyàt climb 22(39). climbed 16(15).
áakiyàt will climb 22(36).
pagakiyàt a climbing 24(6).
nagsísiakiyàt are climbing 108(31).
àakiyatìn will be climbed 16(15).
makaakiyàt be able to climb 108(28).
makaákiyàt will be able to climb 22(37).
maakiyàt be able to be climbed 16(13).
náakiyàt got carried up 295(3).
paakiyàt ask to be climbed with or for; caused to be climbed or climbed for; climbing up 106(14). 299(6.37). 301(22.29).
paáakiyàt will ask to be climbed with or for 301(38). 302(1).
napaakiyàt asked to be climbed for 311(37).

aklàt book 154(28).
aklátan library 210(12). See báhay.

-akmàʾ: inakmaàn was prepared for 70(29).

akò I 16(17). 152(14). 63. Cf. ákin, ko.

ákoʾ person relieved 220(19).
paŋákoʾ 233(35).
maŋákoʾ promise 44(13).
inákoʾ was pledged for 220(19). 243(31).
ipinaŋákoʾ was promised 34(10).
pagkapaŋákoʾ a having promised 44(22). 287(29).

alaála souvenir, present 72(37). 221(3).
paŋalaála memory 116(24).
alalahánin be minded 104(33).
àalalahánin will be minded 243(34).
inàalaála is being remembered 243(32).
naalaála was remembered 202(36).
nàalaála was recalled 30(16). 72(23). 100(13).
nààalaála is remembered. màalaála be recalled 86(3).
paalaála caused to be given as a souvenir 299(8).
pagpapaalaála a causing to be remembered 292(22).

-alágaʾ: nagàalágaʾ is attending to 311(28).

alagàd assistant 114(12).

aláhas (S.) jewelry 102(24).

álak wine, liquor 221(6).

-alala see alaála.

-álam (a) know: màláman be known 22(35). 298(9).
màlàláman will be known 42(37).
nàláman was known 26(32).
nàlàláman is known 24(32).
màpagaláman be generally known 60(35).
paálam causing himself to be known (as leaving) 183(17).
ipinaálam was caused to be known (as leaving) 32(9). 306(4).
paaláman be made known 308(3).
paàaláman will be made known 42(35).
napaálam caused himself to be known (as leaving) 54(12)
—(b) with accent-shift: alàm known 300(32).
makialàm interfere 58(42). 264(18).
pinakialamàn was looked after 265(32). 290(32).
kaalàm accomplice 267(1) and Corrigenda.
nakààalàm knows 42(14).
pagkáalàm a knowing 82(9). 272(6).
nàalamàn got known 118(1). 298(14).
màpagalamàn get generally known 118(42). 298(24).
ipaalàm be given out to be known 307(3).
ipinaalàm was given out to be known 307(4).

alasìŋko S. five o’clock 180(7).

alasès S. six o’clock 122(6).

alaskuwátro S. four o’clock 172 (42).
magàalaskuwátro will be four o’clock 66(34).

alastrès S. three o’clock 66(32).

álat salty 218(37).
kaálat kayálat [331]what saltiness 267(34).
kaalátan saltiness 267(27).

-álay: iniyálay was offered 16(5).

áli aunt, madam 118(14). 151(36). 59. 256.
magáli aunt and niece or nephew 242(1).

alikabòk dust 245(26).
maalikabòk dusty 289(1).

alílaʾ servant, domesticated 54(7). 62(32).
aliláin be domesticated 106(40).
pagkàpaalílaʾ a making a servant of oneself 104(2).

alìn which? 22(37). 48(18.25.36). 97.
alìn-alìn pl. 97.

alintána in spite 277.
inalintána was paid attention to 88(29).

alípin slave 90(36).

-alipustàʾ: alipustaìn be mistreated 72(39).

alìs go away 192(36).
umalìs go away 52(22). went away 20(36).
áalìs will go away 192(2).
pagalìs a going away 108(22).
nagsísialìs are going away 114(27).
naŋagsialìs went away, pl. 120(39).
inalìs was removed 30(10).
iniyalìs was removed 248(6).
alisàn be removed from 250(33).
àlísan a going away together 257(23).
nagàlísan went away together 236(14).
nagààlísan are going away together 96(15).
ikinaalìs was the cause of going away 271(41).
makaalìs be able to go away 78(11).
makaáalìs will be able to go away 42(38). 281(25).
nakaalìs has gone away 282(21).
pagkaalìs a having gone away 80(3).
mààalìs will be removed 96(34).
papaalìs going away 300(39).
pinaalìs was caused to go away 32(34).
pinaáalìs is being caused to go away 64(23).
ipinaalìs was caused to be removed 70(4). 306(5).
mapaalìs be able to be caused to go away 122(21).
ikinápaalìs was the cause of ordering to go away 310(5).
ikinàpàpaalìs is the cause of ordering to go away 310(8).
tagaalìs remover 315(33).
tagapagpaalìs head remover 316(1).

alitaptap firefly 40(15).

Alfònso S. n. 309(6).

-alsà S.: pagaalsà a raising 70(2).

altàr S. altar 96(17).

aluwági (S.) carpenter 56(35).
pagaaluwági carpentry 58(2).

amà father 30(26). 59.
magamà father and child 242(2).
magaamà father and children 242(27).
amaìn uncle 247(26).
magamaìn uncle and nephew or niece 242(25).
ináamà godfather 247(17).

ámin prep. and loc. of kamì: our, us, by us excl. 165. 169.
námin disj. of us, by us 163.
umámin confessed 226(28).
àamínin will be owned up to 243(36).
inàámin is being owned up to 243(35).

Amérika S. America 189(29).

amerikána S. European coat 281(5).

Amerikáno S. American 56(30).

-ampàt: maampàt be able to be stopped 46(8). 259(30).

-ámoʾ (S. ?): inámoʾ was caressed 84(32).
inamù-amòʾ was repeatedly caressed 86(4).

ámoŋ (S.) sir, Father 20(37). 50(40).

-ámot sell, of other than professional merchant: umámot sold 226(30).
inamútan was sold to 246(41). [332]

an see anò.

-ának: magának family 165(17). 242(17).
kamagának relative 54(22). 266(34).
kamaganákan clan 112(26). 277(14).
aŋkàn one’s family 112(19). 260(39).

anàk son, daughter 30(25).
paŋanàk infant 54(6).
kapaŋànákan birth, birthday 275(43).
paŋaŋanàk a giving birth 220(24).
naipaŋáŋanàk has just been born 36(16). 288(4).

Andrès S. n. 26(30).

Andòy S. short-n. 208(1).

áni harvest 191(32).

-ánib: paŋánib danger 46(15).
mapaŋánib dangerous 289(21).
umánib make one’s sleeping-mat overlap 226(30).
iyánib be made to overlap 248(7).
magkaánib overlapping each other 269(38).

ánim six 52(44). 67.
paŋánim number six 225(38).
ikaánim ikánim sixth 273(17).
makàánim six times 298(32).

-anínaw: inanínaw was scrutinized 66(19).

aniyáya invitation 219(28).
inaniyáhan was invited 250(34).
inàaniyáhan is being invited 203(26).

aniyòʾ aspect 20(12).
nagáaniyòʾ is behaving 40(40).
pagaaniyòʾ behavior 108(33).

antimáno S. beforehand 20(39). 262(1).

antòk sleepiness 84(14).
nagáantòk is sleepy 231(42).
nakapagáantòk causes to get sleepy 108(8).

anò, an what? what kind of? 18(6). 22(21). 97. 179. 190. 264.
anò-anò pl. 114(16). 97.
naŋanò did what? 239(29).
páno how? 155(21). 300(8).
papáno how? 18(11). 301(1).
gaáno gáno how great? 28(2). 316(28). 190. 247. See also saàn.

anúnas S. custard-apple, Anona reticulata L. 76(19).

Ánoŋ S. short-n. 286(38).

aŋ the, a 45. 61–71. 75. 78. 108. 109. 115. 116. 119. 126. 130–133. 161. 168. 196. 246. 248. 253.
naŋ disj. the, a, of the, by the; when 45. 119. 116–194. 253. 317(2). 340. 341 (3,d).

-aŋk see -ának.

aŋkìn appropriated 60(20).
umaŋkìn appropriate 226(32).
aŋkinìn be appropriated 62(6). 243(39).
inaŋkìn was appropriated 16(8).
ináaŋkìn is being appropriated 243(37).
máaŋkìn get appropriated 308(20).

ápat four 24(37). 67.
àápat only four 116(16).
ápat-ápat four at a time 223(41).
paŋápat number four 225(36).
ikaápat ikápat fourth 82(16).
makàápat makàípat four times 298(36).

Áfrika S. Africa 189(4).

-apt see atìp.

apòy fire 22(6).
inapuyàn was inflamed 94(29) and Corrigenda.

áral doctrine 140(31). 223(23).
umáral arch. teach morals 233(22).
magáral study 18(7). 209(13).
magàáral will study 217(28).
nagáral studied 30(5).
nagàáral is studying 90(31). 233(22).
pagaáral a studying 28(3).
magsipagáral study pl. 262(34).
nagsìsipagáral are studying 38(5).
arálan be taught morals 250(36).
aralàn study-room 238(6).
pagarálan be learned 168(1).
pinagarálan was studied 18(14).
pinagàarálan is [333]being studied 255(4).
makapagáral be able to study 34(33).
pinapagáral was caused to study 305(19).
ipapagáral be used for causing to study 88(11).
pàaralàn school 26(32).

aráro S. plow 232(2).
pagaaráro a plowing 232(1).
magaaráro plowman 242(38).
ararúhin be plowed 243(40).

áraw sun, day 16(11). 66(1). See also madalìʾ, kalahátiʾ.
áraw-gabì day and night 94(31). 257. 331.
áraw-áraw every day 58(7). 331.
kaarawàn holiday 110(17).
tagáraw sunny season 34(27). 315(29).

arày ouch 151(15).

áriʾ that owned 42(2). 220(22). See also máy.
nagàáriʾ owns 40(17).
pagaáriʾ possession 62(24). 102(31).
maáriʾ be possible 168(18).
maàáriʾ will be possible 16(27). 46(12).
naáriʾ was owned, became possible 104(12). 285(29).
naàáriʾ is possible 152(18).
pagkaáriʾ possibility 80(30).

aritmétika S. arithmetic 82(1).

àrmas armàs S. arms 106(26). 235(4).

arsubìspo S. archbishop 96(10).

artísta S. artist 90(10).

ása expectation 72(7). 209(24).
pagása hope 56(19). 76(13).

-ásal: inásal conduct 34(24).

asanàʾ (S. ?) a tree, Pterocarpus Indicus Willd. 263(25).

asáwa husband, wife 30(39). 34(5).
magasáwa take a wife 78(38). married couple 30(25). 242(4).
magàasáwa will take a wife 232(2).
nagasáwa took a wife 80(6).
pagaasáwa the taking a husband or wife 80(27). 92(9).

ásim sourness 297(10).
maásim sour 289(1).

asìn salt 30(11).
asnàn be salted 250(37).

aspilè S. pin 260(7.21).

áso dog 18(8).
inàáso is being chased 243(41).
naáso has been chased 284(9).
nàáso got chased 292(42).

asò smoke 64(33).
asuhàn chimney 261(10) and Corrigenda.
pinaasuhàn was smoked 308(4).

asúkal S. sugar 198(31).

asùl S. blue 122(2).
kayasùl what blueness 267(35).

asuwàŋ vampire 34(30).
magasuwàŋ-asuwáŋan play vampire 237(9).
magàasuwàŋ-asuwáŋan will play vampire 237(7).
nagasuwàŋ-asuwáŋan played vampire 34(26).

at t and; for, that, though 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 213. 289. 306. 312. 317.

átas that prompted 98(33).
iniyátas was enjoined 54(42).

ataòl S. coffin 116(1).

atè (C.) oldest sister 59. 256.
magatè oldest sister with brother or sister 242(5).

átin prep. and loc. of táyo: our, us, by us, incl. 165. 169.
nátin disj., of us, by us 163.

atìp roofing 118(27).
paŋatìp shingle 224(40).
aptàn be roofed 250(38).

átis custard-apple, Anona squamosa L. 76(20).
atísan grove of átis trees 261(10).

atsára sour preserves 163(17). 299(11).

áwaʾ (a) pity 46(22).
kàwáwaʾ [334]piteous 80(12). 267(29).
ikinaáwaʾ was the cause of pitying 272(1).
naáwaʾ pitied 285(16).
pagkaáwaʾ a pitying 285(40).
nagmàmakaáwaʾ is calling forth pity 44(11). 288(36).
(b) accent shifted: awàʾ overcome by pity 222(17).
kaawaàn be the object of pity 182(39).
kinaàawaàn is the object of pity 275(1).
nawàʾ pray 47. 225.

-áway: nagàáway is fighting 232(4).
pagaáway a fighting 306(18).
nakipagáway fought along 264(24).
nakìkipagáway fights along 264(21).
kaáway enemy 18(11).
kaàáway there has just been quarreling 267(12).
mapagawày quarrelsome 186(33).
màpagáway be matched 297(10).

áwit song 280(39).
awítan be sung to 250(38).
magàwítan sing together 183(11).
nagààwítan are singing together 236(27).

ay y is; then 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 89. 119.

áyap condiment 244(2) and Corrigenda.
naŋáyap ate relishes 239(31).
ináyap was used as a condiment 244(1).
paáyap given to be used as a condiment 299(12).
nagpaáyap served a relish 302(28).

áyaw (a) not desired 30(5.37). 40(30). 239. 267.
pagáyaw unwillingness 226(32).
(b) accent shifted: umayàw refused, left the table 231(12).
pagayàw refusal 94(17). 231(9).
nakaayàw has left the table 286(25).
pagkáayàw dislike 70(13).

áyon according to 40(3). 278.
umáyon agreed 30(4).
nakaáyon has come to be in accordance 281(3).
paayòn conforming 300(13).

áyos formation 48(4.15) 90(11).
mapagáyos be able to be straightened 287(6).
mapàpagáyos will be able to be put into shape 287(7).

[Contents]

B(V)

bà interrogative particle 47. 215. 223. 229. 299.

-bábaʾ (a) bumábaʾ became low 226(35).
kababáan lowness, south 62(15). 163(26). 241(19).
mabábaʾ low, humble 104(27). 289(2).
(b) Accent shifted: babàʾ low; come down 223(16) and see pákoʾ.
bumabàʾ descended 36(35).
ibabàʾ south 56(24). 163(26). See also bandà.

-bábag: bàbábag will fight 226(37).
nagbábabàg are fighting each other 237(25).
pagbababàg a fighting together 252(14).
nakipagbabàg fought along 264(37).

-bábaw: bumábaw became shallow 258(40).
ibábaw top surface 66(28).
kababáwan shallowness 88(30).
mabábaw 88(26). 220(8).

babáyi babái female, woman 30(32). 163(13). nagbabá-babayíhan played woman 237(14).

báboy pig 36(13).

-badiyà: náibadiyà got spread abroad 24(33).

bagà really? 22(21). 47. 216. 290. 219. 317(3).

-bagábag: nabagábag grew uneasy 120(37).

-bágal: mabágal slow 18(4).

bágay thing, circumstance 28(1). [335]36(22).
bágay-bágay various things 116(33).
ibinàbágay is being adapted 248(9).
nàbàbágay is suitable 78(34).

bagiyò hurricane 273(8).

-bagsàk: ibinagsàk was dropped 271(24).

-bagsìk: mabagsìk violent 42(3). 44(30).
mababagsìk pl. 102(19).
maghimagsìk come to violence 314(27).
naghimagsìk came to violence 236(5).
nagsipaghimagsìk revolted, pl. 263(12).
naŋhimagsìk resorted to violence 241(18).
nagsipaŋhimagsìk pl. 263(30).
hìmagsíkan internal warfare 258(13). 314(28).
naghìmagsíkan fought each other 236(23).
nagsipaghìmagsíkan pl. 263(13).
paghihìmagsíkan internal warfare 52(42). 116(12).
paŋhihìmagsíkan id. 241(11).

bágo new; before 18(37). 36(32). 291.
kabàbágo newly 54(6).
nabàbágo has been changed 64(35).

bahàʾ flood 98(17). 110(23).
bumábahàʾ there is a flood 110(19).
pagbahàʾ a flooding 110(21).

bahági part 82(17).

bahagiyà slight 201(21).

báhay (a) house 34(21). See also kápit, tánod.
báhay-aklátan library-building 210(11).
báhay-bátaʾ womb 210(23).
báhay-gúyaʾ womb of animal 210(24).
báhay-pàhayagàn newspaper-office 210(25).
báhay-pàmahaláan government building 292(21).
Báhay-paníki place-n. 210(25).
báhay-pintáhan paint-house 210(26).
báhay-saŋláan pawnshop 252(22).
báhay-tùlúyan inn 112(38).
bahày-bahày various houses 52(15). 110(36).
magbáhay build a house 232(5).
pamamáhay household 70(26).
kabahayàn house containing several dwellings 120(3). furnishings of a house 276(5).
—(b) Accent shifted: bahày tame, shy 222(19).
nabábahày is shy 286(29).

baìt good conduct 165(1).
kabàítan kindness, virtue 74(41).
mabaìt well-behaved 84(11).
mababaìt pl. 34(35).

báka S. cow 112(40).

bákal iron 201(30). 220(5).

bakàs mark, in: bakàs-súgat mark of a wound 46(6).

bakasiyòn S. vacation 26(35).

-bakìl: bakìl-bakìl uneven 220(2).

bákit why? 18(7). 236.

bakiyàʾ sandal 245(20).

bákod fence 266(6).
paŋbákod used in making a fence 225(2).
bakúran be fenced in 250(40). yard, grounds 34(38).

bákol open bamboo basket without handle 74(5).

bála any 186(18). 271(22). 66. 132.

bála S. bullet 52(36).

balahíbo fur 212(18).

baláe person whose son or daughter one’s daughter or son has married; old friend 207(35). 266(5).
magbaláe two people whose children have intermarried 242(8). 269(42).
magbabaláe pl. 240(28).
kabaláe one’s baláe 266(2).
magkabaláe two fellow baláe 269(40).

bálak plan 287(11).
binálak was planned 18(34).

bálaŋ locust 267(27).

balàt skin, shell 16(18). 30(10). [336]

báli S. matter, harm 52(6). 42(5).
balatàn be peeled 200(24).

báliʾ break 219(29).
ipinagkákabalèʾ is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
makabáleʾ be able to break 281(26).
nabáleʾ was broken 284(32).
nabàbáleʾ is interrupted 104(4).
mabalían be broken in 70(18).
nabalían was broken in 62(27).

-balìk: bumalìk come back 66(17). 233(17). came back 20(40).
bábalìk will come back 32(27).
bumábalìk is coming back 66(24).
magbalìk come back to 233(18).
nagbalìk came back to 72(11). 283(4).
pagbalikàn be come back to 255(5).
pagbàbalikàn will be come back to 32(28). 255(5).
makabábalìk will be able to go back 56(31).
pabalìk going back 299(13.27.39).
pagpapabalìk a causing to go back 48(20).
pinabalìk was caused to go back 68(41).
ipinabábalìk is being sent back 48(7).

balíkat shoulder 48(19).

balítaʾ that reported; famed 34(29). 36(2).
magbalítaʾ relate 42(24).
nagbalítaʾ related 118(35).
pamamalítaʾ a relating of stories 102(12).
ibalítaʾ be reported 88(39).
ibinalítaʾ was reported 32(8).
ipamalítaʾ be related 275(18).
ipinamalítaʾ was related 22(27).
binalitáan was narrated to 250(42).
pagbabàlitaàn a reporting by many 102(13).
pinakibalitáan was ascertained by report 102(42). 265(30).
nàbalítaʾ got related 46(18).
nàbàbalítaʾ gets related 48(26).
pagkàbalítaʾ a getting narrated 272(42).
màbalitáan be learned by report 56(18).
nàbalitáan was learned by report 38(12).

Balíwag place-n. 173(9). See báyan, daàn.

balúbad casoy, Anacardium occidentale L. 76(20).

baluktòt crooked 218(38).
balú-baluktòt variously bent 290(33).
bumaluktòt bend; bent 226(39). 233(25).
magbaluktòt bend in quantity 233(24).
pagbabaluktòt a bending 48(15).

balòn a well 24(37).

-bálot: bumálot roll up 226(40). 233(27).
magbálot roll up in quantity; wrap oneself up 233(26).
magbalòt roll up variously 52(21).
nagbalòt rolled up variously 52(35).
nagsipagbalòt pl. 118(13).
nabálot has been wrapped up 284(10).
nabàbálot is wrapped up 36(39).
nàbálot got wrapped up 198(8). 255(40).

bambò club 70(17).
paŋbambò club for beating 225(2).
naŋbábambò is beating 239(32).
bambuhìn be beaten 70(29).
binambò was beaten 72(10).

-banàl: kabànálan act of piety 78(33).

banáyad gentle 48(17).

bànda S. band, orchestra 48(31).
bànda-ŋ-músika band of music 48(30).

bandà direction 18(22).
bandà ŋ ibabàʾ south
mábandà-ŋ-ibabàʾ get turned towards the south 296(21).
bandà ŋ kaliwàʾ, kánan see dúlo.
bandà ŋ kataasàn north
nàbàbandà-ŋ-kataasàn is turned toward the north 296(20).
bandáhin direction headed for 294(24).

bandílaʾ S. flag 234(14). [337]

banìg sleeping-mat 62(35).

bantày watcher 80(18).
bantày-pálay rice-guard 228(17).
bantày-pintòʾ door-keeper 78(31).
magbantày stand guard 38(14).
pagbabantày a guarding 36(18).
bantayàn be guarded 251(2).
bantáyan sentry-box 248(16).

Bantòg family-n. 165(17).

baŋàn granary 270(33).

-baŋgìt: binaŋgìt was mentioned 90(23).
nábaŋgìt got mentioned 50(11).

baŋkàʾ canoe 20(3).
mamaŋkàʾ go boating 28(12).
magsipamaŋkàʾ pl. 263(21).
namámaŋkàʾ is boating 20(2).
nagsísipamaŋkàʾ pl. 98(17).
pamamaŋkàʾ a boating 239(32).
pagbabaŋkáan boating-party 112(13).
baŋkéro boatman 80(34). 316(11).

baŋkày corpse 46(30).

bàŋko S. banking-house 227(18).

baŋkòʾ S. bench 30(29).

-baŋòʾ: mabaŋòʾ fragrant 278(15).
pabaŋòʾ perfume 222(38).

-báŋon: nagbàbáŋon is getting up 70(36).
kabàbáŋon there has been getting up 267(13).

bapòr S. steamship 56(24).

-barà: barà-barà unruly 273(37).

baráha S. cards 173(3).

baráso S. arm 138(31).

barbéro S. barber 24(35).

barìl gun 36(20).
nagsipamarìl went shooting, pl. 28(25).
pamamarìl a shooting 230(9).
pinagbábarìl is being shot 56(26).
barìl-barílan toy-gun 261(35). 293(18).
maipabarìl be caused to be shot 52(23). 312(9).
nábarìl got shot 56(29).

báriyo S. district of a town 70(11).

bároʾ blouse 205(20).
magbaròʾ put on one’s clothes 237(26).
pamamároʾ clothing 110(33).

-bása: pagbása reading 227(3).
binása was read 299(18).
binàbása is being read 172(6).
basáhan be read to 251(2).
basahàn reading-room 137(16).
mabása be able to be read 186(2).
nabása has been read 244(3). 284(11).
màbása get read 52(12).
nàbása got read 86(19). 293(2).
pabása gospel-reading ordered by a communicant 251(13).

-basàʾ: nagsísipagbasàʾ are getting themselves wet 110(23).
nakabasàʾ caused to be wet 201(22).

básag a breaking, in:
básag-úlo a head-smashing, free-for-all fight 262(7).
básag-uléro ruffian 316(13).
basàg broken 30(10).
mabásag be broken 30(8). 283(21). 284(35).
nabásag has been broken 296(14).
màbásag get broken 293(4).

-bastàʾ: nagbastàʾ packed up 232(5).
pagbabastáan a packing up together 118(17).

báso S. drinking-glass 137(39).

bátaʾ boy, girl 30(33). See also báhay.
binátaʾ young man 90(28).
pagkabátaʾ childhood 86(22). 285(41).

batalàn platform of house 72(14).

Bathálaʾ God 54(42). 59.

-bátis: nagbàbátis is fording 104(42).
binátis was forded 244(4).

batò stone 30(7). 220(4).
binatò was stoned 303(30). [338]

báo cocoanut-shell 108(32). 163(13).

báo widower, widow 163(29). 256.
nabáo was widowed 80(29). 285(29).

baòl S. box, trunk 268(8).

báon provisions 28(27).

-baòn: pagbabaòn a burying 54(29).
mábaòn get buried 54(17).
magpabaòn cause to be buried 54(24).
ipinabaòn was caused to be buried 54(30).

báwal forbidden 218(39).

báwaŋ garlic 36(22).

báwat every 24(40). 48. 66. 132. 246.

-báwiʾ: bàbawíin will be taken back 244(4) and Corrigenda.
ikinabáwiʾ was the cause of being taken back 272(3).

-báyaʾ (a) bayáan be permitted 46(37). 48(13).
binayáan was permitted 78(31).
binàbayáan is being permitted 286(38).
paubáyaʾ permitted 300(9).
magpàpabáyaʾ will be neglectful 106(32).
nagpabáyaʾ was neglectful 302(29).
pabayáan be left alone 308(7).
pinabayáan was left alone, not interfered with 168(23). 169(42). 308(6).
(b) Accent shifted: pabayàʾ neglectful 300(25).
kapabayaàn neglectfulness 310(39).
pabayaàn be permitted 52(8). 237(29). 308(34).

bayábas see biyábas.

báyad payment 54(9).
báyad-útaŋ debt-payment 178(29).
bayàd paid 222(22).
magbáyad pay 54(23).
nagbáyad paid 232(6).
bàbayáran will be paid to 54(29).
binayáran was paid 54(11).
binàbayáran is being paid for 74(3).
pagbayáran be settled with 54(32).
pagbàbayáran will be settled for 58(27).
pinagbayáran was settled for 255(6).
pinagbàbayáran is being atoned for 74(21).
makabàbáyad will be able to pay 114(41).

báyan town, district 22(27). See also kápit, táo.
báya-ŋ-Balíwag the town of Baliuag 20(3).
báya-ŋ-Kamálig 92(15).
báya-ŋ-Malólos 38(5).
báya-ŋ-Marikína 96(38).
báya-ŋ-Maynílaʾ 256(30).
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl 50(14).
bayàn-bayàn various towns 50(8).
namàmáyan is dwelling in a town 50(34).
kababáyan fellow-townsman 60(12). 267(3). 291(37).
magkababáyan two or more fellow-townsmen 26(31). 270(10.17).
makabáyan patriotic 288(30).

bayàw wife’s brother, sister’s husband 54(8).
magbayàw two men, one of whom has married the other’s sister 242(9).

-báyo: ibáyo far side 80(36).

-bayò: paŋbayò pestle 225(3).
magbayò pound rice 232(7).
magbabáyo rice-pounder 242(40).

bayúgin a tree, Pterospermum 237(39).

bayòŋ palm-leaf sack 74(5).

bíbas jester 98(30).

bibìg mouth 30(20).

Bigaà place-n. 116(25).

bigàs hulled rice 104(15).
magbigàs hull rice 232(8).
magbibígas rice-dealer 242(41).
bigasàn be supplemented with rice 251(3). containing uncooked rice 261(10).
bìgásan rice-mill 203(3).
Bìgása-ŋ-Sumúloŋ-at-Kasamahàn Rice-Mill [339]of Sumulong and Company 210(34).

bigàt weight 226(36).
kabigatàn heaviness 158(12).
nakabíbigàt is making heavy 32(10).
mabigàt heavy, grave 58(34).
mabibigàt pl. 118(22).
pabigàt weighting 110(7).
nápakabigàt too severe 313(10).

bigày that given 220(24).
bigày-loòb favor 210(27).
pagbibigày-loòb a doing favors 60(23). 235(26).
nagbigày gave 76(35).
nagbíbigày is giving 60(38).
pagbibigày a giving 50(30).
ibigày be given 42(43).
ibíbigày will be given 16(28).
ibinigày was given 20(14).
ibiníbigày is being given 40(11).
bigyàn be given to 26(2).
bìbigyàn will be given to 74(42).
binigyàn was given to 32(15).
bìgáyan receiver 258(22).
kabìgáyan one of two who give to each other 277(36).
mapagbigày over-indulgent 289(25).
tagapagbigày hander-out 315(41).

-bigkàs: nagbíbigkàs is pronouncing 231(24).
biníbigkàs is being pronounced 98(38).

biglàʾ suddenly 82(40).
pabiglàʾ in sudden manner 68(10).

bigtì strangled 223(24).
bumigtì strangled 227(3).
pagbigtì a strangling 227(4).
nagbigtì strangled himself 233(29).
pagbibigtì a strangling oneself 233(29).
bigtihìn be strangled 22(22).
bigtíhan gallows 279(19).

béha cigarette-stub 205(21).

bíhag captive 233(1).

bihásaʾ skilled 46(12).

bihíraʾ seldom, rare 40(26). 42(21). 72(29). 106(39). 110(29). 112(13).
magkàbihíraʾ occur at odd times 114(27). 271(9).

bíhis that donned 220(26).
bihìs dressed up 222(23).
nagbíhis dressed himself up 232(10).
nagbìbíhis is dressing himself up 32(37). 96(21).
magsipagbíhis dress up, pl. 262(35).
makapagbíhis have dressed oneself 96(24).
pinapagbíhis was ordered to dress himself 32(14).

biìk young pig 72(36).

-bilàʾ: kabilàʾ other side 16(23). 266(6).
magkábilàʾ be on both sides 16(7). 271(11).

bílaŋ number 24(5).
bilàŋ counted 222(24).
pagbílaŋ a counting 285(24).
bìbiláŋin will be counted 24(4).
mabílaŋ having a number 114(1).
pagkàbílaŋ count 291(2).
tagabílaŋ counter 315(34).

bilaŋgòʾ prisoner 258(24).
ibíbilaŋgòʾ will be put into prison 100(28).
ibinilaŋgòʾ was put into prison 248(12).
bìlaŋgúan prison 201(31).
nábilaŋgòʾ got jailed 38(2). 198(1).
ipabíbilaŋgòʾ will be caused to be put in prison 100(15).

bilàs wife’s sister’s husband 242(11).
magbilàs two men whose wives are sisters 242(10).

biláo large flat basket 74(5). 108(17).

bilì that bought 308(26).
bilì naŋ bilì keeps buying 177(8).
paŋbilì used for buying 255(34).
bumilì buy 120(19).
pagbilì a buying 223(21).
magbilì sell 249(22).
nagbilì sold 233(30).
nagbíbilì is selling 233(31).
pagbibilì a selling 252(19).
namilì bought in quantity 239(33).
namímilì is shopping 249(9).
bìbilhìn will be bought [340]203(18).
binilì was bought 163(40).
pinamilì was bought in quantity 246(41).
ipagbilì be sold 98(36).
ipinabilì was sold 249(21).
ipinagbíbilì is being sold 74(8).
binilhàn was bought from 251(5).
pinagbilhàn was sold to 255(8).
bìlíhan market 258(24).
ikabilì be the cause of buying 186(10).
nakábilì happened to buy 56(38).
màbìbilì will get bought 203(37).
pabilhìn be caused to buy 34(5).
makapagpabilì be able to cause to be bought 286(39).

bílin commission, errand 221(27).

-bilmìt: pamilmìt used as fish-pole 249(28).

bílog circle 112(2).
bilòg rounded, round 222(25).
bumílog turned on a lathe 227(6).
namílog turned 188(26).
binílog was turned 244(5).
binìbílog is being turned 244(6).
kabilúgan roundness 38(17). 152(17). 276(27).
nàbìbílog gets turned 293(36).
pabilòg in a circle, spherically 46(40). 48(4). 110(41).

-bendisiyòn S.: magbendisiyòn give blessing 96(26).
nagbébendisiyòn is blessing 98(3).
pagbebendisiyòn a blessing 54(32).
binèbendisyunàn is being blessed 114(19).
pagkabendisiyòn a having blessed 64(29).
pagkábendisiyòn a having chanced to bless 56(8).
pabendisyunàn be caused to be blessed 54(17).

bendíta S.: holy 96(25).

-biniyàg: nagbíbiniyàg is baptizing 98(2).
binyágan person baptized 314(20).

bintánaʾ S. window 70(30).

bintàŋ suspicion 36(29).
nagbintàŋ suspected 38(24).
pagbintaŋàn be suspected 20(9).
pinagbintaŋàn was suspected 16(21).
nàpàpagbintaŋàn gets suspected 20(35).
palabintáŋin given to suspicion 315(7).

biŋì deaf 86(23). 167(8).
ikinabiŋì was the cause of being deaf 295(17).
nakabíbiŋì causes deafness 219(42).
nábiŋì got deaf 295(12).

bíŋit edge, brink 180(34).
bumíŋit went to the brink 227(7).
ibiníŋit was put on the edge 248(13).
biniŋítan was approached up to the brink 251(7).
kinàbìbiŋítan is been on the brink of 52(31).
napabíŋit go to the brink 312(2).

birtùd S. occult quality 60(10).

bíroʾ joke 220(27).
paŋbibíroʾ a joking 40(39).

biróke S. blow-gun bullet 212(31).

bèsbol E. baseball 48(2).
nagbèbèsbol is playing baseball 135(28).

bisìg arm, stick 70(28). 84(10).

bisíta S. visitor, visitors 305(5). chapel 251(13).

bísiyo S. vice 163(21). 221(14).

bistày sieve 74(5).
magbibistày screener 242(38).

bitàk crack 32(5).

-bitàw: binitàwan was let go of 66(34). 254(24).
maŋákabitàw relax their hold 78(15).

-bítay: ipabítay be caused to be hanged 52(6).

bitbìt that carried by a part of it 122(2).
binitbìt was carried 52(37).
pagkábitbìt the way of holding 253(24). [341]

-bitìw: bumitìw let go 174(22).
bitíwan be let go of 76(10). 254(25).
binitíwan was let go of 44(22).
pinagbitiwàn was variously let go of 256(16).
mabitíwan be let go of 44(21). 288(23).

bitúka intestine 38(30).

bitóke (S.) blow-gun bullet 212(31).

biyábas bayábas S. guava, Pisidium guayava L. 236(17). 256(38). 283(11).
magsìsipamiyábas will go guava-picking, pl. 263(22).

-biyábit: naŋakabiyábit were hanging 34(28).

-biyábo: pagbibiyábo swinging the feet 232(11).
pinagbìbiyabúhan is being swung on 255(10).

-biyàk: biniyàk was split 244(7) Corrigenda.
kabiyàk half, side 112(40).

Biyàrnes-Sànto Biyernesànto S. Good Friday 20(1).

biyátiko S.: viaticum 98(3).

biyày that given liberty in a closed space 220(27).
nagbiyày set loose 232(13).
nagpabiyày caused to be set loose 302(20).
pàbiyáyan place for giving temporary liberty 88(26). 309(6).

Viyóla S. family-n. 277(16).

bóbo clown 241(34).

-bubòŋ: bubuŋàn roof 38(22).

bubuwìt a kind of mouse 224(27).

-budbòd: ibinudbòd was strewn 32(18).

bugtòŋ riddle 222(3).
nagsìsipagbugtúŋan tell each other riddles 114(32).

bugòk rotten, crazy 218(40).

buháŋin sand 68(4).
kabuhaŋínan beach 68(4).

-búhat: bumúhat lifted 189(34).
buhátin be lifted 283(29).

búhay life 18(10). See also hánap.
buhày alive 92(19).
namùmúhay is leading a life 104(27).
pamumúhay way of living 30(30).
ikabùbúhay will be the means of living 34(25).
kabuháyan livelihood 32(12).
mabùbúhay will live 58(30).
nabúhay lived 285(29).
nabùbúhay is living 72(17).
pagkabúhay a coming to life; staple food 285(41). 288(38).
pagkàbúhay a lucky bringing to life 291(36).

búhoʾ slender bamboo, Dendrocalamus 18(3).

buhòk hair 24(31).

buhòl knot 274(29).
magbuhòl tie a knot 232(14).

-búhos: ibinúhos was poured 30(20).

búkas tomorrow 88(13). 262(2).
kinàbukásan when the next day came 48(41). 190(27). 279(24).

bukàs opened 223(26).
bumúbukàs is opening, intr. 227(10).
magbukàs open, tr. 228(35).
pagbubukàs an opening, tr. 26(31).
buksàn be opened 78(30).
binuksàn was opened 78(31).
bùkásan aperture 84(43).
mabuksàn be opened 86(1). 120(21).
nàbuksàn came open 22(2). 188(9).

búkid field, estate, country 38(8). 74(1). 90(7).
bukirìn estate, fields 92(35).

búko unripe cocoanut 316(8).
tarabúko trabúko bald-headed 316(7).

bukòd beside, in addition to 54(5). 279.
magkabukòd two separately [342]269(43).
magkakabukòd pl. 279(9).

-búkol: bukulàn covered with bumps 62(26).
nagkàkabúkol is getting bumps 62(16).

bóla S. ball 46(38).

-búlag (a) nakabùbúlag is causing blindness 280(35).
màbúlag get blinded 255(38).
(b) Accent shifted: bulàg blinded, blind 22(29).
nábulàg went blind 296(16).

búlak cluster of capoc cotton 247(2).
Bulakàn place-n. 110(13). 260(5).

bulaklàk flower 189(2).

-bulìd: ibinulìd was pushed off 26(7).

bulsà S. purse 112(21).

-búlo: kabuluhàn importance 42(15).
makabuluhàn important 271(16). 289(23).

bulòk rotten 218(40).
naŋabulòk became rotten, pl. 306(27).
palabùlúkin easily decaying 315(8).

-bulòŋ: kabùlúŋan one of two who whisper together 277(38).
pabulòŋ in whispers 114(5).

bundòk mountain 116(18). See also paà.
namundòk took to the mountains 52(38).
pamumundòk a living in the mountains 52(42).

buntìs pregnant 36(17).

buntòn heap 116(34).

buntòt tail, train 240(41). 244(40). 253(8).
buntútan tail-end 72(3).

-bunòʾ: nagbunòʾ wrestled 66(32).
nagbúbunòʾ is wrestling 86(40).
pagbubunòʾ a wrestling 252(25).
nakipagbunòʾ engaged in wrestling 66(27).
kabunòʾ person with whom one wrestles 66(34).

-búnot: bunòt plucked up 225(26). cocoanut-fibre 221(11).
bumúnot plucked up 227(11).
nagbunòt plucked up in quantity 237(27).

búŋa fruit; betel-fruit 16(15). 247(3).
búŋa-ŋ-káhoy fruit of a tree 36(1).
magbúŋa bear fruit 16(12).

buŋáŋaʾ maw 212(35).

buŋbòŋ piece of unsplit bamboo 110(31).

-búrol: ibinùbúrol is being laid in state 112(30).
kinàbùburúlan is being lain in state in 114(4).

busábos slave 90(36).

bóses S. voice 74(19).

Bùstos S. place-n. 100(12). See also lúpaʾ.

busòg satiated 223(27).
pàbusugìn be well fed up 305(10).

bútas hole, hollow space 86(11). 104(10).
bútas-karáyom needle’s-eye 22(27).
bumútas make a hole 86(5).
binútas was pierced 106(20).
makabútas have made a hole 86(8).
nabútas has been perforated 86(8).
nàbùbútas gets perforated 106(37).
pinabútas was caused to make a hole 86(9).

bóte S. bottle 120(22).

búti goodness 218(23).
butíhan be done well 220(10).
ikinabúti was the cause of improvement 287(43).
kabutíhan excellence, advantage 58(2). 62(3).
makabùbúti will cause to improve 28(35).
nakabùbúti causes to be well 226(33).
mabúti good, well 16(9).
mabubúti pl. 102(5).
nàbúti got better, reached a high point 294(22). 295(12).
pinakamabúti best [343]230(10).
nàpakabúti extreme 313(11).

botikáriyo S. apothecary 54(2).

bútil kernel of grain 316(33).
gabútil as large as a grain 316(31).

-bóto S.: bumóto voted 227(13).

butò bone, seed 42(5). 108(7).

boòʾ buòʾ whole, entire 34(29). 66. 98. 261.

-buwàl: nagbuwàl felled 199(25). 232(14).
ibuwàl be felled 178(33).
ibinuwàl was felled 270(27)
nabuwàl has been felled 253(4). 294(5).

buwàn moon, month 38(18). 110(13).

buwìs interest on money 227(18).

buwísit repulsive 98(16). 219(1).
binuwísit was annoyed 58(26).
kinàbùbuwisítan is being abhorred 94(27).

[Contents]

D(R)

daàn raàn hundred 52(43). 17. 134.

daàn way, road 32(3).
daà-ŋ-Balíwag road to Baliuag 220(3).
magdaàn pass by 68(7).
nagdaàn passed by, past 24(40). 76(36).
nagdádaàn is passing by 26(11).
pagdadaàn a passing by 254(20).
idaàn be left on the way 248(15).
dinaanàn was run over, was called for on the way 251(9). 254(29).
dinaánan was assailed 254(25).
dinàdaánan is being assailed 254(27).
pinagdàdaanàn is being gone through 30(30). 82(7).
pinagdaánan was traversed 32(24). 256(10).
dàánan usual route 258(26).
nagdàdàánan are passing on the way 234(31).
makaraàn have passed 16(11).
nakaraàn has passed 18(38).
pagkaraàn a having passed 24(11).
nakáraàn nakádaàn came upon 18(32).
paraàn manner, means 42(12).

dagàʾ rat 84(20).

-dagàn: dinaganàn was lain upon 44(38).
magkádagàn be one on top of the other 270(24).
magkàkàdagàn will be one on top of the other 270(26).
nagkádagàn were one on top of the other 270(30).
nagkàkàdagàn are one on top of the other 270(33).
nagkàkàdagàn-dagàn pl. 108(24).

dágat sea 110(19).
dagàt-dagátan lake 261(34).

dágok blow with the fist 256(23)
pinagdadagukàn was variously struck at 84(21) and Corrigenda.
pinagdàdadagukàn is being variously struck at 256(22).

dáhil cause 16(4). 78(33). 143(15). 206(10). 280.
dahilàn cause 22(6). 280.
nagdàdahilàn is alleging as cause 187(10).

dáhon leaf 16(9).
nagdàdáhon is putting out leaves 232(16).

dáiŋ that laid open 250(37).
daìŋ laid open 222(29).
dináiŋ was laid open 244(7).

-daìŋ: dumádaìŋ is complaining 40(41).

-dáka: pagdáka immediately 18(42).
karáka-ráka at once 207(20). 267(30).
pagkaráka at once 288(40). 265(5.9).

dála fishnet 240(7).
dinála was caught with the net 244(8). [344]

dalà that borne 34(22) 38(27.34).
dumalà bear up 233(16).
dumádalà is bearing up 227(14).
magdalà bring, carry 106(32). 233(17).
nagdalà brought 28(27).
nagdádalà is bringing 48(33). 72(35). 233(32).
pagdadalà a bringing 251(12).
dalhìn be carried 32(2).
dàdalhìn will be carried 34(4).
dinalà was carried 56(24).
dinádalà is being carried 40(19).
dalhàn be carried to 251(11).
makadádalà will be able to carry 178(39).
nakapagdalà was able to bring 286(35).
nakapagdádalà nakapápagdalà nakákapagdalà is able to bring 286(36).
madalà be able to be carried 16(4). 283(25).
madádalà will be able to be carried 34(31).
nadalà was able to be carried 283(22).
nádalà got carried off 293(6).
nagpadalà caused to be carried, sent 264(3).
pagpapadalà a sending 48(17).
ipadalà be sent 22(19).
ipinadalà was sent 90(32). 306(7).
ipinadádalà is being sent 74(6).
ipinagpapadalà were repeatedly sent 58(25). 307(26).
pinadalhàn was sent to 58(6).
máipadalà get sent 58(19).

dalága young woman 36(26).

dalamhátiʾ grief 219(31).
pagdadalamhátiʾ a grieving 74(13).
pakikipagdalamhátiʾ a grieving along 112(26).
kadalamhatían grief 276(28).

dalandàn orange 76(20).

-dálaŋ: dumálaŋ became infrequent 26(10).
madálaŋ infrequent 289(4).
padaláŋin be made infrequent 304(35).
pàdalaŋìn be made very infrequent 305(14).

dalaŋhítaʾ tangerine 294(28).

-daláŋin: panaláŋin prayer 94(33).

-dalàs: dumádalàs is growing frequent 68(16).
kadalasàn frequency, frequently 40(40). 186(22). 262(4).
madalàs frequent 46(24). 269(1).

dálaw visitor 112(29).
dumálaw paid a visit 64(9).
dumàdálaw pays a visit 112(36).
nagsìsidálaw pl. 112(25).
pagdálaw a visiting 86(28).

dalawà see -lawà.

dalìʾ hasten 221(41).
dálì-dáliʾ very quickly 34(1). 224(13).
daliàn be done quickly 251(12).
madalìʾ quick, soon 94(28). 102(11). 166(16).
madalì ŋ áraw: nagmàmadalì-ŋ-áraw it is dawning 235(21).
—magmadalìʾ be quick 34(9).
magmámadalìʾ will hurry 235(38).
pagmamadalìʾ a hurrying 293(11).

dalíriʾ finger 185(21).

-dalò: dumalò come for a purpose, to aid 34(1). 38(11). 304(1).
nagsísidalò are coming 114(36).
daluhàn be succored 58(39).
dinaluhàn was attended 100(18). 251(14).

dáma S. checkers 266(12).

-damàg: magdamàg the whole night 190(35).

damdàm feeling 102(16). 219(32).
dumamdàm felt 227(15). 233(37).
magdamdàm feel oneself hurt 233(34).
dináramdàm is being regretted 82(9). 244(10).
damdámin feeling, emotion 276(29).
makiramdàm spy out 264(4).
karamdáman illness 207(31).
nakáramdàm felt 68(3). 292(32).
nakàràramdàm is feeling 42(43).
nàramdamàn [345]was felt 201(26).
nàràramdamàn is being felt 70(6).

dámi multitude 112(21). 267(27).
dumámi grew in number 60(32).
dinamíhan was made numerous 251(15).
karamíhan numerousness, majority 34(33). 198(9). 66. 132.
marámi many 20(13). 28(27). 69. 71. 99. 110. 138.

damìt garment, cloth 52(22). 169(2).
pananamìt clothing 32(33). 219(14).

damò ramò grass 76(28). See also kalabàw, púnoʾ.
dinamuhàn was cut grass from 251(16).
damúhan grass-field 18(33). 259(17).

dámot stinginess 268(5).
kaydámot karámot what stinginess 268(5).
kaydámot-dámot what great stinginess 268(4).
karamútan stinginess 34(18).
marámot stingy 60(22).
mararámot pl. 112(8).

-dániw?: karaniyúwan karaniyúan usual, usually 36(15). 40(9). 262(6).

daŋàl honesty, honor 218(26).
karàŋálan honoring 90(13).

-dapàʾ: dumapàʾ lay down on his face 227(17).
nagdàdapá-dapáan pretends to fall on his face 108(18).
nagkaŋdadápaʾ sustained repeated falls on his face 70(35). 269(29).
nagkàkaŋdadápaʾ is falling repeatedly on his face 269(31).
nakadapàʾ is prone 281(12).
nárapàʾ fell on his face 295(30). Corrigenda.
pagkárapàʾ a falling on one’s face 295(39).
napadapàʾ had himself laid on his face 311(27).
náparapàʾ fell on his face 312(11).

dápat necessary, fitting 22(1). 36(9.20). 268.
karapatàn due, right 276(8).
marápat deserving 80(20).
nàràrápat is appropriate 80(13). 276(29).

Rafayèl S. n. 270(5).

-dápit: pagdápit a calling for 114(39).
ipinadàdápit is being caused to be called for 114(18).

-dápoʾ: dumápoʾ struck, landed 16(31).
pagdápoʾ a hitting, landing 64(31). 68(16).
dinapúan was landed on, was hit 96(28). 251(18).

daràs adze 58(14).
pagdaràs a chopping with the adze 60(3).
darasìn be trimmed with the adze 58(17).
dinaràs was trimmed with the adze 58(32).
pinagdarasàn was variously hewn off 58(17).

Daruwìn E. family-n. 245(9).

-dasàl (S.): magdasàl say prayers 78(37).
nagdádasàl is saying prayers 64(36).
nagsísipagdasàl pl. 114(30).
pagdadasàl a praying 104(4).
pinagdàdasalàn is being prayed in 104(17).
dàsálan rosary 76(43).

dátapuwat but 16(4). 318. 322.

dáti formerly; since long ago 44(23). 64(18). 262(3).
paráti often 18(8). 30(28). 262(12).

-dátig: kadátig karátig bordering on, next to 256(32). 266(9).
magkarátig bordering on each other 270(2).
nàkàkarátig borders on 296(27).

-datìŋ: dumatìŋ arrive 18(37). arrived 20(14).
nagsidatìŋ pl. 118(34). 232(1).
dumáratìŋ is arriving 18(35).
dáratìŋ will arrive 52(2).
pagdatìn an arriving 48(12). 56(25).
datnàn be reached 56(32).
dinatnàn was reached 46(3).
dinàratnàn is being reached 64(7).
[346]karáratìŋ there has been arriving 151(31).
makaratìŋ have arrived 82(38). 100(1).
nakaratìŋ has arrived 34(21).
màdatnàn be come upon 88(36).

-dáos: pagdadáos a performing 20(5).
idáos be performed 264(32).
idináos was performed 274(15).
idinàdáos is being performed 92(24). 114(29).

dàw ràw he says, they say 17. 47. 217.

-dáyaʾ: magdàdáyaʾ will cheat 18(24).

dáyap the lime 76(20).

dìʾ not 38(17). 237. 239. 301.

-ribàl S.: karibàl rival 46(21).

dibdìb the chest 212(9).

-dikdìk: dikdikìn be crushed 16(25).

dikìn mat on which dishes are set 221(32).

dikìt blaze 220(30).
paŋparikìt kindlings 158(10).

-dikìt: idinikì was pasted 52(10).

dikóla S. (de cola) train 262(41).

dílaʾ tongue 251(21). 306(21).
diláan be licked 251(22).
diniláan was shown the tongue (as insult) 251(20).

-dílat: nadílat came open 24(24).

-dilàw: madidilàw yellow, pl. 291(19).

-dilìg: paŋdilìg implements for sprinkling 225(4).
naŋdídilìg is sprinkling 239(34).
paŋdidilìg a sprinkling 239(35).
diligìn be sprinkled 244(11).

dilìm darkness 36(5).
dumilìm it grew dark 52(29).
pagdilìm a growing dark 36(32).
kadilimàn darkness 72(1).
madilìm dark 40(15).

Del-Pilàr S. family-n. 241(25).

relòs S. watch 137(41).

dimóniyo S. demon 40(5).

dìn rìn also, again 18(16). 17. 47. 218. 221. 227. 238. 239. 262(11).

dindìŋ, see diŋdìŋ.

díne ríne loc. of irè: here 316 (27). 17. 47. 263.
nàrìrinè is here 74(21).
paríne come here 301(33).
pumaríne come here 302(8).
naparíne came here 312(3).

-dinìg: makárinìg hear 24(18).
nakárinìg heard 20(19). 292(33).
márinìg be heard 28(19).
nárinìg was heard 20(41).
nàrìrinìg is being heard 114(12).
pagkárinìg a hearing 18(13). 176(41).

diŋdìŋ dindìŋ wall 62(20).

Risàl S. family-n., Rizal 275(43).

desgrásiya S. misfortune 276(39).

-distíno S.: idinistíno was assigned to the parish 96(2).
nàdistíno got assigned 50(9).

retáso S. patch 239(10).

-retráto S.: retratúhan be photographed 281(14).

díto ríto loc. of itò: here, hither; to him 16(4). 18(22). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. 280.
nàrìritò is here 70(26). 184(36). 203(6).
pumàparíto comes here 204(18).
pàparíto will come here 302(11). 306(11).
pagparíto a coming here 203(5).
pinàparíto is being sent here 104(20).
ipinaríto was come here for 307(1).
naparíto came here 44(9).
napàparíto comes [347]here 191(16).
màparíto get here 184(35).
màpàparíto will get here 312(15).
nàparíto got here 312(13).
nàpàparíto gets here 312(15).
pagkàparíto a getting here 313(1).
makàparí-paríto never come here 313(3) Corrigenda.

-díwaŋ: nagdíwaŋ celebrated 275(43).
pagdiríwaŋ a celebrating 90(13).
ipinagdìdíwaŋ is being celebrated 110(12). 249(23).

diyàn riyàn loc. of iyàn: there, thither, from there 182(27). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
náriyàn went there, was there 191(14).
pápariyàn will go there 302(13).

diyáriyo S. newspaper 284(11).

Diyégo S. n. 100(40).

Diyòs S. God 64(4). 182(40). 59.

-dugtòŋ: idinugtòŋ was said in continuation 80(28). 102(19).

dugòʾ blood 22(8).
nagdudugòʾ bled profusely 88(28). 282(38).
pagdudugòʾ a bleeding 46(8).

-dúkit: dumúkit carved 88(8).
paŋdudúkit sculpture 90(3).
maŋdudúkit mandurúkit carver, sculptor 86(18). 104(8).
dukítin be carved 90(11).
dinúkit was carved 90(9).

-duklày: nagdùduklày-duklày keeps blurting out 114(15).

doktò S. learned man 168(9).

-dúkot: idinùdúkot is being scooped out 110(2).

dúlaŋ low table 252(1).

-dulàs: madulàs slippery 313(41).
mádulàs slip 313(35).
pagkádulàs a slipping 313(39).
magpadulàs let oneself slide 313(36).
pagpapadulàs a letting oneself slide 294(29).

dúlo end 16(7).
dúlo-ŋ-bandà-ŋ-kaliwàʾ left-hand end 274(28).
dúlo-ŋ-bandà-ŋ-kánan right-hand end 211(1).
dulúhan end part, back yard 34(38).

Romanìsmo S. Romanism 56(14).

-dumì: pagdumì defecation 42(4).
marumì dirty 94(7). 219 (36).

Don-Nasáriyo S. n. 116(26).

dúnoŋ knowledge 28(15).
karúnoŋ what wisdom 173(42).
karunúŋan wisdom 276(30).
marúnoŋ wise, knowing, knowing how to 16(1). 26(1). 269(8).
pagmamarúnoŋ a pretending to be wise 167(29).
pagpapakamarúnoŋ a making oneself wise 309(24).
pinakamarúnoŋ wisest 309(40).
marurúnoŋ pl. 48(10).
nagparúnoŋ caused to be educated 90(40).

-duŋò: nagdúduŋò is shy 285(17).

dúroʾ stitch 224(1).
durúin be pricked 244(1).
durúan be stuck into 251(22). a spit 221(8).
duruàn place for sticking 260(6).

-dúrog: dinúrog was crumbled 32(18).

dúsa suffering 245(18).
pagdudúsa a suffering 76(24).
parúsa punishment 16(28).
nagpàparúsa is causing to suffer 42(9).
pagpaparúsa a causing to suffer 42(16).
ipinarùrúsa is being caused to be suffered 313(10).
parusáhan be punished 16(22).
parùrusáhan will be punished 16(24).
pinarusáhan was punished 292(19).
pinarùrusáhan is being punished 222(18). 233(1). 308(8).
pàrusahàn place of punishment 74(21). 309(12).
[348]màpàparusáhan will get punished 22(5). 313(6).

rosáriyo S. rosary 104(4).
magrosáriyo pray a rosary 104(17).

Rúso S. Russian 306(19).

doòn roòn ron loc. of iyòn: there; to him, to it 18(40). 38(17). 316(27). 17. 47. 263.
dumoòn go there 20(26).
magkaroòn get, have 96(3).
nagkaroòn got, had 24(35). 52(30). 268(25).
kinàdòroonàn is been in 74(33). 90(18). 279(13).
nároòn nàndon got there, is there 36(33). 193(15). 39. 468.
nàròroòn is there 42(36). 74(12). 264(10).
paroòn go there 301(33).
pumaroòn go there 20(15). went there 76(27).
páparoòn will go there 88(13). 207(30). 302(18).
pagparoòn a going there 72(40). 302(16).
parunàn be gone to 70(34).
pinaroonàn pinaronàn pinarunàn was gone to 46(4). 138(37).
ikináparoòn was the cause of going there 310(11).
makaparòn be able to go there 100(16).
naparoòn went there 20(23). 312(5).
pagkáparoòn a getting there 300(9).

-doòp: pinagdódoòp were brought together (hands) 96(8).

duwàg coward 312(22).
kaduwágan cowardice 116(14).

duwènde S. dwarf, elf 30(24).

Dòytsland E. n. of a ship 268(29).

[Contents]

G.

-gaàn: magaàn light, easy 48(2). 255(2).

gaáno, see anò.

gabì night, evening 36(2). See also áraw.
gabì-gabì every night 62(38). 331.
ginágabì is being overtaken by night 244(12).
kagabì last night 190(15). 259.

gága madwoman 44(25).

gagambà spider 262(23).

-gálaŋ: magálaŋ polite 237(19). 289(5).

-gálaw: paggálaw a moving 192(20).

gáliŋ coming from 40(5). 193(18).
naŋgáliŋ came from 193(22).
naŋgàgáliŋ is coming from 193(22).
pinaŋgalíŋan was come from 256(30).
pinaŋgàgalíŋan is being come from 32(30).
kagàgáliŋ there has just been coming from 267(14).

galìŋ skill 58(6).
gumalìŋ got well 54(10).
magalìŋ skilful; well 46(29). 269(2).
magagalìŋ pl. 94(32).
pagpapagalìŋ a causing to get well 42(22).

gálit (a) anger 22(15).
ikagálit be the cause of anger 195(39).
ikinagálit was the cause of anger 303(24).
kinagalítan was the object of anger 274(15).
kinagàgalítan is the object of anger 40(36).
nagálit got angry 16(20).
nagàgálit gets angry 106(28).
pagkagálit a getting angry 176(39).
nàkagalítan happened to be the object of anger 52(40). 298(28).
magpagálit cause to get angry 98(32).
palagalitìn hot-head 315(18).
—(b) Accent shifted: galìt angry 177(39).
kagalìt at odds 266(39).
nagkagalìt had a falling out 269(19).
pagkakagalìt a falling out [349]155(27). 269(19).
nagkagá-kagalìt got angry at each other, pl. 269(25).
kàgalítan quarrel 236(36). 279(34).
pagkakàgalítan a quarreling together 222(42). 279(39).

-gambálaʾ: nagambálaʾ was disturbed 284(36).
nàgambálaʾ was unintentionally disturbed 293(8).

gámit that used 46(39).
gamìt used, second-hand 183(15).
gumámit use 58(14). used 94(4).
gumàgámit is using 202(17).
paggámit a using 56(37).
gamítin be used 161(20).
gàgamítin will be used 234(22).
ginámit was used 60(26).
ginàgámit is being used 40(35).
gamítan be used on 58(16).
kagamitàn use, employment 36(23). 120(15).
magámit be able to be used 20(5). 74(7). 283(26).
nagámit was able to be used 230(14).
nàgámit was accidentally used 293(10).
pagkàgámit the way of using, chance ability to use 240(3). 291(40).
ipinagàgámit is being caused to be used 306(9).

gamòt medicine 54(9).
paŋgamòt means of curing 46(14).
gumamòt cure 46(13).
gumágamòt is curing 46(16).
paggamòt a curing 42(15).
maŋgagamòt maŋgagámot physician 28(24). 44(28.30). 243(10).
paŋgagamòt curing 42(25).
gamutìn be treated 46(23).
ginamòt was treated 46(4).
ginágamòt is being treated 290(13).
ipinagamòt was caused to be treated 54(8).

-gána S.: gumàgána is earning 227(18).

ganà concern 98(6). 281(25). 198.

gandà beauty 70(11).
magandà beautiful 48(15). 152(3).
magagandà pl. 72(19).
nagpápagandà is causing to be beautiful 48(18).

ganitò, see itò.

ganiyàn, see iyàn.

gantì that given in return 90(12). 200(33). 272(11).
gantì ŋ pálaʾ: gumantì-ŋ-pálaʾ return favors 231(14).
gumantì act in retaliation 227(19).
maŋhigantì take vengeance 24(25). 241(19).
maŋhíhigantì will take vengeance 241(21).
gantihìn be given return for 58(9).
paŋhigantihàn be the object of vengeance 40(38).

gáno, see anò.

ganoòn, see iyòn.

-gápaŋ: gumàgápaŋ is crawling 18(3).
paggápaŋ a crawling 18(4).

-gápas: paŋgápas kind of knife 225(5).
gumápas cut, slice 227(20).
pinaŋgàgapásan is being cut from 256(32).

-gápos: iginápos was tied down 58(31).

-gastà S.: paggastà a spending 248(11).

gàstos S. expense 54(27).

gátas milk 175(1).

gawàʾ that done 54(20). 74(8). 240(34). 277(24).
gumawàʾ do, make 244(35).
paggawàʾ a making, doing 86(10). 202(36).
gawìn be done, made 24(17).
gàgawìn will be made, done 32(6). 104(1).
ginawàʾ was done, made 20(36).
ginágawàʾ is being done, made 44(3.9).
pinaggagawàʾ was variously done 310(8).
ginawaàn was done to 74(40). 76(3.6).
gàwáan workshop 58(41).
gawaàn factory 315(35).
kagagawàn surprisingly, illicitly [350]done 277(23).
nakagawàʾ succeeded in making 86(7).
nakagágawàʾ is able to make 281(28).
magawàʾ be able to be done 30(6). 56(2).
magágawàʾ will be able to be done 18(20). 74(27).
nagawàʾ has been done 54(40).
nagágawàʾ can be done 102(30).
pagkagawàʾ a having made, ability to make 282(10.28).
mapaggawàʾ given to doing 98(31).
mágawàʾ chance to be done 238(36).
pagkágawàʾ the way making turned out 291(3).
pagawàʾ ordered to be made 104(11).
nagpagawàʾ caused to be made 104(8).
ipinagawàʾ was caused to be made 104(15).

gawìʾ direction 163(28). 193(28).

gáya like 18(8). 316(30). 272.

gayòn, see iyòn.

gibàʾ broken-down 225(9).
gibá-gibàʾ tumble-down 290(36).
maŋágibàʾ collapse, pl. 296(3).
maŋàgìgibàʾ will collapse 296(5).

gílas energy, enterprise 48(32).

-gílid: tagílid side 315(27).
tumagílid turned the side to 231(17).
pagtagílid a moving side-ways 192(20). 231(17).
tinagilíran was hurt in the side 254(18).
tinaligdàn was turned the side to 254(19).
tagilíran side wall, side part 261(29).
nàtàtagílid is inclined to one side 296(24).

gíliw respected 219(3).

ginàw cold feeling 280(38).
naginàw got cold 285(17).

-ginháwa: guminháwa became comfortable 227(20).
gumìginháwa is getting comfortable 227(21).
kaginhawáhan comfort, bliss 72(20).
nakaginháwa caused to be comfortable 280(36).
maginháwa comfortable 289(6).
nagpaginháwa caused to be comfortable 302(32).

gíniŋ Miss, Mrs. 256.

gintò gold 311(20).

ginoò Mr., gentleman 54(37). 100(30). 219(3). 289(5). 256.

-gìŋ 48. 250. 516.: magìŋ become 18(26). 314(18).
magígiŋ will become, take place 18(28). 94(23).
nagìŋ became, occurred 18(31). 36(38). 144(23).
nagígiŋ is becoming, arising 42(5). 62(14).
pagigìŋ a becoming 314(19).

-gísiŋ (a) awaken, tr.:
kagìgísiŋ there has been awakening 184(12).
makàgísiŋ accidentally awaken 62(11).
nakàgísiŋ awakened 257(32).
nàgísiŋ was accidentally awakened 293(12).
napagísiŋ caused himself to be awakened 311(30).
—(b) With accent shifted: wake up, intr.:
ikinágisìŋ was the cause of waking up 158(9).
mágisìŋ wake up 18(39).
màgìgisìŋ will wake up 18(37).
nágisìŋ woke up 38(21).
pagkágisìŋ a waking up 62(18).
pagisìn-gisìŋ waking up now and then 300(36).
nápagisìŋ woke up 312(39).
palagisiŋìn fitful sleeper 315(19).

gitnàʾ middle 16(7). 24(38).

grúpo S. group 90(25).

gúbat jungle 18(2).
kagubátan jungle country 118(40).

gubiyèrno S. government 92(32). 200(18).

-gúgol: ginúgol was spent 257(14).
ginùgúgol is being spent 112(22).

gúlaŋ age 38(6). 56(33).
paggúlaŋ a growing ripe 272(22).
magúlaŋ [351]old, mature; parent 32(6). 283(39).

-gúlat: gulatìn scary 247(32).
pagkagúlat a getting scared 285(42).
pagkàgúlat astonishment 36(38).
mapaŋgúlat given to scaring 289(36).
magugulatìn jumpy 62(7). 290(4).
nàpagúlat was astonished 30(22). 58(8).
palagulatìn nervous person 315(20).

gúlay vegetable 72(36).

-gulò: nagkagulò was surprised 268(29).
magulò confused 237(2).
nagulò became confused 284(38).
nagúgulò is confused 52(29).

gulòd hill 226(25).

gúlok bolo 38(27).

-gúmon: nàgùgúmon is trailing 98(20).

guntìŋ shears 26(2).

gupìt a cutting with scissors, hair-cut 219(13).
paŋgupìt used for cutting, scissors 225(5).
gumupìt cut 26(15).
naggugupìt cut to bits 238(33).
naggúgugupìt is cutting to bits 238(34).
paggugupìt a cutting to bits 273(33).
maŋgupìt cut hair 26(1).
naŋgupìt did hair-cutting 167(2).
maŋgugupìt maŋgugúpit hair-cutter 24(34). 243(11).
paŋgugupìt hair-cutting 26(19).
ginupìt was cut 60(6).
gupitàn be sheared 26(3).
nakagupìt was able to cut 281(29).
pagkagupìt a having cut 250(32).
nakágupìt accidentally cut 290(12).
nágupìt chanced to be cut 293(38).
pagkágupìt a chance cutting 291(4.42).
nagpagupìt allowed himself to be sheared 302(33).
pagpapagupìt an allowing oneself to be sheared 302(34).
ipinagupìt was caused to be cut 180(11).

góra S. cap 246(4).

guròʾ teacher 80(40).

gustò S.: desired, liked 16(29). 52(22). 267.
paggustò a desiring 18(21).
gustuhìn be desired 114(41).
nagkagustò conceived a desire 268(31).
ipinagkagustò was the cause of desiring 272(33).
ikinàgùgustò is the cause of liking 273(31).
pinagkàkagustuhàn is being liked by many 275(7).
magustúhin fond 110(1). 289(42).
pagkágustò a coming to desire 24(1). 92(36).
màgustuhàn happen to be liked 74(2).
nàgùgustuhàn is liked 209(25).

gútom hunger 28(32).
gutòm hungry 76(8).
gutúmin be assailed by hunger 28(28).
nagùgútom is hungry 285(19).
palagutumìn one who easily gets hungry 315(19).

guwàrdiya-sibìl guwàrdiya-sivìl S. gendarme, gendarmerie 20(20).

guwarnisiyòn S. harness 315(33).

gúyaʾ young of animal, calf 210(24). See báhay.

[Contents]

H.

hábaʾ length 56(39).
humábaʾ grew long 38(30).
kahabáan length 192(22).
mahábaʾ long 120(2).
pinakamahábaʾ longest 58(11).
mahahábaʾ pl. 18(15).

habágat spring wind 227(40).

hábaŋ while, during 16(2). 292.

-hábol: nagsìsihábol are pursuing 301(21).
paghábol a pursuing 84(27).
paŋhahábol a chasing 116(7).[352]
habúlin be pursued 18(10).
hinábol was pursued 88(24).
hinàhábol is being pursued 68(19).
nàhàhábol gets pursued 18(8).
ipinahábol was caused to be pursued 76(10).
ipinahàhábol is being caused to be pursued 72(32).

hagdàn ladder 270(31).
hagdánan stairway 106(11).

-hágis: naghágis tossed 48(8).
inihágis was tossed 16(30). 248(17).
mapaŋhágis given to flinging 289(36).
pahagìs with a toss 300(14) and Corrigenda.

-hagk, see halìk.

-hágod: humàhágod is stroking 98(21).
hinágod was stroked 84(10).

Hagúnoy place-n. 110(24).

-hakbàŋ: háhakbàŋ will take a step 70(1).
paghakbàŋ a stepping 68(29).

-hákot: paghahàkútan a carting together 118(17).

halagà price 54(23).
mahalagà dear 36(14). 234(41).
pinakamahalagà most valued 42(1). 288(38).
mahahalagà pl. 116(2).

-halakhàk: nápahalakhàk burst into laughter 68(26).

haláman garden-plant 72(36).
hàlamanàn garden, flower-pot 74(14). 260(38).

halayà S. jelly 253(38).

halíge post 64(23).

halìk kiss 94(12).
humalìk kissed 227(22).
hagkàn be kissed 251(24).
hinagkàn was kissed 94(10).
mahagkàn be able to be kissed 92(26).

halimbáwaʾ example 48(23). 62(10). 265(2).

-halimhìm: hinàhalimhimàn is being brooded on 102(18).

háloʾ that admixed 220(35).
hálù-háloʾ confused 50(15).
hinalúan was mixed with 251(24).
hinàhalúan is being given an admixture 108(6).
haluàn mixing-vessel 260(8).
pinahàhalúan is being caused to be given an admixture 108(7).

hálos almost 110(25). 265(3).

hámak unfortunate, no-account 219(3).
ikàpahámak be the cause of coming to grief 310(12).
ikàpàpahámak will be the cause of coming to grief 310(14).
màpahámak come to grief 312(22).
màpàpahámak will become good-for-nothing 312(24).
nàpahámak came to grief 312(17).
nàpàpahámak is getting spoiled 312(19).

hampàs whipping, whip 220(37). 221(42).
hampàs-lúpaʾ vagabond 211(4).
maghampàs-lúpaʾ be a vagabond 235(27).
paŋhampàs used as a whip 225(8).
humampàs hit with a whip 227(24).
naghampàs whipped himself 233(38).
nagháhahampàs is whipping about 238(36).
maŋhampàs whip people 239(38).
hampasìn be whipped 184(8).
hinampasàn was struck with a whip 251(25).
hampásan whipping-bench 258(27).
kahampásan one of two who perform mutual flagellation 277(39).
nahampàs has been whipped 284(12).
nakáhampàs happened to hit 291(27).
náhampàs was accidentally hit with a whip 293(14).
pagkáhampàs a chance hitting 62(17). 292(3).
páhampasìn be whipped harder 305(11). [353]

hámon a challenge 52(25).
maŋhàhámon will challenge 48(24).
maŋhahámon challenger 48(29).
hinámon was challenged 48(32).
hinàhámon is being challenged 18(21).

hánap that sought 76(23).
hánap-búhay livelihood 271(40).
maghàhánap-búhay will work for a livelihood 193(32). 235(30).
humánap seek 74(23).
paghánap a seeking 227(25).
maghánap earn 32(11). 233(39).
paghahánap the earning one’s living 60(16). 102(7).
maghanàp seek in quantity; search 237(28).
paghahanàp a searching 52(29).
hanápin be sought 92(12). 244(13).
hinánap was sought out 16(22).
hinàhánap is being sought 76(18).
ihánap be looked for 30(32).
paghahanapàn a searching through a place 52(34).
nahánap has been sought 143(36).
makapaghanàp have searched 287(20).
nakapaghanàp has searched 287(18).
pinahanápan was ordered to be sought in 52(15).

handàʾ a serving food 114(34).
maghandàʾ serve 112(29).
nagháhandàʾ is serving 114(9).
iháhandàʾ will be served 237(36).
inihandàʾ was served 299(11).
iniháhandàʾ is being served out 62(36).
nakahandàʾ is served 183(22). 281(4).

-hantày: hantayìn be awaited 32(26).
hinantày was awaited 50(37).

haŋàd aim, goal 46(36).

haŋàl fool 276(31).
kahaŋalàn foolishness 276(31).

-haŋgà: haŋgáhan boundary 258(29).
haŋgàn limit 22(6).

haŋgàŋ until, up to 16(12). 68. 293.

háŋin wind 118(31).

-háŋoʾ: pagháŋoʾ a rescuing 78(10).
hináŋoʾ was rescued 88(36).
ikahàháŋoʾ will be the means of rescuing 74(42).
maháŋoʾ be able to be rescued 74(23).
mahàháŋoʾ will be able to be rescued 78(2).
nahàháŋoʾ is being rescued 78(12).

hápis grief 38(11).
hinápis was grieved 244(14).
nahàhápis is sad 285(20).
pagkahápis a grieving 74(25).

hápon afternoon 18(39). 190(23.31).
maghápon whole day 112(9). 262(8).
kahápon yesterday 152(13). 172(6). 259.
pagkahápon a having supped 104(16).

Hapòn S. Japan 269(20).

Hapunès S. Japanese 306(19).

háraŋ obstruction 220(39).
paŋháraŋ used as an obstruction 225(8).
humáraŋ held up 227(26).
pagháraŋ a holding up 198(21).
nagháraŋ made an obstruction 233(41).
paghaháraŋ an obstructing 233(42).
naŋháraŋ held people up 239(38).
paŋhaháraŋ highway robbery 239(40).
hináraŋ was held up 282(36).
ipinaŋháraŋ was used in holding up 250(10).
hinaráŋan was obstructed 251(27).
pinaŋharáŋan was the place of holding up 255(11).
haraŋàn hold-up 197(9).
paghaharaŋàn a holding up together 275(22).
ikinaháraŋ was the cause of being held up 272(6).
pagkaháraŋ a having held up 282(29).
pagkapaŋhaháraŋ a having practised highway robbery 287(30).[354]
nàháraŋ got held up 295(6).
pagkàháraŋ a chance holding up 292(5).
paháraŋ caused to be held up 197(10).
paharàŋ crosswise 300(15).
pagpapaháraŋ a causing to be held up 302(36).
pinapaŋhàháraŋ is being caused to practise highway robbery 305(22).
ipinaháraŋ was caused to be held up 306(11).

haràp front 228(25).
humáharàp is facing 96(7).
háharàp will be present 96(18).
hinaràp was faced 20(37).
harapàn place in front of 24(37).
kaharàp facing 98(21).
náharàp came to face 72(2).

hardìn S. garden 72(19).

háriʾ king 24(29).
naghàháriʾ is ruling 24(30).
pagharían be ruled 255(14).
pinaghàharían is being ruled 24(32).
kahariyàn kingdom 24(36). 276(18).

-hásaʾ: hasàʾ sharpened 202(30).
paghahásaʾ a sharpening 232(16).
ihásaʾ be sharpened 248(19).
hasáan be given a sharp edge 251(28).
paghasáan be sharpened on 255(15).
hasaàn whetstone 255(15).

-hátak: paghátak a tugging 78(8).
hatákin be pulled at 284(16).
kahatakàn one of two who tug against each other 186(38).

hátiʾ divide; that divided; mid- 222(1).
háti ŋ gabì: naghàháti-ŋ-gabì it is midnight 84(19). 235(24).
kinàháti-ŋ-gabihàn was at midnight 38(21). 279(25).
hatìʾ divided 222(31).
paŋhátiʾ used for dividing 225(11).
humátiʾ divided, halved 227(29).
naghátiʾ distributed 234(1).
paghahátiʾ a distributing 234(3).
naghatìʾ divided up, divided in quantity 237(30).
paghahatìʾ a dividing in quantity 237(32).
naŋhátiʾ shared orders 239(41).
paŋhahátiʾ a sharing orders 239(42).
hinátiʾ was divided 16(7). 244(4).
pinaghatìʾ was divided in quantity 246(20).
paghatían be shared 28(34).
ikinahátiʾ was the cause of breaking in two 270(39). of being able to divide 272(9).
nahátiʾ has been divided 284(39).
pagkahátiʾ a having divided 282(31).
nakàhátiʾ chanced to divide 291(29).
pagkàhátiʾ a chance dividing 291(6). 292(8).
pahátiʾ ordered to be divided 299(14).
pahatìʾ tending to halve 300(18).
nagpahátiʾ caused to be divided 302(38).
pagpapahátiʾ a causing to be divided 302(41).
ipinhátiʾ was caused to be divided 306(13).
ipinagpahátiʾ was caused to be divided up 307(19).
pinahatían was caused to be given his share 308(9).
pinapahatían was caused to be caused to to be given his share 308(41).
kalahátiʾ half 80(24). 273(21). 314(32).
kalaháti-ŋ-áraw half-day 118(26).
kalaháti-ŋ-óras half-hour 66(36).
magkákalahatìʾ will be half through 104(17). 238(22).
paŋaŋalahátiʾ a being halfway 24(6). 241(13).
kalahatían middle 261(27).

-hatìd: naghatìd conveyed 56(26).
nagháhatìd is conveying 98(3).
paghahatìd an escorting 114(39).
ihatìd be conveyed 34(6).
iháhatìd will be conveyed 104(28).
inihatìd was conveyed 20(26).
iniháhatìd is being conveyed 20(4).
[355]hàhatdàn will be conveyed to 175(1).
hinàhatdàn is being conveyed to 190(10).
paghàhatdàn will be delivered to 20(9).
pinaghatdàn was delivered to 255(16).
pinaghàhatdàn is being delivered to 179(8).
ipinahatìd was caused to be conveyed 294(28).
napahatìd had himself conveyed 52(37).

hátol advice 30(4).
naghàhátol advises 74(30).

-háwa: nakàhàháwa is contagious 272(3).

háwak that grasped 66(35).
humáwak took hold 78(7).
pagháwak a taking hold 227(31).
hinawákan was taken hold of 66(26).
makaháwak be able to take hold 22(22).
nakaháwak has taken hold 281(14).
nakàháwak got hold of 290(18).

-háyag (a): paháyag that published 48(37).
nagpàpaháyag causes to become public, announces 48(35).
pagpapaháyag an announcing 90(22).
ipinaháyag was caused to become public, was announced 56(6).
pàhayágan páhayagàn newspaper 48(27). 236(41). See báhay.
—(b) with accent shift: hàyágan public affair, public 236(37).
náhayàg got widely known 60(11).

háyop animal; carabao 28(26).

-higàʾ: paghigàʾ a going to bed 64(6).
hinìhigàn is being slept on 102(26).
hìgáan bed 244(22).
hihigàn couch 62(12).
kahíhigàʾ there has just been lying down 267(15).
makahigàʾ be able to lie down 281(33).
nakahigàʾ has lain down 86(39).
nahigàʾ lay down 38(17). 285(34).
nahíhigàʾ is in the act of lying down 285(35).
máhigàʾ get laid 295(8).
nagpatihigàʾ suddenly lay down 313(20).
mápatihigàʾ fall on one’s back 313(37).
nàpàpatihigàʾ falls on his back 313(35).

higànte S. giant 32(31).

-higìt: mahigìt with an excess 118(16).

-higpìt: mahigpìt firm, strict 42(40).
mahihigpìt pl. 122(5).

híkaw ear-ring 303(3).
nagpahíkaw caused himself to be adorned with ear-rings 303(2).

-híla: humìhíla is dragging 118(20).
paghíla a dragging 118(22).
hiníla was dragged 16(3).
hinìhíla is being dragged 100(23).
mahìhíla will be able to be dragged 80(27).

-hilámos: paŋhilámos water for washing hands 62(36).

hilàw raw 28(31).
palahilawìn kind of rice 315(20).

hilìŋ request 219(34).
humilìŋ requested 186(18).
hinilìŋ was asked for 16(27).
hiníhilìŋ is being asked for 52(8).
mapaŋhilìŋ given to demanding 42(7).

hìléra S. row 34(20).
makahiléra be in single file 110(41).
nakahiléra is in single file 122(2).

-himbìŋ: mahimbìŋ sound, deep 296(39).
náhimbìŋ fell sound asleep 84(19).

hínaʾ weakness 18(7).
humínaʾ became weak, slow 227(34).
naghínaʾ made gentle 234(5).
naŋhínaʾ slackened up 240(2).
nagsìsipaŋhínaʾ are getting weak 108(28).
kahináan weakness, slowness 22(39).
mahínaʾ weak, slow 22(33).
mahihínaʾ pl. 149(20). [356]

hinálaʾ suspicion 40(23).
paghihinálaʾ a suspecting 84(39).
hininálaʾ was suspected 30(23).
hinìhinálaʾ is being suspected 18(20).
pinaghìhinaláan is the object of suspicion 40(21).
màpaghìhinaláan màpàpaghinaláan will get suspected 38(19). 298(19).
nàpaghìhinaláan napàpaghinaláan gets suspected 298(15).

hindìʾ not, no 16(4). 152(7). 228. 237. 239. 301. 319. 340.

-hinhìn: mahihinhìn respectable, decent, pl. 94(11).

hintày wait 206(1).
maghintày wait 153(4).
naghintày awaited 26(13). 30(14).
naghíhintày is awaiting 48(12).
paghihintày a waiting 285(23).
hinintày was awaited 120(37).

hintòʾ a stopping; stop 22(26). 222(2). stopped 223(28).
maghintòʾ stop 170(3).
magsihintòʾ pl. 184(22).
naghintòʾ stopped, ceased 18(3). 283(13).
naghíhintòʾ stops 110(36).
nagsísipaghintòʾ pl. 112(5).
ihintòʾ be stopped 104(19).
hintuàn be ceased from 251(28).
hinintuàn was ceased from 122(22).
hintúan stopping-place 258(32).
máhintòʾ come to an end 60(37).
náhintòʾ got stopped 259(34).
pahintò-hintòʾ stopping at intervals 300(30).
pinahintòʾ was caused to stop 26(2).
pinapaghintòʾ was caused to cease 84(31).
ipinahintòʾ was caused to be stopped 241(1).

-hintúlot: pahintúlot a permit 116(2). 272(4).
ipinahìhintúlot is being permitted 54(18).
pahintulútan be given permission 264(22).
pinahintulútan was given permission 264(39).
pinahìhintulútan is being given permission 122(6).

hinòg ripe 34(28).
nagkákahinòg are in part getting ripe 36(1).
nahinòg got ripe 16(13).
pagkahinòg a getting ripe 300(19).
napahinòg was able to be caused to ripen 311(20).
nápahinòg came to be caused to ripen 312(27).

-hiŋà: humíhiŋà is breathing 20(8).
hiniŋà breath 40(28). 228(29).
makapaghiŋà be able to breathe 68(20).
magpahiŋà rest 54(11).
nagpápahiŋà is resting 303(3).
makapahiŋà be able to rest 311(2).
makapápahiŋà will have rested 311(4).
nakapahiŋà has rested 310(43).
nakapápahiŋà has just rested, is rested 206(1).
nàpàpahiŋà is resting, of animals 312(31).
naŋàpàpahiŋà pl. 312(37).

hiŋìʾ: paghiŋìʾ a requesting 227(35).
maŋhiŋìʾ beg 34(18).
naŋhiŋìʾ begged 32(20).
nagsísipaŋhiŋìʾ are begging 112(5).
maŋhihiŋìʾ begger, beggar 112(16).
makahiŋìʾ be able to ask for 281(33)
makáhiŋìʾ get by asking 32(22).

hip, see -íhip.

hípag husband’s sister, (woman’s) brother’s wife 242(13).
maghípag two women, one of whom is married to the other’s brother 242(12).

hípon kind of shrimp 259(6).

-hiràm: híhiràm will borrow 227(36).
maŋhiràm borrow 240(5).
paŋhihiràm a borrowing 221(5).
hiniràm was borrowed 174(22).
hìráman person borrowed from 258(34).
kahìráman one of two who borrow from each other 277(39).
[357]magkahìráman two who borrow from each other 278(35).
makákapaŋhiràm will be able to borrow 287(24).
nakákapaŋhiràm is able to borrow 287(22).
mapaŋhiràm given to borrowing 289(37).
papaŋhiramìn be caused to go and borrow 305(34).
mapahíhiràm will be able to be caused to borrow, will be able to be lent to 311(21).

hírap misery 22(5). 50(29).
hiràp wearied 62(25).
maghìhírap will suffer 46(18).
paghihírap suffering 44(24).
kahirápan hardship 62(4).
mahírap difficult, poor 22(32). 36(19). 269(3).
mahihírap pl. 54(22).
nahirápan was pained, wearied 118(22).
nahìhirápan is being pained 44(12).
nagpàpahírap is causing to suffer 22(10).
pagpapahírap a causing to suffer 46(14). 273(1).
pagpapakahírap a taking pains 309(20).
pahìhirápan will be caused to suffer 44(10). 100(15).

Hesùs S. Jesus 285(42).

-hitìt: hititìn be puffed at 66(13).

-hitsà (S. ?): ihiníhitsà is being tossed up 48(5).
hinitsahàn was tossed to 48(7).
nápahitsà got thrown upward 84(3).

hitsúra S. appearance 40(13). 106(11). 116(33).

-híwaʾ: hiníwaʾ was slashed 20(33). 203(37).

-hiwalày: maghiwá-hiwalày part, separate, pl. 183(11).
naghiwalày parted (two persons) 88(17).
naghiwá-hiwalày pl. 26(34). 102(40).
naghíhiwalày are parting 40(18).
magkáhiwalày go apart (two involuntary actors) 270(38).
magkàkàhiwá-hiwalày will part, pl. 26(32).
nagkàhiwá-hiwalày went apart, pl. 271(14).

hiyàʾ shame 72(12). 90(39).
kahiyá-hiyàʾ arousing shame 58(13).
kahiyaàn be revered 274(18).
makahiyàʾ given to embarrassment 288(31).
nahíhiyàʾ is ashamed 285(20).
mapaŋhìyàʾ given to embarrassing 289(38).

heyugrafíya hewgrafíya S. geography 82(1).

hubàd naked 223(29).
maghubàd undress oneself 232(19).
pinaghùhubaràn is being undressed in 255(18).
nagpahubàd had himself undressed 303(5).
pinapaghubàd was caused to undress himself 305(21).
pinahubaràn was caused to be undressed 308(11).

húgas dish-washing 219(36).
naghùhúgas is washing 114(7).
maghuhugàs dish-washer 242(42).
maŋhuhugàs id. 243(14).
hinùhugásan is being washed 251(30).
hugasàn place for dish-washing 260(8).

húkay hole, ditch 24(38).
hukày hollowed 104(9).
humúkay dig 24(37). 152(32). dug 179(26).
hùhukáyin hùhukáin will be dug 309(34).
ihinúkay was dug for 248(19).
hinukáyan was dug up 179(27).

hukòm judge 18(26).
hùkúman court of justice 54(31).
paghuhùkúman session of court 54(34).

-húlaʾ: humúlaʾ predicted 277(37).
maŋhúlaʾ tell fortunes 240(6).
maŋhuhúlaʾ fortune-teller 206(16).

húli (a) that caught 220(41). 282(6).
paŋhúli means of catching [358]52(27).
humúli catch 108(5). 165(34).
paghúli a catching 108(3).
nagsìsihúli are catching 102(1).
naŋhùhúli goes catching 106(39). 240(6).
paŋhuhúli a catching in quantity 106(24).
maŋhuhúli catcher 56(20). 110(6).
hulíhin be caught 52(16). 68(9).
hinúli was caught 20(20). 84(31).
hulíhan be caught from 251(32).
hulihàn a catching by many 260(9).
pagkahúli a having caught 282(33).
màhúli get caught 52(22). 70(19). 102(3).
nàhúli got caught 16(22). 44(16).
nàhùhúli is getting caught, is caught 28(29). 309(7).
nagpahúli allowed himself to be left behind 68(36).
tagahúli catcher 165(34).
—(b) Accent shifted: hulì late; last 20(30). 28(18). 222(31).
paŋhulì last 226(10).
kàhulì-hulíhan very last 40(27). 280(17).
máhulì be late 235(39).
màhùhulì will be left behind 18(18).
náhulì was last 118(34).
pagkáhulì a being left behind 18(31). 296(18).
màpàpaghulì will all be caught 198(12). 297(20).

Húliyo S. n. 279(5).

Holò S. Sulu 120(18).

húloʾ source, upstream 279(4).

-húlog: ihúlog be dropped 168(19).
ihùhúlog will be dropped 64(43).
hulúgan be dropped to 16(17).
hùhulúgan will be dropped to 16(19).
ipakihúlog be dropped along 265(6).
ipinakihúlog was dropped along 265(9).
ipinakìkihúlog is being asked to be dropped along 265(10).
ikinahúlog was the cause of falling 74(38).
kahùhulúgan will be fallen from 158(30).
kinahulúgan was fallen from 274(19).
kahùlúgan one of two who drop to each other 278(6).
kahulugàn meaning 30(18). 120(24).
nakahúlog caused to drop 281(34).
mahúlog fall down 299(32).
mahùhúlog will fall down 22(12).
nahúlog fell down 24(7).
pagkahúlog a falling down 24(18).
magpatihulòg throw oneself down 206(23).
magpápatihulòg will throw himself down 313(28).
nagpatihulòg threw himself down 313(21).
nagpápatihulòg throws himself down 313(24).

húni chirp 197(21).
humúni purred 84(1).
hùníhan chirping together 202(21).
kahùníhan one of two that chirp at each other 278(8).
mapaghunì given to neighing 289(31).
palahùníhin given to neighing, chirping 315(15).

Húniyo S. June 110(11).

huŋkòy winnowed 223(30)
naghuŋkòy winnowed 232(21).
huŋkúyan winnowing-machine 258(36).

Hòrdan S. Jordan 106(6).

hurnò S. oven 212(36).

húsay excellence 58(1).
nagsìsihúsay are getting well 108(36).
mahúsay in good shape, excellent 46(5). 108(12). 269(4).
pinakamahúsay most excellent 28(38).
mahuhúsay pl. 196(22).
nàhúsay got well 44(24).

hustò S. just suited 108(40).

hóta S. iota 30(16).

huwàg not, do not 20(13). 234. 239. 240.

Huwàn S. n. 20(2).

Huwána S. n. 173(25).

huwátaw (C?) Chinese bowl 255(30).

huwès S. judge 54(37).

huwétiŋ (C?) lottery 229(26). [359]

[Contents]

I(E).

ibà other 22(10). 66. 98. 132. 251. 314.
ibà t ibà: nakapagìibà-t-ibà is able to alter 36(10).
pinagibhàn was differed in 255(19).
pagkakáibà a being different 46(39). 276(31).
náibà got different 294(24)
nàìibà changes 50(17).
pagkáibà a being different 110(17).

íbig liked, desired 20(18). 267.
pagíbig a desiring, loving 60(25). 64(4).
iníbig was desired, loved 18(15). 40(16).
inìíbig is being desired, loved 92(20).
ìbígan mutual love 259(28).
magìbígan loved each other 236(29).
nagììbígan are loving each other 236(29).
pagiìbígan a loving each other 90(6).
kaibigàn desire, affection 140(2). 168(38).
kaìbígan one of two who love each other 94(18). 140(2). 278(9).
magkaìbígan two who love each other 42(30). 278(36).
kayibígan friend 16(5). 139(41). 278(17).
magkayibígan pair of friends 22(30). 278(37).
magkakayibígan pl. 26(30). 278(40).
pagkakayibígan a being friends 24(28). 278(30).
makipagkayibígan make friends with 40(6). 278(31).
nakipagkayibígan made friends with 86(30).
kàibígan person loved 279(41).
nagkàkàibígan are loving each other 90(32). 280(4).
maibigìn fond of 96(39). 110(15).

íbon bird 197(21).

-ígiʾ: maígiʾ accurate 28(5).

igìb that dipped 220(42).
umigìb dip out 227(38).
maŋigìb fetch water 282(24).

Igoróte S. Igorote 110(33).

-íhaw: ihàw roasted 222(32).
magíhaw roast, tr. 232(21).
iníhaw was roasted 244(16).
ihawàn gridiron 295(9).

-íhip: umìíhip is blowing 227(39).
hinípan was blown on 251(33).

ikàw thou 18(10). 47. 63. 182.
See iyò, kà, mò.

-íkid: nakaíkid is coiled up 120(21).
tagaíkid roller 315(35).

-iklìʾ: kaikliàn shortness 192(21).
maiiklìʾ short, pl. 24(31).
nápakaiklìʾ very short 221(17).

ílag go away 151(39).
umílag get out of the way 56(20).
nagsiílag got out of the way, pl. 118(34).
umìílag is running away 116(7).
pagiílag a getting away 116(27).
paŋiŋílag an avoiding 102(2). 118(43). 240(8).
ilágan inlagàn be avoided 238(42).
inilágan was avoided 251(37).
inìilágan is being avoided 36(22).

ilàn a few; how many? 16(11). 66. 98.
íilàn only a few 38(9). 48(28).
makáilàn several times 44(39). 298(33).

ilàŋ uncanny 40(9).
pagilàŋ a tricking 227(41).
kailáŋan kayiláŋan necessity 58(16). 275(35). 288(12).
naŋàŋailáŋan requires 108(2). 275(38).
paŋaŋailáŋan a needing 236(32). 275(39).
kàkailaŋánin will be necessitated 275(39).
kinàkailáŋan is being necessitated 46(11). 82(38).
nailàŋ was nonplussed 285(21).

-ílap: maiílap wild, pl. 28(25).

ílaw light, lamp 122(5).
ilawàn lamp 286(27).
maílaw illuminated 72(6). [360]

elektrisidàd S. electricity 290(19).

-ílin: paŋiŋílin performing of ceremonies 112(18).

ílog river 16(2).
Ílog-Pásig Pasig river 244(9).

Ilóko S. Iloko 275(8).

impiyèrno, see infiyèrno.

empléyo S. employment 92(32).

impò grandmother 59. 256.
magimpò grandmother and grandchild 242(13).

inà mother 30(27). 151(22). 59.
maginà mother and child 242(14).
magiinà pl. 242(30).
inahìn female 238(40).
iníinà godmother 247(17).

-ínam: maínam handsome, pleasant 18(14). 269(5).
pàináman be made very pretty 308(37).

indàʾ grandmother 59. 256.

-inìp: naíinìp is impatient 285(22).

ínit heat 134(19).
inìt heated, angry 167(9). 222(33).
umínit became hot 227(42).
nagínit heated; grew angry 24(22).
nagìínit is heating 234(6).
kainítan heat 118(20).
maínit hot 50(9).
maiínit pl. 96(29). and Corrigenda.
taginìt hot season 152(20). 315(11). and Corrigenda.

iniyò prep. and loc. of kayò: your, you, by you, pl. 165. 169.
niniyò disj., by you, of you, 163.

-inlag, see ílag.

infiyèrno impiyèrno S. hell 22(6).

entabládo S. platform 98(40).

-intindè S.: nàintindihàn was understood 50(6).

Intsèk Chinese 56(34).

-inò: ininò was paid attention to 68(6).
náinò got noticed 100(3).

-inòm: uminòm drank 228(2).
paginòm a drinking 163(21).
magiinòm drink much 206(26).
màŋiŋínom maŋiínom boozer 243(11).
ininòm was drunk 230(11).
inumìn drinking water 247(27).
ìnumínan water-shelf 259(22).
ìnúman drinking-party 257(25).
kaìnúman one of two who drink together 277(40).
makáinòm accidentally drink 88(34).
pinaíinòm is being caused to drink 200(18).
tagainòm one whose only duty it is to drink 315(36).
tagapagpainòm one whose duty it is to give drink 316(2).

inúyat molasses 253(40).

-íŋat: nagíŋat was careful 288(13).
nagìíŋat is being careful 48(13).
pagiíŋat a being careful 62(14).
iŋátan be done carefully 227(31).
pagiŋátan be given due care 255(20).
maíŋat careful 40(22).

íŋay noise 32(30).
pagiiŋày a making much noise 293(13).
naíŋay made a sound 285(30).
maíŋay make a sound 106(5). noisy 295(16).

Iŋglès Iŋgléses S. English 155(24). 260(11).

iŋkantádo S. enchanted 84(16).

eŋkantadòr S. enchanter 84(38).

iŋkòŋ grandfather 59. 256.

ipà rice-hulls 120(22).

-ípat, see ápat.

-ípon: nagsìsipagípon are gathering up 262(37).
maípon have been gathered 34(12).
naípon has been gathered 60(32).
màípon get gathered 293(39).

irè this 163(36). 64.
nirì disj., [361]of this, by this 316(18). 166.
See also díne.

isà sà one, a 16(3). 67. 248. 261. 314.
isà ŋ báhay: kasà-ŋ-báhay housemate 68(22). 266(37).
isà ŋ daàn: ikaisà-ŋ-daàn hundredth 273(22).
isà ŋ laksà: ikaisà-ŋ-laksàʾ millionth 273(23).
isà ŋ líbo: ikaisà-ŋ-líbo thousandth 273(23).
isà ŋ pùʾ: paŋsà-m-pùʾ number ten 225(40).
ikasà-m-pùʾ tenth 212(38). 273(24).
makásà-m-pùʾ ten times 64(19).
íisà only one 36(20).
isà-isà one by one 32(23). 76(19). 265(4).
nagisà-isà acted one by one 239(16).
inisà-isà were taken one by one 76(15).

isdàʾ fish 88(26).
máŋiŋisdàʾ fisherman 243(6).
palàisdáan fishpond 315(24).

ísip thought, intelligence; think 88(15). 159(29). 184(15). 222(2).
paŋísip means of thinking 271(15).
umísip think 228(3). thought out 96(19). 100(15).
pagísip a thinking out 228(4).
magísip take thought 200(23). 234(7).
nagísip took thought, planned 207(20). 233(8).
pagiísip a planning; thinking-power, reason 44(25). 98(34). 234(9). 252(31). 254(27).
magisìp think of various things 237(33).
nagisìp thought about, ransacked his mind 102(43).
nagíisìp is variously thinking of 202(42).
pagiisìp a searching through one’s mind 30(16).
isípin be thought of 166(11).
inísip was thought of 170(4).
pinagísip was planned 246(14).
pinagisìp was variously thought out 246(21).
pagkaísip a having thought out 193(31).
pagkàísip a chance thinking out 291(7). 292(11).
nagpaísip caused to be thought out 310(21).
ipinaísip was caused to be thought of 306(18).

eskuwéla S. pupil 304(5).
eskuwèlhan school 90(3).

Espániya S. Spain 80(40).

ispírito S. spirit 66(23).

Estádos-Unídos S. United States 46(33).

estasiyòn S. station 116(20).

estudiyànte S. student 26(29).

estopádo S. stew 182(2).

istóriya S. history 271(6).

itìm black 36(40).
itimàn be made black 251(40).
kaitìm what blackness 151(27).
kaiitìm pl. 267(41).
maitìm black 36(12).
pàitimàn be made very black 308(37).

itlòg egg 28(31).
pinaŋitlugàn was laid into 256(35).
pàŋitlúgan place where eggs are laid 262(4).

itò yitò this, the latter, he, it 16(32). 64.
nitò disj., of this, by this 20(34). 166.
ganitò in this manner 26(7). 190.
See also díto.

-íwan: íwan (for i-íwan) be left 32(3). 140(3).
ìíwan will be left 248(21).
iníwan was left 32(25). 44(42).
inìíwan is being left 248(22).
kinaiwánan was left in 237(34).
naíwan has been left 32(27).
naŋaíwan pl. 120(33).
nàíwan got left 293(16).
nagpáiwàn caused himself to be left 50(38). 304(26).

-iyàk: umiyàk weep, cry 186(35).
umíiyàk is weeping 22(24).
nagsísiiyàk pl. 114(15).
pagiyàk a weeping, crying 100(1). 228(6).
inìiyakàn is being wept for 251(42).
ìyákan a crying by many 100(4). 257(26).
nagìyákan wept together 32(8).
ikináiyàk was the [362]cause of weeping 30(37).
paiyàk-iyàk weeping at intervals 300(38).
pagpapaiyàk a causing to cry 100(7).
nápaiyàk burst into tears 90(20).
palaiyákin cry-baby 315(17).

iyàn yàn that 20(9). 64.
niyàn disj., of that, by that 157(32). 166.
ganiyàn in that manner 20(12). 102(22). 190.
See also diyàn.

iyò yò prep. and loc. of ikàw: by thee, thee, thy 16(28). 165. 169.

iyòn yòn yoòn yaòn that, you, the former 16(9). 64.
niyòn noòn disj., of that, by that, 34(27). 38(8). 50(27). 166.
gayòn ganoòn in that manner 18(19). 190. 238. 239.
magkágayòn happen thus 46(17). 271(10).
See also doòn.

Eyurúpa Yurúpa S. Europe 82(2). 221(37).

[Contents]

K.

kà thou, enclitic form of ikàw 47. 63. 182.

kabaliyerésa S. stable 181(39).

kabàn box; dry measure of 75 litres, equal to 25 salòp; twenty-five 220(38). 228(36).

kabáyo S. horse 60(30). 288(25).
See kinamatayàn.
naŋàŋabáyo is riding horseback 240(9).
kabá-kabayúhan hobby-horse 261(34).
nakapaŋàŋabáyo is able to ride horseback 287(26).

kabiyàw: kumabiyàw press sugar-cane 228(6).
kabyáwan cane-press 255(28).
pagkabyawàn be used to press cane in 255(27).
pagkàkabyawàn will be used to press cane in 255(28).
pinagkabyawàn was the place of pressing cane 255(24).
pinagkàkabyawàn is the place of cane-pressing 255(25).

kabuluhàn, see -búlo.

kabutì mushroom 244(19).

-kagàt: pagkagàt a gnawing 36(4). 86(6).
kinagàt was gnawed 76(9).
kinákagàt is being gnawed 106(30).
pinagkakagàt was variously gnawed 84(24).

káhit although; no matter; any 18(11). 22(3). 28(21). 48. 68. 248. 253. 264. 290. 294.

kahòn S. box 84(42). 120(20).

káhoy wood; tree 32(33). 34(28). 58(1).
See búŋa, piráso, púnoʾ.

-káin: kumáin eat 24(1). ate 16(16).
kumàkáin is eating 42(8).
kàkáin will eat 28(39).
pagkáin an eating; food 28(33). 241(40). 254(5).
naŋàŋáin makes his food of 36(13).
kánin be eaten 293(20). boiled rice 72(34).
kináin was eaten 32(16). contents of stomach 275(7).
maŋináin graze 18(33). 241(13).
naŋìŋináin is grazing 18(2).
paŋiŋináin a grazing 18(4).
makapaŋináin have grazed 18(36).
kinàkáin is being eaten 36(15).
kakanìn sweetmeats 108(6).
nagkàkakanìn makes sweetmeats 236(7).
pagkánan be eaten from 255(30).
kàínan eating-party 284(36).
pagkakàínan an eating together 108(21).
kainàn kakanàn dining-room 114(6). 230(12).
makikáin eat along 192(40).
makìkikáin will eat along 264(6).
nakikáin ate along 264(7).
kakàkáin [363]there has been eating 175(8).
kakàínan one of two who eat together 278(9).
makakáin be able to eat 94(30). 281(37).
nakáin was able to be eaten 283(27).
pagkakáin a having eaten 108(27).
makàkáin happen to eat 108(9).
makàpakikáin-káin ever eat along 297(26).
paŋpakáin served as food 112(29).
nagpakáin caused to be eaten 303(6).
pagpapakáin a causing to eat 112(39).
pakánin be caused to eat 72(33).
ipinakipakáin was asked to be caused to eat 307(37).
tagakáin one whose task is merely to eat 315(37).
tagapagpakáin one who is to serve food 316(4).

kaiŋìn a clearing 118(40).

kakàw S. cocoa 299(6).

káki S. khaki 122(2).

kalabása S. pumpkin 76(15).

kalabàw (S.) carabao 70(38).
kalabàw-ramò grass-carabao, wild carabao 230(9).

kalabìt a touch 201(26).
kakàlabítan one of two who touch each other 277(41).

kalabòg a thud 24(4).
kumalabòg fell with a thud 24(9).
kàlabúgan thud of many objects 257(27).

kalákal merchandise 236(31).

kalámay rice-paste 56(16).

kalàn stove, brazier 74(5).

kalasìŋ clink 247(21).
kàlasíŋan clink of many objects 257(31).

-kálat: pakálat caused to be rumored 118(10).

kálaw owl 18(29).

kalaykày rake 225(25).
kinalaykày was raked 166(22).

kàliŋkíŋan, see -liŋkìŋ.

kaliwàʾ left-hand 90(26).
See bandà.

kalsáda, see karsáda.

káluluwà soul 72(26). 268(15).

-kaluskòs: kumaluskòs pattered 228(6).
kàluskúsan a pattering by many 84(20).

kamálig storehouse 253(37).
Also as place-n., see báyan.

kamátis (S.) tomato 268(26).

kamatsilè S. a tree, Pithecolobium dulce Benth. 247(1).

kamày hand 22(9).
nagkàmáyan shook hands with each other 234(10).

kambèŋ goat 112(40).

kamì we, excl. 20(38). 63.
See ámin.

kamiséta S. shirt 122(2).

-kamìt: nagkamìt gained 232(22).
kàkamtàn will be received 272(42).
màkamtàn get obtained 40(5).
nàkamtàn got obtained 62(3).

kampánaʾ S. church-bell 80(26).

kampìt kitchen-knife 174(22).

kampòn S. comrade 305(33).

-kámot: kinámot was scratched 84(2).

kamóte S. sweet-potato 253(2).

kánan right-hand 90(26).
See bandà.

kandáro S. lock 283(40).

kandidáto S. candidate 209(24).

kandílaʾ S. candle 50(29).

kandeléro S. candlestick 293(5).

kanilà, see silà.

kanína a little while ago 22(17). 50(40). 262(5).

kaníno, see síno.
—kanità, see kità.
—kaniyà, see siyà.

kaniyàʾ therefore 20(13). 241. 295. 297. 324.

kaniyòn S. cannon 252(9). [364]

kaniyunéro kaniyunéros S. cannoneer 200(18). See trabáho.

kànser S. cancer 204(11).

kantà S. song 208(6).
kumantà sing 110(32).
kumákantà is singing 228(8).
nagsísikantà pl. 110(38).
pagkantà a singing 112(3).
nagkákantà sings 112(2).
kantahìn be sung 110(38).
kinantà was sung 208(7).
kantahàn be sung for 204(29).
kantáhan song in chorus 112(4).
nagkantáhan sang in chorus 200(20).

-kapàʾ: kumapàʾ felt out 228(9).
kumákapàʾ is groping for 228(10).
naŋapàʾ caught with his hand 240(10).
kinapàʾ was groped out 244(21).
nakàkàkapàʾ has come to be grasping 291(31).

kapàg when, if 187(12). 248(31). 48. 296. 300. 304.

-kapàl: makapàl thick 86(7).

Kapampáŋan, see paŋpàŋ.

kápit that held; a hold 66(29).
kápit-báhay neighboring house, neighbor 38(10). 56(35). 211(5).
magkápit-báhay pair of neighbors 242(22).
magkakápit-báhay pl. 38(9).
kápit-báyan neighboring town; person from the next town 46(7). 60(12). 211(7).
pagkápit a holding on 295(4).
nagsikápit took hold, pl. 78(11).
nakakápit has taken hold 64(22).
nàkàkápit is clinging 78(15).
pakapítin be caused to take hold 78(2).

kápitan S. mayor 98(38).

kapitàn S. captain 254(34).

kapóte S. rain-coat 161(20).

kápuwàʾ fellow-; equally 36(39). 249.
kápuwà tào: magkápuwà-táo two fellow-men 242(23).

karaniyúwan, see -dániw.

káraŋ covering of wagon or boat 118(21).

karáyom needle 224(1). See bútas.

karéra S. course 167(27).

karéta S. wagon 100(23).

karitòn S. cart 38(17).

karnabàl S. carnival 237(8).

karnè S. meat, beef 114(11).

karsáda kalsáda S. street 201(22). 257(26).

karumáta S. carriage 52(36).

karósa S. float 234(13).

kasàl (S.) wedding 219(38). married 54(19). 223(31).
pagkakasàl a uniting in marriage 90(34).
ikinasàl was united in marriage 94(29).
mákasàl get married 92(26).
màkàkasàl will get married 295(14).
pagkákasàl a getting married 94(35).
pakasàl get married 168(16).
ipakasàl be caused to be united in marriage 92(17).
ipinakasàl was caused to be united in marriage 92(24).
mápakasàl get married 90(41).

kasalukúyan, see -salúkoy.

kasapuwégo S. match 193(7).

kaséra S. landlady 302(28).
naŋàŋaséra eats in a boarding-house 240(11).
pàŋaserahàn boarding-place 38(4). 262(9).
nagpàpakaséra keeps a boarding-house 303(8).

Kastílaʾ S. Spanish, Spaniard 28(3).

katàm a plane 56(38).
kumatàm use the plane 58(10).
màŋaŋátam planer 56(34).
pinagkatamàn was variously planed off; shavings 56(40).

katawàn, see táo.

kathàʾ that composed 221(2). [365]

kátiyaw fighting-cock 238(3).

kátre S. bedstead 62(38).

katuturàn, see -tuwìd.

káwad wire 284(22).

-káwag: ikináwag was shaken 78(14).

káwal herd, troop 106(26). 116(6).

kawáleʾ frying-pan 114(10).

káwáwaʾ, see áwaʾ.

kawáyan bamboo 34(37). See pantày.
kawayanàn kwayanàn bamboo-grove 260(42). 290(20).

káwit pruning-knife 240(12).
maŋáwit prune; get tired of 240(12).
naŋàŋáwit is getting tired of 104(18).

kay, see si.

káy ké than 16(9). 281.

káya ability, means 56(4). 226(35). 255(3).
naŋàŋáya has mastery 240(14).
ikakáya be the cause of ability; means 54(22).
makàkáya will come within the ability 16(16).
nakáya came within the ability 283(29).
nakàkáya comes within the ability 283(30).

kayàʾ else 40(5).
so that 48(11). 47. 219. 297. 317(4). 321.

-káyas: kayàs smoothed 222(34).
kumáyas smoothed 228(11).
nakáyas was able to be smoothed 283(31).

-kayilàʾ: ipinagkayilàʾ was lied about 60(18).

káylan kélan when? 70(18). 92(2). 39. 262(7). (13). 317(5).

káyo cloth 249(34).
maŋkakayò cloth-dealer 248(9).

kayò you, pl. 63. See iniyò.

kibòʾ least sound or movement 44(42).
kumibòʾ make the least sound, budge 279(13). made the least sound, budged 44(5).
pagkibòʾ a making the least sound or movement 104(25).

Kíkaʾ (S.) short-n. (Francisca) 311(11).

Kíkoʾ (S.) short-n. (Francisco) 50(36).

-kilála: kilalà familiar 290(19).
kumilála make acknowledgement 90(40).
kakilála person with whom one is acquainted 60(23).
pagkàkilanlàn be used as an advertisement 58(18). 279(28).
nakàkìkilála nakàkàkilála is acquainted with 167(30). 276(8). 292(28).
nàkilála was perceived, got known 70(38). 104(2).
màpagkilála be found out 40(20). 66(38).
nàpagkilála was realized 50(32).
nàpagkìkilála is being recognized 44(34). 52(1).
nagpakilála caused to be known 168(34).
nagpàpakilála is causing to be known, showing 44(24).
pagpapakilála a showing 52(25).
ipakilála be caused to be known 58(5).
ipinakilála was caused to be known 64(40).
ipinakìkilála is being shown 88(8).
màipakilála come to be shown 68(32).

-kílos: pagkílos a moving, intr. 44(35). 66(35).
kìlúsan concerted movement 264(4).
makakílos be able to move 311(28).

kinà, see sinà.

kinábaŋ profit 263(39).
pakikinábaŋ profit; holy communion 263(38).
pakinábaŋ advantage 300(3).
nagpakinábaŋ caused to profit, gave holy communion 98(4).
pakìkinabáŋan will be profited from 94(26).

-kinìg: kuminìg trembled 42(41). 64(27). [366]

-kinìg: makinìg hear 20(16). 30(17).
makíkinìg will hear 96(11).
nakinìg heard 285(30).
nakíkinìg is hearing 22(21). 96(5).
pakiŋgàn be listened to 20(29). 308(12).
pinakiŋgàn was listened to 50(27).
nàpakiŋgàn happened to be heard 46(24).

kínis skill 56(37). 102(22).
kakínis what cleverness, how clever? 102(14).
makínis smooth, skilful 102(9).
pinakamakínis most skilful 102(14).
makikínis pl. 118(29).
nakapagpàpakínis is able to make smooth 58(14).

-kintàb: nagpápakintàb is causing to shine, polishing 114(8).

-kiŋg, see kinìg.

-kísig: makísig lively 78(23).

-kíta: kumíta find, earn 30(33).
kumìkíta is finding 30(37).
pagkíta an earning 60(37).
magkíta see each other (two actors) 234(10).
magkikíta pl. 28(1). 239(5).
nagkíta saw each other 203(40).
kinakitáan was the place of seeing, was seen in 36(32).
makàkíta happen to see, find 30(26). 66(6).
makàkìkíta will happen to see 30(36).
nakàkíta happened to see 16(2). 40(27).
nakàkàkíta happens to see 292(31).
màkíta get seen 30(25). 32(38).
màkìkíta will be seen 22(37).
nàkíta got seen 20(24). 32(31).
nàkìkíta is getting seen 20(21). 26(4).
pagkàkíta a chance seeing 38(18). 80(12). 292(35).
kàpakitáan one of two who show each other 310(36).
nagpàpakíta causes to be seen, shows 48(14).
ipakíta be shown 48(33). 306(21).
ipinakíta was caused to be seen, was shown 30(38). 34(18).
màipakíta come to be shown 28(15).

kità thou and I; thou by me 16(19). 18(21). 63. 182.
nità disj., by, of thee and me 163.
kanità prep. and loc., thy and my, thee and me, by thee and me 227(17). 165. 169.

kitèʾ chicken 238(9).

kláse S. class, school 26(36).

kristàl S. glass 255(21).

kristiyáno (Chinese brogue: kilistiyáno) S. Christian 58(39).

Krísto S. Christ 20(4).

krùs S. cross; also as family-n. 20(24). 242(20).
nagkurùs crossed himself 64(29).
nagkúkurùs is crossing himself 64(5).

kò disj. of akò: of me, by me 47. 163. 182.

kúbaʾ hump; hunchback 22(29).

-kublì: nagkublì concealed himself 94(5).
nagkúkublì is hiding (intr.) 232(23).
pagkukublì a hiding 186(14).
naŋúŋublì is staying concealed 108(20). 240(16).
paŋúŋublì a staying concealed 272(14).
pinagkùkublihàn is being hidden in 94(8).
kublíhan hiding-place 36(33).
nàkùkublì is in hiding 108(33).
pagkákublì a being in hiding 108(23).

kúbo hut 118(27).

kúgon nipa, Imperata arundinacea 118(27).

-kúha: kumúha took 50(38).
kumùkúha is taking 112(7).
kúnin be taken 202(10).
kinúha was taken 30(7). 84(25).
kinùkúha is being taken 74(26).
pinagkúkuhà is being variously taken 74(7).
pagkúnan be taken from 255(35).
pagkùkúnan will be taken from 222(35).[367]
pinagkúnan was taken from 255(31).
pinagkùkúnan is being taken from 255(33).
ikinakúha was the cause of taking 272(11).
makakùkúha will be able to take 56(40).
nakakúha has taken 90(24).
nakakùkúha succeeds in taking 54(4).
pagkakúha a completed taking 52(36).
màkúha get taken 34(9).
nàkúha chanced to be taken 58(11). 267(7).

kukò fingernail 234(23).
maŋhinukò cut the fingernails 241(24).

kúlam magic principle 40(11).
maŋkukúlam sorcerer 40(1). See médiko.
kinúlam was bewitched 42(29).
kinùkúlam is being bewitched 40(41).
nàkùkúlam is bewitched 42(6).

kúlaŋ lack 201(10).
kulàŋ made incomplete 222(35).
nagkùkúlaŋ is at fault 96(40).

-kulápol: nàkùkulapúlan is encrusted 110(35).

Kulàs (S.) n. (for Nicolás) 258(28).

Kulása (S.) n. 287(23).

kúlay color 171(21).
kakúlay of the same color 266(10).
kasiŋkúlay id. 314(37).

kulilìŋ small bell 225(22).

kólera S. cholera 42(3).

-kulòʾ: kumúkulòʾ is boiling, intr. 74(24).
nagpakulòʾ caused to boil 96(20).

kulòg thunder 254(36).

kulugò wart 228(30).

-kulòŋ: kùlúŋan place of imprisonment 86(4).
kuluŋàn cage, crate 238(41).
kinàkùkuluŋàn is the place of accidental imprisonment 86(5).
nàkùkulòŋ is imprisoned 84(42).

-kumbidà (S.): kinumbidà was summoned 20(19).

kompaniyà S. company 221(20).

-kumpisàl (S.) magkumpisàl go to confession 98(22).
pagkukumpisàl a going to confession 98(12).
naŋumpisàl practised going to confession 98(28).
naŋúŋumpisàl goes to confession 56(13).
kinúkumpisàl is being given confession 98(7).
kumpìsálan confession 98(24).
mapagkumpisàl given to going to confession 98(11).
nagpápakumpisàl gives confession 98(3).
pagpapakumpisàl a giving confession 98(5).
pàkumpisálan confessional 96(37).

kumpòl cluster 281(35).

kumpusisiyòn S. composition 90(15).

kumustà S. como está? 230(39).

kúmot blanket, sheet 36(39).

-kun, see—kúha.

kuŋ when, if, whether 16(6). 45. 298–301.

koŋkristiyános S., see kapatìd.

kópiya S. copy 52(10).

kúra S. priest 50(3).

kuràl S. corral 268(42).

korbáta S. necktie 163(36).

kurípot stingy 112(16).

koréyo S. mail 168(19).

-kúroʾ: pinagkùkúroʾ is being considered 82(24).
mapagkúroʾ be able to be divined 287(10).
napagkùkúroʾ is able to be divined 52(19).
màpagkúroʾ get figured out 20(18).
màpàpagkúroʾ will get figured out 182(20).
nàpagkúroʾ got figured out 297(13).
nàpàpagkúroʾ is divined, is understood 297(15).

koróna S. crown 26(24).

-kurùs, see krùs [368]

-kuròt: kumuròt pinch 228(13).
maŋuròt pinch people 240(16).
kurutìn be pinched 244(24).
kurutàn be pinched from 251(43).
kùrútan a pinching by many 257(35).

kúsaʾ of its own accord 225(20).

kusínaʾ S. kitchen 114(9).

kosinéro S. cook 114(1).

kutìŋ kitten 255(37).

kutsíliyo S. table-knife 114(9).

kutséro S. driver 272(2).

kúto head-louse 225(16). See pamatày.
kutuhàn lousy person 260(10).

kuwáko cigar-holder 220(34).

kuwaltà kuwàlta kuwàrta (S.) money 30(33). 141(27).

kuwàrto S. room 84(23).

-kuwayan, see kawáyan.

-kuwènta S.: pagkuwènta a counting 223(6).

kuwènto S. story 66(3).
pagkukuwènto a story-telling 286(5).

kúya kúyaŋ (C.) oldest brother 46(22). 118(15). 59. 254.
magkúya oldest brother with brother or sister 242(14).
magkukúya pl. 242(30).

[Contents]

L

laàn that reserved 221(3).
inilálaàn is being reserved 248(22).

-labà S. ipaglálabà will be washed for 174(40).

lában against 22(15). 282.
lumában complete 60(40).
labánan be opposed 60(36).
labanàn war 251(1).
nagsìsipaglabanàn are fighting each other 122(15).
paglalabanàn a fighting, war, battle 116(27).
makipaglában engage in a contest 48(23).
pakikipaglában an engaging in a contest 116(29).
kalában opponent 266(11).
kinàkalában is being opposed 60(38).

labanòs (S.) large radish 252(21).

labàŋ trough 289(3).
labaŋàn manger 260(25).

labàs the outside 52(38).
lumabàs went out 52(34).
lumálabàs is going out 74(1).
paglabàs a going out 245(3).
maglabàs bring out 234(11).
ilabàs be brought out 270(32).
nilàlabasàn is being come out at 42(14).
naglàlàbásan are going out together 236(16).
máilabàs get taken out 110(4).
palabàs theatrical performance 300(4).
papalabàs going out 96(30).
nagpápalabàs is bringing out, presenting 303(9).

labì added to ten, -teen 58(12). 135.
labi ŋ isà: paŋlabì-ŋ-isà number eleven 225(40).
ika-labì-ŋ-isà eleventh 273(24).

lábis excessive 172(40).

labòŋ bamboo-sprout 172(25).

-ladlàd: iniladlàd was dropped 104(36).

lagablàb blaze 231(6).

-lagánap: lumagánap circulated, intr. 34(29).

lagáriʾ a saw 187(13).
maŋlalagarìʾ food-sawer 243(17).
mapaglagarían be able to be sawed on 288(24).

lagày situation, condition 46(8). 90(35).
ilagày be placed 108(12).
inilagày was placed 220(17).
inilálagày 108(42).
nilagyàn was put onto, was covered 30(11). 261(30).
nilàlagyàn is being put into, is being filled 108(39).
làgáyan place where things are put 193(36). [369]258(38).
lalagyàn receptacle 96(25). 261(22).
pagkakálagày a placing, position 270(40).
kinàlàlagyàn is the place of putting 38(32). 88(5).
kalàgáyan position, state 34(34). 176(35).
málagày get placed 294(26).
pagkálagày chance placing, position 100(20).
nagpalagày caused to be placed 24(39).
mápalagày chance to stay in a position 22(14).

lágiʾ frequently 60(27). 62(15).
palágiʾ id. 62(10).

-lagkìt: malagkìt sticky 221(26).

laglàg that falling 247(3). 257(31).
ilálaglàg will be dropped 24(3).
inilaglàg was dropped 32(24).
nalaglàg fell down 257(28).

lagnàt fever 94(30).

lagpàk a falling down 58(35).
lumagpàk come down on, land 46(38). came down 299(32).
lálagpàk will fall down on 244(39).
paglagpàk a falling down onto 48(22).
nàpàpalagpàk is falling down onto 108(19).

-lagòʾ: malagòʾ dense 24(31).

-lagòk: pagkalagòk a having swallowed 30(20).
pagkálagòk a chance swallowing 291(9).

-lagòt: malagòt break off, intr. 40(28).
nalagòt broke off 261(27).
pagkalagòt a breaking off 112(31).

lahàt all 26(12). 66. 132. 145. 174.
lahàt-lahàt all the various things 74(35).

láhiʾ family, race 275(29).

lákad a going, an errand 221(4).
lakàd on foot 223(17).
lumákad go, walk 18(7). went 283(1).
lumàlákad is walking 115(15).
paglákad a going 66(18).
naglákad drew on foot 234(13).
paglalákad a drawing on foot 234(12).
maglakàd walk about 122(7).
naglálakàd is walking about, journeying 22(31). 66(9).
nagsísipaglakàd pl. 58(40).
paglalakàd a walking, journeying 66(15). 84(4).
maglalakàd traveler 242(43).
lakárin be traveled over 118(26).
nilákad was walked over 244(24).
lakáran be gone to, be gone on 70(6). 252(4).
nilakáran was travelled on 32(19).
nilàlakáran is being walked on 22(33).
lakaràn walking-party 260(13).
makalàlákad will be able to walk 104(31).
nakalàlákad is able to walk 34(8).
nalákad was able to be walked over 283(33).
nàlákad chanced to walk 177(17).
palákad course 50(6).
pagpapalákad a causing to go 288(9).
pinalákad was caused to walk 68(41).
ipalákad be caused to go 118(19).

lakàs force 44(6). See úbos.
lumakàs grew strong 76(39).
inilakàs was made louder 42(41).
lakasàn be done with strength 252(5).
kalakasàn strength, loudness 182(23).
malakàs strong, loud 18(23). 269(6).
pinakamalakàs strongest 309(41).
malalakàs pl. 18(15).

lakì size 66(12).
lumakì grew larger 56(9).
nagsilakì pl. 90(5).
paglakì a growing larger 300(17).
lakhàn be made big 252(6).
kalakhàn greatness, most 44(29). 60(39).
malakì large 18(18). 69. 99. 110. 138.
malalakì pl. 34(38).
ikàpagpàpalakì will be the means of causing to grow larger 310(22).
kasiŋlakì of the same size 314(39).
magkakasiŋlakì several of the same size 120(3). [370]

lákip: kalákip having the same cover, enclosed with 173(28).

laksàʾ million 134. See isà.

-lákoʾ: maglákoʾ peddle 232(23).
maglalakòʾ peddler 226(23).

-lála: nilála was woven 46(40).

-lalàʾ: inilalàʾ was the cause of getting worse 291(17).
palalàʾ getting worse 92(10).

laláki man, male 30(31).

lálim depth 218(27).
ilálim under side 20(28).
nilalíman was done deeply 252(7).
malálim deep 18(39).
pakalalímin be made too deep 309(33).
pakalàlalímin will be made too deep 309(34).
pinakalálim was made too deep 309(35).

láloʾ more 24(27). 147. 242.
nilalúan was exaggerated 98(5).

-lam, see -álam.

lamàn flesh, muscle, contents 18(15). 48(1). See piráso.

lámaŋ only 28(33). 47. 220. 227. 243.

lámat crack 300(17).

-lambòt: malambòt soft 163(14).

lamìg cold 118(31).
lumamìg became cold 296(39).
lálamìg will become cold 183(16).
kalalamìg what coldness, pl. 268(1).
kalamigàn coldness 272(36).
malalamìg cold, pl. 219(32).
taglamìg cold weather 315(30).

lamésa S. table 114(9).

-lampàs: lumálampàs is getting excessive 54(27).

lamòg bruised 62(28).
naglálamòg is getting bruised 62(15).

lamòk gnat 303(9).

-lámon: lumàlámon is feeding, intr. 228(14).
nagsìsilámon pl. 262(21).
lalumúnan throat 88(28).

landàs path 252(3).

lansónes S. fruit of Lansium domesticum Jack. 306(32).

lantà withered 76(36).

laŋgàm ant 202(20).

laŋìs oil 74(24).

láŋit sky, heaven 22(2).
kalaŋitàn heavenly regions 104(24).

-laŋòy: lumaŋòy swim 28(21). swam 82(33).
làŋúyan swimming-place 258(40).
makipaglàŋúyan go along swimming 264(28).
makìkipaglàŋúyan will join the swimming party 264(30).
pàlaŋúyan place where something is allowed to swim 309(8).

-lápad: lapàd widened 306(8).
kalapáran wideness 70(40).
malápad wide 92(35).

-lapàg: inilapàg was placed on the ground 106(16).
inilálapàg is being placed on the ground 36(41).
nàlàlapàg is lying on the ground 114(43).

lápis S. pencil 223(8).

-lápit (a) lumápit came near 26(19).
lumàlápit is coming near 64(19).
paglápit a coming near 66(25).
nilapítan was approached 24(22).
malápit near 44(27).
malalápit pl. 110(18).
—(b) With accent-shift: málapìt get near 100(27).
màlàlapìt will be near 120(7).
nálapìt got near 98(40).
pagkálapìt a having got near 46(28).

laráwan image 20(4).

lariyò (S.) brick 302(41).

laròʾ game; play 46(32). 241(34).
maglálaròʾ will play 232(24).
naglaròʾ played 232(24).
nagsipaglaròʾ pl. 86(31).
naglálaròʾ is playing 46(36).
nagsísipaglaròʾ pl. 46(35).
paglalaròʾ a playing 48(5).
laruìn be played [371]with 244(25).
làrúan play-ground 139(41).
laruwàn toy 84(6).
paglaruwàn be used as a plaything 255(37).
pinaglaruàn was played in 48(41).
pinaglàlaruwàn is being used as a plaything 255(40).
makipaglaròʾ play along 88(20).
pakikipaglaròʾ a playing along 264(25).
kalaròʾ playmate 86(33).
kalálaròʾ there has been playing 267(16).
palaròʾ public games 204(20).
pagpapalaròʾ an allowing to be played 268(9).

lasìŋ drunken 108(32).
naglasìŋ got drunk 282(28).
paglalasìŋ a getting drunk 190(15).
nakalálasìŋ makes drunk 108(8).
nakákapaglasìŋ is able to get drunk 286(38).
balasìŋ an intoxicant plant, Anamirta cocculus 108(7). 314(23).

laséta (S.) knife 207(6).

láta tin; can 223(26). 292(2).

-latàʾ: paŋlalatàʾ extreme fatigue 66(33).

-látag: ipinaglàlátag is being spread for 62(35).
nàlàlátag is lying stretched out 92(22).
pagkàlátag a chance spreading 269(39).

latìn S. Latin 28(23).

-láon: kalaúnan duration, length 32(1). 86(11).
naláon took long 34(20). 70(37).
nalàláon takes long 108(27).
maláon long, taking long 34(25). 108(35). 69. 110. 138.
nalaúnan lasted long 36(33). 38(12). 54(13).

lawà, see sa.
dalawà two 16(25). 224(22). 67.
dalawà ŋ pùʾ: paŋdalawà-ŋ-pùʾ number twenty 225(41).
ikadalawà-ŋ-pùʾ twentieth 273(24).
dalawà ŋ pù t isà: ikadalawà-ŋ-pù-t-isà twenty-first 273(25).
dádalawà only two 84(30). 224(32).
dalá-dalawà two by two 224(10).
paŋalawà number two 226(7).
dadalawáhin having two 54(5).
ikalawà second 24(15).
makalawà second day, day after tomorrow 180(4). 204(18). 288(33).
kamakalawà day before yesterday 166(42). 266(35). 259.
makálawà twice 98(1). 262(8).

-láwak: maláwak broad 28(26). 72(18).

-láwig: lalawígan province 110(13).
lalawíga-ŋ-Pampàŋga Pampanga province 210(28).
maláwig roundabout 240(32).

-lawìt: naglawìt hung out, tr. 232(26).
ilawìt be hung out, down 78(1).
inilawìt was hung down 78(6).
nakalawìt hung down 38(29).

-layàʾ: kalayáan liberty 56(31).

láyag a sail 228(17).
lumáyag sailed, voyaged 228(16).
naglálayàg sails back and forth 258(42).

láyas get away 222(4).
lumáyas go away 100(8). went away 228(18).
làláyas will go away 181(28).
nilayásan was deserted 252(9).
làyásan a deserting by many 259(30).
makàláyas-láyas ever run away 297(24).
pagpapaláyas a driving away 36(23).
palayásin be driven away 84(22).
pinaláyas was driven away 72(11).
pinalàláyas is being driven away 72(31).

-láyaw: pagpapaláyaw a causing to be fulfilled 312(19).

-láyoʾ (a): kaláyoʾ what farness, how far? 70(5).
maláyoʾ distant, far 28(26).
malaláyoʾ pl. 82(37).
—(b) With accent-shift: málayòʾ be far away 32(19). 34(11).
nàlàlayòʾ is far away 80(37). [372]

líban except 70(12). 114(23). 283.

-libàŋ: paglilibàŋ an amusing 116(37).
lìbáŋan place for amusing 258(42).
malibàŋ be diverted 204(30).
nalibàŋ became engrossed 70(22).
ipinalílibàŋ is being caused to be amused 116(37).

-libìŋ: paglilibìŋ a burying 114(21).
inilílibìŋ is being buried 112(30).
lìbíŋan burial-ground 114(21).
pagkálibìŋ a chance burying 114(25).

libreríya S. library 227(36).

librò S. book 90(29).

líbo thousand 48(28). 52(43). 134. See isà.
líbo-líbo a thousand at a time 100(18).
makàlìlíbo a thousand times 50(28). 298(38).

-líbot: lumíbot took a walk 228(20).
naglíbot carried about 234(14).
naglibòt went on his errands 70(20).
naglílibòt is going about 34(30).
nagsísipaglibòt pl. 110(27).
paglilibòt a going about 68(2).
nalíbot has been gone round to 76(24).

-lígaw: paglígaw a courting 46(21).
maŋlilígaw manlilígaw wooer 42(27). 70(10).
nilìligáwan is being courted 70(14).

-ligàw: paligàw allowing himself to be led astray 32(13).

-ligáya: magsiligáya rejoice, pl. 262(21).
nakalìligáya is gladdening 202(21).

-ligd, see -gílid.

-lígid: palígid round about 16(20). 26(8).
palígid-lígid all around 32(33). 38(19).

ligsì speed 218(30).
ligsihàn be done quickly 252(10).
maligsì quick 44(37).
nagmámaligsì acts quickly 235(41).

-ligtàs: nagligtàs saved 291(39).
naglíligtàs saves 18(9).
pagliligtàs a saving 96(19).
iligtàs be saved 88(30).
niligtasàn was escaped from 22(28).
makapagligtàs be able to save 94(34).
máligtàs get saved 92(8). 96(4).
náligtàs got saved 122(18).
màligtasàn get escaped from 50(30).

lígoʾ bathe, intr. 222(4).
malígoʾ bathe, intr. 28(14). 191(38).
malìlígoʾ will bathe 191(30).
nalígoʾ took a bath 76(37). 285(38).
nalìlígoʾ is bathing 16(2). 32(31).
palígoʾ bath 300(4).
paligòʾ bathed 300(26).
paŋpalígoʾ used for bathing 183(23).
pagpalígoʾ a bathing, intr. 40(18). 76(38). 302(20).
magsipalígoʾ bathe, intr. pl. 28(12). 302(23).
makapalígoʾ have bathed 32(37).
pagkàpalígoʾ a chance bathing 313(2).
pàliguàn bathroom, bathtub 309(12).
nagpalígoʾ caused to bathe, bathed, tr. 181(36). 303(11).
pagpapalígoʾ a bathing, tr. 303(12).
pinalìligúan is being caused to bathe, given a bath 308(14). is being bathed in 308(13).
tagapagpalígoʾ one whose duty it is to bathe, tr. 316(5).

-liguwàk: máliguwàk get spilled 174(6).

líham letter 154(4).

líhim secret 24(32). 40(33).
lihìm kept secret 36(22).
inilíhim was kept secret 118(41).
palihìm secretly 70(14).

liìg neck 135(17). 201(10).

-liìt: kaliitàn smallness 34(2). 118(1).
maliìt small 40(14).
maliliìt pl. 34(36). [373]

leksiyòn S. lesson 187(24).

likòd back 24(26). 68(4).
likuràn rear 48(16). 68(11).
-talíkod 315(27).
tumalíkod turned the back 231(18).
pagtalíkod a turning the back 231(18).
tinalikdàn was turned the back to 254(21).

Lílay (S.) short-n. 264(6).

lílim shade 310(43).
malílim shady 294(27).

limà five 56(33). 67.
paŋlimà number five 225(37).
lilimáhin having five 86(21). 247(36).
ikalimà fifth 273(18).
makálimà five times 298(33).

-límaŋ: limàŋ confused 291(1).
nalímaŋ became confused 285(24).

limonáda S. lemonade 297(10).

limòs alms; ceremonial gift 112(6).
maglimòs give alms 78(37).
maŋlilímos alms-seeker 112(10).
limusàn be given alms 112(7).
nilìlimusàn is being given alms 72(31).
nagpápalimòs is asking for alms 72(30).
nagsísipagpalimòs pl. 110(28). 304(17).

-límot: nalimútan was forgotten 208(7).
nalìlimútan is forgotten 92(2).
nakalìlímot has forgotten 276(8).

-linamnàm: malinamnàm tasty 16(18).

-línaw: malínaw clear 38(18). 116(38).

lindòl earthquake 289(14).
lumílindòl there is an earthquake 281(12).

-línis: lumínis get clear 228(21).
naglínis cleaned 181(38).
naglìlínis is cleaning 182(31).
maglilinìs cleaner 242(43).
linísin be cleaned 238(6).
nilínis was cleaned 56(39).
nilìlínis is being cleaned 244(26).
kalinísan cleanness 276(32).
pinakamalínis cleanest 310(1).
malilínis clean, neat, pl. 259(1).

lintìk lightning 254(37).

liŋgò (S.) Sunday 50(11).
liŋgò-liŋgò every Sunday 96(4).

-liŋkìŋ: kàliŋkíŋan little finger 280(13).

lípaʾ a smearing, plastering 196(24).
paŋlípaʾ used for plastering 225(12).
maglilipàʾ plasterer 242 (43).

-lipàd: lumílipàd is flying 88(23).
pinalipàd was caused to fly 295(5).

-lípas: lipàs elapsed, evaporated 222(38). 287(7).
magpalípas allow to elapse 26(39).
nagpalípas allowed to elapse 92(3).
nagpàpalípas allows to elapse 74(12). 90(7).

-lípat: lumípat change one’s abode, move 88(43). moved 118(39). 228(23).
nagsìsilípat are changing their abode 122(13).
ikinalípat was the cause of moving 116(26).
màlìlípat will go over 46(2).

-lípol: lipúlin be exterminated 24(36).

-lipumpòn: nagsísilipumpòn are swarming over 262(22).
pinagkàkalipumpunàn is being overrun by many 90(19). 276(9).
màpagkalipumpunàn get overrun by many 106(28). 298(30).

-lípon: nagsìslípon are swarming over 262(22).
nagsìsipaglípon are gathering up 262(37).
nagkàkalípon is getting all over 268(32).
nalìlípon has been, is able to be gathered together 98(38). 283(34). [374]

-litàw: lumitàw bobbed up 78(7).

-litsòn S. paglilitsòn a pig-roasting 262(39).
litsúnan pig-roasting party 257(37).

-litò: pagkalitò a having become confused 72(9).

-liwalìw: magliwalìw be idle, loaf 240(23).
pagliliwalìw an amusing oneself, pleasure 96(39).

liwánag illumination 66(1).
lumiwánag became light 201(37).
maliwánag bright 66(37).

liyàb flame 66(16).

léyi S. law 234(36).

lubày cessation 100(1).
naglubày ceased 66(35).
naglúlubày ceases 58(21).

lubhàʾ very 46(33). 147.
malubhàʾ intense 46(7). 78(25).

lúbid rope 186(38).

-lublòb: naglúlublòb is splashing about 110(25).

lóbo S. wolf 299(38).

lóbo (S.) balloon 138(31).

lubòg immersion, dyeing 251(41).
lumubòg went under 78(17).
nálubòg got sunk 257(12).
nàlùlubòg is immersed 78(13).

lubòs complete 40(2). 312(19).

lugàr S. place 20(27).

-lúgaw: maglúgaw prepare rice-broth 232(27).
nilúgaw rice-broth 252(32).

-lúgi: ikinalúgi was the cause of losing money 239(43).

-lúgit: palúgit handicap 60(38).

-lugmòk: nàlùlugmòk is sunk (in an emotion) 92(4). 114(14).

-lúhaʾ: lumùlúhaʾ is shedding tears 94(31).

-luhòd: lumuhòd kneel down 228(24). knelt down 228(25).
nakaluhòd has knelt down, is on his knees 112(1).
náluhòd knelt down 295(33).
nàlùluhòd is kneeling 22(24).
nagpatiluhòd suddenly knelt down 313(29).
pagpapatiluhòd a suddenly kneeling down 313(31).
nápatiluhòd fell on his knees 313(38).

Lúkas S. n. 104(20).

luksò jump over 222(5).
lumuksò jumped 16(21).
pagluksò a jumping 60(14).
luksuhàn be jumped onto 252(11).
luksúhan jumping by many 257(38).
nakipagluksúhan took part in a jumping-contest 264(31).
nakìkipagluksúhan takes part in a jumping-contest 204(19).
pakikipagluksúhan a jumping with others 62(1).
nàpàpaluksò involuntarily jumps up 62(10).

luktòn locust 191(32).

lóko S. crazy 80(31).
paŋlolóko a fooling 108(3).
nilòlóko is being fooled 50(32).
kalokóhan insanity 313(25).
pagkalóko a fit of insanity 313(22).
nàlòlóko is fooled 106(1).

lúlan that loaded onto a vehicle; an embarking 100(32). 118(18). 219(40).
nagsilúlan embarked, pl. 118(24).
ilúlan be put on a vehicle 20(38).
inilúlan was put on a vessel 56(24).
lulánan be laden 252(12).
lùlánan an embarking by many 259(32).
màlúlan get put in a vehicle 20(11).

Lóleŋ (S.) short-n. 134(31).

lulòd shin 254(35).
luluràn be hit on the shin 252(13). the shin 261(25) Corrigenda.

lúmaʾ worn-out, old 171(4). [375]

lumbò cocoanut-shell drinking-cup 74(5).

lumpò lame 219(5).
nalumpò became lame 285(28).

lúmot moss 313(41).

lundàg a leap 48(16).
lumundàg leaped 70(39).
paglulundàg a leaping about 296(13).

lúnes S. Monday 180(5).

-lúnod: lunúrin be drowned 16(25).
kalunúran be drowned in 274(22). west 18(22). 163(27).
kalùlunúran will be the place of drowning 274(23).
magkalunòd have drownings 112(13).
malúnod get drowned 264(29).
nalúnod got drowned 28(22).
naŋalúnod pl. 88 (31).
pagkalúnod a drowning 88(30). 272(23).

luŋgàʾ lair, hole 84(29).

-luŋkòt: ikinaluŋkòt was the cause of regret 32(37). 88(17).
ikinalúluŋkòt is the cause of regret 80(30). 272(13).
kaluŋkútan melancholy 92(5).
naluŋkòt became sad 90(34).
naŋaluŋkòt pl. 34(23).
nalúluŋkòt is sorry 285(25).
palaluŋkútin given to grief 315(9).

lúpaʾ land, ground, earth 16(4). 24(4). 46(38). See hampàs.
lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos ground of Bustos 100(9).
lúpa-ŋ-San-Ildepònso ground of San Ildefonso 100(34).
lupaìn land, country 56(17).

-lupìt: kalupitàn cruelty 74(20).
malupìt cruel 44(30).
malulupìt pl. 20(32).

lúsoŋ aid 231(42).
lusúŋin be gone down into 244(27).
nilúsoŋ was gone down into 244(27).
nilusúŋan was gone to the aid of 252(15).
lusuŋàn mutual aid 260(14).

lusòŋ mortar 16(25).

lútoʾ a cooking; that cooked 182(33). 221(8).
maglútoʾ cook 114(3).
naglútoʾ cooked 182(1).
naglùlútoʾ is cooking 108(6).
maglulutòʾ cook 243(1).
lutúin be cooked 134(19).
nilútoʾ was cooked 257(35).
nilùlútoʾ linùlútoʾ is being cooked 244(28).
inilùlútoʾ ilinùlútoʾ is being cooked 181(18). 248(24). 249(25).
ipinaglùlútoʾ is being cooked for 249(24).
lutúan be cooked with 252(15).
lutuàn kitchen 114(6).
pagkalútoʾ a past cooking 108(10).
nagpàpalútoʾ causes to be cooked 108(6).

loòb inside; spirit, will, opinion 36(5). 40(25). 90(40). See bigày.
loòb-loòb modest opinion 98(26).
nilóloòb is being intended 307(5).
pumaloòb go into the inside 42(10). 302(19).
napaloòb got into the inside 104(15).

-luwà, see káluluwà.

-luwàʾ: inilúwàʾ is being spat out 40(28).

-luwàg: maluwàg loose, not well fixed 92(38).

-luwalhátiʾ: maluwalhátiʾ in good shape 268(36).

-luwàŋ: kaluwáŋan looseness, width 253(27).
maluwàŋ loose, too wide 289(8).

-luwàs: lumuwàs go down-stream 56(21).
pagluwàs a going down-stream 297(34).
napaluwásan went down-stream together 279(4). 312(8).

luwàt long duration 173(39).
maluwàt long 40(31). 62(22). 269(7).[376]
magmaluwàt take much time 236(2).
nagmaluwàt acted slowly 236(1).
naluwatàn took long 84(8).

[Contents]

M.

(see also B, P).

m, see na.

màʾ Uncle, Don, Mr. 256.

mabúlo a tree and its fruit Trichodesma zeylanicum 34(40).

madlàʾ populace 24(33).

-magàt: pamagàt title 86(19). 300(5).
pamagatàn be given a name 42(21).
pinamàmagatàn is being given a name 168(8).

magígiŋ, magìŋ see -gìŋ.

mahàl dear 22(11).
pagmamahàl a holding dear 72(38).
minámahàl is being held dear 62(34).
kamàhálan highness, majesty 26(23).
kamahalàn dearness, high price 186(9).
kinàmahalàn was got dear in 279(17).
pinakamahàl dearest 309(38).

-mahálaʾ: namàmahálaʾ is ruling 122(4).
pàmahalaàn pàmahaláan government 56(15). See báhay.

maìs S. maize 248(29).

maèstro mayèstro S. master, teacher 88(12).

mákina S. machine 203(2).

-málas: nàmálas got perceived 36(38). 38(19).

málay consciousness 288(18).
nagkamálay became conscious 268(33).
nakàmálay happened to notice 188(10).
nàmaláyan got noticed 42(39).
pamaláyan be caused to be noticed 308(15).

malìʾ bad 34(24). 271(42).
kamàlían wrongness 297(12).
pamalímalìʾ repeatedly wrong 300(31).

Malólos place-n. 110(24). See báyan.

mámaʾ uncle, sir 151(35). 59.

mámayàʾ mámiyàʾ soon 262(9).

màn too, as well 16(18). 47. 221. 227. 248. 262.(7).(10).(13). 219. 317(3).(5).

mána that inherited 40(5).
nàmàmána is inherited 40(11).
ipamána be bequeathed 40(30).
ipinamàmána is being bequeathed 40(31).
pamanáhan be bequeathed to 40(33).

manèʾ peanut 76(16).

maníkaʾ (S.) doll 40(14).

Manikìs S. family-n. 209(24).

mansà S. spot 191(14).

mansánas S. apple 182(27).

-máno S.: nagmàmáno kisses the hand 56(14).

manòk hen, cock, chicken 38(30). 72(36).
nagmanòk-manúkan played rooster 237(10).

Manuwèl S. n. 228(16).

maŋà plural sign 16(8). 143(16). 48. 251.

maŋgà S. mango 34(40). See púnoʾ,
maŋgáhan mango-grove 255(11).

maŋgàs S. sleeves 306(24).

-maŋhàʾ: pagkámaŋhàʾ a getting astonished 60(5).
naŋápamaŋhàʾ were astonished 52(18). 312(38).

maŋkòk (C.?) bowl 248(35).

maŋmàŋ ignorant 94(39).
kamaŋmaŋàn ignorance 82(24).

màpápasa, mápasa, see sa.

Marikína S. place-n. See báyan. [377]

Mariyà S. n. 70(11).

Mariyáno S. n. 54(1).

Màrkes S. family-n. 189(43).

Markíta S. n. 92(29).

-masìd: nagmámasìd is observing 100(21).
pagmamasìd an observing 272(25).
masdàn be looked at 20(32).
minàmasdàn is being looked at 252(17).
pagmasdàn be observed 255(42).
pinagmasdàn was scrutinized 18(4).
pagkámasìd a chance looking at, a glancing 168(33).
màmasdàn get looked at 88(7).
màmàmasdàn will get looked at 96(16).
nàmàmasdàn is visible 297(32).

masiyádo, see -siyádo.

Masòn S. freemason 56(12).

matà eye 20(27). See pilìk.
matà-matà trellis-work 223(41).
minámatà is being looked down on 30(3).
matáan be looked round for 254(31).
minatáan was looked round for 254(30).
kamatà congenial at sight 266(12).
mapaŋmatà given to looking down on people 18(19).
nàmatáan got espied 36(3).

-matày: ikamámatày will be the cause of dying 94(28).
ikinamatày was the cause of dying 186(15).
ipagkákamatày will be the cause of a part dying 272(34).
kinamatayàn was died in 38(23).
Kinamatayà-ŋ-kabáyo place-n. 221(30).
pagkàkamatayàn will be died in by some 275(13).
pinagkamatayàn was died in by some 275(10).
kamàtáyan death 94(34).
mamatày die 40(32).
mamámatày will die 32(1). 62(26).
namatày died 16(11).
naŋamatày pl. 286(16).
namámatày is dead 74(11).
pagkamatày a dying 22(3). 40(27).
mamatày-matày be able to die off 287(37).
namatayàn was died from 38(9).
namàmatayàn is died from 112(19).
magpápakamatày will commit suicide 309(23).
nagpakamatày committed suicide 309(22).
pagpapakamatày suicide 309(24).
himatày fainting-fit 314(25).
naghíhimatày is fainting 236(6).
paghihimatày a fainting 159(6).
himatayìn be attacked by a fainting-fit 208(5).
hinimatày was attacked by a fainting-fit 246(1).
ipinaghimatày was the cause of fainting 88(32). 250(3).

matsìŋ young monkey 110(9).
kamatsiŋàn monkey-tricks 276(32).

máy mé there is; having; about 16(8). 48. 69. 110. 138. 252. 331.
máy áriʾ: nagmèmé-áriʾ has ownership 40(13).
máy-roòn same as máy 18(25). 69. 110. 331.

-máyaw: magkàmáyaw harmonize 102(13). 270(41).

mayèstro, see maèstro.

Maynílaʾ place-n. 50(2). See báyan.

médiko S. physician 30(2).
médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam witch-doctor 42(21).

Migèl S. n. 255(33).

milágro S. miracle 74(32).
nagmìmilágro is working a miracle 104(23).

milagróso S. miraculous 74(29).

míle-nobisiyèntos-dòs S. 1902 34(27).

milòn S. melon 76(16).

mínsan once 16(2). 22(34). 39. 42. 262(10).
mínsanin be done all at once 246(5).
pamínsan-mínsan [378]once in a while 68(10).

mésa S. table 173(26).

mísa S. mass 50(37).
magmísa say mass 96(26).
nagmìmísa says mass 96(4).
pagmimísa a saying mass 96(18).
pagkamísa a having said mass 98(19).
makapagmísa be able to say mass 96(14).
magpamísa have mass said 72(29).
nagpamísa had mass said 72(25).
pagpapamísa a having mass said 80(25).

mìsmo S. himself 46(18). 72(29). 265(7).

mítiŋ E. meeting 236(18).

miyèrkules S. Wednesday 259(32).

mo disj. of ikàw: by thee; of thee 47. 163.

mukhàʾ face 24(23).
kamukhàʾ of the same appearance 266(14).

mulàʾ from 16(7). 284.
magmulàʾ start from 32(7). 284.
minulàn was begun 283(9).

muláwin a tree, molave, Vitex littoralis Decne 263(27).

mulìʾ again 18(35). 20(17). 148.

múna previously, first 40(6). 47. 222.

mundò S. world 50(18).

Mundò (S.) short-n. 96(38).

munisiliyò S. sacristan 253(16).

munisípiyo S. town-hall 36(42).

muntìʾ little 174(6).
kumuntìʾ what almost-ness 174(4).

múra (a) cheap 219(7).
minúra was scolded 90(38).
muráhan be done cheaply 252(20).
minuráhan was sold too cheaply 252(19).
pagmumùráhan a making things cheap 236(31).
kamuráhan cheapness 276(33).
pinakamúra cheapest 114(41).
—(b) With accent-shift: nagmurà cursed 32(38).
murahàn mutual reviling 260(16).
magmurahàn revile each other 236(34).
magmùmurahàn will curse each other 203(39).
nagmùmurahàn are reviling each other 236(35).
pagmumurahàn a mutual reviling 236(37).
kamurahàn one of two who curse at each other 278(22).

múraʾ unripe 22(38).

músika S. music 48(31). See bandà.

músiko S. musician 110(31).

-muòʾ: ipinagkákamuòʾ is the cause of partial hardening 272(37).

muwàŋ information 82(6).

[Contents]

N

(See also D, S, T.)

na ŋ m attributive 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 119. 122–159 and Syntax, passim.

nà already 18(39). 47. 223. 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244. 341(3,c). 342. 437.

nagígiŋ, see -gìŋ.

-nagínip: panagínip dream 225(13).
nanagínip dreamt 240(21).
nanànagínip is dreaming 240(20).
pananagínip a dreaming 240(17).
nàpanagínip was dreamt 297(22).

nagìŋ, see -gìŋ.

nákaw that stolen 221(9).
numákaw stole 32(39).
pagnákaw a stealing 104(1).
magnákaw commit theft 170(4). 244(17).
nagnákaw did some stealing 155(41).
pagnanákaw [379]thievery 38(2).
magnanákaw thief, robber 36(29).
nakáwin be stolen 102(24).
nànakáwin will be stolen 32(35).
ninákaw was stolen 32(36).
ninànákaw is being stolen 102(24).
pinagnakàw was variously stolen 120(32).
nakáwan be stolen from 234(8).
ninakáwan was stolen from 252(22).
nakawàn robbery 178(37).
nakapagnànákaw is able to commit thefts 102(17).
mànákaw get stolen 102(27).
nànákaw got stolen 102(27).
mànakáwan chance to be stolen from 24(3).
nànànakáwan chances to be stolen from 102(20).

namàn on the other hand, however 22(32). 47. 224.

námin, see ámin.

nánay mother 116(17). 59.
magnánay mother and child 242(15).
magnanánay pl. 242(31).

nàndon, see doòn.
—naŋ, see aŋ.

Narsíso S. n. 296(30).

nása, nàsása, see sa.
—nátin, see -átin.

-náog: manáog come down from one’s dwelling 264(23).
nanáog came down 38(16).
nanànáog is descending 100(25).
panáog come down 151(40).
pagpanáog a descending 302(20).
magsìsipanáog will descend, pl. 108(13).
nagsìsipanáog are descending 106(29).
pinanaúgan was come down from 308(18).

nawàʾ, see áwaʾ.
—ni, see si.

nì S. nor; any, and, and not 22(22). 48. 68. 253. 319.

nilà, see silà and sinà.
—ninà, see sinà.
—niniyò, see iniyò.
—níno, see síno.

niŋnìŋ glow 40(16).
nagníniŋnìŋ glows 40(15).

nirè, see irè.
—nità, see kità.
—nitò, see itò.
—niyà, see siyà.
—niyàn, see iyàn.
—niyáyaʾ, see yáyaʾ.

niyòg cocoanut 24(1).
See púnoʾ,
niyúgan cocoanut-grove 259(3).

niyòn, see iyòn.

nobéla S. novel 86(19).

nóbiyo S. fiancé 92(31).

núnoʾ ghost 34(32).

-noòd: nanúnoòd is looking on 48(36).
nagsísipanoòd pl. 48(29).
panunoòd a looking on 296(37).
panoorìn be looked at 108(29).
pinanónoòd is being looked at 108(32).

noòn, see iyòn.

[Contents]

Ŋ

(See also K.)

ŋ, see na.

ŋàʾ indeed, please 40(21). 47. 226. 229.

ŋálan name 156(11).
paŋálan id. 26(16).

ŋayòn now, today 28(7). 262(11). 302.

-ŋitìʾ: ŋumíŋitìʾ is smiling 228(26).
nàŋìŋitìʾ is asmile 92(28).

-ŋiyàw: ŋumiyàw mewed 84(27).

ŋúnit but 30(6). 320. 322.

[Contents]

P (F)

pà still, yet, more 24(16). 47. 226. 243. 248. 314.

paà foot, leg 18(15).
Paà-ŋ-bundòk place-n. 118(25).
pinaahàn [380]was caught by the leg, hurt in the leg 252(25).
paanàn be turned the feet to 252(29). base, foot 98(40).
pinaanàn was turned the feet to 252(27).
paánan base, foot 90(30).

Páblo S. n. 283(22).

padèr S. wall 52(11).

-padpàd: nápadpàd was cast by chance 96(2).

pag when, if 32(13). 45. 300. 303.

pagakpàk applause 219(41).
pagakpakàn be applauded 197(36).
pàgakpákan applause by many 257(40).

pagigìŋ, see -gìŋ.

pagítan place between, interval 258(31). 271(17).
pumagítan took position between 228(26).
pamamagítan an acting as means 24(33). 38(34).
ipinagítan was placed between 248(25).
nàpàpagítan is between 171(21).

pagkà as soon as, after, when 181(27). 48. 296. 300. 304. 306.

pagkìt wax 221(11).

págod weariness 76(1).
pagòd tired 66(33).

pagòŋ turtle 16(1).

Páhoʾ place-n. 120(11).

páin bait 108(14).
pagpapáin a catching with bait 108(39).

pákay purpose, aim 50(33).

pákoʾ nail 218(38).
páko ŋ babàʾ: mapagpáko-m-babàʾ over-modest 289(28).
pakuàn nailing-place 260(20).
nàpàpákoʾ is nailed 20(24).

pakuwàn watermelon 203(37).

palà but otherwise 209(25). 47. 228. 301.

pálaʾ gift, prize, favor 90(12). See gantì.

pálad palm of hand 106(37). See kasamaàn, kasawiàn, sawìʾ.
nagkapálad had good fortune 34(3). 78(38).
nagkàkapálad has the good fortune 40(24).
kapaláran fortune 60(17).

palakàʾ frog 228(11).

palakòl hatchet 240(5).

palànsa plànsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32). 227(42).
pinalànsa was ironed 244(30).

palásiyo S. palace 26(26).

palatòn S. dish 193(3).

pálay rice, standing or in hull 163(19). See bantày, tánod.

palayòk earthenware pot 74(5).

palibhásaʾ for the reason, because 54(20). 265(8).

palìt exchange 148(26).
pinalitàn was supplanted 104(12).

páloʾ hit, strike 183(25).
pamáloʾ club, cudgel 70(16).
palúin be caned 195(35).
ikinàpáloʾ was the cause of getting thrashed 273(34).
pagkàpáloʾ a thrashing that was got 272(16).

páloŋ comb of rooster 291(16).

famíliya S. family 54(4).

Pampàŋga S. place-n. 173(9). See lalawígan, provìnsiya.

pánaʾ arrow 228(28).
pumánaʾ shot an arrow at 228(28).
pinánaʾ was shot with an arrow 244(31).
nakàpánaʾ chanced to hit with an arrow 291(32).

panahòn time 34(25). 50(5). 52(32).

-pánaw: pumánaw departed 228(29).
pumàpánaw is departing 92(25).
pagpánaw a departing 114(17).
pinanáwan was parted from 92(27). [381]

panày constant 72(20). 82(6).
kapanayàn continuance 276(34).

-panhìk: pumanhìk entered (a dwelling), went up into (a house) 38(27). 72(8).
pumápanhìk is entering 106(9).
pinanhikàn was entered 175(41).
mápanhìk get in 106(15).
pagkápanhìk a getting in 72(9).
pinapanhikàn was caused to be entered 52(14).

paníki bat 210(26). See báhay.

paniyò S. handkerchief 147(1).

pansìn noticeable 219(8).
pansinìn be paid attention to 46(1).
pàpansinìn will be minded 96(35).
pinansìn was paid attention to 20(41). 94(2).
pinápansìn is being paid attention to 54(19).
nàpàpansìn gets noticed 100(19).

pantày leveled 223(32).
pantày-kawáyan height of a bamboo-plant 218(28).
pantày-pantày even, all level 118(30). 291(5).
kapantày of the same height 173(28).
magkapantày both of the same height 270(3).
kasiŋpantày id. 104(6). 315(1).

páno, see anò.
—panukálaʾ, see akálaʾ.

panòt bald-headed 219(10).

-paŋàw: nakapaŋàw is pilloried 110(5).
naŋàpàpaŋàw have got into the pillory 110(9).

paŋinoòn master 62(39). 86(31). 226(3).

paŋkàt group, team 46(34). 76(21). 110(31).
paŋkàt-paŋkàt group by group 110(30).

paŋnàn hand-basket 261(40).

paŋpàŋ bank of stream 28(13).
Kapampáŋan Pampanga 189(23).
Kakapampaŋánan the Pampanga country 277(12).

papáno, see anò.
—pápasa, see sa.

papáya S. papaw 163(18).

papèl S. paper 50(39).

pára like 36(12). 67. 275.

parà pára S. for 90(11). 286. 288.

páraŋ forest 62(29).
kaparáŋan wooded regions 82(36).

páriʾ S. priest, Father 20(4). 256.

parého S. equal 257(42).
paré-parého all equal 40(13). 224(1).

Parìs S. Paris 220(31).

partè S. part 82(21).
kapartè share 16(6).

-parò: parù-parò butterfly 88(24).

pása, see sa.

pasàʾ bruise 62(27).

pásak that calked with 221(10).
pasakàn calking-place 260(23).

pasàn that carried on the shoulders 98(36).
pumápasàn carries on the shoulders 22(32).
pàpasanìn will be carried on the shoulder 104(34).
pinasàn was carried on the shoulder 104(38).

Pasífiko S. Pacific 259(1).

Pásig the Pasig; see ílog.

pasígan beach 16(4).

-pasiyàl (S.): magpasiyàl take a walk 32(2).
magsipagpasiyàl pl. 32(13).
magpápasiyàl will take a walk 232(28).
magsísipagpasiyàl pl. 32(15).
nagpasiyàl took a walk 182(7).
nagsipagpasiyàl pl. 279(1).
nakapagpasiyàl was able to take a walk 200(14).
papasí-pasiyàl walking about at intervals 96(6).

-pasiyènsiya S.: magpasiyènsiya rest content 56(8). [382]

-paséyo S.: nagpàpaséyo forms a procession 48(40).

paskò S. Easter; Christmas 220(24).

pastòl (S.) herdsman 116(7).

pásoʾ a burn 220(1).
pasòʾ burnt; pottery 222(40).
pumásoʾ burned 228(30).
mamásoʾ a blister 241(39). 244(12).
namásoʾ scorched 240(21).
napásoʾ has been burned 284(41).

-pások: pumások go in, enter 78(30). went in 30(17). 38(31). 50(19).
pumàpások enters 42(13).
pàpások will go in 192(5).
pagpások a going in 42(12). 96(26).
pasúkin be violently entered 262(19).
pinások was illicitly entered 237(41).
pinàpások is being penetrated 118(30).
pinasúkan was entered 36(36).
makapások be able to enter 74(31).
makapàpások will be able to enter 22(4).
nakapások was able to enter 80(2). 116(21).
pagkapások a having gone in 38(32).
pagkàpások the way of getting put in 291(11).
màipások get put in 108(41).
nàpasúkan chanced to be come upon in entering 297(37).
papások going in; asking to be taken in; ask to be taken in 204(22). 299(29). 301(24).
papàpások will ask to be taken in 301(40).
pagpapapások a causing to enter 272(39).
papasúkin be caused to enter 72(26). 80(30).
mapapàpások will ask to be taken in 311(34).
napapások caused himself to be taken in; was able to be caused to enter 311(23.32).

-pátag: ikinàpátag chanced to be the cause of staying quiet 116(11).

patàk a drop 96(29).

patày dead person 20(8). 38(25).
pamatày used for killing 225(15).
pamatày-kúto louse-killer, thumb 225(15).
pumatày (arch. matày) kill 231(2).
pagpatày a killing 227(4).
patayìn pataìn be killed 84(22).
pàpatayìn pàpataìn will be killed 28(20). 44(16).
pinatày was killed 244(33).
patayàn be killed for 252(32).
pinagpatayàn was killed in 274(31).
pàtáyan mortal combat; slaughter-house 190(15). 259(3).
kapàpatayàn will be the place of killing 279(18).
kapàtáyan one of two who kill each other 277(42).
mapatày be able to be killed 283(35).
napatày has been killed 284(14).
pagkapatày a having killed 282(35).
mápatày get killed 36(19). 293(42).
màpàpatày will get killed 18(12).
nápatày got killed 26(12). 38(3). 84(28).
pagkápatày a chance killing 291(12). 292(15).
ipinapápatày is being caused to be extinguished 122(6).

patì also, even 110(34). 112(20). 68. 305.

patìd a breaking, an interruption 42(4). 44(42). 58(1). broken 223(33).
pumatìd break, tr. 228(31).
kapatìd broken from the same piece; brother, sister 32(8). 266(16).
kapatìd-koŋkristiyános brother-Christians 50(22). 210(16).
magkapatìd two brothers or sisters, brother and sister 46(20).
magkakapatìd pl. 270(14).
kinákapatìd child of one’s godparents 271(30).
magkinákapatìd two people, one of whom is the child of [383]the other’s godparents 271(31).
magkikinákapatìd pl. 271(32).
kapàpatiràn will be the place of breaking 274(29).
kinapatiràn was the place of breaking 274(27).
kapàtíran one of two who break together 277(43).
mapatìd break off, cease 60(9).
napatìd broke off 78(16).
napatiràn was broken in, suffered a fracture 88(28).

patìs shrimp-sauce 259(5).
patisàn be spiced with shrimp-sauce 252(33).
pàtísan cannery for shrimp-sauce 259(5).

pátiyo S. court-yard 98(20).

Patrísiyo S. n. 275(28).

patrúliya S. patrol 122(20).

páto S. duck 116(38).

patumaŋgàʾ regard, consideration 22(24).

-pátuŋ: nàpàpátuŋ is placed on 116(1).

Patúpat derisive n. 50(3).

-páwiʾ: pawìʾ allayed 222(42).
nakapàpáwiʾ will allay 28(35). 280(37).
napáwiʾ has subsided 279(34).

páwid nipa fibre 30(37).

-páwis: pumàpáwis is sweating 22(8).

-páyag: pumáyag consent 30(5). consented 18(29).
pumàpáyag consents 228(34).
ipináyag was granted 248(26).
pinayágan was agreed to 252(33).

payápaʾ tranquil 219(11).
kapayapaàn tranquility 116(9).

páyo advice 52(24).
ipináyo was suggested 28(36).

páyoŋ umbrella 166(27).

Pédro S. n. 20(2).

pígil that restrained 134(28).
pigìl under control 223(1).
nagsipígil controlled, pl. 282(14).
pigílin be brought under control 66(23).
nàpigílan got restrained 66(17). 100(36).

-píhit: pumìpíhit turns round 68(10).

pího surely 18(11).
piního was ascertained 44(33).

piklàt scar 219(9).

pìknik E. picnic 235(34).

píko S. a pick 58(33).

-píliʾ: pumíliʾ chose 228(34).
mamíliʾ choose out 16(24).
namíliʾ selected 186(20).
piníliʾ was chosen 244(34).
màpíliʾ get chosen 241(34).
nàpìpíliʾ is preferred 293(21).

pilìk fin, lash 210(30). Corrigenda.
pilìk-matà eyelash 210(30). Corrigenda.
pilikàn have the fins removed 252(34).

píliŋ side, proximity 90(8).

Felípe S. n. 208(1).

Filipínas S. the Philippines 40(2). See kapuluàn.

-pílit: pumílit effected by trying hard 228(37).
pumìpílit is trying hard 228(35).
pagpílit a trying hard 64(1).
nagpílit tried very hard 44(5). 50(14).
nagpìpílit tries very hard 44(20). 234(17).
nagpùpumílit is making an extreme effort 168(14). 235(32).
pilítin be striven for 18(17). 184(35).
pinílit was compelled 244(35).
pagpilítan was striven for 297(2).
napìpilítan is compelled 112(28).

pelóta S. ball 48(11).

pínsan cousin 39. 42.
magpipínsan group of cousins 242(32).

pintà S. paint, painting 219(12).
[384]pintahàn be painted 252(35).
pintáhan place for paint; see báhay.

pintàs that found fault with 221(13).
pintasàn be found fault with 252(36).
pintásan mutual fault-finding 257(42).
kapintásan reprehensible quality 310(40).

pintòʾ door 78(30). See bantày.
pintúan doorway 22(2).

piŋgà carrying-pole 158(12).

piŋgàn dishes 114(7).

pípa S. cigarette-mouthpiece 249(29).

Pépe S. short-n. 279(5).

pípe dumb 86(23).
napípe became dumb 285(28).
pagkapípe dumbness 86(23).

pipíno S. cucumber 76(16).

pipìt stone-sparrow 197(21).

péras S. pears 189(16).

piráso (S.) piece broken off
piráso-ŋ-káhoy piece of wood 56(38).
piráso-ŋ-lamàn piece of meat 108(42) Corrigenda.
pirasúhin be broken off 252(6).
mapiráso go to pieces 300(19).
napiráso went to pieces 284(42).

pirìnsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32).
pinirìnsa was ironed 223(4).

Píro (S.) n., for Pédro. 138(28).

píso S. peso, half-dollar 102(38).

-pitàg: pìtágan respect 118(9).
pinagpìpìtagánan is being respected 256(8).

pítak section 247(11).
pinítak section of rice-field 247(10).

-pitàs: pumitàs pick, pluck 22(35). picked 282(40).
pitasìn be picked 244(36).
pìpitasìn will be picked 22(37).
pamìmitasìn will be picked selectively, in quantity 247(2).
pinamímitàs is being gathered 246(42).
pitasàn be picked from 252(37).
pamitasàn be gathered from 256(36).
pamìmitasàn will be gathered from 256(38).
nagpìtásan picked together 236(17).
napitàs has been picked 284(43).
nápitàs got picked 293(22).
nàpìpitàs is picked 24(16).

pitìk fillip 225(14).
pamitìk single rein 72(1).
pumitìk give a fillip 228(37).

Pétra S. n. 240(29).

fétsa S. date 271(16).

pitsòn S. pigeon 252(32).

píto S. small flute, whistle 227(39).

pitò seven 20(5). 67.
pitò ŋ pùʾ: pamitò-ŋ-pùʾ number seventy 225(42).
pamitò number seven 225(38).
ikapitò seventh 32(4).

piyáno S. piano 167(21).

fiyèsta piyèsta S. fiesta 98(35). 137(37).
kapiyestáhan holiday 110(11).

plànsa, see palànsa.

Pransìsko S. n. 50(20).

presidènte S. magistrate 38(1).

-prubà S.: prubahàn be proved 52(3).
pùprubahàn will be proved 52(4).

provìnsiya S. province 50(1).
provìnsiya-ŋ-Pampàŋga Pampanga province 210(29).

pòʾ deferential particle 20(37). 47. 229.

pùʾ ten 38(6). 134. See isà, dalawà, etc.

púgad nest 228(9).

-pukpòk: pamukpòk mallet 90(30).
pumúpukpòk is pounding 228(38).

pukòl a throw 106(36).
pagpukòl a throwing 281(35).
magpupukòl [385]throw repeatedly 238(38).
pinúpukòl is being thrown at 112(8).
mapamukòl given to throwing things 289(39).

pulà red, redness 147(1).
pulahàn all red 261(12).
kapulà what redness 173(40).

Polikàrpiyo S. family-n. 189(43).

polìs S. policeman 34(26).

pùlpito S. pulpit 20(28).

pulòʾ island 255(14).
kapuluàn kapuluwàn archipelago 24(30).
kapuluà-ŋ-Filipínas the Philippine archipelago 56(24).

pulúbe beggar 72(30).

púloŋ crowd 229(13).

púlot that picked up 221(15).
namúlot gathered up 32(23).
mámumulòt gleaner 243(17).
pinamúlot was picked up selectively, in quantity 247(3).
pinulútan was picked up in 252(38).
pùlútan a scramble 259(33).
nàpúlot got picked up 62(30).
nàpùpúlot gets picked up 40(8).

pulòt honey 174(7).

-púnas: nagpùpúnas is scrubbing 232(29).
pinùpunásan is being scrubbed 252(40).

púnit small hole, tear 169(2).
punìt-punìt full of small holes 259(6).

-punlàʾ: punláan germinating-plot 243(40).

punsò ant-hill 66(1).

puntà S. direction of going 106(2).
nagsipuntà went to, pl. 116(18).
púpuntà will go to 193(24).
nagsísipuntà are going to 108(1).
pagpuntà a going toward 104(35). 106(4). 116(20).
puntahàn be gone to 40(9).
pinuntahàn was gone toward 32(20).
papuntà towards 84(36).
napapúpuntà is able to be directed 48(10).

púnoʾ head: of wood (i. e. tree) 16(8).
of grass (i. e. blade) 76(31).
of bridge 248(16).
stem end of fruit 203(38).
chief 306(11).
beginning 50(15).
púno-ŋ-damò blade of grass 76(29).
púno-ŋ-káhoy tree 34(39).
púno-ŋ-maŋgà mango-tree 254(37).
púno-ŋ-niyòg cocoanut-tree 22(34).
púno-ŋ-ságiŋ banana-tree 16(3).
púno-ŋ-súhaʾ grape-fruit-tree 36(34).
pinúnoʾ chief, official 56(27). 116(22).
pàmunúan initiator 262(7).

punòʾ filled, full 36(40). 76(30).
punàn be completed, be added to 252(41).
pùnúan all full 118(21). 258(1).
napunòʾ became full 26(9).

purgà S. purge 230(11).

purgatóriyo S. purgatory 50(17).

púri honor, respectability 94(12). See kasiraàn.
nagpúri an honoring 48(38). 60(9).
nagpurihàn praised one another 236(39).
nagpùpurihàn are praising one another 236(41).
mapúri honorable 289(8).
nagmápurì praised himself 238(25).
nagmàmàpurì is praising himself 238(25).
pagmamápurì praising oneself 238(26).
nagpakamápurì praised himself much 309(28).

Port-Àrtur S. Port Arthur 306(19).

-puròl: mapuròl dull 225(6).
mapúpuròl will get dull 248(31).

púsaʾ cat 84(1).

pustà S. a bet 60(29).
nagsipustà made a bet, pl. 60(34).
pustáhan a betting together 60(33). 102(40).[386]
nakipagpustáhan entered into a bet with 102(34).

púsoʾ heart 218(24).

-putàk: nagpúpuputàk is cackling much 238(40).
pùtákan cackling by many 238(10).
palapùtákin given to cackling 315(10).

fùtbol E. football 46(35).

putìʾ white 219(12).
pàputiìn be made too white 305(12).
pàputiàn be made very white 308(39).

pútik mud, clay 86(37).
putíkan be made muddy 253(1).
putikàn muddy place, person, thing; clay-pit 166(19). 260(24).
mapútik muddy 110(14).

púto cake, bun 32(15).

putòk crash, report 259(34).
pumutòk made a crash; there was a crash 64(31).
pinùputukàn is reached by a crash 106(33).

pútol a cut; that cut 220(2). 221(16).
p. naŋ p. cuts and cuts 222(10).
putòl cut 223(3).
putòl-putòl all cut up 224(16).
pamútol used for cutting 225(16).
pumútol cut 154(4). 199(27). 226(26).
magsipútol cut, pl. 262(26).
nagsipútol cut, did cut, pl. 190(22).
pumùpútol is cutting 228(39).
nagsìsipútol pl. 262(24).
pùpútol will cut 228(40).
magsìsipútol pl. 191(8).
pagpútol a cutting 196(34).
magpútol cut several things, cut on oneself 228(21).
magsipagpútol pl. 262(38).
magpùpútol will cut 234(21).
magsìsipagpútol pl. 262(41).
nagpútol cut 234(24).
nagsipagpútol pl. 263(2).
nagpùpútol is cutting 202(14).
nagsìsipagpútol pl. 263(3).
pagpupútol a cutting 234(19).
magputòl cut variously or repeatedly, cut up 237(37).
magpúputòl will cut 237(38).
nagputòl cut 237(40).
nagpúputòl is cutting 237(42).
nagpúpuputòl is cutting to bits 239(9).
magpuputòl cutter 243(1).
mamútol cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 220(21).
magsipamútol pl. 263(24).
mamùmútol will cut 240(29).
magsìsipamútol pl. 263(26).
namútol cut 240(27).
namùmútol is cutting 240(27).
mámumutòl cutter 243(18).
pamumútol a cutting 240(23).
putúlin be cut 244(42).
pùputúlin will be cut 58(27). 207(5).
pinútol was cut, cut off, stopped 38(34). 44(26). 154(10).
pinùpútol is being cut 58(36). 248(34).
pagputulìn be cut up 246(27).
pinagpúputòl is being cut up 246(25).
ipútol be cut for 248(29).
ipùpútol will be cut for 248(29).
ipinútol was cut for or with 154(15). 175(31). 248(28).
ipinùpútol is being cut for or with 181(15). 202(6).
ipagpútol be cut for 249(26).
ipagpùpútol will be cut for 249(27).
ipinagpútol was cut for or with 249(28).
ipinagpùpútol is being cut for or with 249(29).
ipamútol be used for cutting 250(17).
ipinamútol was used for cutting 250(13).
ipinamùmútol is being cut with or for, in quantity 187(13). 250(14).
putúlan putlàn be cut from 253(5).
pùputúlan pùputlàn will be cut from 253(7).
pinutúlan was cut from 118(28). 154(20).
pinùputlàn is being cut from 60(1). 253(3).
pagputúlan be cut on 256(1).
pagputulàn be cut from variously 256(13).
pinamutúlan was cut from selectively [387]or in quantity 158(10). 256(40).
pinamùmutúlan is being cut from 256(33).
nagputulàn cut together 236(43).
pakipútol that cut with others or as a favor 184(3). 263(40).
makipútol cut by permission 264(12).
makìkipútol will cut along with others 206(11).
nakipútol cut by permission 264(8).
nakìkipútol is cutting by permission 264(10).
pakikipútol a cutting by permission 264(13).
pakikipamútol a cutting, as occupation, by permission 264(39).
pakiputúlin be cut as a favor 264(43).
ipakipútol be cut as a favor 184(1).
ipakìkipútol will be asked to be cut 265(13).
ipakipagpútol be cut with as a favor 265(19).
ipakìkipagpútol will be cut for as a favor 265(23).
ipinakipagpútol was asked to be cut for 265(25).
ipinakìkipagpútol is being asked to be cut for 172(26). 265(28).
kapútol piece; brother, sister 16(5). 266(16).
magkapútol two such 270(5).
magkakapútol pl. 270(16).
kàkapútol only a piece 267(6).
kapùpútol there has just been cutting 267(17).
kapagpùpútol there has just been cutting of several things 267(20).
kapàpamútol there has just been cutting in quantity 267(23).
magkaputòl get broken in numbers 182(22).
magkákaputòl will many of them get broken 269(10).
nagkaputòl got broken in numbers 269(11).
nagkákaputòl is breaking in numbers 269(13).
magkáputòl-putòl break into many pieces 255(21).
magkàkàputòl-putòl will break into many pieces 271(23).
nagkáputòl-putòl broke into many pieces 271(19).
nagkàkàputòl-putòl gets mangled 271(21).
ikapútol be the cause of breaking 158(12).
ikapùpútol will be the cause of breaking or involuntary cutting 272(19).
ikinapútol was the cause of breaking 272(15).
ikinapùpútol is the cause of breaking 272(17).
ipagkaputòl be the cause of breaking in numbers 273(9).
ipinagkaputòl was the cause of breaking in numbers 273(11).
ipinagkákaputòl is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7).
kapùtúlan one of two who cut together 278(10).
makapútol be able to cut 269(7).
makapùpútol will be able to cut 281(41).
nakapútol has cut 282(22).
nakapùpútol is able to cut 281(39).
mapútol have been cut, be able to be cut 38(35). 60(4). 283(37).
mapùpútol will be able to be cut 283(38).
napútol has been cut, was cut 261(26).
naŋapútol pl. 286(17).
napùpútol has just been cut, is cut 284(15). 285(1).
naŋapùpútol pl. 286(19).
pagkapútol a having cut 282(37).
makapagpútol be able to cut several things 286(43).
nakapagpútol has cut 286(41).
nakapagpùpútol is able to cut 286(42).
maputúlan be cut from 185(21).
mapùputúlan will be cut from 288(13).
naputúlan was cut from 288(9).
napùputúlan is cut from 288(10).
napagputúlan was able to be cut on 288(26).
makàpútol chance to cut 290(28).
makàpùpútol will chance to cut 290(30).
nakàpútol chanced to cut 24(34). 290(20).
nakàpùpútol is by chance cutting 290(23).
màpútol get cut 294(3).
[388]màpùpútol will get cut 294(5).
nàpútol got cut 293(24.43). 294(2).
nàpùpútol gets cut, is cut 201(30).
pagkàpútol the way cutting got done 291(15).
màputúlan get cut from 238(2).
màpùputúlan will get cut from 297(41).
nàputúlan got cut from 297(38).
nàpùputúlan gets cut from 297(39).
papútol that caused to be cut 299(15).
paputòl transversely 166(21).
kapàpapútol there has just been causing to cut 301(11).
kapagpàpapútol there has just been causing to cut several things 301(13).
papùpútol will ask to have cut 302(2).
magpapútol cause to be cut 225(1).
magpàpapútol will cause to be cut 191(6).
nagpapútol caused to be cut 303(13).
nagpàpapútol is causing to be cut 303(14).
pagpapapútol a causing to be cut 303(15).
paputúlin be caused to be cut 304(39).
papùputúlin will be caused to cut 304(40).
pinapútol was caused to cut 153(23).
pinapùpútol is being caused to cut 304(37).
papagputúlin be caused to cut on oneself 305(23).
papagpùputúlin will be caused to cut several things 305(24).
pinapagpútol was caused to cut 181(27).
pinapagpùpútol is being caused to cut 181(16).
papamutúlin be caused to cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 305(35).
papamùmutúlin will be caused to cut 305(36).
ipapútol be caused to be cut 306(25).
ipapùpútol will be caused to be cut 306(23).
ipinapútol was caused to be cut 204(10).
ipinapùpútol is being caused to be cut 306(22).
ipakipapútol be asked to be caused to be cut 307(29).
ipakìkipapútol will be asked to be caused to be cut 307(32).
ipinakipapútol was asked to be caused to be cut 307(34).
paputúlan be caused to be cut from 308(24).
papùputúlan will be caused to be cut from 308(25).
pinaputúlan was caused to be cut from 308(19).
pinapùputúlan is being caused to be cut from 308(22).
makapagpapútol be able to cause to be cut 311(12).
makàkapagpapútol will be able to cause to be cut 311(15).
nakapagpapútol has been caused to be cut 311(8).
nakàkapagpapútol is able to cause to be cut 311(10).
napapútol asked to be cut for 311(38).
napapùpútol asks to be cut for 311(40).
palaputulìn brittle 315(21).
tagapútol person whose duty it is to cut 315(32).

poòk place, district 40(2).

poòn lord, saint 104(5). 182(40).
pinópoòn is being worshipped 189(3).

-puwàʾ, see kápuwàʾ.

-púyat: nagpúyat staid up, watched 232(30).
nagpuyàt repeatedly staid up 238(1).
pagpupuyàt a repeated staying up 297(7).
namùmúyat keeps from sleeping, keeps up 240(31).
pinúyat was kept up late 245(2).

[Contents]

S.

sa loc. particle 16(2). 45. 49. 195–212. 306. 515.
sa lawà: sà-lawáhan fickle 94(1). 259(20).
sa ulèʾ: pagsa-ulàn be returned to 62(12). [389]72(13).
pinagsa-ulàn was returned to 44(25). 256(7).
nása is in 18(22). 314(7).
naŋása pl. 118(35).
násàsa is being in 36(16). 44(1).
pása go to 20(18). 314(9).
pápàsa will go to 314(10).
mápasa get to 94(4).
mápàpasa will get to 314(15).
nápasa went by chance 116(30). 279(4).
nápàpasa comes by chance to 106(26).
pagkápasa a chance coming to 60(21). 314(16).

sà, see isà.

saàn loc. of anò: where? to what? 42(14). 64(37). 316(34). 264.

-sabàd: isinabàd was said in interruption, was thrust in 102(22).

-sabày: sabày-sabày all at the same time 224(2).
sinabayàn was accompanied 82(32).
pagkakásabày a happening at the same time 270(42).

sábi that said 24(8). 74(36). 198(12). 276.
sabì-sabì chance talk 116(10). 120(9).
nagsábi said 26(14). 36(29).
nagsipagsábi pl. 26(5).
nagsàsábi is saying 156(40).
pagsasábi a saying 155(24).
sabíhin be said 30(15). 50(24).
sàsabíhin will be said 20(11). 30(14).
sinábi was said 16(17).
sinàsábi is being said 96(9).
pinagsabì was variously said 156(13).
pinagsabì-sabì was repeatedly said 246(34).
ipinagsábi was told about 249(35).
pinagsabíhan was told, was ordered 20(15). 32(26).
kasabihàn proverb 276(11).
pagkasábi a having said 70(28).
makapagsábi be able to tell 52(9).
nakapagsábi was able to tell 76(25).
màsàsábi will get said 92(37).
pagkàsábi a getting said 80(1). 100(36).

-sábit: sabitàn clothes-rack 258(38).
nakasábit is hanging (from a nail, peg, etc.) 281(4).

-sábog: nagsábog strewed 16(20).
nàsàsábog is lying scattered 90(30). 108(19).
naŋàsábog got scattered, pl. 293(40).

sabòn S. soap 184(34).

-sáboŋ: paŋsáboŋ used for cock-fighting 297(42).
pagsasáboŋ cock-fighting 312(17).
sabuŋàn cockpit, cock-fight 304(1).
sabuŋéro cock-fighter 98(21). 316(11).

-sabuwàt: kasabuwàt accomplice 298(19).

sáboy a sprinkling 68(3).
sumàsáboy is splashing, intr. 228(41).
pagsáboy sprinkling 68(40).
nagsàsáboy is scattering 68(9).
isináboy was sprinkled 268(11).
sinàsabúyan is being sprinkled at 68(24).
napàpasáboy falls scattering 70(4).

sadiyàʾ that come for 38(26). 78(28). 221(18)
magsadiyàʾ go for one’s purpose 74(28).
nagsadiyàʾ went for his purpose 74(33).
sinadiyàʾ was done intentionally 233(36).
sinásadiyàʾ is being done intentionally 62(13). 98(32).

sagàd close-cropped 219(13).

-sagásaʾ: sumagásaʾ knock, jostle 229(1).
sagasáin be hit upon, be conflicted with 245(3).
sinagasáan was bumped into 22(24).
nagsàgasaán jostled each other 237(1).
pagsasàgasaàn a jostling each other 237(1).
màsagasáan get run into 271(22).
nàsagasáan got run into 297(43). [390]

ságiŋ banana 16(8). See púnoʾ.
sagíŋan banana-grove 250(40).

sagitsìt sizzling 114(10).

sagòt that answered 26(23). 44(15).
sumagòt answer 44(10). answered 26(1).
sumásagòt answers 44(2).
sinagòt was given an answer 191(41).
isinagòt was said in reply 16(18).
makasagòt be able to answer 76(4).
nakasagòt was able to answer 68(21).

saguwàn a paddle 261(41).
sumaguwàn paddled 229(1).
pagsaguwàn a paddling 82(12).

sahìg flooring, floor 114(43).
isinásahìg is being used as flooring 248(32).

-sáhod: sumáhod hold under 229(1).
isáhod be held under 248(34).

-sáiŋ: magsáiŋ cook rice dry 232(30).
sináiŋ ration of rice, not yet served 229(8).

sakàʾ then, afterwards 52(30). 68(21). 243.

-sakàl: pagsakàl choking 227(5).

sakatéro S. grass-cutter 96(2).

sakày person carried in a vehicle 80(36).
paŋsakày used for riding or driving 225(18).
sumakày mount, ride 72(1). mounted 52(37).
sumásakày is mounting, is getting on or in (a vehicle) 229(2).
pagsakày mounting, riding 70(40). 167(41).
nagsakày took into a vehicle 234(25).
pagsasakày a taking into a vehicle 272(2).
isinakày was put on a vehicle 306(16).
ipinagsakày was taken into a vehicle 249(37).
sakyàn be embarked in 253(10).
sinakyàn was ridden in 253(9).
sinàsakyàn is being ridden in 82(32).
sàkáyan embarkation by many 258(3).
sasakyàn vehicle 219(35).
nakíkisakày embarks along with others 98(18).
ikinásakày was the cause of chance mounting 273(36).
nakasakày has mounted, is mounted 100(23). 281(15).
nakasásakày is able to mount 281(43).
pagkasakày a past mounting, ability to mount 282(12.39).
nasakyàn was able to be mounted 228(16).
násakày got put on a vehicle 294(28).
nàsàsakày is in a vehicle 114(22).
pagkásakày a chance mounting or riding 292(17). 294(36). 295(41).
nàsakyàn got mounted 298(1).
pasakày that caused to be taken into a vehicle 299(17). in riding position, astride 299(30).
nagpasakày caused to be put on a vehicle 268(25).
pagpapasakày a causing to be put on a vehicle 303(17).
ipinasakày was caused to be put on a vehicle 306(26).
ipinagpasakày was caused to be used for riding 307(21).
pinasakyàn was caused to be mounted 308(28).
ipinagkápasakày was the cause of causing to ride 310(18).

sakdàl accusation 54(36).
isinakdàl was charged 56(12).
ipinagsakdàl was accused 54(31).

-sakìm: kasakimàn selfishness 28(34). 74(20).

sákit (a) grief 223(20).
pasákit suffering caused 42(43).
nagpasákit caused suffering to be undergone 303(20).
ipinasákit was caused to be suffered 22(7).
pinasàsakítan is being caused to suffer 40(40).
—(b) Accent shifted: sakìt pain, sickness 30(28). 42(3). [391]223(18).
sumakìt hurt, injure 188(30).
sinàsaktàn is being hurt 60(1). 70(15).
nagkasakìt got sick 54(7). 78(24).
pagkakasakìt a getting sick 269(8).
ipinagkasakìt was the cause of getting sick 273(14).
nakasakìt cause injury 313(32).
masakìt sore 40(41). 281(31).
masaktàn be hurt 206(24).
masàsaktàn will be hurt 204(2).
nasaktàn got hurt 264(25).
palasàkítin one who easily gets sick 315(14).

sáko S. sack 104(15).

-sákop: sakòp included 290(31).
pagsákop an including, a saving 306(42).
mànanákop savior 20(33).
nasàsákop is included, is under control 116(31).

sála failure, offense 38(2).
sumála fail, miss, 64(42). failed 229(4).
saláhan be omitted, skipped 253(11).
saŋlàn be missed 253(14).
sinaŋlàn was missed 253(12).
nagkàsála sinned against 271(1).
pagkakàsála a sinning against 290(1).
kasalánan sin 20(32). 98(7).
makasalánan 22(1). 74(22). 289(22).
pagkasála a having missed 272(10). 286(3).

salakàb fish-trap 243(7).
mánanalakàb fish-trapper 243(7).

-salákay: pagsalákay an attacking 122(10).
pananalákay a repeated attacking 122(23).
sinalakáyan was attacked 122(9).

salakòt rain-hat of palm-leaves 212(22).

salamaŋkà S. sleight-of-hand trick 202(37).

salámat thanks 16(32). 152(4).
magpasalámat give thanks, thank 160(15).
napasalámat was thankful 88(16).

salamìn glass, looking-glass, eye-glass 60(7). 238(39). n. of dog 147(22).

salapìʾ money; half-dollar 30(27). 252(41).

salàt needy 219(14).
kasalatàn lack 239(35).

salawàl trousers 122(1).

-salaysày: isinalaysày was narrated 38(5).

salbáhi S. savage, brutal; brute 44(4). 50(17). 70(25).
kasalbahíhan brutality 54(28).

-sáli: isáli be taken along, be included 248(37).
isináli was included 248(36).
kasáli participant 22(18). 48(5).
nàkasáli got taken as companion 296(28).
makàsáli chance to take part 114(28).

salitàʾ word, speech 18(13). 20(41).
magsalitàʾ speak 28(39). 80(37).
nagsalitàʾ spoke 104(19).
pagsasalitàʾ a speaking 80(40).
pananalitàʾ manner of speaking 44(35). 50(15).
pinagsalitaàn was spoken to 76(3).
sàlitáan conversation 32(7). 44(20).
magsàlitáan converse 114(5).
nagsàsàlitáan are conversing 86(32).
pagsasàlitáan a conversing 28(11). 64(10). 88(3).
kasàlitáan one of two who converse together 278(2).
makapagsalitàʾ be able to speak 50(14).

-sálo: kasálo fellow-partaker 42(8).

-salúboŋ: sinalúboŋ was met 18(40). 66(19).

sálok dipper; basket 229(6).
sumálok dip out water 229(6).

-salúkoy: kasalukúyan present, [392]at the same time 36(40). 260(11).

salòp a dry measure; see kabàn.

sáma (a) come along, go along 182(26). 222(5).
sumáma go along 32(13). 66(30). went along 140(19).
sàsáma will go along 84(12).
pagsáma a going along 104(30).
pagsasáma a going together 54(18).
isáma be taken along 84(32).
isináma was taken along 86(28).
samáhan be gone with 253(14).
sinamáhan was gone with 186(20).
sàsamáhan will be gone with 68(34).
sàmáhan society, company 296(32).
sàmáha-ŋ-Sumúloŋ the Sumulong Co. 210(30).
sàmáha-ŋ-ópera opera company 303(10).
makisáma go along with 202(23).
kasáma companion 30(9.22). 50(39). 273.
magkakasáma group of three or more companions 28(25). 48(39).
—(b) With accent-shift: samà act as partners 223(20).
kasamà field-worker, peon 72(32). 86(22).
kasamahàn partner 108(32). 210(35). See Sumúloŋ.
magkakasamahàn group of three or more 207(41). 278(40).

samàʾ badness, injury 218(31).
kasamaàn badness, injuriousness 276 (37).
kasamaà-ŋ-pálad bad fortune 42(28).
masamàʾ bad, hurtful, ugly 40(14). 50(7). 58(39).

sambalílo (S.) hat 137(42).

sampàl a slap 24(23).
sinampàl was slapped 24(22).

sampày that hung across 251(33).
nagsampày hung across, tr. 232(31).
isinampày was hung across 248(38).
sampáyan clothes-line 223(33).

Sam-Pédro S. St. Peter 72(27).

sána in that case, then 34(17). 74(23). 47. 230.

San-Antóniyo S. place-n. 34(29). See táo.

sánay practice 46(16).
sanày practised 46(24).
pasasánay a drilling 116(29).
pagkasánay a past practising 46(23).

San-Visènte S. place-n. 220(40).

sandalìʾ moment, while, short space of time 18(6). 24(11).

sandáliyas S. sandals 278(35).

sandòk cooking-dipper of cocoanut-shell 74(5).
sumandòk dipped out 229(8).

sanhìʾ cause 190(16).

-sánib: sumánib make one’s sleeping-mat overlap 229(8).
isánib be made to overlap 248(7).
kasánib overlapping 266(18).
magkasánib two that overlap 269(38).

San-Ildepònso S. place-n. 100(10). See lúpaʾ.

San-Matéyo S. place-n., see báyan.

San-Migèl S. place-n. 50(9). 116(6). See báyan.

sànto S. saint 98(15). 104(15).

Sàntos S. family-n. 209(26).

santòl fruit and tree of Sandoricum Indicum L. 34(40).

saŋà bough 34(28). 118(28).

-saŋgà: sumásaŋgà is warding off 106(36).
sinásaŋgà is being warded off 106(35).

Saŋ-Huwàn S. St. John 104(6). 110(10).

saŋkálan chopping-block 256(1).

saŋkàp accompaniment 221(22).
kasaŋkàp id. 266(20).
kasaŋkápan [393] utensil, tool, appurtenances 58(2.33). 74(6).

-saŋl, see sála.

sanlàʾ pledge 252(22).
saŋláan place for pledges, see báhay.

sápaʾ pond 88(26).

sapagkàt because 20(17). 201(36). 306.

-sapantáhaʾ: sinapantáhaʾ was conjectured 38(25).

sapàt sufficient 305(19).

sapátos S. shoes 32(35).

-sápit: sumápit arrived, came 62(24).

-sarà: paŋsarà instrument for closing 225(19).
sumásarà closes, intr. 225(20).
pagsasarà a closing, tr. 26(36).
isinarà was closed 80(1).
pagkásarà a chance closing 80(17).

-saràp: masasaràp tasty, pl. 34 (39).

sáriʾ sárì-sáriʾ various 48(15). 74(31).

saríle self; own 48(33). 62(12). 72(13). 137. 169. 175.

saríwaʾ moist; fresh 184(9).
nanaríwaʾ got fresh 76(40).

satsàt tonsure 106(21).

sawìʾ awkward 219(15). 276(33).
sawì-ŋ-pálad unlucky 211(8).
nasawì-ŋ-pálad became unlucky 54(3).
kasawiàn awkwardness 276(37).
kasawià-ŋ-pálad bad fortune 94(37).

sáya S. dress, skirt 240(41).

-sayà: kasàyáhan gladness 275(27).
masayà gay 80(15). 92(28).

-sáyad: magsisáyad get wearied, pl. 118(20).

sáyaŋ that regretted 219(16).
naŋhináyaŋ grieved 292(14).
naŋhìhináyaŋ is mourning 241(24).
paŋhihináyaŋ a mourning 241(26).
paŋhinayáŋan be regretted 257(6).
paŋhìhinayáŋan will be regretted 191(31).
pinaŋhinayáŋan was regretted 257(12).
pinaŋhìhinayáŋan is being regretted 257(13).
nasáyaŋ went for naught 285(5).

-sayàw: sumayàw dance 110(32). danced 186(18).
sumásayàw is dancing 112(2).
pagsayàw a dancing 112(4).
nagsásayàw is performing a dance 110(38).
sayawàn be danced before 253(15).
sinayawàn was danced to 186(21).
sàyáwan dance by many; ball 112(5). 186(19). 258(4).

si siy particle of names 20(2). 45. 58. 62. 78. 126. 162. 196.
ni disj., of, by 45. 162.
kay loc., to, for 45. 196.

Sibòl place-n. 118(26).

sibúyas S. onions 76(17).

sigàʾ bonfire 66(16).

-sigàŋ: isigàŋ be put on the fire 248(39).
nakasigàŋ is cooking 281(6).

sigaríliyo S. cigarette 227(1).

sigàw that cried 221(23).
sumigàw yelled 24(21).
sísigàw will yell 24(19).
pagsigàw a shouting 42(41).
nagsisigàw kept shouting 16(31). 44(40).
nagsísisigàw screams continually 40(42).
pagsisigàw a continual shouting 16(26). 44(26).
isinigàw was cried out 24(13). 68(39).
sinigawàn was yelled at 253(16).
sìgáwan a shouting by many 258(5).
magsìsìgáwan will yell together 236(18).
pagsisìgáwan a yelling together 48(37).
nakasísigàw is able to cry out 84(25).
pasigàw in a shout 70(24).
[394]nápasigàw involuntarily gave a shout 88(27).

-sigl, see silìd.

-siglà: masiglà cheerful 276(35).
magpasiglà cause to be cheerful 112(11).

sigúro S. no doubt 18(24). 80(39).

siìt spines at base of bamboo-cluster 246(27).

-síkad: sumíkad kicked at 229(9).
nagsísikàd kicks repeatedly 238(3).
nagsísisikàd is kicking much and repeatedly 239(11).
sinikáran was kicked at 253(17).

síkat ray of light 66(22).
sumìsíkat is shining 78(4).

-sikìp: sumikìp became narrow 229(10).
nagsikìp grew crowded 234(27).
masikìp crowded 98(39).

sekréta S. spy 168(5).

-siksìk: sumiksìk crowded his way 229(13).
nagsísiksìk is stuffing 234(29).
nakìkipagsiksíkan takes part in the crowding 98(41).

síko elbow 48(19).

síko, see tsíko.

-síkot: pasíkot-síkot nooks and corners 300(33).

silà they 18(27). 63.
nilà disj., by them, of them 16(7). 163.
kanilà prep. and loc., their, by them, them 18(26). 165. 169.
kaní-kanilà prep. and loc., their various, their respective 26(37). 165. 169.

silà, see sinà.

silakbò a flare, leap 231(6). 254(26).
sumilakbò flared up 229(14).
sinìsilakbuhàn is being welled up in 22(15).

-sílaŋ: sìláŋan place of rising 259(41).
silaŋàn place of child-birth 260(26).
sìlaŋánan east 163(27).
siláŋan east; place-n. 163(27). 261(13).

-silbè (S.): magsilbè serve 40(7).
pinagsìsilbihàn is being waited on 64(12).

síle S. chile pepper 76(16).

silìd small room 84(39). 114(13).
sumilìd get into a small space 104(34).
isilìd be put in 248(40).
siglàn be filled 138(5).
siniglàn was filled 20(17.34).
sinìsiglàn is being filled 20(6).
pinagsisiglàn was variously filled 118(7). 256(20).
pagkásilìd a chance putting away 104(37).

-sílip: sinílip was peeped at 106(20).

síliya S. chair 234(12).

síloŋ ground-floor, space under platform of house 260(29).

-simbà: magsimbà go to church 78(37).
nagsimbà went to church 242(18).
nagsísimbà goes to church 56(13).
simbáhan church 20(15).
mapagsimbà devout 98(10).

sinà silà pl. particle of names 48. 60. 62. 162. 196.
ninà nilà disj., of, by 48. 162.
kinà loc., to, for 48. 196.

sínag ray 66(36).

síne S. cinematograph 204(22).

sinélas S. sandals 70(1).

séniyas S. signals 246(22).

-sintà: pagsintà a proffering love 229(16).
sinísintà is being loved 245(5).

sèntimos S. centimos, cents 222(37).

síno who? 97. 167.
síno-síno pl. 97. 131.
níno disj., of whom? by whom? 167. 168.
kaníno prep. and loc., whose? by whom? 168. 169.
kaní-kaníno pl. 168. 169.

sinuŋáliŋ mendacious 219(17).
[395]nagsísinuŋalìŋ tells lies 238(5).
kasinuŋalíŋan falsehood 276(38).

-siŋìl: paniniŋìl a dunning 313(1).
siŋilìn be dunned for 264(14).
sinísiŋìl is being claimed 54(23).
násiŋìl got collected 294(7).

siŋkamàs (S.) Pachyrizus angulatus Rich. 76(16).

-siŋkàw: nagpasiŋkàw caused to be hitched up 52(35).

siŋsìŋ ring 102(2).
palàsiŋsíŋan the ring finger 315(25).

sípaʾ that kicked away; football 46(32).
pagsípaʾ a kicking 48(15).
màninípaʾ football-player 48(24).
sipáin be kicked away 84(9).
sinípaʾ was kicked away 24(45). 84(3).
pinagsipàʾ was variously kicked 84(43).
pinagsisipàʾ was variously and repeatedly kicked 84(21).
sipéro football-player 316(11).
sipéros pl. 48(24).

-sípag: kasipágan diligence 276(38).
masípag diligent 64(14).
masisípag pl. 34(35).

-síraʾ (a) nagkasíraʾ got partly spoiled 268(37).
nakasìsíraʾ causes ruin 235(27).
masíraʾ be able to be destroyed 283(40).
nasíraʾ was destroyed; deceased 78(5). 285(7).
nasìsiráan gets damaged 301(24).
màsíraʾ get destroyed 293(26).
nàsìsíraʾ gets destroyed 191(32).
—(b) Accent shifted:
siràʾ destroyed 223(3).
kasiràʾ opponent in anger 266(42).
magkasiràʾ break with each other 24(28).
nagkasiràʾ had a falling out 269(20).
nagsipagkasiràʾ pl. 269(28).
kasiraàn ruin 94(12).
kasiraà-ŋ-púri injury to honor 94(16).

serbísiyo S. service 62(35).

sèrmon S. sermon 20(16).
isinèsèrmon is being preached about 50(16).
sinèsèrmunan is being preached to 50(13).

-sísi: magsísi repent 20(31).
magsipagsísi pl. 22(2).
pagsisísi a repenting 22(25).
pinagsisíhan was repented 291(9).

-sísid: sumísid stay under water 168(41).
pagsísid a staying under water 309(10).
nàsìsísid is submerged 88(35).
pagpapasísid a causing to dive 116(38).

sítaw the cow-pea, Vigna catjang Endl. 76(16).

siyà he, she; that which 47. 63. 106.
niyà disj., by him, of him, 47. 163.
kaniyà prep. and loc., his, by him, him 165. 169.
kásiyà sufficient 268(8).
magkàkàsiyà will be sufficient 271(4).
pagkàsiyahàn be a sufficient container 52(13).
makasísiyà will be adequate 281(7).
nasiyahàn got what corresponded to it 66(21).
nasìsiyahàn gets what corresponds to it 112(26).

-siyádo (S. demasiado)
:masiyádo excessive 54(19). 289(17).

siyàm nine 38(6). 67. paŋsiyàm number nine 225(38).
makásiyàm nine times 298(33).

siyásat that inquired into 203(5).
nagsiyásat inquired 28(2). 203(2).
pagsisiyásat an inquiring 66(21).
maniyásat pry into 240(33).
siniyásat was interrogated 64(34).
nasiyásat has been inquiring into 199(32).
mapagsiyásat inquisitive 40(20).

siyèmpre S. always 262(13).

siyéte-palábras S. Easter Mass 20(29).

subálit but 322.

-subò: sumubò boiled over, intr. [396]52(12).
sinubhàn was boiled over in 54(30).

súboʾ mouthful 221(24).
pagsusúboʾ a feeding 219(15).
subúan be fed 253(19).

-súbok: nanùnúbok is spying 40(24).
subúkan be watched for, put to a test 68(8). 102(34).
sinubúkan was put to a test 56(39).
sinùsubúkan is being spied on 40(22).
masubúkan be able to be tested 265(20).

-sugàl (S.): nagsúsugàl is gambling 269(22).
nagsipagsugàl gambled, pl. 190(34).
pagsusugàl a gambling 251(29).
sùgálan gambling-party 174(29).

súgat a wound 20(8).
sumúgat wounded 20(38).
sinugátan was wounded 253(20).
sugatàn wounded person, the wounded 20(39). 260(28).
nagsugatàn wounded each other 237(3).
masugátan be able to be wounded 36(21).

súhaʾ grape-fruit 34(40). See púnoʾ.

súhol a bribe 72(39).

súkaʾ wine set to sour, vinegar 289(2).

súkat proper, fitting 58(18). 98(24). 268.

suklày comb 229(19).
sumuklày combed 229(18).
nagsuklày combed himself 234(30).
sinuklày was combed 245(7).
sinuklayàn id. 253(21).
nagpasuklày caused himself to be combed 303(22).
pinapagsuklày was caused to comb himself 305(26).

súlat that written, letter 52(10).
sulàt written 199(30).
sumúlat write 140(18). wrote 50(39).
sùsúlat will write 138(11).
sumùsúlat is writing 146(5).
pagsúlat a writing 140(29).
pagsusulàt a writing in quantity 238(5).
panunúlat id. 240(35).
magsusulàt clerk, scribe 243(2).
mánunulàt id. 243(20).
sinúlat was written 154(8). 245(9).
isinúlat was put into writing 94(22). 184(35).
sulátan be written to 154(19).
sulatàn writing-desk 217(13).
kasùlátan kasulatàn correspondent 278(12. 24).
makasúlat be able to write 282(2).
nakasùsúlat is able to write 282(1).
nakàsúlat happened to write 176(38).
tagasúlat writer 315(39).
tagapagpasúlat overseer of writers 316(5).

-súlid: sumúlid spin thread 229(19).
sinúlid thread 184(4).

sulihiyà the weave 48(1).

suléras S. joists 234(43).

-sulsè (S.): manulsè darn 169(2).
tagasulsè darning-woman 169(1).

sulòʾ torch 90(26).

súlok corner 52(33). 64(22).
sulòk-sulòk nooks and corners 64(21).

súloŋ go ahead 151(39).
sumúloŋ push ahead 229(19). also as family-n. (Sumúloŋ at kasamahàn: see bìgásan).
pagsúloŋ a pushing on; a going away 88(41). 308(36).
isùsúloŋ will be pushed forward 58(3).
isinùsúloŋ is being pushed ahead 230(3).

súman steamed rice in banana-leaves 227(1).

sombréro S. hat 137(41).

sumbòŋ complaint 96(12).
nagsumbòŋ brought a charge 100(21).
ipagsumbòŋ be complained of 96(35).
ipinagsumbòŋ was complained [397] of 38(1). 96(10).
palasumbúŋin tattle-tale 315(10).

-sumpòŋ: pagsumpòŋ attack, fit 313(22).
sinumpòŋ was overcome 18(36). 84(14).
sinúsumpòŋ is being overcome 108(27).

sundálo S. soldier 52(23).
nagsundálo became a soldier 183(2).
pagsusundálo military service 303(34).

-sundòʾ: sumundòʾ fetch 229(21).
pagsundòʾ a fetching 229(22).
sinundòʾ was called for 256(41).
sinúsundòʾ is being called for 104(23).
kásundòʾ agreeing 268(9).
nagkásundòʾ agreed with each other 168(16).
pagkakásundòʾ an agreeing with each other 271(5).
pagkàsunduàn pagkàsunduwàn be agreed upon 278(30).
pinagkàsunduàn was agreed upon 32(2).
nagpasundòʾ caused to be fetched 92(23).
pagpapasundòʾ a causing to be fetched 303(23).
ipinasundòʾ was caused to be fetched 306(28).
ipinasúsundòʾ is being caused to be fetched 88(19). 92(16).

suntòk blow on the head 229(24).
pagsuntòk a striking on the head 229(23).
suntukìn be struck on the head 245(10).
sinuntòk was struck on the head 245(10).
sinúsuntòk is being struck on the head 245(11).

-súnoʾ: nakisúnoʾ dwelt along, dwelt with 264(15).
kasúnoʾ fellow-guest 118(15).
magkakasúnoʾ pl. 118(18).

-sunòd: sunòd-sunòd following on one another 72(25).
sumunòd follow, comply, obey 52(24). 100(27). followed 231(6).
sumúsunòd is following 38(7). 46(19).
pagsunòd a following 38(10). 94(24).
sundìn be complied with 92(8).
sinunòd was complied with 303(16).
sinúsunòd is being complied with 62(37). 66(13).
isinunòd was taken next, was made to follow 76(18).
sundàn be followed 240(23).
sinundàn was followed 22(25). 36(36).
sinùsundàn is being followed 68(23).
kasunòd following another 266(21).
magkasunòd two, one of whom follows the other 42(29). 270(8).
pagkakásunòd-sunòd a following one on the other 271(6).
masùnúrin obedient 94(20).

súnog a burning up, conflagration 122(18). 156(10).
sunòg burnt 66(41). 223(4).
panunúnog a setting fire to, a burning 122(12).
sunúgin be burned up 122(20).
pinagsunòg was variously burned up 122(10).
magkasúnog have a fire 268(41).
nasúnog has been burned 172(39). 259(4).
pagkasúnog a past burning 197(34). 283(2).
pagkàsúnog a getting burned 292(19). 295(19).

súnoŋ that carried on the head 108(16).

suŋáŋaʾ a blow on the mouth 212(37).
sùsuŋaŋáin will be struck on the mouth 174(37).

súŋay horn 24(29).

-suŋgàb: sinuŋgabàn was seized 46(27). 58(22).
sinùsuŋgabàn is being seized 108(34).
masuŋgabàn have been taken hold of 110(2).
nasùsuŋgabàn is able to be seized 110(8).

súpot bag 34(5).

sorbétes S. sherbet 272(33).

súso breast, nipple 212(11).
ipinakìkipasúso is being asked to be [398]caused to take the breast 307(38).

susòʾ snail 18(1).

sutsòt a whistling 197(22).
sumúsutsòt is whistling 229(24).
malasutsòt a young lout 315(3).
palasutsútin one who always whistles 315(11).

soòt that worn 70(1).
isoòt be put on 248(41).
sootàn be got into 104(11).

-suwày: pagsuwày a disobeying 54(3).
makasuwày be able to disobey 94(21).

suwélas S. soles 306(8).

suwèldo S. pay 26(27).

-súyoʾ: pagsúyoʾ a bribing 92(38).
panunúyoʾ a propitiating by bribes 72(34).

súyod a harrow 243(3).
magsuyòd harrower.

[Contents]

T.

t, see at.

taàn that set apart 221(3).
itinátaàn is being reserved 248(24).
taanàn fugitive 261(14).
magtaanàn flee 237(4).
makataanàn be able to flee 286(24). 313(29).
nàtàtaàn is reserved 80(13).

taàs height 218(13).
itaàs upper part, north 36(27). 163(25).
paitaàs upward 48(6).
itinaàs was raised 88(34).
kataasàn north 163(25).
mataàs high 64(12).
nátaàs got raised up 78(8).

-tabàʾ: tumabàʾ grow stout 206(27).
katabàʾ how fat 42(5).
matabàʾ fat, stout 244(34).
nápakatabàʾ very fat 313(12).

tabakéra S. tabatière 220(25).

tabáko S. cigar 66(12).
nagtàtabáko is smoking a cigar 66(19).

tabì side; step aside 32(31). 152(1).
nátabì got to the side of 74(14).
pagkátabì a getting to the side of 94(8).

tablà S. board 34(37).

táboʾ dipper 222(27).

tábon dam 245(14).
nagtábon dammed up 232(32).
pagtatábon a damming up 179(39).
tinabúnan was dammed up 253(22).
nàtàtábon is covering, is piled over 120(22).
pinatabúnan was caused to be filled 26(10).

taburéte S. chair 24(39).

tadtàd chopped up 20(7).
pagtatadtàd a chopping up 114(10). and Corrigenda.

tagà tigà coming from 56(23). 48. 254.

-tagàʾ: tumagàʾ hew, chop 290(27).
tinagàʾ was chopped 44(39).

tagàl length in time, endurance 168(41).
tagalàn be done long 253(23).
matagàl long-enduring, patient 104(26).
natagalàn was able to be endured in 62(6).
pàtagálan contest of endurance 309(10).
pagpapàtagálan a contesting for endurance 48(22). 309(17).
kapàtagálan opponent in a contest for endurance 310(32).

Tagálog Tagalog 50(15). 58(6).
Katagalúgan the Tagalog country 50(23).

tagílid, see -gílid.

tagpìʾ a patch 266(4).
tagpiàn be mended 253(26).
tagpían place of patching 259(7).
katátagpìʾ there has just been mending 175(9).

tagpòʾ a meeting 220(3).
magtatagpòʾ meet each other, pl. 102(4).[399]
nagtatagpòʾ met each other 26(39).
tagpuìn be met by appointment 245(12).
tagpuàn be joined up 253(26).
pagtàtagpuàn will be met in 26(34).
tagpúan meeting-place 106(9).
makíkipagtagpòʾ will meet another 98(26).
makátagpòʾ happen to meet 66(5). 92(14).
nakátagpòʾ happened to meet 18(2). 36(8).
màtagpuàn get met with 106(25).
nàtagpuàn got met with 34(20). 92(15).

tágoʾ that put away 221(25).
magtágoʾ hide oneself 32(35).
magtagòʾ keep oneself in hiding 56(19).
nagtagòʾ kept himself in hiding 56(21).
pagtatagòʾ a staying in hiding 312(13).
itágoʾ be hidden 40(25).
itinàtágoʾ is being put away 273(34).
taguàn place for safe-keeping; hiding-place; hiding 52(35). 120(10). 163(22).
kinàtàtagúan is the place of concealment 118(43).
makapagtágoʾ be able to hide oneself 52(32).
nàtàtágoʾ is hidden 24(31). 34(11).
pagkàtágoʾ the way of storing 268(39).
patágoʾ given for safe-keeping 293(26).

-tahàn: magtahàn cease 232(33).
nagtahàn ceased 106(7).
tàhánan abode 66(24).
patahanin be caused to cease 100(2).

-tahìʾ: manahìʾ sew, patch 169(2).
pananahìʾ sewing as occupation 240(36).
mànanáhiʾ seamstress 243(14).
pinanànahiàn is the place where sewing is done 256(42).
tagatahìʾ person appointed to sew 315(39).

tahìd spur of rooster 238(3).

tahílan girder 227(15).

tahímik quiet 102(4). 114(4).
tumahímik become quiet, quiet down 44(17). became quiet 44(25). 122(23).
nanahímik quieted down 240(37).
nagsipanahímik pl. 36(5).
katahimíkan quietness 116(9).
matahímik quiet 34(35). 120(38).
màtahímik get quiet 40(42).

tahòl a bark 62(8).
tumátahòl is barking 229(25).
pagtahòl a barking 305(2).
pagtatahòl a barking at 234(31).
tàhúlan a baying together 258(7).
nagtàhúlan bayed together 190(17).
ikinátahòl was the cause of barking 273(38).
nakatahòl has barked, was able to bark 191(2). 198(18).
pagkátahòl a chance barking 158(8).
pagpapatahòl a causing to bark 296(10).
pinatahòl was caused to bark 304(41).

taíŋa téŋa ear 110(35).

-takà: pagtatakà a being surprised 64(16). 232(34).
ipinagtátakà is the cause of surprise 66(4).
katakà-takà exciting wonder 36(26).
nakapagtátakà causes wonderment 36(24).

takbò a run 70(40).
tumakbò run 18(18). ran 18(39).
tumátakbò is running 251(39).
tátakbò will run 18(35).
pagtakbò a running 18(9).
pagtakbò-takbò a running about at intervals 231(22).
nagtátakbò runs (as repeated occurrence) 108(16).
nagsipagtakbò ran, pl. 84(29).
naŋagsipagtakbò id. 116(13).
pagtatakbò a running 88(25).
nagtátatakbò is running wild 62(13). 238(42).
takbúhan a running together 60(27). 116(5).
nagtakbúhan ran together 22(26).
nagsipagtakbúhan pl. 96(30).
nagtàtakbúhan are running [400]together 86(40). 106(34).
pagtatakbúhan a running together 18(1). 96(17).
makipagtakbúhan join in a race with 18(21).
nakìkipagtakbúhan joins in a race 60(26).
pinakìkipagtakbuhàn is being run with 60(29). 265(33).
makatakbò be able to run 18(16).
patakbò on the run 68(18). 72(8).
pinatakbò was caused to run 70(39).

takìp cover 172(15).
paŋtakìp used as cover 94(15).

tákot fear 20(6).
takútin be frightened 50(33).
nagtàtakòt-takútan pretends to be frightened 108(15).
katákot-tákot terrifying 267(27).
ikinatákot was the cause of fearing 272(23).
katakútan be feared 36(9).
kinatakútan was feared 274(30).
kinatàtakútan is being feared 42(18).
pagkatakutàn be feared by many 275(19).
pagkàkatakutàn will be feared by many 275(21).
pinagkatakutàn was feared by many 275(15).
pinagkàkatakutàn is being feared by many 36(30).
katakútan timidity 116(14).
katakutàn reverence 276(11).
katatakutàn terrifying 34(32). 277(30).
nakatàtákot is causing fear 66(12).
matákot be afraid 20(13).
natákot grew afraid 58(23).
naŋatákot pl. 36(6).
natàtákot is afraid 36(7).
pagkatákot a being afraid 72(9).
palatakutìn easily frightened.

tálaʾ star 272(25).

-talàʾ: nátalàʾ got fixed 116(24).

talagà by fate, by nature, once for all 98(33). 116(16).
tinalagà was resolved upon 46(23).
katalagahàn fate 276(40).

-tálas: matálas keen, clever 234(9).

-talastàs: natátalastàs is able to be understood 284(2).
napagtalastàs was entirely understood 287(14).
napagtátalastàs napápagtalastàs is entirely understood 287(15).

-táliʾ: panáliʾ used for tethering, tying up 225(21).
nagtáliʾ tethered 232(35).
itináliʾ was tethered 313(25).
tinalían was tied up 104(37).
nakatáliʾ is tied 284(16).

-tálik: tumálik became close 88(2).
matálik intimate 22(30). 52(17).

-talíkod, see likòd.

talìm cutting-edge 221(36).
patalìm cutting instrument 36(19).
nagpatalìm caused to be sharp, sharpened 44(36).
nagpápatalìm is sharpening 303(25).
pinatalìm was made sharp 304(42).
napatátalìm is able to be made sharp. 311(24).

talíno (S.?) intelligence 60(16).
katalinúhan id. 50(6).
matalíno intelligent 36(28).

-tálo (a): nagtàtálo is contending 46(34).
pagtatálo a contending 296(31).
manálo be victorious 52(8).
nanálo won 48(36).
nanànálo is victorious 62(2).
nagsìsipanálo pl. 118(5).
pananálo victory 56(30).
mánanalò victorious, victor 48(38). 62(1).
talúnin be defeated 46(37).
tàtalúnin will be defeated 18(24).
talúnan defeated, loser 18(42). 148(22). 163(7).
pinanalúnan was won 60(33).
katàlúnan one of two who are opposing each [401]other 278(12).
pinagkatalunàn was won in by many 60(27). 275(23).
pagkatálo a being defeated 52(7).
màkatálo turn out to be the opponent 168(28).
màkàkatálo will be an opponent 30(2).
nàkatálo was the opponent 296(29).
nàkàkatálo is the opponent 296(31).
—(b) Accent shifted: katalò opponent in winning-and-losing game 266(43).
nagkatalò played a game 269(21).
pagkakatalò a winning-and-losing 48(21).

talumpátiʾ oration 98(38).
nagtàtalumpátiʾ is making a speech 98(41).
pagtatalumpátiʾ a speech-making 236(39).

-talòn: tumalòn jumped down 88(29).
nagtalòn jumped down 28(21). 70(30). 72(13).

talòŋ egg-plant 76(16).

-taluŋkòʾ: nakataluŋkòʾ has squatted down 98(19). 112(1).
naŋàtàtaluŋkòʾ are in squatting position 108(29).
pataluŋkòʾ in squatting position 220(9).

támaʾ (a) a hit, correct 152(7). 220(5).
tumámaʾ hit 24(23). 229(26).
tamáan be hit and destroyed or disfigured 238(39).
màtamáan get hit and disfigured 298(5).
—(b) Accent shifted: tamàʾ hit 223(5).
tamaàn be hit in some part 106(38).
tinamaàn was hit 24(25). 38(21).
màtamaàn get hit in some part 36(21). 298(11).

-tamàd: katamaràn be neglected 274(36).
katàtamaràn will be neglected 274(39).
kinatamaràn was neglected 274(34).
katàmáran laziness 18(36).
matamàd lazy 260(15).

tamìs sweetness 297(10).
matamìs sweet, sugar 198(31). 252(6).

-tamn, see tanìm.

-tampalásan: tinampalásan was roughly handled 94(14).
katampalasánan roughness 310(9).

-tampò: pagtatampúhan mutual contrariness 259(28).

-tamò: magtamò partake 78(39).
nagtátamò is partaking 112(20).

-tanàw: tumanàw take into view 90(39).
tanawìn be observed 108(21).
pagkatanàw a having looked 283(4).
nakátanàw chanced to espy 28(13). 72(5).
pagkátanàw a chance espying, the way of seeing 18(34). 108(16). 291(19).

-tandàʾ: tumátandàʾ is getting old 229(27).
matandàʾ old 38(6).
matatandàʾ pl. 114(31).
matandaàn be able to be remembered 24(5).
natàtandaàn is able to be remembered 20(25). 28(5). 116(19).

tanikalàʾ chain 244(38).

tanìm that planted 221(26).
pananìm used for planting 86(32).
nagtátanìm is planting 86(38).
pagtatanìm a planting 307(13).
mànanánim planter 243(15).
itátanìm will be planted 16(6).
tamnàn be planted in 253(28).
nàtàtanìm is planted 76(31).
nàtàtamnàn is planted in 34(39).

taniyàg much regarded 219(18).
pagtataniyàg an exhibiting 90(16).
tanyágan exhibition 259(9).
pagtatanyágan the making an exhibition 90(9).

tansòʾ copper 230(14).

tantiyà S. calculation, guess 281(41).

tánod watchman
tánod-báhay house-watchman 210(31).
tánod-pálay [402]rice-guard 210(31).
tumánod guarded 229(27).
nagtánod stood guard, formed a guard 207(41).
tinanúran was guarded 253(30).

tanòŋ that asked, question 56(5). 68(21).
tumanòŋ asked (with quotation or thing asked about) 44(8). 82(13). 106(10). 229(29).
nagtanòŋ put questions, asked (with indirect quotation) 82(3). 234(34).
nagtátanòŋ is putting questions 234(33).
tinanòŋ was inquired of 26(1).
itinanòŋ was asked 26(3). 30(30).
ipagtanòŋ be asked about 74(26).
ipagtatanòŋ be repeatedly asked about 98(23).

-táŋaʾ: tinaŋáan was threatened 100(13).

táŋan grasp; that grasped 66(38). 108(41).
tinaŋnàn was grasped 42(39).

taŋày that carried along 70(3).
nagtátaŋày is carrying along 68(28).
tinaŋày was carried along, washed away 82(34).
tinátaŋày is being borne along 16(3).

taŋgàp that received 221(27).
tumaŋgàp received 76(25).
taŋgapìn be accepted 48(25). 245(16).
tàtaŋgapìn will be accepted 52(25).
tinaŋgàp was received, accepted 58(9). 219(29).
taŋgapàn be taken from 253(31).
taŋgápan receiving-place 252(21).
nátaŋgàp chanced to be accepted 42(28).

-taŋgòl: pagtataŋgòl a defending 257(14).
mánanaŋgòl attorney 116(25).
maipagtaŋgòl be able to be defended 288(1).
tagapagtaŋgòl attorney 305(40).

-taŋhàʾ: tumaŋhàʾ wonder 229(30).

taŋháliʾ noon 30(29).
manaŋháliʾ eat the noon meal 204(26).
kataŋhalían middle part of day 26(14). 120(38).

-táŋiʾ: itináŋiʾ was refused 60(29).

-taŋlàw: pagtaŋlàw an illuminating 66(36).

-taŋòʾ: tumaŋòʾ consented 16(6).
tumátaŋòʾ consents 229(31).

tápaŋ courage 36(31).
katapáŋan bravery 276(41).
matápaŋ courageous 42(19). 66(2).

tapàt space in front 189(1).
ipinagtapàt was owned up 90(32).
katapàt facing 48(7).

tapìk a tap 220(7).
pinagtátapìk is being petted 84(10).

-tápon: itápon be cast away 30(36). 62(23).
itinápon was cast away 62(30).
ipinagtapòn was variously cast away 120(40).
tapunàn place for throwing away 205(21).
nagpatápon caused to be exiled 56(27).
ipatápon be caused to be cast out 56(17).
pagkapatápon a having caused to be banished 120(18).

tapòn S. stopper, cork 166(17).
tapunàn be corked 253(34).

-tápos: tapòs ended 30(19).
tapúsin be ended 236(18).
tinápos was ended 56(6).
katapusàn end, cessation 24(1). 50(18). 114(33).
makatápos have finished 88(3). 167(26).
matápos come to an end 50(37). 82(3).
natápos ended 236(37).[403]
pagkatápos a having ended 44(37). 52(4).
matápos-tápos be able to come to an end 287(39).

tarà come along 207(35).

tarabúko, see búko.

-taraŋkà: tàraŋkáhan gateway 32(17).

-taráto S.: pagtaráto a treating 44(31).

tasà (S.) point 254(2).

tátal splinters 58(17).

tátay father 120(17). 122(17). 59.
magtátay father and child 242(16).
magtatátay pl. 242(33).

tatlò, see -tlò.

táo person, human being 20(7).
táo-ŋ-báyan townsperson 50(17).
táo-ŋ-San-Antóniyo person of San Antonio 34(31).
panaúhin guest 247(29). 250(39).
táo-taúhan manikin; pupil of the eye 88(8). 135(22).
katáo persons 42(6). 255.
kataúhan mankind 135(21).
katawàn body 20(33). 276(19).
paŋaŋatawàn physique, body 18(14). 36(11).

-taòb: pagtataòb a tipping over, tr. 82(32).

taòn year 26(36).
taòn-taòn every year 191(32).
kátaòn at the same time 104(18).
nagkátaòn happened at the same time 84(37). 94(6).
pagkakátaòn a happening at the same time 271(6).
nàtàtaòn comes at the same time 110(22).

táwa (a) laughter 68(27).
t. naŋ t. keeps laughing 206(35).
tumáwa laughed 18(23).
tumàtáwa is laughing 229(31).
pagtáwa a laughing 100(37).
tumàtáwa-táwa laughs at intervals 231(23).
tawánan be laughed at 186(34).
tàwánan laughter by many 259(37).
katatawanàn laughable, laughing-stock 24(17). 167(30).
—(b) Accent shifted: tumátawà-tawà snickers, giggles at intervals 231(28).
nanawà-nawà kept snickering 241(33).
ikátawà be the cause of laughter 185(23).
ikàtàtawà will be the cause of snickering 274(2).
ikinátawà was the cause of laughter 292(31).
ikinàtàtawà is the cause of snickering 274(4).
nakàtàtawà causes irrepressible laughter 108(28).
matatawanìn easily made to laugh 290(3).
patawàtawà snickering at intervals 300(38).
nápatawà burst out laughing 120(28).

-táwad: patàtawárin will be pardoned, excused 184(19).

táwag a call; name 50(10). 64(18).
paŋtáwag panáwag used for calling 225(22).
tumáwag call 18(27). called 32(39).
tumàtáwag is calling 64(5).
pagtáwag a calling 64(42).
nagtáwag announced 234(36).
pagtatáwag an announcing 234(37).
nagtawàg called in numbers 238(7).
nagtátawàg is calling in numbers 238(7).
pagtatawàg a calling in numbers 238(11).
nagtátatawàg is calling much and variously 239(12).
magtatawàg town-crier 303(30).
manáwag summon 240(38).
tawágin be called 78(1).
tináwag was called 16(5).
tinàtáwag is being called 40(32).
itináwag was called out, was called for 42(31). 44(28). 248(42).
ipinagtáwag was called out 249(39).
tawágan be called to 253(36).
pagkatáwag a having called 283(6).
màtáwag get called 46(21).[404]
nàtáwag got called 303(34).
pagkàtáwag a chance calling 291(39).
patáwag caused to be called out 299(19).
nagpatáwag caused to be called 303(26).
pagpapatáwag a causing to be called 303(27).
magpapatawàg town-crier 248(42).
ipinatáwag was caused to be called 52(13). 54(25).
ipinagpàpatáwag is being caused to be called out 307(24).

-tawìd: tumawìd cross 106(4). crossed 68(2).
napatátawìd is causing himself to be taken across 80(35).

tayàʾ stakes 258(8).
tàyáan a staking by several 258(8).

táyo we, incl. 63. Cf. átin and té.

tayòʾ stand up 222(7). erected 223(35).
paŋtayòʾ used for setting up, for standing up 225(24). 306(9).
tumayòʾ stood up 204(27).
pagtayòʾ a standing up 289(21).
magtayòʾ set up, erect 203(2).
nagtayòʾ erected 234(40).
pagtatayòʾ an erecting 234(22).
itátayòʾ will be set up 296(2).
itinayòʾ was erected 248(43).
tinayuàn was built in 253(36).
pagkakátayòʾ a standing up together 98(39). 271(7).
kinàtàtayuàn is being stood on 98(40).
nakatayòʾ is upright 110(41).
nakatátayòʾ is able to stand up 282(3).
pagkatayòʾ a having stood up 283(8).
nàtàtayòʾ is standing 34(38). 50(26).
pagkátayòʾ a chance standing up or erecting 104(19). 291(21).
patayòʾ caused to be erected 299(20). in standing position 287(26).
nagpatayòʾ caused to be erected 303(32).
pagpapatayòʾ a causing to be built 303(33).
pinatayòʾ was caused to stand up 304(43).
ipinatayòʾ was caused to be erected 306(30).
nápatayòʾ jumped to his feet 312(31).

-táyog: katáyog what tallness 267(35).

té (táyo?) come along 207(35).

teátro, see teyátro.

-tibàʾ: tumibàʾ cut down bananas 229(34).
tinibàn trunk of banana-tree after fruit has been gathered 184(2).

-tíbay: tumíbay grew firm 24(27).
tibáyan be propped 296(2).
matíbay firm 18(20). 64(36).

tigà, see tagà.

tigàs hardness, hard 219(20). 281(26).
tigasàn be done with hardening 253(38).
matigàs hard 283(27).
pinatigasàn was made hard 237(31).

-tígil: nagtígil ceased 201(37).

-tiìs: tinítiìs is being endured 223(18).
tìísin hardship 62(21).

tiktìk spy 312(14).
tumiktìk spied 36(31).

tikuwàs lowered at one end 223(35).
pagtikuwàs a getting out of balance 192(22).
nagtikuwàs tilted 234(42).

-tilàd: tumilàd split, cut up 229(35).
tinilàd was split 46(40).
napatilàd asked to be sliced for 311(43).

teléfono S. telephone 291(40).

timbàʾ well-bucket 314(34).
tumimbàʾ drew in a bucket 229(36).
kalatimbàʾ squatting on heels 314(32).
nagkalatimbàʾ squatted on heels 196(37).
pinapagkalatimbàʾ was caused to squat on heels 305(29). [405]

-timbàŋ: timbáŋan scales 259(10).
katimbàŋ equal 42(6) and Corrigenda.

tinápay bread 32(17).

tindà (S.) goods for sale 259(11).
tindáhan store, shop 170(4).

-tindìg: nagsitindìg stood on end, pl. 66(16).
nagtindìg stood up 26(25).
nagsipagtindìg pl. 96(29).
nakatindìg is on his feet 38(33). 90(25).
pagkátindìg a chance standing up 291(21).
nápatindìg jumped to his feet 202(1).

tinidòr S. table-fork 114(8).

tinìg voice 86(25). 114(11).

tinìk spine, splinter, fish-bone 16(20). 250(34).
nátinìk got a splinter 16(21).
pagkátinìk the getting a splinter 295(23).

-tintéro: S.: tinterúhan ink-stand 180(33).

tinóla stew 163(18).

tiŋà foreign substance between the teeth 241(29).
maŋhiniŋà pick one’s teeth 241(29).

-tiŋìn: tumiŋìn watch 18(26).
pagtiŋìn an observing 229(37).
tiŋnàn be looked at 64(26).
tiniŋnàn was looked at 18(13).
tinìtiŋnàn is being looked at 106(34).

-tiŋkàd: matiŋkàd intense 147(1).

tiŋtìŋ fibre, bristle, straw 315(21).

-tipàn: pinagtipanàn was appointed as meeting-place 104(39).
tìpánan a meeting by appointment 102(11).
nagtìpánan made an appointment to meet each other 26(34).

-tipìd: pagtipìd a being economical 229(37).
nagtipìd saved 235(2).
nagsipagtipìd pl. 236(6).
pagtitipìd a saving 235(1).
tinipìd was economized in 245(17).
kaytipìd what savingness 174(1).
natipìd has been economized in 284(18).
matipìd economical 298(9).
mapagtipìd given to saving 289(26).
pagkátipìd a chance saving 292(25).
nagpatipìd caused to be economized 303(36).
ipatipìd be caused to be economized in 244(20).
ipinatipìd was caused to be economized 306(31).

-típon: tipòn gathered 223(6).
paŋtípon used for gathering 225(26).
pagtípon a gathering 229(39).
magtípon store up 235(5).
nagtípon stored up 235(5).
nagtìtípon stores up 202(19).
pagtitípon a storing up 235(3).
tìpúnan meeting 259(35) Corrigenda.
katipúnan a gathering; n. of a secret society 116(27).
Katipunéros members of the Katipunan 116(32).
nakatípon succeeded in gathering 282(4).
natípon has been gathered 284(19).
pagkatípon ability to gather, a having gathered 282(16). 283(10).
nakàtípon chanced to gather 291(33).
pagkàtípon a chance gathering 291(23).
patípon that caused to be gathered 299(21).
patipòn into a heap 166(23).
nagpatípon caused to be gathered 303(37).
pagpapatípon a causing to be gathered 303(39).
ipinatípon was caused to be gathered 306(32).

típus S. typhoid 223(19).

-tirà: tumirà dwelt, staid 229(41).
magtirà dwelt 54(12).
nagtirà dwelt 50(4).
nagtítirà is dwelling, [406]stays 38(8). 114(27).
pagtitirà a staying 36(25). 54(13).
nagtútumirà keeps staying 112(27).
itinirà was left 249(1).
tirahàn be dwelt in 253(40).
tinìtirahàn is being dwelt in 253(42).
tirhàn be left for 253(39).
tinirhàn was dwelt in, was left for 118(3). 253(38).
tìráhan dwelling 16(32). 24(38).
titirhàn home, house 118(27).
ikinápagtirà was the cause of dwelling 120(6).
kinàtirhàn was lived in 120(42).
makatirà be able to stay 52(39).
mátirà remain, get left 192(38).
màtìtirà will have to remain 187(26).
nátirà got left, dwelt 28(31). 56(30).
nàtìtirà is left, dwells 26(28). 28(33).
pagkátirà a chance staying 116(25).

-tísod: tinísod was kicked away 245(20).
natísod has been kicked away 284(20).
nakàtísod accidentally hit with the foot 290(35).

-tiwálaʾ: tiwalàʾ persuaded, convinced 104(40).
paniwálaʾ belief 40(3).
maniwálaʾ believe 68(29).
naniwálaʾ believed 106(19).
nanìniwálaʾ believes 40(7). 52(1).
paniniwálaʾ a believing, faith 34(32). 40(2).
pàniwalaìn credulous 116(9).
paniwaláan be given credence 52(6).
kàtiwálaʾ confidential agent, manager 268(13).

tiyà S. aunt 59. 256.

tiyàn womb 36(16).

tiyának goblin 68(1).

teyátro teátro S. theatre 148(27).

tiyobíbo S. merry-go-round 307(21).

-tlò: tatlò three 24(18). 67.
tatlò ŋ gabì: pagtatatlò-ŋ-gabì a three-nights’ celebration 114(28).
tatlò ŋ pùʾ: paŋatlò-ŋ-pùʾ number thirty 226(9).
tatlò-tatlò three by three 224(1).
paŋatlò number three 226(8).
ikatlò third 273(19).
makáitlò makáyitlò three times 298(36).

trabahadùr S. laborer 82(25).

trabáho S. labor 30(26).
trabáho-ŋ-kaniyunéro artilleryman’s work 155(22).
magtàtrabáho will work 138(30).
nagtrabáho worked 90(14).
pagtatrabáho a working 82(7).
pinapagtàtrabáho is being caused to work 72(33).

trabúko, see búko.

trèn S. train 116(21).

Tsàŋ C. n. 263(4).

tsíko síko S. custard-apple, Achras sapota L. 34(40).

Tsína S. China 269(20).

tubàʾ sap 258(1).

túbig water 16(31).

túbo S. tube 255(20).

tubò sugar-cane 181(15).
tubúhan cane-field 237(41). 259(18).

túboʾ that grown; profit 189(24). 232(22).
tumúboʾ grew 16(12).
tùtúboʾ will grow 16(9).
tinubúan was grown up in, was grown on 26(39). 204(10).
katutúboʾ inborn 38(13). 267(4).

-tud, see -tuwìd.

tugtòg that played, piece of music 186(21).
tumugtòg play music 166(3).
tumútugtòg is playing music 110(37).
nagsísitugtòg pl. 110(32).
mánunugtòg musician 112(3).
tugtúgin music 247(22).
tinùtugtugàn is being played for 48(30).
tugtúgan piece of music by several performers 112(4).
pagtutugtúgan a playing together 110(40).
pagpapatugtòg a causing to be played 80(26). [407]

túhod knee 48(19).

tukàʾ beak 230(2).
tumukàʾ pick with the beak 230(2).
paŋpatukàʾ given to pick 301(8).

tuksò joke 195(39).

-tuktòk: tumuktòk knocked 78(26).
tumútuktòk is knocking 155(37).
pagtuktòk a knocking 78(27).
itinuktòk was knocked 30(7).
ituktòk top, ceiling 62(15). 118(21).

-túkop: tinúkop was covered with the hand 100(2).

tulàʾ connected 186(40).
tulá-tulàʾ coherent 44(35).

-túlad: tuláran be limited 74(23).

túlak push 252(5).
tumúlak pushed at; went away 230(3). 235(10).
nagtúlak pushed 235(9).

tulày bridge 163(12).

-tulè: tutulè ear-wax 224(22).
maŋhinulè clean the ears 241(30).

-túlin: magtúlin go fast 167(35).
nagtùtúlin is hurrying 68(16).
tinulínan speed 310(19).
matúlin swift 18(8). 60(31).
nàtúlin got faster 294(29).
pinatúlin was caused to hurry 72(4).

túlis point 284(33).
tulìs pointed 223(7).
tulísan be sharpened 254(1).
tulisàn bandit 120(1).
matúlis pointed 271(12).

túlog sleep 220(8).
tumúlog slept in 64(38).
tumùtúlog sleeps in 64(37).
pagtúlog a sleeping 230(7).
tinùtulúgan is being slept in 62(39). 190(12).
tulugàn sleeping-place 260(32).
makitúlog sleep along with 122(14).
matúlog go to sleep 64(5). 84(18).
natúlog went to sleep 18(36). 38(20). 84(39).
natùtúlog is asleep 18(38). 38(28). 62(9).
matutulugìn sleepy-head 290(4).
nakàtúlog happened to sleep in 290(36).
màkatúlog chance to fall asleep 296(41).
maŋàkatúlog pl. 297(3).
maŋàkàkatúlog will fall asleep pl. 192(14).
nàkatúlog fell asleep 296(37).
naŋàkàkatúlog are asleep 296(43).
pagkàkatúlog a falling asleep 62(22).
màtulúgan get slept in 84(17).
patúlog-túlog sleeping by fits and starts 300(36).
nagpatúlog caused to sleep 62(8).
patulúgin be caused to sleep 305(3).
pinatúlog was caused to sleep 36(18). 84(38).
mapatúlog be able to be caused to sleep 64(2).

túloŋ help 32(39).
tùtúloŋ will help 32(11).
nagsìsitúloŋ are helping 114(2).
tulúŋan be assisted 234(19).
pinagtùtulùŋ-tulúŋan is being done by haphazard helping 106(29).
pagtutuluŋàn a mutual assisting 237(4).
ikatúloŋ be the means of helping 60(23).
nakatúloŋ contributed 94(37).
nakatùtúloŋ is contributing 112(11).
napatùtúloŋ is asking to be helped 311(35).

-túlos: pagtutúlos an offering up 50(29).
nàtùtúlos is set up 66(41).
nagpatúlos caused to be set up 72(29).
nàipatúlos was caused to be set up 80(26).

-túloy (a): itinúloy was gone on with 287(11).
tinulúyan was staid with 116(35).
tùlúyan place of lodging; see báhay.
nakitúloy asked to stay with 148(31).
patúloy caused to go on; going on 60(3). 70(34).
pinatúloy was caused to stay on 84(38).
ipatúloy be caused to go on, be continued 88(43).[408]
ipinatúloy was continued 20(41). 66(18). 84(3).
ipinatùtúloy is being continued 108(20).
—(b) With accent-shift: tulòy further 28(12). 34(8). 47. 231.
nátulòy chanced to continue, got continued 207(31). 237(5). 240(18).
papagtùtuluyìn will be caused to go on 88(14).
ipinatulòy was caused to be gone on with 96(31). 307(6).
ipinapatulòy was caused to be caused to be gone on with 307(12).

tumpàk correct 219(20).
màtumpakàn get ascertained 70(32).

túnay true 66(7). 82(31).
katunáyan truth, truly 30(15). 82(5). 265(6).
pinatunáyan was caused to be realized 308(29).

-tuntòn: tùtuntunìn will be followed 34(14).
tinuntòn was followed 34(21).
palatuntúnin querulant 315(11).
palàtuntúnan set of rules 315(26).

tóno S. tone 207(4).

tuŋkòl about, concerning 30(16). 52(25). 287. 288.
tuŋkúlin concern, duty 96(40).
katuŋkúlan duty, office 52(41). 110(32).

tuŋtòŋ a stand 221(31).
tútuntóŋ will set foot on 70(26). 100(29).
tinùtuntuŋàn is being stood on 100(25).
makátuntòŋ-tuntòŋ ever set foot on 100(8).
mátuntòŋ happen to stand on 68(4).

-túŋo: tumúŋo went toward 230(8).
nagsitúŋo pl. 282(30).
katúŋo person dealt with 266(25).
kàtùtuŋúhan will turn out to be the place gone toward 279(20).
nàkàkatúŋo is being dealt with 68(14).
patúŋo towards 18(40). 20(3). 48(6). 285.
pagpatúŋo a going towards 120(7). 302(21).
patùtuŋúhan will be headed for 90(43). 307(4).
pinatùtuŋúhan is being headed for 72(6). 308(30).
kapàpatuŋúhan will be the place headed for 26(33). 310(28).
napatúŋo went toward 102(42).

-tuŋò: itinuŋò was bent over 74(16).

túpa sheep 112(40).

-tupàd: pagtupàd a fulfilling 96(39).
pagkatupàd a having fulfilled 233(35).

Tùrkos S. Turks 260(10).

torníliyo S. screw 92(38).

túroʾ that pointed out, a teaching 186(32). 221(32).
turòʾ extended, stiff 223(8).
panúroʾ pointer 225(27).
magtúroʾ teach 232(36).
nagtùtúroʾ is teaching 232(38).
pagtutúroʾ a teaching 88(14).
nagtúturòʾ is pointing out variously 238(14).
panunúroʾ a pointing things out 240(39).
itúroʾ be pointed out, be shown 182(43). 249(2).
katuruàn one of two who point at each other 278(25).
màitúroʾ get taught 90(1).
hintutúroʾ forefinger 42(14).

turumpò S. spinning-top 227(6).

tútaʾ puppy 244(40).

túto perception, care 166(36).
màtúto get educated 168(14).
nàtúto got taught 178(4).
màtutúhan get learned 196(35).
nàtutúhan got learned 28(2). 50(24).

tutubè dragon-fly 291(28).

totoò true 104(23). 116(2).
tòtohánan actuality 94(21). 259(16).
katotohánan truth 26(5). 68(32).
nagpatotoò testified, affirmed 303(42).
pagpapatotoò a testifying 304(3).
pinapagpatotoò was caused [409]to testify 305(40).
tagapagpatotoò witness 20(13).

toòd stump 16(23).

tuòs care 46(29).

tuwàʾ joy, gladness 46(5). 76(41). glad 80(15).
ikinatuwàʾ was the cause of joy 26(25).
ikinatútuwàʾ is the cause of being glad 272(26).
kàtwáan a rejoicing together 120(25).
magkàtwáan rejoice together 280(11).
nagkàkàtwáan are rejoicing together 120(26).
nakatútuwàʾ causes pleasure 280(40).
natuwàʾ became glad 24(27).
naŋatuwàʾ pl. 34(23).
màkatuwaàn happen to be liked 40(39). 298(28).
palatwáin easily pleased 315(13).

tuwìʾ every time, whenever 58(3). 60(40). 244. 300. 307. 317(5).

-tuwìd: pagtutuwìd a reckoning 232(39).
katuwíran the right 56(7). 100(38). 257(14).
katuturàn right outcome 76(21).
makatuwìd have figured out; consequence 56(15).
matuwìd correct 44(26). 50(14).

túyot drought 191(32).

[Contents]

U (O).

o S? or 16(25). 45. 321.

ò oh 76(34). 80(12). 151(15).

ó, see óo.

-ubrà (S.): umbrà took effect, was suitable 230(11).
pagubrà a taking effect 108(35).
magúubrà will suit 235(11).

úbos exhaustion
úbos-lakàs exhaustion of strength 18(39). 22(16).
úbos-làkásan exhaustion of strength by several 96(29).
ipinagúbos-làkásan was done with exhaustion of strength 250(4).
inùúbos is being used up 112(9).
iniyúbos was expended 283(41).
nakaùúbos is able to use up 112(40).
naúbos was used up 312(29).
naubúsan was exhausted of 32(19).

ugáliʾ habit 96(26).
inugáliʾ was made a habit 36(25).
kaugáliʾ accordant in habits 266(27).
kaugaliàn custom 38(10). 112(22).

ugàt root, artery 218(32). 290(12).

úhaw thirst 280(38).
naùúhaw is thirsty 285(25).

úkol with regard to, for 42(15). 50(28). 288.

úlam that eaten along with one’s rice 72(34).

ulàn rain 110(14).
umulàn rained 177(16).
umúulàn is raining 152(16).
úulàn will rain 168(34).
pagulàn a raining 110(21).
maulàn rainy 110(21).
nagpápaulàn causes rain 110(15).
tagulàn rainy season 202(18).

ulèʾ again 24(11). 47. 232. See sa.
úulèʾ will do it again 44(12).

olíva S. olive 90(28).

úliŋ charcoal 70(32).

-úlit: paguúlit-úlit a manifold repeating 86(10).
inúlit was repeated 50(28).
maúlit stubborn 24(14).

úlo head 22(10). 26(4). See básag.
uluhàn head-end 72(3).

ulòl foolish, crazy 16(1).
kaululàn foolishness 98(23).
kaùlúlan one of two who fool each other 278(3).
pagkaulòl insanity 254(29).

umága, see -ága. [410]

-umìt: paŋuŋumìt paŋuumìt petty thievery 156(3). 310(6).
inumìt was filched 293(28).

-umpisà: magumpisà begin 18(31). 32(16).
nagumpisà began 16(26). 20(29).
paguumpisà a beginning 26(35). 96(15).
umpisahàn be begun 48(4).
inumpisahàn was begun 26(19). 50(21).
inùumpisahàn is being begun 48(37).

-umpòg: nagkákaumpòg-umpòg is getting repeated bumps 62(19).

-umpòk: umpúkan assemblage for talking 38(7).

úna (a) first 24(15). 38(21). 273(21).
paŋúna number one 225(39).
maŋùŋúna will take the lead 240(40).
naŋúna took the lead 240(40).
inúna was taken first 42(31).
pagkaúna a having got ahead 283(12).
—(b) With accent-shift: nagunà-unà competed for the first place 239(19).
kàunà-unáhan very first 280(16).
náunà got ahead 64(8).
nàùunà is ahead 88(24).
pagkáunà a getting ahead 18(34).
nagpáunà got himself into the first place 304(24).
nagpáunà-unà got himself too far ahead 304(27).

únan pillow 260(6).

-únat: naúnat has been straightened 284(21).
nàúnat got straightened 24(26).

untìʾ short 219(21).
untì-untìʾ little by little 76(12). 78(9).
umuntìʾ grew less 28(30).
untiàn be lessened 254(2).
kauntìʾ something small, a bit 48(32). 60(16).
kayuntìʾ what fewness 267(36).
kákauntìʾ only few 267(8).
pauntiìn be caused to be few, be reduced 98(7).

uŋàs stupid 22(21).

uŋgòʾ monkey 16(1).
nagùuŋgù-uŋgúan is playing monkey 237(11).

úpa pay 56(3). 72(33).
ùúpa will pay 88(12).
umùúpa hires 48(29).
ùupáhan will be paid 34(6).
upahàn hired 114(1.23).

úpaŋ in order to, so that 16(22). 18(16). 308.

ópera S. opera; see sàmáhan.

úpo a vegetable, Lagenaria vulgaris Seringe 76(16).

upòʾ sit; a sitting 220(9). 222(7).
paŋupòʾ used for sitting 225(28).
umupòʾ sit 184(23). sat 230(15).
pagupòʾ a sitting 230(16).
nagupòʾ seated 235(12).
nagúuupòʾ sits variously 239(2).
paguupòʾ a sitting variously 181(30).
naŋupòʾ mischievously sat down on 240(41).
paŋuupòʾ a mischievous sitting on 240(42).
ùupàn will be sat on 254(4).
inùupàn is being sat on 32(5).
ùpúan a sitting together 258(9). seat 24(39). 283(9).
uupàn chair 180(29).
kaùpúan one of two who sit together 278(4).
kinàùupàn happens to be the place of sitting 223(16).
nakaupòʾ is seated 281(19).
naŋákaupòʾ pl. 286(11).
naŋàkàkaupòʾ are able to sit 286(14).
maupòʾ sit down 184(24).
maúupòʾ will sit down 192(39).
naupòʾ sat down 24(39).
naúupòʾ is (in the act of) sitting down 204(26).
pagkaupòʾ a sitting down 286(4).
náupòʾ happened to sit down 202(1).
nàùupòʾ is sitting 30(29). 96(22).
pagkáupòʾ a chance sitting 277(24).
paupòʾ that caused to sit 174(29). 249(35). in sitting position 299(32).
nagpaupòʾ caused to sit 304(4).
[411]pagpapaupòʾ a causing to sit 304(5).
pinaupòʾ was caused to sit 305(4).
nápaupòʾ involuntarily sat down 198(24).
nápatiupòʾ fell into sitting position 313(39).
nàpàpatiupòʾ falls on his seat 313(40).

úpos cigar-butt 205(21).

óras S. hour 42(4). 48(26). See kalahátiʾ.
orásan be done promptly 254(5).
orasàn watch, clock 248(14).

orasiyòn S. prayer 104(14).

-úroŋ: umùúroŋ is going backwards 230(18).
naŋagsiúroŋ retreated, pl. 262(30).
pauròŋ backwards 299(34).
papauròŋ backwards continually 300(40).

usà deer 18(1).
nagusà-usáhan played deer 237(12).

úsap law-suit 199(33).
paguúsap a conversing 70(19).
pagusápan be discussed 102(5).
pinagusápan was discussed 28(2).
pinagùusápan is being discussed 30(29).
makipagúsap converse with 28(14).
nakìkipagúsap is entering into conversation with 74(30).
pakikipagúsap an engaging in conversation with 80(38).
kaúsap person conversed with 102(32).
kumàkaúsap is talking at 268(19).
kausápin be conversed with 44(2). 70(21).
kinaúsap was addressed 70(24).
makaúsap be able to converse 68(20).
màkaúsap get conversed with 70(14).
nàkaúsap got conversed with 44(26). 78(17).

usbòŋ edible shoot 253(2). 256(13).

usísaʾ that inquired about 221(34).
nagusísaʾ made inquiry 76(1).
naŋusísaʾ interrogated 241(3).
usisáin be asked about; be interrogated 76(14). 98(13). 290(26).
inusísaʾ was questioned 76(28).
pinagusisàʾ was variously questioned 76(5).
nausísaʾ has been questioned 284(23).
naùusísaʾ has just been questioned 76(22).
mapagusísaʾ inquisitive 60(19).
nakàusísaʾ happen to inquire 290(39).
nàusísaʾ got inquired for 293(28).

úso S. fashion 287(7).

útaŋ debt 54(12). 76(2). See báyad.
umútaŋ borrow 230(19).
magutàŋ borrow variously 238(15).
maguutàŋ habitual borrower 243(3).
naŋútaŋ borrowed 241(4).
máŋuŋutàŋ habitual borrower 243(20).
inútaŋ was borrowed 245(24).
pinaŋútaŋ was (reluctantly) borrowed 247(4).
utáŋan be borrowed from 254(6).
magpaútaŋ cause to be borrowed, lend 304(8).

-utàs: nautàs was completed 303(18).

útos a command 56(27). 122(5).
nagútos commanded 232(41).
nagùútos is commanding 114(7).
iyútos be commanded 62(37). 64(13).
iniyútos was commanded 24(37). 26(18). 106(17).
ipinagútos was given as an order 182(19). 249(40).
inutúsan was given an order 92(12).
utusàn servant, waiter, orderly 254(34). 260(34).
kautusàn decree, law 54(4).

óo ó yes 26(2). 44(18).
oóhan be answered affirmatively 254(7).
napaóo assented 312(6).

uwalàʾ, see walàʾ.

uwèʾ a going home; that taken home 114(26). 221(35).
umuwèʾ go home 34(12). 76(43). went home 50(36). 52(35).
úuwèʾ will go home 287(20).
nagsísiuwèʾ are [412]going home 72(35).
paguwèʾ a going home 70(23).
naguwían went home together 26(37).
pauwèʾ that caused to go home 298(23). homeward 34(14).
nagpauwèʾ caused to be taken home, sent home 304(9).
ipinauwèʾ was caused to be taken home, was sent home 304(10).

[Contents]

W.

walàʾ without, not having; there is not 16(10). 20(21). 69. 99. 110. 239. 248.
walà ŋ hiyàʾ: kawalà-ŋ-hiyaàn shamelessness 277(10).
nápakawalà-ŋ-hiyàʾ most impudent 98(27).
pagwawalàʾ a breaking away 232(42).
iwalàʾ be got rid of 249(3).
kawalàʾ partaking of freedom 196(27).
magkawalàʾ get away 44(6).
nagkawalàʾ got away 44(10).
nagkákawalàʾ is getting away 58(31).
ikinawalàʾ was the cause of being without 292(6).
ipagkawalàʾ be the cause of getting away 272(38).
ipagkákawalàʾ will be the cause of getting away 272(41).
ipinagkawalàʾ was the cause of getting away 273(1).
ipinagkákawalàʾ is the cause of getting away 273(2).
kawàwalàn will be the place of losing 206(17).
kawalàn lack, absence 46(16). 118(1).
makawalàʾ be able to get away 44(40).
makawáwalàʾ will be able to get away 294(1).
nakawalàʾ succeeded in getting away 46(31). 86(12).
mawáwalàʾ will disappear 46(2).
nawalàʾ disappeared 64(33). 82(10).
nawáwalàʾ is disappearing 40(16). 76(13).
pagkawalàʾ a disappearing 298(17).
nawalàn has been deprived of 70(8). 82(30).
pawalàn be allowed to get away 44(12).
pinawalàn was allowed to get away 44(8).
magpakawalàʾ get oneself away 106(23).
pinakawalàn was allowed to get loose 66(28). 310(26).

walìs broom 315(22).
nagwáwalìs is sweeping 233(2).
wináwalìs niwáwalìs is being swept away 245(26).
niwalisàn was swept 94(7).
niwàwalisàn is being swept 254(8).

walò eight 52(43). 67.
paŋwalò number eight 225(38).

wapélo C. exclamation of distress 58(38).

wíkaʾ language, word, words 20(5). 28(3). 74(39).
nagwíkaʾ spoke 20(20).
winíkaʾ was spoken 18(42).
kawikaàn proverb 276(15).
pagkawíkaʾ a having spoken 20(40).

-wíli: nàwíli got spellbound 88(2).
pagkàwíli a getting spellbound 295(26).

-wisìk: iniwisìk was sprinkled 96(27).
niwisikàn was sprinkled on 64(30).
nàwisikàn got sprinkled on 76(38).

[Contents]

Y.

-yábaŋ: kayabáŋan pride 272(2) Corrigenda.
mayábaŋ proud 60(15).
nagmayabàŋ boasted 238(21).
ipinagmayabàŋ was boasted of 60(17).
nagpakamayabàŋ boasted of himself 309(29).

-yáboŋ: mayáboŋ grassy 18(33).

yáman wealth 72(22). 80(25).
[413]yumáman get rich 60(25). got rich 74(9).
pagyáman a getting rich 120(27).
kayamánan wealth 308(16).
mayáman wealthy 72(19).
payamánin be caused to get rich 50(34).

yámaŋ while 16(12). 18(33). 309.

yàn, see iyàn.

yantòk rattan 46(40).

Yap C. n. 234(25).

-yári: maŋyári happen 54(29). 66(22).
maŋyàyári will happen 18(11). 52(20).
naŋyári happened 24(27). 46(19).
naŋyàyári happens 40(30). 44(20).
kapaŋyaríhan power 36(10). 40(4).

yáriʾ that made; the make 74(4). 220(10). 221(37).
mayáriʾ have been made 104(11).
nayàyáriʾ is made 34(36). 46(40).

yaòn, see iyòn.

-yáyaʾ: yumáyaʾ invited 230(21).
pagyáyaʾ an inviting 230(22).
nagyayàʾ urged 28(11). 34(12).
niyáyaʾ was invited, summoned 32(13). 36(42).

Yèŋ C. n. 263(4).

yéro S. iron 92(35).

yitò ytò, see itò.—yò, see iyò.

-yukayòk: nagsísipagyukayòk are nodding 108(30).

yòn, see iyòn.

Yurúpa, see Eyurúpa.

yútaʾ billion 134.

yoòn, see iyòn. [414]

1 Where S. words are, as genuine loan-words, more or less fully Tagalized, the S. is enclosed in brackets. In cases where Mr. Santiago is not conscious of this origin, it would have been more consistent to omit the indication, but it would be very difficult to single these out. ↑

[Contents]

CORRIGENDA.

The following errors are due entirely to oversights on my part; they would have been far more numerous, but for the accuracy and intelligence of the typesetter, Mr. Staley, and the unfailing kindness of the editor, Professor W. A. Oldfather.—L. B.

The indicated errors have been corrected in the text of this edition, except for the one referring to 212(25), as the instruction is not clear enough, and 322(42), as the location could not be found.

VOLUME I.

PAGE LINE FOR READ
20 16 mákinig makinìg
22 2 nabuksan nábuksan
24 31 n ŋ
32 1 namámatay mamámatay
38 11 galían galiàn
40 39 pagbibíroʾ paŋbibíroʾ
42 6 katimbàʾ katimbàŋ
42 39 tiniŋnan tinaŋnan
44 2 sumagòt sumásagòt
44 40 nagsisigáw nagsisigàw
46 24 ŋà ŋá
48 20 pagbabalìk pagpapabalìk
60 38 nagbibigay nagbíbigay
62 5 syà nyà
68 13 siniglan siniglàn
72 12 hyà hyàʾ
74 40 a o
84 21 pinagdagukàn pinagdadagukàn
92 6 mámatày mamámatày
94 29 inapúyan inapuyàn
96 29 maínit maiínit
98 2 magbíbinyàg nagbíbinyàg
98 39 Masakìp Masikìp
99 25 giving given
100 15 ipabíbilanŋgòʾ ipabíbilaŋgòʾ
108 42 pirásu ŋ lamàn pirásu-ŋ-lamàn
114 10 pagtadtàd pagtatadtàd

[415]

Volume II.

PAGE LINE
190 2 Add: si nasíra ŋ Mariyà the deceased Maria.
210 30 Add example: pilìk-matà eyelash (pilìk fin, lash), and at 211(13) omit pilìk.
212 25 Omit: bagáso etc.; the word may be S. bagazo sediment.
212 37 Add: hantày hintày.
215 41 Omit: lákad.
223 17 The example of lakàd should be transferred to 222(38).
223 25 Binyàk etc.; transfer to 244(7).
244 2 Add: (aŋ áyap condiment).
244 4 Add example: Aŋ gúlok na yàn ay bàbawíin ko sa iyò, kapag ipinamútol mo naŋ kawáyan. I shall take back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo.
244 7 See on 223(25).
245 39 Add: sagòt.
249 8 Add: lalàʾ.
259 35 Add example: aŋ tìpúnan a meeting; and omit típon in next line.
261 10 Add example: Aŋ asuhàn naŋ báhay ni Pédro ay nasúnog. The chimney in Pedro’s house burned out; and omit asò from line 16.
261 24 Add example: luluràn shin.
267 18 Add: So gísiŋ, káin.
277 2 Add example: kayabáŋan pride; and omit yábaŋ, line 8.
277 7 Add: salúkoy.
286 30 Add example: Pagkaabòt naŋ bátà naŋ kanyà ŋ laruwàn ay tumakbò sya ŋ agàd. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran. Omit the words: see ábot.
294 33 Omit: ibadyà.
295 30 Add example: Sya y nárapàʾ. He fell on his face.
296 19 Omit: ábot, and add example: Aŋ pagkáabot nyà sa bóte ay hindi magálaŋ. The way he reached for the bottle was not polite.
297 29 Add: badiyà. [416]
299 27 For pahágis read pahagìs, and transfer the example to 300(14).
300 14 See preceding.
313 3 Add: With makà- D (§ 473) from -paríto: Hwag kà ŋ makàparí-paríto. Don’t you ever come round here!
315 31 Add: With accent-shift: taginìt the hot season.
322 42 Add reference: 28(7).

Table of Contents

Table of Contents 7
PREFACE 9
LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES CONSULTED 13
I. TEXTS IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION 16
1. Aŋ ulòl na uŋgòʾ at aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ. 16
2. Aŋ pagtatakbúhan naŋ usà at naŋ susòʾ. 18
3. Isà ŋ Biyàrnes-Sànto. 20
4. Aŋ kúbaʾ at aŋ bulàg. 22
5. Aŋ hári ŋ may súŋay at si Hwàn. 24
6. Tatlò ŋ estudyànte. 26
7. Isa ŋ sundálu ŋ marúnuŋ naŋ Latìn. 28
8. Aŋ pitù ŋ dwènde. 30
9. Isà ŋ pulìs na nagaswàŋ-aswáŋan. 34
10. Isà ŋ aswàŋ na nápatày. 38
11. Aŋ maŋkukúlam. 40
12. Aŋ laro ŋ sípaʾ sa Filipínas. 46
13. Aŋ kúra ŋ si Patúpat. 50
14. Si Maryáno at aŋ pári ŋ si Patúpat. 54
15. Aŋ Intsìk na màŋaŋátam. 56
16. Isa ŋ táo ŋ may birtùd naŋ usà. 60
17. Aŋ alíla ŋ uŋgòʾ. 62
18. Aŋ matandá sa punsò sa liwánag naŋ áraw. 66
19. Aŋ tiyának ni Hwàn. 68
20. Si Hwà ŋ maŋlilígaw. 70
21. Si Mariyà ŋ marámot. 72
22. Tatlò ŋ káluluwa ŋ tumáwag kay Sam-Pédro. 78
23. Si Hwà ŋ baŋkéro. 80
24. Aŋ kabàítan sa maŋa háyop. 82
25. Si Hwà ŋ maŋdudúkit. 86
26. Si Markíta. 92
27. Aŋ maŋmàŋ na páreʾ. 94
28. Aŋ pàkumpisálan. 96
29. Si Hwà ŋ bíbas. 98
30. Tatlò ŋ magkakaybíga ŋ magnanákaw. 100
31. Aŋ paŋhuhúli naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. 106
32. Aŋ fiyèsta ni Saŋ-Hwàn. 110
33. Aŋ maŋa paŋiŋílin naŋ maŋa kamagának naŋ isa ŋ namatày. 112
34. Aŋ takbúhan sa Amerikáno. 116
II. GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. 133
A. PHONETICS. 134
1. Distinctive sounds. 134
2. Syllabication. 138
a. In the word. 138
b. In word-formation. 139
c. In the phrase. 140
3. Accentuation. 141
a. Word-accent. 141
b. Sentence-accent. 143
B. SYNTAX. 146
1. Sentence and word. 146
a. Syntactic relations. 146
b. Parts of speech. 146
c. Static and transient words. 147
d. Personal names. 147
e. The object construction. 148
f. Expressions of indefinite quantity. 150
2. Subject and predicate. 151
a. Non-predicative sentences. 151
b. The subject. 153
c. The predicate. 153
1. Transient predicate. 153
2. Static predicate. 155
3. Object expression as predicate. 157
d. Subordinate predications. 159
e. Omission of predicate. 160
3. Attributes. 160
a. Conjunctive attributes. 162
1. Conjunctive attributes of quality. 162
2. Conjunctive attributes of manner. 165
3. Conjunctive attributes as complements. 167
b. Disjunctive attributes. 170
c. Local attributes. 177
d. Absolute attributes. 180
1. enclitic particles. 181
2. prepositive particles. 185
3. words used as absolute attributes of manner and time. 190
4. absolute complements. 194
5. words used with disjunctive and local attributes. 197
6. words introducing subordinate phrases or predications. 200
4. Serial groups. 205
1. coordinating particles. 205
2. paratactic sentences. 207
3. parenthesis. 208
4. anacolouthon. 208
C. MORPHOLOGY. 210
1. Composition. 210
2. General features of word-formation. 211
3. Description of formations. 218
I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, paŋ-). 218
A. Simple static forms. 218
1. Root-words. 218
2. Doubling. 223
3. Reduplication. 224
4. paŋ-. 224
B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words. 226
1. Active with -um- and abstract with pag-. 226
2. Active with mag- and abstract with pag-r. 231
3. Active with maŋ- and abstract with paŋ- r. 239
4. Special static words. 241
5. Direct passive. 243
6. Special static words. 247
7. Instrumental passive. 247
8. Special static words. 250
9. Local passive. 250
10. Special static words. 257
II. Secondary groups. 262
1. Prefix si-. 262
2. The prefix paki-. 263
3. The prefix ka-. 265
1. Simple static forms. 265
2. Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms. 268
3. Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms. 280
4. The prefix pa-. 298
1. Simple static forms. 299
2. Normal transients, abstracts, and special static words. 301
3. Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka-. 309
5. The prefix pati-. 313
III. Irregular Derivatives. 314
1. Transients and abstracts of the particles sa and -giŋ. 314
2. Odd affixes. 314
3. Pronoun forms. 316
III. LIST OF FORMATIONS. 325
A. Forms without prefix. 325
B. Forms with prefix. 325
INDEX OF WORDS. 328
CORRIGENDA. 414

Colophon

Availability

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org.

This eBook is produced by the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at www.pgdp.net.

Scans for this book are available from the Internet Archive (copy 1); and from Google Books (copy 1).

Related Library of Congress catalog page: 18027096.

Related Open Library catalog page (for source): OL6613171M.

Related Open Library catalog page (for work): OL1106944W.

Related WorldCat catalog page: 2802976.

Encoding

This book uses Tagalog in phonetic transcription, which does not match current orthography. Accent usage is kept as in the original, even where it may appear inconsistent, as are inconsistencies in the use of the letters i and e, as well as o and u. These may very well indicate differences in pronunciation as spoken or perceived by the author. As in the source, the particle ŋ is written separately, omitting a final ʾ or n from the previous word.

The line-breaks in this digital edition have been replaced by anchors, which are used to link cross-reference to; but no attempt has been made to preserve the original line-breaks otherwise.

Obvious typographical errors have been fixed and documented in the colophon; the blunder caribou (reindeer) has been replaced by carabao (Philippine water buffalo) throughout the text; end-of-line hyphenation has been silently removed.

The errors indicated in the Corrigenda have been fixed in the text.

The Tagalog texts and English translations, originally on facing pages, have been aligned side-by-side on the paragraph level.

The three parts of the original work have been consolidated into a single book with a single table of contents. The title-pages for each part have been omitted.

Revision History

External References

This Project Gutenberg eBook contains external references. These links may not work for you.

Corrections

The following corrections have been applied to the text:

Page Source Correction
13 Nederlandsch-Indie Nederlandsch-Indië
13 Metodo Método
14 Sanscrito Sánscrito
14, 170, 267, 272, 329, 331, 348, 386, 393 [Not in source] ,
20 mákinig makinìg
22 nabuksan nábuksan
24, 147 n ŋ
24 ito itò
32 namámatay mamámatay
38 kaugalían kaugaliàn
40 makipagkaybígan makipagkayibígan
40 pagbibíroʾ paŋbibíroʾ
42 katimbàʾ katimbàŋ
42 kápit—báhay kápit-báhay
42 tiniŋnan tinaŋnan
44 sumagòt sumásagòt
44 nagsisigáw nagsisigàw
46 ŋà ŋá
48 pagbabalìk pagpapabalìk
60 nagbibigay nagbíbigay
62 syà nyà
68 siniglan siniglàn
72 hyà hyàʾ
74 a o
84 pinagdagukàn pinagdadagukàn
92 mámatày mamámatày
94 inapúyan inapuyàn
96 maínit maiínit
98 magbíbinyàg nagbíbinyàg
98 Masakìp Masikìp
100 ipabíbilanŋgòʾ ipabíbilaŋgòʾ
108 pirásu ŋ lamàn pirásu-ŋ-lamàn
114 pagtadtàd pagtatadtàd
17 ” [Deleted]
59 humilating humiliating
65 dilligent diligent
67 , .
71, 71, 71, 71, 71, 73, 73, 81, 101, 101, 119, 119, 223, 230, 253, 255, 269, 282, 303, 306, 311, 311, 311, 311, 312, 355, 363, 363 caribou carabao
99 giving given
133 [Not in source] II.
135, 144, 144, 144, 151, 163, 203 . ,
139 celebation celebration
143 nawà,ʾ nawàʾ
146, 394 ) [Deleted]
151 s :
152, 163, 359, 407 . [Deleted]
155, 156, 230, 235, 235, 246, 263, 263, 331, 333, 345, 345, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 362, 364, 367, 367, 369, 369, 369, 369, 369, 383, 392, 392, 397, 397, 403, 409 [Not in source] .
157 appy apply
168 An Aŋ
172, 173, 258 an aŋ
174 libro librò
176 a [Deleted]
190 [Not in source] , si nasíra ŋ Mariyà the deceased Maria
192 nakáraan nakáraàn
198 especiall especially
208 : ;
210 [Not in source] pilìk-matà eyelash (pilìk fin, lash);
211 pilìk, [Deleted]
212 [Not in source] ; hantày, hintày
215 reduplcated reduplicated
215, 224 [Not in source] (
215 lákad, [Deleted]
216 forma-mations formations
217 aspect aspect aspect
220 relieves relieved
220 ; .
222 [Not in source] Lakàd kamì ŋ umwèʾ. We went home on foot.
223 Lakàd kamì ŋ umwèʾ. We went home on foot. [Deleted]
223 Binyàk ni Hwàn aŋ kawáyan. Juan has split the bamboo. [Deleted]
227, 254 you your
237 thigns things
239, 263 canoing canoeing
240 Rounabout Roundabout
242 [Not in source] thief
244 [Not in source] (aŋ áyap condiment).
244 [Not in source] Aŋ gúlok na yàn ay bàbawíin ko sa iyò, kapag ipinamútol mo naŋ kawáyan. I shall take back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo.
244 [Not in source] Binyàk ni Hwàn aŋ kawáyan. Juan has split the bamboo.
244 felt fell
245 [Not in source] sagòt,
249 [Not in source] lalàʾ,
252 isda isdàʾ
259 [Not in source] aŋ tìpúnan a meeting.
259 típon, [Deleted]
261 [Not in source] Aŋ asuhàn naŋ báhay ni Pédro ay nasúnog. The chimney in Pedro’s house burned out.
261 asò, [Deleted]
261 [Not in source] luluràn shin.
265 occurence occurrence
267 [Not in source] So gísiŋ, káin.
271 lìbro librò
272 make will make
277 [Not in source] kayabáŋan pride.
277 [Not in source] salúkoy,
277 yábaŋ, [Deleted]
286 see ábot. Pagkaabòt naŋ bátà naŋ kanyà ŋ laruwàn ay tumakbò sya ŋ agàd. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran.
290 dont don’t
293 , [Deleted]
294 ibadiyà, [Deleted]
294 thee the
295 [Not in source] Sya y nárapàʾ. He fell on his face.
296 [Not in source] Aŋ pagkáabot nyà sa bóte ay hindi magálaŋ. The way he reached for the bottle was not polite.
296 ábot, [Deleted]
297 [Not in source] badiyà,
299 Pahágis nya ŋ iniyabòt sa ákin aŋ aklàt. He handed me the book by tossing it. [Deleted]
300 [Not in source] Pahagìs nya ŋ iniyabòt sa ákin aŋ aklàt. He handed me the book by tossing it.
306 grapefruit grape-fruit
313 [Not in source] (d) With makà- D (§ 473) from -paríto: Hwag kà ŋ makàparí-paríto. Don’t you ever come round here!
315 [Not in source] With accent-shift: taginìt the hot season.
325 [Not in source] III.
339 72 74
345 [Not in source] )
352 gven given
353 for for for
357, 370 ( [Deleted]
362 41 21
363 grass-caribou grass-carabao
370 - :
370 6 b
375 97 92
384 108 42 108(42)
392 361(1) 36(40)
399 onsself oneself
399 41 40
401 Acent Accent
415, 415 224 223
415 25 24
415 272 277 





End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by
Leonard Bloomfield

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***

***** This file should be named 50797-h.htm or 50797-h.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/5/0/7/9/50797/

Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of
public domain material from the Google Books project.)


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
1.E.8.

1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country outside the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

  This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
  most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
  restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
  under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
  eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
  United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
  are located before using this ebook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
provided that

* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
  the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
  you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
  to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
  agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
  within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
  legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
  payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
  Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
  Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
  Literary Archive Foundation."

* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
  you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
  does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
  copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
  all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
  works.

* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
  any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
  electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
  receipt of the work.

* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
  distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

For additional contact information:

    Dr. Gregory B. Newby
    Chief Executive and Director
    [email protected]

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.